3com Switch 7750 Command Reference
Uploaded by
lcccsnorton3com Switch 7750 Command Reference
Uploaded by
lcccsnorton3Com® Switch 7750 Family
Command Reference Guide
Switch 7750
Switch 7754
Switch 7757
Switch 7758
www.3Com.com
Part Number: 10015463 Rev. AD
Published: December 2007
3Com Corporation Copyright © 2006-2007, 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any
350 Campus Drive form or by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as translation, transformation, or adaptation) without
written permission from 3Com Corporation.
Marlborough, MA
3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to time
USA 01752-3064 without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision or change.
3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty, term, or condition of any kind, either implied or
expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties, terms or conditions of merchantability, satisfactory quality,
and fitness for a particular purpose. 3Com may make improvements or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s)
described in this documentation at any time.
If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation, it is furnished under a license agreement
included with the product as a separate document, in the hard copy documentation, or on the removable media in a
directory file named LICENSE.TXT or !LICENSE.TXT. If you are unable to locate a copy, please contact 3Com and a copy will
be provided to you.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND
If you are a United States government agency, then this documentation and the software described herein are provided to
you subject to the following:
All technical data and computer software are commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense. Software is
delivered as “Commercial Computer Software” as defined in DFARS 252.227-7014 (June 1995) or as a “commercial item”
as defined in FAR 2.101(a) and as such is provided with only such rights as are provided in 3Com’s standard commercial
license for the Software. Technical data is provided with limited rights only as provided in DFAR 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995) or
FAR 52.227-14 (June 1987), whichever is applicable. You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided
on any licensed program or documentation contained in, or delivered to you in conjunction with, this User Guide.
Unless otherwise indicated, 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may not be registered
in other countries.
3Com and the 3Com logo are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation.
Cisco is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc.
Funk RADIUS is a registered trademark of Funk Software, Inc.
Aegis is a registered trademark of Aegis Group PLC.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. UNIX is a
registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company, Ltd.
IEEE and 802 are registered trademarks of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated.
ENVIRONMENTAL STATEMENT
It is the policy of 3Com Corporation to be environmentally-friendly in all operations. To uphold our policy, we are committed
to:
Establishing environmental performance standards that comply with national legislation and regulations.
Conserving energy, materials and natural resources in all operations.
Reducing the waste generated by all operations. Ensuring that all waste conforms to recognized environmental standards.
Maximizing the recyclable and reusable content of all products.
Ensuring that all products can be recycled, reused and disposed of safely.
Ensuring that all products are labelled according to recognized environmental standards.
Improving our environmental record on a continual basis.
End of Life Statement
3Com processes allow for the recovery, reclamation and safe disposal of all end-of-life electronic components.
Regulated Materials Statement
3Com products do not contain any hazardous or ozone-depleting material.
CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
Conventions 37
Related Documentation 37
1 CLI CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
command-privilege level 53
display history-command 53
super 54
super password 55
2 LOGIN COMMANDS
authentication-mode 57
auto-execute command 58
copyright-info enable 58
databits 59
display user-interface 60
display users 61
flow-control 62
free user-interface 62
header 63
history-command max-size 65
idle-timeout 66
ip http shutdown 66
lock 67
modem 68
modem auto-answer 68
modem timer answer 69
parity 69
protocol inbound 70
screen-length 70
send 71
service-type 72
set authentication password 73
shell 74
speed 75
stopbits 75
telnet 76
user-interface 76
4 CONTENTS
user privilege level 77
3 COMMANDS FOR USER CONTROL
acl 79
free web-users 79
ip http acl 80
snmp-agent community 80
snmp-agent group 81
snmp-agent usm-user 82
4 CONFIGURATION FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
display current-configuration 85
display saved-configuration 93
display this 96
display startup 97
reset saved-configuration 98
save 98
startup saved-configuration 99
5 VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
broadcast-suppression 101
description 102
display interface Vlan-interface 102
display vlan 103
interface Vlan-interface 104
name 105
shutdown 105
vlan 106
vlan to 107
vlan all 108
6 PORT-BASED VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display port 111
port 111
port access vlan 112
port hybrid pvid vlan 112
port hybrid vlan 113
port link-type 114
port trunk permit vlan 115
port trunk pvid vlan 115
7 PROTOCOL-BASED VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display protocol-vlan interface 117
display protocol-vlan slot 118
display protocol-vlan vlan 118
Contents 5
port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan 119
protocol-vlan vlan slot 120
protocol-vlan 121
8 VOICE VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display voice vlan oui 123
display voice vlan status 123
display vlan 124
voice vlan 125
voice vlan aging 125
voice vlan enable 126
voice vlan legacy 127
voice vlan mac-address 127
voice vlan mode 128
voice vlan security enable 129
9 ISOLATE-USER-VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display isolate-user-vlan 131
isolate-user-vlan 132
isolate-user-vlan enable 132
10 SUPER VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
dhcp-server 135
display supervlan 135
subvlan 136
supervlan 137
11 IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display ip interface 139
ip address 140
12 IP PERFORMANCE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display fib 143
display icmp statistics 144
display ip socket 145
display ip statistics 147
display tcp statistics 148
display tcp status 150
display udp statistics 150
icmp redirect send 151
ip 152
ip forward-broadcast 152
reset ip statistics 153
reset tcp statistics 153
reset udp statistics 154
6 CONTENTS
tcp timer fin-timeout 154
tcp timer syn-timeout 154
tcp window 155
13 IPX CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display ipx interface 157
display ipx routing-table 158
display ipx service-table 160
display ipx statistics 161
ipx enable 163
ipx encapsulation 163
ipx netbios-propagation 164
ipx network 164
ipx rip import-route static 165
ipx rip mtu 166
ipx rip multiplier 166
ipx rip timer update 167
ipx route load-balance-path 167
ipx route max-reserve-path 168
ipx route-static 168
ipx sap disable 169
ipx sap gns-disable-reply 170
ipx sap gns-load-balance 170
ipx sap max-reserve-servers 171
ipx sap mtu 171
ipx sap multiplier 172
ipx sap timer update 172
ipx service 173
ipx split-horizon 174
ipx tick 174
ipx update-change-only 175
reset ipx routing-table statistics protocol 175
reset ipx statistics 176
14 GARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display garp statistics 177
display garp timer 177
garp timer 178
garp timer leaveall 179
reset garp statistics 180
15 GVRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display gvrp statistics 183
display gvrp status 183
gvrp 184
gvrp registration 185
Contents 7
16 QINQ CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display port vlan-vpn 187
vlan-vpn enable 187
vlan-vpn priority 188
17 SELECTIVE QINQ CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
double-vlan-id 189
raw-vlan-id inbound 190
vlan-vpn vid 190
18 SHARED VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display shared-vlan 193
shared-vlan mainboard 193
shared-vlan slot 194
19 PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
broadcast-suppression 195
copy configuration 196
description 197
display brief interface 197
display interface 198
display loopback-detection 201
duplex 201
enable log updown 202
flow-control 203
flow-control enable 203
flow interval 204
hardspeedup 204
interface 205
jumboframe enable 206
loopback-detection enable 206
loopback-detection interval-time 207
loopback-detection control 207
loopback-detection per-vlan enable 208
mdi 209
multicast-suppression 209
port monitor last 210
port monitor last slot 211
reset counters interface 212
shutdown 212
speed 213
speed auto 213
speedup 214
unicast-suppression 215
virtual-cable-test 216
8 CONTENTS
20 LINK AGGREGATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display lacp system-id 219
display link-aggregation interface 219
display link-aggregation summary 220
display link-aggregation verbose 221
hash 222
lacp enable 223
lacp port-priority 224
lacp system-priority 224
link-aggregation 225
link-aggregation group description 225
link-aggregation group mode 226
port link-aggregation group 226
reset lacp statistics 227
21 PORT ISOLATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
description 229
display isolate port 229
port 230
port isolate group 230
port-isolate group 231
22 PORT SECURITY COMMANDS
display mac-address security 233
display port-security 233
mac-address security 235
port-security enable 236
port-security intrusion-mode 236
port-security authorization ignore 237
port-security max-mac-count 238
port-security ntk-mode 239
port-security oui 239
port-security port-mode 240
port-security timer disableport 241
port-security trap 242
23 PORT BINDING COMMANDS
am user-bind 245
display am user-bind 246
24 DLDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display dldp 247
dldp 248
dldp authentication-mode 249
dldp interval 249
Contents 9
dldp reset 250
dldp unidirectional-shutdown 251
dldp work-mode 252
dldp delaydown-timer 252
25 MAC ADDRESS TABLE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
bridgemactocpu 253
display mac-address aging-time 253
display mac-address 254
higig-port mac-learning disable 255
mac-address 256
mac-address learning synchronization 257
mac-address mac-learning disable 258
mac-address max-mac-count 258
mac-address timer 259
26 CENTRALIZED MAC ADDRESS AUTHENTICATION CONFIGURATION
COMMANDS
display mac-authentication 261
mac-authentication 263
mac-authentication interface 264
mac-authentication authmode usernameasmacaddress 264
mac-authentication authmode usernamefixed 265
mac-authentication authpassword 266
mac-authentication authusername 266
mac-authentication domain 267
mac-authentication re-authenticate enable 267
mac-authentication re-authenticate mac-address 268
mac-authentication timer 268
reset mac-authentication 269
27 MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
active region-configuration 271
check region-configuration 271
display stp 272
display stp abnormalport 274
display stp portdown 274
display stp region-configuration 275
display stp root 276
display stp root 276
instance 277
region-name 278
reset stp 278
revision-level 279
stp 279
stp bpdu-protection 280
10 CONTENTS
stp bridge-diameter 281
stp config-digest-snooping 282
stp cost 283
stp edged-port 284
stp interface 285
stp interface config-digest-snooping 285
stp interface cost 287
stp interface edged-port 288
stp interface loop-protection 289
stp interface mcheck 289
stp interface no-agreement-check 290
stp interface point-to-point 291
stp interface port priority 292
stp interface root-protection 293
stp interface transmit-limit 294
stp loop-protection 294
stp max-hops 295
stp mcheck 296
stp mode 297
stp no-agreement-check 297
stp pathcost-standard 298
stp point-to-point 300
stp port priority 301
stp portlog 302
stp portlog all 302
stp priority 303
stp region-configuration 303
stp root primary 304
stp root secondary 305
stp root-protection 306
stp tc-protection 307
stp tc-protection threshold 308
stp timer forward-delay 309
stp timer hello 309
stp timer max-age 310
stp timer-factor 311
stp transmit-limit 312
vlan-mapping modulo 312
vlan-vpn tunnel 313
28 ROUTING TABLE MONITORING COMMANDS
display ip routing-table 315
display ip routing-table acl 316
display ip routing-table ip-address 318
display ip routing-table ip-address1 ip-address2 320
display ip routing-table ip-prefix 321
display ip routing-table protocol 322
Contents 11
display ip routing-table radix 323
display ip routing-table statistics 324
display ip routing-table verbose 325
reset ip routing-table statistics 326
29 STATIC ROUTE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
delete static-routes all 327
ip route-static 327
ip route-static default-preference 328
30 RIP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
checkzero 331
default cost 331
display rip 332
display rip routing 333
filter-policy export 334
filter-policy import 335
host-route 336
import-route 336
network 337
peer 338
preference 339
reset 339
rip 340
rip authentication-mode 340
rip input 341
rip metricin 342
rip metricout 343
rip output 343
rip split-horizon 344
rip version 345
rip work 345
summary 346
timers 347
traffic-share-across-interface 347
31 OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
abr-summary 349
area 350
asbr-summary 350
authentication-mode 351
default cost 352
default interval 352
default limit 353
default tag 354
default type 354
12 CONTENTS
default-cost 355
default-route-advertise 356
display ospf abr-asbr 357
display ospf asbr-summary 357
display ospf brief 358
display ospf cumulative 360
display ospf error 361
display ospf interface 363
display ospf lsdb 364
display ospf nexthop 366
display ospf peer 366
display ospf request-queue 368
display ospf retrans-queue 369
display ospf routing 370
display ospf vlink 370
filter-policy export 371
filter-policy import 372
import-route 373
network 374
nssa 375
ospf 376
ospf authentication-mode 376
ospf cost 377
ospf dr-priority 378
ospf mib-binding 378
ospf mtu-enable 379
ospf network-type 380
ospf timer dead 381
ospf timer hello 382
ospf timer poll 382
ospf timer retransmit 383
ospf trans-delay 384
peer 384
preference 385
protocol multicast-mac enable 385
reset ospf 386
router id 387
silent-interface 387
snmp-agent trap enable ospf 388
spf-schedule-interval 389
stub 389
vlink-peer 390
32 INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
area-authentication-mode 393
cost-style 394
default-route-advertise 395
Contents 13
display isis brief 395
display isis interface 396
display isis lsdb 397
display isis mesh-group 397
display isis peer 398
display isis route 398
display isis spf-log 399
domain-authentication-mode 400
filter-policy export 401
filter-policy import 401
ignore-lsp-checksum-error 402
import-route 403
import-route isis level-2 into level-1 404
isis 404
isis authentication-mode 405
isis circuit-level 406
isis cost 407
isis dis-priority 407
isis enable 408
isis mesh-group 409
isis timer csnp 410
isis timer hello 410
isis timer holding-multiplier 411
isis timer lsp 412
isis timer retransmit 413
is-level 413
log-peer-change 414
md5-compatible 415
network-entity 415
preference 416
reset isis all 417
reset isis peer 417
set-overload 417
silent-interface 418
spf-delay-interval 419
spf-slice-size 419
summary 420
timer lsp-max-age 421
timer lsp-refresh 421
timer spf 422
33 BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
aggregate 423
bgp 424
balance 425
compare-different-as-med 425
confederation id 426
14 CONTENTS
confederation nonstandard 427
confederation peer-as 427
dampening 428
default local-preference 429
default med 429
display bgp group 430
display bgp network 431
display bgp paths 431
display bgp peer 432
display bgp routing-table 433
display bgp routing-table as-path-acl 434
display bgp routing-table cidr 435
display bgp routing-table community 436
display bgp routing-table community-list 436
display bgp routing-table dampened 437
display bgp routing-table different-origin-as 438
display bgp routing-table flap-info 439
display bgp routing-table peer 440
display bgp routing-table regular-expression 441
display bgp routing-table statistic 441
filter-policy export 442
filter-policy import 442
group 443
import-route 444
ipv4-family 445
network 445
peer advertise-community 446
peer allow-as-loop 446
peer as-number 447
peer as-path-acl export 447
peer as-path-acl import 448
peer connect-interface 449
peer default-route-advertise 449
peer description 450
peer ebgp-max-hop 451
peer enable 451
peer filter-policy export 452
peer filter-policy import 452
peer group 453
peer ip-prefix export 454
peer ip-prefix import 454
peer next-hop-local 455
peer password 455
peer public-as-only 456
peer reflect-client 457
peer route-limit 458
peer route-policy export 459
peer route-policy import 460
Contents 15
peer route-update-interval 460
peer timer 461
preference 462
reflect between-clients 462
reflector cluster-id 463
refresh bgp 463
reset bgp 464
reset bgp dampening 465
reset bgp flap-info 465
router id 466
summary 466
timer 467
undo synchronization 467
34 IP ROUTING POLICY CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
apply as-path 469
apply community 469
apply cost 470
apply cost-type 471
apply ip next-hop 472
apply isis 472
apply local-preference 473
apply origin 473
apply tag 474
display ip ip-prefix 475
display route-policy 475
if-match { acl | ip-prefix } 476
if-match as-path 477
if-match community 477
if-match cost 478
if-match interface 479
if-match ip next-hop 479
if-match tag 480
ip as-path-acl 481
ip community-list 481
ip ip-prefix 482
route-policy 484
35 ROUTE CAPACITY CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display memory 487
display memory limit 487
memory auto-establish disable 488
memory auto-establish enable 489
memory { safety | limit }* 490
16 CONTENTS
36 GMRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display gmrp statistics 491
display gmrp status 491
gmrp 492
37 IGMP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display igmp-snooping configuration 493
display igmp-snooping group 493
display igmp-snooping statistics 494
display multicast-vlan 495
igmp-snooping 496
igmp-snooping fast-leave 496
igmp-snooping general-query source-ip 497
igmp-snooping group-limit 498
igmp-snooping group-policy 498
igmp-snooping host-aging-time 500
igmp-snooping max-response-time 501
igmp-snooping querier 501
igmp-snooping query-interval 502
igmp-snooping report-aggregation 502
igmp-snooping router-aging-time 503
igmp-snooping version 504
igmp host-join port 504
igmp host-join 505
multicast-vlan enable 506
multicast-vlan subvlan 506
reset igmp-snooping statistics 507
38 COMMON IP MULTICAST CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display mpm forwarding-table 509
display mpm group 510
display multicast forwarding-table 511
display multicast routing-table 512
display multicast-source-deny 514
multicast route-limit 514
multicast routing-enable 515
multicast static-router-port 515
multicast static-router-port vlan 516
multicast wrongif-holdtime 517
multicast-source-deny enable interface 518
multicast-source-deny enable 519
reset multicast forwarding-table 519
reset multicast routing-table 520
Contents 17
39 STATIC MULTICAST MAC ADDRESS TABLE CONFIGURATION
COMMANDS
display mac-address multicast 523
mac-address multicast interface 523
40 IGMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display igmp group 525
display igmp interface 526
igmp enable 527
igmp group-limit 527
igmp group-policy 528
igmp group-policy vlan 529
igmp host-join port 530
igmp host-join vlan 531
igmp lastmember-queryinterval 531
igmp max-response-time 532
igmp proxy 533
igmp report-aggregation 534
igmp robust-count 534
igmp timer other-querier-present 535
igmp timer query 536
igmp version 537
reset igmp group 537
41 PIM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
bsr-policy 539
c-bsr 540
c-rp 541
crp-policy 541
display pim bsr-info 542
display pim interface 543
display pim neighbor 544
display pim routing-table 544
display pim rp-info 546
pim 546
pim bsr-boundary 547
pim dm 548
pim neighbor-limit 548
pim neighbor-policy 549
pim sm 549
pim timer hello 550
register-policy 551
spt-switch-threshold 551
reset pim neighbor 552
reset pim routing-table 552
source-policy 554
18 CONTENTS
static-rp 554
42 MSDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
cache-sa-enable 557
display msdp brief 557
display msdp peer-status 558
display msdp sa-cache 559
display msdp sa-count 560
import-source 560
msdp 561
msdp-tracert 561
originating-rp 563
peer connect-interface 564
peer description 564
peer mesh-group 565
peer minimum-ttl 565
peer request-sa-enable 566
peer sa-cache-maximum 567
peer sa-policy 567
peer sa-request-policy 568
reset msdp peer 569
reset msdp sa-cache 569
reset msdp statistics 570
shutdown 570
static-rpf-peer 570
timer retry 571
43 802.1X CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display dot1x 573
dot1x 575
dot1x authentication-method 576
dot1x dhcp-launch 577
dot1x guest-vlan 578
dot1x max-user 579
dot1x port-control 580
dot1x port-method 581
dot1x quiet-period 582
dot1x re-authenticate 583
dot1x retry 584
dot1x retry-version-max 584
dot1x supp-proxy-check 585
dot1x timer 587
dot1x version-check 589
reset dot1x statistics 589
Contents 19
44 HABP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display habp 591
display habp table 591
display habp traffic 592
habp enable 592
habp server vlan 593
habp timer 593
45 AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
access-limit 595
attribute 595
accounting 597
accounting optional 597
authentication 598
authorization 599
cut connection 600
display connection 601
display domain 602
display local-user 603
domain 605
idle-cut 606
level 607
local-user 607
local-user password-display-mode 608
messenger 609
name 610
password 610
radius-scheme 611
scheme 612
self-service-url 613
service-type 614
state 614
vlan-assignment-mode 615
46 RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
accounting-on enable 619
accounting optional 620
data-flow-format 621
display local-server statistics 622
display radius 622
display radius statistics 623
display stop-accounting-buffer 624
key 625
local-server 626
nas-ip 627
primary accounting 628
20 CONTENTS
primary authentication 629
radius nas-ip 630
radius scheme 630
reset radius statistics 631
reset stop-accounting-buffer 632
retry 633
retry realtime-accounting 633
retry stop-accounting 635
secondary accounting 635
secondary authentication 636
server-type 637
state 637
stop-accounting-buffer enable 638
timer 639
timer quiet 640
timer realtime-accounting 641
timer response-timeout 641
user-name-format 642
47 HWTACACS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
data-flow-format 645
display hwtacacs 646
display stop-accounting-buffer 647
hwtacacs nas-ip 647
hwtacacs scheme 648
key 649
nas-ip 649
primary accounting 650
primary authentication 651
primary authorization 652
reset hwtacacs statistics 652
reset stop-accounting-buffer 653
retry stop-accounting 654
secondary accounting 654
secondary authentication 655
secondary authorization 656
stop-accounting-buffer enable 657
timer quiet 657
timer realtime-accounting 658
timer response-timeout 659
user-name-format 659
48 EAD CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
security-policy-server 661
Contents 21
49 TRAFFIC ACCOUNTING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
accounting enable 663
accounting-mode traffic 663
display traffic-accounting accounting-slot 664
display traffic-accounting statistics 664
display traffic-accounting traffic-group 665
network 666
traffic-accounting accounting-slot 666
traffic-accounting traffic-group 667
traffic-group 667
traffic-slot 668
50 VRRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display vrrp 671
display vrrp statistics 672
display vrrp verbose 673
reset vrrp statistics 675
undo vrrp vrid 675
vrrp method 675
vrrp ping-enable 676
vrrp un-check ttl 677
vrrp vrid authentication-mode 677
vrrp vrid preempt-mode 678
vrrp vrid priority 679
vrrp vrid timer advertise 680
vrrp vrid track 681
vrrp vrid virtual-ip 682
51 HA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display switchover state 683
slave auto-update config 683
slave restart 684
slave switchover 684
slave update configuration 685
52 ARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
arp check enable 687
arp gratuitous-updating enable 687
arp mac-arp-map limit 688
arp max-entry 689
arp max-dynamic-entry 689
arp protective-down recover interval 690
arp rate-limit enable 690
arp rate-limit 691
arp rate-limit trust 691
arp relay enable 692
22 CONTENTS
arp source-suppression limit 692
arp static 693
arp timer aging 694
arp timer gratuitous-updating 695
display arp 695
display arp | 696
display arp attack-list 697
display arp entry-limit 697
display arp interface 698
display arp rate-limit 698
display arp slot 699
display arp source-suppression 699
display arp timer aging 700
display arp vlan 700
gratuitous-arp-learning enable 700
reset arp 701
reset arp attack-list 702
53 PROXY ARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
arp proxy enable 703
arp proxy source-vlan enable 703
display arp proxy 704
54 DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
dhcp enable 705
dhcp select global 705
dhcp select interface 706
dhcp server detect 707
dhcp server dns-list 707
dhcp server domain-name 709
dhcp server expired 709
dhcp server forbidden-ip 710
dhcp server ip-pool 711
dhcp server nbns-list 712
dhcp server netbios-type 713
dhcp server option 714
dhcp server ping 715
dhcp server static-bind 716
display dhcp server conflict 716
display dhcp server expired 717
display dhcp server free-ip 718
display dhcp server ip-in-use 718
display dhcp server statistics 719
display dhcp server tree 720
dns-list 722
domain-name 723
Contents 23
expired 723
gateway-list 724
nbns-list 725
netbios-type 725
network 726
option 727
reset dhcp server conflict 728
reset dhcp server ip-in-use 728
reset dhcp server statistics 729
static-bind ip-address 729
static-bind mac-address 730
55 DHCP RELAY AGENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
address-check 731
address-check dhcp-relay 731
address-check field enable 732
address-check no-matched 732
dhcp-relay gateway interface 733
dhcp-relay gateway vlan 734
dhcp relay information enable 734
dhcp relay information strategy 735
dhcp relay reply broadcast 736
dhcp relay source-ip source-interface 736
dhcp-security static 737
dhcp-server 738
dhcp-server ip 738
display dhcp-security 739
display dhcp-server 739
display dhcp-server interface 740
reset dhcp-server 741
undo dhcp-relay gateway all 741
56 DHCP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
dhcp-snooping 743
dhcp-snooping information enable 743
dhcp-snooping information format 744
dhcp-snooping information packet-format 744
dhcp-snooping information remote-id 745
dhcp-snooping information strategy 745
dhcp-snooping information vlan circuit-id 746
dhcp-snooping information vlan remote-id 747
dhcp-snooping trust 748
display dhcp-snooping 749
display dhcp-snooping count 749
display dhcp-snooping trust 750
display dhcp-snooping vlan 750
display ip source static binding 751
24 CONTENTS
ip check source ip-address 751
ip source static binding 752
reset dhcp-snooping 753
57 ACL COMMANDS
acl 755
acl mode 756
acl order 757
display acl config 757
display acl config statistics 758
display acl mode 758
display acl order 759
display acl remaining entry 759
display acl running-packet-filter 760
display time-range 760
packet-filter 762
reset acl counter 764
rule (Basic ACL) 765
rule (Advanced ACL) 766
rule (Layer 2 ACL) 771
rule (user-defined ACL) 773
time-range 774
58 QOS COMMANDS
display priority-trust 777
display qos cos-local-precedence-map 777
display qos-interface all 778
display qos-interface line-rate 778
display qos-interface queue-scheduler 779
display qos-interface traffic-bandwidth 780
display qos-interface traffic-limit 781
display qos-interface traffic-priority 781
display qos-interface traffic-red 781
display qos-interface traffic-redirect 782
display qos-interface traffic-remark 782
display qos-interface traffic-statistic 783
inboundcar 783
line-rate 784
priority 785
priority-trust 785
qos 787
qos cos-local-precedence-map 788
queue-scheduler 789
reset traffic-statistic 790
traffic-bandwidth 792
traffic-limit 794
Contents 25
traffic-priority 796
traffic-red 799
traffic-redirect 800
traffic-remark 801
traffic-statistic 803
59 MIRRORING COMMANDS
display mirroring-group 805
display qos-interface mirrored-to 806
mirrored-to 807
mirroring-group 809
mirroring-group (only for configuration recovery) 809
mirroring-group mirroring-port 810
mirroring-group mirroring-slot 811
mirroring-group monitor-port 811
mirroring-group monitor-slot 812
mirroring-group reflector-port 813
mirroring-group remote-probe vlan 813
remote-probe vlan 814
60 NDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display ndp 815
ndp enable 817
ndp timer aging 817
ndp timer hello 818
reset ndp statistics 819
61 NTDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display ntdp 821
display ntdp device-list 821
ntdp enable 823
ntdp explore 824
ntdp hop 824
ntdp timer 825
ntdp timer hop-delay 825
ntdp timer port-delay 826
62 CLUSTER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
add-member 829
administrator-address 829
auto-build 830
build 831
cluster 832
cluster enable 832
cluster switch-to 833
26 CONTENTS
cluster-mac 834
cluster-mac syn-interval 835
delete-member 835
display cluster 836
display cluster candidates 837
display cluster members 838
ftp cluster 840
ftp-server 840
holdtime 841
ip address 841
ip-pool 842
logging-host 843
reboot member 843
snmp-host 844
tftp cluster get 845
tftp cluster put 845
tftp-server 846
timer 846
63 POE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display poe interface 849
display poe interface power 851
display poe powersupply 852
display poe pse 853
poe enable 854
poe enable slot 854
poe legacy enable slot 855
poe max-power 855
poe max-power slot 856
poe mode 856
poe power max-value 857
poe power-management 857
poe priority 858
poe upgrade 859
64 POE PSU SUPERVISION DISPLAY COMMANDS
display poe-power ac-input state 861
display poe-power alarm 861
display poe-power dc-output state 862
display poe-power dc-output value 863
display poe-power switch state 863
display supervision-module information 864
65 POE PSU SUPERVISION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
poe-power input-thresh lower 865
poe-power input-thresh upper 865
Contents 27
poe-power output-thresh lower 866
poe-power output-thresh upper 866
66 POE PROFILE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
apply poe-profile 869
display poe-profile 870
poe-profile 870
67 UDP-HELPER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display udp-helper server 873
reset udp-helper packet 873
udp-helper enable 874
udp-helper port 874
udp-helper server 875
68 SNMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display snmp-agent 877
display snmp-agent community 877
display snmp-agent group 878
display snmp-agent mib-view 879
display snmp-agent statistics 880
display snmp-agent sys-info 881
display snmp-agent usm-user 881
enable snmp trap updown 882
snmp-agent 883
snmp-agent community 883
snmp-agent group 884
snmp-agent local-switch fabricid 885
snmp-agent mib-view 886
snmp-agent packet max-size 887
snmp-agent sys-info 887
snmp-agent target-host 888
snmp-agent trap enable 889
snmp-agent trap ifmib 891
snmp-agent trap life 891
snmp-agent trap queue-size 892
snmp-agent trap source 892
snmp-agent usm-user 893
69 RMON CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display rmon alarm 895
display rmon event 896
display rmon eventlog 897
display rmon history 897
display rmon prialarm 898
28 CONTENTS
display rmon statistics 900
rmon alarm 901
rmon event 902
rmon history 903
rmon prialarm 904
rmon statistics 906
70 NTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display ntp-service sessions 909
display ntp-service status 909
display ntp-service trace 910
ntp-service access 911
ntp-service authentication enable 912
ntp-service authentication-keyid 912
ntp-service broadcast-client 913
ntp-service broadcast-server 913
ntp-service disable 914
ntp-service in-interface disable 914
ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions 915
ntp-service multicast-client 915
ntp-service multicast-server 916
ntp-service refclock-master 917
ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid 918
ntp-service source-interface 918
ntp-service unicast-peer 919
ntp-service unicast-server 920
71 SSH SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display rsa local-key-pair public 923
display rsa peer-public-key 924
display ssh server 925
display ssh user-information 926
peer-public-key end 926
protocol inbound 926
public-key-code begin 927
public-key-code end 928
rsa local-key-pair create 928
rsa local-key-pair destroy 929
rsa peer-public-key 930
rsa peer-public-key import sshkey 930
ssh authentication-type default 931
ssh server authentication-retries 932
ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable 932
ssh server rekey-interval 933
ssh server timeout 933
ssh user 934
Contents 29
ssh user assign rsa-key 934
ssh user authentication-type 935
72 SSH CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display ssh server-info 937
public-key-code begin 937
public-key-code end 938
rsa peer-public-key 938
rsa peer-public-key import sshkey 939
ssh client assign rsa-key 940
ssh client first-time enable 940
ssh2 941
73 SFTP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
sftp server enable 943
ssh user service-type 943
74 SFTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
bye 945
cd 945
cdup 946
delete 946
dir 946
exit 947
get 947
help 948
ls 948
mkdir 949
put 949
pwd 950
quit 950
remove 951
rename 951
rmdir 952
sftp 952
75 FILE SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
cd 955
copy 956
delete 957
dir 957
execute 958
file prompt 960
fixdisk 960
format 961
30 CONTENTS
mkdir 961
more 961
move 962
pwd 963
rename 963
reset recycle-bin 964
rmdir 965
umount 965
undelete 966
76 BIMS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
bims boot request 967
bims device-id 967
bims enable 968
bims interval 968
bims ip address 969
bims request 969
bims sharekey 970
bims source ip-address 971
bims specify-time 971
77 INFORMATION CENTER COMMANDS
display channel 973
display info-center 973
display logbuffer 974
display logbuffer summary 976
display trapbuffer 976
info-center channel 977
info-center console channel 978
info-center enable 978
info-center logbuffer 979
info-center loghost 980
info-center loghost source 981
info-center monitor channel 981
info-center snmp channel 982
info-center source 983
info-center timestamp 987
info-center trapbuffer 988
reset logbuffer 989
reset trapbuffer 989
terminal debugging 989
terminal logging 990
terminal monitor 990
terminal trapping 991
Contents 31
78 FTP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display ftp-server 993
display ftp-user 993
ftp server enable 994
ftp timeout 994
79 FTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
ascii 997
binary 997
bye 998
cd 998
cdup 998
close 999
delete 999
dir 1000
disconnect 1000
ftp 1001
get 1001
lcd 1002
ls 1002
mkdir 1003
open 1003
passive 1004
put 1004
pwd 1005
quit 1005
remotehelp 1005
rmdir 1006
user 1006
verbose 1007
80 TFTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
tftp get 1009
tftp put 1009
tftp-server acl 1010
81 DNS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display dns domain 1011
display dns dynamic-host 1011
display dns server 1012
display ip host 1012
dns domain 1013
dns resolve 1014
dns server 1014
ip host 1015
reset dns dynamic-host 1015
32 CONTENTS
82 BASIC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
clock datetime 1017
clock summer-time 1017
clock timezone 1019
language-mode 1019
quit 1020
return 1020
sysname 1021
system-view 1021
83 SYSTEM STATUS/INFORMATION DISPLAY COMMANDS
display clock 1023
display debugging 1023
display version 1024
84 SYSTEM DEBUGGING COMMANDS
debugging 1027
display diagnostic-information 1028
terminal debugging 1029
85 NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEST COMMANDS
ping 1031
tracert 1033
86 DEVICE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
boot boot-loader 1037
boot bootrom 1037
boot bootrom default 1038
bootrom-update security-check enable 1038
display boot-loader 1039
display cpu 1039
display device 1040
display environment 1041
display fan 1041
display memory 1042
display power 1043
display schedule reboot 1043
display transceiver alarm interface 1043
display transceiver diagnosis interface 1046
display transceiver interface 1047
display transceiver manuinfo interface 1048
display uplink monitor 1048
loadsharing enable 1049
pause-protection 1050
qe monitor 1050
Contents 33
qe monitor errpkt 1051
qe monitor errpkt check-time 1051
qe monitor inner-bad 1052
qe monitor overflow-threshold 1053
rdram 1053
reboot 1054
schedule reboot at 1054
schedule reboot delay 1055
set backboard enhance 1056
temperature-limit 1056
uplink monitor 1057
87 REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
count 1059
datasize 1059
destination-ip 1060
destination-port 1061
display remote-ping 1061
dns-server 1066
dns resolve-target 1067
filename 1068
frequency 1068
ftp-operation 1069
history-records 1069
http-operation 1070
http-string 1070
remote-ping 1071
remote-ping-agent enable 1072
jitter-interval 1072
jitter-packetnum 1073
password 1074
probe-failtimes 1074
send-trap 1075
source-interface 1075
source-ip 1076
source-port 1077
test-type 1077
test-enable 1078
test-failtimes 1078
timeout 1079
tos 1079
username 1080
88 REMOTE-PING SERVER COMMANDS
remote-ping-server enable 1083
remote-ping-server tcpconnect 1083
remote-ping-server udpecho 1084
34 CONTENTS
89 RRPP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
control-vlan 1087
display rrpp brief 1088
display rrpp statistics 1088
display rrpp verbose 1089
reset rrpp statistics 1091
ring 1091
ring enable 1094
rrpp domain 1095
rrpp enable 1095
timer 1096
90 NETSTREAM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display ip netstream cache 1097
display ip netstream export 1098
enable 1098
ip netstream aggregation 1099
ip netstream export dscp 1100
ip netstream export host 1100
ip netstream export source 1101
ip netstream export version 1102
ip netstream inbound source 1102
ip netstream outbound source 1103
ip netstream template refresh 1104
ip netstream template timeout 1104
ip netstream timeout active 1105
ip netstream timeout inactive 1105
reset ip netstream statistics 1106
91 POLICY ROUTING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display qos-vlan traffic-redirect 1107
traffic-redirect inbound ip-group 1108
traffic-redirect outbound ip-group 1109
92 TELNET PROTECTION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
attack-protection 1113
attack-protection disable-defaultroute 1113
attack-protection icmp 1114
attack-protection snmp 1115
attack-protection telnet 1115
93 SMART LINK CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display smart-link flush 1117
display smart-link group 1118
flush enable control-vlan 1118
Contents 35
link-aggregation group 1119
port 1119
port smart-link group 1120
reset smart-link packets counter 1121
smart-link flush enable 1121
smart-link group 1122
94 MONITOR LINK CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display monitor-link group 1125
link-aggregation group 1125
monitor-link group 1126
port 1127
port monitor-link group 1128
smart-link group 1128
95 COMMANDS FOR BOOT ROM UPGRADE WITH APP FILE
boot bootrom default 1131
boot bootrom file-url 1131
boot boot-loader primary 1132
96 INTER-CARD LINK STATE ADJUSTMENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
set inlink 1133
97 INTERNAL CHANNEL MONITOR COMMANDS
monitor inner-channel 1135
monitor inner-channel 1136
98 SWITCH CHIP AUTO-RESET CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
monitor slot 1137
99 CPU USAGE THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION COMMAND
cpu-usage-threshold 1139
36 CONTENTS
ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF
COMMANDS
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
A arp proxy enable 703
arp proxy source-vlan enable 703
abr-summary 349 arp rate-limit 691
access-limit 595 arp rate-limit enable 690
accounting 597 arp rate-limit trust 691
accounting enable 663 arp relay enable 692
accounting optional 597 arp source-suppression limit 692
accounting optional 620 arp static 693
accounting-mode traffic 663 arp timer aging 694
accounting-on enable 619 arp timer gratuitous-updating 695
acl 755 asbr-summary 350
acl 79 ascii 997
acl mode 756 attack-protection 1113
acl order 757 attack-protection
active region-configuration 271 disable-defaultroute 1113
add-member 829 attack-protection icmp 1114
address-check 731 attack-protection snmp 1115
address-check dhcp-relay 731 attack-protection telnet 1115
address-check field enable 732 attribute 595
address-check no-matched 732 authentication 598
administrator-address 829 authentication-mode 351
aggregate 423 authentication-mode 57
am user-bind 245 authorization 599
apply as-path 469 auto-build 830
apply community 469 auto-execute command 58
apply cost 470
apply cost-type 471
apply ip next-hop 472 B
apply isis 472 balance 425
apply local-preference 473 bgp 424
apply origin 473 bims boot request 967
apply poe-profile 869 bims device-id 967
apply tag 474 bims enable 968
area 350 bims interval 968
area-authentication-mode 393 bims ip address 969
arp check enable 687 bims request 969
arp gratuitous-updating enable 687 bims sharekey 970
arp mac-arp-map limit 688 bims source ip-address 971
arp max-dynamic-entry 689 bims specify-time 971
arp max-entry 689 binary 997
arp protective-down recover interval boot boot-loader 1037
690 boot boot-loader primary 1132
40 ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
boot bootrom 1037 databits 59
boot bootrom default 1038 data-flow-format 621
boot bootrom default 1131 data-flow-format 645
boot bootrom file-url 1131 debugging 1027
bootrom-update security-check default cost 331
enable 1038 default cost 352
bridgemactocpu 253 default interval 352
broadcast-suppression 101 default limit 353
broadcast-suppression 195 default local-preference 429
bsr-policy 539 default med 429
build 831 default tag 354
bye 945 default type 354
bye 998 default-cost 355
default-route-advertise 356
default-route-advertise 395
C delete 946
cache-sa-enable 557 delete 957
c-bsr 540 delete 999
cd 945 delete static-routes all 327
cd 955 delete-member 835
cd 998 description 102
cdup 946 description 197
cdup 998 description 229
check region-configuration 271 dhcp enable 705
checkzero 331 dhcp relay information enable 734
clock datetime 1017 dhcp relay information strategy 735
clock summer-time 1017 dhcp relay reply broadcast 736
clock timezone 1019 dhcp relay source-ip source-interface
close 999 736
cluster 832 dhcp select global 705
cluster enable 832 dhcp select interface 706
cluster switch-to 833 dhcp server detect 707
cluster-mac 834 dhcp server dns-list 707
cluster-mac syn-interval 835 dhcp server domain-name 709
command-privilege level 53 dhcp server expired 709
compare-different-as-med 425 dhcp server forbidden-ip 710
confederation id 426 dhcp server ip-pool 711
confederation nonstandard 427 dhcp server nbns-list 712
confederation peer-as 427 dhcp server netbios-type 713
control-vlan 1087 dhcp server option 714
copy 956 dhcp server ping 715
copy configuration 196 dhcp server static-bind 716
copyright-info enable 58 dhcp-relay gateway interface 733
cost-style 394 dhcp-relay gateway vlan 734
cpu-usage-threshold 1139 dhcp-security static 737
c-rp 541 dhcp-server 135
crp-policy 541 dhcp-server 738
cut connection 600 dhcp-server ip 738
dhcp-snooping 743
D dhcp-snooping information enable
743
dampening 428
Alphabetical Listing of Commands 41
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
dhcp-snooping information format display bgp routing-table flap-info
744 439
dhcp-snooping information display bgp routing-table peer 440
packet-format 744 display bgp routing-table
dhcp-snooping information regular-expression 441
remote-id 745 display bgp routing-table statistic 441
dhcp-snooping information strategy display boot-loader 1039
745 display brief interface 197
dhcp-snooping information vlan display channel 973
circuit-id 746 display clock 1023
dhcp-snooping information vlan display cluster 836
remote-id 747 display cluster candidates 837
dhcp-snooping trust 748 display cluster members 838
dir 1000 display connection 601
dir 946 display cpu 1039
dir 957 display current-configuration 85
disconnect 1000 display debugging 1023
display acl config 757 display device 1040
display acl config statistics 758 display dhcp server conflict 716
display acl mode 758 display dhcp server expired 717
display acl order 759 display dhcp server free-ip 718
display acl remaining entry 759 display dhcp server ip-in-use 718
display acl running-packet-filter 760 display dhcp server statistics 719
display am user-bind 246 display dhcp server tree 720
display arp | 696 display dhcp-security 739
display arp 695 display dhcp-server 739
display arp attack-list 697 display dhcp-server interface 740
display arp entry-limit 697 display dhcp-snooping 749
display arp interface 698 display dhcp-snooping count 749
display arp proxy 704 display dhcp-snooping trust 750
display arp rate-limit 698 display dhcp-snooping vlan 750
display arp slot 699 display diagnostic-information 1028
display arp source-suppression 699 display dldp 247
display arp timer aging 700 display dns domain 1011
display arp vlan 700 display dns dynamic-host 1011
display bgp group 430 display dns server 1012
display bgp network 431 display domain 602
display bgp paths 431 display dot1x 573
display bgp peer 432 display environment 1041
display bgp routing-table 433 display fan 1041
display bgp routing-table as-path-acl display fib 143
434 display ftp-server 993
display bgp routing-table cidr 435 display ftp-user 993
display bgp routing-table community display garp statistics 177
436 display garp timer 177
display bgp routing-table display gmrp statistics 491
community-list 436 display gmrp status 491
display bgp routing-table dampened display gvrp statistics 183
437 display gvrp status 183
display bgp routing-table display habp 591
different-origin-as 438 display habp table 591
42 ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
display habp traffic 592 display local-server statistics 622
display history-command 53 display local-user 603
display hwtacacs 646 display logbuffer 974
display icmp statistics 144 display logbuffer summary 976
display igmp group 525 display loopback-detection 201
display igmp interface 526 display mac-address 254
display igmp-snooping configuration display mac-address aging-time 253
493 display mac-address multicast 523
display igmp-snooping group 493 display mac-address security 233
display igmp-snooping statistics 494 display mac-authentication 261
display info-center 973 display memory 1042
display interface 198 display memory 487
display interface Vlan-interface 102 display memory limit 487
display ip host 1012 display mirroring-group 805
display ip interface 139 display monitor-link group 1125
display ip ip-prefix 475 display mpm forwarding-table 509
display ip netstream cache 1097 display mpm group 510
display ip netstream export 1098 display msdp brief 557
display ip routing-table 315 display msdp peer-status 558
display ip routing-table acl 316 display msdp sa-cache 559
display ip routing-table ip-address display msdp sa-count 560
318 display multicast forwarding-table
display ip routing-table ip-address1 511
ip-address2 320 display multicast routing-table 512
display ip routing-table ip-prefix 321 display multicast-source-deny 514
display ip routing-table protocol 322 display multicast-vlan 495
display ip routing-table radix 323 display ndp 815
display ip routing-table statistics 324 display ntdp 821
display ip routing-table verbose 325 display ntdp device-list 821
display ip socket 145 display ntp-service sessions 909
display ip source static binding 751 display ntp-service status 909
display ip statistics 147 display ntp-service trace 910
display ipx interface 157 display ospf abr-asbr 357
display ipx routing-table 158 display ospf asbr-summary 357
display ipx service-table 160 display ospf brief 358
display ipx statistics 161 display ospf cumulative 360
display isis brief 395 display ospf error 361
display isis interface 396 display ospf interface 363
display isis lsdb 397 display ospf lsdb 364
display isis mesh-group 397 display ospf nexthop 366
display isis peer 398 display ospf peer 366
display isis route 398 display ospf request-queue 368
display isis spf-log 399 display ospf retrans-queue 369
display isolate port 229 display ospf routing 370
display isolate-user-vlan 131 display ospf vlink 370
display lacp system-id 219 display pim bsr-info 542
display link-aggregation interface display pim interface 543
219 display pim neighbor 544
display link-aggregation summary display pim routing-table 544
220 display pim rp-info 546
display link-aggregation verbose 221 display poe interface 849
Alphabetical Listing of Commands 43
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
display poe interface power 851 display rrpp statistics 1088
display poe powersupply 852 display rrpp verbose 1089
display poe pse 853 display rsa local-key-pair public 923
display poe-power ac-input state 861 display rsa peer-public-key 924
display poe-power alarm 861 display saved-configuration 93
display poe-power dc-output state display schedule reboot 1043
862 display shared-vlan 193
display poe-power dc-output value display smart-link flush 1117
863 display smart-link group 1118
display poe-power switch state 863 display snmp-agent 877
display poe-profile 870 display snmp-agent community 877
display port 111 display snmp-agent group 878
display port vlan-vpn 187 display snmp-agent mib-view 879
display port-security 233 display snmp-agent statistics 880
display power 1043 display snmp-agent sys-info 881
display priority-trust 777 display snmp-agent usm-user 881
display protocol-vlan interface 117 display ssh server 925
display protocol-vlan slot 118 display ssh server-info 937
display protocol-vlan vlan 118 display ssh user-information 926
display qos display startup 97
cos-local-precedence-map 777 display stop-accounting-buffer 624
display qos-interface all 778 display stop-accounting-buffer 647
display qos-interface line-rate 778 display stp 272
display qos-interface mirrored-to 806 display stp abnormalport 274
display qos-interface display stp portdown 274
queue-scheduler 779 display stp region-configuration 275
display qos-interface display stp root 276
traffic-bandwidth 780 display stp root 276
display qos-interface traffic-limit 781 display supervision-module
display qos-interface traffic-priority information 864
781 display supervlan 135
display qos-interface traffic-red 781 display switchover state 683
display qos-interface traffic-redirect display tcp statistics 148
782 display tcp status 150
display qos-interface traffic-remark display this 96
782 display time-range 760
display qos-interface traffic-statistic display traffic-accounting
783 accounting-slot 664
display qos-vlan traffic-redirect 1107 display traffic-accounting statistics
display radius 622 664
display radius statistics 623 display traffic-accounting
display rip 332 traffic-group 665
display rip routing 333 display transceiver alarm interface
display rmon alarm 895 1043
display rmon event 896 display transceiver diagnosis interface
display rmon eventlog 897 1046
display rmon history 897 display transceiver interface 1047
display rmon prialarm 898 display transceiver manuinfo
display rmon statistics 900 interface 1048
display route-policy 475 display trapbuffer 976
display rrpp brief 1088 display udp statistics 150
44 ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
display udp-helper server 873
display uplink monitor 1048
F
display user-interface 60 file prompt 960
display users 61 filter-policy export 334
display version 1024 filter-policy export 371
display vlan 103 filter-policy export 401
display vlan 124 filter-policy export 442
display voice vlan oui 123 filter-policy import 335
display voice vlan status 123 filter-policy import 372
display vrrp 671 filter-policy import 401
display vrrp statistics 672 filter-policy import 442
display vrrp verbose 673 fixdisk 960
dldp 248 flow interval 204
dldp authentication-mode 249 flow-control 203
dldp delaydown-timer 252 flow-control 62
dldp interval 249 flow-control enable 203
dldp reset 250 flush enable control-vlan 1118
dldp unidirectional-shutdown 251 format 961
dldp work-mode 252 free user-interface 62
dns domain 1013 free web-users 79
dns resolve 1014 ftp 1001
dns server 1014 ftp cluster 840
dns-list 722 ftp server enable 994
domain 605 ftp timeout 994
domain-authentication-mode 400 ftp-server 840
domain-name 723
dot1x 575 G
dot1x authentication-method 576
garp timer 178
dot1x dhcp-launch 577
garp timer leaveall 179
dot1x guest-vlan 578
gateway-list 724
dot1x max-user 579
get 1001
dot1x port-control 580
get 947
dot1x port-method 581
gmrp 492
dot1x quiet-period 582
gratuitous-arp-learning enable 700
dot1x re-authenticate 583
group 443
dot1x retry 584
gvrp 184
dot1x retry-version-max 584
gvrp registration 185
dot1x supp-proxy-check 585
dot1x timer 587
dot1x version-check 589 H
double-vlan-id 189 habp enable 592
duplex 201 habp server vlan 593
habp timer 593
E hardspeedup 204
hash 222
enable 1098
header 63
enable log updown 202
help 948
enable snmp trap updown 882
higig-port mac-learning disable 255
execute 958
history-command max-size 65
exit 947
holdtime 841
expired 723
host-route 336
Alphabetical Listing of Commands 45
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
hwtacacs nas-ip 647 import-route 444
hwtacacs scheme 648 import-route isis level-2 into level-1
icmp redirect send 151 404
import-source 560
inboundcar 783
I info-center channel 977
idle-cut 606 info-center console channel 978
idle-timeout 66 info-center enable 978
if-match { acl | ip-prefix } 476 info-center logbuffer 979
if-match as-path 477 info-center loghost 980
if-match community 477 info-center loghost source 981
if-match cost 478 info-center monitor channel 981
if-match interface 479 info-center snmp channel 982
if-match ip next-hop 479 info-center source 983
if-match tag 480 info-center timestamp 987
igmp enable 527 info-center trapbuffer 988
igmp group-limit 527 instance 277
igmp group-policy 528 interface 205
igmp group-policy vlan 529 interface Vlan-interface 104
igmp host-join 505 ip 152
igmp host-join port 504 ip address 140
igmp host-join port 530 ip address 841
igmp host-join vlan 531 ip as-path-acl 481
igmp lastmember-queryinterval 531 ip check source ip-address 751
igmp max-response-time 532 ip community-list 481
igmp proxy 533 ip forward-broadcast 152
igmp report-aggregation 534 ip host 1015
igmp robust-count 534 ip http acl 80
igmp timer other-querier-present 535 ip http shutdown 66
igmp timer query 536 ip ip-prefix 482
igmp version 537 ip netstream aggregation 1099
igmp-snooping 496 ip netstream export dscp 1100
igmp-snooping fast-leave 496 ip netstream export host 1100
igmp-snooping general-query ip netstream export source 1101
source-ip 497 ip netstream export version 1102
igmp-snooping group-limit 498 ip netstream inbound source 1102
igmp-snooping group-policy 498 ip netstream outbound source 1103
igmp-snooping host-aging-time 500 ip netstream template refresh 1104
igmp-snooping max-response-time ip netstream template timeout 1104
501 ip netstream timeout active 1105
igmp-snooping querier 501 ip netstream timeout inactive 1105
igmp-snooping query-interval 502 ip route-static 327
igmp-snooping report-aggregation ip route-static default-preference 328
502 ip source static binding 752
igmp-snooping router-aging-time ip-pool 842
503 ipv4-family 445
igmp-snooping version 504 ipx enable 163
ignore-lsp-checksum-error 402 ipx encapsulation 163
import-route 336 ipx netbios-propagation 164
import-route 373 ipx network 164
import-route 403 ipx rip import-route static 165
46 ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
ipx rip mtu 166 link-aggregation group 1119
ipx rip multiplier 166 link-aggregation group 1125
ipx rip timer update 167 link-aggregation group description
ipx route load-balance-path 167 225
ipx route max-reserve-path 168 link-aggregation group mode 226
ipx route-static 168 loadsharing enable 1049
ipx sap disable 169 local-server 626
ipx sap gns-disable-reply 170 local-user 607
ipx sap gns-load-balance 170 local-user password-display-mode
ipx sap max-reserve-servers 171 608
ipx sap mtu 171 lock 67
ipx sap multiplier 172 logging-host 843
ipx sap timer update 172 log-peer-change 414
ipx service 173 loopback-detection control 207
ipx split-horizon 174 loopback-detection enable 206
ipx tick 174 loopback-detection interval-time 207
ipx update-change-only 175 loopback-detection per-vlan enable
isis 404 208
isis authentication-mode 405 ls 1002
isis circuit-level 406 ls 948
isis cost 407
isis dis-priority 407
isis enable 408
M
isis mesh-group 409 mac-address 256
isis timer csnp 410 mac-address learning
isis timer hello 410 synchronization 257
isis timer holding-multiplier 411 mac-address mac-learning disable
isis timer lsp 412 258
isis timer retransmit 413 mac-address max-mac-count 258
is-level 413 mac-address multicast interface 523
isolate-user-vlan 132 mac-address security 235
isolate-user-vlan enable 132 mac-address timer 259
mac-authentication 263
mac-authentication authmode
J usernameasmacaddress 264
jumboframe enable 206 mac-authentication authmode
usernamefixed 265
mac-authentication authpassword
K 266
key 625 mac-authentication authusername
key 649 266
mac-authentication domain 267
L mac-authentication interface 264
mac-authentication re-authenticate
lacp enable 223 enable 267
lacp port-priority 224 mac-authentication re-authenticate
lacp system-priority 224 mac-address 268
language-mode 1019 mac-authentication timer 268
lcd 1002 md5-compatible 415
level 607 mdi 209
line-rate 784 memory { safety | limit }* 490
link-aggregation 225
Alphabetical Listing of Commands 47
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
memory auto-establish disable 488 netbios-type 725
memory auto-establish enable 489 network 337
messenger 609 network 374
mirrored-to 807 network 445
mirroring-group (only for network 666
configuration recovery) 809 network 726
mirroring-group 809 network-entity 415
mirroring-group mirroring-port 810 nssa 375
mirroring-group mirroring-slot 811 ntdp enable 823
mirroring-group monitor-port 811 ntdp explore 824
mirroring-group monitor-slot 812 ntdp hop 824
mirroring-group reflector-port 813 ntdp timer 825
mirroring-group remote-probe vlan ntdp timer hop-delay 825
813 ntdp timer port-delay 826
mkdir 1003 ntp-service access 911
mkdir 949 ntp-service authentication enable
mkdir 961 912
modem 68 ntp-service authentication-keyid 912
modem auto-answer 68 ntp-service broadcast-client 913
modem timer answer 69 ntp-service broadcast-server 913
monitor inner-channel 1135 ntp-service disable 914
monitor inner-channel 1136 ntp-service in-interface disable 914
monitor slot 1137 ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions
monitor-link group 1126 915
more 961 ntp-service multicast-client 915
move 962 ntp-service multicast-server 916
msdp 561 ntp-service refclock-master 917
msdp-tracert 561 ntp-service reliable
multicast route-limit 514 authentication-keyid 918
multicast routing-enable 515 ntp-service source-interface 918
multicast static-router-port 515 ntp-service unicast-peer 919
multicast static-router-port vlan 516 ntp-service unicast-server 920
multicast wrongif-holdtime 517
multicast-source-deny enable 519
multicast-source-deny enable
O
interface 518 open 1003
multicast-suppression 209 option 727
multicast-vlan enable 506 originating-rp 563
multicast-vlan subvlan 506 ospf 376
ospf authentication-mode 376
ospf cost 377
N ospf dr-priority 378
name 105 ospf mib-binding 378
name 610 ospf mtu-enable 379
nas-ip 627 ospf network-type 380
nas-ip 649 ospf timer dead 381
nbns-list 725 ospf timer hello 382
ndp enable 817 ospf timer poll 382
ndp timer aging 817 ospf timer retransmit 383
ndp timer hello 818 ospf trans-delay 384
48 ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
P poe legacy enable slot 855
poe max-power 855
packet-filter 762 poe max-power slot 856
parity 69 poe mode 856
passive 1004 poe power max-value 857
password 610 poe power-management 857
pause-protection 1050 poe priority 858
peer 338 poe upgrade 859
peer 384 poe-power input-thresh lower 865
peer advertise-community 446 poe-power input-thresh upper 865
peer allow-as-loop 446 poe-power output-thresh lower 866
peer as-number 447 poe-power output-thresh upper 866
peer as-path-acl export 447 poe-profile 870
peer as-path-acl import 448 port 111
peer connect-interface 449 port 1119
peer connect-interface 564 port 1127
peer default-route-advertise 449 port 230
peer description 450 port access vlan 112
peer description 564 port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan 119
peer ebgp-max-hop 451 port hybrid pvid vlan 112
peer enable 451 port hybrid vlan 113
peer filter-policy export 452 port isolate group 230
peer filter-policy import 452 port link-aggregation group 226
peer group 453 port link-type 114
peer ip-prefix export 454 port monitor last 210
peer ip-prefix import 454 port monitor last slot 211
peer mesh-group 565 port monitor-link group 1128
peer minimum-ttl 565 port smart-link group 1120
peer next-hop-local 455 port trunk permit vlan 115
peer password 455 port trunk pvid vlan 115
peer public-as-only 456 port-isolate group 231
peer reflect-client 457 port-security authorization ignore
peer request-sa-enable 566 237
peer route-limit 458 port-security enable 236
peer route-policy export 459 port-security intrusion-mode 236
peer route-policy import 460 port-security max-mac-count 238
peer route-update-interval 460 port-security ntk-mode 239
peer sa-cache-maximum 567 port-security oui 239
peer sa-policy 567 port-security port-mode 240
peer sa-request-policy 568 port-security timer disableport 241
peer timer 461 port-security trap 242
peer-public-key end 926 preference 339
pim 546 preference 385
pim bsr-boundary 547 preference 416
pim dm 548 preference 462
pim neighbor-limit 548 primary accounting 628
pim neighbor-policy 549 primary accounting 650
pim sm 549 primary authentication 629
pim timer hello 550 primary authentication 651
ping 1031 primary authorization 652
poe enable 854 priority 785
poe enable slot 854
Alphabetical Listing of Commands 49
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
priority-trust 785 reset arp attack-list 702
protocol inbound 70 reset bgp 464
protocol inbound 926 reset bgp dampening 465
protocol multicast-mac enable 385 reset bgp flap-info 465
protocol-vlan 121 reset counters interface 212
protocol-vlan vlan slot 120 reset dhcp server conflict 728
public-key-code begin 927 reset dhcp server ip-in-use 728
public-key-code begin 937 reset dhcp server statistics 729
public-key-code end 928 reset dhcp-server 741
public-key-code end 938 reset dhcp-snooping 753
put 1004 reset dns dynamic-host 1015
put 949 reset dot1x statistics 589
pwd 1005 reset garp statistics 180
pwd 950 reset hwtacacs statistics 652
pwd 963 reset igmp group 537
reset igmp-snooping statistics 507
reset ip netstream statistics 1106
Q reset ip routing-table statistics 326
qe monitor 1050 reset ip statistics 153
qe monitor errpkt 1051 reset ipx routing-table statistics
qe monitor errpkt check-time 1051 protocol 175
qe monitor inner-bad 1052 reset ipx statistics 176
qe monitor overflow-threshold 1053 reset isis all 417
qos 787 reset isis peer 417
qos cos-local-precedence-map 788 reset lacp statistics 227
queue-scheduler 789 reset logbuffer 989
quit 1005 reset mac-authentication 269
quit 1020 reset msdp peer 569
quit 950 reset msdp sa-cache 569
reset msdp statistics 570
R reset multicast forwarding-table 519
reset multicast routing-table 520
radius nas-ip 630 reset ndp statistics 819
radius scheme 630 reset ospf 386
radius-scheme 611 reset pim neighbor 552
raw-vlan-id inbound 190 reset pim routing-table 552
rdram 1053 reset radius statistics 631
reboot 1054 reset recycle-bin 964
reboot member 843 reset rrpp statistics 1091
reflect between-clients 462 reset saved-configuration 98
reflector cluster-id 463 reset smart-link packets counter 1121
refresh bgp 463 reset stop-accounting-buffer 632
region-name 278 reset stop-accounting-buffer 653
register-policy 551 reset stp 278
remotehelp 1005 reset tcp statistics 153
remote-probe vlan 814 reset traffic-statistic 790
remove 951 reset trapbuffer 989
rename 951 reset udp statistics 154
rename 963 reset udp-helper packet 873
reset 339 reset vrrp statistics 675
reset acl counter 764 retry 633
reset arp 701
50 ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
retry realtime-accounting 633 secondary authentication 636
retry stop-accounting 635 secondary authentication 655
retry stop-accounting 654 secondary authorization 656
return 1020 security-policy-server 661
revision-level 279 self-service-url 613
ring 1091 send 71
ring enable 1094 server-type 637
rip 340 service-type 614
rip authentication-mode 340 service-type 72
rip input 341 set authentication password 73
rip metricin 342 set backboard enhance 1056
rip metricout 343 set inlink 1133
rip output 343 set-overload 417
rip split-horizon 344 sftp 952
rip version 345 sftp server enable 943
rip work 345 shared-vlan mainboard 193
rmdir 1006 shared-vlan slot 194
rmdir 952 shell 74
rmdir 965 shutdown 105
rmon alarm 901 shutdown 212
rmon event 902 shutdown 570
rmon history 903 silent-interface 387
rmon prialarm 904 silent-interface 418
rmon statistics 906 slave auto-update config 683
route-policy 484 slave restart 684
router id 387 slave switchover 684
router id 466 slave update configuration 685
rrpp domain 1095 smart-link flush enable 1121
rrpp enable 1095 smart-link group 1122
rsa local-key-pair create 928 smart-link group 1128
rsa local-key-pair destroy 929 snmp-agent 883
rsa peer-public-key 930 snmp-agent community 80
rsa peer-public-key 938 snmp-agent community 883
rsa peer-public-key import sshkey snmp-agent group 81
930 snmp-agent group 884
rsa peer-public-key import sshkey snmp-agent local-switch fabricid 885
939 snmp-agent mib-view 886
rule (Advanced ACL) 766 snmp-agent packet max-size 887
rule (Basic ACL) 765 snmp-agent sys-info 887
rule (Layer 2 ACL) 771 snmp-agent target-host 888
rule (user-defined ACL) 773 snmp-agent trap enable 889
snmp-agent trap enable ospf 388
snmp-agent trap ifmib 891
S snmp-agent trap life 891
save 98 snmp-agent trap queue-size 892
schedule reboot at 1054 snmp-agent trap source 892
schedule reboot delay 1055 snmp-agent usm-user 82
scheme 612 snmp-agent usm-user 893
screen-length 70 snmp-host 844
secondary accounting 635 source-policy 554
secondary accounting 654 speed 213
Alphabetical Listing of Commands 51
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
speed 75 stp mcheck 296
speed auto 213 stp mode 297
speedup 214 stp no-agreement-check 297
spf-delay-interval 419 stp pathcost-standard 298
spf-schedule-interval 389 stp point-to-point 300
spf-slice-size 419 stp port priority 301
spt-switch-threshold 551 stp portlog 302
ssh authentication-type default 931 stp portlog all 302
ssh client assign rsa-key 940 stp priority 303
ssh client first-time enable 940 stp region-configuration 303
ssh server authentication-retries 932 stp root primary 304
ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable stp root secondary 305
932 stp root-protection 306
ssh server rekey-interval 933 stp tc-protection 307
ssh server timeout 933 stp tc-protection threshold 308
ssh user 934 stp timer forward-delay 309
ssh user assign rsa-key 934 stp timer hello 309
ssh user authentication-type 935 stp timer max-age 310
ssh user service-type 943 stp timer-factor 311
ssh2 941 stp transmit-limit 312
startup saved-configuration 99 stub 389
state 614 subvlan 136
state 637 summary 346
static-bind ip-address 729 summary 420
static-bind mac-address 730 summary 466
static-rp 554 super 54
static-rpf-peer 570 super password 55
stop-accounting-buffer enable 638 supervlan 137
stop-accounting-buffer enable 657 sysname 1021
stopbits 75 system-view 1021
stp 279
stp bpdu-protection 280
stp bridge-diameter 281
T
stp config-digest-snooping 282 tcp timer fin-timeout 154
stp cost 283 tcp timer syn-timeout 154
stp edged-port 284 tcp window 155
stp interface 285 telnet 76
stp interface config-digest-snooping temperature-limit 1056
285 terminal debugging 1029
stp interface cost 287 terminal debugging 989
stp interface edged-port 288 terminal logging 990
stp interface loop-protection 289 terminal monitor 990
stp interface mcheck 289 terminal trapping 991
stp interface no-agreement-check tftp cluster get 845
290 tftp cluster put 845
stp interface point-to-point 291 tftp get 1009
stp interface port priority 292 tftp put 1009
stp interface root-protection 293 tftp-server 846
stp interface transmit-limit 294 tftp-server acl 1010
stp loop-protection 294 timer 1096
stp max-hops 295 timer 467
52 ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF COMMANDS
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
timer 639 undo synchronization 467
timer 846 undo vrrp vrid 675
timer lsp-max-age 421 unicast-suppression 215
timer lsp-refresh 421 uplink monitor 1057
timer quiet 640 user 1006
timer quiet 657 user privilege level 77
timer realtime-accounting 641 user-interface 76
timer realtime-accounting 658 user-name-format 642
timer response-timeout 641 user-name-format 659
timer response-timeout 659
timer retry 571
timer spf 422
V
time-range 774 verbose 1007
timers 347 virtual-cable-test 216
tracert 1033 vlan 106
traffic-accounting accounting-slot vlan all 108
666 vlan to 107
traffic-accounting traffic-group 667 vlan-assignment-mode 615
traffic-bandwidth 792 vlan-mapping modulo 312
traffic-group 667 vlan-vpn enable 187
traffic-limit 794 vlan-vpn priority 188
traffic-priority 796 vlan-vpn tunnel 313
traffic-red 799 vlan-vpn vid 190
traffic-redirect 800 vlink-peer 390
traffic-redirect inbound ip-group voice vlan 125
1108 voice vlan aging 125
traffic-redirect outbound ip-group voice vlan enable 126
1109 voice vlan legacy 127
traffic-remark 801 voice vlan mac-address 127
traffic-share-across-interface 347 voice vlan mode 128
traffic-slot 668 voice vlan security enable 129
traffic-statistic 803 vrrp method 675
vrrp ping-enable 676
vrrp un-check ttl 677
U vrrp vrid authentication-mode 677
udp-helper enable 874 vrrp vrid preempt-mode 678
udp-helper port 874 vrrp vrid priority 679
udp-helper server 875 vrrp vrid timer advertise 680
umount 965 vrrp vrid track 681
undelete 966 vrrp vrid virtual-ip 682
undo dhcp-relay gateway all 741
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
This guide describes the 3Com® Switch 7750 and how to install hardware,
configure and boot software, and maintain software and hardware. This guide
also provides troubleshooting and support information for your switch.
This guide is intended for Qualified Service personnel who are responsible for
configuring, using, and managing the switches. It assumes a working knowledge
of local area network (LAN) operations and familiarity with communication
protocols that are used to interconnect LANs.
n Always download the Release Notes for your product from the 3Com World Wide
Web site and check for the latest updates to software and product
documentation:
http://www.3com.com
Conventions Table 1 lists icon conventions that are used throughout this guide.
Table 1 Notice Icons
Icon Notice Type Description
n Information note Information that describes important features or
instructions.
c Caution Information that alerts you to potential loss of data
or potential damage to an application, system, or
device.
w Warning Information that alerts you to potential personal
injury.
Related The following manuals offer additional information necessary for managing your
Documentation Switch 7750:
■ Switch 7750 Getting Started Guide — Provides detailed descriptions of the
Switch 7750 hardware, instructions for installing the hardware and software
and important information about how to get started using the Switch 7750.
■ Switch 7750 Configuration Guide— Describes how to configure your Switch
7750 using the supported protocols and CLI commands.
■ Switch 7750 Quick Reference Guide— Provides a brief description of each
command available when using the Switch 7750 Family.
38 ABOUT THIS GUIDE
■ Switch 7750 Release Notes — Contains the latest information about your
product. If information in this guide differs from information in the release
notes, use the information in the Release Notes.
These documents are available in Adobe Acrobat Reader Portable Document
Format (PDF) on the CD-ROM that accompanies your router or on the 3Com
World Wide Web site:
http://www.3com.com/
CLI CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
1
command-privilege level
Syntax command-privilege level level view view command
undo command-privilege view view command
View System view
Parameter level: Command Level. This argument ranges from 0 to 3.
view: Command view. This argument can be any command view the switch
supports.
command: Command to be specified.
Description Use the command-privilege level command to set the level of the specified
command in a specified view.
Use the undo command-privilege view command to restore the level of the
specified command in the specified view to the default.
Commands fall into four command levels: visit, monitor, system, and manage,
which are identified as 0, 1, 2, and 3 respectively. The administrator can change
the level of a command to enable users of specific level to utilize the command.
By default, the ping, tracert, and telnet commands are at the visit level (level 0);
the display and debugging commands are at the monitor level (level 1); all
configuration commands are at the system level (level 2); and FTP/TFTP and file
system related commands are at the manage level (level 3).
Example # Specify the system-view command in user view to be of level 0.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] command-privilege level 0 view shell system-view
display history-command
Syntax display history-command
View Any view
54 CHAPTER 1: CLI CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter None
Description Use the display history-command command to display history commands. All
the history commands are saved in the history command cache. When the history
command cache is full, the old information in it will be overlaid.
Related command: history-command max-size.
Example # Display history commands.
<SW7750> display history-command
system-view
quit
display history-command
super
Syntax super [ level ]
View User view
Parameter level: User level. This argument ranges from 0 to 3 and defaults to 3. If you
execute this command with the level argument not provided, this command
switches the current user level to level 3.
Description Use the super command to switch the current user level to the one identified by
the level argument. If a password is previously set by using the super password [
level level ] { simple | cipher } password command, you need to provide the
password as well to switch to the higher user level. You will remain in the original
user level if you fail to provide the correct password.
n Note that:
■ Users logging into a switch also fall into four levels, each of which
corresponding to one of the command levels. Users at a specific level can only
use the commands at the same level and the commands at the lower levels.
■ You can specify an AUX user to provide a password when he switches from a
lower user level to a higher user level and specify the password by using the
super password [ level level ] { simple | cipher } password command. With a
password configured, an AUX user remains in the original user level if the
password provided is incorrect when the AUX user attempts to switch to a
higher user level. If the password is not configured, an AUX user can switch to
a higher user level directly.
■ A password is necessary for a VTY user to switch to a higher user level. You can
use the super password [ level level ] { simple | cipher } password command
to set the password. With the password not configured, a VTY user is
prompted the message reading "Password is not set" and remains in the
previous level.
■ An AUX user or a VTY user can switch to a lower user level directly regardless
of the password.
super password 55
Related command: super password.
Example # Switch to user level 3.
<SW7750> super 3
Password:
Now user privilege is 3 level, and only those commands whose level is
equal to or less than this level can be used.
Privilege note: 0-VISIT, 1-MONITOR, 2-SYSTEM, 3-MANAGE
super password
Syntax super password [ level level ] { simple | cipher } password
undo super password [ level level ]
View System view
Parameter level: User level. This argument ranges from 1 to 3 and defaults to 3. If you
execute this command with the level argument not provided, this command sets
the password to switch to level 3.
simple: Specifies to provide the password in plain text.
cipher: Specifies to provide the password in encrypted text.
password: Password to be set. If you specify the simple keyword, provide this
argument in plain text. If you specify the cipher keyword, you can provide this
argument in either encrypted text or plain text. In this case, a password containing
no more than 16 characters (such as 123) is regarded to be in plain text and is
converted to the corresponding 24-character encrypted form (such as
7-CZB#/YX]KQ=^Q‘MAF4<1!!) automatically. You can also provide a 24-character
encrypted password directly (such as 7-CZB#/YX]KQ=^Q‘MAF4<1!!). In this case,
you must know its corresponding plain-text password is 123.
Description Use the super password command to set the password for users to switch to a
higher user level. To prevent unauthorized accesses, you can use this command to
require users to provide the password when they switch to a higher user level. For
security purpose, the password a user enters when switching to a higher user level
is not displayed. A user will remain at the original user level if the user has tried
three times to enter the correct password but fails to do this.
Use the undo super password command to cancel the configuration.
Note that no matter what form of the password (plain text or encrypted text) is in,
the password entered for verification must be in plain text.
Example # Set the password to switch from the current user level to user level 3 to
"1234567890".
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
56 CHAPTER 1: CLI CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
[SW7750] super password level 3 simple 1234567890
Updating user(s) information, please wait..........
LOGIN COMMANDS
2
authentication-mode
Syntax authentication-mode { password | scheme [ command-authorization ] |
none }
View User interface view
Parameter password: Authenticates users using the local password.
scheme: Authenticates users locally or remotely using usernames and passwords.
command-authorization: Performs command authorization on TACACS
authentication server.
none: Does not authenticate users.
Description Use the authentication-mode command to specify the authentication mode.
■ If you specify the password keyword to authenticate users using the local
password, remember to set the local password using the set authentication
password { cipher | simple } password command.
■ If you specify the scheme keyword to authenticate users locally or remotely
using usernames and passwords, the actual authentication mode, that is, local
or remote, depends on other related configuration.
■ If this command is executed with the command-authorization keywords
specified, authorization is performed on the TACACS server whenever you
attempt to execute a command, and the command can be executed only when
you pass the authorization. Normally, a TACACS server contains a list of the
commands available to different users.
If you specify to perform local authentication when a user logs in through the
Console port, a user can log into the switch with the password not configured.
But for a VTY user interface, a password is needed for a user to log into the switch
through it under the same circumstance.
By default, users logging in through the Console port are not authenticated,
whereas modem users and Telnet users are authenticated.
c CAUTION: For a VTY user interface, to specify the none keyword or password
keyword for login users, make sure that SSH is not enabled in the user interface.
Otherwise, the configuration fails. Refer to “protocol inbound” on page 70 for
related configuration.
58 CHAPTER 2: LOGIN COMMANDS
Example # Configure to authenticate users using the local password on the AUX interface.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface aux 0
[SW7750-ui-aux0] authentication-mode password
auto-execute command
Syntax auto-execute command text
undo auto-execute command
View User interface view
Parameter text: Command to be executed automatically.
Description Use the auto-execute command command to set the command that is
executed automatically after a user logs in.
Use the undo auto-execute command command to disable the specified
command from being automatically executed.
Normally, the telnet command is specified to be executed automatically to enable
the user to Telnet to a specific network device automatically.
By default, no command is automatically executed.
c CAUTION:
■ The auto-execute command command may cause you unable to perform
common configuration in the user interface, so use it with caution.
■ Before executing the auto-execute command command and save your
configuration, make sure you can log into the switch in other modes and
cancel the configuration.
Example # Configure the telnet 10.110.100.1 command to be executed automatically
after users log into VTY 0.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface vty 0
[SW7750-ui-vty0] auto-execute command telnet 10.110.100.1
% This action will lead to configuration failure through ui-vty0. Ar
e you sure?[Y/N]y
copyright-info enable
Syntax copyright-info enable
undo copyright-info enable
databits 59
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the copyright-info enable command to enable copyright information
displaying.
Use the undo copyright-info enable command to disable copyright
information displaying.
By default, copyright information displaying is disabled.
With copyright information displaying enabled on a switch, the copyright
information is displayed after a user logs into the switch successfully.
These two commands apply to users logging in through the Console port and
Telnet users.
Example # Disable copyright information displaying.
*************************************************************************
* Copyright(c) 2004-2007 3Com Corporation *
* Without the owner’s prior written consent, *
* no decompiling or reverse-switch fabricering shall be allowed. *
*************************************************************************
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] undo copyright-info enable
# After the above configuration, the copyright information is not displayed when a
user logs into the switch successfully, as shown below.
<SW7750>
databits
Syntax databits { 7 | 8 }
undo databits
View User interface view
Parameter 7: Sets the data bits to 7.
8: Sets the data bits to 8.
Description Use the databits command to set the databits for the user interface.
Use the undo databits command to revert to the default data bits.
Execute these two commands in AUX user interface view only.
The default data bits is 8.
60 CHAPTER 2: LOGIN COMMANDS
Example # Set the data bits to 7.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface aux 0
[SW7750-ui-aux0] databits 7
display user-interface
Syntax display user-interface [ type number | number ] [ summary ]
View Any view
Parameter type: User interface type.
number: User interface number.
summary: Displays the summary information about a user interface.
Description Use the display user-interface command to display the information about a
specified user interface or all user interfaces. If the summary keyword is not
specified, this command displays user interface type, absolute/relative user
interface number, transmission speed, available command level, authentication
mode, and physical position. If the summary keyword is specified, this command
displays the number and type of the user interfaces, including those that are in use
and those that are not in use.
Example # Display the information about user interface 0.
<SW7750> display user-interface 0
Idx Type Tx/Rx Modem Privi Auth Int
F 0 AUX 0 9600 - 3 N -
+ : Current user-interface is active.
F : Current user-interface is active and work in async mode.
Idx : Absolute index of user-interface.
Type : Type and relative index of user-interface.
Privi: The privilege of user-interface.
Auth : The authentication mode of user-interface.
Int : The physical location of UIs.
A : Authenticate use AAA.
N : Current UI need not authentication.
P : Authenticate use current UI’s password.
Table 1 Descriptions on the fields of the display user-interface command
Filed Description
+ The user interface is in use.
F The user interface operates in asynchronous mode.
Idx The absolute index of the user interface
Type User interface type and the relative index
Tx/Rx Transmission speed of the user interface
Modem Indicates whether or not a modem is used.
Privi Available command level
display users 61
Table 1 Descriptions on the fields of the display user-interface command
Filed Description
Auth Authentication mode
Int Physical position of the user interface
A The current user is authenticated by AAA.
N Users are not authenticated.
P Users need to provide passwords to pass the authentication.
# Display the summary information about the user interface.
<SW7750>display user-interface summary
User interface type : [AUX]
0:UXXX XXXX
User interface type : [VTY]
8:UUUU X
5 character mode users. (U)
8 UI never used. (X)
5 total UI in use
display users
Syntax display users [ all ]
View Any view
Parameter all: Displays the information about all user interfaces.
Description Use the display users command to display the information about user
interfaces. If you do not specify the all keyword, only the information about the
current user interface is displayed.
Example # Display the information about the current user interface.
<SW7750> display users
UI Delay Type Ipaddress Username Userlevel
F 0 AUX 0 00:00:00 3
1 VTY 0 00:06:08 TEL 192.168.0.3
+ : Current operation user.
F : Current operation user work in async mode.F 0 AUX 0 00:00:00
Table 2 Descriptions on the fields of the display users command
Field Description
F The information is about the current user interface, and the current user
interface operates in asynchronous mode.
UI The numbers in the left sub-column are the absolute user interface indexes, and
those in the right sub-column are the relative user interface indexes.
Delay The period (in seconds) the user interface idles for.
Type User type
IPaddress The IP address form which the user logs in.
Username The login name of the user that logs into the user interface.
62 CHAPTER 2: LOGIN COMMANDS
Table 2 Descriptions on the fields of the display users command
Field Description
Userlevel The level of the commands available to the users logging into the user interface
+ The user interface is in use.
flow-control
Syntax flow-control { hardware | none | software }
undo flow-control
View User interface view
Parameter hardware: Performs hardware flow control.
none: Performs no flow control.
software: Performs software flow control.
Description Use the flow-control command to configure the flow control mode of the user
interface.
Use the undo flow-control command to restore the default flow control mode
of the user interface.
By default, flow control is not performed.
This command can only be executed in AUX user interface view.
Example # Set flow control mode to software flow control.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface aux 0
[SW7750-ui-aux0] flow-control software
free user-interface
Syntax free user-interface [ type ] number
View User view
Parameter type: User interface type.
number: Index of the user interface. This argument can be an absolute user
interface index (if you do not provide the type argument) or a relative user
interface index (if you provide the type argument).
header 63
Description Use the free user-interface command to release a specified user interface. If
you execute this command, the corresponding user interface will be disconnected.
Note that the current user interface cannot be released.
Example # Release user interface VTY 0.
<SW7750> free user-interface vty 0
Are you sure you want to free user-interface vty0 [Y/N]? y
[OK]
After you execute this command, user interface VTY 0 will be disconnected. The
user in it must log in again to connect to the switch.
header
Syntax header [ incoming | login | shell ] text
undo header { incoming | login | shell }
View System view
Parameter Incoming: Sets the login banner for users that log in through modems. If you
specify to authenticate login users, the banner appears after a user passes the
authentication. (The session does not appear in this case.)
login: Sets the login banner. The banner set by this keyword is valid only when
users are authenticated before they log into the switch and appears while the
switch prompts for user name and password.
shell: Sets the session banner, which appears after a session is established. If you
specify to authenticate login users, the banner appears after a user passes the
authentication.
text: Banner to be displayed. If no keyword is specified, this argument is the login
banner. You can provide this argument in two ways. One is to enter the banner in
the same line as the command (A command line can accept up to 255 characters.)
The other is to enter the banner in multiple lines (you can start a new line by
pressing <Enter>,) where you can enter a banner that can contain up to 2000
characters (including the invisible characters). Note that the first character is the
beginning character and the end character of the banner. After entering the end
character, you can press <Enter> to exit the interaction.
Description Use the header command to set the banners that are displayed when a user logs
into a switch. The login banner is displayed on the terminal when the connection
is established. And the session banner is displayed on the terminal if a user
successfully logs in.
Use the undo header command to disable displaying a specific banner or all
banners.
64 CHAPTER 2: LOGIN COMMANDS
Note that if you specify any one of the three keywords without providing the text
argument, the specified keyword will be regarded as the login information.
You can specify the banner in the following three ways, each of which requires
that the first character and the last character of the banner be the same.
■ Enter the banner in multiple lines. If you only type one character in the first line
of a banner, the character and the last character do not act as part of the
banner. The following gives an example of this way.
[SW7750] header shell 0
Input banner text, and quit with the character ’0’.
Welcome!0
When you log in the next time, "Welcome!" is displayed as the banner. The
beginning character and the end character (character 0) do not appear.
■ Enter the banner in multiple lines. If you type multiple characters in the first line
of a banner and the beginning and the end characters of the banner in this line
are not the same, the beginning character is part of the banner. The following
is an example.
[SW7750] header shell hello
Input banner text, and quit with the character ’h’.
my friend !
h
When you log in the next time, "hello" and "my friend !" is displayed respectively
in two lines as the banner. The beginning character "h" appears in the banner.
■ Enter the banner in a single line. You can also specify the banner in a single
line. In this case, the banner does contain the beginning and the end character.
The following is an example.
[SW7750] header shell 0welcome,my friend!0
When you log in the next time, "welcome, my friend!" is displayed as the banner.
Example # Set the session banner.
Option 1: Enter the banner in the same line as the command.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] header shell %SHELL: Hello! Welcome%
(Make sure the beginning and end characters of the banner are the same.)
When you log in the next time, the session banner appears on the terminal as the
following:
[SW7750] quit
<SW7750> quit
Please press ENTER
SHELL: Hello! Welcome
(The beginning and end characters of the banner are not displayed.)
history-command max-size 65
<SW7750>
Option 2: Enter the banner in multiple lines.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] header shell %SHELL:
(Following appears after you press <Enter>:)
Input banner text, and quit with the character ’%’.
Continue entering the banner and end the banner with the character identical
with the beginning character of the banner.
Hello! Welcome %
(Press <Enter>.)
[SW7750]
When you log in the next time, the session banner appears on the terminal as the
following:
[SW7750] quit
<SW7750> quit
Please press ENTER
%SHELL:
(Note that the beginning character of the banner appears.)
Hello! Welcome
<SW7750>
history-command max-size
Syntax history-command max-size value
undo history-command max-size
View User interface view
Parameter value: Size of the history command buffer. This argument ranges from 0 to 256
and defaults to 10. That is, the history command buffer can store 10 commands
by default.
Description Use the history-command max-size command to set the size of the history
command buffer.
Use the undo history-command max-size command to revert to the default
history command buffer size.
66 CHAPTER 2: LOGIN COMMANDS
Example # Set the size of the history command buffer of AUX 0 to 20 to enable it to store
up to 20 commands.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface aux 0
[SW7750-ui-aux0] history-command max-size 20
idle-timeout
Syntax idle-timeout minutes [ seconds ]
undo idle-timeout
View User interface view
Parameter minutes: Number of minutes. This argument ranges from 0 to 35,791.
seconds: Number of seconds. This argument ranges from 0 to 59.
Description Use the idle-timeout command to set the timeout time. The connection to a
user interface is terminated if no operation is performed in the user interface
within the timeout time.
Use the undo idle-timeout command to revert to the default timeout time.
You can use the idle-timeout 0 command to disable the timeout function.
The default timeout time is 10 minutes.
Example # Set the timeout time of AUX 0 to 1 minute.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface aux 0
[SW7750-ui-aux0] idle-timeout 1 0
ip http shutdown
Syntax ip http shutdown
undo ip http shutdown
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the ip http shutdown command to shut down the WEB Server.
Use the undo ip http shutdown command to launch the WEB Server.
lock 67
By default, the WEB Server is launched.
n To improve security and prevent attacks to the unused Sockets, TCP 80 port for
HTTP service will be enabled or disabled after corresponding configurations.
■ TCP 80 port is enabled only after you use the undo ip http shutdown
command to enable the Web server.
■ If you use the ip http shutdown command to disabled the Web server, TCP 80
port is disabled.
Example # Shut down the WEB Server.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip http shutdown
# Launch the WEB Server.
[SW7750] undo ip http shutdown
lock
Syntax lock
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the lock command to lock the current user interface to prevent unauthorized
operations in the user interface.
With the execution of this command, the system prompts to enter and confirm
the password, and then locks the user interface. You can set the password in the
range of 1 to 16 characters.
Enter the correct password to cancel the lock. If your password contains more
than 16 characters, the system will cancel the lock as long as the first 16
characters are matched.
Example # Lock the current user interface.
<SW7750> lock
Password:
Again:
locked !
# In this case, the user interface is locked. To operate the user interface again, you
need to press Enter and provide the password as prompted
Password:
<SW7750>
68 CHAPTER 2: LOGIN COMMANDS
modem
Syntax modem [ call-in | both ]
undo modem [ call-in | both ]
View User interface view
Parameter call-in: Permits call in.
both: Permits both call in and call out.
Description Use the modem command to configure the both attribute of the Modem.
Use the undo modem command to disable the both configuration.
Both call in and call out are allowed when the modem command is executed
without any keyword.
Both call in and call out are disabled when the undo modem command is
executed without any keyword.
note3The command can only be executed in AUX user interface view.
Example # Enable Modem call in and call out.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface aux 0
[SW7750-ui-aux0] modem both
modem auto-answer
Syntax modem auto-answer
undo modem auto-answer
View User interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the modem auto-answer command to set the answer mode to auto
answer.
Use the undo modem auto-answer command to set the answer mode to
manual answer.
By default, manual answer mode is adopted.
note3The command can only be executed in AUX user interface view.
modem timer answer 69
Example # Set the answer mode of Modem to auto answer.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface aux 0
[SW7750>-ui-aux0] modem auto-answer
modem timer answer
Syntax modem timer answer seconds
undo modem timer answer
View User interface view
Parameter seconds: Waiting timeout time, in seconds, ranging from 1 to 60.The default value
is 30 seconds.
Description Use the modem timer answer to configure the carrier detection timeout time
after off-hook during call-in connection setup.
Use the undo modem timer answer command to restore the default timeout
time.
note3The command can only be executed in AUX user interface view.
Example # Set the timeout time to 45 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface aux 0
[SW7750-ui-aux0] modem timer answer 45
parity
Syntax parity { even | mark | none | odd | space }
undo parity
View User interface view
Parameter mark: Performs mark checks.
even: Performs even checks.
none: Does not check.
odd: Performs odd checks.
space: Performs space checks.
70 CHAPTER 2: LOGIN COMMANDS
Description Use the parity command to set the check mode of the user interface.
Use the undo parity command to revert to the default check mode.
note3Use these two commands in AUX user interface view only.
No check is performed by default.
Example # Set to perform even checks.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface aux 0
[SW7750-ui-aux0] parity even
protocol inbound
Syntax protocol inbound { all | ssh | telnet }
View User interface view
Parameter all: Supports both Telnet protocol and SSH protocol.
ssh: Supports SSH protocol.
telnet: Supports Telnet protocol.
Description Use the protocol inbound command to specify the protocols supported by the
user interface.
Both Telnet protocol and SSH protocol are supported by default.
Related command: user-interface.
c CAUTION: To configure a user interface to support SSH, you need to set the
authentication mode to scheme for users to log in successfully. If the
authentication mode is set to password or none for login users, the protocol
inbound ssh command will fail. Refer to “authentication-mode” on page 57 for
the related configuration.
Example # Configure that only SSH protocol is supported in VTY 0.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface vty 0
[SW7750-ui-vty0] protocol inbound ssh
screen-length
Syntax screen-length screen-length
send 71
undo screen-length
View User interface view
Parameter screen-length: Number of lines the screen can contain. This argument ranges from
0 to 512 and defaults to 24.
Description Use the screen-length command to set the number of lines the terminal screen
can contain.
Use the undo screen-length command to revert to the default number of lines.
By default, the terminal screen can contain up to 24 lines.
You can use the screen-length 0 command to disable the function to display
information in pages.
Example # Set the number of lines the terminal screen can contain to 20.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface aux0
[SW7750-ui-aux0] screen-length 20
send
Syntax send { all | number | type number }
View User view
Parameter all: Sends messages to all user interfaces.
type: User interface type.
number: Absolute or relative index of the user interface.
Description Use the send command to send messages to a specified user interface or all user
interfaces.
Example # Send "hello" to all user interfaces.
<SW7750> send all
Enter message, end with CTRL+Z or Enter; abort with CTRL+C:
hello^Z
Send message? [Y/N]y
<SW7750>
***
***
***Message from aux0 to all terminals:
***
hello
72 CHAPTER 2: LOGIN COMMANDS
service-type
Syntax service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory directory ] | lan-access | { ssh | telnet |
terminal }* [ level level ] }
undo service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory ] | lan-access | { ssh | telnet | terminal
}* }
View Local user view
Parameter ftp: Specifies the users to be of FTP type.
ftp-directory directory: Specifies the path for FTP users. The directory argument is
a string up to 64 characters.
lan-access: Specifies the users to be of LAN-access type, which normally means
Ethernet users, such as 802.1x users.
ssh: Specifies the users to be of SSH type.
telnet: Specifies the users to be of Telnet type.
terminal: Makes Terminal services available to users logging in through the
Console port.
level level: Specifies the user level for Telnet users, Terminal users, or SSH users.
The level argument ranges from 0 to 3 and defaults to 0.
Description Use the service-type command to specify the login type and the corresponding
available command level.
Use the undo service-type command to cancel login type configuration.
Commands fall into four command levels: access, monitor, system, and
administration, which are described as follows:
■ Access level: Commands of this level are used to diagnose network and change
the language mode of user interface, such as the ping, tracert, and
language-mode command. The Telnet command is also of this level.
Commands of this level cannot be saved in configuration files.
■ Monitor level: Commands of this level are used to maintain the system, to
debug service problems, and so on. The display and debugging command
are of monitor level. Commands of this level cannot be saved in configuration
files.
■ System level: Commands of this level are used to configure services.
Commands concerning routing and network layers are of system level. You can
utilize network services by using these commands.
■ Administration level: Commands of this level are for the operation of the entire
system and the system supporting modules. Services are supported by these
commands. Commands concerning file system, file transfer protocol (FTP),
set authentication password 73
trivial file transfer protocol (TFTP), downloading using XModem, user
management, and level setting are of administration level.
Example # Configure commands of level 0 are available to the users logging in using the
user name of "zbr".
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] local-user zbr
[SW7750-luser-zbr] service-type telnet level 0
# To verify the above configuration, you can quit the system, log in again using the
user name of "zbr", and then list the available commands, as listed in the
following.
[SW7750] quit
<SW7750> ?
User view commands:
cluster Run cluster command
debugging Enable system debugging functions
language-mode Specify the language environment
ping Send echo messages
quit Exit from current command view
super Privilege the current user a specified priority
level
telnet Establish one TELNET connection
tracert Trace route function
undo Cancel current setting
set authentication password
Syntax set authentication password { cipher | simple } password
undo set authentication password
View User interface view
Parameter cipher: Specifies to display the local password in encrypted text when you display
the current configuration.
simple: Specifies to display the local password in plain text when you display the
current configuration.
password: Password. The password must be in plain text if you specify the simple
keyword in the set authentication password command. If you specify the
cipher keyword, the password can be in either encrypted text or plain text. When
you enter the password in plain text containing up to 16 characters (such as 123),
the system converts the password to the corresponding 24-character encrypted
password (such as 7-CZB#/YX]KQ=^Q‘MAF4<1!!). Make sure you are aware of
the corresponding plain password if you enter the password in ciphered text (such
as 7-CZB#/YX]KQ=^Q ‘MAF4<1!!).
Description Use the set authentication password command to set the local password.
74 CHAPTER 2: LOGIN COMMANDS
Use the undo set authentication password command to remove the local
password.
Note that only plain text passwords are expected when users are authenticated.
n By default, modem users and Telnet users need to provide their passwords to log
in. If no password is set, the "Login password has not been set !" message appears
on the terminal when users log in.
Example # Set the local password of VTY 0 to "123".
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface vty 0
[SW7750-ui-vty0] set authentication password simple 123
shell
Syntax shell
undo shell
View User interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the shell command to make terminal services available for the user interface.
Use the undo shell command to make terminal services unavailable to the user
interface.
By default, terminal services are available in all user interfaces.
Note the following when using the undo shell command:
■ This command is available in all user interfaces except the AUX (Console) user
interface.
■ This command is unavailable in the current user interface.
■ This command prompts for confirmation when being executed in any valid user
interface.
Example # Log into user interface 0 and make terminal services unavailable in VTY 0
through VTY 4.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface vty 0 4
[SW7750-ui-vty0-4] undo shell
% Disable ui-vty0-4 , are you sure ? [Y/N] y
speed 75
speed
Syntax speed speed-value
undo speed
View User interface view
Parameter speed-value: Transmission speed (in bps). This argument can be 300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200, 38,400, 57,600, and 115,200 and defaults to 9,600.
Description Use the speed command to set the transmission speed of the user interface.
Use the undo speed command to revert to the default transmission speed.
note3Use these two commands in the AUX user interface view only.
Example # Set the transmission speed of the AUX user interface to 115,200 bps.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface aux 0
[SW7750-ui-aux0] speed 115200
stopbits
Syntax stopbits { 1 | 1.5 | 2 }
undo stopbits
View User interface view
Parameter 1: Sets the stop bits to 1.
1.5: Sets the stop bits to 1.5.
2: Sets the stop bits to 2.
Description Use the stopbits command to set the stop bits of the user interface.
Use the undo stopbits command to revert to the default stop bits.
note3Use these two commands in the AUX user interface only.
By default, the stop bits is 1.
n ■
■
The stopbits cannot be 1.5 on an Switch 7750 Ethernet switch.
Changing the stop bits value of the switch to a value different from that of the
terminal emulation utility does not affect the communication between them.
76 CHAPTER 2: LOGIN COMMANDS
Example # Set the stop bits to 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface aux 0
[SW7750-ui-aux0] stopbits 2
telnet
Syntax telnet { hostname | ip-address } [ service-port ]
View User view
Parameter hostname: Host name of the remote switch. You can use the ip host command to
assign a host name to a switch.
ip-address: IP address of the remote switch.
service-port: TCP port number of the port that provides Telnet service on the
switch. This argument ranges from 0 to 65,535.
Description Use the telnet command to Telnet to another switch from the current switch to
manage the former remotely. You can terminate a Telnet connection by pressing
<Ctrl + K> or by executing the quit command.
The default TCP port number is 23.
Related command: display tcp status, and ip host.
Example # Telnet to the switch with the host name of 3Com2 and IP address of
129.102.0.1 from the current switch (with the host name of 3Com1).
<SW77501> telnet 129.102.0.1
Trying 129.102.0.1 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 129.102.0.1 ...
*******************************************************************
* Copyright(c) 2004-2007 3Com Corporation *
* Without the owner’s prior written consent, *
* no decompiling or reverse-switch fabricering shall be allowed. *
*******************************************************************
<SW77502>
user-interface
Syntax user-interface [ type ] first-number [ last-number ]
View System view
Parameter type: User interface type.
user privilege level 77
first-number: User interface index, which identifies the first user interface to be
configured.
last-number: User interface index, which identifies the last user interface to be
configured.
Description Use the user-interface command to enter one or more user interface views to
perform configuration.
Example # Enter VTY 0 user interface view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface vty 0
[SW7750-ui-vty0]
user privilege level
Syntax user privilege level level
undo user privilege level
View User interface view
Parameter level: Command level ranging from 0 to 3.
Description Use the user privilege level command to configure the command level
available to the users logging into the user interface.
Use the undo user privilege level command to revert to the default command
level.
By default, the commands of level 3 are available to the users logging into the
AUX user interface. The commands of level 0 are available to the users logging
into VTY user interfaces.
Example # Configure that commands of level 0 are available to the users logging into VTY
0.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface vty 0
[SW7750-ui-vty0] user privilege level 0
# You can verify the above configuration by Telneting to VTY 0 and displaying the
available commands, as listed in the following.
<SW7750> ?
User view commands:
cluster Run cluster command
debugging Enable system debugging functions
language-mode Specify the language environment
ping Send echo message
78 CHAPTER 2: LOGIN COMMANDS
quit Exit from current command view
super Privilege current user a specified priority level
telnet Establish one TELNET connection
tracert Trace route function
undo Cancel current setting
COMMANDS FOR USER CONTROL
3
acl
Syntax acl acl-number { inbound | outbound }
undo acl { inbound | outbound }
View User interface view
Parameter acl-number: ACL number ranging from 2,000 to 3,999.
inbound: Filters the users Telneting to the current switch.
outbound: Filters the users Telneting to other switches from the current switch.
Description Use the acl command to apply an ACL to filter Telnet users.
Use the undo acl command to disable the switch from filtering Telnet users using
the ACL.
By default, Telnet users are not filtered by ACLs.
Example # Apply ACL 2000 to filter users Telneting to the current switch (assuming that
ACL 2,000 already exists.)
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface vty 0 4
[SW7750-ui-vty0-4] acl 2000 inbound
free web-users
Syntax free web-users { all | user-id user-id | user-name user-name }
View User view
Parameter all: Specifies all Web users.
user-id: Web user ID, an eight-digit hexadecimal number.
user-name: User name of the Web user. This argument can contain 1 to 80
characters.
80 CHAPTER 3: COMMANDS FOR USER CONTROL
Description Use the free web-users command to disconnect a specified Web user or all Web
users by force.
Example # Disconnect all Web users by force.
<SW7750> free web-users all
ip http acl
Syntax ip http acl acl-number
undo ip http acl
View System view
Parameter acl-number: ACL number ranging from 2000 to 2999.
Description Use the ip http acl command to apply an ACL to filter Web users.
Use the undo ip http acl command to disable the switch from filtering Web
users using the ACL.
By default, the switch does not use the ACL to filter Web users.
Example # Apply ACL 2000 to filter Web users (assuming that ACL 2000 already exists.)
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip http acl 2000
snmp-agent community
Syntax snmp-agent community { read | write } community-name [ mib-view
view-name | acl acl-number ]*
undo snmp-agent community community-name
View System view
Parameter read: Specifies that the community has read-only permission in the specified view.
Write: Specifies that the community has read/write permission in the specified
view.
community-name: Community name. A string ranges from 1 to 32 characters.
mib-view: Sets the name of the MIB view accessible to the community.
view-name: MIB view name, 1 to 32 characters long.
snmp-agent group 81
acl acl-number: Specifies the ACL number. The acl-number argument ranges from
2,000 to 2,999.
Description Use the snmp-agent community command to set a community name and to
enable users to access the switch through SNMP. You can also optionally use this
command to apply an ACL to filter network management users.
Use the undo snmp-agent community command to cancel community-related
configuration for the specified community.
By default, SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c access a switch by community names.
Example # Set the community name to "h123", enable users to access the switch in the
name of the community (with read-only permission), and apply ACL 2,000 to filter
network management users (assuming that ACL 2000 already exists.)
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent community read h123 acl 2000
snmp-agent group
Syntax snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name [ read-view read-view ] [
write-view write-view ] [ notify-view notify-view ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name
snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ] [ read-view
read-view ] [ write-view write-view ] [ notify-view notify-view ] [ acl acl-number
]
undo snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ]
View System view
Parameter v1: Specifies to adopt v1 security scheme.
v2c: Specifies to adopt v2c security scheme.
v3: Specifies to adopt v3 security scheme.
group-name: Group name. This argument can be of 1 to 32 characters.
authentication: Specifies to authenticate SNMP data without encrypting the
data.
privacy: Authenticates and encrypts packets.
read-view: Sets a read-only view.
read-view: Name of the view to be set to read-only. This argument can be of 1 to
32 characters.
82 CHAPTER 3: COMMANDS FOR USER CONTROL
write-view: Sets a readable & writable view.
write-view: Name of the view to be set to readable & writable. This argument can
be of 1 to 32 characters.
notify-view: Sets a notifying view.
notify-view: Name of the view to be set to a notifying view. This argument can be
of 1 to 32 characters.
acl acl-number: Specifies an ACL. The acl-number argument ranges from 2,000 to
2,999.
Description Use the snmp-agent group command to create a SNMP group. You can also
optionally use this command to apply an ACL to filter network management users.
Use the undo snmp-agent group command to remove a specified SNMP
group.
By default, the snmp-agent group v3 group-name command is provided without
the authentication and privacy keyword. That is, the switch does not
authenticate or encrypt the specified group.
Example # Create a SNMP group named "h123" and apply ACL 2001 to filter network
management users (assuming that ACL 2001 already exists).
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent group v1 h123 acl 2001
snmp-agent usm-user
Syntax snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name
snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name [ authentication-mode {
md5 | sha } auth-password ] [ privacy des56 priv-password ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name { local | switch fabricid
switch fabricid-string }
View System view
Parameter v1: Specifies to adopt V1 security scheme.
v2c: Specifies to adopt V2 security scheme.
v3: Specifies to adopt V3 security scheme.
user-name: User name. This argument can be of 1 to 32 characters.
snmp-agent usm-user 83
group-name: Group name the user corresponds to. This argument can be of 1 to
32 characters.
authentication-mode: Specifies to authenticate users.
md5: Specifies the authentication protocol to be HMAC-MD5-96.
sha: Specifies the authentication protocol to be HMAC-SHA-96.
auth-password: Authentication password. This argument can be of 1 to 64
characters.
privacy: Specifies to encrypt data.
des56: Specifies the encrypting protocol to be DES.
priv-password: Encrypting password string. This argument can be of 1 to 64
characters.
acl acl-number: Specifies the ACL number. The acl-number argument ranges from
2,000 to 2,999.
local: Specifies the user to be a local user entity.
switch fabricid: Specifies the ID of the switch fabric associated with the user.
switch fabricid-string: Engine ID, a string comprising 10 to 64 characters.
Description Use the snmp-agent usm-user command to add a user to a specified SNMP
group. You can also optionally use this command to apply an ACL to filter network
management users.
Use the undo snmp-agent usm-user command to remove a user from the
corresponding SNMP group. The operation also frees the user from the
corresponding ACL-related configuration.
Example # Add the user named "3com" to the SNMP group named "3comgroup",
specifying to authenticate the user, specifying the authentication protocol to be
HMAC-MD5-96, the authentication password to be "3Com", and applying ACL
2002 to filter network management users (assuming that ACL 2002 already
exists).
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent usm-user v3 3com 3comgroup authentication-mode m
d5 3Com acl 2002
84 CHAPTER 3: COMMANDS FOR USER CONTROL
CONFIGURATION FILE MANAGEMENT
4 COMMANDS
display current-configuration
Syntax display current-configuration [ [ interface [ interface-type [ interface-number ]
] | configuration [ configuration ] ] [ | { begin | exclude | include } text ] ] | [ vlan
[ vlan-id ] ]
View Any view
Parameter interface: View the configuration information of interfaces.
interface-type: Type of the interface, which may be Aux, GigabitEthernet, NULL,
Vlan-interface, or M-Ethernet.
interface-number: Number of the interface.
configuration configuration: View the configuration information excluding the
port information. The value of the configuration argument is the keyword of the
configuration on the switch, such as:
■ acl-adv: Views the configuration information of advanced ACLs.
■ ospf: Views the configuration information of the OSPF protocol.
■ system: Views the name of the host.
■ timerange: Views the configuration information of the time range.
The optional configuration keywords are available only after the related functions
are enabled on the switch.
vlan [ vlan-id ]: Displays the VLAN configuration in the system. If the vlan-id
argument is not specified, the configuration information of all VLANs in the
system is displayed; if the vlan-id argument is specified, the configuration
information of the specified VLAN is displayed.
|: Filters the configuration information to be output via the regular expression.
begin: Displays the configuration beginning with the specified characters.
exclude: Displays the configuration excluding the specified characters.
include: Displays the configuration including the specified characters.
text: Text included in a configuration item, expressed in a regular expression. .
86 CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Table 3 Description on the special characters in the regular expression
Character Meaning Description
_ Underline, which can represent the If the first character of a regular
following characters: (^|$|[,{}]), space, expression is not "_", the number of
starting character, and ending the underline characters in a regular
character. expression is only limited by the length
of a command line.
If the first character of a regular
expression is "_", there can be up to
four other successive underline
characters following it.
If the underline characters are not
successive, only the first underline
character group is matched. The
subsequent underline groups are
ignored.
^ Matches the character string starting ^user matches the configuration
with the subsequent sub-expression starting with "user"
$ Matches the character string starting user$ matches the configuration
with the sub-expression before $ information ending with "user"
( Left parenthesis, push-in-stack signal You are not recommended to use this
character in a regular expression.
. Period, a wildcard It can match any single character
excluding a line feed
* Asterisk. It means that the preceding zo* matches "z" and "zoo".
sub-expression can be matched for
zero or multiple times.
+ Plus sign. It means that the preceding zo+ matches "zo" and "zoo", but not
sub-expression can be matched for one "z".
or multiple times.
Description Use the display current-configuration command to display the currently
effective configuration parameters of the switch.
If some running configuration parameters are the same with the default
operational parameters, they will not be displayed.
If a user needs to authenticate whether the configurations are correct after
finishing a set of configuration, the display current-configuration command
can be used to display the running parameters. Although the user has configured
some parameters, but the related functions are not effective, they are not
displayed.
When there is much configuration information, you can use the regular expression
to filter the output information.
Related command: save, reset saved-configuration and display saved-configuration.
Example # View the running configuration parameters of the switch.
<SW7750> display current-configuration
#
sysname 3Com
#
display current-configuration 87
ftp server enable
#
local-server nas-ip 127.0.0.1
#
domain default enable system
#
nat address-group 0 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2
nat address-group 1 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.3
nat blacklist start slot 2
nat blacklist mode all
nat blacklist limit amount 202
#
temperature-limit 0 10 70
temperature-limit 1 10 70
temperature-limit 2 10 80
temperature-limit 3 10 70
#
poe power max-value 2400
#
attack-protection disable-defaultroute
#
password-control login-attempt 3 exceed lock-time 120
#
traffic-accounting traffic-group somegroup
network 1.1.0.0 255.255.0.0
#
radius scheme system
primary authentication 127.0.0.1 1645
primary accounting 127.0.0.1 1646
user-name-format without-domain
#
domain new
vlan-assignment-mode integer
access-limit disable
state active
idle-cut disable
self-service-url disable
messenger time disable
accounting-mode traffic
traffic-group somegroup rate 2
domain system
vlan-assignment-mode integer
access-limit disable
state active
idle-cut disable
self-service-url disable
messenger time disable
#
stp instance 0 PortLog
stp TC-protection enable
#
acl number 2001
rule 0 deny
#
vlan 1
description TestVlan1
igmp-snooping enable
#
88 CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
vlan 2
#
vlan 5
#
vlan 6
#
vlan 7
#
interface Vlan-interface1
ip address 192.168.0.68 255.255.255.0
nat outbound 2001 address-group 0 slot 2
#
interface Aux0/0/0
#
interface M-Ethernet0/0/0
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/3
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/4
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/1
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/2
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/3
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/4
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/5
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/6
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/7
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/8
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/9
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/10
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/11
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/12
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/13
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/14
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/15
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/16
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/17
#
display current-configuration 89
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/18
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/19
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/20
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/21
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/22
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/23
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/24
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/25
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/26
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/27
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/28
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/29
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/30
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/31
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/32
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/33
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/34
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/35
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/36
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/37
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/38
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/39
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/40
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/41
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/42
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/43
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/44
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/45
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/46
#
90 CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/47
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/48
port access vlan 300
#
interface RprGE1/0/1
#
interface RprGE1/0/1.1
#
interface RprGE1/0/1.2
#
interface NULL0
#
interface LoopBack103
ip address 103.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
rip
default cost 5
network 103.0.0.0
network 101.0.0.0
network 100.0.0.0
network 192.168.0.0
#
traffic-accounting accounting-slot 2
traffic-slot 1
accounting enable
#
user-interface aux 0
user-interface vty 0 4
authentication-mode none
user privilege level 3
#
return
# Display the configuration information that takes effect on VLAN1.
<SW7750> display current-configuration vlan 1
#
vlan 1
description TestVlan1
igmp-snooping enable
#
return
# Display configuration information lines containing 10*. * indicates that the
number zero before * can be displayed multiple times consecutively or is not
displayed.
<SW7750> display current-configuration | include 10*
local-server nas-ip 127.0.0.1
nat address-group 0 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2
nat address-group 1 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.3
temperature-limit 0 10 70
temperature-limit 1 10 70
temperature-limit 2 10 80
temperature-limit 3 10 70
password-control login-attempt 3 exceed lock-time 120
display current-configuration 91
network 1.1.0.0 255.255.0.0
primary authentication 127.0.0.1 1645
primary accounting 127.0.0.1 1646
acl number 2001
vlan 1
description TestVlan1
interface Vlan-interface1
ip address 192.168.0.68 255.255.255.0
nat outbound 2001 address-group 0 slot 2
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/1
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/10
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/11
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/12
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/13
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/14
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/15
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/16
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/17
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/18
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/19
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/21
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/31
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/41
interface RprGE1/0/1
interface RprGE1/0/1.1
interface RprGE1/0/1.2
interface LoopBack103
ip address 103.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
network 103.0.0.0
network 101.0.0.0
network 100.0.0.0
network 192.168.0.0
traffic-slot 1
# Display the configuration information starting with "user".
<SW7750> display current-configuration | include ^user
user-interface aux 0
user-interface vty 0 4
# Display the configuration information excluding port configuration.
<SW7750> display current-configuration configuration
#
sysname 3Com
#
ftp server enable
#
local-server nas-ip 127.0.0.1
#
domain default enable system
#
nat address-group 0 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2
nat address-group 1 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.3
nat blacklist start slot 2
nat blacklist mode all
nat blacklist limit amount 202
92 CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
#
temperature-limit 0 10 70
temperature-limit 1 10 70
temperature-limit 2 10 80
temperature-limit 3 10 70
#
poe power max-value 2400
#
attack-protection disable-defaultroute
#
password-control login-attempt 3 exceed lock-time 120
#
traffic-accounting traffic-group somegroup
network 1.1.0.0 255.255.0.0
#
radius scheme system
primary authentication 127.0.0.1 1645
primary accounting 127.0.0.1 1646
user-name-format without-domain
#
domain new
vlan-assignment-mode integer
access-limit disable
state active
idle-cut disable
self-service-url disable
messenger time disable
accounting-mode traffic
traffic-group somegroup rate 2
domain system
vlan-assignment-mode integer
access-limit disable
state active
idle-cut disable
self-service-url disable
messenger time disable
#
stp instance 0 PortLog
stp TC-protection enable
#
acl number 2001
rule 0 deny
#
rip
default cost 5
network 103.0.0.0
network 101.0.0.0
network 100.0.0.0
network 192.168.0.0
#
traffic-accounting accounting-slot 2
traffic-slot 1
accounting enable
#
user-interface aux 0
user-interface vty 0 4
authentication-mode none
user privilege level 3
display saved-configuration 93
#
return
# Display the configuration information of all the VLANs.
<SW7750> display current-configuration vlan
#
vlan 1
description TestVlan1
igmp-snooping enable
#
vlan 2
#
vlan 5
#
vlan 6
#
vlan 7
#
return
display saved-configuration
Syntax display saved-configuration
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display saved-configuration command to display the configuration
files saved in the switch flash memory.
If the Ethernet switch cannot work normally after being booted, you can use this
command to view the booting configuration of this Ethernet switch.
Related command: save, reset saved-configuration, and display current-configuration.
Example # Display the configuration files saved in the flash memory.
<SW7750> display saved-configuration
#
sysname 3Com
#
local-server nas-ip 127.0.0.1
#
domain default enable system
#
temperature-limit 0 10 70
temperature-limit 1 10 70
temperature-limit 2 10 80
temperature-limit 3 10 70
#
poe power max-value 2400
94 CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
#
radius scheme system
primary authentication 127.0.0.1 1645
primary accounting 127.0.0.1 1646
user-name-format without-domain
#
domain system
vlan-assignment-mode integer
access-limit disable
state active
idle-cut disable
self-service-url disable
messenger time disable
#
stp TC-protection enable
#
vlan 1
#
interface Vlan-interface1
ip address 192.168.0.68 255.255.255.0
#
interface Aux0/0/0
#
interface M-Ethernet0/0/0
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/3
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/4
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/1
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/2
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/3
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/4
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/5
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/6
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/7
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/8
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/9
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/10
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/11
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/12
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/13
display saved-configuration 95
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/14
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/15
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/16
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/17
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/18
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/19
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/20
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/21
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/22
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/23
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/24
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/25
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/26
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/27
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/28
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/29
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/30
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/31
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/32
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/33
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/34
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/35
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/36
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/37
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/38
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/39
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/40
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/41
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/42
96 CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/43
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/44
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/45
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/46
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/47
#
interface GigabitEthernet3/0/48
#
interface RprGE1/0/1
#
interface RprGE1/0/1.1
#
interface RprGE1/0/1.2
#
interface NULL0
#
user-interface aux 0
user-interface vty 0 4
authentication-mode none
user privilege level 3
#
return
The mentioned-above information describes global configuration, port
configuration, and user interface configuration respectively.
display this
Syntax display this
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display this command to display the configuration of the current view.
After finishing configuration in the current view, you can use this command to
display parameters that take effect.
If the configuration parameters are the same as default parameters, the system
does not display such parameters. The system does not display the configuration
parameters that do not take effect, either.
Associated configuration of the interface is displayed when executing the
command in different interface views; related configuration of the protocol view is
displayed when executing this command in different protocol views; and all the
configuration of the protocol view is displayed when executing this command in
protocol sub-views.
display startup 97
Related command: save, reset saved-configuration, display current-configuration, and display
current-configuration
Example # Display the configuration parameters that take effect in system view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] display this
#
sysname 3Com
#
ftp server enable
#
local-server nas-ip 127.0.0.1
#
domain default enable system
#
nat address-group 0 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2
nat address-group 1 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.3
nat blacklist start slot 2
nat blacklist mode all
nat blacklist limit amount 202
#
temperature-limit 0 10 70
temperature-limit 1 10 70
temperature-limit 2 10 80
temperature-limit 3 10 70
#
poe power max-value 2400
#
attack-protection disable-defaultroute
#
password-control login-attempt 3 exceed lock-time 120
#
return
display startup
Syntax display startup
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display startup command to display the configuration file names used
for the current and the next start-ups.
Related command: startup saved-configuration.
Example # Display the configuration filenames used for the current and the next start-ups.
<SW7750> display startup
MainBoard:
98 CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Startup saved-configuration file: flash:/config.cfg
Next startup saved-configuration file: flash:/config.cfg
reset saved-configuration
Syntax reset saved-configuration
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset saved-configuration command to erase configuration files from
the flash memory of the Ethernet Switch.
Perform this command with cautious. It is suggested to consult technical support
personnel first.
Generally, this command is used in the following situations:
■ After upgrade of software, configuration files in flash memory may not match
the new version’s software. Perform reset saved-configuration command to
erase the old configuration files.
■ If a used Ethernet Switch is applied to the new circumstance and the original
configuration files cannot meet the new requirements, the Ethernet Switch
should be configured again. Erase the original configuration files for
reconfiguration.
If the configuration files do not exist in the flash memory when Ethernet Switch is
electrified and initialized, it will enter setup switch view automatically.
Related command: save, display current-configuration, display saved-configuration.
Example # Erase the configuration files from the flash memory of the Ethernet Switch.
<SW7750> reset saved-configuration
The saved configuration will be erased.
Are you sure?[Y/N]y
Configuration in flash memory is being cleared.
Please wait ...
....
Configuration in flash memory is cleared.
save
Syntax save [ file-name | safely ]
View User view
startup saved-configuration 99
Parameter file-name: File name with the extension name ".cfg", a character string of 5 to 56
characters.
safely: Saves the configuration files to the flash memory in the safely mode.
Description Use the save command to save the current configuration files to the Flash
memory.
After finishing a group of configurations and achieving corresponding functions,
user should remember to get the current configuration files stored in the flash
memory.
The configured files can be saved in one of the following two ways:
■ Fast saving: in this mode, the configuration files are saved fast. However, if
restart or power-off occurs in the saving procedure, the configuration files will
be lost.
■ Safely saving: in this mode, the configuration files are saved slowly. However,
even if restart or power-off occurs in the saving procedure, the configuration
files still exist.
If the save command is executed without the safely keyword, the configuration
files are saved in the fast saving mode. If the save command is executed with the
safely keyword, the configuration files are saved in the safely saving mode.
You are recommended to adopt the fast saving mode in the conditions of stable
power and adopt the safely saving mode in the conditions of unstable power or
remote maintenance.
Related command: reset saved-configuration, display current-configuration, display
saved-configuration.
Example # Get the current configuration files stored in the flash memory.
<SW7750> save
The configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure?[Y/N]y
Please input the file name(*.cfg)[flash:/config.cfg]:123.cfg
.......
Now saving current configuration to the device.
Saving configuration flash:/123.cfg. Please wait...
...
Configuration is saved to flash memory successfully.
startup saved-configuration
Syntax startup saved-configuration { cfgfile | device-name }
View User view
100 CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Parameter cfgfile: The name of the configuration file. It is a string with a length of 5 to 56
characters.
device-name: Name of the current storage device.
Description Use the startup saved-configuration command to configure the configuration
file used for enabling the system for the next time.
Note that the configuration file must use ".cfg" as its extension name and is saved
under the root directory of the Flash.
Related command: display startup.
Example # Configure the configuration file for the next start-up as config.cfg.
<SW7750> startup saved-configuration config.cfg ......
VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
5
broadcast-suppression
Syntax broadcast-suppression { ratio | pps pps }
undo broadcast-suppression
View VLAN view
Parameter ratio: Specifies the bandwidth ratio for the maximum broadcast traffic in specific
VLAN. Its value ranges from 1 to 100 and defaults to 100. The smaller the ratio is,
the less the allowed broadcast traffic can pass.
pps pps: Specifies the maximum number of broadcast packets that can pass
through a specific VLAN per second. Its value ranges from 1 to 148800.
Description Use the broadcast-suppression command to suppress broadcast traffic through
a VLAN.
Use the undo broadcast-suppression command to reset the allowed broadcast
traffic through a VLAN to the default value.
By default, the switch does not suppress broadcast traffic.
When the actual broadcast traffic exceeds the specified value, the system will
discard the extra packets so that the bandwidth occupied by broadcast traffic can
be kept within a specific ratio to ensure normal network operation.
The modules of Switch 7750s support different broadcast storm suppression
modes, as listed in Table 4.
Table 4 Broadcast storm suppression modes and module types
Broadcast storm
suppression mode Type A card Non-Type-A card
VLAN pps suppression Supported Not supported
VLAN bandwidth ratio Supported Not supported
suppression
n Type A modules include 3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A, 3C16858, 3C16859,
and 32Gbps and 64Gbps Switch Fabrics.
102 CHAPTER 5: VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
A VLAN only supports one broadcast storm suppression mode at one time. If you
configure broadcast storm suppression modes multiple times for a VLAN, the
latest configuration will overwrite the previous configuration.
Example # Allow broadcast traffic to occupy 20% bandwidth in VLAN2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 2
[SW7750-vlan2] broadcast-suppression 20
description
Syntax description { string | text }
undo description
View VLAN view, VLAN interface view
Parameter string: Contiguous string describing the VLAN. It contains 1 to 32 characters
without space.
text: Text describing the VLAN interface. It contains 1 to 80 characters and space is
allowed.
Description Use the description command to set the description string or text for the current
VLAN or VLAN interface.
Use the undo description command to restore the default description string or
text.
By default, the description string of a VLAN is its VLAN ID, for example, "VLAN
0001"; the descriptive text of a VLAN interface is its name, for example,
"Vlan-interface 1 Interface".
Related command: display vlan, and display interface Vlan-interface.
Example # Specify the description string of VLAN 1 as "research".
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 1
[SW7750-vlan1] description research
display interface Vlan-interface
Syntax display interface Vlan-interface [ vlan-id ]
View Any view
display vlan 103
Parameter vlan-id: ID of the specific VLAN interface.
Description Use the display interface Vlan-interface command to display the related
information of a VLAN interface, including, physical state and link state of the
VLAN interface, format of the sent frames, MAC address, IP address and subnet
mask of the VLAN interface, and descriptive string and MTU of the VLAN interface
If the vlan-id argument is specified, the information about the specified VLAN
interface is displayed; if the vlan-id argument is not specified, the information
about all the created VLAN interfaces is displayed.
Related command: interface Vlan-interface.
Example # Display the information about Vlan-interface 2.
<SW7750> display interface Vlan-interface 2
Vlan-interface2 current state :DOWN
Line protocol current state :DOWN
IP Sending Frames’ Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 0012-a990-2241
Internet Address is 10.1.1.1/24 Primary
Description : Vlan-interface2 Interface
The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Table 5 Description of the fields of the display interface Vlan-interface command
Field Description
Vlan-interface2 current state Current state of the VLAN interface
Line protocol current state Current state of the Line protocol
IP Sending Frames’ Format Format of the frames that IP sends
Hardware address MAC address corresponding to the VLAN interface
Internet Address IP address corresponding to the VLAN interface
Description Description on the VLAN interface
The Maximum Transmit Unit Maximum transmission unit
display vlan
Syntax display vlan [ vlan-id [ to vlan-id ] | all | static | dynamic ]
View Any view
Parameter vlan-id: Specifies the VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
to: Specifies multiple contiguous VLAN IDs.
all: Specifies to display the information about all the VLANs.
static: Specifies to display the VLANs created statically.
dynamic: Specifies to display the VLANs created dynamically.
Description Use the display vlan command to display the information about specified VLANs
or all VLANs.
104 CHAPTER 5: VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
If the vlan-id argument or the all keyword is specified, the information about the
specified VLANs or the all VLANs is displayed, including VLAN ID, VLAN type
(dynamic or static), routing function status (If enabled, the primary IP address and
mask are displayed), VLAN description and VLAN name, VLAN broadcast storm
suppression ratio, and VLAN member ports.
If no argument or keyword is specified, this command displays the list of all the
existing VLANs. If the dynamic or static keyword is specified, this command
displays the list of the VLANs that are created dynamically or statically.
Related command: vlan.
Example # Display the information about VLAN 2.
<SW7750> display vlan 2
VLAN ID: 2
VLAN Type: static
Route Interface: not configured
Description: VLAN 0002
Name: VLAN 0002
Broadcast MAX-ratio: 100
Tagged Ports: none
Untagged Ports:
Ethernet3/0/30
Table 6 Description of the fields of the display vlan command
Field Description
VLAN ID VLAN ID
VLAN Type VLAN type (dynamic or static)
Route Interface Whether the routing interface function is enable for this VLAN
Description Description on the VLAN
Name VLAN name
Broadcast MAX-ratio VLAN broadcast storm suppression ratio
Tagged Ports The ports that keep packets’ tags when sending packets
Untagged Ports The ports that strip off packet tags when sending packets
interface Vlan-interface
Syntax interface Vlan-interface vlan-id
undo interface Vlan-interface vlan-id
View System view
Parameter vlan-id: ID of the VLAN interface, in the range of 1 to 4,094.
Description Use the interface Vlan-interface command to create a VLAN interface or enter
VLAN interface view.
name 105
Use the undo interface Vlan-interface command to delete the VLAN
interface.
Related command: display interface Vlan-interface.
Example # Enter Vlan-interface 1 view
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1]
name
Syntax name string
undo name
View VLAN view
Parameter string: String that refers to the VLAN name. It contains 1 to 32 characters.
Parameter Use the name command to assign a name to the current VLAN.
Use the undo name command to restore to the default VLAN name.
By default, the name of a VLAN is its VLAN ID, for example, "VLAN 0001".
Example # Specify the name of VLAN 2 to "hello".
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 2
[SW7750-vlan2] name hello
shutdown
Syntax shutdown
undo shutdown
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the shutdown command to disable a VLAN interface.
Use the undo shutdown command to enable a VLAN interface.
106 CHAPTER 5: VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
By default, a VLAN interface is enabled. In this scenario, the VLAN interface’s
status is determined by the status of its ports, that is, if all the ports of the VLAN
interface are down, the VLAN interface is down (disabled); if one or more ports of
the VLAN interface are up, the VLAN interface is up (enabled).
If a VLAN interface is disabled, its status is not determined by the status of its
ports.
You can use the undo shutdown command to enable a VLAN interface when its
related parameters and protocols are configured. When a VLAN interface fails, you
can use the shutdown command to disable the interface, and then use the undo
shutdown command to enable this interface again, which may restore the
interface.
The operation of enabling/disabling a VLAN interface does not influence all the
Ethernet ports belonging to this VLAN.
Example # Disable Vlan-interface2 and then enable it.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] shutdown
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] undo shutdown
vlan
Syntax vlan vlan-id
undo vlan vlan-id
View System view
Parameter vlan-id: ID of the VLAN that you want to enter. Its value ranges from 1 to 4094.
Description Use the vlan command to enter a VLAN view. If the VLAN identified by the vlan-id
argument does not exist, this command creates the VLAN and then enters the
VLAN view.
Use the undo vlan command to remove a VLAN.
c CAUTION: You cannot use the undo vlan command to remove the following
kinds of VLANs directly.
■ RRPP-controlled VLAN
■ Guest VLAN
■ VLAN that belongs to a VRRP group
■ Portal-running VLAN
■ Isolate-user-VLAN and all its mapping secondary VLANs.
■ Voice VLAN
vlan to 107
■ Protocol-based VLAN
■ Shared-VLAN
n When you use the undo vlan command to remove a VLAN which is the default
VLAN of an access port, a trunk port or a hybrid port on the device, the port will
use VLAN 1 as the default VLAN after the undo vlan command is executed.
Related command: display vlan
Example # Enter VLAN 1 view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 1
[SW7750-vlan1]
vlan to
Syntax vlan vlan-id1 to vlan-id2
undo vlan vlan-id1 to vlan-id2
View System view
Parameter vlan-id1: ID of the first VLAN to be created, in the range of 1 to 4094.
to: Specifies a VLAN range. The VLAN ID after to must be greater than or equal to
that before to.
vlan-id2: ID of the last VLAN to be created, in the range of 1 to 4094, and cannot
be less than vlan-id2.
Description Use the vlan to command to create a range of VLANs.
Use the undo vlan to command to remove a range of VLANs.
c CAUTION: You cannot use the undo vlan to command to remove the following
kinds of VLANs directly.
■ RRPP-controlled VLAN
■ Guest VLAN
■ VLAN that belongs to a VRRP group
■ Portal-running VLAN
■ Isolate-user-VLAN and all its mapping secondary VLANs.
■ Voice VLAN
■ Protocol-based VLAN
■ Shared-VLAN
108 CHAPTER 5: VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
n As the default VLAN, VLAN 1 needs not to be created and cannot be removed.
Example # Create VLAN 4 through VLAN 100 at a time.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 4 to 100
This operation may take a few minutes.
Please wait...
Done.
[SW7750]
# Display existing VLANs on the device after you create VLANs in a bulk.
[SW7750] display vlan
Now, the following VLAN exist(s
1(default), 4-100
--- 98 VLAN(s) found ---
vlan all
Syntax vlan all
undo vlan all
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the vlan all command to create all VLANs, that is, to create VLANs from
VLAN 2 through VLAN 4094.
Use the undo vlan all command to remove all VLANs.
c CAUTION: You cannot use the undo vlan all command to remove the following
kinds of VLANs directly.
■ RRPP-controlled VLAN
■ Guest VLAN
■ VLAN that belongs to a VRRP group
■ Portal-running VLAN
■ Isolate-user-VLAN and all its mapping secondary VLANs.
■ Voice VLAN
■ Protocol-based VLAN
■ Shared-VLAN
n ■
■
As the default VLAN, VLAN 1 needs not to be created and cannot be removed.
Operations of creating and removing all VLANs take much of the system
resource, which may cause the system not to respond to the current user
vlan all 109
interface. And during the operations, you cannot perform VLAN configurations
in other user interfaces, either.
Example # Create all VLANs
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan all
This operation may take a few minutes.
Please wait...
Done.
# Remove all VLANs, in which VLAN 2, VLAN 5, and VLAN 20 has been configured
as the shared-VLAN, voice VLAN, and remote probe VLAN respectively.
[SW7750] undo vlan all
This may delete all static VLAN except the VLAN kept by protocol and
the default
VLAN.
Continue?[Y/N]:y
This operation may take a few minutes.
Please wait...
Can’t delete vlan when shared-vlan enabled!
Can’t delete vlan when voice vlan enabled
Cannot delete remote probe VLAN
Fail to delete VLAN: 2, 5, 20
Done.
110 CHAPTER 5: VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
PORT-BASED VLAN CONFIGURATION
6 COMMANDS
display port
Syntax display port { hybrid | trunk }
View Any view
Parameters hybrid: Displays hybrid ports.
trunk: Displays trunk ports.
Description Use the display port command to check whether there are hybrid or trunk ports
in the current system and display such ports (if available).
Examples # Display the hybrid ports in the current system.
<SW7750> display port hybrid
The following hybrid ports exist:
Ethernet2/0/1 Ethernet2/0/2
The above information shows the current system has two hybrid ports: Ethernet
2/0/1 and Ethernet 2/0/2.
port
Syntax port interface-list
undo port interface-list
View VLAN view
Parameter interface-list: List of Ethernet ports to be added to or removed from a VLAN. You
need to provide this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where:
■ interface-type is port type and interface-number is port number.
■ The port number to the right of the to keyword must be larger than or equal to
the one to the left of the keyword.
■ &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 ports or ports lists.
Parameter Use the port command to add a port or multiple ports to a VLAN.
112 CHAPTER 6: PORT-BASED VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo port command to remove a port or multiple ports from a VLAN.
Related command: display vlan.
Example # Add Ethernet2/0/2 through Ethernet2/0/4 to VLAN 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 2
[SW7750-vlan2] port Ethernet 2/0/2 to Ethernet 2/0/4
port access vlan
Syntax port access vlan vlan-id
undo port access vlan
View Ethernet port view
Parameters vlan-id: VLAN ID defined in IEEE802.1Q, in the range of 1 to 4094.
c CAUTION: All access ports belong to VLAN 1, which is the default VLAN of the
system, so you are not allowed to add an access port to VLAN 1 or remove an
access port from VLAN 1. Otherwise, the system will prompt: "Can’t delete ports
from or add ports to the default VLAN!".
Description Use the port access vlan command to add the access port into the specified
VLAN.
Use the undo port access vlan command to remove the access port from the
specified VLAN.
You must specify the ID of an existing VLAN in the command.
Examples # Add Ethernet 2/0/1 into VLAN 3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 3
[SW7750-vlan3] quit
[SW7750] interface ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port access vlan 3
port hybrid pvid vlan
Syntax port hybrid pvid vlan vlan-id
undo port hybrid pvid
View Ethernet port view
port hybrid vlan 113
Parameters vlan-id: VLAN ID defined in IEEE802.1Q, in the range of 1 to 4094. It is 1 by
default.
Description Use the port hybrid pvid vlan command to set the default VLAN ID for the
hybrid port.
Use the undo port hybrid pvid command to restore the default VLAN ID of the
port.
Related commands: port link-type.
c CAUTION: You are recommended to set the default VLAN ID of the local hybrid or
trunk ports to the same value as that of the hybrid or trunk ports on the peer
switch. Otherwise, packet forwarding may fail on the ports.
Examples # After configuring Ethernet 2/0/1 as a hybrid port, set the default VLAN ID to
100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port link-type hybrid
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 100
port hybrid vlan
Syntax port hybrid vlan vlan-id-list { tagged | untagged }
undo port hybrid vlan vlan-id-list
View Ethernet port view
Parameters vlan-id-list: VLAN range to which the hybrid port will be added. vlan-id-list = [
vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] ]&<1-10>, where, vlan-id is in the range of 1 to 4094 and
can be discrete, and &<1-10> means you can input up to ten VLAN IDs/ID ranges.
tagged: Keeps VLAN tags when the packets of the specified VLANs are forwarded
on this port.
untagged: Keeps no VLAN tags when the packets of the specified VLANs are
forwarded on this port.
Description Use the port hybrid vlan command to add the hybrid port into specified VLANs.
Use the undo port hybrid vlan command to remove the hybrid port from
specified VLANs.
A hybrid port can belong to multiple VLANs. When you use the command several
times, all VLAN specified in the commands will be allowed to pass the port.
114 CHAPTER 6: PORT-BASED VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
The VLAN specified by the vlan-id argument must exist. Otherwise, this command
is invalid.
Related commands: port link-type.
Examples # Add the hybrid port Ethernet 2/0/1 to VLAN 2, VLAN 4 and VLAN 50 through
VLAN 100, with tags assigned to their packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 2
[SW7750-vlan2] quit
[SW7750] interface ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port link-type hybrid
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port hybrid vlan 2 4 50 to 100 tagged
Operation complete, except these VLAN(s):
Non-existent VLAN(s)
port link-type
Syntax port link-type { access | hybrid | trunk }
undo port link-type
View Ethernet port view
Parameters access: Sets the port as an access port.
hybrid: Sets the port as a hybrid port.
trunk: Sets the port as a trunk port.
Description Use the port link-type command to set the link type of the current Ethernet
port.
Use the undo port link-type command to restore the default link type.
By default, the link type of any port is access.
Pay attention to the following:
The three types of ports can co-exist on the same Ethernet switch. However, a
trunk port cannot be directly switched to a hybrid port, and vice versa. To set a
trunk/hybrid port to another type (different from access), you must first set the
port to an access port and then set the access port to the required type. For
example, a trunk port cannot be directly set to a hybrid port. You must set the
trunk port to an access port and then set it to a hybrid port.
Examples # Set Ethernet 2/0/1 as a trunk port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
port trunk permit vlan 115
[SW7750] interface ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port link-type trunk
port trunk permit vlan
Syntax port trunk permit vlan { vlan-id-list | all }
undo port trunk permit vlan { vlan-id-list | all }
View Ethernet port view
Parameters vlan-id-list: VLAN range to which the trunk port will be added. vlan-id-list = [
vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] ]&<1-10>, where, vlan-id is in the range of 1 to 4094 and
can be discrete, and &<1-10> means you can input up to ten VLAN IDs/ID ranges.
all: Adds the trunk port into all VLANs.
Description Use the port trunk permit vlan command to add the trunk port into the
specified VLAN.
Use the undo port trunk permit vlan command to remove the hybrid port
from the specified VLAN.
A trunk port can belong to multiple VLANs. When you use the command several
times, all VLAN specified in the commands will be allowed to pass the port.
Related commands: port link-type.
Examples # Add the trunk port Ethernet 2/0/1 to VLAN 2, VLAN 4 and VLAN 50 through
VLAN 100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port link-type trunk
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port trunk permit vlan 2 4 50 to 100
Please wait... Done.
port trunk pvid vlan
Syntax port trunk pvid vlan vlan-id
undo port trunk pvid
View Ethernet port view
Parameters vlan-id: VLAN ID defined in IEEE802.1Q, in the range of 1 to 4094. It is 1 by
default.
116 CHAPTER 6: PORT-BASED VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the port trunk pvid vlan command to set the default VLAN ID for the trunk
port.
Use the undo port trunk pvid command to restore the default setting.
To guarantee the proper packet transmission, the default VLAN ID of the local
trunk port must be identical with that of the trunk port on the peer switch
connected with the local trunk port.
Related commands: port link-type.
Examples # Set the default VLAN ID of the trunk port Ethernet 2/0/1 to 100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port link-type trunk
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port trunk pvid vlan 100
PROTOCOL-BASED VLAN
7 CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display protocol-vlan interface
Syntax display protocol-vlan interface { { interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] } | all }
View Any view
Parameter { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] }: Specifies
the port number of the protocol to be displayed. If you do not use the to keyword,
only one port is specified. If you use the to keyword, multiple contiguous ports are
specified. The interface-type argument refers to the port type and the
interface-number argument refers to the port number.
all: Displays the protocol-related information about all ports.
Description Use the display protocol-vlan interface command to display the
protocol-based VLAN information, including VLAN ID, protocol index and protocol
type.
Related command: display interface Vlan-interface.
Example # Display protocol information and protocol index configured for Ethernet2/0/1
and Ethernet2/0/2 ports.
<SW7750> display protocol-vlan interface Ethernet 2/0/1 to Ethernet
2/0/2
Interface: Ethernet2/0/1
VLAN ID Protocol-Index Protocol-type
50 1 ip 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
80 2 ip 101.120.34.0 255.255.0.0
100 1 ip 104.232.43.0 255.255.255.0
100 2 ipx ethernetii
Interface: Ethernet2/0/2
VLAN ID Protocol-Index Protocol-type
50 5 ipx raw
80 1 at
100 3 snap etype 0x0abc
100 5 llc dsap 0xac ssap 0xbd
118 CHAPTER 7: PROTOCOL-BASED VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display protocol-vlan slot
Syntax display protocol-vlan slot { slot-number [ to slot-number ] | all }
View Any view
Parameter slot-number [ to slot-number ]: Specifies to display information about the
protocol-based VLANs on the card(s) specified by slot number. The to keyword is
used to specify multiple modules.
all: Specifies to display information about the protocol-based VLANs on all
modules.
Description Use the display protocol-vlan slot command to display the protocol-based
VLAN information in specific module, including VLAN ID, protocol index and
protocol type.
Example # Display the protocol-based VLAN information of all modules.
<SW7750> display protocol-vlan slot all
Slot: 0
VLAN ID Protocol-Index Protocol-Type
4 0 ip 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
4 1 ip 192.168.1.1 255.0.0.0
4 2 ip 10.1.0.4 255.0.0.0
4 3 ip 172.168.0.1 255.255.0.0
4 4 ip 172.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
display protocol-vlan vlan
Syntax display protocol-vlan vlan { vlan-id [ to vlan-id ] | all }
View Any view
Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
to: Specifies the range of VLAN IDs.
all: Specifies all VLANs.
Description Use the display protocol-vlan vlan command to display the protocol
information and protocol index configured for specified VLANs.
Related command: display vlan.
Example # Display the protocol information and protocol indices configured for VLAN 2
through VLAN 20..
<SW7750> display protocol-vlan vlan 2 to 20
VLAN ID: 2
VLAN Type: Protocol-based VLAN
port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan 119
Protocol Index Protocol Type
0 ip 1.1.1.0 255.255.255.0
VLAN ID: 20
VLAN Type: Protocol-based VLAN
Protocol Index Protocol Type
0 ip 192.168.0.0 255.255.255.0
1 ipx ethernetii
2 snap etype 0x0abc
3 llc dsap 0xac ssap 0xbd
port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan
Syntax port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan vlan-id { protocol-index [ to protocol-end ] | all }
undo port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan vlan-id { protocol-index [ to protocol-end ]
| all }
View Ethernet port view
Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
to: Specifies the range for VLAN IDs.
protocol-index: Beginning protocol index, ranging from 0 to 6. Its value must be
smaller than or equal to the value of the protocol-end argument.
protocol-end: End protocol index, ranging from 0 to 6. Note that its value must be
larger than or equal to the value of the protocol-index argument.
all: Specifies all protocol indices.
Description Use the port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan command to associate a port with the
protocol-based VLAN.
Use the undo port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan command to remove the
association between the specified protocol-based VLAN and a port.
Related command: protocol-vlan vlan slot and display protocol-vlan interface.
Example # Associate port Ethernet2/0/1 with the protocol-based VLAN 3, whose protocol
index is from 0 to 6.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan 3 0 to 6
120 CHAPTER 7: PROTOCOL-BASED VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
protocol-vlan vlan slot
Syntax protocol-vlan vlan vlan-id { protocol-index [ to protocol-end ] | all } { slot
slot-number | mainboard }
undo protocol-vlan vlan vlan-id { protocol-index [ to protocol-end ] | all } { slot
slot-number | mainboard }
View System view
Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
protocol-index: Beginning protocol index, ranging from 0 to 6. Its value must be
smaller than or equal to the value of the protocol-end argument.
protocol-end: End protocol index, ranging from 0 to 6. Note that its value must be
larger than or equal to the value of the protocol-index argument.
all: Specifies all protocol indices.
slot slot-number: Specifies to associate a module with protocol-based VLAN. The
slot-number argument specifies module slot number.
mainboard: Specifies to associate the Fabric with the protocol-based VLAN.
Description Use the protocol-vlan vlan slot command to associate a module with
protocol-based VLAN.
Use the undo protocol-vlan vlan slot command to cancel the association.
Note that it is necessary to add those ports that require protocol in the module to
the protocol-based VLAN. Currently, only non-Type-A modules, including I/O
Modules and Fabrics, support this command.
Table 7 shows the supported protocol-based VLAN creation commands on
different modules.
Table 7 Protocol-based VLAN creation commands on different cards
Command description Type A card Non-Type-A card
Create protocol-based VLAN on Not supported Supported (for all IP protocols and
specific module in system view. subnet IP protocols.)
Create protocol-based VLAN on Supported Supported (exclude all IP protocols
specific port in Ethernet port view. and subnet IP protocols, AppleTalk
protocol, and the user-defined LLC
template which defines only one of
dsap-id and ssap-id. )
n Type A modules include 3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A, 3C16858, 3C16859,
and 32Gbps and 64Gbps Switch Fabrics.
Related command: port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan and display protocol-vlan interface.
protocol-vlan 121
Example # Associate protocols 0 to 6 in VLAN3 with module 5.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] protocol-vlan vlan 3 0 to 6 slot 5
protocol-vlan
Syntax protocol-vlan [ protocol-index ] { at | ip [ ip-address [ net-mask ] ] | ipx {
ethernetii | llc | raw | snap } | mode { ethernetii [ etype etype-id ] | llc [ dsap
dsap-id [ ssap ssap-id ] | ssap ssap-id ] | snap [ etype etype-id ] } }
undo protocol-vlan { protocol-index [ to protocol-end ] | all }
View VLAN view
Parameter at: Specifies an AppleTalk-based VLAN.
ip [ ip-address [ net-mask ] ]: Specifies an IP-based VLAN. The ip-address argument
specifies IP address and the net-mask argument specifies subnet mask. The default
subnet mask is the mask of the network where ip-address belongs.
ipx { ethernetii | llc | raw I snap }: Specifies IPX protocol-based VLAN. The
ethernetii, llc, raw and snap keywords indicate four encapsulation types.
mode: Specifies VLAN based on other protocol type and encapsulation format.
ethernetii [ etype etype-id ]: Specifies EthernetII encapsulation-based VLAN. The
etype-id argument indicates the Ethernet type of the incoming packets, and its
value ranges from 600 to FFFF.
llc [ dsap dsap-id [ ssap ssap-id ] | ssap ssap-id ]: Specifies VLAN based on logical
link control encapsulation format. The dsap-id argument indicates the destination
service access point and its value ranges from 0 to FF. The ssap-id argument
indicates the source service access point and its value ranges from 0 to FF.
snap [ etype etype-id ]: Specifies VLAN based on sub-network access protocol
(SNAP) encapsulation format. The etype-id argument indicates the Ethernet type
of incoming packets and its value ranges from 600 to FFFF.
protocol-index: Beginning protocol index, ranging from 0 to 6. Its value must be
smaller than or equal to the value of the protocol-end argument. If this argument
is not specified, the system will assign an index automatically.
protocol-end: End protocol index, ranging from 0 to 6. Note that its value must be
larger than or equal to the value of the protocol-index argument.
all: Specifies all protocol indices.
Description Use the protocol-vlan command to configure the protocol template used for
classifying protocol-based VLANs.
Use the undo protocol-vlan command to cancel the configuration.
122 CHAPTER 7: PROTOCOL-BASED VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
c CAUTION: In a VLAN, it is not allowed to configure two templates with the same
protocol type and encapsulation format. If any parameter in a user-defined
template has the same value as the corresponding parameter in the standard
template, the user-defined template and the standard template cannot be
configured in the same VLAN.
Pay attention to the following notices about the template configuration
■ It is not allowed to configure both ipx llc standard template and LLC
user-defined template in the same VLAN.
■ It is not allowed to configure both ipx raw standard template and LLC
user-defined template whose dsap and ssap are both ff in the same VLAN.
■ It is not allowed to configure both ipx ethernetii standard template and
EthernetII user-defined template whose etype is 8137 in the same VLAN.
■ It is not allowed to configure both ipx snap standard template and SNAP
user-defined template whose etype is 8137 in the same VLAN.
■ When the values of the dsap-id and ssap-id arguments are AA, the packet
encapsulation type is not llc but snap. To avoid template conflict, the system
disable the value AA for the dsap-id and ssap-id arguments when you
configure LLC user-defined template.
In addition, pay attention to the following notices about IP template
■ If a packet can match both Ipv4-based VLAN and the VLAN based on other
protocol, Ipv4-based VLAN takes higher priority.
■ ip [ ip-address [ net-mask ] ] defines IPv4-based VLAN. If you want to define the
VLANs based on IP or other encapsulation formats, use mode { ethernetii [
etype etype-id ] } and snap [ etype etype-id ], in which, etype-id is 0x0800.
Related command: display protocol-vlan vlan.
Example # Configure VLAN 3 as a VLAN based on all IP packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 3
[SW7750-vlan3] protocol-vlan ip
# Configure VLAN 5 as a VLAN based on network segment 123.34.56.0.
[SW7750-vlan3] vlan 5
[SW7750-vlan5] protocol-vlan ip 123.34.56.0
# Cancel protocols 0 to 5 in VLAN 5.
[SW7750-vlan5] undo protocol-vlan 0 to 5
VOICE VLAN CONFIGURATION
8 COMMANDS
display voice vlan oui
Syntax display voice vlan oui
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display voice vlan oui command to display the currently supported OUI
addresses and the related information.
Related command: voice vlan, voice vlan enable.
Example # Display the OUI addresses of the voice VLAN.
<SW7750> display voice vlan oui
Oui Address Mask Description
0003-6b00-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 Cisco phone
000f-e200-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 3Com Aolynk phone
00d0-1e00-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 Pingtel phone
00e0-7500-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 Polycom phone
00e0-bb00-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 3com phone
display voice vlan status
Syntax display voice vlan status
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display voice vlan status command to display voice VLAN-related
information, including voice VLAN status (disabled/enabled), security mode, aging
time, port mode (manual mode or automatic mode), and so on.
Related command: voice vlan, voice vlan enable.
Example # Display the information about the voice VLAN.
124 CHAPTER 8: VOICE VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> display voice vlan status
Voice Vlan security mode: Security
Voice Vlan aging time: 1440 minutes
Current voice vlan enabled port mode:
PORT MODE STATUS Voice Vlan ID
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Ethernet2/0/5 MANUAL ENABLE 3
Table 8 Field descriptions of the display voice vlan status command
Field Description
Voice Vlan security mode The status of voice VLAN security mode:
enabled/disabled.
Voice Vlan aging time The voice VLAN aging time
Current voice vlan enabled port mode The operation mode of ports with the voice VLAN
function enabled
PORT Port type and port number
MODE Operation mode of the voice VLAN bound to the
port
STATUS Voice VLAN status on the port (ENABLE or
DISABLE)
Voice VLAN ID ID of the voice VLAN bound to the port
c CAUTION: The "Current voice vlan enable port mode" field lists the ports with the
voice VLAN function enabled. Note that a port listed in this field may not currently
operate in a voice VLAN. To check the ports operating in the current voice VLAN,
use the display vlan command, which is described in section “display vlan” on
page 124.
display vlan
Syntax display vlan vlan-id
View Any view
Parameter vlan-id: Voice VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4094.
Description Use the display vlan command to display the automatic/manual ports in the
current voice VLAN.
Related command: voice vlan.
Example # Display the ports included in the current voice VLAN, assuming that the current
voice VLAN is VLAN 6.
<SW7750> display vlan 6
VLAN ID: 6
VLAN Type: static
Route Interface: not configured
Description: VLAN 0006
Name: VLAN 0006
Tagged Ports:
voice vlan 125
GigabitEthernet2/0/5
Untagged Ports:
GigabitEthernet2/0/6
The output indicates that GigabitEthernet2/0/5 and GigabitEthernet2/0/6 ports are
in the current voice VLAN.
voice vlan
Syntax voice vlan vlan-id
undo voice vlan vlan-id
View Ethernet port view
Parameter vlan-id: ID of the VLAN to be bound to the port as a voice VLAN, in the range of 2
to 4094.
Description Use the voice vlan command to bind a VLAN to the port as a voice VLAN.
Use the undo voice vlan command cancel a voice VLAN-to-port binding.
c CAUTION:
■ Before binding a VLAN to a port as a voice VLAN, make sure the VLAN already
exists.
■ To remove a VLAN bound to a port as a voice VLAN, you need to cancel the
voice VLAN-to-port binding first.
Related command: display voice vlan status.
Example # Bind VLAN 2 to Ethernet 2/0/2 as a voice VLAN.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/2
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/2] voice vlan 2
voice vlan aging
Syntax voice vlan aging minutes
undo voice vlan aging
View System view
Parameter minutes: Aging time (in minutes) to be set for a voice VLAN. This argument ranges
from 5 to 43,200.
126 CHAPTER 8: VOICE VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the voice vlan aging command to set the aging time for a voice VLAN.
Use the undo voice vlan aging command to restore the default aging time for
a voice VLAN.
By default, the aging time of a voice VLAN is 1,440 minutes.
Related command: display voice vlan status.
Example # Set the aging time of the voice VLAN to 100 minutes.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] voice vlan aging 100
voice vlan enable
Syntax voice vlan enable
undo voice vlan enable
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the voice vlan enable command to enable the voice VLAN function for a
port.
Use the undo voice vlan enable command to disable the voice VLAN function
for a port.
By default, the voice VLAN function is disabled on all ports.
■ The voice VLAN function takes effect on a port only when it is enabled in both
system view and port view.
■ The access port working in automatic mode does not support the voice VLAN
function.
n ■ After the voice VLAN function is enabled on a port, you cannot enable the
QinQ feature on the port.
■ After the QinQ feature is enabled on a port, you cannot enable the voice VLAN
function on the port.
Related command: display voice vlan status.
Example # Enable the voice VLAN function for Ethernet2/0/2 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/2
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/2] voice vlan enable
voice vlan legacy 127
voice vlan legacy
Syntax voice vlan legacy
undo voice vlan legacy
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the voice vlan legacy command to enable the voice VLAN legacy function.
This function realizes the communication between 3Com’s devices and other
vendors’ voice devices by automatically adding the voice VLAN tags to the voice
data coming from other vendors’ voice devices.
Use the undo voice vlan legacy command to disable the voice VLAN legacy
function.
By default, the voice VLAN legacy function is disabled.
Example # Enable the voice VLAN legacy function on Ethernet2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] voice vlan legacy
voice vlan mac-address
Syntax voice vlan mac-address oui mask oui-mask [ description text ]
undo voice vlan mac-address oui
View System view
Parameter oui: OUI address to be set. You need to provide this argument in the format of
H-H-H.
n Organizationally unique identifier (OUI) is the first 24 bits of a MAC address. It is
the global unique identifier assigned by IEEE for different device supplier.
oui-mask: Valid bits of OUI address, indicated by mask in the format of H-H-H.
text: Description string of the OUI address. This argument can contain 1 to 30
characters.
Description Use the voice vlan mac-address command to set an OUI address used for a
voice VLAN to identify voice devices.
128 CHAPTER 8: VOICE VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo voice vlan mac-address command to disable an OUI address
from being used to identify voice devices.
A switch can use up to 16 OUI addresses to identify voice devices, including the
five default OUI addresses (as listed in Table 9). When the number of OUI
addresses reaches 16, you will fail to add new OUI addresses.
Table 9 Default OUI addresses of a switch
Number OUI addresses Vendor
1 0003-6b00-0000 Cisco phone
2 000f-e200-0000 3Com Aolynk phone
3 00d0-1e00-0000 Pingtel phone
4 00e0-7500-0000 Polycom phone
5 00e0-bb00-0000 3com phone
Related command: display voice vlan oui.
Example # Specify 00aa-bb00-0000 as an OUI address, with the description string being
"ABC".
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] voice vlan mac-address 00aa-bb00-0000 mask ffff-ff00-0000 d
escription ABC
voice vlan mode
Syntax voice vlan mode auto
undo voice vlan mode auto
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the voice vlan mode auto command to configure an Ethernet port to
operate in the automatic voice VLAN mode.
Use the undo voice vlan mode auto command to configure an Ethernet port
to operate in the manual voice VLAN mode.
By default, an Ethernet port operates in the automatic voice VLAN mode.
Related command: display voice vlan status.
Example # Configure GigabitEthernet3/0/2 port to operate in the manual voice VLAN
mode.
voice vlan security enable 129
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet 3/0/2
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet3/0/2] undo voice vlan mode auto
voice vlan security enable
Syntax voice vlan security enable
undo voice vlan security enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the voice vlan security enable command to enable the voice VLAN
security mode.
Use the undo voice vlan security enable command to disable the voice VLAN
security mode.
In the voice VLAN security mode, the ports in a voice VLAN and with voice devices
attached to can only forward voice data. Data packets with their MAC addresses
not among the OUI addresses that can be identified by the system will be
dropped. This mode has no effects on other VLANs.
By default, the voice VLAN security mode is enabled.
Related command: display voice vlan status.
Example # Disable the voice VLAN security mode.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] undo voice vlan security enable
130 CHAPTER 8: VOICE VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
ISOLATE-USER-VLAN
9 CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
n You need to configure the hybrid attribute for a port in the process of configuring
an isolate-user-VLAN. For hybrid port-related commands, refer to “Port-Based
VLAN Configuration Commands” on page 111.
display isolate-user-vlan
Syntax display isolate-user-vlan [ vlan-id ]
View Any view
Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID of the configured isolate-user-VLANs, ranging from 1 to 4,094.
Description Use the display isolate-user-vlan command to display the mapping between
the isolate-user-VLAN and the secondary VLAN, and the current status and port
information of the isolate-user-VLAN and the secondary VLAN.
Related command: isolate-user-vlan enable and isolate-user-vlan.
Example # Display the mapping between the isolate-user-VLAN and the secondary VLAN.
<SW7750> display isolate-user-vlan
Isolate-user-VLAN Vlan ID : 3
Secondary Vlan ID : 4-5
Vlan ID: 3
Vlan Type: static
Isolate-user-VLAN type : isolate-user-VLAN
Route Interface: not configured
Description: VLAN 0003
Tagged Ports: none
Untagged Ports:
Ethernet2/0/4 Ethernet2/0/8 Ethernet2/0/18
Vlan ID: 4
Vlan Type: static
Private-vlan Type : Secondary
Route Interface: not configured
Description: VLAN 0004
Tagged Ports: none
Untagged Ports:
Ethernet2/0/4 Ethernet2/0/8
Vlan ID: 5
Vlan Type: static
Private-vlan Type : Secondary
Route Interface: not configured
Description: VLAN 0004
Tagged Ports: none
132 CHAPTER 9: ISOLATE-USER-VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Untagged Ports:
Ethernet2/0/4 Ethernet2/0/18
isolate-user-vlan
Syntax isolate-user-vlan vlan-id secondary vlan-list
undo isolate-user-vlan vlan-id [ secondary vlan-list ]
View System view
Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID of an isolate-user-VLAN, ranging from 1 to 4,094.
vlan-list: List of the secondary VLAN that needs to establish the mapping with the
isolate-user-VLAN, provided in the form of vlan-list = { vlan-id [ to vlan-id ]
}&<1-4093>, where the vlan-id is the VLAN ID of the secondary VLAN. VLAN ID
after to must not be less than that before to. You can input this argument
repeatedly to establish the mapping between the isolate-user-VLAN and all other
VLANs.
Description Use the isolate-user-vlan command to establish the mapping between the
isolate-user-VLAN and the secondary VLAN.
Use the undo isolate-user-vlan command to cancel the mapping between the
isolate-user-VLAN and the secondary VLAN.
Without the parameter secondary vlan-list, the undo isolate-user-vlan
command can cancel the mapping between all the secondary VLANs and the
specified isolate-user-VLAN. With this parameter, the command can cancel the
mapping between the specified secondary VLAN and the specified
isolate-user-VLAN.
Note that, establishing or canceling the mapping between the isolate-user-VLAN
and the secondary VLAN does not affect the port status in each VLAN.
By default, the user-created isolate-user-VLAN does not map the secondary VLAN.
Related command: display isolate-user-vlan.
Example # Map the isolate-user-VLAN 10 with the secondary VLAN 2, 3, 4, 5, and 9.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isolate-user-vlan 10 secondary 2 to 5 9
isolate-user-vlan enable
Syntax isolate-user-vlan enable
undo isolate-user-vlan enable
isolate-user-vlan enable 133
View VLAN view
Parameter None
Description Use the isolate-user-vlan enable command to specify a VLAN as an
isolate-user-VLAN.
Use the undo isolate-user-vlan enable command to cancel the configuration.
By default, no VLAN is enabled with the isolate-user-VLAN function.
n ■
■
Multiple isolate-user-VLANs can be configured for a switch.
With GVRP function enabled, a switch cannot be enabled with
isolate-user-VLAN function.
■ The isolate-user-VLAN function and super VLAN function cannot be enabled
simultaneously for a VLAN. If a VLAN is specified as an isolate-user-VLAN or a
secondary VLAN, you cannot configure it as a super VLAN or a sub VLAN
additionally.
Related command: display isolate-user-vlan.
Example # Configure VLAN 5 as an isolate-user-VLAN.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 5
[SW7750-vlan5] isolate-user-vlan enable
134 CHAPTER 9: ISOLATE-USER-VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
SUPER VLAN CONFIGURATION
10 COMMANDS
n Only the 96Gbps series switch fabric supports this feature.
dhcp-server
Syntax dhcp-server groupNo
undo dhcp-server
View VLAN interface view
Parameter groupNo: Number of DHCP server, ranging from 0 to 19.
Description Use the dhcp-server command to specify which DHCP server group a VLAN
interface belongs to.
Use the undo dhcp-server command to cancel this mapping.
For configurations of a DHCP server group, refer to “DHCP Server Configuration
Commands” on page 705.
Example # Configure VLAN-interface1 to belong to DHCP server group 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] dhcp-server 1
display supervlan
Syntax display supervlan [ supervlan-id ]
View Any view
Parameter supervlan-id: ID of Super VLAN, range from 1 to 4,094.
Description Use the display supervlan command to view the mapping relationship between
Super VLAN and Sub VLAN, and the ports identifying mapping relationship
between super VLAN and sub VLAN.
136 CHAPTER 10: SUPER VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Related command: supervlan, and subvlan.
Example # Display the mapping relationship between Super VLAN 100 and the sub VLANs.
<SW7750> display supervlan 100
Supervlan ID : 100
Subvlan ID : 101-102
VLAN ID: 100
VLAN Type: static
It is a Super VLAN.
Route Interface: not configured
Description: VLAN 0100
Name: VLAN 0100
Broadcast MAX-ratio: 100
Tagged Ports: none
Untagged Ports: none
VLAN ID: 101
VLAN Type: static
It is a Sub VLAN. And the Super VLAN is VLAN 100
ARP proxy disabled.
Route Interface: not configured
Description: VLAN 0101
Name: VLAN 0101
Broadcast MAX-ratio: 100
Tagged Ports: none
Untagged Ports:
Ethernet3/0/3
VLAN ID: 102
VLAN Type: static
It is a Sub VLAN. And the Super VLAN is VLAN 100
ARP proxy disabled.
Route Interface: not configured
Description: VLAN 0102
Name: VLAN 0102
Broadcast MAX-ratio: 100
Tagged Ports: none
Untagged Ports:
Ethernet3/0/4
subvlan
Syntax subvlan vlan-list
undo subvlan [ vlan-list ]
View VLAN view of the super VLAN
Parameter vlan-list: List of sub VLANs, provided in the format of vlan-list = { vlan-id [ to
vlan-id ] }&<1-10>, where the vlan-id is the VLAN ID of a sub VLAN, and the
&<1-10> means you can specify ten sub VLANs or sub VLAN lists.
Description Use the subvlan commmand to establish the mapping relationship between sub
VLAN and super VLAN.
supervlan 137
Use the undo subvlan commmand to cancel the mapping relationship between
sub VLAN and super VLAN.
Without the argument vlan-list, the undo subvlan command can cancel the
mapping between all the sub VLANs and the isolate-user-VLAN. With this
argument, the command can cancel the mapping between the specified sub VLAN
and the isolate-user-VLAN.
c CAUTION:
■ The sub VLAN must exist before you create mapping between the sub VLAN
and the super VLAN.
■ After establishing the mapping between the sub VLAN and the super VLAN,
you can still add (or delete) ports to (from) the sub VLAN.
■ A super VLAN can establish mappings with 128 sub VLANs.
■ The system can create up to 1024 sub VLANs.
Related command: display supervlan.
Example # Establish the mapping relationship between sub VLAN 3, 4, 5, 9 and super VLAN
10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 10
[SW7750-vlan10] supervlan
[SW7750-vlan10] subvlan 3 to 5 9
supervlan
Syntax supervlan
undo supervlan
View VLAN view
Parameter None
Description Use the supervlan commmand to set current VLAN to super VLAN.
Use the undo supervlan commmand to restore the current VLAN type to
ordinary VLAN.
n Note that:
You can not configure a VLAN which includes Ethernet ports as a super VLAN; and
after you configure a super VLAN, you cannot add any Ethernet port to it.
Related command: display supervlan.
138 CHAPTER 10: SUPER VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Set the VLAN 2 to super VLAN.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 2
[SW7750-vlan2] supervlan
IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
11 COMMANDS
display ip interface
Syntax display ip interface [ brief ] [ interface-type [ interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: interface-type indicates a port type and
interface-number indicates a port number. For details, see interface on page 205.
brief: Displays the basic interface configuration information.
Description Use the display ip interface command to display information about one specific
or all interfaces.
Example # Display information about VLAN interface 1.
<SW7750> display ip interface Vlan-interface 1
Vlan-interface1 current state :UP
Line protocol current state :UP
Internet Address is 192.168.0.39/24 Primary
Broadcast address : 192.168.0.255
The Maximum Transmit Unit : 1500 bytes
IP packets input number: 9678, bytes: 475001, multicasts: 7
IP packets output number: 8622, bytes: 391084, multicasts: 0
TTL invalid packet number: 0
ICMP packet input number: 0
Echo reply: 0
Unreachable: 0
Source quench: 0
Routing redirect: 0
Echo request: 0
Router advert: 0
Router solicit: 0
Time exceed: 0
IP header bad: 0
Timestamp request: 0
Timestamp reply: 0
Information request: 0
Information reply: 0
Netmask request: 0
Netmask reply: 0
Unknown type: 0
140 CHAPTER 11: IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 10 Field descriptions of the display ip interface command
Field Description
Vlan-interface1 current state Current state of VLAN interface 1
Line protocol current state Current state of the Line protocol
Internet Address IP address
Broadcast address Broadcast address
The Maximum Transmit Unit Max transmit unit
IP packets input number: 9678, bytes: Number of input/output unicast packets, bytes,
475001, multicasts: 7 and multicast packets
IP packets output number: 8622, bytes:
391084, multicasts: 0
TTL invalid packet number Number of received invalid TTL packets
ICMP packet input number: 0 Total number of received ICMP packets,
including:
Echo reply: 0
Echo reply packet, unreachable packet, source
Unreachable: 0
quench packet, routing redirect packet, Echo
Source quench: 0 request packet, router advert packet, router
solicit packet, time exceed packet, IP header
Routing redirect: 0
bad packet, timestamp request packet,
Echo request: 0 timestamp reply packet, information request
packet, information reply packet, netmask
Router advert: 0
request packet, netmask reply packet, and
Router solicit: 0 unknown types of packets.
Time exceed: 0
IP header bad: 0
Timestamp request: 0
Timestamp reply: 0
Information request: 0
Information reply: 0
Netmask request: 0
Netmask reply: 0
Unknown type: 0
ip address
Syntax ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length } [ sub ]
undo ip address [ ip-address { mask | mask-length } [ sub ] ]
View VLAN interface view/Loopback interface view/M-Ethernet interface view
Parameter ip-address: IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
mask: Subnet mask, in dotted decimal notation.
mask-length: Length of a subnet mask.
sub: Secondary IP address of a VLAN or loopback interface.
ip address 141
Description Use the ip address command to specify an IP address and mask for a VLAN or
loopback interface.
Use the undo ip address command to remove an IP address and mask of a VLAN
or loopback interface.
By default, a VLAN or loopback interface has no IP address.
Generally, it is enough to configure one IP address for an interface. However, you
can configure up to eight IP addresses for an interface so that it can be connected
to several subnets. Among these IP addresses, one is the primary IP address and all
the others are secondary ones. The relationship between the primary address and
the secondary addresses is as follows:
■ When you configure a primary IP address for an interface which already has a
primary IP address, the new address will replace the old one.
■ If you execute the undo ip address command without any parameter, the
switch deletes both primary and secondary IP addresses of the interface. The
undo ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length } command is used to delete
the primary IP address. The undo ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length }
sub command is used to delete secondary IP addresses.
Related command: display ip interface.
Example # Specify the IP address and subnet mask of VLAN interface 1 to 129.12.0.1 and
255.255.255.0 respectively.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] ip address 129.12.0.1 255.255.255.0
142 CHAPTER 11: IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
IP PERFORMANCE CONFIGURATION
12 COMMANDS
display fib
Syntax display fib fib-rule
View Any view
Parameter fib-rule: Specifies FIB entries that conform to specific rules. It can be a combination
of multiple rules. The following table describes the combinations.
Table 11 Display combination of specified FIB entries
Description Form of fib-rule
Display FIB entries of the specified slot slot-number
Display FIB entries matching the specified ip-address1 [ { mask1 | mask-length1 } [
destination IP address/mask pair and all the ip-address2 { mask2 | mask-length2 } | longer ] |
FIB entries matching the specified IP longer ]
address/mask (in the natural mask range)
pair
Display FIB statistics statistics
Display the FIB entries which are output | { begin | exclude | include } text
from the buffer according to the regular
expression and are related to the specific
character string
Display the FIB entries matching a specific acl { number | name }
ACL
Display the FIB entries matching the specific ip-prefix listname
prefix list
Description Use the display fib command to view the summary of the forwarding
information base (FIB). Each line indicates an FIB entry. The information includes:
destination address/mask length, next hop, current flag, timestamp, and output
interface. For the ACL configuration, refer to “ACL Commands” on page 755.
Example # Display all the FIB summary.
<SW7750> display fib
Destination/Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface
211.71.75.0/24 1.1.1.2 GSU t[250763] Vlan-interface2
1.1.2.1/32 127.0.0.1 GHU t[37] InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 127.0.0.1 GHU t[37] InLoopBack0
127.0.0.0/8 127.0.0.1 U t[37] InLoopBack0
1.1.1.1/32 127.0.0.1 GHU t[37] InLoopBack0
1.1.1.0/24 1.1.1.1 U t[37] Vlan-interface2
144 CHAPTER 12: IP PERFORMANCE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 12 Field descriptions of the display fib command
Field Description
Destination/Mask Destination address/mask length
Nexthop Next hop address
Flag Flags:
U: A route is up and available.
G: Gateway route
H: Local host route
B: Blackhole route
D: Dynamic route
S: Static route
R: Rejected route
E: Multi-path equal-cost route
L: Route generated by ARP or ESIS
TimeStamp Timestamp
Interface Forwarding interface
# Display ACL 2001.
<SW7750> display acl config 2001
Basic ACL 2001, 1 rule
rule 0 permit source 211.71.75.0 0.0.0.255 (0 times matched)
# Display the FIB entries filtered by ACL 2001.
<SW7750> display fib acl 2001
Route Entry matched by access-list 2001
Summary Counts :1
Destination/Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface
211.71.75.0/24 1.1.1.2 GSU t[250763] Vlan-interface2
# Display all the lines from the line containing the string 1.1.1.1.
<SW7750> display fib | begin 1.1.1.1
1.1.1.1/32 127.0.0.1 GHU t[37] InLoopBack0
1.1.1.0/24 1.1.1.1 U t[37] Vlan-interface2
# Display the total number of FIB entries.
<SW7750> display fib statistics
Route Entry Count : 30
display icmp statistics
Syntax display icmp statistics
View Any view
Parameter None
display ip socket 145
Description Use the display icmp statistics command to view the statistics about ICMP
packets.
Related command: display ip interface and reset ip statistics.
Example # Display the statistics about ICMP packets.
<SW7750> display icmp statistics
Input: bad formats 0 bad checksum 0
echo 5 destination unreachable 0
source quench 0 redirects 0
echo reply 10 parameter problem 0
timestamp 0 information request 0
mask requests 0 mask replies 0
time exceeded 0
Output:echo 10 destination unreachable 0
source quench 0 redirects 0
echo reply 5 parameter problem 0
timestamp 0 information reply 0
mask requests 0 mask replies 0
time exceeded 0
Table 13 Field descriptions of the display icmp statistics command
Field Description
bad formats Number of input packets in bad formats
bad checksum Number of input packets with bad checksum
echo Number of input/output echo request packets
destination unreachable Number of input/output packets with unreachable
destination
source quench Number of input/output source quench packets
redirects Number of input/output redirected packets
echo reply Number of input/output echo reply packets
parameter problem Number of input/output packets with parameter
problem
timestamp Number of input/output timestamp packets
information request Number of input information request packets
mask requests Number of input/output mask request packets
mask replies Number of input/output mask reply packets
information reply Number of output information reply packets
time exceeded Number of time exceeded packets
display ip socket
Syntax display ip socket [ socktype sock-type ] [ task-id socket-id ]
View Any view
Parameter sock-type: Type of a socket, ranging from 1 to 3. These values correspond to
SOCK_STREAM (TCP socket), SOCK_DGRAM (UDP socket or socket based on the
link layer), and SOCK_RAW (RAW IP socket).
146 CHAPTER 12: IP PERFORMANCE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
task-id: ID of a task, with the value ranging from 1 to 100.
socket-id: ID of a socket, with the value ranging from 0 to 3072.
Description Use the display ip socket command to display the information of the current
socket.
Example # Display the information about the socket of the TCP type.
<SW7750> display ip socket socktype 1
SOCK_STREAM:
Task = VTYD(18), socketid = 1, Proto = 6,
LA = 0.0.0.0:23, FA = 0.0.0.0:0,
sndbuf = 8192, rcvbuf = 8192, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,
socket option = SO_ACCEPTCONN SO_KEEPALIVE SO_SENDVPNID SO_SETKEEPAL
IVE,
socket state = SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC
Task = VTYD(18), socketid = 2, Proto = 6,
LA = 10.153.17.99:23, FA = 10.153.17.56:1161,
sndbuf = 8192, rcvbuf = 8192, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,
socket option = SO_KEEPALIVE SO_OOBINLINE SO_SENDVPNID SO_SETKEEPALI
VE,
socket state = SS_ISCONNECTED SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC
Task = VTYD(18), socketid = 3, Proto = 6,
LA = 10.153.17.99:23, FA = 10.153.17.82:1121,
sndbuf = 8192, rcvbuf = 8192, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,
socket option = SO_KEEPALIVE SO_OOBINLINE SO_SENDVPNID SO_SETKEEPALI
VE,
socket state = SS_ISCONNECTED SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC
Table 14 Field descriptions of the display ip socket command
Field Description
SOCK_STREAM Type of a socket. Three types are available: SOCK_STREAM
(TCP socket), SOCK_DGRAM (UDP socket or socket
supporting link layer access), and SOCK_RAW (RAW IP
socket).
Task Task ID
socketid Socket ID
Proto Protocol number used by the socket
sndbuf Sending buffer size of the socket
rcvbuf Receiving buffer size of the socket
sb_cc Current data size in the sending buffer. The value makes
sense only for the socket of TCP type, because only TCP is
able to cache data.
rb_cc Current data size in the receiving buffer
socket option Option of a socket
socket state State of a socket
display ip statistics 147
display ip statistics
Syntax display ip statistics
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display ip statistics command to view the statistics about IP packets.
Related command: display ip interface and reset ip statistics.
Example # Display the statistics about IP packets.
<SW7750> display ip statistics
Input: sum 7120 local 112
bad protocol 0 bad format 0
bad checksum 0 bad options 0
Output: forwarding 0 local 27
dropped 0 no route 2
compress fails 0
Fragment: input 0 output 0
dropped 0
fragmented 0 couldn’t fragment 0
Reassembling: sum 0 timeouts 0
Table 15 Field descriptions of the display ip statistics command
Field Description
Input: sum Sum of input packets
Local Number of received packets whose destination
address is the local device
bad protocol Number of packets with wrong protocol
number
bad format Number of packets in bad format
bad checksum Number of packets with bad checksum
bad options Number of packets with wrong options
Output: forwarding Number of forwarded packets
local Number of packets sent by the local device
dropped Number of dropped packets during transmission
no route Number of packets that cannot be routed
compress fails Number of packets that cannot be compressed
Fragment: input Number of input fragments
output Number of output fragments
dropped Number of dropped fragments
fragmented Number of packets that are fragmented
couldn’t fragment Number of packets that cannot be fragmented
Reassembling: sum Number of reassembled packets
timeouts Number of timeout fragment packets
148 CHAPTER 12: IP PERFORMANCE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display tcp statistics
Syntax display tcp statistics
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display tcp statistics command to view the statistics about TCP
packets.
Related command: display tcp status and reset tcp statistics.
Example # Display the statistics about TCP packets.
<SW7750> display tcp statistics
Received packets:
Total: 753
packets in sequence: 412 (11032 bytes)
window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 0
checksum error: 0, offset error: 0, short error: 0
duplicate packets: 4 (88 bytes), partially duplicate packets: 5 (7 bytes)
out-of-order packets: 0 (0 bytes)
packets of data out of window: 0 (0 bytes)
packets received after close: 0
ACK packets: 481 (8776 bytes)
duplicate ACK packets: 7, too much ACK packets: 0
Sent packets:
Total: 665
urgent packets: 0
control packets: 5 (including 1 RST)
window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 2
data packets: 618 (8770 bytes) data packets retransmitted: 0 (0 bytes)
ACK-only packets: 40 (28 delayed)
Retransmitted timeout: 0, connections dropped in retransmitted timeout: 0
Keepalive timeout: 0, keepalive probe: 0, Keepalive timeout, so connections disco
nnected : 0
Initiated connections: 0, accepted connections: 0, established connections: 0
Closed connections: 0 (dropped: 0, initiated dropped: 0)
Packets dropped with MD5 authentication: 0
Packets permitted with MD5 authentication: 0
display tcp statistics 149
Table 16 Field descriptions of the display tcp statistics command
Field Description
Received packets Total Total number of received packets
packets in sequence Number of packets in sequence
window probe packets/ Number of window probe
window update packets packets/number of window update
packets
checksum error/ offset Number of checksum errors/number of
error/ short error offset errors/number of short errors
duplicate packets/ partially Number of duplicate packets/number of
duplicate packets partially duplicate packets
out-of-order packets Number of out-of-order packets
packets of data out of Number of packets out of window
window
packets received after Number of received packets after close
close
ACK packets Number of ACK packets
duplicate ACK packets/ too Number of duplicate ACK packets/number
much ACK packets of ACK packets for data not sent.
Sent packets Total Total number of sent packets
urgent packets Number of urgent packets
control packets (including Number of control packets, including one
1 RST) retransmitted packet
window probe packets/ Number of window probe
window update packets packets/number of window update
packets
data packets/ data packets Number of data packets/number of
retransmitted retransmitted packets
ACK-only packets Number of ACK packets (28 delay ACK
packets)
Retransmitted timeout/ connections dropped in Times of retransmission timer
retransmitted timeout timeout/number of dropped connections
because retransmission times exceed the
limit
Keepalive timeout/ keepalive probe/ Keepalive Times of keepalive timer timeout/number
timeout, so connections disconnected of transmitted keepalive probe
packets/number of dropped connections
due to keepalive probe failure
Initiated connections/ accepted connections/ Number of initiated connections/number
established connections of accepted connections/number of
established connections
Closed connections (dropped: initiated dropped: ) Number of closed connections (number of
dropped connections
umber of failed connection attempts)
Packets dropped with MD5 authentication Number of dropped packets with MD5
authentication
Packets permitted with MD5 authentication Number of permitted packets with MD5
authentication
150 CHAPTER 12: IP PERFORMANCE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display tcp status
Syntax display tcp status
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display tcp status command to view the state of all the TCP
connections so that you can monitor TCP connections in real time.
Example # Display the state of all the TCP connections.
<SW7750> display tcp status
TCPCB Local Add:port Foreign Add:port State
03e37dc4 0.0.0.0:4001 0.0.0.0:0 Listening
04217174 100.0.0.204:23 100.0.0.253:65508 Established
Table 17 Field descriptions of the display tcp status command
Field Description
TCPCB Address of the TCP control block
Local Add:port Local IP address; port number
Foreign Add:port Remote IP address; port number
State TCP connection state
display udp statistics
Syntax display udp statistics
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display udp statistics command to view the statistics about UDP
packets.
Related command: reset udp statistics.
Example # Display the statistics about UDP packets.
<SW7750> display udp statistics
Received packets:
Total: 26320
checksum error: 0
shorter than header: 0, data length larger than packet: 0
no socket on port: 0
total broadcast or multicast packets : 25006
no socket broadcast or multicast packets: 24989
not delivered, input socket full: 0
icmp redirect send 151
input packets missing pcb cache: 1314
Sent packets:
Total: 7187
Table 18 Field descriptions of the display udp statistics command
Field Description
Received Total Total number of received UDP packets
packets:
checksum error Number of packets with checksum errors
shorter than header, Number of packets whose lengths are shorter than
their headers
data length larger than Number of packets whose lengths are larger than
packet the packets
no socket on port Number of packets dropped because the socket
corresponding to the port number is not found
total broadcast or multicast Total number of transmitted broadcast or multicast
packets packets
no socket broadcast or Total number of transmitted broadcast or multicast
multicast packets packets whose sockets are not found
not delivered, input socket Number of not delivered packets because the
full socket cache is full
input packets missing pcb Number of packets missing pcb cache
cache
Sent Total Total number of transmitted UDP packets
packets:
icmp redirect send
Syntax icmp redirect send
undo icmp redirect send
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the icmp redirect send command to enable ICMP redirect message
sending.
Use the undo icmp redirect send command to disable ICMP redirect message
sending.
By default, ICMP redirect message sending is enabled.
Example # Disable ICMP redirect message sending.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] undo icmp redirect send
152 CHAPTER 12: IP PERFORMANCE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
ip
Syntax ip { ttl-expires | unreachables }
undo ip { ttl-expires | unreachables }
View System view
Parameter ttl-expires: Configure whether to send TTL timeout packets to CPU.
unreachables: Configure whether to send unreachable packets to CPU.
Description Use the ip { ttl-expires | unreachables } command to configure to send TTL
timeout packets and unreachable packets to CPU.
Use the undo ip { ttl-expires | unreachables } command to cancel the
configuration.
By default, unreachable packets are not sent to the CPU, while TTL timeout
packets are sent to the CPU.
Example # Configure to send unreachable packets to CPU.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip unreachables
ip forward-broadcast
Syntax ip forward-broadcast [ acl-number ]
undo ip forward-broadcast
View VLAN interface view
Parameter acl-number: Number of the ACL used for filtering directed broadcast packets, in
the range of 2000 to 3997.
Description Use the ip forward-broadcast command to enable forwarding of directed
broadcast packets to a directly connected network.
Use the undo ip forward-broadcast command to restore the default.
By default, the switch does not forward directed broadcast packets to a directly
connected network.
n Note that:
■ If you reference an ACL, only the directed broadcasts that pass the ACL filtering
can be forwarded to the directly connected networks.
reset ip statistics 153
■ If you reference a non-existent ACL, all the directed broadcasts to directly
connected networks cannot be forwarded.
■ If no ACL is referenced, all the directed broadcasts to directly connected
networks can be forwarded.
Example # Reference ACL 2000 to filter directed broadcasts to directly connected networks.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] ip forward-broadcast 2000
reset ip statistics
Syntax reset ip statistics
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset ip statistics command to clear the statistics information about IP
packets.
Related command: display ip interface and display ip statistics.
Example # Clear the statistics information about IP packets.
<SW7750> reset ip statistics
reset tcp statistics
Syntax reset tcp statistics
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset tcp statistics command to clear the statistics information about
TCP packets.
Related command: display tcp statistics.
Example # Clear the statistics information about TCP packets.
<SW7750> reset tcp statistics
154 CHAPTER 12: IP PERFORMANCE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
reset udp statistics
Syntax reset udp statistics
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset udp statistics command to clear the statistics information about
UDP packets.
Example # Clear the statistics information about UDP packets.
<SW7750> reset udp statistics
tcp timer fin-timeout
Syntax tcp timer fin-timeout time-value
undo tcp timer fin-timeout
View System view
Parameter time-value: TCP finwait timer value, in seconds, with the value ranging from 76 to
3600.
Description Use the tcp timer fin-timeout command to configure the TCP finwait timer.
Use the undo tcp timer fin-timeout command to restore the default value of
the TCP finwait timer.
The default value is 675 seconds.
When the TCP connection state changes from FIN_WAIT_1 to FIN_WAIT_2, the
finwait timer is enabled. If the switch does not receive FIN packets before finwait
timer time outs, the TCP connection will be terminated.
Related command: tcp timer syn-timeout and tcp window.
Example # Configure the default value of the TCP finwait timer to 800 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] tcp timer fin-timeout 800
tcp timer syn-timeout
Syntax tcp timer syn-timeout time-value
tcp window 155
undo tcp timer syn-timeout
View System view
Parameter time-value: TCP synwait timer value, in seconds, with the value ranging from 2 to
600.
Description Use the tcp timer syn-timeout command to configure the TCP synwait timer.
Use the undo tcp timer syn-timeout command to restore the default value of
the TCP synwait timer.
The default value is 75 seconds.
When sending the SYN packet, TCP starts the synwait timer. If the response packet
is not received before synwait times out, the TCP connection will be terminated.
Related command: tcp timer fin-timeout and tcp window.
Example # Configure the default value of the TCP synwait timer to 80 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] tcp timer syn-timeout 80
tcp window
Syntax tcp window window-size
undo tcp window
View System view
Parameter window-size: The size of the transmission and receiving buffers measured in
kilobytes (KB), whose value ranges from 1 to 32.
Description Use the tcp window command to configure the size of the transmission and
receiving buffers of the connection-oriented socket.
Use the undo tcp window command to restore the default size of the
transmission and receiving buffers of the connection-oriented socket.
By default, the size of the transmission and receiving buffers of the
connection-oriented socket is 8 KB.
Related command: tcp timer fin-timeout and tcp timer syn-timeout.
Example # Configure the size of the transmission and receiving buffers to 3KB.
156 CHAPTER 12: IP PERFORMANCE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] tcp window 3
IPX CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
13
display ipx interface
Syntax display ipx interface [ Vlan-interface vlan-id ]
View Any view
Parameter vlan-id: Specifies a VLAN interface by specifying its VLAN ID.
Description Use the display ipx interface command to view the IPX information of the
specified VLAN interface.
If no vlan-id is specified, the IPX information of all the IPX-enabled VLAN interfaces
will be displayed.
Example # Display the IPX information of VLAN interface 1.
<SW7750> display ipx interface Vlan-interface 1
Vlan-interface1 is down
IPX address is 1.0020-9c68-448e [down]
SAP is enabled
Split horizon is enabled
Update change only is disabled
Forwarding of IPX type 20 propagation packet is disabled
Delay of this IPX interface, in ticks is 1
SAP GNS response is enabled
RIP packet maximum size is 432 bytes
SAP packet maximum size is 480 bytes
IPX encapsulation is Netware 802.3
0 received, 0 sent
0 bytes received, 0 bytes sent
0 RIP received, 0 RIP sent, 0 RIP discarded
0 RIP specific requests received, 0 RIP specific responses sent
0 RIP general requests received, 0 RIP general responses sent
0 SAP received, 0 SAP sent, 0 SAP discarded
0 SAP requests received, 0 SAP responses sent
Table 19 Field descriptions of the display ipx interface command
Field Description
Vlan-interface1 is down State of the current VLAN interface
IPX address IPX network number and node address of the
current VLAN interface
[down] State of the IPX protocol
158 CHAPTER 13: IPX CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 19 Field descriptions of the display ipx interface command
Field Description
SAP Indicates whether SAP is enabled on the current
VLAN interface
Split horizon Indicates whether split horizon is enabled on the
current VLAN interface
Update change only Indicates whether triggered update is enabled on
the current VLAN interface
Forwarding of IPX type 20 propagation Indicates whether the IPX packets whose broadcast
packet type is 20 are forwarded through the current VLAN
interface
Delay of this IPX interface Delay of the current VLAN interface
SAP GNS response Indicates whether SAP GNS reply is enabled on the
current VLAN interface
RIP packet maximum size Maximum length of the RIP update packets that the
current VLAN interface can send
SAP packet maximum size Maximum length of the SAP update packets that
the current VLAN interface can send
IPX encapsulation IPX encapsulation format of the current VLAN
interface
0 received, 0 sent The number of IPX packets and bytes sent and
received by the current VLAN interface; the number
0 bytes received, 0 bytes sent
of received, sent, and dropped IPX RIP packets; the
0 RIP received, 0 RIP sent, 0 RIP number of received special request packets and
discarded response packets; the number of received general
request packets and response packets; the number
0 RIP specific requests received, 0 RIP
of received, transmitted, and dropped IPX SAP
specific responses sent
packets; the number of received IPX SAP packets
0 RIP general requests received, 0 RIP and response packets
general responses sent
0 SAP received, 0 SAP sent, 0 SAP
discarded
0 SAP requests received, 0 SAP
responses sent
display ipx routing-table
Syntax display ipx routing-table [ network [ verbose ] | protocol { default | direct |
rip | static } [ inactive | verbose ] | statistics | verbose ]
View Any view
Parameter network: Displays IPX routing information by specifying a destination network
number, which comprises eight hexadecimal numbers and is in the range of 1 to
0xFFFFFFFE.
protocol: Displays the IPX routing information of the specified route type.
default: Displays the information of all the default routes.
direct: Displays information of all the direct routes.
display ipx routing-table 159
rip: Displays all the IPX RIP routing information.
static: Displays all the IPX static routing information.
inactive: Displays the information of the inactive routes.
verbose: Displays the detailed IPX routing information, including the active and
inactive routes.
statistics: Displays the IPX routing statistics.
Description Use the display ipx routing-table command to view the IPX routing
information.
If no parameters are specified, the information of all the active IPX routes will be
displayed.
Example # Display the information of the active IPX routes.
<SW7750> display ipx routing-table
Routing tables:
Summary count: 2
Dest_Ntwk_ID Proto Pre Ticks Hops Nexthop Interface
0x1 Direct 0 1 0 0.0000-0000-0000 Vlan-interface1
0x2 Static 60 1 1 1.000e-0001-0000 Vlan-interface1
Table 20 Field descriptions of the display ipx routing-table command
Field Description
Dest_Ntwk_ID Destination network number of the route
Proto Protocol type of the route
Pre Route preference
Ticks Tick count of the route
Hops Hop count of the route
Nexthop Next hop of the route
Interface Outgoing interface of the route
# Display the detailed IPX routing information, including the active and inactive
routes.
<SW7750> display ipx routing-table verbose
Routing tables:
Destinations: 2 Routes: 3
Destination Network ID: 0x1
Protocol: Direct Preference: 0
Ticks: 1 Hops: 0
Nexthop: 0.0000-0000-0000 Time: 0
Interface: 1.0020-9c68-448e(Vlan-interface1)
State: <Active>
Protocol: Static Preference: -60
Ticks: 1 Hops: 1
Nexthop: 2.000e-0001-0000 Time: 0
Interface: 2.0020-9c68-448f(Vlan-interface2)
State: <Inactive>
160 CHAPTER 13: IPX CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Destination Network ID: 0x2
Protocol: Static Preference: 60
Ticks: 1 Hops: 1
Nexthop: 1.000e-0001-0000 Time: 0
Interface: 1.0020-9c68-448e(Vlan-interface1)
State: <Active>
Table 21 Field descriptions of the display ipx routing-table verbose command
Field Description
Time Route aging time; it is 0 for the direct and static routes,
meaning they never time out.
State The state of the route. It can be active, inactive, or
delete. Active indicates that this route is an active route.
Inactive indicates that this route is an inactive route.
Delete indicate that this route has been deleted, but it is
not released.
# Display the IPX routing statistics.
<SW7750> display ipx routing-table statistics
Routing tables:
Proto/State route active added deleted freed
Direct 1 1 2 1 1
Static 2 1 2 0 0
RIP 0 0 0 0 0
Default 0 0 0 0 0
Total 3 2 4 1 1
Table 22 Field descriptions of the display ipx routing-table statistics command
Field Description
Proto/State Routing protocol
Route Number of routes, including active and inactive routes
Active Number of active routes
Added Number of added routes
Deleted Number of deleted, but not released routes
Freed Number of released routes
display ipx service-table
Syntax display ipx service-table [ inactive | name name | network network | order {
network | type } | type service-type ] [ verbose ]
View Any view
Parameter inactive: Displays the information of the inactive services.
name name: Displays the name information of the specified server. It is a string of
1 to 47 characters.
network network: Displays the network number information of the specified
server. The network number comprises eight hexadecimal numbers and is in the
display ipx statistics 161
range of 0x1 to 0xFFFFFFFF. The leading 0s can be omitted when you input a
network number.
order { network | type }: Displays the service information by network number or
by service type.
type service-type: Displays the service information with a specified service type. It
comprises four hexadecimal numbers, ranging from 0 to FFFF. 0 indicates all the
service types.
verbose: Displays the detailed service information.
Description Use the display ipx service-table command to view the contents of the IPX
service information table.
Example # Display the contents of the IPX service information table.
[SW7750] display ipx service-table
Abbreviation: S - Static, Pref - Preference(Decimal), NetId - Network number,
NodeId - Node address, hop - Hops(Decimal), Recv-If - Interface from which the service is received
Number of Static Entries: 2
Number of Dynamic Entries: 0
Name Type NetId
S Prn1 0005 000d
S Prn2 0005 0008
# Display the details about the IPX service information table.
[SW7750] display ipx service-table verbose
Abbreviation: S - Static, Pref - Preference(Decimal), NetId - Network number,
NodeId - Node address, hop - Hops(Decimal), Recv-If - Interface from which the service is received
Number of Static Entries: 2
Number of Dynamic Entries: 0
Name Type NetId NodeId Sock Pref Hops Recv-If
S Prn1 0005 000d 000a-000a-000a 0452 500 02 Vlan-interface1
S Prn2 0005 0008 000a-000a-000a 0452 500 03 Vlan-interface1
Table 23 Field descriptions of the display ipx service-table command
Field Description
Name Server name
Type Service type
NetId Network number
NodeId Node number
Sock Socket
Pref Preference
Hops Hop count
Recv-If Name of the interface receiving services
display ipx statistics
Syntax display ipx statistics
View Any view
Parameter None
162 CHAPTER 13: IPX CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the display ipx statistics command to view the IPX statistics.
Example # Display the IPX packet statistics.
<SW7750> display ipx statistics
Received: 0 total, 0 packets pitched
0 packets size errors, 0 format errors
0 bad hops(>16), 0 discarded(hops=16)
0 other errors, 0 local destination
0 can not be dealt with
Sent: 0 forwarded, 0 generated
0 no route, 0 discarded
RIP: 0 sent, 0 received
0 responses sent, 0 responses received
0 requests received, 0 requests dealt
0 requests sent, 0 periodic updates
SAP: 0 general requests received
0 specific requests received
0 GNS requests received
0 general responses sent
0 specific responses sent
0 GNS responses sent
0 periodic updates, 0 errors
PING: 0 requests sent, 0 requests received
0 responses sent, 0 responses received
0 responses in time, 0 responses time out
Table 24 Field descriptions of the display ipx statistics command
Field Description
Received: 0 total, 0 packets pitched Statistics of received packets: the total
number of received packets, the number of
0 packets size errors, 0 format errors
filled packets, the number of packets with
0 bad hops(>16), 0 discarded(hops=16) incorrect length, the number of incorrectly
encapsulated packets, the number of packets
0 other errors, 0 local destination
whose hop count exceeds 16, the number of
0 can not be dealt with packets whose hop count is equal to 16, the
number of other incorrect packets, the
number of packets whose destination is the
local switch, and the number of packets that
cannot be handled
Sent: 0 forwarded, 0 generated Statistics of transmitted packets: the number
of forwarded packets, the number of packets
0 no route, 0 discarded
transmitted from the local switch, the
number of packets that fail to find routes,
and the number of dropped packets
RIP: 0 sent, 0 received Statistics of IPX RIP packets: the total number
of received, transmitted IPX RIP packets, the
0 responses sent, 0 responses received
number of transmitted/received response
0 requests received, 0 requests dealt packets, the number of
received/transmitted/handled packets, and
0 requests sent, 0 periodic updates
the number of the periodic update packets
ipx enable 163
Table 24 Field descriptions of the display ipx statistics command
Field Description
SAP: 0 general requests received Statistics of SAP packets: the number of
received general request packets, the
0 specific requests received
number of special request packets, the
0 GNS requests received number of latest request packets, the
number of transmitted periodic update
0 general responses sent
packets, and the number of received error
0 specific responses sent packets
0 GNS responses sent
0 periodic updates, 0 errors
PING: 0 requests sent, 0 requests received Statistics of Ping packets: the number of
transmitted/received request packets, the
0 responses sent, 0 responses received
number of transmitted/received response
0 responses in time, 0 responses time out packets, the number of prompt response
packets, and the number of timeout
response packets
ipx enable
Syntax ipx enable
undo ipx enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the ipx enable command to enable IPX.
Use the undo ipx enable command to disabled IPX and delete all the IPX
configurations.
Note that after the undo ipx enable command is executed, the IPX
configurations cannot be recovered with the ipx enable command.
Example # Enable IPX.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]ipx enable
ipx encapsulation
Syntax ipx encapsulation [ dot2 | dot3 | ethernet-2 | snap ]
undo ipx encapsulation
View VLAN interface view
164 CHAPTER 13: IPX CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter dot2: Sets the encapsulation format to Ethernet_802.2.
dot3: Sets the encapsulation format to Ethernet_802.3.
ethernet-2: Sets the encapsulation format to Ethernet_II.
snap: Sets the encapsulation format to Ethernet_SNAP.
Description Use the ipx encapsulation command to configure an IPX frame encapsulation
format on the current VLAN interface.
Use the undo ipx encapsulation command to restore the encapsulation format
to the default format.
By default, the IPX frame encapsulation format is Ethernet_802.3 (dot3).
Example # Set the IPX frame encapsulation format to Ethernet_II on VLAN interface 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] ipx encapsulation ethernet-2
ipx netbios-propagation
Syntax ipx netbios-propagation
undo ipx netbios-propagation
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the ipx netbios-propagation command to enable the current VLAN
interface to forward type 20 broadcast packets.
Use the undo ipx netbios-propagation command to disable the current VLAN
interface from forwarding type 20 broadcast packets.
By default, type 20 broadcast packets are not forwarded.
Example # Allow the current interface to forward type 20 broadcast packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] ipx netbios-propagation
ipx network
Syntax ipx network network
ipx rip import-route static 165
undo ipx network
View VLAN interface view
Parameter network: Hexadecimal IPX network number in the range 0x1 to 0xFFFFFFFD. The
leading 0s can be omitted when you input a network number.
Description Use the ipx network command to assign an IPX network number to the VLAN
interface.
Use the undo ipx network command to delete the IPX network number of the
VLAN interface.
By default, no network number is assigned to VLAN interfaces; therefore, IPX is
disabled on all the VLAN interfaces even after it is enabled globally.
Example # Assign the network number 675 to VLAN interface 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] ipx network 675
ipx rip import-route static
Syntax ipx rip import-route static
undo ipx rip import-route static
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the ipx rip import-route static command to enable RIP to import static
routes. The imported routes are included in the update packets of RIP.
Use the undo ipx rip import-route static command to disable RIP from
importing static routes.
By default, IPX RIP does not import static routes.
Note that IPX RIP imports only active static routes; inactive static routes are neither
imported nor forwarded.
Example # Import static routes into IPX RIP.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ipx rip import-route static
166 CHAPTER 13: IPX CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
ipx rip mtu
Syntax ipx rip mtu bytes
undo ipx rip mtu
View VLAN interface view
Parameter bytes: The maximum size of IPX RIP update packets, in bytes. It is in the range of
432 to 1500.
Description Use the ipx rip mtu command to configure the IPX RIP update packet size.
Use the undo ipx rip mtu command to restore the default size.
By default, the default size of IPX RIP update packets is 432 bytes.
Example # Set the maximum RIP update packet size to 500 bytes on VLAN interface 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] ipx rip mtu 500
ipx rip multiplier
Syntax ipx rip multiplier multiplier
undo ipx rip multiplier
View System view
Parameter multiplier: A multiplier of the update interval, decides the aging period of the RIP
routing entries together with the update interval. It is in the range 1 to 1000.
Multiplying the update interval by the multiplier, you can get the actual aging
period.
Description Use the ipx rip multiplier command to configure the aging period of the IPX RIP
routing entries.
Use the undo ipx rip multiplier command to restore the default value. The
aging period of IPX RIP is a multiple of the IPX RIP update interval. You can set
multiple update intervals as an aging period.
By default, the aging period of the IPX RIP routing entries is three times the RIP
updating interval.
Related command: ipx rip timer update
ipx rip timer update 167
Example # Set the RIP aging period of the routing entries to five times the update interval.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ipx rip multiplier 5
ipx rip timer update
Syntax ipx rip timer update seconds
undo ipx rip timer update
View System view
Parameter seconds: RIP update interval, in seconds. It is in the range of 10 to 60,000.
Description Use the ipx rip timer update command to configure a RIP update interval.
Use the undo ipx rip timer update command to restore the default value.
By default, the update interval of IPX RIP is 60 seconds.
Related command: ipx rip multiplier
Example # Set the RIP update interval to 30 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ipx rip timer update 30
ipx route load-balance-path
Syntax ipx route load-balance-path paths
undo ipx route load-balance-path
View System view
Parameter paths: The maximum number of equivalent routes to the same destination. It is in
the range of 1 to 64.
Description Use the ipx route load-balance-path command to configure the maximum
number of equivalent routes to the same destination.
Use the undo ipx route load-balance-path command to restore the default
value.
By default, the maximum number of equivalent routes to the same destination is
1.
168 CHAPTER 13: IPX CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
The maximum number of equivalent routes is the maximum number of active
equivalent routes to the same destination in the current system. If the new
number is less than the number of the current active routes, the system
deactivates those excessive routes.
Example # Set the maximum number of equivalent routes to the same destination to 30.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ipx route load-balance-path 30
ipx route max-reserve-path
Syntax ipx route max-reserve-path paths
undo ipx route max-reserve-path
View System view
Parameter paths: The maximum number of dynamic routes saved in the device to the same
destination. It is in the range of 1 to 255.
Description Use the ipx route max-reserve-path command to configure the maximum
number of dynamic routes saved in the device to the same destination.
Use the undo ipx route max-reserve-path command to restore the default
value.
By default, the maximum number of dynamic routes to the same destination is 4.
When the number of dynamic routes saved in the device to the same destination
exceeds the specified maximum value, the new dynamic routes are dropped
directly without being added into the routing table. When the configured new
value is less than the old one, the switch, however, does not delete the excessive
route entries. These route entries either time out or are manually deleted.
Example # Set the maximum number of dynamic routes saved in the device to the same
destination to 200.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ipx route max-reserve-path 200
ipx route-static
Syntax ipx route-static network network.node [ preference value ] [ tick ticks hop hops
]
undo ipx route-static { network [ network.node ] | all }
ipx sap disable 169
View System view
Parameter network: Destination network number of an IPX static route. It comprises eight
hexadecimal numbers and is in the range of 1 to 0xFFFFFFFE. IPX static routes
whose destination network number is 0xFFFFFFFE are default routes.
network.node: Next hop address of the IPX static route. network defines the
network number; node defines the node address using 12 hexadecimal numbers
that are separated into three parts using "-", each part in the range of 1 to 0xFFFF.
preference value: Static route preference in the range of 1 to 255. A smaller value
indicates a higher preference. By default, the preference values of the static
routes, direct routes, and dynamic RIP IPX routes are 60 (user-configurable), 0, and
100.
ticks ticks: Time that a packet must take to reach the destination network, with 1
tick = 1/18 seconds. The value ranges from 1 to 65534. The default value is
1.When the tick value of a VLAN interface is modified, the tick value of the static
route also changes. You must configure both the tick value and the hop count.
hop hops: Number of the switches on the way to the destination network. It is in
the range 1 to 15 and defaults to 1. You must configure both the hop count and
tick value.
all: All the IPX static routes.
Description Use the ipx route-static command to configure a static IPX route.
Use the undo ipx route-static command to delete the static IPX route.
The IPX static routes whose destination network number is 0xFFFFFFFE are default
routes.
Example # Configure an IPX static route, with the destination network number being 0x5a,
next hop being 675.0-0c91-f61f, tick value being 10 and hop count being 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ipx route-static 5a 675.0-0c91-f61f tick 10 hop 2
ipx sap disable
Syntax ipx sap disable
undo ipx sap disable
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the ipx sap disable command to disable SAP on the current VLAN interface.
170 CHAPTER 13: IPX CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo ipx sap disable command to enable SAP on the current VLAN
interface.
By default, SAP is enabled as soon as IPX is enabled on the VLAN interface.
Example # Disable SAP on VLAN interface 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] ipx sap disable
ipx sap gns-disable-reply
Syntax ipx sap gns-disable-reply
undo ipx sap gns-disable-reply
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the ipx sap gns-disable-reply command to disable IPX GNS reply on the
current VLAN interface.
Use the undo ipx sap gns-disable-reply command to enable IPX GNS reply on
the current VLAN interface.
By default, GNS reply is enabled on the current VLAN interface.
Example # Disable GNS reply on VLAN interface 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] ipx sap gns-disable-reply
ipx sap gns-load-balance
Syntax ipx sap gns-load-balance
undo ipx sap gns-load-balance
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the ipx sap gns-load-balance command to configure the switch to respond
to GNS requests through Round-Robin polling.
ipx sap max-reserve-servers 171
Use the undo ipx sap gns-load-balance command to configure the switch to
respond to GNS requests with information of the nearest server.
By default, the switch responds to SAP GNS requests with the information of a
server that is picked out in turn from all the known servers. This prevents a server
from getting overloaded.
Related command: ipx sap gns-disable-reply
Example # Respond to GNS requests with the information of the nearest server.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] undo ipx sap gns-load-balance
ipx sap max-reserve-servers
Syntax ipx sap max-reserve-servers length
undo ipx sap max-reserve-servers
View System view
Parameter length: The maximum length of the service information reserve queue for one
service type. It is in the range of 1 to 2048.
Description Use the ipx sap max-reserve-servers command to configure the maximum
length of the service information reserve queue for one service type.
Use the undo ipx sap max-reserve-servers command to restore the default
value.
By default, the maximum length of the service information reserve queue for one
service type is 2,048.
Example # Set the maximum length of the service information reserve queue for one service
type to 1024.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ipx sap max-reserve-servers 1024
ipx sap mtu
Syntax ipx sap mtu bytes
undo ipx sap mtu
View VLAN interface view
172 CHAPTER 13: IPX CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter bytes: The maximum SAP packet size, in bytes. It is in the range of 480 to 1500.
Description Use the ipx sap mtu command to configure the maximum size of SAP update
packets.
Use the undo ipx sap mtu command to restore the default value.
By default, the default size of SAP update packets is 480 bytes.
Example # Set the maximum size of SAP update packets to 674 bytes, allowing 10 service
entries on VLAN interface 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] ipx sap mtu 674
ipx sap multiplier
Syntax ipx sap multiplier multiplier
undo ipx sap multiplier
View System view
Parameter multiplier: A multiplier of the update interval, decides the aging period of the SAP
routing entries together with the update interval. It is in the range of 1 to 1000.
Multiplying the update interval by the multiplier, you can get the actual aging
period.
Description Use the ipx sap multiplier command to configure the aging period of the SAP
routing entries.
Use the undo ipx sap multiplier command to restore the default value.
By default, the aging period of the SAP service information entries is 3.
Related command: ipx sap timer update
Example # Set the aging period of the SAP service entries to five times the update interval.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ipx sap multiplier 5
ipx sap timer update
Syntax ipx sap timer update seconds
undo ipx sap timer update
ipx service 173
View System view
Parameter seconds: SAP update interval. It is in the range of 10 to 60,000.
Description Use the ipx sap timer update command to configure a SAP update interval.
Use the undo ipx sap timer update command to restore the default value.
By default, the SAP update interval is 60 seconds.
Note that this command is invalid if the triggered updates feature is applied on the
VLAN interface.
Related command: ipx sap multiplier and ipx update-change-only.
Example # Set the SAP update interval to 300 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ipx sap timer update 300
ipx service
Syntax ipx service service-type name network.node socket hop hops [ preference
preference ]
undo ipx service { service-type [ name [ network.node ] ] [ preference
preference ] | all }
View System view
Parameter service-type: A 4-byte hexadecimal number ranging from 0 to FFFF. 0 indicates all
the service types.
name: Specifies the server providing the specified service, a string of 1 to 47
characters.
network.node: Network number and node value of the server. The network
number comprises eight hexadecimal numbers and is in the range of 0x1 to
0xFFFFFFFD. A node address identifies a node in the network; it is 48 bits long and
comprises 12 hexadecimal numbers that are separated into three parts by "-". The
leading 0s can be omitted when you input a network number.
socket: Comprises four hexadecimal numbers and is in the range 0x1 to 0xFFFF.
hop hops: Number of hops to the server, written in decimal and in the range of 1
to 15. The hop count equal to or exceeding 16 indicates that the service is
unreachable.
preference: Service preference value. The value ranges from 1 to 255. A smaller
number indicates a higher preference. By default, the preference value of the
174 CHAPTER 13: IPX CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
static service entries is 60 (configurable); the preference value of the dynamic
service entries is fixed to 500.
all: Deletes all the static service entries.
Description Use the ipx service command to add a static service entry to the service
information table.
Use the undo ipx service command to delete a static service entry from the
service information table.
By default, no static service entry is found in the service information table.
Example # Add a static service entry, setting service type to 4, server name to FileServer,
server network number to 130, node number to 0000-0a0b-abcd, hop count to 1
and server preference to 60.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ipx service 4 FileServer 130.0000-0a0b-abcd 451 hop 1 prefe
rence 60
ipx split-horizon
Syntax ipx split-horizon
undo ipx split-horizon
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the ipx split-horizon command to enable split horizon on the current VLAN
interface.
Use the undo ipx split-horizon command to disable split horizon on the current
VLAN interface.
By default, split horizon is enabled.
Example # Enable split horizon on VLAN interface 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] ipx split-horizon
ipx tick
Syntax ipx tick ticks
ipx update-change-only 175
undo ipx tick
View VLAN interface view
Parameter ticks: Delay, in ticks; ranging from 0 to 30000. One tick is equal to 1/18 seconds.
Description Use the ipx tick command to configure an IPX packet forwarding delay on a
VLAN interface.
Use the undo ipx tick command to restore the default value.
By default, the forwarding delay on the VLAN interface is one tick.
Example # Configure VLAN interface 2 to experience a delay of five ticks before forwarding
IPX packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] ipx tick 5
ipx update-change-only
Syntax ipx update-change-only
undo ipx update-change-only
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the ipx update-change-only command to enable triggered update on the
current VLAN interface.
Use the undo ipx update-change-only command to disable triggered update
on the current VLAN interface.
By default, triggered update of IPX is disabled.
Example # Enable triggered update of IPX on VLAN interface 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] ipx update-change-only
reset ipx routing-table statistics protocol
Syntax reset ipx routing-table statistics protocol { all | default | direct | rip | static }
176 CHAPTER 13: IPX CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View User view
Parameter all: Clears the statistics of all the IPX routes.
default: Clears the statistics of the default IPX routes.
direct: Clears the statistics of the direct IPX routes.
rip: Clears the statistics of the IPX RIP routes.
static: Clears the statistics of the static IPX routes.
Description Use the reset ipx routing-table statistics protocol command to clear the
statistics on the IPX routes of a specific route type.
Related command: display ipx routing-table statistics.
Example # Clear the statistics of the IPX static routes.
<SW7750> reset ipx routing-table statistics protocol static
reset ipx statistics
Syntax reset ipx statistics
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset ipx statistics command to clear the IPX statistics.
Example # Clear the IPX statistics.
<SW7750> reset ipx statistics
GARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
14
display garp statistics
Syntax display garp statistics [ interface interface-list ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-list: List of Ethernet ports. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index lists for this
argument.
Description Use the display garp statistics command to display the GARP statistics of
specified ports or all ports.
This command displays the following information:
■ Number of the GMRP packets received
■ Number of the GVRP packets received
■ Number of the GMRP packets transmitted
■ Number of the GVRP packets transmitted
■ Number of the packets discarded
Example # Display the GARP statistics of port Ethernet2/0/1.
<SW7750> display garp statistics interface Ethernet2/0/1
GARP statistics on port Ethernet2/0/1
Number Of GMRP Frames Received : 0
Number Of GVRP Frames Received : 0
Number Of GMRP Frames Transmitted : 0
Number Of GVRP Frames Transmitted : 0
Number Of Frames Discarded : 0
display garp timer
Syntax display garp timer [ interface interface-list ]
View Any view
178 CHAPTER 14: GARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter interface-list: List of Ethernet ports. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index lists for this
argument.
Description Use the display garp timer command to display the settings of the GARP timers
on specified ports or all ports.
This command displays the settings of the following timers:
■ Join timer
■ Leave timer
■ LeaveAll timer
■ Hold timer
Related command: garp timer, garp timer leaveall.
Example # Display the settings of the GARP timers on port Ethernet2/0/1.
<SW7750> display garp timer interface Ethernet2/0/1
GARP timers on port Ethernet2/0/1
Garp Join Time : 20 centiseconds
Garp Leave Time : 60 centiseconds
Garp LeaveAll Time : 1000 centiseconds
Garp Hold Time : 10 centiseconds
garp timer
Syntax garp timer { hold | join | leave } timer-value
undo garp timer { hold | join | leave }
View Ethernet port view
Parameter hold: Sets the GARP Hold timer. When a GARP entity receives a piece of
registration information, it does not send out a Join message immediately. Instead,
to save the bandwidth resources, it starts the Hold timer, puts all registration
information it receives before the timer times out into one Join message and sends
out the message after the timer times out.
join: Sets the GARP Join timer. To transmit the Join messages reliably to other
entities, a GARP entity sends each Join message two times. The Join timer is used
to define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join message.
leave: Sets the GARP Leave timer. When a GARP entity expects to deregister a
piece of attribute information, it sends out a Leave message. Any GARP entity
receiving this message starts its Leave timer, and deregisters the attribute
information if it does not receives a Join message again before the timer times out.
garp timer leaveall 179
timer-value: Timeout time (in centiseconds) of the GARP timer (Hold, Join or Leave)
to be set. This argument needs to be a multiple of 5. By default, it is 10, 20, and
60 for Hold, Join and Leave timers respectively.
Description Use the garp timer command to set a GARP timer (that is, the Hold timer, the
Join timer, or the Leaver timer) for an Ethernet port.
Use the undo garp timer command to restore the default setting of a GARP
timer.
The timeout ranges of the timers vary depending on the timeout values you set for
other timers. If you want to set the timeout time of a timer to a value out of the
current range, you can set the timeout time of the associated timer to another
value to change the timeout range of this timer.
The following table describes the relations between the timers:
Table 25 Relations between the timers
Timer Lower threshold Upper threshold
Hold 10 centiseconds This upper threshold is less than or equal
to one-half of the timeout time of the Join
timer. You can change the threshold by
changing the timeout time of the Join
timer.
Join This lower threshold is greater This upper threshold is less than one-half
than or equal to twice the of the timeout time of the Leave timer.
timeout time of the Hold timer. You can change the threshold by changing
You can change the threshold by the timeout time of the Leave timer.
changing the timeout time of the
Hold timer.
Leave This lower threshold is greater This upper threshold is less than the
than twice the timeout time of timeout time of the LeaveAll timer. You
the Join timer. You can change can change the threshold by changing the
the threshold by changing the timeout time of the LeaveAll timer.
timeout time of the Join timer.
LeaveAll This lower threshold is greater 32,765 centiseconds
than the timeout time of the
Leave timer. You can change
threshold by changing the
timeout time of the Leave timer.
Related command: display garp timer.
Example # Set the GARP Join timer to 25 centiseconds for port Ethernet2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] garp timer join 25
garp timer leaveall
Syntax garp timer leaveall timer-value
180 CHAPTER 14: GARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
undo garp timer leaveall
View System view
Parameter timer-value: Setting (in centiseconds) of the GARP LeaveAll timer. You need to set
this argument with the Leave timer settings of other Ethernet ports as references.
That is, this argument needs to be larger than the Leave timer settings of any
Ethernet ports. Also note that this argument needs to be a multiple of 5 and
cannot be larger than 32,765.
By default, the LeaveAll timer is set to 1,000 centiseconds (that is, 10 seconds).
Description Use the garp timer leaveall command to set the GARP LeaveAll timer.
Use the undo garp timer leaveall command to restore the default setting of
the GARP LeaveAll timer.
Once a GARP entity starts up, it starts the LeaveAll timer, and sends out a
LeaveALL message after the timer times out, so that other GARP entities can
re-register all the attribute information on this entity. After that, the entity restarts
the LeaveAll timer to begin a new cycle.
Related command: display garp timer.
Example # Set the GARP LeaveAll timer to 100 centiseconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] garp timer leaveall 100
reset garp statistics
Syntax reset garp statistics [ interface interface-list ]
View User view
Parameter interface-list: List of Ethernet ports. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index lists for this
argument.
Description Use the reset garp statistics command to clear the GARP statistics (such as the
information about the packets received/sent/discarded by GVRP/GMRP) on
specified or all ports.
Executing the reset garp statistics command without any parameter clears the
GARP statistics of all ports.
Related command: display garp statistics.
reset garp statistics 181
Example # Clear GARP statistics of all ports.
<SW7750> reset garp statistics
182 CHAPTER 14: GARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
GVRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
15
display gvrp statistics
Syntax display gvrp statistics [ interface interface-list ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-list: List of Ethernet ports. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index lists for this
argument.
Description Use the display gvrp statistics command to display the GVRP statistics of
specified or all trunk ports.
This command displays the following information:
■ GVRP status
■ Whether GVRP is running
■ Number of the GVRP entries that fail to be registered
■ Source MAC address of the previous GVRP PDU
■ GVRP registration type of a port
Example # Display the GVRP statistics of port Ethernet2/0/1, assuming that the port is a
trunk port.
<SW7750> display gvrp statistics interface Ethernet2/0/1
GVRP statistics on port Ethernet2/0/1
GVRP Status : Enabled
GVRP Running : Yes
GVRP Failed Registrations : 0
GVRP Last Pdu Origin : 0000-0000-0000
GVRP Registration Type : Normal
display gvrp status
Syntax display gvrp status
184 CHAPTER 15: GVRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display gvrp status command to display the global GVRP status
(enabled or disabled).
Example # Display the global GVRP status.
<SW7750> display gvrp status
GVRP is enabled
The above information indicates that GVRP is enabled globally.
gvrp
Syntax gvrp
undo gvrp
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the gvrp command to enable GVRP globally (in system view) or for a port (in
Ethernet port view).
Use the undo gvrp command to disable GVRP globally (in system view) or on a
port (in Ethernet port view).
By default, GVRP is disabled both globally and on ports.
n Note that:
■ To enable GVRP for a port, you need to enable GVRP globally first.
■ GVRP is disabled on any ports if GVRP is disabled globally. In this case, you
cannot enable GVRP for a port.
■ You can enable/disable GVRP only on trunk ports.
■ After you enable GVRP on a trunk port, you cannot change the port to other
types.
Related command: display gvrp status.
Example # Enable GVRP globally.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] gvrp
GVRP is enabled globally.
gvrp registration 185
gvrp registration
Syntax gvrp registration { fixed | forbidden | normal }
undo gvrp registration
View Ethernet port view
Parameter fixed: Allows to add or register the current port to the manually created VLAN,
and prohibits to register or deregister the current port to the dynamic VLAN.
forbidden: Deregisters all the VLANs except VLAN 1 on the current port, and
inhibits the creation and registration of any other VLAN on the current port.
normal: Allows both manual and dynamic creation, registration, and
Deregistration of VLANs on the current port.
Description Use the gvrp registration command to configure the GVRP registration type on
a port.
Use the undo gvrp registration command to restore the default GVRP
registration type on a port.
By default, the registration type is normal.
Note that these commands can be operated only on trunk ports.
Related command: display gvrp statistics
Example # Configure the GVRP registration type on the port Ethernet2/0/1 to fixed.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] gvrp registration fixed
186 CHAPTER 15: GVRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
QINQ CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
16
display port vlan-vpn
Syntax display port vlan-vpn
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display port vlan-vpn command to display the QinQ configuration of
the current system, including the current status of VLAN-VPN and the VLAN ID of
VLAN-VPN.
Example # Display the QinQ configuration of the current system.
<SW7750> display port vlan-vpn
Ethernet3/0/4
VLAN-VPN status: enabled
VLAN-VPN VLAN: 1
vlan-vpn enable
Syntax vlan-vpn enable
undo vlan-vpn
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the vlan-vpn enable command to enable the QinQ function for a port.
Use the undo vlan-vpn command to disable the QinQ function for a port.
By default, the QinQ function is disabled.
With the QinQ function enabled, a received packet is tagged with the default
VLAN tag of the receiving port no matter whether or not the packet already carries
a VLAN tag. If the packet already carries a VLAN tag, the packet becomes a
dual-tagged packet. Otherwise, the packet becomes a packet carrying the default
VLAN tag of the port.
188 CHAPTER 16: QINQ CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
c CAUTION:
■ The QinQ feature is unavailable if the port has the Voice VLAN feature enabled.
■ After you enable the QinQ feature for a port, the Voice VLAN function is not
available on the port.
■ 3C16863 and 3C16862 I/O Modules do not support the QinQ feature.
Example # Enable the QinQ function for Ethernet2/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] vlan-vpn enable
vlan-vpn priority
Syntax vlan-vpn priority inner-priority remark outer-priority
undo vlan-vpn priority inner-priority
View Ethernet port view
Parameter inner-priority: Priority of the inner tag to be mapped, in the range of 0 to 7.
outer-priority: Priority of the outer tag obtained through mapping the priority of
the inner tag, in the range of 0 to 7.
Description Use the vlan-vpn priority command to enable the inner-to-outer tag priority
mapping for the specific port.
Use the undo vlan-vpn priority command to restore the default setting.
By default, inner-to-outer tag priority mapping is not configured for a port.
Example # Enable inner-to-outer tag priority mapping for Ethernet2/0/1. Map the inner tag
priority 3 to outer tag priority 5.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] vlan-vpn priority 3 remark 5
SELECTIVE QINQ CONFIGURATION
17 COMMANDS
n You can implement traffic-based selective QinQ on a Switch 7750 by using ACLs
and QoS techniques. Refer to “QoS Commands” on page 777.
double-vlan-id
Syntax double-vlan-id inbound vlan-id-list outer-vid vlan-id
undo double-vlan-id inbound { all | vlan-id-list } outer-vid vlan-id
View QinQ view
Parameter inbound vlan-id-list: Species one or more inner VLAN IDs as part of a match
condition. You can provide up to 10 VLAN ID lists, by each of which you can
specify an indiviual VLAN ID in the form of vlan-id, or a range of VLAN IDs in the
form of start-vlan-id to end-vlan-id, where the end VLAN ID must be greater than
the start VLAN ID.
all: Species all packets.
outer-vid vlan-id: Specified an outer VLAN ID as part of a match condition.
Description Use the double-vlan-id command to define a match condition for outer tag
replacement. The outer VLAN tag of every matched packet will be replaced with
the VLAN tag specifed in the vlan-vpn vid command.
Use the undo double-vlan-id command to remove the configuration.
By default, no match condition is configured for outer tag replacement.
Related command: vlan-vpn vid.
n ■ The double-vlan-id command is to be used in conjunction with the vlan-vpn
vid command.
■ The double-vlan-id command cannot be used while the vlan-vpn enable
and raw-vlan-id inbound commands are in effect on the port.
Example # Configure outer tag replacement on Ethernet2/0/1 to replace the outer VLAN
tag of packets with an inner VLAN ID in the range of 8 to 15 and an outer VLAN ID
of 30 with the tag of VLAN 20. Specify Ethernet 2/0/5 as the uplink port and
configure it to send packets without removing the outer VLAN tag.
190 CHAPTER 17: SELECTIVE QINQ CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] vlan-vpn vid 20 uplink Ethernet 2/0/5
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1-vid-20] double-vlan-id inbound 8 to 15 outer-vid 30
raw-vlan-id inbound
Syntax raw-vlan-id inbound vlan-id-list
undo raw-vlan-id inbound { all | vlan-id-list }
View QinQ view
Parameter vlan-id-list: List of VLAN Ids. You need to provide this argument in the form of
vlan-id-list = { vlan-id [ to { vlan-id } ] } & <1-10>, where & <1-10> means that you
can provide up to ten VLAN Ids/VLAN ID lists.
all: Specifies the packets of all the VLANs.
Description Use the raw-vlan-id inbound command to specify a group of VLANs,
single-tagged inbound packets of which are to be tagged with specified outer
VLAN tags.
Use the undo raw-vlan-id inbound command to remove the configuration.
Note that the raw-vlan-id inbound command needs to be coupled by the
vlan-vpn vid command.
Example # Configure the inbound packets of VLAN 8 through VLAN 15 received on
Ethernet2/0/1 to be tagged with outer tag of VLAN 20. Specify Ethernet2/0/5 as
the upstream port, and specify Ethernet2/0/5 to remove outer tags when it
forwards packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] vlan-vpn vid 20 uplink Ethernet 2/0/5 untagged
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1-vid-20] raw-vlan-id inbound 8 to 15
vlan-vpn vid
Syntax vlan-vpn vid vlan-id uplink interface-type interface-number [ untagged ]
undo vlan-vpn vid vlan-id
View Ethernet port view
Parameter vid vlan-id: Specifies ID of the VLAN whose tag is to be inserted to matched
packets as the outer VLAN tag.
vlan-vpn vid 191
uplink interface-type interface-number: Specifies the upstream port of the
packets to be tagged with outer VLAN tags.
untagged: Sets whether to keep VLAN tags of the packets tagged with outer
VLAN tags when they are forwarded on the upstream port.
Description Use the vlan-vpn vid command to specify the VLAN whose tag is to be inserted
to matched packets as the outer VLAN tag and specify the upstream port for these
packets. You can use the raw-vlan-id inbound command to specify the outer
VLAN tag for packets with the specified inner VLAN tags.
Use the undo vlan-vpn vid command to remove the configuration.
When the upstream port and the port where the selective QinQ configured are not
on the same module, if the module where the upstream port resides is unplugged,
this configuration is invisible. This configuration takes effect again when the
unplugged module is plugged.
When the specified upstream port is available, the configuration of the
raw-vlan-id inbound command remains even if the upstream port configuration
or untagged attribute in this configuration is modified. When the upstream port is
unavailable, the configuration of the raw-vlan-id inbound command is removed
if this configuration is modified.
c CAUTION: A QinQ-enabled port and its corresponding upstream port cannot be
added to the same aggregation group.
n ■ Type-A I/O Modules do not support the selective QinQ feature. Type A I/O
Modules include: 3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A, 3C16858, 3C16859, and
32Gbps and 64Gbps Switch Fabrics.
■ The 3C16863 and 3C16862 I/O Modules do not support the selective QinQ
feature.
Note that the vlan-vpn vid command needs to be coupled by the raw-vlan-id
inbound command.
Example # Configure to use VLAN 20 tag as the outer VLAN tag of packets with the inner
tag of VLAN 10 received on Ethernet2/0/1. Specify the upstream port as
Ethernet2/0/5 and specify the upstream port to remove outer tags of the packets
when forwarding the packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] vlan-vpn vid 20 uplink Ethernet 2/0/5 untagge
d
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1-vid-20] raw-vlan-id inbound 10
192 CHAPTER 17: SELECTIVE QINQ CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
SHARED VLAN CONFIGURATION
18 COMMANDS
display shared-vlan
Syntax display shared-vlan
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display shared-vlan command to display the shared VLANs configured
for all the I/O Modules and Fabrics in the system.
Example # Display the shared VLANs configured for all the I/O Modules and Fabrics in the
system.
<SW7750> display shared-vlan
shared-vlan 1 mainboard
shared-vlan 3 slot 4
The fields above show that the shared VLAN configured in the current system
include VLAN 1 on the Fabric and VLAN 3 on the I/O Module in slot 4.
shared-vlan mainboard
Syntax shared-vlan vlan-id mainboard
undo shared-vlan vlan-id mainboard
View System view
Parameter vlan-id: ID of the shared VLAN, in the range of 1 to 4,094.
Description Use the shared-vlan mainboard command to configure a shared VLAN on the
Fabric. Use the undo shared-vlan mainboard command to remove the shared
VLAN on the Fabric.
By default, no shared VLAN is configured on the Fabric.
n ■ For a Switch 7758 with two Fabrics equipped, the shared VLAN configured on
the primary Fabric also takes effect on the secondary Fabric.
194 CHAPTER 18: SHARED VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
■ You must specify an existing VLAN to be the shared VLAN. Otherwise, the
system prompts configuration failure information.
c CAUTION: The shared VLAN can destroy RRPP rings and disable the RRPP feature,
and thus cause rings in the network. So make sure that the RRPP feature and the
shared VLAN feature is not enabled on a switch at the same time.
Example # Specify VLAN 10 to be a shared VLAN on the Fabric.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] shared-vlan 10 mainboard
shared-vlan slot
Syntax shared-vlan vlan-id slot slot-number
undo shared-vlan vlan-id slot slot-number
View System view
Parameter vlan-id: ID of the shared VLAN, in the range of 1 to 4,094.
Description Use the shared-vlan slot command to configure shared VLAN on the I/O
Module. Use the undo shared-vlan slot command to remove the shared VLAN
from the I/O Module.
By default, no shared VLAN is configured on the I/O Module.
n You must specify an existing VLAN to be the shared VLAN. Otherwise, the system
prompts configuration failure information.
c CAUTION: The shared VLAN can destroy RRPP rings and disable the RRPP feature,
and thus cause rings in the network. So make sure that the RRPP feature and the
shared VLAN feature is not enabled on a switch at the same time.
Example # Specify VLAN 20 to be the shared VLAN on the I/O Module in slot 3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] shared-vlan 20 slot 3
PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION
19 COMMANDS
broadcast-suppression
Syntax broadcast-suppression { ratio | bandwidth bandwidth | pps pps }
undo broadcast-suppression
View Ethernet port view
Parameter ratio: Maximum ratio of the received broadcast traffic to the total bandwidth on
an Ethernet port. The value ranges from 1 to 100 and defaults to 100. The smaller
the ratio is, the less broadcast traffic is allowed.
bandwidth bandwidth: Specifies the maximum bandwidth of broadcast traffic
received on the Ethernet port. For a 100 Mbps port, the bandwidth argument is in
the range of 1 to 100 in Mbps; for a gigabit port, the bandwidth argument is in
the range of 1 to 1000 in Mbps.
pps pps: Specifies the maximum number of broadcast packets allowed to be
received per second on an Ethernet port (in pps).
■ For a 100 Mbps Ethernet port, the pps argument is in the range of 0 to
148,810.
■ For a Gigabit Ethernet port, the pps argument is in the range of 1,488,100.
■ For a 10GE port, the pps argument is in the range of 0 to 14,881,000.
Description Use the broadcast-suppression command to limit broadcast traffic allowed to
be received on each port (in system view) or on a specified port (in Ethernet port
view).
Use the undo broadcast-suppression command to restore the default
broadcast suppression setting.
When incoming broadcast traffic exceeds the broadcast traffic threshold you set,
the system drops the packets exceeding the threshold to reduce the broadcast
traffic ratio to the reasonable range, so as to keep normal network service.
By default, broadcast suppression is disabled.
n Type-A I/O Modules, including 3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A, 3C16858, and
3C16859, do not support enabling broadcast suppression on ports.
196 CHAPTER 19: PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
A port supports one way of broadcast suppression at the same time. If broadcast
suppression has been configured for a port for multiple times, only the latest
configuration takes effect.
Example # Allow incoming broadcast traffic to occupy at most 20% of the bandwidth on
the port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] broadcast-suppression 20
# Set the maximum number of broadcast packets that can be received per second
by the Ethernet2/0/2 port to 1000 pps.
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/2] broadcast-suppression pps 1000
copy configuration
Syntax copy configuration source { interface-type interface-number |
aggregation-group source-agg-id } destination { interface-list [
aggregation-group destination-agg-id ] | aggregation-group
destination-agg-id }
View System view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.
source-agg-id: Source aggregation group number, in the range of 1 to 384. The
port with the smallest port number in the aggregation group is used as the source
port.
interface-list: Destination port list, interface-list =interface-type interface-number [
to interface-type interface-number ] &<1-10. &<1-10> means that you can input
up to 10 ports/port ranges.
destination-agg-id: Destination aggregation group number, in the range of 1 to
384.
Description Use the copy configuration command to copy the configuration on a port to
some other ports to keep consistent configuration on them.
n Any aggregation group port you input in the destination port list will be removed
from the list and the copy command will not take effect on the port. If you want
an aggregation group port to have the same configuration with the source port,
you can specify the aggregation group of the port as the destination (with the
destination-agg-id argument).
Example # Copy the configuration of Ethernet3/01 to Ethernet3/0/2.
description 197
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] copy configuration source Ethernet3/0/1 destination Ethernet3/0/2
The operation will be invalid for some special port(s) in the destination port
list, such as aggregation port.
Copying VLAN configuration...
Copying Protocol based VLAN configuration...
Copying LACP configuration...
Copying QOS configuration...
Copying STP configuration...
Copying speed/duplex configuration...
Port configuration copy complete
description
Syntax description text
undo description
View Ethernet port view
Parameter text: Port description, a string of up to 80 characters.
Description Use the description command to set a port description string.
Use the undo description command to remove the port description string.
By default, no description is defined for a port.
Example # Set description string "lanswitch-interface" for the Ethernet2/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] description lanswitch-interface
display brief interface
Syntax display brief interface [ interface-type interface-number ] [ | { begin | include |
exclude } regular-expression ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.
|: Specifies to use a regular expression to describe the configuration information
entries to be displayed.
begin: Each entry must begin with a specified character string.
include: Each entry must include a specified character string.
198 CHAPTER 19: PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
exclude: Each entry must not include a specified character string.
regular-expression: Regular expression, a string of 1 to 256 characters.
Description Use the display brief interface command to display the brief configuration
information about one or all interfaces, including: interface type, link state, link
rate, duplex mode, link type, default VLAN ID and port description string (only the
first 33 characters are displayed).
This command is similar to the display interface command, but the information
it displays is briefer.
n Currently, for the port types other than Ethernet port, this command only displays
the link state, and shows "--" in all other configuration information fields.
Related command: display interface.
Example # Display the brief configuration information about the Ethernet2/0/1 port.
<SW7750> display brief interface Ethernet2/0/1
Interface:
Eth - Ethernet GE - GigabitEthernet
Loop - LoopBack Vlan - Vlan-interface M-E - M-Ethernet
Link:
spf -spoofing
Speed/Duplex:
A - auto-negotiation
Interface Link Speed Duplex Type PVID Description
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth3/0/1 DOWN A A access 1 abc
Table 26 Field descriptions of the display brief interface command
Field Description
Interface Port type
Link Link state: UP or DOWN
Speed Link rate
Duplex Duplex mode
Type Link type: access, hybrid or trunk
PVID Default VLAN ID
Description Port description string (only the first 33 characters are displayed)
display interface
Syntax display interface [ interface-type | interface-type interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.
display interface 199
Description Use the display interface command to display port configuration.
When using this command:
■ If you specify neither port type nor port number, the command displays
information about all ports.
■ If you specify only port type, the command displays information about all ports
of the specified type.
■ If you specify both port type and port number, the command displays
information about the specified port.
Example # Display the configuration information of the Ethernet2/0/1 port.
<SW7750> display interface Ethernet2/0/1
Ethernet2/0/1 current state : DOWN
IP Sending Frames’ Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc2c-3f11
The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Media type is twisted pair, loopback not set
Port hardware type is 100_BASE_TX
Unknown-speed mode, unknown-duplex mode
Link speed type is autonegotiation, link duplex type is autonegotiation
Flow-control is not enabled
The Maximum Frame Length is 1536
Allow jumbo frame to pass
Port monitor last value: 1
PVID: 1
Mdi type: auto
Port link-type: access
Tagged VLAN ID : none
Untagged VLAN ID : 1
Last 300 seconds input: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
Last 300 seconds output: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
Input(total): 1150 packets, 149854 bytes
542 broadcasts, 55 multicasts, - pauses
Input(normal): - packets, - bytes
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses
Input: - input errors, 0 runts, - giants, 0 throttles, 0 CRC
0 frame, - overruns, - aborts, - ignored, - parity errors
Output(total): 1288 packets, 116919 bytes
0 broadcasts, 886 multicasts, 0 pauses
Output(normal): - packets, - bytes
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses
Output: 0 output errors, - underruns, - buffer failures
0 aborts, 0 deferred, 0 collisions, 0 late collisions
- lost carrier, - no carrier
Receive Packet Peak Value Info: 35 bytes/sec, happened at 09:24:56 06-19-2007
Transmit Packet Peak Value Info: 37 bytes/sec, happened at 09:25:01 06-19-2007
Table 27 Field descriptions of the display interface command
Field Description
Ethernet2/0/1 current state Enable/disable status of the current
Ethernet port
IP Sending Frames’ Format Ethernet frame format
Hardware address Port hardware address
The Maximum Transmit Unit The maximum transmit unit (MTU)
Media type Media type
Port hardware type Port hardware type
Flow-control is enabled Flow-control status of the port
The Maximum Frame Length Maximum frame length allowed on
the port
200 CHAPTER 19: PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 27 Field descriptions of the display interface command
Field Description
Allow jumbo frame to pass Whether Jumbo frame is allowed on
the port.
Port monitor last value: 5 Delay of reporting down state to the
system for a port
PVID Default VLAN ID of the port
Mdi type Network cable type
Port link-type Port link type
Tagged VLAN ID Identify the VLANs whose packets
will be forwarded with tags on the
port.
Untagged VLAN ID Identify the VLANs whose packets
will be forwarded without tags on
the port.
Last 300 seconds input: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec Rate and number of incoming and
outgoing packets in the last 300
Last 300 seconds output: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
seconds
Input(total): 1150 packets, 149854 bytes Statistics on the incoming packets
and errors on the port
542 broadcasts, 55 multicasts, - pauses
The "-" indicates that the statistical
Input(normal): - packets, - bytes
item is not supported.
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses
Input: - input errors, 0 runts, - giants, 0 throttles, 0 CRC
0 frame, - overruns, - aborts, - ignored, - parity errors
Output(total): 1288 packets, 116919 bytes Statistics on the outgoing packets
and errors on the port
0 broadcasts, 886 multicasts, 0 pauses
The "-" indicates that the statistical
Output(normal): - packets, - bytes
item is not supported.
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses
Output: 0 output errors, - underruns, - buffer failures
0 aborts, 0 deferred, 0 collisions, 0 late collisions
- lost carrier, - no carrier
Receive Packet Peak Value Info Peak incoming rate (in Bps)
A port figures out the average
incoming rate periodically. The Peak
incoming rate displayed by the
display interface command is the
maximum average incoming rate
ever figured out.
happened at Time when the peak rate occurs
Transmit Packet Peak Value Info Peak outgoing rate (in Bps)
A port figures out the average
outgoing rate periodically. The Peak
outgoing rate displayed by the
display interface command is the
maximum average outgoing rate
ever figured out.
display loopback-detection 201
display loopback-detection
Syntax display loopback-detection [ port-loopbacked ] [ | { begin | include | exclude
} regular-expression ]
View Any view
Parameter port-loopbacked: Specifies to display the information of ports where loopback
occurs.
|: Specifies to use a regular expression to display the details in the configuration
information of an interface.
begin: Specifies the interface information to begin with a specific character/string.
include: Specifies the interface information to include a specific character/string.
exclude: Specifies the interface information to exclude a specific character/string.
regular-expression: Regular expression, a string containing 1 to 256 characters.
Description Use the display loopback-detection command to display the information
related to the loopback detection function on the port.
Example # Display the information about loopback detection on the port and "40" is
included in the interface information.
<SW7750> display loopback-detection | include 40
Loopback-detection interval time is 30 seconds
Interface detect control per-vlan loopback-status
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet2/0/40 N N N not-loop
Ethernet3/0/40 N N N not-loop
Table 28 Field descriptions of the display loopback-detection command
Field Description
Loopback-detection interval time Interval of performing loopback detection
Interface Interface name
detect Whether loopback detection is enabled
control Processing mode for the port where loopback is
detected
per-vlan Whether to perform loopback detection on all the
VLANs on the port
loopback status Whether loopback occurs on the current port
duplex
Syntax duplex { auto | full | half }
undo duplex
202 CHAPTER 19: PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View Ethernet port view
Parameter auto: Sets the port to auto-negotiation mode.
full: Sets the port to full duplex mode.
half: Sets the port to half duplex mode.
Description Use the duplex command to set the duplex mode of the current port.
Use the undo duplex command to restore the default duplex mode, that is,
auto-negotiation mode.
By default, the duplex mode of a port is in auto-negotiation mode.
Related command: speed.
Example # Set the duplex mode of Ethernet2/0/1 to full-duplex mode.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] duplex full
enable log updown
Syntax enable log updown
undo enable log updown
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the enable log updown command to allow a port to output the Up/Down
log information.
Use the undo log enable updown command to disable the port from
outputting Up/Down log information.
By default, a port is allowed to output the Up/Down log information.
Example # By default, a port is allowed to output the Up/Down log information. Execute
the shutdown command or the undo shutdown command on Ethernet2/0/1,
and the system outputs the Up/Down log information of Ethernet2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] shutdown
%Sep 8 11:56:41 2006 3Com Switch 7765 (4-Slot Chassis) L2INF/5/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:
Ethernet2/0/11: is DOWN
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] undo shutdown
%Sep 8 11:57:00 2006 3Com Switch 7765 (4-Slot Chassis) L2INF/5/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:
Ethernet2/0/11: is UP
flow-control 203
# Disable Ethernet2/0/1 from outputting Up/Down log information, execute the
shutdown command or the undo shutdown command on Ethernet2/0/1, and
no Up/Down log information is output for Ethernet2/0/1.
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] undo enable log updown
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] shutdown
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] undo shutdown
flow-control
Syntax flow-control
undo flow-control
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the flow-control command to enable flow control on the port so as to avoid
packet loss during congestion.
Use the undo flow-control command to disable flow control on the port.
By default, flow control is disabled on a port.
n Enable flow control on the port following the two steps
■ Enable flow control globally;
■ Enable flow control on the port in Ethernet port view.
Example # Enable flow control on the Ethernet2/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] flow-control
flow-control enable
Syntax flow-control enable
undo flow-control disable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the flow-control enable command to enable flow control globally.
Use the flow-control disable command to disable flow control globally.
204 CHAPTER 19: PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
By default, flow control is disabled globally.
Example # Enable flow control globally.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] flow-control enable
flow interval
Syntax flow-interval interval
undo flow-interval
View Ethernet port view
Parameter Interval: Interval (in seconds) to perform statistics on port information. This
argument ranges from 5 to 300 (in step of 5) and is 300 by default.
Description Use the flow-interval command to set the interval to perform statistics on port
information.
Use the undo flow-interval command to restore the default interval.
By default, this interval is 300 seconds.
When you use the display interface interface-type interface-number command
to display the information of a port, the system performs statistical analysis on the
traffic flow passing through the port during the specified interval and displays the
average rates in the interval. For example, if you set the interval to 100 seconds,
the displayed information is as follows:
Last 100 seconds input: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
Last 100 seconds output: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
Related command: display interface.
Example # Set the interval to perform statistics on the Ethernet2/0/1 port to 100 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] flow-interval 100
hardspeedup
Syntax hardspeedup enable
hardspeedup disable
interface 205
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the hardspeedup enable command to enable command to enable the
hardware speedup function inside the port.
Use the hardspeedup disable command to disable the hardware speedup
function inside the port.
By default, the hardware speedup function inside the port is enabled.
n ■ The commands above are applicable to type-A I/O Modules only, including
3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A, 3C16858, and 3C16859.
■ The commands above are diagnostic, so you cannot use them at discretion.
Example # Enable the hardware speedup function inside the port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hardspeedup enable
interface
Syntax interface interface-type interface-number
View System view
Parameter interface-type: Port type, which can be Aux, Ethernet, GigabitEthernet, LoopBack,
M-Ethernet, NULL, Tunnel or Vlan-interface.
interface-number: Port number, in the format of I/O Module slot number/subcard
slot number/port number.
Table 29 Range of I/O Module slot number/subcard slot number
Description/ Range of I/O Subcard slot Range of port
Device Module number number number
S7704 0 to 3 0 Depending on the number of ports on
the I/O Module you select
S7707 0 to 6 0
S7708R 0 to 7 0
Description Use the interface command to enter Ethernet port view. To configure parameters
for a port, you must enter the port view first.
Example # Enter Ethernet2/0/1 port view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1]
206 CHAPTER 19: PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
jumboframe enable
Syntax jumboframe enable [ jumboframe-value ]
undo jumboframe enable
View Ethernet port view
Parameter jumboframe-value: Size of the permitted jumbo frame, in the range of 1,536 to
9,216 in byte.
Description Use the jumboframe enable command to allow jumbo frames to pass through
the current Ethernet port.
Use the undo jumboframe enable command to inhibit jumbo frames from
passing through the current Ethernet port.
By default, jumbo frames that are larger than 1,518 bytes and smaller than 1,536
bytes are allowed to pass through the Ethernet port.
Example # Allow jumbo frames smaller than 1,536 bytes to pass through Ethernet2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] jumboframe enable
loopback-detection enable
Syntax loopback-detection enable
undo loopback-detection enable
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the loopback-detection enable command to enable the loopback
detection feature on the port.
Use the undo loopback-detection enable command to disable the loopback
detection feature on the port.
By default, the loopback detection feature is disabled on the port.
Related command: display loopback-detection.
Example # Enable the loopback detection feature.
loopback-detection interval-time 207
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] loopback-detection enable
loopback-detection interval-time
Syntax loopback-detection interval-time time
undo loopback-detection interval-time
View System view
Parameter time: Interval for detecting external loopback on a port, in the range of 5 to 300
(in seconds). It is 30 seconds by default.
Description Use the loopback-detection interval-time command to set the interval for
detecting external loopback on a port.
Use the undo loopback-detection interval-time command to restore the
default interval.
Related command: display loopback-detection.
Example # Set the interval for detecting external loopback on a port to 10 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] loopback-detection interval-time 10
loopback-detection control
Syntax loopback-detection control { block | nolearning | shutdown }
undo loopback-detection control
View Ethernet port view
Parameter block: Specifies to block the port where loop is detected, that is, the port cannot
receive or send any packets except BPDU packets. The system will periodically
detect whether loopback still occurs on the port. If yes, the port will be blocked
continuously. If not, and no other protocols (such as STP, LACP, DLDP) change the
state of the port, the port will be restored to the state of sending and receiving
packets normally.
nolearning: Specifies the port to continue forwarding packets after loopback is
detected on it. However, the port will stop learning new MAC addresses. The
system will periodically detect whether loopback still occurs on the port. If yes, the
port keeps in the current state. If not, the port will be restored to the state of
208 CHAPTER 19: PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
sending and receiving packets normally, and additionally the MAC address
learning function will be also restored for the port.
shutdown: Specifies to disable the port after loopback is detected on the port.
Description Use the loopback-detection control command to set the processing mode for
the port where loopback is detected.
Use the undo loopback-detection control command to cancel the defined
processing mode for the port where loopback is detected.
By default, no processing mode is set for the port where loopback is detected.
Example # Specify the processing mode for the port where loopback is detected as
nolearning.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] loopback-detection control nolearning
loopback-detection per-vlan enable
Syntax loopback-detection per-vlan enable
undo loopback-detection per-vlan enable
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the loopback-detection per-vlan enable command to enable loopback
detection for all the VLANs on the current trunk port or hybrid port.
Use the undo loopback-detection per-vlan enable command to enable
loopback detection for only the default VLAN on the current port.
By default, loopback detection is enabled for only the default VLAN of a trunk port
or hybrid port.
Note that this command is not available to access ports.
Example # Enable loopback detection for all the VLANs on the trunk port Ethernet2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port link-type trunk
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] loopback-detection per-vlan enable
mdi 209
mdi
Syntax mdi { across | auto | normal }
undo mdi
View Ethernet port view
Parameter across: Specifies the network cable to be crossover network cable.
auto: Identifies the network cable type (crossover or straight through)
automatically.
normal: Specifies the network cable to be straight through network cable.
Description Use the mdi command to set the network types that can be identified by Ethernet
ports.
Use the undo mdi command to restore the default network cable type that can
be identified by Ethernet ports.
By default, the port identifies the network type automatically.
c CAUTION: The Switch 7750 supports the auto mode only. If another mode is
specified, the system prompts "Operation not supported".
Example # Specify Ethernet2/0/1 to identify the network cable type automatically.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] mdi auto
multicast-suppression
Syntax multicast-suppression { ratio | bandwidth { mbps-value | kbps kbps-value } |
pps max-pps }
undo multicast-suppression
View Ethernet port view
Parameter ratio: Maximum ratio of received multicast traffic to the total bandwidth on the
Ethernet port. The value ranges from 1 to 100 (in step of 1) and defaults to 100.
The smaller the ratio is, the less multicast traffic is allowed to be received.
mbps-value: Maximum bandwidth (in Mbps) for receiving multicast traffic on an
Ethernet port. The range of the mbps-value argument depends on the port type:
■ 1 to 100 for 100 Mbps Ethernet ports;
210 CHAPTER 19: PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
■ 1 to 1,000 Mbps for Gigabit Ethernet ports;
■ 1 to 10,000 Mbps for 10 GE ports.
kbps kbps-value: Specifies the maximum bandwidth (in Kbps) for receiving
multicast traffic, in the range of 64 to 1,024,000 in the step of 64.
max-pps: Maximum number of multicast packets allowed to be received per
second on the Ethernet port (in pps). The range of the max-pps argument depends
on the port type.
■ 1 to 148,810 for 100 Mbps Ethernet ports;
■ 1 to 1,488,100 for Gigabit Ethernet ports;
■ 1 to 14,881,000 for 10 GE ports.
Description Use the multicast-suppression command to limit multicast traffic allowed to be
received on the current port.
Use the undo multicast-suppression command to restore the default multicast
suppression setting on the current port.
When incoming multicast traffic on the port exceeds the multicast traffic threshold
you set, the system drops the packets exceeding the threshold to reduce the
multicast traffic ratio to the reasonable range, so as to keep normal network
service.
By default, the switch does not suppress multicast traffic.
c CAUTION: Note that type-A I/O Modules (including 3C16860, 3C16861,
LS81FS24A, 3C16858, 3C16859) do not support enabling multicast suppression
on a port.
Example # Allow the incoming multicast traffic on the Ethernet2/0/1 port to occupy at most
20% of the bandwidth on the port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] multicast-suppression 20
# Set the maximum number of multicast packets that can be forwarded per
second by the Ethernet2/0/2 port to 1000 pps.
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/2] multicast-suppression pps 1000
port monitor last
Syntax port monitor last [ value ]
undo port monitor last
View Ethernet port view
port monitor last slot 211
Parameter value: Delay of reporting down state to the system, in the range of 0 to 60. When
this argument is set to 0, the port will report its state as soon as it is brought
down. The bigger this argument is, the longer delay it takes for a port to report its
down state to the system.
Description Use the port monitor last command to set the delay of reporting down state to
the system for the current port.
Use the undo port monitor last command to restore the delay of reporting
down state to the system for the current port to the default value, which is related
to the configuration performed in system view:
■ If you have configured the global delay in stem view (refer to “port monitor last
slot” on page 211 “port monitor last slot” on page 211 for details), the default
delay will be the global delay.
■ If no global delay is configured, the default delay is 1.
n The delay of reporting down state to the system can be configured in either
system view or Ethernet port view. If the delay is configured in both system view
and Ethernet port view simultaneously, the configuration performed in Ethernet
port view is given priority.
After the setting, you can use the display interface command to display the
information about the field "Port monitor last value".
Example # Set the delay of reporting down state to the system to 5 for Ethernet2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port monitor last 5
port monitor last slot
Syntax port monitor last [ slot slot-number ] value
undo port monitor last [ slot slot-number ]
View System view
Parameter slot-number: Number of the slot where the I/O Module resides.
value: Delay of reporting down state to the system, in the range of 0 to 60. When
this argument is set to 0, the port will report its state as soon as it is brought
down. The bigger this argument is, the longer delay it takes for a port to report its
down state to the system.
Description Use the port monitor last command to set the delay of reporting down state to
the system for the ports of all the I/O Modules or the specified I/O Module.
212 CHAPTER 19: PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo port monitor last command to restore the delay to the default
value.
By default, the delay of reporting down state to the system is 1.
After the setting, you can use the display interface command to display the
information about the field "Port monitor last value".
Example # Set the delay of report down state to the system to 10 for the ports on the I/O
Module in slot 5.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] port monitor last slot 5 10
reset counters interface
Syntax reset counters interface [ interface-type | interface-type interface-number ]
View User view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.
Description Use the reset counters interface command to clear the statistics of the port,
preparing for a new statistics collection.
■ If you specify neither port type nor port number, the command clears statistics
of all ports.
■ If specify only port type, the command clears statistics of all ports of this type.
■ If specify both port type and port number, the command clears statistics of the
specified port.
Example # Clear the statistics of Ethernet2/0/1.
<SW7750> reset counters interface ethernet2/0/1
shutdown
Syntax shutdown
undo shutdown
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the shutdown command to disable an Ethernet port.
speed 213
Use the undo shutdown command to enable an Ethernet port.
By default, an Ethernet port is enabled.
Example # Enable Ethernet2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] undo shutdown
speed
Syntax speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 | auto }
undo speed
View Ethernet port view
Parameter 10: Specifies the port speed to 10 Mbps.
100: Specifies the port speed to 100 Mbps.
1000: Specifies the port speed to 1000 Mbps.
auto: Specifies the port speed to the auto-negotiation mode.
n For ports of different types, the parameter prompts after you enter the speed
command are also different.
Description Use the speed command to set the port speed.
Use the undo speed command to restore the port speed to the default setting.
By default, the port speed is in the auto-negotiation mode.
Example # Set the speed of Ethernet2/0/1 to 10 Mbps.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] speed 10
speed auto
Syntax speed auto [ 10 | 100 | 1000 ]*
View Ethernet port view
Parameter 10: Configures 10 Mbps as an auto-negotiation speed of the port.
214 CHAPTER 19: PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
100: Configures 100 Mbps as an auto-negotiation speed of the port.
1000: Configures 1,000 Mbps as an auto-negotiation speed of the port.
Description Use the speed auto [ 10 | 100 | 1000 ]* command to configure auto-negotiation
speed(s) for the current port.
By default, the port speed is auto-negotiated.
The last configuration will take effect if you configure the command for multiple
times.
Example # Configure 10 Mbps and 1000 Mbps as the auto-negotiation speeds of Ethernet
2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] speed auto 10 1000
speedup
Syntax speedup enable
speedup disable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the speedup enable command to enable the hardware speedup function
outside the port.
Use the speedup disable command to disable the hardware speedup function
outside the port.
By default, the hardware speedup function outside the port is disabled.
n ■ The commands above are applicable to type-A I/O Modules only, including
3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A, 3C16858, and 3C16859.
■ The commands above are diagnostic, so you cannot use them at discretion.
Example # Enable the hardware speedup function outside the port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] speedup enable
unicast-suppression 215
unicast-suppression
Syntax unicast-suppression { ratio | bandwidth { mbps-value | kbps kbps-value } | pps
max-pps }
undo unicast-suppression
View Ethernet port view
Parameter ratio: Maximum ratio of the received unknown unicast traffic to the total
bandwidth on an Ethernet port. The value ranges from 1 to 100 in the step of 1
and defaults to 100. The smaller the ratio is, the less unknown unicast traffic is
allowed.
mbps-value: Maximum bandwidth (in Mbps) for receiving unknown unicast traffic
on an Ethernet port. The range of the mbps-value argument depends on the port
type:
■ 1 to 100 for 100 Mbps Ethernet ports;
■ 1 to 1000 for 1000 Mbps Ethernet ports;
■ 1 to 10,000 Mbps for 10 GE ports.
kbps kbps-value: Specifies the maximum bandwidth (in Kbps) for receiving
unknown unicast traffic, in the range of 64 to 1,024,000 in the step of 64.
max-pps: Maximum number of unknown unicast packets allowed to be received
per second on the Ethernet port (in pps). The range of the max-pps argument
depends on the port type.
■ 0 to 100 for 148810 Mbps Ethernet ports;
■ 0 to 1000 for 1488100 Mbps Ethernet ports;
■ 0 to 14881000 Mbps for 10 GE ports.
Description Use the unicast-suppression command to set the size of unknown unicast
traffic allowed to be received on the current port.
Use the undo unicast-suppression command to restore the size of unknown
unicast traffic allowed to be received on the current port.
When incoming unknown unicast traffic on the port exceeds the threshold you
set, the system drops the packets exceeding the threshold to reduce the unknown
unicast traffic ratio to the reasonable range, so as to keep normal network service.
This function is disabled by default.
c CAUTION: Type-A I/O Modules (including 3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A,
3C16858, and 3C16859) do not support enabling unknown unicast suppression
on a port.
216 CHAPTER 19: PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Allow the incoming unknown unicast traffic on the Ethernet2/0/1 port to occupy
at most 20% of the bandwidth on the port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] unicast-suppression 20
# Set the maximum number of unknown unicast packets that can be forwarded
per second by Ethernet2/0/2 to 1,000 pps.
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/2] unicast-suppression pps 1000
virtual-cable-test
Syntax virtual-cable-test
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the virtual-cable-test command to enable the system to test the cable
connected to a specific port and to display the results. The system can test these
attributes of the cable:
■ Cable status, including normal, abnormal, abnormal-open, abnormal-short and
failure
■ Cable length
n ■
■
If the cable is in normal state, the displayed information is "-".
If the cable is in any other state, the displayed length value is the length from
the port to the faulty point.
■ Pair impedance mismatch
■ Pair skew
■ Pair swap
■ Pair polarity
■ Insertion loss
■ Return loss
■ Near-end crosstalk
By default, the system does not test the cable connected to the Ethernet port.
n ■
■
The combo port does not support the virtual-cable-test command.
The error for cable length tested through the virtual-cable-test command is
±5m.
Example # Enable the system to test the cable connected to Ethernet2/0/1.
virtual-cable-test 217
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet0/1] virtual-cable-test
Cable status: abnormal(open), 7 metres
Pair Impedance mismatch: yes
Pair skew: 4294967294 ns
Pair swap: swap
Pair polarity: normal
Insertion loss: 7 db
Return loss: 7 db
Near-end crosstalk: 7 db
218 CHAPTER 19: PORT BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
LINK AGGREGATION CONFIGURATION
20 COMMANDS
display lacp system-id
Syntax display lacp system-id
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display lacp system-id command to display the device ID of the local
system, including the system priority and the MAC address.
Example # Display the device ID of the local system.
<SW7750> display lacp system-id
Actor System ID: 0x8000, 000f-e20f-0100
Table 30 Field descriptions of the display lacp system-id command
Field Description
Actor System ID Device ID of the local system, including the
system priority and the system MAC address
display link-aggregation interface
Syntax display link-aggregation interface interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameter interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]:
Specifies a port range.
■ If the to keyword is not specified, only one port is specified;
■ If the to keyword is specified, multiple contiguous ports are specified;
■ The interface-type argument represents the port type and the
interface-number argument represents the port number.
Description Use the display link-aggregation interface command to display the link
aggregation details about a specified port or port range, including:
■ Link aggregation group ID of the specified port or port range
220 CHAPTER 20: LINK AGGREGATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
■ Port priority, operation key and LACP status flag of the local end,
■ Device ID, port number, port priority, operation key and protocol status flag
and LACP packet statistics of the remote end
Note that, for a manual aggregation group, value 0 is displayed for all the above
items of the remote end (which does not indicate the real information of the
remote end), since information about the remote end cannot be obtained for a
manual aggregation group.
Example # Display the link aggregation details on the specified port.
<SW7750> display link-aggregation interface ethernet2/0/1
Ethernet2/0/1:
Attached AggID: 20
Local:
Port-Priority: 32768, Oper key: 2, Flag: 0x3d
Remote:
System ID: 0x8000, 000e-84a6-fb00
Port Number: 2, Port-Priority: 32768 , Oper-key: 10, Flag: 0x3d
Received LACP Packets: 8 packet(s), Illegal: 0 packet(s)
Sent LACP Packets: 9 packet(s)
Table 31 Field descriptions of the display link-aggregation interface command
Field Description
Attached AggID ID of the aggregation group to which the
specified port belongs
Local: Port priority, operation key and LACP status
flag of the local end
Port-Priority: 32768, Oper key: 1, Flag: 0x00
Remote: Device ID, port number, port priority,
operation key and LACP status flag of the
System ID: 0x0, 0000-0000-0000
remote end
Port Number: 0, Port-Priority: 0, Oper-key: 0,
Flag: 0x00
Received LACP Packets: 0 packet(s), Illegal: 0 Statistics about LACP packets, including: the
packet(s) number of received LACP packets, the
number of illegal LACP packets and the
Sent LACP Packets: 0 packet(s)
number of send LACP packets
display link-aggregation summary
Syntax display link-aggregation summary
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display link-aggregation summary command to display summary
information of all aggregation groups, including device ID of the local end,
aggregation group ID, aggregation group type, device ID of the remote end,
number of the selected ports, number of the unselected ports, load sharing type
and master port number.
display link-aggregation verbose 221
Example # Display summary information of all aggregation groups.
<SW7750> display link-aggregation summary
Aggregation Group Type: D -- Dynamic, S -- Static, M -- Manual
Loadsharing Type: Shar - Loadsharing, NonS - Non-Loadsharing
Actor ID: 0x8000, 000f-e20f-ff04
AL AL Partner ID Select Standby Share Master
ID Type Ports Ports Type Port
-------------------------------------------------------------------
1 D 0x8000, 000f-e20f-ff01 1 0 NonS Ethernet2/0/1
10 M none 1 0 NonS Ethernet2/0/2
20 S 0x8000, 000f-e20f-ff01 1 0 NonS Ethernet2/0/3
Table 32 Field descriptions of the display link-aggregation summary command
Field Description
Actor ID Local device ID
AL ID Aggregation group ID
AL Type Aggregation group type: D (dynamic), S (static), or M (manual)
Partner ID ID of the remote device
Select Ports Number of the selected ports
Standby Ports Number of standby ports
Share Type Load sharing type: Shar (load-sharing), or NonS (non-load-sharing)
Master Port Port with the smallest port number in the aggregation group
display link-aggregation verbose
Syntax display link-aggregation verbose [ agg-id ]
View Any view
Parameter agg-id: ID of the aggregation group to be displayed, which must be the ID of the
existing aggregation group, in the range of 1 to 384.
Description Use the display link-aggregation verbose command to display the details
about a specified aggregation group, including:
■ Aggregation group ID, aggregation group type, load sharing type, aggregation
group description string;
■ Local end details: device ID, port number, port status, port priority, LACP flag,
operation key and connection status;
■ Remote end details: local port, remote port index, remote port priority,
operation key, and device ID.
Note that, for a manual aggregation group, value 0 is displayed for all the above
items of the remote end (which does not indicate the real information of the
remote end), since information about the remote end cannot be obtained for a
manual aggregation group.
Example # Display the details about aggregation group 1.
<SW7750> display link-aggregation verbose 1
Loadsharing Type: Shar -- Loadsharing, NonS -- Non-Loadsharing
Aggregation ID: 1, AggregationType: Static, Loadsharing Type: NonS
222 CHAPTER 20: LINK AGGREGATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Aggregation Description:
System ID: 0x8000, 000f-e218-d0d0
Port Status: S -- Selected, T -- sTandby
Local:
Port Status Priority Flag Oper-Key Link-Status
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet2/0/1 S 32768 0x7d 1 Up
GigabitEthernet2/0/2 T 32768 0x45 2 Down
Remote:
Actor Partner Priority Flag Oper-Key SystemID
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet2/0/1 0 32768 0x38 0 0x8000,0000-0000-0000
GigabitEthernet2/0/2 0 32768 0x30 0 0x8000,0000-0000-0000
Table 33 Field descriptions of the display link-aggregation verbose command
Field Description
Aggregation ID Aggregation group ID
AggregationType Aggregation group type, including dynamic aggregation, static
aggregation and manual aggregation
Loadsharing Type Loadsharing type, including Loadsharing and Non-Loadsharing
Aggregation Description Aggregation group description string
System ID Local device ID
Port state Port state
Local Other information about the local end, including port number,
port state, port priority, LACP flag, operation key and connection
status
Remote Detailed information about the remote end, including: local port
number, remote port index, port priority, flag bit, operation key
and device ID
hash
Syntax hash { dstip | dstmac | ip | l4port | mac | srcip | srcmac } { ioboard slot
slot-number | mainboard }
undo hash { dstip | dstmac | ip | l4port | mac | srcip | srcmac } { ioboard slot
slot-number | mainboard }
View System view
Parameter dstip: Specifies to use a destination IP address as the parameter of the HASH
algorithm.
dstmac: Specifies to use a destination MAC address as the parameter of the
HASH algorithm.
ip: Specifies to use the value obtained from the XOR operation performed
between the source IP address and the destination IP address as the parameter of
the HASH algorithm.
l4port: Specifies to use the port number of TCP or UDP as the parameter of the
HASH algorithm.
lacp enable 223
mac: Specifies to use the value obtained from the XOR operation performed
between the source MAC address and the destination MAC address as the
parameter of the HASH algorithm.
srcip: Specifies to use a source IP address as the parameter of the HASH algorithm.
srcmac: Specifies to use a source MAC address as the parameter of the HASH
algorithm.
ioboard: Enables configured parameter to be valid for I/O Modules only.
slot slot-num: Specifies a slot number of the I/O Module.
mainboard: Enables configured parameter to be valid for Fabrics only.
n ■ All the seven parameters are available on type-A I/O Modules including
3C16860, 3C16860, 3C16861, 3C16861, LS81FS24A, LS81FS24, 3C16858,
3C16858, 3C16859, and 3C16859.
■ None of the above seven parameters are available on non-type-A I/O Modules.
■ Only type-A I/O Modules support l4port.
Description Use the hash command to configure parameters used by the HASH algorithm in
link aggregation.
Use the undo hash command to cancel the configuration.
By default, type-A I/O Modules use four-tuple (dstip, dstmac, srcip and srcmac)
as the parameters for HASH operation. I/O Modules other than type-A I/O
Modules use ip as the parameter for HASH operation.
Example # For I/O Module 2, use the destination IP address as the parameter of the HASH
algorithm.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hash dstip ioboard slot 2
lacp enable
Syntax lacp enable
undo lacp enable
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the lacp enable command to enable the LACP protocol.
Use the undo lacp enable command to disable the LACP protocol.
224 CHAPTER 20: LINK AGGREGATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Enable the LACP protocol on Ethernet 2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] lacp enable
lacp port-priority
Syntax lacp port-priority port-priority-value
undo lacp port-priority
View Ethernet port view
Parameter port-priority-value: Port priority, ranging from 0 to 65,535 and defaulting to
32,768.
Description Use the lacp port-priority command to set the priority of the current port.
Use the undo lacp port-priority command to restore the default port priority.
Example # Set the port priority to 64.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] lacp port-priority 64
lacp system-priority
Syntax lacp system-priority system-priority-value
undo lacp system-priority
View System view
Parameter system-priority-value: System priority, ranging from 0 to 65,535 and defaulting to
32,768.
Description Use the lacp system-priority command to set the system priority.
Use the undo lacp system-priority command to restore the default system
priority.
Example # Set the system priority to 64.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] lacp system-priority 64
link-aggregation 225
link-aggregation
Syntax link-aggregation interface-type interface-number to interface-type
interface-number [ both ]
View System view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
interface-num: Port number.
to: Specifies a series of contiguous ports.
both: Performs load sharing for both inbound traffic and outbound traffic on all
member ports in the aggregation group.
Description Use the link-aggregation command to add a series of ports to a new manual
aggregation group, to which the system assigns a new group number. The
link-aggregation group agg-id mode command and the port
link-aggregation group command can be used together to implement the
function of the link-aggregation command.
By default:
■ For IP packets, the system performs load sharing based on IP addresses;
■ For non-IP packets, the system performs load sharing based on MAC addresses.
Example # Set up an aggregation group with Ethernet 2/0/1 to Ethernet 2/0/4 and perform
load sharing for both inbound and outbound traffic of the aggregation group.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] link-aggregation ethernet2/0/1 to ethernet2/0/4 both
link-aggregation group description
Syntax link-aggregation group agg-id description agg-name
undo link-aggregation group agg-id description
View System view
Parameter agg-id: Aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 384.
agg-name: Aggregation group name, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
Description Use the link-aggregation group description command to set a description for
an aggregation group.
226 CHAPTER 20: LINK AGGREGATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo link-aggregation group description command to remove the
description of the aggregation group.
Example # Set the description "office" for aggregation group 22.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] link-aggregation group 22 description office
link-aggregation group mode
Syntax link-aggregation group agg-id mode { manual | static }
undo link-aggregation group agg-id
View System view
Parameter agg-id: Aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 384.
manual: Creates a manual aggregation group.
static: Creates a static aggregation group.
Description Use the link-aggregation group mode command to create a manual or static
aggregation group.
Use the undo link-aggregation group command to remove an aggregation
group.
Example # Create manual aggregation group 22
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] link-aggregation group 22 mode manual
port link-aggregation group
Syntax port link-aggregation group agg-id
undo port link-aggregation group
View Ethernet port view
Parameter agg-id: Aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 384.
Description Use the port link-aggregation group command to add the current Ethernet
port to a manual or static aggregation group.
Use the undo port link-aggregation group command to remove the current
Ethernet port from the aggregation group.
reset lacp statistics 227
Example # Add Ethernet 2/0/1 to aggregation group 22.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port link-aggregation group 22
reset lacp statistics
Syntax reset lacp statistics [ interface interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] ]
View User view
Parameter interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]:
Specifies a port range.
■ If the to keyword is not specified, only one port is specified;
■ If the to keyword is specified, multiple contiguous ports are specified;
■ The interface-type argument represents the port type and the
interface-number argument represents the port number.
Description Use the reset lacp statistics command to clear LACP statistics on specified
port(s), or on all ports if no port is specified.
Example # Clear LACP statistics on all Ethernet ports.
<SW7750> reset lacp statistics
228 CHAPTER 20: LINK AGGREGATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
PORT ISOLATION CONFIGURATION
21 COMMANDS
description
Syntax description text
undo description
View Isolation group view
Parameter text: Description string for an isolation group, comprising 1 to 80 characters.
Description Use the description command to specify the description string for the current
isolation group.
Use the undo description command to remove the description string for the
current isolation group.
By default, no description string is specified for the isolation group.
Example # Specify "home" as the description string for isolation group 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] port-isolate group 1
[SW7750-port-isolate-group1] description home
display isolate port
Syntax display isolate port [ group group-id ]
View Any view
Parameter group-id: ID of an isolation group, in the range 1 to 64.
Description Use the display isolate port command to display the configuration of a created
isolation group, including:
■ ID of the isolation group
■ Description string for the isolation group
■ Ports that the isolation group contains
230 CHAPTER 21: PORT ISOLATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Display the configuration of isolation group 1.
<SW7750> display isolate port group 1
Isolate group ID: 1
Description: home
Isolated port(s) in group 1:
Ethernet2/0/2 Ethernet2/0/3 Ethernet2/0/4
port
Syntax port interface-list
undo port interface-list
View Isolation group view
Parameter interface-list: List of destination ports, expressed in the form of interface-list =
interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] &<1-10>.,
where:
■ The interface-type argument represents the type of the bound port;
■ The interface-number argument represents the number of the bound port;
■ The to keyword specifies a group of contiguous ports. The port number after
the to keyword must be not smaller than that before the to keyword.
■ &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indices/port index lists for
this argument.
Description Use the port command to add the specified ports to an isolation group.
Use the undo port command to remove the specified ports from an isolation
group.
By default, an isolation group contains no Ethernet port.
This command functions the same as the “port isolate group” on page 230 “port
isolate group” on page 230 command except that Ethernet ports must be
specified in this command.
Example # Add Ethernet2/0/2 to isolation group 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] port-isolate group 1
[SW7750-port-isolate-group1] port Ethernet 2/0/2
port isolate group
Syntax port isolate group group-id
undo port isolate
port-isolate group 231
View Ethernet port view
Parameter group-id: ID of an isolation group, in the range 1 to 64.
Description Use the port isolate group command to add the current Ethernet port to a
created isolation group.
Use the undo port isolate command to remove the current Ethernet port from
an isolation group.
By default, an isolation group contains no Ethernet port.
This command functions the same as the “port” on page 230 “port” on page 230
command except that Ethernet ports need not be specified in this command.
n ■ An Ethernet port belongs to only one port isolation group. If you add an
Ethernet port to different isolation groups, the port belongs to only the latest
isolation group to which the port is added.
■ Currently, modules of Type A (3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A, 3C16858, and
3C16859) do not support the Port Isolation feature.
Example # Add Ethernet2/0/3 port to isolation group 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/3
[SW7750- Ethernet2/0/3] port isolate group 1
port-isolate group
Syntax port-isolate group group-id
undo port-isolate group group-id
View System view
Parameter group-id: ID of an isolation group, in the range 1 to 64.
Description Use the port-isolate group command to create an isolation group.
Use the undo port-isolate command to remove the specified isolation group.
By default, an isolation group contains no Ethernet ports.
Example # Create isolation group 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] port-isolate group 1
[SW7750-port-isolate-group1]
232 CHAPTER 21: PORT ISOLATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
PORT SECURITY COMMANDS
22
n Currently, A type modules (3C16860, 3C16860, 3C16861, 3C16861, LS81FS24A,
LS81FS24, 3C16858, 3C16858, 3C16859, and 3C16859) do not support the port
security feature.
display mac-address security
Syntax display mac-address security [ interface interface-type interface-number ] [
vlan vlan-id ] [ count ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.
vlan-id: VLAN ID, in the range of 1 to 4094.
count: Displays the number of security MAC addresses.
Description Use the display mac-address security command to display information about
security MAC addresses. Each piece of information for a port includes: secure
MAC address on the port, VLAN ID of the port, current MAC address state, port
index, and MAC address aging time.
By checking the output of this command, you can verify the current configuration.
Example # Display the security MAC address configuration on GigabitEthernet 2/0/1 port.
<SW7750> display mac-address security interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/1
MAC ADDR VLAN ID STATE PORT INDEX AGING TIME(s)
0001-0001-0001 1 Security GigabitEthernet2/0/1 NOAGED
--- 1 mac address(es) found on port GigabitEthernet2/0/1 ---
display port-security
Syntax display port-security [ interface interface-list ]
View Any view
234 CHAPTER 22: PORT SECURITY COMMANDS
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list, which can contain multiple Ethernet ports. The
interface-list argument is in the format of { interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] } & <1-10>, where interface-type represents the
port type, interface-number represents the port number, and & <1-10> means
that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges in this argument.
Description Use the display port-security command to display information about port
security configuration (including global configuration, and configuration on
specified or all ports).
By checking the output of this command, you can verify the current configuration.
c CAUTION:
■ This command will display global and all ports’ security configuration
information if the interface-list argument is not specified.
■ This command will display particular port’s security configuration information if
the interface-list argument is specified.
Example # Display global and all ports’ security configuration information.
<SW7750> display port-security
Equipment port-security is enabled
RALM logoff trap is Enabled
Disableport Timeout: 20 s
OUI value:
Index is 2, OUI value is 000100
GigabitEthernet2/0/1 is link-down
Port mode is noRestriction
NeedtoKnow mode is disabled
Intrusion mode is no action
Max mac-address num is not configured
Stored mac-address num is 0
Authorization is permit
GigabitEthernet2/0/2 is link-down
Port mode is noRestriction
NeedtoKnow mode is disabled
Intrusion mode is no action
Max mac-address num is not configured
Stored mac-address num is 0
Authorization is permit
(Any display that follows is omitted.)
Table 34 Field descriptions of the display port-security command
Field Description
Equipment port security is enabled Port security is enabled on the switch.
RALM logoff trap is Enabled The sending of RALM authentication success trap
messages is enabled.
Disableport Timeout: 100 s The temporary port-disabling time is 100 seconds.
OUI value The next line displays OUI value.
mac-address security 235
Table 34 Field descriptions of the display port-security command
Field Description
GigabitEthernet2/0/1 is link-down The link status of the port GigabitEthernet 2/0/1 is
"down".
Port mode is noRestriction The security mode of the port is normal.
NeedtoKnow mode is disabled NTK is disabled on a port
Intrusion mode is no action no action is taken when intrusion protection is triggered.
Max mac-address num is 100 The maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on
the port is 100.
Stored mac-address num is 0 No MAC address is stored.
Authorization is permit Authorization information delivered by the RADIUS
server will be applied to the port.
mac-address security
Syntax mac-address security mac-address interface interface-type interface-number
vlan vlan-id
undo mac-address security mac-address [ interface interface-type
interface-number ] vlan vlan-id
undo mac-address security { interface interface-type interface-number | vlan
vlan-id }
View System view
Parameter mac-address: Security MAC address, in the H-H-H format.
interface-type interface-number: Specifies a port by its type and number.
vlan-id: VLAN ID of the security MAC address, ranging 1 to 4094.
Description Use the mac-address security command to manually add a security MAC
address to a port.
Use the undo mac-address security command to remove a security MAC
address from a port.
By default, no security MAC address is configured.
n You can manually add a security MAC address to a port only when port security is
enabled globally and the port-security port-mode autolearn command is
configured on the port.
Example # Add 0001-0001-0001 as a security MAC address to GigabitEthernet 2/0/1 in
VLAN 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] port-security enable
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] port-security max-mac-count 100
236 CHAPTER 22: PORT SECURITY COMMANDS
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] port-security port-mode autolearn
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] quit
[SW7750] mac-address security 0001-0001-0001 interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/1 vlan 1
port-security enable
Syntax port-security enable
undo port-security enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the port-security enable command to enable port security.
Use the undo port-security enable command to disable port security.
By default, port security is disabled.
c CAUTION: To avoid confliction, the following restrictions on 802.1x
authentication and MAC address authentication occur after port security is
enabled
■ The access control mode (set by the dot1x port-control command)
automatically changes to auto.
■ The dot1x, dot1x port-method, dot1x port-control and
mac-authentication commands cannot be used.
Example # Enable port security.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] port-security enable
Notice: The port-control of 802.1x will be restricted to auto when port-security is enabled.
Please wait... Done.
port-security intrusion-mode
Syntax port-security intrusion-mode { disableport | disableport-temporarily |
blockmac }
undo port-security intrusion-mode
View Ethernet port view
Parameter disableport: Specifies to permanently disable the port.
disableport-temporarily: Specifies to temporarily disable the port, and enable
the port after a pre-set time.
blockmac: Specifies to discard the packets with illegal source MAC addresses.
port-security authorization ignore 237
Description Use the port-security intrusion-mode command to set the action to be taken
by the device when intrusion protection is triggered on the port.
Use the undo port-security intrusion-mode command to cancel the action
setting.
By default, intrusion protection is not configured.
n By checking the source MAC addresses in inbound data frames or the username
and password in 802.1x authentication requests on a port, intrusion protection
detects illegal packets (packets with illegal MAC address) or events and takes a
pre-set action accordingly. The actions you can set include: disconnecting the port
temporarily/permanently and blocking packets with invalid MAC addresses.
The following cases can trigger intrusion protection on a port
■ A packet with unknown source MAC address is received on the port while
MAC address learning is disabled on the port.
■ A packet with unknown source MAC address is received on the port while the
amount of security MAC addresses on the port has reached the preset
maximum number.
■ The user fails the 802.1x or MAC address authentication.
After executing the intrusion-mode blockmac command, you can only use the
display port-security command to view blocked MAC addresses, which you
cannot configure as static MAC addresses.
n If intrusion protection mode is set to disableport-temporarily on the port, the
time set by the port-security timer disableport command determines how long
the system temporarily disables the port when intrusion protection is triggered on
the port.
Example # Configure the switch to disable GigabitEthernet 2/0/1 when intrusion protection
is triggered on the port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] port-security enable
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet2/0/1
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] port-security intrusion-mode disableport
port-security authorization ignore
Syntax port-security authorization ignore
undo port-security authorization ignore
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
238 CHAPTER 22: PORT SECURITY COMMANDS
Description Use the port-security authorization ignore command to configure the port
to ignore the authorization information delivered by the RADIUS server.
Use the undo port-security authorization ignore command to restore the
default configuration.
By default, the port uses (does not ignore) the authorization information delivered
by the RADIUS server.
■ With the port-security authorization ignore command executed, issuing the
display port-security command will display "Authorization is ignore" in the
output information.
■ With the undo port-security authorization ignore command executed,
issuing the display port-security command will display "Authorization is
permit" in the output information.
Example # Configure GigabitEthernet 2/0/2 to ignore the authorization information
delivered from the RADIUS server.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet2/0/2
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/2] port-security authorization ignore
port-security max-mac-count
Syntax port-security max-mac-count count-value
undo port-security max-mac-count
View Ethernet port view
Parameter count-value: Maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on the port, in the
range of 1 to 1,024.
Description Use the port-security max-mac-count command to set the maximum number
of MAC addresses allowed on the port.
Use the undo port-security max-mac-count command to cancel this limit.
By default, there is no limit on the number of MAC addresses allowed on the port.
Example # Set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on the port to 100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] port-security enable
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet2/0/1
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] port-security max-mac-count 100
port-security ntk-mode 239
port-security ntk-mode
Syntax port-security ntk-mode { ntkonly | ntk-withbroadcasts | ntk-withmulticasts
}
undo port-security ntk-mode
View Ethernet port view
Parameter ntkonly: Allows the port to transmit only unicast packets with
successfully-authenticated destination MAC addresses.
ntk-withbroadcasts: Allows the port to transmit broadcast packets and unicast
packets with successfully-authenticated destination MAC addresses.
ntk-withmulticasts: Allows the port to transmit multicast packets, broadcast
packets and unicast packets with successfully-authenticated destination MAC
addresses.
Description Use the port-security ntk-mode command to configure the NTK feature on the
port.
Use the undo port-security ntk-mode command to restore the default setting.
Be default, NTK is disabled on a port, namely all frames are allowed to be sent.
n By checking the destination MAC addresses of the data frames to be sent from a
port, the NTK feature ensures that only successfully authenticated devices can
obtain data frames from the port, thus preventing illegal devices from intercepting
network data.
Example # Set the NTK feature to ntk-withbroadcasts on GigabitEthernet 2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] port-security enable
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] port-security ntk-mode ntk-withbroadcasts
port-security oui
Syntax port-security oui OUI-value index index-value
undo port-security oui index id-value
View System view
Parameter OUI-value: OUI value. You can input a full MAC address (in hexadecimal format)
for this argument and the system will calculate the OUI value from your input.
index-value: OUI index, ranging from 1 to 16.
240 CHAPTER 22: PORT SECURITY COMMANDS
n The organizationally unique identifiers (OUIs) are assigned by IEEE to different
manufacturers. Each OUI uniquely identifies an equipment manufacturer in the
world and is the higher 24 bits of MAC address.
Description Use the port-security oui command to set an OUI value for authentication.
Use the undo port-security oui command to cancel the OUI value setting.
c CAUTION:
■ The OUI value set by this command takes effect only when the security mode
of the port is set to userlogin-secure-oui by the port-security port-mode
command.
■ You need only to input a full MAC address in hexadecimal format for the
OUI-value argument in this command, and the system will automatically
convert the address from hexadecimal format to binary format and then take
the higher 24 bits of the resulting binary data as the OUI value.
Related command: port-security port-mode.
Example # Set an OUI value by specifying the MAC address 000f-e200-0000, with an OUI
index of 5.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] port-security oui 000f-e200-0000 index 5
port-security port-mode
Syntax port-security port-mode { autolearn | mac-authentication |
mac-else-userlogin-secure | mac-else-userlogin-secure-ext | secure |
userlogin | userlogin-secure | userlogin-secure-ext |
userlogin-secure-or-mac | userlogin-secure-or-mac-ext | userlogin-withoui }
undo port-security port-mode
View Ethernet port view
Parameter autolearn: Sets the port security mode to autoLearn.
mac-authentication: Sets the port security mode to macAddressWithRadius.
mac-else-userlogin-secure: Sets the port security mode to
mac-else-userlogin-secure.
mac-else-userlogin-secure-ext: Sets the port security mode to
mac-else-userlogin-secure-ext.
secure: Sets the port security mode to secure.
userlogin: Sets the port security mode to userLogin.
port-security timer disableport 241
userlogin-secure: Sets the port security mode to userlogin-secure.
userlogin-secure-ext: Sets the port security mode to userlogin-secure-ext.
userlogin-secure-or-mac: Sets the port security mode to
userlogin-secure-or-mac.
userlogin-secure-or-mac-ext: Sets the port security mode to
userlogin-secure-or-mac-ext.
userlogin-withoui: Sets the port security mode to userlogin-secure-oui.
Description Use the port-security port-mode command to set the security mode of the
port.
Use the undo port-security port-mode command to restore the port to the
normal operating mode.
Port security defines various security modes that allow devices to learn legal source
MAC addresses, in order for you to implement different network security
management as needed. With port security, packets whose source MAC addresses
cannot be learned by your switch in a security mode, or packets that fail to pass
802.1x authentication are considered illegal.
By default, no security mode is set on the port.
Example # Set the security mode on GigabitEthernet 2/0/1 to userlogin.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] port-security enable
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet2/0/1
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] port-security port-mode userlogin
port-security timer disableport
Syntax port-security timer disableport timer
undo port-security timer disableport
View System view
Parameter timer: This argument ranges from 20 to 300 and defaults to 20 (in seconds).
Description Use the port-security timer disableport command to set the time during
which the system temporarily disables a port.
Use undo port-security timer disableport command restore the default time.
By default, the system disables a port for 20 seconds.
242 CHAPTER 22: PORT SECURITY COMMANDS
n After the port-security intrusion-mode disableport-temporarily command is
executed on a port, the time set by the port-security timer disableport timer
command determines how long the port can be temporarily disabled.
Example # Set the time during which the system temporarily disables a port to 50 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] port-security timer disableport 50
port-security trap
Syntax port-security trap { addresslearned | intrusion | dot1xlogon | dot1xlogoff |
dot1xlogfailure | ralmlogon | ralmlogoff | ralmlogfailure }
undo port-security trap { addresslearned | intrusion | dot1xlogon |
dot1xlogoff | dot1xlogfailure | ralmlogon | ralmlogoff | ralmlogfailure }
View System view
Parameter addresslearned: Enables/disables the sending of MAC address learning trap
messages.
intrusion: Enables/disables the sending of intrusion packet discovery trap
messages.
dot1xlogon: Enables/disables the sending of 802.1x user logon trap messages.
dot1xlogoff: Enables/disables the sending of 802.1x user logoff trap messages.
dot1xlogfailure: Enables/disables the sending of 802.1x user authentication
failure trap messages.
ralmlogon: Enables/disables the sending of RALM user logon trap messages.
ralmlogoff: Enables/disables the sending of RALM user logoff trap messages.
ralmlogfailure: Enables/disables the sending of RALM user authentication failure
trap messages.
n RADIUS authenticated login using MAC-address (RALM) refers to MAC
address-based RADIUS authentication.
Description Use the port-security trap command to enable the sending of specified type(s)
of trap messages.
Use the undo port-security trap command to disable the sending of specified
type(s) of trap messages.
By default, the system disables the sending of any types of trap messages.
port-security trap 243
n This command is based on the trap feature, which enables the switch to send trap
messages when special data packets (generated by illegal intrusion, abnormal user
logon/logoff, or other special activities) are passing through a port, so as to help
the network administrator to monitor special activities.
When you use the display port-security command to display global information,
the system will display which types of trap messages are allowed to send.
Related command: display port-security.
Example # Allow the sending of intrusion packet discovery trap messages.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] port-security trap intrusion
244 CHAPTER 22: PORT SECURITY COMMANDS
PORT BINDING COMMANDS
23
n Currently, A type modules (3C16860, 3C16860, 3C16861, 3C16861, LS81FS24A,
LS81FS24, 3C16858, 3C16858, 3C16859, and 3C16859) do not support the port
binding feature.
am user-bind
Syntax In system view:
am user-bind { mac-addr mac-address | ip-addr ip-address }* interface-list
undo am user-bind { mac-addr mac-address | ip-addr ip-address } interface-list
In Ethernet port view:
am user-bind { mac-addr mac-address | ip-addr ip-address }*
undo am user-bind { mac-addr mac-address | ip-addr ip-address }
View System view/Ethernet port view
Parameter mac-address: MAC address to be bound.
ip-address: IP address to be bound.
interface-list: Ethernet port list, interface-list =interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] &<1-10. &<1-10> means that you can input up
to 10 ports/port ranges
Description Use the am user-bind command to bind the MAC and IP addresses of a user
with a specified port.
Use the undo am user-bind command to cancel the binding.
By default, the MAC and IP addresses of a user is not bound with any port.
n ■
■
Up to 100 MAC addresses and IP addresses can be bound to a port.
A MAC/IP address cannot be bound to more than one port.
Example # Bind the MAC address 000f-e200-5101 and IP address 10.1.1.1 (supposing they
are MAC and IP addresses of a legal user) to GigabitEthernet 2/0/2 port.
246 CHAPTER 23: PORT BINDING COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] am user-bind mac-addr 000f-e200-5101 ip-addr 10.1.1.1 interface GigabitEthernet2/0/2
display am user-bind
Syntax display am user-bind [ interface interface-type interface-number | mac-addr
mac-address | ip-addr ip-address ]
View Any view
Parameter interface: Displays binding information on a specified port.
interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.
mac-addr mac-address : Displays only the binding information of a specified MAC
address.
ip-addr ip-address : Displays only the binding information of a specified IP
address.
Description Use the display am user-bind command to display port binding information.
Example # Display the current system port binding information.
<SW7750> display am user-bind
Following address bind have been configured (* means that the rule is set by system):
Mac IP Port
000f-e200-5101 1.2.3.3 Ethernet2/0/2
000f-e200-5102 2.3.2.3 Ethernet2/0/4
The above output displays that two port binding settings exist:
■ MAC address 000f-e200-5101 and IP address 1.2.3.3 are bound with Ethernet
2/0/2.
■ MAC address 000f-e200-5102 and IP address 2.3.2.3 are bound with Ethernet
2/0/4.
DLDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
24
display dldp
Syntax display dldp [ interface-type interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.
Description Use the display dldp command to display the DLDP configuration information of
the device or the specified port.
Example # Display the DLDP configuration information of the device.
<SW7750> display dldp
dldp interval 10
dldp work-mode enhance
dldp authentication-mode none
dldp unidirectional-shutdown manual
dldp delaydown-timer 1
The port number with DLDP is 2.
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/1
dldp port state : inactive
dldp link state : down
The neighbor number of the port is 0.
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/2
dldp port state : advertisement
dldp link state : up
The neighbor number of the port is 1.
neighbor mac address : 000f-e227-750d
neighbor port index : 98
neighbor state : two way
neighbor aged time : 24
Table 35 Field descriptions of the display dldp command
Field Description
dldp interval Interval for sending DLDP advertisement packets
dldp work-mode DLDP work mode
dldp authentication-mode DLDP authentication mode
dldp unidirectional-shutdown DLDP action to be performed on detecting a
unidirectional link
dldp delaydown-timer Setting of the DelayDown timer
248 CHAPTER 24: DLDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 35 Field descriptions of the display dldp command
Field Description
The port number with DLDP Number of the DLDP-enabled ports on device
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/1 Port type and port number
dldp port state DLDP state of a port
dldp link state DLDP link state
The neighbor number of the port Number of the neighbor ports
neighbor mac address MAC address of a neighbor port
neighbor port index Neighbor port index
neighbor state Neighbor state (two way or unknown)
neighbor aged time Neighbor aging time
dldp
Syntax dldp { enable | disable }
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description In system view:
Use the dldp enable command to enable DLDP globally on all optical ports of the
switch.
Use the dldp disable command to disable DLDP globally on all optical ports of
the switch.
In Ethernet port view:
Use the dldp enable command to enable DLDP on the current port.
Use the dldp disable command to disable DLDP on the current port.
The commands apply to both non-optical ports and optical ports.
By default, DLDP is disabled.
n When you use the dldp enable/dldp disable commands in system view to
enable/disable DLDP globally on all optical ports of the switch, these commands
are only valid for the existing optical ports on the device, however, they are not
valid for those added subsequently.
Example # Enable DLDP globally on all optical ports of the switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dldp enable
DLDP is enabled on all fiber ports.
dldp authentication-mode 249
dldp authentication-mode
Syntax dldp authentication-mode { none | simple simple-password | md5
md5-password }
undo dldp authentication-mode
View System view
Parameter none: Performs no authentication with the peer port.
simple: Sets the authentication mode with the peer port to plain text.
simple-password: Password for authentication with the peer port, a plaintext
string in the range of 1 character to 16 characters.
md5: Specifies the mode of authentication with the peer port to MD5.
Description Use the dldp authentication-mode command to set the DLDP authentication
mode and password for the ports of the local and peer devices.
Use the undo dldp authentication-mode to cancel the DLDP authentication
mode and password for the ports of the local and peer devices.
By default, authentication mode is none, that is, authentication is not performed.
n Note that:
When you configure the DLDP authentication mode and authentication password,
make sure the same DLDP authentication mode and password are set for the ports
connecting the local and peer devices. Otherwise, DLDP authentication fails. DLDP
cannot work when DLDP authentication fails.
Related command: dldp unidirectional-shutdown.
Example # Enable DLDP on the ports connecting two devices. Plaintext authentication is
performed with the password password1.
■ Configure 3Com A:
<SW7750A> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750A] dldp authentication-mode simple password1
■ Configure 3Com B:
<SW7750B> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750B] dldp authentication-mode simple password1
dldp interval
Syntax dldp interval integer
250 CHAPTER 24: DLDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
undo dldp interval
View System view
Parameter Integer: Interval of sending DLDP packets, in the range of 1 seconds to 100
seconds. It is 5 seconds by default.
Description Use the dldp interval command to set the interval of sending advertisement
packets when all the DLDP-enabled ports are in the Advertisement status.
Use the undo dldp interval command to restore the interval to the default value
5 seconds.
By default, the interval of sending advertisement packets is 5 seconds.
n Note that:
■ The interval you define is applicable to all DLDP-enabled ports.
■ The interval must be shorter than one-third of the STP convergence time. If too
long an interval is set, an STP loop may occur before DLDP shuts down
unidirectional links. On the contrary, if too short an interval is set, network
traffic increases, and port bandwidth is reduced. Generally, the STP
convergence time is 30 seconds.
■ For the dldp interval integer command, make sure that the same interval for
transmitting advertisement packets is set on the ports used to connected both
devices; otherwise DLDP will not operate properly.
Example # Set the interval of sending advertisement packets to 20 seconds for all the
DLDP-enabled ports.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dldp interval 20
dldp reset
Syntax dldp reset
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description In system view:
Use the dldp reset command to reset the DLDP status of all the ports disabled by
DLDP.
In Ethernet port view:
dldp unidirectional-shutdown 251
Use the dldp reset command to reset the DLDP status of the current port
disabled by DLDP.
After the dldp reset command is executed, the DLDP status of these ports
changes from disable to active and DLDP restarts to probe the link status of the
fiber cables or copper twisted pairs.
Related command: dldp, and dldp unidirectional-shutdown.
Example # Reset the DLDP status of all the ports disabled by DLDP.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dldp reset
dldp unidirectional-shutdown
Syntax dldp unidirectional-shutdown { auto | manual }
undo dldp unidirectional-shutdown
View System view
Parameter auto: Disables the corresponding port automatically when DLDP detects a
unidirectional link.
manual: Prompts the user to disable the corresponding port manually instead of
disabling the port automatically when DLDP detects an unidirectional link. It stops
the DLDP packet sending/receiving on the port at the same time.
Description Use the dldp unidirectional-shutdown command to set the DLDP handling
mode when a unidirectional link is found.
Use the dldp unidirectional-shutdown command to restore the default
setting.
By default, the handling mode of DLDP after unidirectional links are detected is
auto.
Related command: dldp work-mode.
Example # Configure DLDP to automatically disable the corresponding port when a
unidirectional link is found.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dldp unidirectional-shutdown auto
252 CHAPTER 24: DLDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
dldp work-mode
Syntax dldp work-mode { enhance | normal }
undo dldp work-mode
View System view
Parameter enhance: Configures DLDP to work in enhanced mode. In this mode, DLDP
probes actively whether neighbors exist when neighbor tables are aging.
normal: Configures DLDP to work in normal mode. In this mode, DLDP does not
probe actively whether neighbors exist when neighbor tables are aging.
Description Use the dldp work-mode command to set the DLDP operating mode.
Use the undo dldp work-mode command to restore the default DLDP
operating mode.
By default, DLDP works in normal mode.
Example # Configure DLDP to work in enhanced mode.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dldp work-mode enhance
dldp delaydown-timer
Syntax dldp delaydown-timer delaydown-time
undo dldp delaydown-timer
View System view
Parameter delaydown-time: Delaydown timer to be set (in seconds). This argument ranges
from 1 to 5. By default, the delaydown timer expires after 1 second it is triggered.
Description Use the dldp delaydown-timer command to set the delaydown timer.
Use the undo dldp delaydown-timer command to restore the default
delaydown timer setting.
Example # Set the delaydown timer to 2 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dldp delaydown-timer 2
MAC ADDRESS TABLE
25 CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
n This chapter describes the management of static and dynamic MAC address
entries. For information on the management of multicast MAC address entries,
refer to “Static Multicast MAC Address Table Configuration Commands” on page
523.
bridgemactocpu
Syntax bridgemactocpu { enable | disable }
View System view
Parameter enable: Enables the packets to be passed to the CPU for processing.
disable: Disables the packets from being passed to the CPU for processing.
Description Use the bridgemactocpu command to set whether the packets with destination
MAC address as the bridge MAC address of the switch will be passed to the CPU
for processing.
By default, the packets with destination MAC address as the bridge MAC address
of the switch are not passed to the CPU for processing.
Example # Enable the packets with destination MAC address as the bridge MAC address of
the switch to be passed to the CPU for processing.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bridgemactocpu enable
display mac-address aging-time
Syntax display mac-address aging-time
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display mac-address aging-time command to display the aging time
for the dynamic MAC address entries in the MAC address table.
254 CHAPTER 25: MAC ADDRESS TABLE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Related command: mac-address, mac-address timer, display mac-address.
Example # Display the aging time for the dynamic MAC address entries.
<SW7750> display mac-address aging-time
Mac address aging time: 300s
The output information indicates that the aging time for the dynamic MAC
address entries is 300 seconds.
<SW7750> display mac-address aging-time
Mac address aging time: no-aging
The output information indicates that dynamic MAC address entries do not age
out.
display mac-address
Syntax display mac-address [ display-option ]
View Any view
Parameter display-option: Option used to display specific MAC address table information, as
described in Table 36.
Table 36 Description on the display-option argument
Value Description
mac-address [ vlan vlan-id ] Displays information about a specified MAC
address entry.
{ static | dynamic } [ interface interface-type Displays information about dynamic or static
interface-number ] [ vlan vlan-id ] [ count ] address entries.
interface interface-type interface-number Displays information about the MAC address
[ vlan vlan-id ] [ count ] entries concerning a specified port.
vlan vlan-id [ count ] Displays information about the MAC address
entries concerning a specified VLAN.
count Displays the total number of the MAC
address entries maintained by the switch.
mac-address: MAC address.
static: Displays static MAC address entries. (A static MAC address entry does not
age.)
dynamic: Displays dynamic MAC address entries. (A dynamic MAC address entry
ages with time.)
interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.
vlan-id: VLAN ID. This argument ranges from 1 to 4094.
higig-port mac-learning disable 255
count: Displays only the total number of the MAC address entries.
Description Use the display mac-address command to display information about MAC
address entries in a MAC address table, including: MAC address, VLAN and port
corresponding to the MAC address, the type (static or dynamic) of a MAC address
entry, aging time and so on.
Example # Display the information about the MAC address 000f-e201-0101.
<SW7750> display mac-address 000f-e201-0101
MAC ADDR VLAN ID STATE PORT INDEX AGING TIME(s)
000f-e201-0101 1 Learned Ethernet3/0/11 AGING
# Display the MAC address entries for the port Ethernet2/0/4.
<SW7750> display mac-address interface Ethernet 2/0/4
MAC ADDR VLAN ID STATE PORT INDEX AGING TIME(s)
00e0-0112-9a86 2 Config static Ethernet2/0/4 NOAGED
000c-760a-172d 1 Learned Ethernet2/0/4 AGING
000d-88f6-44c1 1 Learned Ethernet2/0/4 AGING
000d-88f7-9f7d 1 Learned Ethernet2/0/4 AGING
000d-88f7-b090 1 Learned Ethernet2/0/4 AGING
000d-88f7-b094 1 Learned Ethernet2/0/4 AGING
000d-88f8-4e88 1 Learned Ethernet2/0/4 AGING
--- 7 mac address(es) found on port Ethernet2/0/4 ---
# Display the total number of MAC address entries found in VLAN 2.
<SW7750> display mac-address vlan 2 count
9 mac address(es) found in vlan 2
Table 37 Field descriptions of the display mac-address command
Field Description
MAC ADDR MAC address
VLAN ID ID of the VLAN to which the network device identified by the MAC address
belongs
STATE The state of the MAC address. The value of this field can be "Static",
"Learned", and so on.
PORT INDEX Port index (including port type and port number)
AGING TIME(s) Indicates whether a MAC address entry is aging
higig-port mac-learning disable
Syntax higig-port mac-learning disable slot-number
undo higig-port mac-learning disable slot-number
View System view
Parameter slot-number: Number of the module slot for which MAC address learning on
HiGig ports is to be enabled/disabled.
256 CHAPTER 25: MAC ADDRESS TABLE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the higig-port mac-learning disable command to disable the HiGig ports
from learning MAC addresses.
Use the undo higig-port mac-learning disable command to enable the HiGig
ports to learn MAC addresses.
By default, HiGig ports are enabled to learn MAC addresses.
n The above-mentioned command is not available for the following modules:
3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A, 3C16858, 3C16859, LS8M1PT4GB0,
LS8M1PT8GB0, LS81PT4GA, and LS81PT8GA.
Example # Disable the HiGig ports on the module in slot 3 from learning MAC addresses.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] higig-port mac-learning disable 3
mac-address
Syntax mac-address { static | dynamic } mac-address interface interface-type
interface-number vlan vlan-id
undo mac-address [ mac-address-attribute ]
View System view
Parameter static: Specifies that the MAC address entry to be added/updated is of static type.
dynamic: Specifies that the MAC address entry to be added/updated is of
dynamic type.
mac-address: MAC address.
interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.
vlan-id: VLAN ID. This argument ranges from 1 to 4094.
mac-address-attribute: String used to specify the MAC address entries to be
removed, as described in Table 38.
Table 38 Description on the mac-address-attribute argument
Value Description
{ static | dynamic } interface interface-type Removes the static or dynamic MAC address
interface-number entries concerning a specified port.
{ static | dynamic } vlan vlan-id Removes the static or dynamic MAC address
entries concerning a specified VLAN.
{ static | dynamic } mac-address [ interface Removes a specified static or dynamic MAC
interface-type interface-number ] vlan address entry.
vlan-id
mac-address learning synchronization 257
Table 38 Description on the mac-address-attribute argument
Value Description
interface interface-type interface-number Removes all the MAC address entries
concerning a specified port.
vlan vlan-id Removes all the MAC address entries
concerning a specified VLAN.
mac-address [ interface interface-type Removes a specified MAC address entry.
interface-number ] vlan vlan-id
Description Use the mac-address command to add/modify a MAC address entry.
Use the undo mac-address command to remove one or more MAC address
entries.
If the MAC address you input in the mac-address command already exists in the
MAC address table, the system will modify the attributes of the corresponding
MAC address entry according to your settings in the command.
You can remove all MAC address entries (unicast MAC addresses only) concerning
a specific port, or remove a specific type of MAC address entries, such as the
addresses learnt by the system and dynamic or static MAC address entries
configured.
Example # Configure a static MAC address entry with the following settings:
■ MAC address: 000f-e201-0101
■ Outbound port: Ethernet2/0/1 port
■ Ethernet2/0/1 port belongs to VLAN 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-address static 000f-e201-0101 interface Ethernet 2/0/1 vlan 2
mac-address learning synchronization
Syntax mac-address learning synchronization
undo mac-address learning synchronization
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the mac-address learning synchronization command to enable MAC
address learning synchronization between module chips.
Use the undo mac-address learning synchronization command to disable
MAC address learning synchronization between module chips.
By default, MAC address learning synchronization between module chips is
disabled.
258 CHAPTER 25: MAC ADDRESS TABLE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Enable MAC address learning synchronization between module chips.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-address learning synchronization
mac-address mac-learning disable
Syntax mac-address mac-learning disable
undo mac-address mac-learning disable
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the mac-address mac-learning disable command to disable the current
port from learning MAC addresses.
Use the undo mac-address mac-learning disable command to re-enable the
current port to learn MAC addresses.
By default, the port is enabled to learn MAC addresses.
n ■ Do not use the mac-address mac-learning disable command together with
any 802.1X-related command in Ethernet port view.
■ Do not use the mac-address mac-learning disable command together with
the mac-address max-mac-count command.
Example # Disable the port Ethernet2/0/1 from learning MAC addresses.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] mac-address mac-learning disable
mac-address max-mac-count
Syntax mac-address max-mac-count count
undo mac-address max-mac-count
View Ethernet port view
Parameter count: Maximum number of MAC addresses a port can learn. This argument
ranges from 0 to 16384. A value of 0 disables the port from learning MAC
addresses.
Description Use the mac-address max-mac-count command to set the maximum number
of MAC addresses an Ethernet port can learn.
mac-address timer 259
Use the undo mac-address max-mac-count command to cancel the limitation
on the number of MAC addresses an Ethernet port can learn.
By default, the number of MAC addresses an Ethernet port can learn is not
limited.
When you use the mac-address max-mac-count command, the port stops
learning MAC addresses after the number of MAC addresses it learned reaches
the value of the count argument you provided. You can use the undo
mac-address max-mac-count command to cancel this limit so that the port can
learn an unlimited number of MAC addresses, which is the default setting.
Related command: mac-address, mac-address timer.
Example # Set the maximum number of MAC addresses Ethernet2/0/3 port can learn to
600.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/3
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/3] mac-address max-mac-count 600
mac-address timer
Syntax mac-address timer { aging age | no-aging }
undo mac-address timer aging
View System view
Parameter aging age: Specifies the aging time (in seconds) for layer 2 dynamic MAC address
entries. The age argument ranges from 10 to 1000000 and defaults to 300.
no-aging: Specifies not to age dynamic MAC address entries.
Description Use the mac-address timer command to set the aging time for dynamic MAC
address entries.
Use the undo mac-address timer aging command to restore the default aging
time.
Set the aging time for dynamic MAC address entries as required but ensure that
the aging time does not decrease the layer 2 packet forwarding performance of
the switch.
■ If the aging time is too short, the MAC address entries that are still valid may be
removed. Upon receiving a packet destined for a MAC address that is already
removed, the switch broadcasts the packet through all its ports in the VLAN
which the packet belongs to. This decreases the operating performance of the
switch.
260 CHAPTER 25: MAC ADDRESS TABLE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
■ If the aging time is too long, MAC address entries may still exist even if they
turn invalid. This causes the switch to be unable to update its MAC address
table in time. In this case, the MAC address table cannot reflect the position
changes of network devices in time.
Example # Set the aging time for MAC address entries to 500 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-address timer aging 500
CENTRALIZED MAC ADDRESS
26 AUTHENTICATION CONFIGURATION
COMMANDS
display mac-authentication
Syntax display mac-authentication [ interface interface-list ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-list: List of Ethernet ports. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for
this argument.
Description Use the display mac-authentication command to display global information
about centralized MAC address authentication, including:
■ The state of centralized MAC address authentication (enabled/disabled)
■ Timer settings
■ The number of online users
■ The MAC addresses in quiet period
■ MAC authentication information about each port
Example # Display the global information about centralized MAC address authentication.
<SW7750> display mac-authentication
Mac address authentication is Enabled.
Mac authentication re-authenticate is Disabled.
Authentication mode is UsernameAsMacAddress
Fixed username:mac
Fixed password:not configured
Offline detect period is 300s
Quiet period is 60s.
Server response timeout value is 100s
Mac-reauthenticate period is 1800s.
Max allowed user number is 4096
Current user number amounts to 0
Current domain: not configured, use default domain
Silent Mac User info:
MAC ADDR From Port Port Index
GigabitEthernet2/0/1 is link-down
MAC address authentication is Disabled
Authenticate success: 0, failed: 0
Current online user number is 0
262 CHAPTER 26: CENTRALIZED MAC ADDRESS AUTHENTICATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
MAC ADDR Authenticate state AuthIndex
......
Table 39 Field descriptions of the display mac-authentication command
Field Description
Mac address authentication is Enabled Centralized MAC address authentication is
enabled.
Mac authentication re-authenticate is Disabled Centralized MAC address re-authentication
is disabled.
Authentication mode Centralized MAC address authentication
mode. The default is the MAC address
mode.
Fixed username User name used in the fixed mode, which
defaults to mac.
Fixed password Password used in the fixed mode, which is
not configured by default.
Offline detect period Offline detect timer, which sets the time
interval to check whether a user goes
offline and defaults to 300 seconds.
Quiet period Quiet timer sets the quiet period. A switch
goes through a quiet period if a user fails
to pass the MAC address authentication.
The default value is 60 seconds.
Server response timeout value Server timeout timer, which sets the
timeout time for the connection between a
switch and the RADIUS server. By default, it
is 100 seconds.
Mac-reauthenticate period Re-authentication period timer
Max allowed user number The maximum number of users supported
by the switch.
Current user number amounts to The current number of users
Current domain The current used domain. It is not
configured by default.
Silent Mac User info The information about the silent user.
When the user fails to pass MAC address
authentication because of inputting error
user name and password, the switch sets
the user to be in quiet state. During quiet
period, the switch does not process the
authentication request of this user.
GigabitEthernet2/0/1 is link-down The link connected to GigabitEthernet2/0/1
is down.
MAC address authentication is Disabled MAC address authentication is disabled on
GigabitEthernet2/0/1.
Authenticate success: 0, failed: 0 Statistics of the MAC address
authentications performed on the port,
including the numbers of successful and
failed authentication operations.
Current online user number The number of the users current access the
network through the port
MAC ADDR Peer MAC address
mac-authentication 263
Table 39 Field descriptions of the display mac-authentication command
Field Description
Authenticate state The state of the users accessing the
network through the port, which can be:
■ MAC_AUTHENTICATOR_CONNECTING:
Connecting
■ MAC_AUTHENTICATOR_SUCCESS:
Authentication passed
■ MAC_AUTHENTICATOR_FAILURE: Fail
to pass authentication
■ MAC_AUTHENTICATOR_LOGOFF:
Offline
AuthIndex Index of the current MAC address with
regard to the authentication port
mac-authentication
Syntax mac-authentication
undo mac-authentication
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the mac-authentication command to enable centralized MAC address
authentication globally or for a specified port.
Use the undo mac-authentication command to disable centralized MAC
address authentication globally or for a specified port.
By default, centralized MAC address authentication is disabled both globally and
for a port.
When being executed in system view, the mac-authentication command enables
centralized MAC address authentication globally.
When being executed in Ethernet port view, the mac-authentication command
enables centralized MAC address authentication for the current port.
n You can configure the global or port-specific MAC address authentication-related
attributes before or after you enable centralized MAC address authentication.
Example # Enable centralized MAC address authentication globally.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-authentication
MAC authentication is enabled globally.
# Enable centralized MAC address authentication on Ethernet2/0/1.
264 CHAPTER 26: CENTRALIZED MAC ADDRESS AUTHENTICATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] mac-authentication
MAC authentication is enabled on port Ethernet 2/0/1 already
mac-authentication interface
Syntax mac-authentication interface interface-list
undo mac-authentication interface interface-list
View System view
Parameter interface-list: List of Ethernet ports. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges.
Description Use the mac-authentication interface command to enable the centralized
MAC address authentication for specified ports.
Use the undo mac-authentication interface command to disable the
centralized MAC address authentication on specified ports.
By default, centralized MAC address authentication is disabled on a port.
n ■ To make the centralized MAC address authentication configuration takes effect
on a port, you need to enable the centralized MAC address authentication for
the port after you enable centralized MAC address authentication globally.
■ The configuration of the maximum number of learned MAC addresses
(configured through the mac-address max-mac-count command) is
unavailable for the ports with centralized MAC address authentication enabled.
Similarly, the centralized MAC address authentication is unavailable for the
ports with the maximum number of learned MAC addresses configured.
Example # Enable centralized MAC address authentication for Ethernet2/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-authentication interface Ethernet 2/0/1
mac-authentication authmode usernameasmacaddress
Syntax mac-authentication authmode usernameasmacaddress [ usernameformat {
with-hyphen | without-hyphen } ]
undo mac-authentication authmode
View System view
mac-authentication authmode usernamefixed 265
Parameter usernameformat: Specifies the input format of the username and password.
with-hyphen: Uses hyphened MAC addresses as usernames and passwords,
00-05-e0-1c-02-e3 for example.
without-hyphen: Uses MAC addresses without hyphens as usernames and
passwords, 0005e01c02e3 for example.
Description Use the mac-authentication authmode usernameasmacaddress command
to specify the centralized MAC address authentication mode as MAC address.
Use the undo mac-authentication authmode command to restore the default
centralized MAC address authentication mode.
By default, the MAC address mode is adopted for the centralized MAC address
authentication.
Example # Specify centralized MAC address authentication mode as MAC address, using
hyphened MAC addresses as the usernames and passwords.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-authentication authmode usernameasmacaddress usernamefo
rmat with-hyphen
mac-authentication authmode usernamefixed
Syntax mac-authentication authmode usernamefixed
undo mac-authentication authmode
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the mac-authentication authmode usernamefixed command to specify
the centralized MAC address authentication mode as fixed mode.
Use the undo mac-authentication authmode command to restore the default
centralized MAC address authentication mode.
By default, the MAC address mode is adopted.
Example # Specify centralized MAC address authentication mode as fixed mode.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-authentication authmode usernamefixed
266 CHAPTER 26: CENTRALIZED MAC ADDRESS AUTHENTICATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
mac-authentication authpassword
Syntax mac-authentication authpassword password
undo mac-authentication authpassword
View System view
Parameter password: Password to be set, a string comprising 1 to 63 characters.
Description Use the mac-authentication authpassword command to set a password for
centralized MAC address authentication when the fixed mode is adopted.
Use the undo mac-authentication authpassword command to cancel the
configured password.
By default, no fixed password is configured.
Example # Set the password to mac.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-authentication authpassword mac
mac-authentication authusername
Syntax mac-authentication authusername username
undo mac-authentication authusername
View System view
Parameter username: User name to be set, a string comprising 1 to 55 characters.
Description Use the mac-authentication authusername command to set a user name
when the fixed mode is adopted.
Use the undo mac-authentication authusername command to restore the
default user name.
By default, the user name used in MAC address authentication (in the fixed mode)
is mac.
Example # Set the user name to vipuser for fixed mode.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-authentication authusername vipuser
mac-authentication domain 267
mac-authentication domain
Syntax mac-authentication domain isp-name
undo mac-authentication domain
View System view
Parameter isp-name: ISP domain name, a string comprising up to 24 characters. Note that
this argument cannot be null and cannot contain these characters: "/", ":", "*",
"?", "<", and ">".
Description Use the mac-authentication domain command to configure an ISP domain for
centralized MAC address authentication.
Use the undo mac-authentication domain command to restore the default
ISP domain for centralized MAC address authentication.
By default, the domain for centralized MAC address authentication is not
configured.
Use the "default domain" as the ISP domain name.
Example # Configure the domain for centralized MAC address authentication to be Cams.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-authentication domain Cams
mac-authentication re-authenticate enable
Syntax mac-authentication re-authenticate enable
undo mac-authentication re-authenticate enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the mac-authentication re-authenticate enable command to enable the
MAC address regular re-authentication function.
Use the undo mac-authentication re-authenticate enable command to
disable the MAC address regular re-authentication function.
By default, MAC address regular re-authentication is disabled.
c CAUTION: You must enable MAC address authentication globally and on a port
before you can enable the MAC address regular re-authentication function.
268 CHAPTER 26: CENTRALIZED MAC ADDRESS AUTHENTICATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Enable the MAC address regular re-authentication function globally.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-authentication re-authenticate enable
mac-authentication re-authenticate mac-address
Syntax mac-authentication re-authenticate mac-address mac-address
View System view
Parameter mac-address: All valid unicast MAC addresses.
Description Use the mac-authentication re-authenticate mac-address command to
re-authenticate a specified MAC address that has already passed the MAC address
authentication.
c CAUTION:
■ For a user with the specified MAC address, each MAC address
re-authentication configuration will trigger a re-authentication. If the
re-authentication succeeds, the user will be authorized; otherwise, the user will
be made offline.
■ When you configure to re-authenticate a specified MAC address, if the MAC
address has failed the MAC address authentication, the re-authentication
operation will be ignored.
Example # Configure to re-authenticate MAC address 000F-3D80-4433 which has passed
the MAC address authentication.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-authentication re-authenticate mac-address 000F-3D80-44
33
mac-authentication timer
Syntax mac-authentication timer { offline-detect offline-detect-value | quiet
quiet-value | server-timeout server-timeout-value | reauth-period
reauth-period-value }
undo mac-authentication timer { offline-detect | quiet | server-timeout |
reauth-period }
View System view
Parameter offline-detect-value: Offline detect timer (in seconds) setting. This argument
ranges from 1 to 65,535 and defaults to 300. The offline detect timer sets the
time interval for a switch to test whether a user goes offline.
reset mac-authentication 269
quiet-value: Quiet timer (in seconds) setting. This argument ranges from 1 to
3,600 and defaults to 60. After a user fails to pass the authentication performed
by a switch, the switch quiets for a specific period (the quiet period) before it
authenticates the user again.
server-timeout-value: Server timeout timer setting (in seconds). This argument
ranges from 1 to 65,535 and defaults to 100. During authentication, the switch
prohibits a user from accessing the network through the corresponding port if the
connection between the switch and the RADIUS server times out.
reauth-period-value: Reauth-period timer. After a user passes the MAC address
authentication, the switch will periodically request the server for re-authentication.
This argument ranges from 1 to 1,000,000, in seconds. The default period is 1800
seconds.
Description Use the mac-authentication timer command to configure the timers used in
centralized MAC address authentication.
Use the undo mac-authentication timer command to restore a timer to its
default setting.
Related command: display mac-authentication.
Example # Set the server timeout timer to 150 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-authentication timer server-timeout 150
reset mac-authentication
Syntax reset mac-authentication statistics [ interface interface-list ]
View User view
Parameter interface-list: List of Ethernet ports. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
interface-type is the port type, interface-number is the port number, and &<1-10>
means you can provide up to 10 ports/port ranges.
Description Use the reset mac-authentication command to clear the centralized MAC
address authentication statistics. If you execute this command with the interface
keyword specified, the centralized MAC address authentication statistics of the
specified port is cleared. If the keyword is not specified, the command clears the
global centralized MAC address authentication statistics.
Example # Clear the centralized MAC address authentication statistics of GigabitEthernet
2/0/1.
270 CHAPTER 26: CENTRALIZED MAC ADDRESS AUTHENTICATION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> reset mac-authentication statistics interface GigabitEthern
et 2/0/1
MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
27
active region-configuration
Syntax active region-configuration
View MST region view
Parameter None
Description Use the active region-configuration command to activate the settings of an
MST (multiple spanning tree) region.
Configuring MST region-related parameters (especially the VLAN mapping table)
result in spanning trees being regenerated. To reduce network topology jitter
caused by the configuration, MSTP (multiple spanning tree protocol) does not
regenerate spanning trees immediately after the configuration; it does this only
after you activate the new MST region-related settings or enable MSTP, and then
the new settings can really take effect.
This command causes the switch to operate with the new MST region-related
settings you configured and spanning trees to be regenerated.
Related command: instance, region-name, revision-level, vlan-mapping modulo, and check
region-configuration.
Example # Activate the MST region-related settings.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp region-configuration
[SW7750-mst-region] active region-configuration
check region-configuration
Syntax check region-configuration
View MST region view
Parameter None
272 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the check region-configuration command to display the current MST
region configuration, including region name, revision level, and VLAN mapping
table.
MSTP-enabled switches are in the same region only when they have the same MST
region-related configuration. A switch cannot be in a respected region if any one
of the above three MST region-related settings does not be consistent with that of
another switch in the region.
You can use this command to find the MST region the switch currently belongs to
or check to see whether or not the MST region-related configuration is correct.
Related command: instance, region-name, revision-level, vlan-mapping modulo, and active
region-configuration.
Example # Display the MST region configuration of the current switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp region-configuration
[SW7750-mst-region] check region-configuration
Admin Configuration
Format selector :0
Region name :00e0fc003900
Revision level :0
Instance Vlans Mapped
0 1 to 9, 11 to 4094
16 10
Table 40 Field descriptions of the check region-configuration command
Field Description
Format selector The selector specified by MSTP
Region name The name of the MST region
Revision level The revision level of the MST region
Instance Vlans Mapped Spanning tree instance-to-VLAN mappings in the MST region
display stp
Syntax display stp [ instance instance-id ] [ interface interface-list | slot slot-number ] [
brief ]
View Any view
Parameter instance-id: ID of the spanning tree instance ranging from 0 to 16. A value of 0
specifies the common and internal spanning tree (CIST).
interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
display stp 273
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for
this argument.
Slot slot-number: Specifies a slot, the STP-related information about which is to
be displayed.
brief: Displays only port state and protection measures taken on the port.
Description Use the display stp command to display the state and statistical information
about one or all spanning trees.
The state and statistical information about MSTP can be used to analyze and
maintain the topology of a network. It also can be used to make MSTP operating
properly.
■ If neither spanning tree instance nor port list is specified, the command displays
spanning tree information about all spanning tree instances on all ports in
order of port number.
■ If only a spanning tree instance is specified, the command displays information
about the specified spanning tree instance on all ports in the order of the port
number.
■ If only a port list is specified, the command displays information about all
spanning tree instances on these ports in the order of the port number.
■ If both a spanning tree instance and a port list are specified, the command
displays spanning tree information about the specified spanning tree instance
and the specified ports in order of spanning tree instance ID.
MSTP state information includes:
■ Global CIST parameters: Protocol operation mode, switch priority in the CIST
instance, MAC address, Hello time, Max age, Forward delay, Max hops, the
common root of the CIST, the external path cost for the switch to reach the
CIST common root, region root, the internal path cost for the switch to reach
the region root, CIST root port of the switch, the state of the BPDU (bridge
protocol data unit) guard function (enabled or disabled), and the state of the
digest snooping feature (enabled or disabled).
■ CIST port parameters: Port protocol, port role, port priority, path cost,
designated bridge, designated port, edge port/non-edge port, whether or not
the link on the port is a point-to-point link, the maximum transmitting speed,
type of the enabled guard function, state of the digest snooping feature
(enabled or disabled), VLAN mappings, Hello time, Max age, Forward delay,
Message-age time, and Remaining-hops.
■ Global MSTI parameters: MSTI instance ID, bridge priority of the instance,
region root, internal path cost, MSTI root port, and master bridge.
■ MSTI port parameters: Port state, role, priority, path cost, designated bridge,
designated port, and Remaining Hops.
The statistical information includes: the numbers of the TCN BPDUs, the
configuration BPDUs, the RST BPDUs, and the MST BPDUs transmitted/received by
each port.
274 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Related command: reset stp.
Example # Display the state and statistical information about a spanning tree.
<SW7750> display stp instance 0 interface Ethernet 1/0/1 to Ethernet 1/0/4 brief
MSTID Port Role STP State Protection
0 Ethernet1/0/1 ALTE DISCARDING LOOP
0 Ethernet1/0/2 DESI FORWARDING NONE
0 Ethernet1/0/3 DESI FORWARDING NONE
0 Ethernet1/0/4 DESI FORWARDING NONE
Table 41 Field descriptions of the display stp command
Field Description
MSTID ID of a spanning tree instance in the MST region
Port Port index
Role Port role
STP State STP state on the port, which can be forwarding and discarding.
Protection Protection type of the port
display stp abnormalport
Syntax display stp abnormalport
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display stp abnormalport command to display the ports that are
blocked by STP guard functions.
Example # Display the ports that are blocked by STP guard functions.
<SW7750> display stp abnormalport
MSTID Port Block Reason
--------- -------------------- -------------
0 Ethernet1/0/20 Root-Protection
1 Ethernet1/0/21 Loop-Protection
Table 42 Field descriptions of the display stp abnormalport command
Field Description
MSTID MST instance ID in the MST region
Port Port number
Block Reason The function blocking the port
display stp portdown
Syntax display stp portdown
View Any view
display stp region-configuration 275
Parameter None
Description Use the display stp portdown command to display the ports that are shut
down by STP guard functions.
Example # Display the ports that are shut down by STP guard functions.
<SW7750> display stp portdown
Port Down Reason
--------------------- ------------
Ethernet1/0/20 BPDU-Protection
Table 43 Field descriptions of the display stp portdown command
Field Description
Port Port number
Down Reason The function shutting down the port
display stp region-configuration
Syntax display stp region-configuration
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display stp region-configuration command to display the activated
MST region configuration, including the region name, region revision level, and
spanning tree instance-to-VLAN mappings configured for the switch.
Related command: stp region-configuration.
Example # Display the activated MST region configuration.
<SW7750> display stp region-configuration
Oper Configuration
Format selector :0
Region name :hello
Revision level :0
Instance Vlans Mapped
0 21 to 4094
1 1 to 10
2 11 to 20
Table 44 Field descriptions of the display stp region-configuration command
Field Description
Format selector The selector specified by MSTP
Region name The name of the MST region
Revision level The revision level of the MST region
Instance Vlans Mapped Spanning tree instance-to-VLAN mappings in the MST region
276 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display stp root
Syntax display stp root
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display stp root command to display information about the root ports
in the MSTP region where the switch resides.
Example # Display information about the root ports in the MSTP region where the switch
resides.
<SW7750> display stp root
MSTID Root Bridge ID ExtPathCost IntPathCost Root Port
-------- -------------------- ------------ ------------- -----------
0 32768.00e0-fc53-d908 0 200 Ethernet1/0/18
Table 45 Field descriptions of the display stp root command
Field Description
MSTID MST instance ID in the MST region
Root Bridge ID ID of the root bridge
ExtPathCost Cost of the external path from the switch to the root bridge
IntPathCost Cost of the internal path from the switch to the root bridge
Root Port Root port
display stp root
Syntax display stp root
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display stp root command to display information about the root ports
in the MSTP region where the switch resides.
Example # Display information about the root ports in the MSTP region where the switch
resides.
<SW7750> display stp root
MSTID Root Bridge ID ExtPathCost IntPathCost Root Port
-------- -------------------- ------------ ------------- -----------
0 32768.00e0-fc53-d908 0 200 Ethernet1/0/18
Table 46 Field descriptions of the display stp root command
Field Description
MSTID MST instance ID in the MST region
instance 277
Table 46 Field descriptions of the display stp root command
Field Description
Root Bridge ID ID of the root bridge
ExtPathCost Cost of the external path from the switch to the root bridge
IntPathCost Cost of the internal path from the switch to the root bridge
Root Port Root port
instance
Syntax instance instance-id vlan vlan-list
undo instance instance-id [ vlan vlan-list ]
View MST region view
Parameter instance-id: ID of a spanning tree instance ranging from 0 to 16. A value of 0
specifies the CIST.
vlan-list: List of VLANs. You need to provide this argument in the form of vlan-list
= { vlan-id [ to vlan-id ] }&<1-10>, where &<1-10> means that you can provide up
to 10 VLAN IDs/VLAN ID ranges for this argument. Normally, a VLAN ID can be a
number ranging from 1 to 4094. VLANs with their IDs beyond this range (if the
switch supports this kind VLAN IDs), such as VLAN 4095, VLAN 4096, can only be
mapped to the CIST (spanning tree instance 0).
Description Use the instance command to map specified VLANs to a specified spanning tree
instance.
Use the undo instance command to remove the mappings from the specified
VLANs to the specified spanning tree instance and remap the specified VLANs to
the CIST (spanning tree instance 0). If you specify no VLAN in the undo instance
command, all VLANs that are mapped to the specified spanning tree instance are
remapped to the CIST.
By default, all VLANs are mapped to the CIST.
VLAN-to-spanning tree instance mappings are recorded in the VLAN mapping
table of an MSTP switch. So these two commands are actually used to manipulate
the VLAN mapping table. You can add/remove a VLAN to/from the VLAN mapping
table of a specific spanning tree instance by using these two commands.
Note that a VLAN cannot be mapped to multiple spanning tree instances at the
same time. A VLAN-to-spanning tree instance mapping is automatically removed if
you map the VLAN to another spanning tree instance.
Related command: region-name, revision-level, vlan-mapping modulo, check
region-configuration, and active region-configuration.
Example # Map VLAN 2 to spanning tree instance 1.
278 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp region-configuration
[SW7750-mst-region] instance 1 vlan 2
region-name
Syntax region-name name
undo region-name
View MST region view
Parameter name: MST region name to be set for the switch, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
Description Use the region-name command to set an MST region name for a switch.
Use the undo region-name command to revert to the default MST region name.
The default MST region name of a switch is its MAC address.
MST region name, along with VLAN mapping table and MSTP revision level,
determines the MST region which a switch belongs to.
Related command: instance, revision-level, check region-configuration, vlan-mapping
modulo, and active region-configuration.
Example # Set the MST region name of the switch to "hello".
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp region-configuration
[SW7750-mst-region] region-name hello
reset stp
Syntax reset stp [ interface interface-list ]
View User view
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for
this argument.
Description Use the reset stp command to clear spanning tree-related statistics on Ethernet
ports.
revision-level 279
The spanning tree statistics include the numbers of the TCN BPDUs, configuration
BPDUs, RST BPDUs, and MST BPDUs sent/received through one or more specified
ports or all ports (note that STP BPDUs and TCN BPDUs are counted only for CISTs.)
This command clears the spanning tree-related statistics on specified ports if you
specify the interface-list argument. If you do not specify the interface-list
argument, this command clears the spanning tree-related statistics on all ports.
Related command: display stp.
Example # Clear the spanning tree-related statistics on ports Ethernet1/0/1 through
Ethernet1/0/3.
<SW7750> reset stp interface Ethernet 1/0/1 to Ethernet 1/0/3
revision-level
Syntax revision-level level
undo revision-level
View MST region view
Parameter level: MSTP revision level to be set for the switch. This argument ranges from 0 to
75,535.
Description Use the revision-level command to set the MSTP revision level for a switch.
Use the undo revision-level command to revert to the default revision level.
By default, the MSTP revision level is 0.
MSTP revision level, along with MST region name and VLAN mapping table,
determines the MST region which a switch belongs to.
Related command: instance, region-name, check region-configuration, vlan-mapping modulo,
and active region-configuration.
Example # Set the MSTP revision level of the MST region to 5.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp region-configuration
[SW7750-mst-region] revision-level 5
stp
Syntax stp { enable | disable }
undo stp
280 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter enable: Enables MSTP globally or on a port.
disable: Disables MSTP globally or on a port.
Description Use the stp command to enable/disable MSTP globally or on a port.
Use the undo stp command to revert to the default MSTP state globally or on a
port.
By default, MSTP is disabled globally and on a port.
By default, once MSTP is enabled globally, it is enabled on a port.
After MSTP is enabled, the actual operation mode, which can be STP-compatible
mode, RSTP-compatible mode, and MSTP mode, is determined by the protocol
mode configured by users. A switch becomes a transparent bridge if MSTP is
disabled.
After being enabled, MSTP maintains spanning trees by processing configuration
BPDUs of different VLANs. After being disabled, it stops maintaining spanning
trees.
Related command: stp mode, and stp interface.
Example # Enable MSTP globally.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp enable
# Disable MSTP on Ethernet1/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface ethernet 1/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet1/0/1] stp disable
stp bpdu-protection
Syntax stp bpdu-protection
undo stp bpdu-protection
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the stp bpdu-protection command to enable the BPDU guard function.
stp bridge-diameter 281
Use the undo stp bpdu-protection command to revert to the default state of
the BPDU guard function.
By default, the BPDU guard function is disabled.
Normally, the access ports of the devices operating on the access layer directly
connect to terminals (such as PCs) or file servers. These ports are usually
configured as edge ports to achieve rapid transition. But they resume non-edge
ports automatically upon receiving configuration BPDUs, which causes spanning
trees regeneration and network topology jitter.
Normally, no configuration BPDU will reach edge ports. But malicious users can
attack a network by sending configuration BPDUs deliberately to edge ports to
cause network jitter. You can prevent this type of attacks by utilizing the BPDU
guard function. With this function enabled on a switch, the switch shuts down the
edge ports that receive configuration BPDUs and then reports these cases to the
administrator. If a port is shut down, only the administrator can restore it.
Example # Enable the BPDU guard function.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp bpdu-protection
stp bridge-diameter
Syntax stp bridge-diameter bridgenum
undo stp bridge-diameter
View System view
Parameter bridgenum: Network diameter to be set for a switched network. This argument
ranges from 2 to 7.
Description Use the stp bridge-diameter command to set the network diameter of a
switched network. The network diameter of a switched network is represented by
the maximum possible number of switches between any two terminals in a
switched network.
Use the undo stp bridge-diameter command to revert to the default network
diameter.
By default, the maximum number of switches between any two terminal devices in
the switched network is 7.
After you configure the network diameter of a switched network, MSTP adjusts its
Hello time, Forward delay, and Max age settings accordingly. With the network
diameter set to 7 (the default), the three time-relate settings, Hello time, Forward
delay, and Max age, are set to their defaults as well.
The stp bridge-diameter command only applies to CIST; it is invalid for MSTIs.
282 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Related command: stp timer forward-delay, stp timer hello, and stp timer max-age.
Example # Set the network diameter to 5.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp bridge-diameter 5
stp config-digest-snooping
Syntax stp config-digest-snooping
undo stp config-digest-snooping
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the stp config-digest-snooping command to enable the digest snooping
feature.
Use the undo stp config-digest-snooping command to disable the digest
snooping feature.
The digest snooping feature is disabled by default.
According to IEEE 802.1s, two connected switches can interwork with each other
through MSTIs in an MST region only when the two switches have the same MST
region-related configuration. With MSTP employed, interconnected switches
determine whether or not they are in the same MST region by checking the
configuration IDs of the BPDUs between them. (A configuration ID contains
information such as region ID and configuration digest.)
As some partners’ switches adopt proprietary spanning tree protocols, they cannot
interwork with other switches in an MST region even if they are configured with
the same MST region-related settings as other switches in the MST region.
This kind of problems can be overcome by implementing the digest snooping
feature. If a switch port is connected to a partner’s switch that has the same MST
region-related settings but adopts a proprietary spanning tree protocol, you can
enable digest snooping on the port. Then the switch regards the peer switch
connected to the port as in the same region and records the configuration digests
carried in the BPDUs received from the switch, which will be put in the BPDUs to
be send to the peer switch.. In this way, the switch can interwork with the
partners’ switches in an MST region.
n ■ The digest snooping feature is needed only when your Switch 7750 is
connected to partner’s proprietary protocol-adopted switches.
■ To enable the digest snooping feature successfully, you must first enable it on
all the switch ports that connect to partner’s proprietary protocol-adopted
switches and then enable it globally.
stp cost 283
■ To enable the digest snooping feature, the interconnected switches must be
configured with exactly the same MST settings.
■ The digest snooping feature must be enabled on all the switch ports that
connect to partners’ proprietary protocol-adopted switches in the same MST
region.
■ With the digest snooping feature enabled, the VLAN-to-MSTI mapping cannot
be modified.
■ The digest snooping feature is not applicable to MST region edge ports.
Example # Enable the digest snooping feature for Ethernet1/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet1/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet1/0/1] stp config-digest-snooping
[SW7750-Ethernet1/0/1] quit
[SW7750]stp config-digest-snooping
stp cost
Syntax stp [ instance instance-id ] cost cost
undo stp [ instance instance-id ] cost
View Ethernet port view
Parameter instance-id: ID of a spanning tree instance ranging from 0 to 16. A value of 0
specifies the CIST.
cost: Path cost to be set for the port. This argument ranges from 1 to 200,000.
Description Use the stp cost command to set the path cost of the current port in a specified
spanning tree instance.
Use the undo stp cost command to revert to the default path cost of the current
port in the specified spanning tree instance.
By default, a switch automatically calculates the path costs of a port in different
spanning tree instances based on a specified standard.
If you specify the instance-id argument to be 0 or do not specify this argument,
the stp cost command sets the path cost of the port on CIST.
The path costs of a port in spanning tree instances affect the roles of the ports in
the spanning tree instances. By configuring different path costs for the same port
in different MSTIs, you can make flows of different VLANs traveling along different
physical links, so as to achieve VLAN-based load balancing. Changing the path
cost of a port in a spanning tree instance may change the role of the port in the
instance and put it in state transition.
284 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Related command: stp interface cost.
Example # Set the path cost of Ethernet1/0/3 port in spanning tree instance 2 to 200.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface ethernet1/0/3
[SW7750-Ethernet1/0/3] stp instance 2 cost 200
stp edged-port
Syntax stp edged-port { enable | disable }
undo stp edged-port
View Ethernet port view
Parameter enable: Configures the current Ethernet port as an edge port.
disable: Configures the current Ethernet port as a non-edge port.
Description Use the stp edged-port enable command to configure the current Ethernet
port as an edge port.
Use the stp edged-port disable command to configure the current Ethernet
port as a non-edge port.
Use the undo stp edged-port command to restore the current Ethernet port to
its default state.
By default, all Ethernet ports of a switch are non-edge ports.
An edge port is a port that is directly connected to a user terminal instead of
another switch or a network segment. Rapid transition is applied to edge ports
because, on these ports, no loops can be incurred by network topology changes.
You can enable a port to transit to the forwarding state rapidly by setting it to an
edge port. And you are recommended to configure the Ethernet ports directly
connected to user terminals as edge ports to enable them to transit to the
forwarding state rapidly.
Normally, configuration BPDUs cannot reach an edge port because the port is not
connected to another switch. But when the BPDU guard function is disabled on an
edge port, configuration BPDUs sent deliberately by a malicious user may reach
the port. If an edge port receives a BPDU, it turns to a non-edge port.
Related command: stp interface edged-port.
c CAUTION: Among loop guard function, root guard function and edge port
setting, only one can be valid on a port at one time.
Example # Configure Ethernet1/0/1 port as a non-edge port.
stp interface 285
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface ethernet1/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet1/0/1] stp edged-port disable
stp interface
Syntax stp interface interface-list { enable | disable }
View System view
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for
this argument.
enable: Enables MSTP on the specified ports.
disable: Disables MSTP on the specified ports.
Description Use the stp interface command to enable or disable MSTP on specified ports in
system view.
By default, MSTP is enabled on the ports of a switch if MSTP is globally enabled on
the switch, and is disabled on the ports if MSTP is globally disabled.
An MSTP-disabled port does not participate in any calculation of spanning tree
and is always in forwarding state.
c CAUTION: Disabling MSTP on ports may result in loops.
Related command: stp mode, stp.
Example # Enable MSTP on Ethernet1/0/1 port in system view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp interface Ethernet 1/0/1 enable
stp interface config-digest-snooping
Syntax stp interface interface-list config-digest-snooping
undo stp interface interface-list config-digest-snooping
View System view
286 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the format of interface-list ={ interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for
this argument.
Description Use the stp interface config-digest-snooping command to enable the digest
snooping feature.
Use the undo stp interface config-digest-snooping command to disable the
digest snooping feature.
By default, the digest snooping feature is disabled.
According to IEEE 802.1s, two interconnected MSTP switches can interwork with
each other through MSTIs in an MST region only when the two switches have the
same MST region-related configuration. Interconnected MSTP switches determine
whether or not they are in the same MST region by checking the configuration IDs
of the BPDUs between them. (A configuration ID contains information such as
region ID and configuration digest.)
As some partners’ switches adopt proprietary spanning tree protocols, they cannot
interwork with other switches in an MST region even if they are configured with
the same MST region-related settings as other switches in the MST region.
This problem can be overcome by implementing the digest snooping feature. If a
port on a Switch 7750 is connected to a partner’s switch that has the same MST
region-related settings as its own but adopts a proprietary spanning tree protocol,
you can enable digest snooping on the port. Then the Switch 7750 regards the
partner’s switch as in the same region; it records the configuration digests carried
in the BPDUs received from the partner’s switch, and put them in the BPDUs to be
send to the partner’s switch. In this way, the Switch 7750es can interwork with the
partners’ switches in the same MST region.
n ■ The digest snooping feature is needed only when your Switch 7750 is
connected to partner’s proprietary protocol-adopted switches.
■ To enable the digest snooping feature successfully, you must first enable it on
all the ports of your Switch 7750 that are connected to partner’s proprietary
protocol-adopted switches and then enable it globally.
■ To enable the digest snooping feature, the interconnected switches must be
configured with exactly the same MST region-related configuration.
■ The digest snooping feature must be enabled on all the ports of your Switch
7750 that are connected to partners’ proprietary protocol-adopted switches in
the same MST region.
■ With the digest snooping feature enabled, the VLAN-to-MSTI mapping cannot
be modified.
■ The digest snooping feature is not applicable to MST region edge ports.
Example # Enable the digest snooping feature on Ethernet1/0/1 port in system view.
stp interface cost 287
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp interface Ethernet 1/0/1 config-digest-snooping
stp interface cost
Syntax stp interface interface-list [ instance instance-id ] cost cost
undo stp interface interface-list [ instance instance-id ] cost
View System view
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for
this argument.
instance-id: Spanning tree instance ID ranging from 0 to 16. A value of 0 specifies
the CIST.
cost: Port path cost to be set. This argument ranges from 1 to 200,000,000.
Description Use the stp interface cost command to set the path cost(s) of the specified
port(s) in a specified spanning tree instance in system view.
Use the undo stp interface cost command to revert to the default path cost(s)
of the specified port(s) in the specified spanning tree instance in system view.
By default, a switch automatically calculates the path costs of a port in different
spanning tree instances based on a specified standard.
If you specify the instance-id argument to be 0 or do not specify this argument,
the stp interface cost command sets the path cost(s) of the specified port(s) in
the CIST.
The path costs of a port in spanning tree instances affect the roles of the ports in
the spanning tree instances. By configuring different path costs for the same port
in different MSTIs, you can make flows of different VLANs traveling along different
physical links, so as to achieve VLAN-based load balancing. Changing the path
cost of a port in a spanning tree instance may change the role of the port in the
instance and put it in state transition.
The default port path cost differs with port speed. Refer to Table 47 for details.
Related command: stp cost.
Example # Set the path cost of Ethernet1/0/3 port in spanning tree instance 2 to 400 in
system view.
288 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp instance 2 interface Ethernet 1/0/3 cost 400
stp interface edged-port
Syntax stp interface interface-list edged-port { enable | disable }
undo stp interface interface-list edged-port
View System view
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for
this argument.
enable: Configures the specified Ethernet ports to be edge ports.
disable: Configures the specified Ethernet ports to be non-edge ports.
Description Use the stp interface edged-port enable command to configure the specified
Ethernet port(s) as edge ports in system view.
Use the stp interface edged-port disable command to configure the specified
Ethernet port(s) as non-edge ports in system view.
Use the undo stp interface edged-port command to restore the specified
Ethernet port(s) to their default states.
By default, all Ethernet ports of a switch are non-edge ports.
An edge port is a port that is directly connected to a user terminal instead of
another switch or a network segment. Rapid transition is applied to edge ports
because, on these ports, no loops can be incurred by network topology changes.
You can enable a port to transit to the forwarding state rapidly by setting it to an
edge port. And you are recommended to configure the Ethernet ports directly
connected to user terminals as edge ports to enable them to transit to the
forwarding state rapidly.
Normally, configuration BPDUs cannot reach an edge port because the port is not
connected to another switch. But when the BPDU guard function is disabled on an
edge port, configuration BPDUs sent deliberately by a malicious user may reach
the port. If an edge port receives a BPDU, it turns to a non-edge port.
Related command: stp edged-port.
c CAUTION: Among loop guard function, root guard function and edge port
setting, only one can be valid on a port at one time.
stp interface loop-protection 289
Example # Configure Ethernet1/0/3 port as an edge port in system view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp interface Ethernet 1/0/3 edged-port enable
stp interface loop-protection
Syntax stp interface interface-list loop-protection
undo stp interface interface-list loop-protection
View System view
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for
this argument.
Description Use the stp interface loop-protection command to enable the loop guard
function in system view.
Use the undo stp interface loop-protection command to revert to the default
state of the loop guard function in system view.
The loop guard function is disabled by default.
Related command: stp loop-protection.
c CAUTION: Among loop guard function, root guard function and edge port
setting, only one can be valid on the same port.
Example # Enable the loop guard function on Ethernet1/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp interface Ethernet 1/0/1 loop-protection
stp interface mcheck
Syntax stp [ interface interface-list ] mcheck
View System view
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for
this argument.
290 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the stp interface mcheck command to perform the mCheck operation on
specified port(s) in system view.
A port on an MSTP-enabled switch toggles to the STP-/RSTP-compatible mode
automatically if an STP-/RSTP-enabled switch is connected to it. But when the
STP-/RSTP-enabled switch is disconnected from the port, the port cannot toggle
back to the MSTP mode automatically. In this case, you can force the port to
toggle to the MSTP mode by performing the mCheck operation on the port.
Related command: stp mcheck, and stp mode.
Example # Perform the mCheck operation for Ethernet1/0/3 port in system view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp interface Ethernet 1/0/3 mcheck
stp interface no-agreement-check
Syntax stp interface interface-type interface-number no-agreement-check
undo stp interface interface-type interface-number no-agreement-check
View System view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.
Description Use the stp interface no-agreement-check command to enable the rapid
transition feature on a specified port.
Use the undo stp interface no-agreement-check command to disable the
rapid transition feature on a specified port.
The rapid transition feature is disabled on any port by default.
Some manufactures’ switches adopt proprietary spanning tree protocols that are
similar to RSTP in the way to implement rapid transition on designated ports.
When a switch of this kind operates as the upstream switch of a Switch 7750
running MSTP, the upstream designated port fails to change their states rapidly.
The rapid transition feature is developed to avoid this case. When a Switch 7750
running MSTP is connected in the upstream direction to a manufacture’s switch
running proprietary spanning tree protocol, you can enable the rapid transition
feature on the ports of the Switch 7750 operating as the downstream switch.
Among these ports, those operating as the root ports will then send agreement
packets to their upstream ports after they receive proposal packets from the
upstream designated ports, instead of waiting for agreement packets from the
upstream switch. This enables designated ports of the upstream switch to change
their states rapidly.
stp interface point-to-point 291
Related command: stp no-agreement-check.
n ■ The rapid transition feature can be enabled on root ports or alternate ports
only.
■ If you configure the rapid transition feature on the designated port, the feature
does not take effect on the port.
Example # Enable the rapid transition feature for Ethernet1/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]stp interface Ethernet1/0/1 no-agreement-check
stp interface point-to-point
Syntax stp interface interface-list point-to-point { force-true | force-false | auto }
undo stp interface interface-list point-to-point
View System view
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for
this argument.
force-true: Specifies that the links connected to the specified Ethernet ports are
point-to-point links.
force-false: Specifies that the links connected to the specified Ethernet ports are
not point-to-point links.
auto: Specifies to automatically determine whether or not the links connected to
the specified Ethernet ports are point-to-point links.
Description Use the stp interface point-to-point command to specify whether the links
connected to the specified Ethernet ports are point-to-point links in system view.
Use the undo stp interface point-to-point command to restore the links
connected to the specified ports to their default link types, which are
automatically determined by MSTP.
If no keyword is specified in the stp interface point-to-point command, the
auto keyword is used by default, and so MSTP automatically determines the types
of the links connected to the specified ports.
The rapid transition feature is not applicable to ports on non-point-to-point links.
If an Ethernet port is the master port of an aggregated port or operates in
full-duplex mode, the link connected to the port is a point-to-point link.
292 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
You are recommended to let MSTP automatically determine the link types.
These two commands only apply to CIST and MSTIs. If you configure the link to
which a port is connected to be a point-to-point link (or a non-point-to-point link),
the configuration applies to all spanning tree instances (that is, the port is
configured to connect to a point-to-point link (or a non-point-to-point link) in all
spanning tree instances). If the actual physical link is not a point-to-point link and
you configure the link to which the port is connected to be a point-to-point link,
loops may temporarily occur.
Related command: stp point-to-point.
Example # Configure the link connected to Ethernet1/0/3 port as a point-to-point link in
system view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp interface Ethernet 1/0/3 point-to-point force-true
stp interface port priority
Syntax stp interface interface-list instance instance-id port priority priority
undo stp interface interface-list instance instance-id port priority
View System view
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for
this argument.
instance-id: Spanning tree instance ID ranging from 0 to 16. A value of 0 specifies
the CIST.
priority: Port priority to be set. This argument ranges from 0 to 240 and must be a
multiple of 16 (such as 0, 16, and 32). The default port priority of a port in any
spanning tree instance is 128.
Description Use the stp interface port priority command to set a port priority for the
specified ports in the specified spanning tree instance.
Use the undo stp interface port priority command to restore the specified
ports to the default port priority in the specified spanning tree instance.
If you specify the instance-id argument to be 0, these two commands apply to the
port priorities on the CIST. The role a port plays in a spanning tree instance is
determined by the port priority in the instance. A port on an MSTP-enabled switch
can have different port priorities and play different roles in different MSTIs. This
enables packets of different VLANs to be forwarded along different physical paths,
stp interface root-protection 293
so as to achieve load balancing by VLANs. Changing port priorities results in port
roles being re-determined and may cause state transitions.
Related command: stp port priority.
Example # Set the port priority of Ethernet1/0/3 port (with regard to spanning tree instance
2) to 16.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp interface Ethernet 1/0/3 instance 2 port priority 16
stp interface root-protection
Syntax stp interface interface-list root-protection
undo stp interface interface-list root-protection
View System view
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for
this argument.
Description Use the stp interface root-protection command to enable the root guard
function on specified port(s).
Use the undo stp interface root-protection command to restore the root
guard function to the default state on specified port(s).
By default, the root guard function is disabled.
Configuration errors or attacks may result in configuration BPDUs with their
priorities higher than that of a root bridge, which causes new root bridge to be
elected and network topology jitter to occur. In this case, flows that should travel
along high-speed links may be led to low-speed links, and network congestion
may occur.
You can avoid this by utilizing the root guard function. Ports with this function
enabled can only be kept as designated ports in all spanning tree instances. When
a port of this type receives configuration BPDUs with higher priorities, it changes
to Discarding state (rather than becomes a non-designated port) and stops
forwarding packets (as if it is disconnected from the link). It resumes the normal
state if it does not receive any configuration BPDUs with higher priorities for a
specified period.
Related command: stp root-protection.
294 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
c CAUTION: Among loop guard function, root guard function and edge port
setting, only one can be valid on a port at one time.
Example # Enable the root guard function on Ethernet1/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp interface Ethernet 1/0/1 root-protection
stp interface transmit-limit
Syntax stp interface interface-list transmit-limit packetnum
undo stp interface interface-list transmit-limit
View System view
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for
this argument.
packetnum: Also known as maximum transmitting speed, the maximum number
of configuration BPDUs a port can send in each Hello time. This argument ranges
from 1 to 255 and defaults to 3.
Description Use the stp interface transmit-limit command to set the maximum number of
configuration BPDUs each specified port can send in each Hello time.
Use the undo stp interface transmit-limit command to revert to the default
maximum number.
The larger the packetnum argument is, the more packets a port can transmit in
each Hello time. Configure the packetnum argument to a proper value to limit the
number of BPDUs a port can send in each Hello time to avoid MSTP from
occupying too much network resources when network topology jitter occur.
Related command: stp transmit-limit.
Example # Set the maximum transmitting speed of Ethernet1/0/3 port to 5.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp interface Ethernet 1/0/3 transmit-limit 5
stp loop-protection
Syntax stp loop-protection
stp max-hops 295
undo stp loop-protection
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the stp loop-protection command to enable the loop guard function on
the current port.
Use the undo stp loop-protection command to restore the loop guard function
to the default state on the current port.
By default, the loop guard function is disabled.
A switch maintains the states of the root port and other blocked ports by receiving
and processing BPDUs from the upstream switch. These BPDUs may get lost
because of network congestions and link failures. If a switch does not receive
BPDUs from the upstream switch for a certain period, the switch selects a new
root port; the original root port becomes a designated port; and the blocked ports
transit to forwarding state. This may cause loops in the network.
The loop guard function suppresses loops. With this function enabled, if link
congestions or link failures happen, a root port becomes a designated port, and
the port state becomes discarding. The blocked port also becomes designated port
and the port state becomes discarding (do not forward packets), and thereby
loops can be prevented.
Example # Enable the loop guard function on Ethernet1/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet1/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet1/0/1] stp loop-protection
stp max-hops
Syntax stp max-hops hops
undo stp max-hops
View System view
Parameter hops: Maximum hops to be set. This argument ranges from 1 to 40. The default
maximum hops value of an MST region is 20.
Description Use the stp max-hops command to set the maximum hops for the MST region
the current switch belongs to.
Use the undo stp max-hops command to revert to the default maximum hops.
296 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
The maximum hops values configured on the region roots of the CIST and MSTI in
an MST region limit the size of the MST region.
A configuration BPDU contains a field that maintains the remaining hops of the
configuration BPDU. And a switch discards the configuration BPDUs whose
remaining hops are 0. After a configuration BPDU reaches a root bridge of a
spanning tree in a MST region, the value of the remaining hops field in the
configuration BPDU is decreased by 1 every time the configuration BPDU passes a
switch. Such a mechanism disables the switches that are beyond the maximum
hops from participating in spanning tree generation, and thus limits the size of an
MST region.
With such a mechanism, the maximum hops configured on the switch operating
as the root bridge of the CIST or an MSTI in a MST region becomes the network
diameter of the spanning tree, which limits the size of the spanning tree in the
current MST region. The switches that are not root bridges in the MST region
adopt the maximum hops settings of their root bridges.
Example # Set the maximum hops of the current MST region to 35.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp max-hops 35
stp mcheck
Syntax stp mcheck
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the stp mcheck command to perform the mCheck operation on the current
port.
When a port on an MSTP-enabled upstream switch connects with an STP enabled
downstream switch, the port transits to the STP-compatible mode. But when the
STP enabled downstream switch is then replaced by an MSTP-enabled switch, the
port cannot automatically transit to the MSTP mode but remains in the
STP-compatible mode. In this case, you can force the port to transit to the MSTP
mode by performing the mCheck operation on the port.
Similarly, when a port on an RSTP-compatible upstream switch connects with an
STP-enabled downstream switch, the port transits to the STP-compatible mode.
But when the STP enabled downstream switch is then replaced by an
MSTP-enabled switch, the port cannot automatically transit to the MSTP mode but
remains in the STP-compatible mode. In this case, you can force the port to transit
to the MSTP-compatible mode by performing the mCheck operation on the port.
Related command: stp mode, stp interface mcheck.
stp mode 297
Example # Perform the mCheck operation for Ethernet1/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet1/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet1/0/1] stp mcheck
stp mode
Syntax stp mode { stp | rstp | mstp }
undo stp mode
View System view
Parameter stp: Enables the STP-compatible mode.
mstp: Enables the MSTP mode.
rstp: Enables RSTP-compatible.
Description Use the stp mode command to set the MSTP operation mode.
Use the undo stp mode command to revert to the default MSTP operation
mode.
By default, a switch operates in MSTP mode.
To make a switch compatible with STP/RSTP, MSTP provides following three
operation modes:
STP-compatible mode, where a switch sends out STP BPDU packets
RSTP-compatible mode, where a switch sends out RSTP BPDU packets
MSTP mode, where a switch sends out MSTP BPDU packets
Related command: stp mcheck, stp, stp interface, and stp interface mcheck.
Example # Configure the switch to operate in STP-compatible mode.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp mode stp
stp no-agreement-check
Syntax stp no-agreement-check
undo stp no-agreement-check
298 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the stp no-agreement-check command to enable the rapid transition
feature for a port.
Use the stp no-agreement-check command to disable the rapid transition
feature.
By default, the rapid transition feature is disabled on a port.
Some manufactures’ switches adopt proprietary spanning tree protocols that are
similar to RSTP in the way to implement rapid transition on designated ports.
When a switch of this kind operates as the upstream switch of a Switch 7750
running MSTP, the upstream designated port fails to change their states rapidly.
The rapid transition feature aims to resolve this problem. When a Switch 7750
running MSTP is connected in the upstream direction to a manufacture’s switch
running proprietary spanning tree protocol, you can enable the rapid transition
feature on the ports of the Switch 7750 operating as the downstream switch.
Among these ports, those operating as the root ports will then send agreement
packets to their upstream ports after they receive proposal packets from the
upstream designated ports, instead of waiting for agreement packets from the
upstream switch. This enables designated ports of the upstream switch to change
their states rapidly.
Related command: stp interface no-agreement-check.
n ■ The rapid transition feature can be enabled on root ports or alternate ports
only.
■ If you configure the rapid transition feature on the designated port, the feature
does not take effect on the port.
Example # Enable the rapid transition feature for Ethernet1/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]interface Ethernet1/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet1/0/1]stp no-agreement-check
stp pathcost-standard
Syntax stp pathcost-standard { dot1d-1998 | dot1t | legacy }
undo stp pathcost-standard
View System view
Parameter dot1d-1998: Uses the IEEE 802.1D-1998 standard to calculate the default path
costs of ports.
stp pathcost-standard 299
dot1t: Uses the IEEE 802.1t standard to calculate the default path costs of ports.
legacy: Uses the proprietary standard to calculate the default path costs of ports.
Description Use the stp pathcost-standard command to set the standard to be used to
calculate the default path costs of the links connected to the switch.
Use the undo stp pathcost-standard command to specify to use the default
standard.
By default, a switch uses the IEEE 802.1t standard to calculate the default path
costs of ports.
Table 47 Transmission speeds and the corresponding path costs
Standard
Transmission Operation mode defined by
speed (half-/full-duplex) 802.1D-1998 IEEE 802.1t Private
0 - 75,535 200,000,000 200,000
10 Mbps Half-duplex/Full-duplex 100 200,000 2,000
Aggregated link 2 ports 95 1,000,000 1,800
Aggregated link 3 ports 95 666,666 1,600
Aggregated link 4 ports 95 500,000 1,400
100 Mbps Half-duplex/Full-duplex 19 200,000 200
Aggregated link 2 ports 15 100,000 180
Aggregated link 3 ports 15 66,666 160
Aggregated link 4 ports 15 50,000 140
1,000 Mbps Full-duplex 4 200,000 20
Aggregated link 2 ports 3 10,000 18
Aggregated link 3 ports 3 6,666 16
Aggregated link 4 ports 3 5,000 14
10 Gbps Full-duplex 2 200,000 2
Aggregated link 2 ports 1 1,000 1
Aggregated link 3 ports 1 666 1
Aggregated link 4 ports 1 500 1
Normally, when a port operates in full-duplex mode, the corresponding path cost
is slightly less than that when the port operates in half-duplex mode.
When calculating the path cost of an aggregated link, the 802.1D-1998 standard
does not take the number of the ports on the aggregated link into account,
whereas the 802.1T standard does. The following formula is used to calculate the
path cost of an aggregated link:
Path cost = 200,000 / link transmission speed,
Where the link transmission speed is the sum of the speeds of the unblocked ports
on the aggregated link, which is measured in 100 Kbps.
300 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Configure to use the IEEE 802.1D-1998 standard to calculate the default path
costs of ports.note2
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp pathcost-standard dot1d-1998
# Configure to use the IEEE 802.1t standard to calculate the default path costs of
ports.note2
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp pathcost-standard dot1t
stp point-to-point
Syntax stp point-to-point { force-true | force-false | auto }
undo stp point-to-point
View Ethernet port view
Parameter force-true: Specifies that the link connected to the current Ethernet port is a
point-to-point link.
force-false: Specifies that the link connected to the current Ethernet port is not a
point-to-point link.
auto: Specifies to automatically determine whether or not the link connected to
the current Ethernet port is a point-to-point link.
Description Use the stp point-to-point command to specify whether the link connected to
the current Ethernet port is a point-to-point link.
Use the undo stp point-to-point command to restore the link connected to the
current Ethernet port to its default link type, which is automatically determined by
MSTP.
If no keyword is specified in the stp point-to-point command, the auto keyword
is used by default, and so MSTP automatically determines the type of the link
connected to the current port.
The rapid transition feature is not applicable to ports on non-point-to-point links.
If an Ethernet port is the master port of an aggregation port or operates in
full-duplex mode, the link connected to the port is a point-to-point link.
You are recommended to let MSTP automatically determine the link types of ports.
These two commands only apply to CISTs and MSTIs. If you configure the link to
which a port is connected is a point-to-point link (or a non-point-to-point link), the
configuration applies to all spanning tree instances (that is, the port is configured
to connect to a point-to-point link [or a non-point-to-point link] in all spanning
stp port priority 301
tree instances). If the actual physical link is not a point-to-point link and you
configure the link to which the port is connected to be a point-to-point link, loops
may temporarily occur.
Related command: stp interface point-to-point.
Example # Configure the link connected to Ethernet1/0/3 port as a point-to-point link.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet1/0/3
[SW7750-Ethernet1/0/3] stp point-to-point force-true
stp port priority
Syntax stp [ instance instance-id ] port priority priority
undo stp [ instance instance-id ] port priority
View Ethernet port view
Parameter instance-id: Spanning tree instance ID ranging from 0 to 16. A value of 0 specifies
the CIST.
port priority priority: Sets the port priority. The priority argument ranges from 0
to 240 and must be a multiple of 16 (such as 0, 16, and 32). The default port
priority of a port in any spanning tree instance is 128.
Description Use the stp port priority command to set the port priority of the current port in
the specified spanning tree instance.
Use the undo stp port priority command to restore the current port to the
default port priority in the specified spanning tree instance.
If you specify the instance-id argument to be 0 or do not specify the argument,
these two commands apply to the port priorities on the CIST. The role a port plays
in a spanning tree instance is determined by the port priority in the instance. A
port on a MSTP-enabled switch can have different port priorities and play different
roles in different MSTIs. This enables packets of different VLANs to be forwarded
along different physical paths, so as to achieve load balancing by VLANs.
Changing port priorities result in port roles being re-determined and may cause
state transitions.
Related command: stp interface port priority.
Example # Set the port priority of Ethernet1/0/3 port in spanning tree instance 2 to 16.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet1/0/3
[SW7750-Ethernet1/0/3] stp instance 2 port priority 16
302 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
stp portlog
Syntax stp [ instance instance-id ] portlog
undo stp [ instance instance-id ] portlog
View System view
Parameter instance instance-id: Specifies a spanning tree instance ID, ranging from 0 to 16.
The value of 0 indicates the CIST.
Description Use the stp portlog command to enable log and trap message output for the
ports of a specified instance.
Use the undo stp portlog command to disable this function.
By default, log and trap message output is disabled.
Executing the stp portlog command (without using the instance instance-id
parameters) will enable log and trap message output for the ports of instance 0.
Example # Enable log and trap message output for the ports of instance 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp instance 1 portlog
stp portlog all
Syntax stp portlog all
undo stp portlog all
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the stp portlog all command to enable log and trap message output for the
ports of all instances.
Use the undo stp portlog all command to disable this function.
By default, log and trap message output is disabled on the ports of all instances.
Example # Enable log and trap message output for the ports of all instances.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp portlog all
stp priority 303
stp priority
Syntax stp [ instance instance-id ] priority priority
undo stp [ instance instance-id ] priority
View System view
Parameter instance-id: Spanning tree instance ID ranging from 0 to 16. A value of 0 specifies
the CIST.
priority: Switch priority to be set. This argument ranges from 0 to 61,440 and
must be a multiple of 4,096 (such as 0, 4,096, and 8,192). There are totally 16
available switch priorities.
Description Use the stp priority command to set the priority of the switch in the specified
spanning tree instance.
Use the undo stp priority command to restore the switch to the default priority
in the specified spanning tree instance.
The default priority of a switch is 32,768.
The priorities of switches are used for spanning tree generation. Switch priorities
are spanning tree-specific. That is, you can set different priorities for the same
switch in different spanning tree instances.
If you do not specify the instance-id argument, the two commands apply to the
CIST.
Example # Set the priority of the switch in spanning tree instance 1 to 4,096.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp instance 1 priority 4096
stp region-configuration
Syntax stp region-configuration
undo stp region-configuration
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the stp region-configuration command to enter MST region view.
Use the undo stp region-configuration command to revert to the default MST
region-related settings.
304 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
MST region-related settings include: region name, revision level, and VLAN
mapping table. The three MST region-related settings default to:
■ MST region name: The first MAC address of the switch
■ VLAN mapping table: All VLANs are mapped to the CIST.
■ MSTP revision level: 0
And you can modify the three settings after entering MST region view by using the
stp region-configuration command.
Example # Enter MST region view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp region-configuration
[SW7750-mst-region]
stp root primary
Syntax stp [ instance instance-id ] root primary [ bridge-diameter bridgenum [
hello-time centi-seconds ] ]
undo stp [ instance instance-id ] root
View System view
Parameter instance-id: Spanning tree instance ID ranging from 0 to 16. A value of 0 specifies
the CIST.
bridgenum: Network diameter of the specified spanning tree. This argument
ranges from 2 to 7 and defaults to 7.
centi-seconds: Hello time (in centiseconds) of the specified spanning tree. This
argument ranges from 100 to 1,000 and defaults to 200.
Description Use the stp root primary command to configure the current switch as the root
bridge of a specified spanning tree instance.
Use the undo stp root command to cancel the current configuration.
By default, a switch is not configured as a root bridge.
If you do not specify the instance-id argument, these two commands apply to the
CIST.
You can specify the current switch as the root bridge of a spanning tree instance
regardless of the priority of the switch. You can also specify the network diameter
of the switched network by using the stp root primary command. The switch will
then figure out the following three time parameters: Hello time, Forward delay,
and Max age. As the Hello time figured out by the network diameter is not always
the optimal one, you can set it manually through the hello-time centi-seconds
stp root secondary 305
parameter. Normally, you are recommended to set the network diameter and leave
the Forward delay and Max age parameters being automatically determined by
the network diameter you set.
c CAUTION:
■ You can configure only one root bridge for a spanning tree instance and can
configure one or more secondary root bridges for a spanning tree instance.
Configuring multiple root bridges for a spanning tree instance causes
unpredictable spanning tree computing results.
■ Once a switch is configured as the root bridge or a secondary root bridge, its
priority cannot be modified.
Example # Configure the current switch as the root bridge of spanning tree instance 1,
setting the network diameter of the switched network to 4, and the Hello time to
500 centiseconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp instance 1 root primary bridge-diameter 4 hello-time 50
0
stp root secondary
Syntax stp [ instance instance-id ] root secondary [ bridge-diameter bridgenum ] [
hello-time centi-seconds ] ]
undo stp [ instance instance-id ] root
View System view
Parameter instance-id: Spanning tree instance ID ranging from 0 to 16. A value of 0 specifies
the CIST.
bridgenum: Network diameter of the specified spanning tree. This argument
ranges from 2 to 7 and defaults to 7.
centi-seconds: Hello time in centiseconds of the specified spanning tree. This
argument ranges from 100 to 1,000 and defaults to 200.
Description Use the stp root secondary command to configure the current switch as a
secondary root bridge of a specified spanning tree instance.
Use the undo stp root command to cancel the current configuration.
By default, a switch does not operate as a secondary root bridge.
If you do not specify the instance-id argument, these two commands apply to the
CIST.
306 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
You can configure one or more secondary root bridges for a spanning tree
instance. If the switch operating as the root bridge fails or is turned off, the
secondary root bridge with the least MAC address becomes the root bridge.
You can also specify the network diameter and the Hello time of the switch that
you are configuring as a secondary root bridge. The switch will then figures out
the other two time parameters: Forward delay and Max age. You can configure
only one root bridge for a spanning tree instance but you can configure one or
more secondary root bridges for a spanning tree instance. Once a switch is
configured as the root bridge or a secondary root bridge, its priority cannot be
modified.
Example # Configure the current switch as a secondary root bridge of spanning tree
instance 4, setting the network diameter of the switched network to 5 and the
Hello time to 300 centiseconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp instance 4 root secondary bridge-diameter 5 hello-time
300
stp root-protection
Syntax stp root-protection
undo stp root-protection
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the stp root-protection command to enable the root guard function on the
current port.
Use the undo stp root-protection command to restore the root guard function
to the default state on the current port.
By default, the root guard function is disabled.
Configuration errors or attacks may result in configuration BPDUs with their
priorities higher than that of a root bridge, which causes new root bridge to be
elected and network topology jitter to occur. In this case, flows that are to travel
along high-speed links may be led to low-speed links, and network congestion
may occur.
You can avoid this by utilizing the root guard function. Ports with this function
enabled can only be kept as designated ports in all spanning tree instances. When
a port of this type receives configuration BPDUs with higher priorities, it changes
to Discarding state (rather than becomes a non-designated port) and stops
forwarding packets (as if it is disconnected from the link). It resumes the normal
state if it does not receive any configuration BPDUs with higher priorities for a
specified period.
stp tc-protection 307
Related command: stp interface root-protection.
Example # Enable the root guard function on Ethernet1/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet1/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet1/0/1] stp root-protection
stp tc-protection
Syntax stp tc-protection enable
stp tc-protection disable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the stp tc-protection enable command to enable the TC-BPDU attack
guard function.
Use the stp tc-protection disable command to disable the TC-BPDU attack
guard function.
By default, the TC-BPDU attack guard function is enabled. The operation of
removing MAC address tables can be executed for up to six times within 10
seconds.
Normally, upon receiving a TC-BPDU, a switch removes its local MAC address table
and then updates its ARP address table based on STP instances according to the
updated MAC address table. If a malicious user forges TC-BPDUs to attack a
switch, the switch will receive a large amount of TC-BPDUs in a short period, so
that the switch will be busy in removing local MAC address tables and updating
ARP address tables, which will affect STP calculation and occupy a large amount of
network bandwidth. As a result, the CPU utilization stays high for the switch.
With the TC-BPDU attack guard function enabled, the switch performs the
operation of removing its MAC address table once upon receiving a TC-BPDU, and
triggers a timer with the period of 10 seconds at the same time. If the switch
receives more TC-BPDUs within this period, the switch can perform the operation
of removing MAC address tables for up to six times. Such a mechanism prevents
the switch from removing MAC address tables frequently and the subsequent
negative effect.
Example # Enable the TC-BPDU guard function on the switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp tc-protection enable
308 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
stp tc-protection threshold
Syntax stp tc-protection threshold number
undo stp tc-protection threshold
View System view
Parameter number: Upper threshold of the times for a switch to process TC-BPDUs within 10
seconds, in the range 1 to 255.
Description Use the stp tc-protection threshold command to set the upper threshold of
the times for a switch to remove its MAC address table within 10 seconds.
Use the undo stp tc-protection threshold command to cancel the
configuration.
Normally, upon receiving a TC-BPDU, a switch removes its local MAC address table
and then updates the ARP address table based on STP instances according to the
updated MAC address table. If a malicious user forges TC-BPDUs to attack a
switch, the switch will receive a large amount of TC-BPDUs in a short period, so
that the switch will be busy in removing local MAC address tables and updating
ARP address tables, which will affect STP calculation and occupy a large amount of
network bandwidth. As a result, the CPU utilization stays high for the switch.
With the TC-BPDU attack guard function enabled, the switch performs the
operation of removing the local MAC address table only once after it receives a
TC-BPDU, and triggers a timer with the period of 10 seconds at the same time. If
the switch receives more TC-BPDUs within this period, the switch can perform the
operation of removing MAC address entries for up to six times. Such a mechanism
prevents the switch from removing MAC address tables frequently and the
subsequent negative effect.
You can use the stp tc-protection threshold command to set the upper
threshold of the times for a switch to remove its MAC address table in the period
set by the timer. If the number of received TC-BPDUs is less than the specified
upper threshold, the switch will remove its MAC address table upon receiving a
TC-BPDU. If the number of received TC-BPDUs is more than the specified upper
threshold, the switch will remove its MAC address table for the times equal to the
specified upper threshold. For example, if you set the upper threshold for the
times for the switch to remove its MAC address table to 100 in the specified
period, while the switch receives 200 TC-BPDUs in the period. In this case, the
switch removes its MAC address table for only 100 times within the period.
Example # Specify the switch to remove its MAC address table for up to five times within
10 seconds.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp tc-protection threshold 5
stp timer forward-delay 309
stp timer forward-delay
Syntax stp timer forward-delay centi-seconds
undo stp timer forward-delay
View System view
Parameter centi-seconds: Forward delay in centiseconds to be set. This argument ranges from
400 to 3,000 and defaults to 1,500.
Description Use the stp timer forward-delay command to set the Forward delay of the
switch.
Use the undo stp timer forward-delay command to revert to the default
Forward delay.
To prevent the occurrence of temporary loops, when a port changes its state from
discarding to forwarding, it undergoes an intermediate state and waits for a
specific period to synchronize with the remote switches. This state transition
period is determined by the Forward delay configured on the root bridge.
The Forward delay setting configured on a root bridge applies to all switches
operating in the same spanning tree instance.
As for the configuration of the three time-related parameters (that is, the Hello
time, Forward delay, and Max age parameters), the following formulas must be
met to prevent network jitter.
2 x (Forward delay - 1 second) >= Max age
Max age >= 2 x (Hello time + 1 second)
You are recommended to specify the network diameter of the switched network
and the Hello time by using the stp root primary or stp root secondary
command. After that, the three proper time-related parameters are automatically
determined.
Related command: stp timer hello, stp timer max-age, and stp bridge-diameter.
Example # Set the Forward delay to 2,000 centiseconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp timer forward-delay 2000
stp timer hello
Syntax stp timer hello centi-seconds
undo stp timer hello
310 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View System view
Parameter centi-seconds: Hello time in centiseconds to be set. This argument ranges from
100 to 1,000 and defaults to 200.
Description Use the stp timer hello command to set the Hello time of the switch.
Use the undo stp timer hello command to revert to the default Hello time.
A root bridge regularly sends out configuration BPDUs to maintain the existing
spanning trees. The Hello time is used to set the sending interval. When a switch
becomes a root bridge, it regularly sends BPDUs at the interval specified by the
hello time you have configured on it. While, the other none-root-bridge switches
listen to the BPDUs; if they do not receive a BPDU in a specific period, spanning
trees will be regenerated.
As for the configuration of the three time-related parameters (that is, the Hello
time, Forward delay, and Max age parameters), the following formulas must be
met to prevent network jitter.
2 * (Forward delay - 1 second) >= Max age
Max age >= 2 * (Hello time + 1 second)
You are recommended to specify the network diameter of the switched network
and the Hello time by using the stp root primary or stp root secondary
command. After that, the three proper time-related parameters are automatically
determined.
Related command: stp timer forward-delay, stp timer max-age, and stp bridge-diameter.
Example # Set the Hello time to 400 centiseconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp timer hello 400
stp timer max-age
Syntax stp timer max-age centi-seconds
undo stp timer max-age
View System view
Parameter centi-seconds: Max age in centiseconds to be set. This argument ranges from 600
to 4,000 and defaults to 2,000.
Description Use the stp timer max-age command to set the Max age of the switch.
Use the undo stp timer max-age command to revert to the default Max age.
stp timer-factor 311
MSTP is capable of detecting link problems and automatically restoring redundant
links to forwarding state. In CIST, switches use the Max age parameter to judge
whether or not a received configuration BPDU times out. And spanning trees will
be regenerated if a configuration BPDU received by a port times out.
The Max age is meaningless to MSTIs. The Max age configured for the root bridge
of the CIST applies to all switches operating on the CIST, including the root bridge.
As for the configuration of the three time-related parameters (that is, the Hello
time, Forward delay, and Max age parameters), the following formulas must be
met to prevent network jitter.
2 * (Forward delay - 1 second) >= Max age,
Max age >= 2 * (Hello time + 1 second).
You are recommended to specify the network diameter of the switched network
and the Hello time parameter by using the stp root primary or stp root
secondary command. After that, the three proper time-related parameters are
automatically determined.
Related command: stp timer forward-delay, stp timer hello, and stp bridge-diameter.
Example # Set the Max age to 1,000 centiseconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp timer max-age 1000
stp timer-factor
Syntax stp timer-factor number
undo stp timer-factor
View System view
Parameter number: Hello time factor. This argument ranges from 1 to 20 and defaults to 3.
Description Use the stp timer-factor command to set the timeout time of MSTP protocol
packets on a switch in the form of a multiple of the Hello time. For example, with
the number argument set to 3, the timeout time is three times of the Hello time.
Use the undo stp timer-factor command to revert to the default Hello time
factor.
A switch regularly sends protocol packets to its neighboring devices at the interval
specified by the Hello time parameter to test the links. Normally, a switch regards
its upstream switch faulty if the former does receive any protocol packets from the
latter in a period three times of the Hello time and then initiates the spanning tree
regeneration process.
312 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Spanning trees may be regenerated even in a steady network if an upstream
switch continues to be busy. You can configure the timeout time factor to a larger
number to avoid this. Normally, the timeout time can be four (or more) times of
the Hello time. For a steady network, the timeout time can be five to seven times
of the Hello time.
Example # Set the Hello time factor to 7.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp timer-factor 7
stp transmit-limit
Syntax stp transmit-limit packetnum
undo stp transmit-limit
View Ethernet port view
Parameter packetnum: Maximum number of configuration BPDUs a port can transmit in each
Hello time. This argument ranges from 1 to 255 and defaults to 5.
Description Use the stp transmit-limit command to set the maximum number of
configuration BPDUs the current port can transmit in each Hello time.
Use the undo stp transmit-limit command to revert to the default maximum
number.
A larger number configured by the stp transmit-limit command allows more
configuration BPDUs can be transmitted in each Hello time, which may occupy
more switch resources. So configure it to a proper value to avoid MSTP from
occupying too many network resources.
Related command: stp interface transmit-limit.
Example # Set the maximum number of configuration BPDUs that can be transmitted by
the Ethernet1/0/1 port in each Hello time to 15.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet1/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet1/0/1] stp transmit-limit 15
vlan-mapping modulo
Syntax vlan-mapping modulo modulo
View MST region view
vlan-vpn tunnel 313
Parameter modulo: Modulo ranging from 1 to 16.
Description Use the vlan-mapping modulo command to map VLANs to specific spanning
tree instances.
By default, all VLANs in a network are mapped to the CIST (spanning tree instance
0).
MSTP uses a VLAN mapping table to describe VLAN-to-spanning-tree-instance
mappings. You can use this command to establish the VLAN mapping table and to
map VLANs to specific spanning tree instances.
Note that a VLAN cannot be mapped to multiple different spanning tree instances
at the same time. A VLAN-to-spanning-tree-instance mapping becomes invalid
when you map the VLAN to another spanning tree instance.
n You can map VLANs to specific spanning tree instances quickly by using the
vlan-mapping modulo modulo command. The ID of the spanning tree instance
to which a VLAN is mapped can be figured out by using the following expression:
(VLAN ID-1) % modulo + 1,
Where (VLAN ID-1) % modulo yields the module of (VLAN ID-1) with regards to
modulo. For example, if you set the modulo argument to 16, then VLAN 1 is
mapped to spanning tree instance 1, VLAN 2 is mapped to spanning tree instance
2, ..., VLAN 16 is mapped to spanning tree instance 16, VLAN 17 is mapped to
spanning tree instance 1, and so on.
Related command: check region-configuration, revision-level, region-name, and active
region-configuration.
Example # Map VLANs to spanning tree instances, with the modulo being 16.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] stp region-configuration
[SW7750-mst-region] vlan-mapping modulo 16
vlan-vpn tunnel
Syntax vlan-vpn tunnel
undo vlan-vpn tunnel
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the vlan-vpn tunnel command to enable the BPDU Tunnel function for a
switch.
314 CHAPTER 27: MSTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo vlan-vpn tunnel command to disable the BPDU Tunnel function.
The BPDU Tunnel function enables BPDUs to be transparently transmitted between
geographically dispersed user networks through specified VLAN VPNs in operator’s
networks, through which spanning trees can be generated across these user
networks and are independent of those of the operator’s network.
By default, the BPDU Tunnel function is disabled.
n ■
■
The BPDU Tunnel function can only be enabled on devices with STP employed.
The BPDU Tunnel function can only be enabled on access ports.
■ To enable the BPDU Tunnel function, make sure the links between operator’s
networks are trunk links.
■ As the VLAN-VPN function is unavailable on ports with 802.1x, GVRP, GMRP,
STP, or NTDP employed, the BPDU Tunnel function is not applicable to these
ports.
Example # Enable the BPDU Tunnel function for the switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan-vpn tunnel
ROUTING TABLE MONITORING
28 COMMANDS
n The words "router" covered in the following text represent routers in common
sense and Ethernet switches running a routing protocol. To improve readability,
this will not be mentioned again in this manual.
display ip routing-table
Syntax display ip routing-table
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display ip routing-table command to display the routing table
summary.
This command displays the summary of the routing table. Each line represents one
route, containing destination address/mask length, protocol, preference, cost, next
hop, and output interface.
This command displays only the currently used routes, that is, the optimal routes.
Example # Display the summary of the current routing table.
<SW7750> display ip routing-table
Routing Table: public net
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
1.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 1.1.1.1 Vlan-interface1
1.1.1.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
2.2.2.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 2.2.2.1 Vlan-interface2
2.2.2.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
3.3.3.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 3.3.3.1 Vlan-interface3
3.3.3.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
4.4.4.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 4.4.4.1 Vlan-interface4
4.4.4.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.0/8 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
Table 48 Field descriptions of the display ip routing-table command
Field Description
Destination/Mask Destination address/mask length
Protocol Routing protocol
Pre Route preference
316 CHAPTER 28: ROUTING TABLE MONITORING COMMANDS
Table 48 Field descriptions of the display ip routing-table command
Field Description
Cost Route cost
Nexthop Next hop address
Interface Output interface, through which the data packets destined for the
destination network segment are sent
display ip routing-table acl
Syntax display ip routing-table acl { acl-number | acl-name } [ verbose ]
View Any view
Parameter acl-number: Number of the number-identified ACL, in the range of 2,000 to
2,999.
acl-name: Name of the basic name-identified ACL.
verbose: Displays the detailed information about active and inactive routes
filtered by the ACL rules if this keyword is provided; displays the brief information
about the active routes filtered by the ACL rules.
Description Use the display ip routing-table acl command to display the routes filtered by
the basic ACL rules.
This command is mainly used to trace and display the routing policies, that is, to
display the routes filtered by the rules based on the input basic ACL numbers.
Example # Display the brief information about the active routes filtered by the basic ACL
2000.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl number 2000
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 10.1.1.1 0.0.0.255
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule deny source any
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] display ip routing-table acl 2000
Routes matched by access-list 2000:
Summary count: 2
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
10.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 10.1.1.2 Vlan-interface1
10.1.1.2/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
Refer to Table 48 for the description on the displayed information above.
# Display the detailed information about the active and inactive routes filtered by
the basic ACL 2000.
<SW7750> display ip routing-table acl 2000 verbose
Routes matched by access-list 2000:
Generate Default: no
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both * = Next hop in use
display ip routing-table acl 317
Summary count: 2
**Destination: 10.1.1.0 Mask: 255.255.255.0
Protocol: #DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 10.1.1.2 Interface: 10.1.1.2(Vlan-interface1)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <Int ActiveU Retain Unicast>
Age: 7:24 Cost: 0/0 Tag: 0
**Destination: 10.1.1.2 Mask: 255.255.255.255
Protocol: #DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 127.0.0.1 Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Unicast>
Age: 7:24 Cost: 0/0 Tag: 0
Table 49 Field descriptions of the display ip routing-table acl command
Field Description
Destination Destination address
Mask Mask
Protocol Routing protocol that detects this route
Preference Preference of the route
Nexthop Address of the next hop
Interface Outbound interface where packets to the destination network segment are
forwarded.
Vlinkindex Virtual link index
318 CHAPTER 28: ROUTING TABLE MONITORING COMMANDS
Table 49 Field descriptions of the display ip routing-table acl command
Field Description
State Route state:
ActiveU Active unicast routes
Blackhole Blackhole routes, which are similar to Reject routes except that
blackhole routes do not send ICMP unreachable messages to the
source end of the packet.
Delete The route is deleted.
Gateway Indirectly reachable routes
Hidden If you do not want to remove some routes that are not available
temporarily for some reasons (such as the configured polices,
the port being down), you can hide the route so as to restore it
later.
Holddown Holddown is a route redistribution policy adopted by some
distance-vector (D-V) routing protocols such as RIP. Through
Holddown, a routing protocol can avoid the flooding of error
routes and deliver route unreachable messages accurately. It
redistributes a certain route every a period of time regardless of
whether the actually found routes destined for the same
destination change. For more details, refer to the specific routing
protocols.
Int The route is discovered by the interior gateway protocol (IGP).
NoAdvise NoAdvise routes are nor released when the routing protocol ad
NotInstall Generally, the route with the highest preference in a routing
table is added to the core routing table and released.
Comparatively, noninstall routes cannot be added to the core
routing table, however, they may be released.
Reject Reject route do not distribute packets as other routes. Instead,
the packet that selects a reject route will be dropped, and ICMP
unreachable messages will be sent to the source end of the
packet. Reject routes are generally used in network tests.
Retain When the routes in the core routing table are removed, the
routes with the retain tag will not be removed. You can tag
some static routes as retain routes so that they can continue to
exist in the core routing table.
Static The static routes manually configured on the route are tagged as
static routes, which will not be removed from the routing table if
the router is restarted after the save command is executed.
Unicast Unicast routes
Age The time that a route exists in the routing table, expressed in the form of
hh:mm:ss.
Cost Route cost
Tag Route tag
display ip routing-table ip-address
Syntax display ip routing-table ip-address [ mask ] [ longer-match ] [ verbose ]
View Any view
Parameter ip-address: Destination IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
display ip routing-table ip-address 319
mask: IP address mask, length in dotted decimal notation or expressed as an
integer. It ranges from 0 to 32 when expressed as an integer.
longer-match: Specifies all the routes that lead to the destination address and
match the specified mask. If you do not specify the mask argument, those that
match the natural mask are specified.
verbose: With the verbose argument specified, this command displays the
verbose information of both the active and inactive routes. Without the argument
specified, this command only displays the summary of active routes.
Description Use the display ip routing-table ip-address command to display the routing
information of the specified destination address.
With different arguments provided, the command output is different. The
following is the command output with different arguments provided:
■ display ip routing-table ip-address
If the destination address ip-address corresponds to a route in the natural mask
range, this command displays the route that is the longest match of the
destination address ip-address and is active.
■ display ip routing-table ip-address mask
This command only displays the routes exactly matching the specified destination
address and mask.
■ display ip routing-table ip-address longer-match
This command displays all destination address routes matching the specified
destination address in the natural mask range.
■ display ip routing-table ip-address mask longer-match
This command displays all destination address routes matching the specified
destination address in the specified mask range.
Example # There is a corresponding route in the natural mask range. Display the summary.
<SW7750> display ip routing-table 169.0.0.0
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
169.0.0.0/16 Static 60 0 2.1.1.1 LoopBack1
For detailed description of the output information, see Table 48.
# There is no corresponding route (only the longest matching route is displayed) in
the natural mask range. Display the summary.
<SW7750> display ip routing-table 169.253.0.0
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
169.0.0.0/8 Static 60 0 2.1.1.1 LoopBack1
# There are corresponding routes in the natural mask range. Display detailed
information.
320 CHAPTER 28: ROUTING TABLE MONITORING COMMANDS
<SW7750> display ip routing-table 169.0.0.0 verbose
Routing Tables:
Generate Default: no
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both * = Next hop in use
Summary count:2
**Destination: 169.0.0.0 Mask: 255.0.0.0
Protocol: #Static Preference: 60
*NextHop: 2.1.1.1 Interface: 2.1.1.1(LoopBack1)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <Int ActiveU Static Unicast>
Age: 3:47 Cost: 0/0 Tag: 0
**Destination: 169.0.0.0 Mask: 255.254.0.0
Protocol: #Static Preference: 60
*NextHop: 2.1.1.1 Interface: 2.1.1.1(LoopBack1)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <Int ActiveU Static Unicast>
Age: 3:47 Cost: 0/0 Tag: 0
# There is no corresponding route in the natural mask range (only the longest
matched route is displayed). Display the detailed information.
<SW7750> display ip routing-table 169.253.0.0 verbose
Routing Tables:
Generate Default: no
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both * = Next hop in use
Summary count:1
**Destination: 169.0.0.0 Mask: 255.0.0.0
Protocol: #Static Preference: 60
*NextHop: 2.1.1.1 Interface: 2.1.1.1(LoopBack1)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <Int ActiveU Static Unicast>
Age: 3:47 Cost: 0/0 Tag: 0
For detailed description of the output information, see Table 49.
display ip routing-table ip-address1 ip-address2
Syntax display ip routing-table ip-address1 mask1 ip-address2 mask2 [ verbose ]
View Any view
Parameter ip-address1, ip-address2: Destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
ip-address1, mask1 and ip-address2, mask2 determine one address range
together. .ip-address1 ANDed with mask1 specifies the start of the range, while
ip-address2 ANDed with mask2 specifies the end. This command displays the
route in this address range.
mask1, mask2: IP address mask, length in dotted decimal notation or expressed as
an integer. It ranges from 0 to 32 when expressed as an integer.
verbose: With the verbose argument provided, this command displays the
verbose information of both active and inactive routes. Without this argument
provided, this command displays the summary of active routes only.
display ip routing-table ip-prefix 321
Description Use the display ip routing-table ip-address1 ip-address2 command to display
the route information in the specified destination address range.
Example # Display the routing information of destination addresses ranging from 1.1.1.0 to
2.2.2.0.
<SW7750>display ip routing-table 1.1.1.0 24 2.2.2.0 24
Routing tables:
Summary count: 3
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
1.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 1.1.1.1 Vlan-interface1
1.1.1.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
2.2.2.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 2.2.2.1 Vlan-interface2
For detailed description of the output information, see Table 48.
display ip routing-table ip-prefix
Syntax display ip routing-table ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ verbose ]
View Any view
Parameter ip-prefix-name: Name of the IP address prefix list, containing 1 to 19 characters.
verbose: Displays the detailed information about active and inactive routes
filtered by the ACL rules if this keyword is provided; displays the brief information
about the active routes filtered by the ACL rules.
Description Use the display ip routing-table ip-prefix command to display the routes
filtered based on the specified ip-prefix list.
This command is mainly used to track and display the routing policy. It displays the
routes filtered by the rules based on the input ip-prefix list name.
If the specified ip-prefix list does not exist, with the verbose keyword provided,
this command displays the detailed information about all active and inactive
routes; without the verbose argument keyword, this command displays the brief
information about all active routes only.
Example # Display the brief information about the active routes filtered by the IP-prefix list
named abc2, which permits the route with a prefix of 10.1.1.0 and a mask length
of 24 to 32.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip ip-prefix abc2 permit 10.1.1.0 24 less-equal 32
[SW7750] display ip routing-table ip-prefix abc2
Routes matched by ip-prefix abc2:
Summary count: 2
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
10.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 10.1.1.2 Vlan-interface1
10.1.1.2/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
For detailed information about the displayed information above, please refer to
Table 48.
322 CHAPTER 28: ROUTING TABLE MONITORING COMMANDS
# Display the detailed information about the active and inactive routes filtered by
the ip-prefix list named abc2.
[SW7750] display ip routing-table ip-prefix abc2 verbose
Routes matched by ip-prefix abc2:
Generate Default: no
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both * = Next hop in use
Summary count: 2
**Destination: 10.1.1.0 Mask: 255.255.255.0
Protocol: #DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 10.1.1.2 Interface: 10.1.1.2(Vlan-interface1)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <Int ActiveU Retain Unicast>
Age: 3:23:44 Cost: 0/0 Tag: 0
**Destination: 10.1.1.2 Mask: 255.255.255.255
Protocol: #DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 127.0.0.1 Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Unicast>
Age: 3:23:44 Cost: 0/0 Tag: 0
For detailed description on the displayed information above, refer to Table 49.
display ip routing-table protocol
Syntax display ip routing-table protocol protocol [ inactive | verbose ]
View Any view
Parameter protocol: You can provide one of the following values for this argument.
■ direct: Displays direct-connect route information
■ static: Displays static route information.
■ bgp: Displays BGP route information
■ isis: Displays IS-IS route information.
■ ospf: Displays OSPF route information.
■ ospf-ase: Displays OSPF ASE route information.
■ ospf-nssa: Displays OSPF NSSA route information.
■ rip: Displays RIP route information.
inactive: With this argument provided, this command displays the inactive route
information. Without this argument provided, this command displays both active
and inactive route information.
verbose: With this argument provided, this command displays the verbose route
information. Without this argument provided, this command displays route
summary only.
display ip routing-table radix 323
Description Use the display ip routing-table protocol command to display the route
information of a specific protocol.
Example # Display the summary of all direct-connect routes.
<SW7750> display ip routing-table protocol direct
DIRECT Routing tables:
Summary count: 8
DIRECT Routing table status:<active>:
Summary count: 7
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
10.5.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 10.5.1.5 Vlan-interface105
10.5.1.5/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
100.100.1.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
102.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 102.1.1.1 LoopBack1
102.1.1.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.0/8 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
DIRECT Routing table status:<inactive>:
Summary count: 1
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
100.100.1.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 100.100.1.1 LoopBack0
# Display the static routing table.
<SW7750> display ip routing-table protocol static
STATIC Routing tables:
Summary count: 1
STATIC Routing tables status:<active>:
Summary count: 0
STATIC Routing tables status:<inactive>:
Summary count: 1
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
1.2.3.0/24 STATIC 60 0 1.2.4.5 Vlan-interface10
For detailed description of the output information, see Table 48.
display ip routing-table radix
Syntax display ip routing-table radix
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display ip routing-table radix command to display the route
information in a tree structure.
Example <SW7750> display ip routing-table radix
Radix tree for INET (2) inodes 14 routes 10:
+--8+--{169.0.0.0
| +-32+--{169.1.1.1
+--0+
| | +--8+--{127.0.0.0
| | | +-32+--{127.0.0.1
| +--1+
| | +--8+--{2.0.0.0
| | | +-24+--{2.2.2.0
| | | | +-32+--{2.2.2.2
324 CHAPTER 28: ROUTING TABLE MONITORING COMMANDS
| | | +-22+
| | | +-32+--{2.2.1.1
| +--6+
| +--8+--{1.0.0.0
| +-32+--{1.1.1.1
Table 50 Field descriptions of the display ip routing-table radix command
Field Description
INET Address suite
inodes Number of nodes
routes Number of routes
display ip routing-table statistics
Syntax display ip routing-table statistics
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display ip routing-table statistics command to display the statistics
information about routes.
The statistics information about routes includes the total number of routes, the
number of routes added by protocols, the number of routes deleted by the
protocols, the number of routes which are not deleted though they are with the
deleted tag, the number of active routes, and the number of inactive routes.
Example # Display the statistics information about routes.
<SW7750> display ip routing-table statistics
Routing tables:
Proto route active added deleted
DIRECT 24 4 25 1
STATIC 4 1 4 0
BGP 0 0 0 0
RIP 0 0 0 0
IS-IS 0 0 0 0
OSPF 0 0 0 0
O_ASE 0 0 0 0
O_NSSA 0 0 0 0
AGGRE 0 0 0 0
Total 28 5 29 1
Table 51 Field descriptions of the display ip routing-table statistics command
Field Description
Proto Routing protocol. O_ASE stands for OSPF_ASE routes; O_NSSA stands for
OSPF NSSA routes; AGGRE stands for aggregated routes.
route Number of routes
active Number of active routes
display ip routing-table verbose 325
Table 51 Field descriptions of the display ip routing-table statistics command
Field Description
added Number of routes added after the router is rebooted or the routing table is
cleared last time.
deleted Number of routes deleted (Such routes will be freed in a period of time)
Total Total number of the different kinds of routes.
display ip routing-table verbose
Syntax display ip routing-table verbose
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display ip routing-table verbose command to display the verbose
routing table information.
With the verbose argument provided, this command displays the verbose routing
table information. The descriptor describing the route state will be displayed first.
Then, the statistics of the entire routing table will be output. Finally, the verbose
description of each route will be output.
The display ip routing-table verbose command can display all current routes,
including inactive routes and invalid routes.
Example # Display the verbose routing table information.
<SW7750> display ip routing-table verbose
Routing Tables:
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both * = Next hop in use
Destinations: 3 Routes: 3
Holddown: 0 Delete: 62 Hidden: 0
**Destination: 1.1.1.0 Mask: 255.255.255.0
Protocol: #DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 1.1.1.1 Interface: 1.1.1.1(Vlan-interface1)
State: <Int ActiveU Retain Unicast>
Age: 20:17:41 Cost: 0/0
**Destination: 1.1.1.1 Mask: 255.255.255.255
Protocol: #DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 127.0.0.1 Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)
State: <NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Unicast>
Age: 20:17:42 Cost: 0/0
**Destination: 2.2.2.0 Mask: 255.255.255.0
Protocol: #DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 2.2.2.1 Interface: 2.2.2.1(Vlan-interface2)
State: <Int ActiveU Retain Unicast>
Age: 20:08:05 Cost: 0/0
Table 49 describes the meaning of route status and Table 52 shows the statistics
information about the routing table.
326 CHAPTER 28: ROUTING TABLE MONITORING COMMANDS
Table 52 Field descriptions of the display ip routing-table verbose command
Field Description
Holddown Number of held-down routes
Delete Number of deleted routes
Hidden Number of hidden routes
reset ip routing-table statistics
Syntax reset ip routing-table statistics protocol { all | protocol }
View User view
Parameter all: Specifies all the protocols.
protocol: Protocol to be specified, which can be BGP, DIRECT, ISIS, OSPF,
OSPF-ASE, OSPF-NSSA, RIP, or STATIC.
Description Use the reset ip routing-table statistics command to clear routing table
statistics.
Example # Clear routing table statistics.
<SW7750> reset ip routing-table statistics protocol all
This will erase the specific routing counters information.
Are you sure?[Y/N]y
# Display routing table statistics. Now, all route statistics are cleared.
<SW7750> display ip routing-table statistics
Routing tables:
Proto route active added deleted
DIRECT 6 6 0 0
STATIC 0 0 0 0
BGP 0 0 0 0
RIP 0 0 0 0
OSPF 0 0 0 0
O_ASE 0 0 0 0
O_NSSA 0 0 0 0
AGGRE 0 0 0 0
Total 6 6 0 0
STATIC ROUTE CONFIGURATION
29 COMMANDS
delete static-routes all
Syntax delete static-routes all
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the delete static-routes all command to delete all static routes.
The system will request your confirmation before it deletes all the configured static
routes.
Related command: ip route-static and display ip routing-table.
Example # Delete all the static routes in the router.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] delete static-routes all
Are you sure to delete all the unicast static routes?[Y/N]y
ip route-static
Syntax ip route-static ip-address { mask | mask-length } { interface-type interface-number
| next-hop } [ preference preference-value ] [ reject | blackhole ]
undo ip route-static ip-address { mask | mask-length } [interface-type
interface-number | next-hop ] [ preference preference-value ]
View System view
Parameter ip-address: Destination IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
mask: Mask.
mask-length: Mask length. Since 1s in a 32-bit mask must be consecutive, a mask
in dotted decimal notation can be replaced by mask-length, which is the number
of the consecutive 1s in the mask.
328 CHAPTER 29: STATIC ROUTE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
interface-type interface-number: Next-hop outgoing interface to be specified.
Currently, you can specify the next-hop outgoing interface as NULL 0 only. The
packets sent to a null interface, which is a virtual interface, will be discarded
immediately. This can decrease the system load.
next-hop: Next hop IP address of the route, in dotted decimal notation.
preference-value: Preference level of the route, in the range from 1 to 255. The
default preference is 60.
reject: Indicates an unreachable route. If a static route to a destination has the
"reject" attribute, all the IP packets destined for this destination will be discarded.
blackhole: Indicates a blackhole route. If a static route to a destination has the
"blackhole" attribute, the outgoing interface of this route is the Null 0 interface
regardless of the next hop address, and all the IP packet addresses destined for this
destination are dropped without the source host being notified.
Description Use the ip route-static command to configure a static route.
Use the undo ip route-static command to delete a manually configured static
route.
By default, the system can obtain the subnet route directly connected to the
router. When you configure a static route, if no preference is specified for the
route, the preference defaults to 60, and if the route is not specified as reject or
blackhole, the route will be reachable by default.
When configuring a static route, note the following points:
■ If the destination IP address and the mask are both 0.0.0.0, what you are
configuring is a default route. All the packets that fail to find a routing entry
will be forwarded through this default route.
■ You cannot configure an interface address of the local switch as the next hop
address of a static route.
■ You can configure a different preference to implement flexible route
management policy.
Related command: display ip routing-table, ip route-static default-preference, ip route-static
default-preference.
Example # Configure the next hop of the default route as 129.102.0.2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 129.102.0.2
ip route-static default-preference
Syntax ip route-static default-preference default-preference-value
undo ip route-static default-preference
ip route-static default-preference 329
View System view
Parameter default-preference-value: Default precedence of the static routes, in the range of 1
to 255. It is 60 by default.
Description Use the ip route-static default-preference command to set the default
precedence of the static routes.
Use the undo ip route-static default-preference command to restore the
default precedence to the default value.
If a static route is configured without the specified precedence, its precedence is
set to the default precedence value.
Related command: display ip routing-table, and ip route-static.
Example # Set the default precedence of static routes to 120.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip route-static default-preference 120
330 CHAPTER 29: STATIC ROUTE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
RIP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
30
n The word "router" covered in the following text represent routers in common
sense and Ethernet switches running a routing protocol. To improve readability,
this will not be mentioned again in this manual.
checkzero
Syntax checkzero
undo checkzero
View RIP view
Parameter None
Description Use the checkzero command to enable zero field check of RIP-1 packets.
Use the undo checkzero command to disable zero field check.
By default, RIP-1 performs zero field check.
According to the protocol (RFC 1058) specifications, some fields in RIP-1 packets
must be zero and these fields are called zero fields. You can use the checkzero
command to enable/disable zero field check of RIP-1 packets. When zero field
check is enabled, if an incoming RIP-1 packet has a non-zero zero field, the packet
will be rejected.
This command does not apply to RIP-2 packets because they have no zero fields.
Example # Disable zero field check on RIP-1 packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] undo checkzero
default cost
Syntax default cost value
undo default cost
332 CHAPTER 30: RIP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View RIP view
Parameter value: Default routing cost to be set, ranging from 1 to 16. It is 1 by default.
Description Use the default cost command to set the default routing cost of imported
routes.
Use the undo default cost command to restore the default value.
If no routing cost is specified when you use the import-route command to import
routes from another routing protocol, the routes will be imported with the default
routing cost specified with the default cost command.
Related command: import-route.
Example # Set the default routing cost of the routes imported from other routing protocols
to 3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] default cost 3
display rip
Syntax display rip
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display rip command to display the current RIP operation state and RIP
configuration.
Example # Display the current RIP operation state and configuration.
<SW7750> display rip
RIP is running
Checkzero is on Default cost : 1
Summary is on Preference : 100
Traffic-share-across-interface is off
Period update timer : 30
Timeout timer : 180
Garbage-collection timer : 120
No peer router
Network :
10.0.0.0
Table 53 Field descriptions of the display rip command
Field Description
RIP is running RIP is active.
display rip routing 333
Table 53 Field descriptions of the display rip command
Field Description
Checkzero is on Zero field checking is enabled.
Default cost : 1 The default route cost is 1
Summary is on Routes are aggregated automatically
Preference : 100 The preference of RIP is 100
Traffic-share-across-interface is off Traffic is shared across equivalent routes.
Period update timer : 30 Settings of the three timers of RIP
Timeout timer : 180
Garbage-collection timer : 120
No peer router No destination address of a transmission is specified
Network :10.0.0.0 RIP is enabled on network segment 10.0.0.0
display rip routing
Syntax display rip routing
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display rip routing command to display RIP routing information.
Example # Display RIP routing table information.
<SW7750> display rip routing
RIP routing table: public net
A = Active I = Inactive G=Garbage collection
Destination/Mask Cost NextHop Age SourceGateway Att
6.0.0.0/8 1 10.153.25.22 4s 10.153.25.22 A
Table 54 Field descriptions of the display rip routing command
Field Description
Destination/Mask Destination address/Mask
Cost Cost
NextHop Net hop address
Age The time that a route exists in the routing table, namely, the aging time
SourceGateway Gateway originating the route
Att Attribute value, which may be one of the three following values:
A Active routes
I Inactive routes
G Unreachable route in the state of garbage collection. If garbage
collection times out, and the unreachable route does not receive
update messages from the same neighbor, the route will be
removed from the routing table completely.
334 CHAPTER 30: RIP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
filter-policy export
Syntax filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol [
process-id ] | interface interface-type interface-number ]
filter-policy route-policy route-policy-name export
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol [
process-id ] | interface interface-type interface-number ]
undo filter-policy route-policy route-policy-name export
View RIP view
Parameter acl-number: Number of the basic or advanced ACL used to filter routing
information by destination address, in the range of 2,000 to 3,999.
ip-prefix-name: Name of the address ip-prefix list used to filter routing information
by destination address, containing 1 to 19 characters.
route-policy-name: Name of the routing policy used to filter routing information,
containing 1 to 19 characters. A routing policy can enable RIP to determine which
routes are to be sent/received based on such fields as
acl/cost/interface/ip/ip-prefix/tag.
protocol: Routing protocol whose routing information is to be filtered. Currently,
this can be bgp, direct, isis, ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa or static.
process-id: Routing protocol process ID, in the range of 1 to 65535. This argument
is valid only when the protocol is ospf.
interface: Interface where the routes to be advertised will be filtered.
interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.
Description Use the filter-policy export command to enable RIP to filter the routing
information to be advertised.
Use the undo filter-policy export command to cancel the filtering of the
routing information to be advertised.
By default, RIP does not filter routing information before advertising.
Related command: acl, filter-policy import, ip ip-prefix.
Example # Configure to filter route information by ACL 2000 before the information is
advertised.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] filter-policy 2000 export
filter-policy import 335
filter-policy import
Syntax filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ gateway ip-prefix-name ] |
gateway ip-prefix-name } import [ interface interface-type interface-number ]
filter-policy route-policy route-policy-name import
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ gateway
ip-prefix-name ] | gateway ip-prefix-name } import [ interface interface-type
interface-number ]
undo filter-policy route-policy route-policy-name import
View RIP view
Parameter acl-number: Number of the ACL used to filter routing information by destination
address, in the range of 2,000 to 3,999.
ip-prefix-name: Name of the address prefix list used to filter routing information by
destination address, containing 1 to 19 characters.
gateway ip-prefix-name: Name of the address prefix list used to filter routing
information by the address of the neighbor router advertising the information,
containing 1 to 19 characters.
route-policy-name: Name of the routing policy used to filter routing information,
containing 1 to 19 characters. A routing policy can enable RIP to determine which
routes are to be sent/received based on such fields as
acl/cost/interface/ip/ip-prefix/tag.
interface interface-type interface-number: Filters routes on the specified
interface. The interface-type argument represents the interface type and the
interface-number argument represents the interface number.
Description Use the filter-policy gateway import command to enable RIP to filter received
routing information by a specified address so that the routing information
advertised by the address can pass the filter.
Use the undo filter-policy gateway import command to disable the above
filtering.
Use the filter-policy import command to filter the received routing information.
Use the undo filter-policy import command to disable the above filtering.
You can control the range of routes received by RIP by specifying an ACL, ip-prefix
list and routing policies.
Related command: acl, filter-policy export, ip ip-prefix.
Example # Configure to filter incoming routing information by acl 2000.
336 CHAPTER 30: RIP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] filter-policy 2000 import
host-route
Syntax host-route
undo host-route
View RIP view
Parameter None
Description Use the host-route command to enable RIP to accept host routes.
Use the undo host-route command to reject host routes.
By default, RIP accepts host routes.
In some special cases, RIP receives a great number of host routes from the same
network segment. These routes are of little help to path searching and occupy a
lot of resources. In this case, the undo host-route command can be used to reject
host routes.
Example # Enable RIP to reject host routes.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] undo host-route
import-route
Syntax import-route protocol [ process-id | allow-ibgp ] [ cost value | route-policy
route-policy-name ]*
undo import-route protocol [ process-id ]
View RIP view
Parameter protocol: Redistributes routes from the protocol, which can be direct, ospf,
ospf-ase, ospf-nssa, static, isis or bgp.
process-id: Redistributes routes from the process of the protocol.
allow-ibgp: Redistributes iBGP routes.
value: Cost value of redistributed routes, in the range of 1 to 16.
network 337
route-policy route-policy-name: Redistributes only the routes matching the
conditions of the specified route-policy. The Name of a routing policy contains 1 to
19 characters.
Description Use the import-route command to redistribute routes from another routing
protocol into RIP.
Use the undo import-route command to disable route redistribution from
another routing protocol.
By default, RIP does not redistribute routes from other protocols.
The import-route command is used to import the routes of another protocol with
a specified cost. RIP regards the imported routes as its own routes and transmits
them with the specified cost. This command can greatly enhance the capability of
RIP to obtain routes, thereby improving RIP performance.
If the cost value is not specified, routes will be imported with the default routing
cost (set by the default cost command, ranging from 1 to 16). If the cost of an
imported route is 16, RIP marks the route as HOLD DOWN (however, the route can
still be used to forward packets), and continues to announce the route with this
cost to other routers running RIP until the Garbage Collection timer times out (the
timeout time defaults to 120 seconds).
Related command: default cost.
n Note that:
The import-route bgp command redistributes only eBGP routes, while the
import-route bgp allow-ibgp command redistributes both iBGP and eBGP
routes. Because the redistributed iBGP routes have the AS-PATH attribute
removed, routing loops may occur. Therefore, use the allow-ibgp keyword with
caution.
Example # Import static routes with the cost of 4.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] import-route static cost 4
# Set the default cost and import OSPF routes with the default cost.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] default cost 3
[SW7750-rip] import-route ospf
network
Syntax network network-address
338 CHAPTER 30: RIP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
undo network network-address
View RIP view
Parameter network-address: Address of the network for which RIP is enabled/disabled. It can
be the IP network address of any interface.
Description Use the network command to enable RIP on a specified interface.
Use the undo network command to disable RIP on the interface.
By default, RIP is disabled on any interface.
After a RIP routing process is started, it is disabled on any interface. To enable RIP
routing on an interface, you must use the network command.
When the network command is used on an address, the effect is that the
interface on the network segment at this address is enabled. For example, the
results of viewing the network 129.102.1.1 with both the display
current-configuration command and the display rip command are shown as
network 129.102.0.0.
Related command: rip work.
Example # Enable RIP on the interface with the network address 129.102.0.0.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] network 129.102.0.0
peer
Syntax peer ip-address
undo peer ip-address
View RIP view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the interface on the peer router with which routing
information needs to be exchanged, in dotted decimal notation.
Description Use the peer command to configure the destination address of the peer device
with which routing information should be exchanged in unicast mode.
Use the undo peer command to cancel a unicast address.
By default, RIP does not send packets to any address in unicast mode.
preference 339
This command is used to for non-broadcast networks to which protocol packets
cannot be sent in broadcast mode. And you are not recommended to use this
command in normal situation.
Example # Specify a unicast destination address of 202.38.165.1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] peer 202.38.165.1
preference
Syntax preference value
undo preference
View RIP view
Parameter value: Preference level, ranging from 1 to 255. By default, the value is 100.
Description Use the preference command to configure the route preference of RIP.
Use the undo preference command to restore the default preference.
Every routing protocol has its own preference. Its default value is determined by
the specific routing policy. The preferences of routing protocols will finally
determine which routing algorithm’s routes will be selected as the optimal routes
in the IP routing table. You can use this command to modify the RIP preference
manually.
Example # Specify the RIP preference as 20.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] preference 20
reset
Syntax reset
View RIP view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset command to reset the system configuration parameters of RIP.
When you need to re-configure the parameters of RIP, you can use this command
to restore the default setting.
340 CHAPTER 30: RIP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Reset the RIP system configuration.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] reset
% Reset RIP’s configuration and restart RIP? [Y/N]y
rip
Syntax rip
undo rip
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the rip command to enable RIP and enter RIP view.
Use the undo rip command to disable RIP.
By default, the system does not run RIP.
RIP must be enabled before you can enter the RIP view and configure various RIP
global parameters. You can, however, configure the interface-based parameters
regardless of whether RIP is enabled.
n Note that the interface parameters configured previously would be invalid when
RIP is disabled.
Example # Enable RIP and enter RIP view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip]
rip authentication-mode
Syntax rip authentication-mode { simple password | md5 { rfc2453 key-string |
rfc2082 key-string key-id } }
undo rip authentication-mode
View Interface view
Parameter simple: Specifies to use simple text authentication mode.
password: Simple text authentication key, containing 1 to 16 characters.
rip input 341
md5: Specifies to use MD5 cipher text authentication mode.
rfc2453: Specifies that MD5 cipher text authentication packets will use a packet
format (IETF standard) stipulated by RFC2453.
rfc2082: Specifies that MD5 cipher text authentication packets will use a packet
format stipulated by RFC2082.
key-string: MD5 cipher text authentication key. If it is input in a plain text form,
MD5 key is a character string not exceeding 16 characters. And it will be displayed
in a cipher text form in a length of 24 characters when you use the display
current-configuration command. You can also input the MD5 key in a cipher
text form with a length of 24 characters.
key-id: MD5 cipher text authentication identifier, ranging from 1 to 255.
Description Use the rip authentication-mode command to configure RIP-2 authentication
mode and its parameters.
Use the undo rip authentication-mode command to cancel RIP-2
authentication mode.
RIP-1 does not authenticate packets. Generally RIP authenticates packets in two
modes: plaintext authentication and MD5 ciphertext authentication. There are two
packet formats in the MD5 ciphertext authentication: one format conforms to RFC
2453 and the other format is described in RFC 2082. Routers support both
formats. You can select any format as required.
Related command: rip version.
Example # Specify the interface Vlan-interface 10 to use the simple authentication with the
authentication key of aaa.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] rip version 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] rip authentication-mode simple aaa
# Specify Vlan-interface 10 to use the MD5 cipher text authentication, with the
authentication key of aaa and the packet format of rfc2453.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] rip version 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] rip authentication-mode md5 rfc2453 aaa
rip input
Syntax rip input
undo rip input
342 CHAPTER 30: RIP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View Interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the rip input command to enable an interface to receive RIP packets.
Use the undo rip input command to disable an interface from receiving RIP
packets.
By default, all interfaces, except loopback interfaces, can receive RIP packets.
This command is used in cooperation with another two commands: rip output
and rip work. Functionally, rip work is equivalent to rip input & rip output. The
latter two control the receipt and the transmission of RIP packets respectively on
an interface. The former command equals the functional combination of the latter
two commands.
Related command: rip output, rip work.
Example # Configure the interface Vlan-interface 10 not to receive RIP packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] undo rip input
rip metricin
Syntax rip metricin value
undo rip metricin
View Interface view
Parameter value: Additional route metric added when receiving a RIP route, ranging from 0
to 16. By default, the value is 0.
Description Use the rip metricin command to configure the additional route metric added to
the RIP routes received on an interface.
Use the undo rip metricin command to restore the default value of this
additional route metric.
Related command: rip metricout.
Example # Set the additional route metric added to RIP routes received on Vlan-interface 10
to 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
rip metricout 343
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] rip metricin 2
rip metricout
Syntax rip metricout value
undo rip metricout
View Interface view
Parameter value: Additional route metric added when transmitting a RIP route, ranging from
1 to 16. By default, the value is 1.
Description Use the rip metricout command to configure the additional route metric added
to the RIP routes to be transmitted on an interface.
Use the undo rip metricout command to restore the default value of this
additional route metric.
n The rip metricout configuration only applies to the RIP routes learnt by the router
and those generated by the router itself. It does not apply to any route imported
to RIP by any other routing protocol.
Related command: rip metricin.
Example # Set the additional route metric added to the RIP routes to be transmitted on
Vlan-interface 10 to 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] rip metricout 2
rip output
Syntax rip output
undo rip output
View Interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the rip output command to enable an interface to transmit RIP packets.
Use the undo rip output command to disable an interface from transmitting RIP
packets.
344 CHAPTER 30: RIP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
By default, all interfaces except loopback interfaces are enabled to transmit RIP
packets to the external.
This command is used in cooperation with another two commands: rip input and
rip work Functionally, rip work is equivalent to rip input & rip output. The
latter two control the receipt and the transmission of RIP packets respectively on
an interface. The former command equals the functional combination of the latter
two commands.
Related command: rip input, rip work.
Example # Disable the interface Vlan-interface 10 from transmitting RIP packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] undo rip output
rip split-horizon
Syntax rip split-horizon
undo rip split-horizon
View Interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the rip split-horizon command to configure an interface to use split horizon
when transmitting RIP packets.
Use the undo rip split-horizon command to configure an interface not to use
split horizon when transmitting RIP packets.
By default, an interface is enabled to use split horizon when transmitting RIP
packets.
Normally, split horizon is necessary for avoiding route loop. Only in some special
cases does split horizon need to be disabled to ensure the correct execution of the
protocol. So, disable split horizon only when necessary.
Example # Specify the interface Vlan-interface 10 not to use split horizon when processing
RIP packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] undo rip split-horizon
rip version 345
rip version
Syntax rip version { 1 | 2 [ broadcast | multicast ] }
undo rip version
View Interface view
Parameter 1: Specifies the version of RIP packets on the interface to RIP-1.
2: Specifies the version of RIP packets on the interface to RIP-2.
broadcast: Transmission mode of RIP-2 packets is broadcast.
multicast: Transmission mode of RIP-2 packets is multicast.
Description Use the rip version command to specify the version of RIP packets on an
interface.
Use the undo rip version command to restore the default RIP packet version on
the interface.
By default, the interface RIP version is RIP-1. RIP-1 transmits packets in broadcast
mode, while RIP-2 transmits packets in multicast mode by default.
When running RIP-1, the interface only receives and transmits RIP-1 broadcast
packets, and receives RIP-2 broadcast packets, but does not receive RIP-2 multicast
packets. When running RIP-2 in broadcast mode, the interface receives and
transmits RIP-2 broadcast packets, receives RIP-1 broadcast packets and RIP-2
multicast packets. When running RIP-2 in multicast mode, the interface only
receives and transmits RIP-2 multicast packets, receives RIP-2 broadcast packets,
but does not receive RIP-1 broadcast packets.
Example # Configure the interface Vlan-interface 10 as RIP-2 broadcast mode.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] rip version 2 broadcast
rip work
Syntax rip work
undo rip work
View Interface view
Parameter None
346 CHAPTER 30: RIP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the rip work command to enable RIP to transmit and receive RIP packets on
an interface.
Use the undo rip work command to disable RIP from transmitting and receiving
RIP packets on an interface.
By default, RIP is enabled from transmitting and receiving RIP packets on an
interface.
This command is used in cooperation with rip input, rip output and network
commands.
Related command: network, rip input, rip output.
Example # Disable RIP from transmitting and receiving RIP packets on the interface
Vlan-interface 10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] undo rip work
summary
Syntax summary
undo summary
View RIP view
Parameter None
Description Use the summary command to enable RIP-2 automatic route aggregation.
Use the undo summary command to disable RIP-2 automatic route aggregation.
By default, RIP-2 route aggregation is enabled.
Route aggregation can be used to reduce the routing traffic on the network as
well as to reduce the size of the routing table. If RIP-2 is used, route aggregation
function can be disabled with the undo summary command when it is necessary
to broadcast subnet routes.
RIP-1 does not support subnet mask. Forwarding subnet routes may cause
ambiguity. Therefore, RIP-1always uses route aggregation.
Related command: rip version.
Example # Set RIP version on the interface Vlan-interface 10 as RIP-2 and disable route
aggregation.
timers 347
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] rip version 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] quit
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] undo summary
timers
Syntax timers { update update-timer | timeout timeout-timer } *
undo timers { update | timeout } *
View RIP view
Parameter update-timer: Value of the Period Update timer, ranging from 1 to 3,600 seconds.
By default, it is 30 seconds.
timeout-timer: Value of the Timeout timer, ranging from 1 to 3,600 seconds. By
default, it is 180 seconds.
Description Use the timers command to modify the values of the three RIP timers: Period
Update, Timeout, and Garbage-collection.
Use the undo timers command to restore the default settings.
By default, the Period Update, Timeout, and Garbage-collection timers are 30
seconds, 180 seconds, and 120 seconds, respectively.
Generally, it is regarded that the value of the Garbage-collection timer is fixed at
four times that of the Period Update timer. Adjusting the Period Update timer will
affect the Garbage-collection timer.
The modification of RIP timers is validated immediately.
Related command: display rip.
Example # Set the values of the Period Update timer and the Timeout timer of RIP to 10
seconds and 30 seconds respectively.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] timers update 10 timeout 30
traffic-share-across-interface
Syntax traffic-share-across-interface
undo traffic-share-across-interface
348 CHAPTER 30: RIP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View RIP view
Parameter None
Description Use the traffic-share-across-interface command to enable traffic sharing
across RIP interfaces, so as to distribute traffic evenly over equal-cost routes across
the interfaces on a router.
Use the undo traffic-share-across-interface command to cancel traffic
sharing.
By default, traffic sharing across RIP interfaces is disabled.
In the case the number of equal-cost routes reaches the upper limit:
With this function enabled, the newly learned equal-cost routes replace existing
ones in the routing table.
With this function disabled, the router determines whether the aging time of the
equal-cost route with the longest aging time has reached the threshold. If yes, the
router replaces this route with the equal-cost route newly learned; otherwise, the
router drops the equal-cost route newly learned.
Example # Enable traffic sharing across RIP interfaces.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rip
[SW7750-rip] traffic-share-across-interface
OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
31
n The words "router" covered in the following text represent routers in common
sense and Ethernet switches running a routing protocol. To improve readability,
this will not be mentioned again in this manual.
abr-summary
Syntax abr-summary ip-address mask [ advertise | not-advertise ]
undo abr-summary ip-address mask
View OSPF Area view
Parameter ip-address: Network segment address.
mask: Network mask.
advertise: Specifies to advertise the aggregated route that match a specific IP
address and mask.
not-advertise: Specifies not to advertise the aggregated route that match a
specific IP address and mask.
Description Use the abr-summary command to enable route aggregation on an area border
router (ABR).
Use the undo abr-summary command to disable route aggregation on an ABR.
By default, an ABR does not aggregate routes.
This command is applicable to ABRs only and is used for route aggregation in an
area. It allows the ABR to transmit an aggregated route to other areas.
Route aggregation means that routing information is processed by an ABR, which
transmits only one route to other areas for each network segment configured with
route aggregation. You can configure multiple aggregation routes in an area so
that OSPF can aggregate multiple network segments.
Example # Aggregate the routes in the two network segments, 36.42.10.0 and
36.42.110.0, in OSPF area 1 into one summary route 36.42.0.0 and transmit it to
other areas.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
350 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] area 1
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 36.42.10.0 0.0.0.255
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 36.42.110.0 0.0.0.255
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] abr-summary 36.42.0.0 255.255.0.0
area
Syntax area area-id
undo area area-id
View OSPF view
Parameter area-id: ID of an OSPF area, which can be a decimal integer (ranging from 0 to
4294967295) or in the form of an IP address.
Description Use the area command to enter OSPF area view.
Use the undo area command to cancel the specified area.
Example # Enter OSPF area 0 view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] area 0
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0]
asbr-summary
Syntax asbr-summary ip-address mask [ not-advertise | tag value ]
undo asbr-summary ip-address mask
View OSPF view
Parameter ip-address: IP address to be matched, in dotted decimal notation.
mask: IP address mask, in dotted decimal notation.
not-advertise: Specifies not to advertise the aggregated route matching the
specified IP address and mask. If this argument is not provided, the aggregated
route will be advertised.
tag value: Tag value, which is mainly used to control route advertisement via
route-policy. It ranges from 0 to 4294967295 and defaults to 1.
Description Use the asbr-summary command to configure the aggregation of imported
routes by OSPF.
authentication-mode 351
Use the undo asbr-summary command to cancel the aggregation.
By default, imported routes are not aggregated.
After the aggregation of imported routes is configured, if the local router is an
autonomous system border router (ASBR), this command aggregates the imported
Type-5 LSAs in the aggregation address range. If an NSSA is configured, this
command also aggregates the imported Type-7 LSAs in the summary address
range.
If the local router acts as both an ABR and a transit router in the NSSA, this
command aggregates Type-5 LSAs transformed from Type-7 LSAs. If the router is
not the router in the NSSA, the aggregation is disabled.
Related command: display ospf asbr-summary.
Example # Set aggregation of routes imported by the router 3Com.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] asbr-summary 10.2.0.0 255.255.0.0 not-advertise
authentication-mode
Syntax authentication-mode { simple | md5 }
undo authentication-mode
View OSPF Area view
Parameter simple: Uses simple text authentication mode.
md5: Uses MD5 cipher text authentication mode.
Description Use the authentication-mode command to configure one area of OSPF to
support the authentication attribute.
Use the undo authentication-mode command to cancel the authentication
attribute of this area.
By default, an area does not support authentication attribute.
All the routers in one area must use the same authentication mode (no
authentication, simple text authentication, or MD5 cipher text authentication). If
the mode of supporting authentication is configured, all routers on the same
segment must use the same authentication key.
Use the ospf authentication-mode simple command to configure a simple
text authentication key.
352 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the ospf authentication-mode md5 command to configure the MD5
cipher text authentication key if the area is configured to support MD5 cipher text
authentication mode.
Related command: ospf authentication-mode.
Example # Enter area 0 view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] area 0
# Specify the OSPF area 0 to support MD5 cipher text authentication.
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] authentication-mode md5
default cost
Syntax default cost value
undo default cost
View OSPF view
Parameter value: Default routing cost of external route imported by OSPF, ranging from 0 to
16,777,214. By default, its value is 1.
Description Use the default cost command to configure the default cost for OSPF to import
external routes.
Use the undo default cost command to restore the default routing cost of
external routes to its default value.
Since OSPF can import external routing information and propagate the
information to the entire autonomous system, routing cost of external routes can
influence route selection and calculation. Therefore, it is necessary to specify the
default routing cost for the protocol to import external routes.
Example # Specify the default routing cost for OSPF to import external routes as 10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] default cost 10
default interval
Syntax default interval seconds
undo default interval
default limit 353
View OSPF view
Parameter seconds: Default interval, in seconds, of importing external routes. It ranges from
1 to 2147483647 and defaults to 1.
Description Use the default interval command to configure the default interval for OSPF to
import external routes.
Use the undo default interval command to restore the default value of the
default interval of importing external routes.
OSPF can import external routing information and propagate it to the entire
autonomous system. However, importing routes too often greatly affects the
performance of the device. Therefore, it is necessary to specify the default interval
for the protocol to import external routes.
Example # Specify the default interval for OSPF to import external routes as 10 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] default interval 10
default limit
Syntax default limit routes
undo default limit
View OSPF view
Parameter routes: Default limit on the number of external routes imported in a unit time. It
ranges from 200 to 2147483647 and defaults to1000.
Description Use the default limit command to configure the default limit on the number of
routes imported by OSPF in a unit time.
Use the undo default limit command to restore the default value.
OSPF can import external routing information and advertise them to the whole AS.
Importing too many external routes at a time greatly affects the performance of
the device. Therefore, it is necessary to limit the number of external routes
imported during each import interval.
Related command: default interval.
Example # Specify the default limit on the number of external routes imported by OSPF in
each import interval as 200.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
354 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] default limit 200
default tag
Syntax default tag tag
undo default tag
View OSPF view
Parameter tag: Default tag, in the range of 0 to 4,294,967,295, which is 1 by default.
Description Use the default tag command to configure the default tag of OSPF when it
imports an external route.
Use the undo default tag command to restore the default tag of OSPF when it
imports the external route.
When OSPF imports a route found by another routing protocol in the router and
uses it as the external routing information of its own autonomous system, some
additional parameters are required, including the default cost and the default tag
of the route.
Related command: default type.
Example # Set the default tag of OSPF imported external route of the autonomous system
as 10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] default tag 10
default type
Syntax default type { 1 | 2 }
undo default type
View OSPF view
Parameter type 1: External routes of type 1.
type 2: External routes of type 2.
Description Use the default type command to configure the default type when OSPF
imports external routes.
default-cost 355
Use the undo default type command to restore the default type when OSPF
imports external routes.
By default, the external routes of type 2 are imported.
OSPF specifies the two types of external routing information. You can use the
command described in this section to specify the default type when external
routes are imported.
Related command: default tag.
Example # Configure OSPF to import external routes of type 1 by default.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] default type 1
default-cost
Syntax default-cost value
undo default-cost
View OSPF Area view
Parameter value: Cost value of the default route transmitted by OSPF to the STUB or NSSA
area. It ranges from 0 to 16,777,214 and defaults to 1.
Description Use the default-cost command to configure the cost of the default route
transmitted by OSPF to the STUB or NSSA area.
Use the undo default-cost command to restore the default cost of the default
route transmitted by OSPF to the STUB or NSSA area.
This command only applies to an ABR in a STUB area or NSSA area.
To configure a STUB area, you need to use the stub and default-cost commands.
You must use the stub command on all the routers connected to a STUB area to
configure the area with the STUB attribute.
Use the default-cost command to configure the cost of the default route
transmitted by an ABR to the STUB area or NSSA area.
Related command: stub, nssa.
Example # Set area 1 as the STUB area and the cost of the default route transmitted to this
STUB area to 60.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
356 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] area 1
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 20.0.0.0 0.255.255.255
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] stub
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] default-cost 60
default-route-advertise
Syntax default-route-advertise [ always | cost value | type type-value | route-policy
route-policy-name ]*
undo default-route-advertise [ always | cost | type | route-policy ]*
View OSPF view
Parameter always: Generates an ase lsa describing the default route and advertises it if the
local router is not configured with the default route. If this keyword is not
provided, the local router must be configured with the default route before it can
import the ase lsa, which generates the default route.
cost value: Specifies the cost value of this ase lsa. The value of value ranges from 0
to 16777214 and defaults to 1.
type type-value: Specifies the cost type of this ase lsa. The value of type-value
ranges from 1 to 2 and defaults 2.
route-policy route-policy-name: If the default route matches the route-policy
specified by route-policy-name, the route-policy will affect the value in ase lsa. The
route-policy-name argument is a string of 1 to 19 characters.
Description Use the default-route-advertise command to import the default route to OSPF
route area.
Use the undo default-route-advertise command to cancel the import of the
default route.
By default, OSPF does not import the default route.
The import-route command cannot import the default route. To import the
default route to the route area, the default-route-advertise command must be
used. If the local router is not configured with the default route, the keyword
always should be specified so that ase lsa of the default route is generated.
Related command: import-route.
Example # The ase lsa of the default route is generated only if the local router has the
default route.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] default-route-advertise
display ospf abr-asbr 357
# The ase lsa of default route will be generated and advertised to OSPF route area
even the local router has no default route.
[SW7750-ospf-1] default-route-advertise always
display ospf abr-asbr
Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] abr-asbr
View Any view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a
process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
Description Use the display ospf abr-asbr command to display the information about the
ABR and ASBR of OSPF.
Example # Display the information about the OSPF ABRs and ASBRs.
<SW7750> display ospf abr-asbr
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1
Routing Table to ABR and ASBR
I = Intra i = Inter A = ASBR B = ABR S = SumASBR
Destination Area Cost Nexthop Interface
IA 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0 10 10.153.17.89 Vlan-interface1
Table 55 Field descriptions of the display ospf abr-asbr command
Field Description
Destination Router ID of the ABR or ASBR
Area Area where the router is connected to the ASBR
Cost Routing overhead value of the route
Nexthop Nexthop address to the destination
Interface Local output interface
display ospf asbr-summary
Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] asbr-summary [ ip-address mask ]
View Any view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a
process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
ip-address: Matched IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
mask: IP address mask, in dotted decimal notation.
358 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the display ospf asbr-summary command to display the summary
information of OSPF imported route.
If you do not specify an IP address or mask, the summary information of all OSPF
imported routes will be displayed.
Related command: asbr-summary .
Example # Display the summary information of all OSPF imported routes.
<SW7750> display ospf asbr-summary
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 10.1.1.1
Summary Addresses
Total summary address count: 2
Summary Address
net : 168.10.0.0
mask : 255.254.0.0
tag : 1
status : Advertise
The Count of Route is 0
Summary Address
net : 1.1.0.0
mask : 255.255.0.0
tag : 100
status : DoNotAdvertise
The Count of Route is 0
Table 56 Field descriptions of the display ospf asbr-summary command.
Field Description
net Destination network segment
mask Mask
tag Tag
status Status information, which takes one of the following two values:
DoNotAdvertise The summary routing information to the network segment will
not be advertised.
Advertise The summary routing information to the network segment will
be advertised.
display ospf brief
Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] brief
View Any view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a
process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
display ospf brief 359
Description Use the display ospf brief command to display brief OSPF information.
Example # Display brief OSPF information.
<SW7750> display ospf brief
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 10.1.1.1
OSPF Protocol Information
RouterID: 10.1.1.1
Spf-schedule-interval: 5
Routing preference: Inter/Intra: 10 External: 150
Default ASE parameters: Metric: 1 Tag: 1 Type: 2
SPF computation count: 163
Area Count: 1 Nssa Area Count: 0
Area 0.0.0.0:
Authtype: none Flags: <>
SPF scheduled: <Router Net Intra>
Interface: 110.1.1.1 (Vlan-interface110)
Cost: 11 State: DR Type: Broadcast
Priority: 11
Designated Router: 110.1.1.1
Backup Designated Router: 110.1.1.2
Timers: Hello 10, Dead 40, Poll 40, Retransmit 5, Transmit Delay 1
Table 57 Field descriptions of the display ospf brief command
Field Description
RouterID Router ID of the router
spf-schedule-interval Interval of SPF schedule
Authtype Authentication type of OSPF
Routing preference Routing preference of OSPF. The internal route of OSPF includes
intra/inter area route, and its default routing preference is 10,
while that of the external route of OSPF is 150 by default
Default ASE parameters Default ASE parameters of OSPF, including metric, type and tag
SPF computation count SPF computation count since OSPF is enabled
Area Count Areas for connection to this router
Nssa Area Count Number of NSSA areas
SPF scheduled SPF scheduled (flag)
Interface Name of interface belonging to this area
Cost Cost of routes
State State information
Type Network type of OSPF interface/the first type refers to the type of
the imported external route
Priority Priority
Designated Router IP address of designated router (DR)
Backup Designated Router IP address of backup designated router (BDR)
Timers OSPF timers, defined as follows:
Hello Interval of hello packet
Dead Interval of dead neighbors
Poll Interval of poll
Retransmit Interval of retransmitting LSA
Transmit Delay Delay time of transmitting LSA
360 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display ospf cumulative
Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] cumulative
View Any view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a
process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
Description Use the display ospf cumulative command to display cumulative OSPF
statistics.
Example # Display cumulative OSPF statistics.
<SW7750> display ospf cumulative
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 10.1.1.1
Cumulations
IO Statistics
Type Input Output
Hello 6271 9241
DB Description 9659 9915
Link-State Req 419 1426
Link-State Update 30190 51723
Link-State Ack 13642 22262
ASE: 6231 Checksum Sum: C3D40E0
LSAs originated by this router
Router: 141 Net: 5
LSAs Originated: 146 LSAs Received: 161905
Area 0.0.0.0:
Neighbors: 4 Interfaces: 5
Spf: 163 Checksum Sum 3C60A5F8
rtr: 105 net: 187 sumasb: 0 sumnet: 30500
Routing Table:
Intra Area: 8 Inter Area: 0 ASE: 5
Table 58 Field descriptions of the display ospf cumulative command
Field Description
IO Statistics Type Type of input/output OSPF packet
Input Number of received packets
Output Number of transmitted packets
ASE Number of all ASE LSAs
checksum sum Checksum of ASE LSA
LSAs originated Number of originated LSAs
received Number of received LSAs generated by other
routers
Router Number of all Router LSAs
SumNet Number of all Sumnet LSAs
SumASB Number of all SumASB LSAs
display ospf error 361
Table 58 Field descriptions of the display ospf cumulative command
Field Description
Area Neighbors Number of neighbors in this area
Interfaces Number of interfaces in this area
Spf Number of SPF computation count in this area
rtr, net, sumasb, sumnet Number of all LSAs in this area
Routing Table Intra Area Number of intra-area routes
Inter Area Number of inter-area routes
ASE Number of external routes
display ospf error
Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] error
View Any view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a
process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
Description Use the display ospf error command to display OSPF error information.
Example # Display the OSPF error information.
<SW7750> display ospf error
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1
OSPF packet error statistics:
0: IP: received my own packet 0: OSPF: wrong packet type
0: OSPF: wrong version 0: OSPF: wrong checksum
0: OSPF: wrong area id 0: OSPF: area mismatch
0: OSPF: wrong virtual link 0: OSPF: wrong authentication type
0: OSPF: wrong authentication key 0: OSPF: too small packet
0: OSPF: packet size > ip length 0: OSPF: transmit error
0: OSPF: interface down 0: OSPF: unknown neighbor
0: HELLO: netmask mismatch 0: HELLO: hello timer mismatch
0: HELLO: dead timer mismatch 0: HELLO: extern option mismatch
0: HELLO: router id confusion 0: HELLO: virtual neighbor unknown
0: HELLO: NBMA neighbor unknown 0: DD: neighbor state low
0: DD: router id confusion 0: DD: extern option mismatch
0: DD: unknown LSA type 0: LS ACK: neighbor state low
0: LS ACK: wrong ack 0: LS ACK: duplicate ack
0: LS ACK: unknown LSA type 0: LS REQ: neighbor state low
0: LS REQ: empty request 0: LS REQ: wrong request
0: LS UPD: neighbor state low 0: LS UPD: newer self-generate LSA
0: LS UPD: LSA checksum wrong 0: LS UPD: received less recent LSA
0: LS UPD: unknown LSA type 0: OSPF routing: next hop not exist
0: DD: MTU option mismatch 0: ROUTETYPE: wrong type value
0: LS UPD: LSA length wrong
Table 59 Field descriptions of the display ospf error command
Field Description
IP: received my own packet Received my own packet
OSPF: wrong packet type OSPF packet type error
OSPF: wrong version OSPF version error
362 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 59 Field descriptions of the display ospf error command
Field Description
OSPF: wrong checksum OSPF checksum error
OSPF: wrong area id OSPF area ID error
OSPF: area mismatch OSPF area mismatch
OSPF: wrong virtual link OSPF virtual link error
OSPF: wrong authentication type OSPF authentication type error
OSPF: wrong authentication key OSPF authentication key error
OSPF: too small packet OSPF packet too small
OSPF: packet size > ip length OSPF packet size exceeds IP packet length
OSPF: transmit error OSPF transmission error
OSPF: interface down OSPF interface is down, unavailable
OSPF: unknown neighbor OSPF neighbors are unknown
HELLO: netmask mismatch Network mask mismatch
HELLO: hello timer mismatch Interval of HELLO packet is mismatched
HELLO: dead timer mismatch Interval of dead neighbor packet is mismatched
HELLO: extern option mismatch Extern option of Hello packet is mismatched
HELLO: router id confusion Hello packet: Router ID confusion
HELLO: virtual neighbor unknown Hello packet: unknown virtual neighbor
HELLO: NBMA neighbor unknown Hello packet: unknown NBMA neighbor
DD: neighbor state low Database description (DD) packet: asynchronous
neighbor state
DD: unknown LSA type DD packet: unknown LSA type
DD: router id confusion DD packet: router id unidentifiable
DD: extern option mismatch DD packet: external route flag error
LS ACK: neighbor state low Link state acknowledgment (LS ACK) packet:
asynchronous neighbor state
LS ACK: wrong ack Link state acknowledgment packet: ack error
LS ACK: duplicate ack Link state acknowledgment packet: ack duplication
LS ACK: unknown LSA type Link state acknowledgment packet: unknown LSA type
LS REQ: neighbor state low Link state request (LS REQ) packet: asynchronous
neighbor state
LS REQ: empty request Link state request packet: empty request
LS REQ: wrong request Link state request packet: erroneous request
LS UPD: neighbor state low Link state update packet: asynchronous neighbor state
LS UPD: newer self-generate LSA Link state update packet: newer LSA generated by itself
LS UPD: LSA checksum wrong Link state update packet: LSA checksum error
LS UPD:received less recent LSA Link state update packet: received less recent LSA
LS UPD: unknown LSA type Link state update packet: unknown LSA type
OSPF routing: next hop not exist Next hop of OSPF routing does not exist
DD: MTU option mismatch MTU option of DD packet is mismatched
ROUTETYPE: wrong type value Route type: the value of the type is wrong
LS UPD: LSA length wrong Link state update packet: LSA length error
display ospf interface 363
display ospf interface
Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] interface [ verbose | interface-type interface-number [
verbose ] ]
View Any view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a
process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.
verbose: Specifies to display detailed OSPF interface information.
Description Use the display ospf interface command to display the OSPF interface
information. With the verbose keyword specified, detailed OSPF interface
information will be displayed.
Example # Display the OSPF interface information of Vlan-interface1.
<SW7750> display ospf interface vlan-interface 1
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1
Interfaces
Interface: 10.110.10.2 (Vlan-interface1)
Cost: 1 State: BackupDR Type: Broadcast
Priority: 1
Designated Router: 10.110.10.1
Backup Designated Router: 10.110.10.2
Timers: Hello 10, Dead 40, Poll 40, Retransmit 5, Transmit Delay 1
Table 60 Field descriptions of the display ospf interface command
Field Description
Cost Cost of the interface
State State of the interface state machine
Type Network type of OSPF
Priority Priority of DR for interface election
Designated Router DR on the network in which the interface resides
Backup Designated Router BDR on the network in which the interface resides
Timers OSPF timers, defined as follows:
Hello Interval of hello packet
Dead Interval of dead neighbors
Poll Interval of poll
Retransmit Interval of retransmitting LSA
Transmit Delay Delay time of transmitting LSA
364 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display ospf lsdb
Syntax display ospf [ process-id [ area-id ] ] lsdb [ brief | [ asbr | ase | network | nssa |
router | summary ] [ ip-address | verbose ] [ originate-router ip-address |
self-originate ] ]
View Any view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a
process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
area-id: OSPF area ID, which can be a decimal integer (ranging from 0 to
4294967295) or in the form of an IP address.
brief: Displays brief database statistics.
asbr: Displays the database summary about Type-4 LSAs (summary-Asbr-LSAs)
advertised by ASBR routers.
ase: Displays the database summary about the Type-5 LSAs (AS-external-LSAs).
This argument is unavailable if you have provided a value for area-id.
network: Displays the database summary about the Type-2 LSAs (network-LSAs).
nssa: Displays the database summary about the Type-7 LSAs
(NSSA-external-LSAs).
router: Displays the database summary about the Type-1 LSAs (router-LSAs).
summary: Displays the database summary about the Type-3 LSAs
(summary-net-LSAs).
ip-address: Link state identifier (in the form of an IP address).
originate-router ip-address: Specifies the Router ID of the router advertising the
LSAs.
verbose: Specifies to display detailed information about the LSAs in the database.
self-originate: Displays the database information about the LSAs generated by
the local router (self-originate LSAs).
Description Use the display ospf lsdb command to display the database information about
OSPF connection state. With the verbose keyword specified, detailed information
about the specific type of LSAs in the OSPF connection state database will be
displayed.
Example # Display the database information about OSPF connection state.
<SW7750> display ospf lsdb
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1
Link State Database
Area: 0.0.0.0
display ospf lsdb 365
Type LinkState ID AdvRouter Age Len Sequence Metric Where
Rtr 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.2 465 36 8000000c 0 SpfTree
Rtr 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 449 36 80000004 0 SpfTree
Net 10.153.17.89 2.2.2.2 465 32 80000004 0 SpfTree
SNet 10.153.18.0 1.1.1.1 355 28 80000003 10 Inter List
Area: 0.0.0.1
Type LinkState ID AdvRouter Age Len Sequence Metric Where
Rtr 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 449 36 80000004 0 SpfTree
Rtr 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 429 36 8000000a 0 Clist
Net 10.153.18.89 3.3.3.3 429 32 80000003 0 SpfTree
SNet 10.153.17.0 1.1.1.1 355 28 80000003 10 Inter List
ASB 2.2.2.2 1.1.1.1 355 28 80000003 10 SumAsb List
AS External Database:
Type LinkState ID AdvRouter Age Len Sequence Metric Where
ASE 10.153.18.0 1.1.1.1 1006 36 80000002 1 Ase List
ASE 10.153.16.0 2.2.2.2 798 36 80000002 1 Uninitialized
ASE 10.153.17.0 2.2.2.2 623 36 80000003 1 Uninitialized
ASE 10.153.17.0 1.1.1.1 1188 36 80000002 1 Ase List
Table 61 Field descriptions of the display ospf lsdb command
Field Description
Type Type of the LSA
LinkStateID Link state ID of the LSA
AdvRouter Router ID of the router that advertises the LSA
Age Age of the LSA
Len Length of the LSA
Sequence Sequence number of the LSA
Metric Cost from the router that advertises the LSA to LSA destination
Where Location of the LSA
<SW7750> display ospf lsdb ase
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1
Link State Data Base
type: ASE
ls id : 2.2.0.0
adv rtr: 1.1.1.1
ls age: 349
len: 36
seq#: 80000001
chksum: 0xfcaf
Options: (DC)
Net mask:255.255.0.0
Tos 0 metric: 1
E type : 2
Forwarding Address: 0.0.0.0
Tag: 1
Table 62 Field descriptions of the display ospf lsdb ase command
Field Description
type Type of the LSA
ls id Link state ID of the LSA
adv rtr Router ID of the router that advertises the LSA
ls age Age of the LSA
len Length of the LSA
366 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 62 Field descriptions of the display ospf lsdb ase command
Field Description
seq# Sequence number of the LSA
chksum Checksum of the LSA
Options Options of the LSA
Net mask Network mask
E type Type of external route
Forwarding Address Forwarding address
Tag Tag
display ospf nexthop
Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] nexthop
View Any view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a
process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
Description Use the display ospf nexthop command to display the OSPF next-hop
information.
Example # Display the OSPF next-hop information.
<SW7750> display ospf nexthop
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 2.2.2.2
Next hops:
Address Type Refcount Intf Addr Intf Name
---------------------------------------------------------------
202.38.160.1 Direct 3 202.38.160.1 Vlan-interface2
202.38.160.2 Neighbor 1 202.38.160.1 Vlan-interface2
Table 63 Field descriptions of the display ospf nexthop command
Field Description
Address Address of next hop
Type Type of next hop
Refcount Reference count of the next hop, namely, number of routes using
the next hop
Intf Addr IP address of the interface to the next hop
Intf Name Interface to the next hop
nexthop Next hop
display ospf peer
Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] peer [ brief | statistics ]
View Any view
display ospf peer 367
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a
process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
Description Use the display ospf peer command to display the information about OSPF
peer.
Use the display ospf peer brief command to display the brief information,
including router ID, interface, and state, about every OSPF peer.
Use the display ospf peer statistics command to display the statistics of every
OSPF peer, namely, the number of peers in various states in every area.
Example # Display the information about OSPF peer.
<SW7750> display ospf peer
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1
Neighbors
Area 0.0.0.0 interface 10.153.17.88(Vlan-interface1)’s neighbor(s)
RouterID: 2.2.2.2 Address: 10.153.17.89
State: Full Mode: Nbr is Master Priority: 1
DR: 10.153.17.89 BDR: 10.153.17.88
Dead timer expires in 31s
Neighbor has been up for 01:14:14
Table 64 Field descriptions of the display ospf peer command
Field Description
RouterID Router ID of neighbor router
Address Address of the interface, through which neighbor router
communicates with the router
State State of adjacency relation
Mode Master/Slave mode formed by negotiation in exchanging DD
packet
Priority Priority of DR/BDR for neighbor election
DR IP address of the interface of elected DR
BDR IP address of the interface of elected BDR
Dead timer expires in 31s If no hello packet is received from the peer within this interval,
the peer will be considered to be invalid.
Neighbor has been up for Time of neighbor connection
01:14:14
# Display OSPF peer statistics.
<SW7750> display ospf peer statistics
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1
Neighbor Statistics
Area ID Down Attempt Init 2-Way ExStart Exchange Loading Full Total
0.0.0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0.0.0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
Table 65 Field descriptions of the display ospf peer statistics command
Field Description
Area ID Area ID
368 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 65 Field descriptions of the display ospf peer statistics command
Field Description
Down Initial state for OSPF to establish neighbor relation, which indicates that OSPF
router does not receive the message from a certain neighbor router within a
period of time
Attempt It is enabled in an NBMA environment, such as Frame Relay, X.25 or ATM. It
indicates that OSPF router does not receive the message from a certain neighbor
router within a period of time, but still attempts to send Hello packet to the
adjacent routers for their communications with a lower frequency.
Init It indicates that OSPF router has received Hello packet from a neighbor router,
but its IP address is not contained in the Hello packet. Therefore, a two-way
communication between them has not been established.
2-Way It indicates that a two-way communication between OSPF router and neighbor
router has been established. DR and BDR can be selected in this state (or higher
state).
ExStart In this state, the router determines the sequence number of initial database
description (DD) packet used for data exchange, so that it can obtain the latest
link state information
Exchange It indicates that OSPF router sends DD packet to its neighbor routers to exchange
link state information
Loading In this state, OSPF router requests neighbor routers based on the updated link
state information from neighbor routers and its expired information, and waits
for response from neighbor routers
Full It indicates that database synchronization between the routers that have
established neighbor relation has been completed, and their link state databases
have been consistent
display ospf request-queue
Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] request-queue
View Any view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a
process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
Description Use the display ospf request-queue command to display the information
about the OSPF request-queue.
Example # Display the information about the OSPF request-queue.
<SW7750> display ospf request-queue
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1
Request List
The Router’s Neighbor is
RouterID: 10.1.1.1 Address: 120.1.1.1
Interface: 120.1.1.2 Area: 0.0.0.0
Request list:
LSID:151.14.83.0 AdvRouter:5.4.0.0 Sequence:8000002a Age:545
LSID:151.10.91.0 AdvRouter:5.4.0.0 Sequence:8000002a Age:545
display ospf retrans-queue 369
Table 66 Field descriptions of the display ospf request-queue command
Field Description
RouterID Router ID of neighbor router
Address Address of the interface, through which neighbor routers communicate with the
router
Interface Address of the interface on the network segment
Area Area number of OSPF
LSID Link State ID of the LSA
AdvRouter Router ID of the router that advertised the LSA
Sequence Sequence number of the LSA, used to discover old and repeated LSAs
Age Age of the LSA
display ospf retrans-queue
Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] retrans-queue
View Any view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID. If you do not specify a process ID, this command
applies to all current OSPF processes.
Description Use the display ospf retrans-queue command to display the information
about the OSPF retransmission queue.
Example # Display the information about the OSPF retransmission queue.
<SW7750> display ospf retrans-queue
OSPF Process 200 with Router ID 103.160.1.1
Retransmit List
The Router’s Neighbors is
RouterID: 162.162.162.162 Address: 103.169.2.2
Interface: 103.169.2.5 Area: 0.0.0.1
Retrans list:
Type: ASE LSID:129.11.77.0 AdvRouter:103.160.1.1
Type: ASE LSID:129.11.108.0 AdvRouter:103.160.1.1
Table 67 Field descriptions of the display ospf retrans-queue command
Field Description
RouterID Router ID of neighbor router
Address Address of the interface, through which neighbor routers
communicate with the router
Interface Address of the interface on the network segment
Area Area number of OSPF
Type Type of the LSA
LSID Link State ID of the LSA
AdvRouter Router ID of the router that advertises the LSA
370 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display ospf routing
Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] routing
View Any view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a
process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
Description Use the display ospf routing command to display the information about OSPF
routing table.
Example # Display OSPF routing information.
<SW7750> display ospf routing
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1
Routing Tables
Routing for Network
Destination Cost Type NextHop AdvRouter Area
10.110.0.0/16 1 Net 10.110.10.1 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
10.10.0.0/16 1 Stub 10.10.0.1 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0
Total Nets: 2
Intra Area: 2 Inter Area: 0 ASE: 0 NSSA: 0
Table 68 Field descriptions of the display ospf routing command
Field Description
Destination Destination network segment
Cost Cost of route
Type Type of route
NextHop Next hop of route
AdvRouter ID of the router that advertises the route
Area Area ID
Intra Area Number of intra-area routes
Inter Area Number of inter-area routes
ASE Number of external routes
NSSA Number of NSSA routes
display ospf vlink
Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] vlink
View Any view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a
process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
Description Use the display ospf vlink command to display the information about OSPF
virtual links.
filter-policy export 371
Example # Display OSPF virtual link information.
<SW7750> display ospf vlink
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1
Virtual Links
Virtual-link Neighbor-id -> 2.2.2.2, State: Full
Cost: 0 State: Full Type: Virtual
Transit Area: 0.0.0.2
Timers: Hello 10, Dead 40, Poll 0, Retransmit 5, Transmit Delay 1
Table 69 Field descriptions of the display ospf vlink command
Field Description
Virtual-link Neighbor-id Router ID of virtual-link neighbor router
State State
Interface IP address of the interface on the virtual link
Cost Route cost of the interface
Type Type: virtual link
Transit Area ID of transit area that the virtual link passes, and it cannot be
backbone area, STUB area, or NSSA area
Timers OSPF timers, defined as follows:
Hello Interval of hello packet
Dead Interval of dead neighbors
Poll Interval of poll
Retransmit Interval of retransmitting LSA
Transmit Delay Delay time of transmitting LSA
filter-policy export
Syntax filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol ]
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name} export [ protocol ]
View OSPF view
Parameter acl-number: Basic or advanced ACL number, in the range of 2,000 to 3,999.
ip-prefix-name: Name of the address prefix list, containing 1 to 19 characters.
protocol: Routing protocol advertising the routing information. At present, it can
be direct, rip, bgp, isis or static.
Description Use the filter-policy export command to enable the ASBR routers to filter the
external routes imported to OSPF. This command is applicable only to ASBR routers
Use the undo filter-policy export command to cancel the filtering rule
configured.
By default, OSPF does not receive routes advertised by the other routing protocols.
n ■ The filter-policy export command take effect on only the routes imported to
the local device through the import-route command. If the filter-policy
372 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
export command is configured while the import-route command is not
configured to import other external routes (including OSPF routes in different
processes), the filter-policy export command does not take effect.
■ If the protocol argument is not specified in the filter-policy export command,
this command takes effect on all the routes imported to the local device
through the import-route command.
Related command: acl, ip ip-prefix.
Example # Configure OSPF to advertise only the routing information permitted by acl 2000.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl number 2000
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 11.0.0.0 0.255.255.255
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule deny source any
[SW7750-ospf-1] filter-policy 2000 export
filter-policy import
Syntax filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name | gateway prefix-list-name }
import
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name | gateway
ip-prefix-name } import
View OSPF view
Parameter acl-number: Basic or advanced Access control list used for filtering the destination
addresses of the routing information.
ip-prefix-name: Name of the address prefix list used for filtering the destination
addresses of the routing information, containing 1 to 19 characters.
gateway ip-prefix-name: Specifies the name of the address prefix list used for
filtering the addresses of the neighbor routers advertising the routing information.
Description Use the filter-policy import command to configure the OSPF rules for filtering
the routing information received.
Use the undo filter-policy import command to cancel the filtering of the
routing information received.
By default, no filtering of the received routing information is performed.
In some cases, it may be required that only the routing information meeting some
conditions can be received. You can use the filter-policy command to set the
filtering conditions for the routing information to be received. Only the routing
information passing the filter can be received.
import-route 373
The filter-policy import command filters the routes calculated by OSPF. Only the
routes passing the filter can be added to the routing table. The routes can be
filtered based on next hop and destination address.
OSPF is a dynamic routing protocol based on link state, with routing information
hidden in LSAs. Therefore, OSPF cannot filter any advertised or received LSA. This
command is used much less in OSPF than in distance-vector routing protocols.
Example # Filter the received routing information according to the rule defined by ACL
2000.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl number 2000
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 20.0.0.0 0.255.255.255
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule deny source any
[SW7750-ospf-1] filter-policy 2000 import
import-route
Syntax import-route protocol [ process-id | allow-ibgp ] [ cost value | type value | tag
value | route-policy route-policy-name ]*
undo import-route protocol [ process- id ]
View OSPF view
Parameter protocol: Redistributes routes from the protocol, which can be direct, rip, bgp,
isis, static, ospf, ospf-ase and ospf-nssa.
process-id: Redistributes routes from the process of the protocol.
allow-ibgp: Redistributes iBGP routes.
route-policy route-policy-name: Redistributes only the routes matching the
conditions of the specified route-policy. The Name of a routing policy contains 1 to
19 characters.
cost value: Specifies the cost of redistributed routes, in the range of 0 to
16,777,214.
type value: Specifies the cost type of redistributed routes. The value ranges from 1
to 2.
tag value: Specifies the tag of redistributed routes.
Description Use the import-route command to redistribute routes from another routing
protocol.
Use the undo import-route command to disable route redistribution from
another routing protocol.
374 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
By default, RIP does not redistribute routes from other protocols.
n ■ The import-route bgp command redistributes only eBGP routes, while the
import-route bgp allow-ibgp command redistributes both iBGP and eBGP
routes. Because the redistributed iBGP routes have the AS-PATH attribute
removed, routing loops may occur. Therefore, use the allow-ibgp keyword
with caution.
■ You are recommended to configure the route type, cost and tag together in
one command. When you configure them individually, the new configuration
will overwrite the old configuration.
By default, the routing information of other protocols is not imported.
Example # Configure to import RIP routes as type-2 routes, with the route tag of 33 and the
route cost of 50.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] import-route rip type 2 tag 33 cost 50
network
Syntax network ip-address ip-mask
undo network ip-address ip-mask
View OSPF Area view
Parameter ip-address: Address of the network segment where the interface resides,
represented in dotted decimal notation.
ip-mask: IP address wildcard shielded text (similar to the complement of the IP
address mask).
Description Use the network command to enable an interface to run the OSPF protocol.
Use the undo network command to disable an interface from running OSPF.
By default, the interface does not belong to any area.
To run OSPF on an interface, the master IP address of this interface must be in the
range of the network segment specified by this command. If only the slave IP
address of the interface is in the range of the network segment specified by this
command, this interface will not run OSPF.
Related command: ospf.
Example # Specify the interfaces whose master IP addresses are in the segment range of
10.110.36.0 to run OSPF and specify the number of the OSPF area (where these
interfaces reside) as 6.
nssa 375
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] area 6
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.6] network 10.110.36.0 0.0.0.255
nssa
Syntax nssa [ default-route-advertise | no-import-route | no-summary ]*
undo nssa
View OSPF Area view
Parameter default-route-advertise: Imports the default route to the NSSA area.
no-import-route: Specifies not to import route to the NSSA area.
no-summary: An ABR is disabled from transmitting summary_net LSAs to the
NSSA area.
Description Use the nssa command to configure an OSPF area as an NSSA area.
Use the undo nssa command to cancel the function.
By default, no NSSA area is configured.
For all the routers connected to the NSSA area, the nssa command must be used
to configure the area as the NSSA attribute.
The default-route-advertise argument is used to generate the default type-7
LSA. No matter whether the route 0.0.0.0 exists in the routing table on the ABR,
the type-7 LSA default route will always be generated. The type-7 LSA default
route is generated only when the route 0.0.0.0 exists in the routing table on the
ASBR.
On the ASBR, if the no-import-route argument is provided, the external route
imported by OSPF with the import-route command will not be advertised to
NSSA area.
Example # Configure area 1 as NSSA area.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] area 1
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 36.0.0.0 0.255.255.255
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] nssa
376 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
ospf
Syntax ospf [ process-id [ router-id router-id ] ]
undo ospf [ process-id ]
View System view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, ranging from 1 to 65,535. By default, the process ID is
1. process-id is locally significant.
router-id: Router ID used by an OSPF process, represented in dotted decimal
notation.
Description Use the ospf command to enable OSPF
Use the undo ospf command to disable OSPF
After OSPF is enabled, you can perform the related configuration in OSPF view.
By default, the system does not run OSPF.
Related command: network.
Example # Enable OSPF.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] router id 10.110.1.8
[SW7750] ospf
[SW7750-ospf-1]
# Enable the running of the OSPF protocol with process ID specified as 120.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] router id 10.110.1.8
[SW7750] ospf 120
[SW7750-ospf-120]
ospf authentication-mode
Syntax ospf authentication-mode { simple password | md5 key-id key }
undo ospf authentication-mode { simple | md5 }
View Interface view
Parameter simple password: Uses plain text authentication. The password argument is a
string of up to eight characters.
ospf cost 377
key-id: ID of the authentication key in MD5 authentication mode, ranging from 1
to 255.
key: MD5 authentication key. If it is input in a plain text form, MD5 key is a string
of 1 to 16 characters. It is displayed in a cipher text form with 24 characters in
length when the display current-configuration command is executed. Inputting
the MD5 key in a cipher text form with 24 characters in length is also supported.
Description Use the ospf authentication-mode command to configure the authentication
mode and key between adjacent routers.
Use the undo ospf authentication-mode command to cancel the
authentication key that has been set.
By default, the interface does not authenticate the OSPF packets.
The passwords for authentication keys of the routers on the same network
segment must be identical. In addition, you need to use the
authentication-mode command to set the authentication type of the area, so as
to validate the configuration.
Related command: authentication-mode.
Example # Configure area 1 where the network segment 131.119.0.0 of interface
Vlan-interface 10 resides to support MD5 cipher text authentication. Set the
authentication key identifier to 15 and the authentication key to abc.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] area 1
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 131.119.0.0 0.0.255.255
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] authentication-mode md5
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] ospf authentication-mode md5 15 abc
ospf cost
Syntax ospf cost value
undo ospf cost
View Interface view
Parameter value: Cost for running OSPF protocol, ranging from 1 to 65,535.
Description Use the ospf cost command to configure the cost for running OSPF on the
interface.
Use the undo ospf cost command to restore the default costs.
378 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
For the switch, the default cost for running OSPF protocol on a VLAN interface is
1.
Example # Specify the cost spent when an interface runs OSPF as 33.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] ospf cost 33
ospf dr-priority
Syntax ospf dr-priority dr-priority-value
undo ospf dr-priority
View Interface view
Parameter dr-priority-value: Interface priority for electing the "designated router", ranging
from 0 to 255. The default value is 1.
Description Use the ospf dr-priority command to configure the priority for electing the
"designated router" on an interface.
Use the undo ospf dr-priority command to restore the default value.
The priority of the interface determines the qualification of the interface when the
"designated router" is elected. The interface with higher priority will be preferred
when the election conflict occurs.
Example # Set the priority of the interface Vlan-interface 10 to 8 during DR election.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] ospf dr-priority 8
ospf mib-binding
Syntax ospf mib-binding process-id
undo ospf mib-binding
View System view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID. It ranges from 1 to 65535 and defaults to 1.
Description Use the ospf mib-binding command to bind MIB operation to the specified
OSPF process.
ospf mtu-enable 379
Use the undo ospf mib-binding command to restore the default settings.
When OSPF enables the first process, OSPF always binds MIB operation to this
process. You can use this command to bind MIB operation to another OSPF
process.
To cancel the binding, use the undo ospf mib-binding command. OSPF will
automatically re-bind MIB operation to the first process that it enables.
By default, MIB operation is bound to the OSPF process enabled first.
Example # Bind MIB operation to OSPF process 100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf mib-binding 100
# Bind MIB operation to OSPF process 200.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf mib-binding 200
# Cancel the binding of MIB operation.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] undo ospf mib-binding
ospf mtu-enable
Syntax ospf mtu-enable
undo ospf mtu-enable
View Interface view
Parameter None.
Description Use the ospf mtu-enable command to enable the interface to write MTU value
when sending DD packets.
Use the undo ospf mtu-enable command to restore the default settings.
By default, the MTU value is 0 when sending DD packets. That is, the actual MTU
value of the interface is not written.
Database Description (DD) packets are used to describe its own LSDB when the
router running OSPF protocol is synchronizing the database.
The default MTU value of DD packet is 0. You can use this command to configure
the specified interface manually to write the MTU value area in DD packets when
sending DD packets. That is, the actual MTU value of the interface is written in.
380 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Configure interface Vlan-interface 3 to write MTU value area when sending DD
packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 3
[SW7750-Vlan-interface3] ospf mtu-enable
ospf network-type
Syntax ospf network-type { broadcast | nbma | p2mp | p2p }
undo ospf network-type
View Interface view
Parameter broadcast: Changes the interface network type to broadcast.
nbma: Changes the interface network type to NBMA.
p2mp: Changes the interface network type to point-to-multipoint.
p2p: Changes the interface network type to point-to-point.
Description Use the ospf network-type command to configure the network type of OSPF
interface.
Use the undo ospf network-type command to restore the default network
type of the OSPF interface.
OSPF divides networks into four types based on link layer protocol:
■ Broadcast: If Ethernet or FDDI is adopted, OSPF defaults the network type to
broadcast.
■ Non-Broadcast Multi-access (nbma): If Frame Relay, ATM, HDLC or X.25 is
adopted, OSPF defaults the network type to NBMA.
■ Point-to-Multipoint (p2mp): OSPF will not default the network type of any link
layer protocol to p2mp. The general undertaking is to change a partially
connected NBMA network to p2mp network if the NBMA network is not
fully-meshed.
■ Point-to-point (p2p): If PPP, LAPB or POS is adopted, OSPF defaults the network
type to p2p.
If there is any router not supporting multicast addresses on a broadcast network,
the network type of the interface can be changed to NBMA. Alternatively, the
network type of the interface can be changed from NBMA to broadcast.
For a non-broadcast multi-accessible network to be of NBMA type, any two
routers in the network must be directly reachable to each other through a virtual
circuit. In other words, the network must be fully-meshed.
ospf timer dead 381
For a network not meeting this condition, the network type of the interface must
be changed to point-to-multipoint. In this way, routing information can be
exchanged between two routers not directly reachable to each other through
another router that is directly reachable to the two routers.
If only two routers run OSPF in the same network segment, the network type of
the interface can also be changed to point-to-point.
Note that you must use the peer command to configure the peer if the network
type of the interface is NBMA or manually changed to NBMA with the ospf
network-type command.
Related command: ospf dr-priority.
Example # Set the interface Vlan-interface 10 to NBMA type.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] ospf network-type nbma
ospf timer dead
Syntax ospf timer dead seconds
undo ospf timer dead
View Interface view
Parameter seconds: Dead interval of the OSPF neighbor. It is in seconds and ranges from 1 to
65,535.
Description Use the ospf timer dead command to configure the dead interval of the OSPF
peer.
Use the undo ospf timer dead command to restore the default value of the
dead interval of the peer.
By default, the dead interval is 40 seconds for the OSPF peers of p2p and
broadcast interfaces and is 120 seconds for those of p2mp and nbma interfaces.
The dead interval of OSPF peers means that, within this interval, if no Hello
message is received from the peer, the peer will be considered to be invalid. The
value of dead seconds should be at least four times of that of the Hello seconds.
The dead seconds for the routers on the same network segment must be
identical.
Related command: ospf timer hello.
Example # Set the peer dead interval on the interface Vlan-interface 10 to 80 seconds.
382 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] ospf timer dead 80
ospf timer hello
Syntax ospf timer hello seconds
undo ospf timer hello
View Interface view
Parameter seconds: Interval, in seconds, at which an interface transmits hello packet. It
ranges from 1 to 255.
Description Use the ospf timer hello command to configure the interval for transmitting
Hello messages on an interface.
Use the undo ospf timer hello command to restore the interval to the default
value.
By default, the interval is 10 seconds for an interface of p2p or broadcast type to
transmit Hello messages, and 30 seconds for an interface of p2mp or nbma type.
Related command: ospf timer dead.
Example # Configure the interval of transmitting Hello messages on the interface
Vlan-interface 10 to 20 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] ospf timer hello 20
ospf timer poll
Syntax ospf timer poll seconds
undo ospf timer poll
View Interface view
Parameter seconds: Poll Hello interval in seconds. It ranges from 1 to 65,535 and defaults to
40.
Description Use the ospf timer poll command to configure the poll Hello packet interval on
NBMA and p2mp network.
ospf timer retransmit 383
Use the undo ospf timer poll command to restore the default poll interval.
On an NBMA or p2mp network, if a neighbor becomes invalid, Hello packet will
be transmitted at the interval of poll seconds. You can configure the poll seconds
to specify how often the interface transmits Hello packet before it establishes
adjacency with the adjacent router. Poll seconds should be no less than 3 times of
Hello.
Example # Configure to transmit poll Hello packet through interface Vlan-interface 20 every
120 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 20
[SW7750-Vlan-interface20] ospf timer poll 120
ospf timer retransmit
Syntax ospf timer retransmit interval
undo ospf timer retransmit
View Interface view
Parameter interval: Interval, in seconds, for retransmitting LSA on an interface. It ranges from
1 to 3600 and defaults to 5.
Description Use the ospf timer retransmit command to configure the interval for LSA
retransmission on an interface.
Use the undo ospf timer retransmit command to restore the default interval
value for LSA retransmission on the interface.
If a router running OSPF transmits a "link state advertisement" (LSA) to the peer, it
needs to wait for the acknowledgement packet from the peer. If no
acknowledgement is received from the peer within the LSA retransmission interval,
this LSA will be retransmitted.
The LSA retransmit between adjacent routers should not be set too short;
otherwise, unexpected retransmission will occur (See RFC2328).
Example # Specify the retransmit for LSA transmission between the interface Vlan-interface
10 and the adjacent routers to 12 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] ospf timer retransmit 12
384 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
ospf trans-delay
Syntax ospf trans-delay seconds
undo ospf trans-delay
View Interface view
Parameter seconds: LSA transmission delay on an interface. It ranges from 1 to 3,600 and
defaults to 1 (in seconds).
Description Use the ospf trans-delay command to configure the LSA transmission delay on
an interface.
Use the undo ospf trans-delay command to restore the default LSA
transmission delay on an interface.
LSA ages in the "link state database" (LSDB) of the router as time goes by (1
added every second), but it does not age during network transmission. Therefore,
it is necessary to add a period of time set by this command to the aging time of
LSA before transmitting it.
Example # Specify the trans-delay of transmitting LSA on the interface Vlan-interface 10 as
3 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] ospf trans-delay 3
peer
Syntax peer ip-address [ dr-priority dr-priority-value ]
undo peer ip-address
View OSPF view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the peer, represented in dotted decimal notation.
dr-priority-value: Value of the corresponding priority of a neighbor in the NBMA
network. It ranges from 0 to 255 and defaults to 1.
Description Use the peer command to configure the IP address of the neighbor router and
specify DR priority on an NBMA network.
Use the undo peer command to cancel this configuration.
Example # Configure the IP address of the neighbor router as 10.1.1.1.
preference 385
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] peer 10.1.1.1
preference
Syntax preference [ ase ] value
undo preference [ ase ]
View OSPF view
Parameter value: OSPF protocol route preference, ranging from 1 to 255.
ase: Indicates the preference of an imported external route of the AS.
Description Use the preference command to configure the preference of an OSPF protocol
route.
Use the undo preference command to restore the default value of the OSPF
protocol route.
By default, the preference of an OSPF protocol internal route is 10 and the
preference of an external route is 150.
Because multiple dynamic routing protocols could be running on a router, there is
the problem of routing information sharing among routing protocols and
selection. Therefore, a default preference is specified for each routing protocol.
When a route is identified by different protocols, the protocol with the highest
preference selected for forwarding IP packets.
Example # Specify the preference of an imported external route of the AS as 160.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] preference ase 160
protocol multicast-mac enable
Syntax protocol multicast-mac enable
undo protocol multicast-mac enable
View System view
Parameter None
386 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the protocol multicast-mac enable command to enable protocol
multicast MAC address delivery.
Use the undo protocol multicast-mac enable command to disable protocol
multicast MAC address delivery.
By default, protocol multicast MAC address delivery is enabled.
If OSPF is configured when Layer 2/Layer 3 multicast function is enabled in the
system, the system will multicast the broadcast routing protocol packets because
the broadcast MAC address and multicast MAC address used by the delivered
OSPF routing protocol are the same. This makes broadcast packets unable to reach
the destination host and adversely affects the running of the routing protocol.
You can disable the protocol multicast MAC address delivery function so that the
system correctly forwards OSPF multicast packets, thus ensuring the normal
running of the routing protocol.
n ■ Disable protocol multicast MAC address delivery (with the undo protocol
multicast-mac enable command) if you are configuring OSPF with Layer
2/Layer 3 multicast function enabled in the system.
■ You do not need to disable protocol multicast MAC address delivery if the
system is enabled with OSPF only.
Example # Disable protocol multicast MAC address delivery in the system.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]undo protocol multicast-mac enable
reset ospf
Syntax reset ospf [ statistics ] { all | process-id }
View User view
Parameter all: Resets all OSPF processes.
process-id: OSPF Process ID, ranging from 1 to 65535. If this argument is not
specified, all OSPF processes will be reset.
statistics: Resets OSPF statistics.
Description Use the reset ospf all command to reset all OSPF processes.
Use the reset ospf process-id command to reset the specified OSPF process and
clear the statistics.
After you use this command to reset an OSPF process:
■ Invalid LSA is cleared immediately before LSA times out.
router id 387
■ A new Router ID takes effect if the Router ID changes.
■ DR and BDR are re-elected conveniently.
■ OSPF configuration before the restart will not lose.
After this command is issued, the system will prompt you to confirm whether to
re-enable OSPF.
Example # Reset all the OSPF processes.
<SW7750> reset ospf all
# Reset OSPF process 200.
<SW7750> reset ospf 200
router id
Syntax router id router-id
undo router id
View System view
Parameter router-id: Router ID, in dotted decimal notation, in the range of 0 to 255.
Description Use the router id command to configure the ID of a router running the OSPF
protocol.
Use the undo router id command to cancel the router ID that has been set.
When the router ID is configured manually, the IDs of any two routers cannot be
same in the autonomous system. Thus, you can select the IP address of an
interface as the ID of this router.
Related command: ospf.
n A modified router ID takes effect only after OSPF is re-enabled.
Example # Set the router ID to 10.1.1.3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] router id 10.1.1.3
silent-interface
Syntax silent-interface interface-type interface-number
undo silent-interface interface-type interface-number
388 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View OSPF view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Interface number.
Description Use the silent-interface command to disable an interface from transmitting
OSPF packet.
Use the undo silent-interface command to restore the default setting.
By default, the interface is enabled to transmit OSPF packet.
To prevent the router on some network from receiving the OSPF routing
information, you can use this command to disable this interface from transmitting
OSPF packet. On the switch, this command can be used to enable/disable OSPF
packet transmission through the specified VLAN interface.
Example # Disable interface Vlan-interface 20 from transmitting OSPF packet.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] silent-interface Vlan-interface 20
snmp-agent trap enable ospf
Syntax snmp-agent trap enable ospf [ process-id ] [ ifstatechange | iftxretransmit |
ifrxbadpkt | ifcfgerror | virifstatechange | nbrstatechange |
virnbrstatechange | virifcfgerror | ifauthfail | virifauthfail | virifrxbadpkt |
viriftxretransmit | originatelsa | maxagelsa | lsdboverflow |
lsdbapproachoverflow ]*
undo snmp-agent trap enable ospf [ process-id ] [ ifstatechange |
iftxretransmit | ifcfgerror |virifstatechange | nbrstatechange |
virnbrstatechange | virifcfgerror | ifauthfail | virifauthfail | ifrxbadpkt |
virifrxbadpkt | viriftxretransmit | originatelsa | maxagelsa | lsdboverflow |
lsdbapproachoverflow ]*
View System view
Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a
process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
ifstatechange, virifstatechange, nbrstatechange, virnbrstatechange,
ifcfgerror, virifcfgerror, ifauthfail, virifauthfail, ifrxbadpkt, iftxretransmit,
virifrxbadpkt, viriftxretransmit, originatelsa, maxagelsa, lsdboverflow, and
lsdbapproachoverflow: Types of TRAP packets that the switch produces in case
of OSPF anomalies.
Description Use the snmp-agent trap enable ospf command to enable the OSPF TRAP
function.
spf-schedule-interval 389
Use the undo snmp-agent trap enable ospf command to disable the OSPF
TRAP function.
This command does not apply to the OSPF processes that are started after the
command is executed.
By default, the switch does not send TRAP packets in case of OSPF anomalies.
For detailed configuration of SNMP TRAP, refer to “SNMP Configuration
Commands” on page 877.
Example # Enable the TRAP function for OSPF process 100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent trap enable ospf 100
spf-schedule-interval
Syntax spf-schedule-interval interval
undo spf-schedule-interval
View OSPF view
Parameter interval: SPF calculation interval of OSPF, in seconds. It ranges from 1 to 10 and
defaults to 5.
Description Use the spf-schedule-interval command to configure the route calculation
interval of OSPF.
Use the undo spf-schedule-interval command to restore the default setting.
According to the Link State Database (LSDB), the router running OSPF can
calculate the shortest path tree taking itself as the root and determine the next
hop to the destination network according to the shortest path tree. Adjusting SPF
calculation interval restrains frequent network changes, which may occupy too
many bandwidth resources and router resources.
Example # Set the OSPF route calculation interval of 3Com to 6 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] spf-schedule-interval 6
stub
Syntax stub [ no-summary ]
undo stub
390 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View OSPF Area view
Parameter no-summary: Disables an ABR from transmitting Summary LSAs to the STUB
area.
Description Use the stub command to configure the type of an OSPF area as "stub".
Use the undo stub command to cancel the settings.
By default, no area is set to be the STUB area.
If the router is an ABR, it will send a default route to the connected stub area . Use
the default-cost command to configure the default route cost. In addition, you
can specify the no-summary argument in the stub command to disable the
receiving of type-3 LSAs by the stub area connected to the ABR.
Related command: default-cost.
Example # Set the type of OSPF area 1 to STUB.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] area 1
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] stub
vlink-peer
Syntax vlink-peer router-id [ hello seconds | retransmit seconds | trans-delay seconds |
dead seconds | simple password | md5 keyid key ]*
undo vlink-peer router-id
View OSPF Area view
Parameter route-id: Router ID of virtual link peer.
hello seconds: Specifies the interval, in seconds, at which the router transmits
hello packet. It ranges from 1 to 8192 and defaults to 10. This value must equal
the hello seconds value of the router virtually linked to the interface.
retransmit seconds: Specifies the interval, in seconds, for retransmitting the LSA
packets on an interface. It ranges from 1 to 3600 and defaults to 5.
trans-delay seconds: Specifies the delay, in seconds, for transmitting LSA packets
on an interface. It ranges from 1 to 3600 and defaults to 1.
dead seconds: Specifies the interval, in seconds, of death timer. It ranges from 1
to 8192 and defaults to 40. This value must equal the dead seconds of the router
virtually linked to it and must be at least four times of the hello seconds.
vlink-peer 391
simple password: Specifies the simple text authentication password, which
contains up to eight characters, of the interface. This value must equal the
authentication key of the virtually linked peer.
keyid: MD5 authentication key ID. It ranges from 1 to 255. It must be equal to the
authentication key ID of the virtually linked peer.
key: MD5 authentication key. If you use simple text authentication key, you can
input a string containing 1 to 16 characters. When you use the display
current-configuration command to display system information, the MD5
authentication key is displayed in the form of cipher text with a length of 24
characters. Inputting the key in the form of cipher text with a length of 24
characters is also supported.
Description Use the vlink-peer command to create and configure a virtual link.
Use the undo vlink-peer command to cancel an existing virtual link.
According to RFC2328, an OSPF area must be connected to the backbone
network. You can use the vlink-peer command to keep the connectivity. Virtual
link can be regarded as a common interface that uses OSPF because the principle
for configuring the parameters such as hello, retransmit, and trans-delay on it is
similar.
Note that, when configuring virtual link authentication, you use the
authentication-mode command to specify the authentication mode as MD5
cipher text or simple text on the backbone network.
Related command: authentication-mode, display ospf peer.
Example # Create a virtual link to 10.110.0.3 and use the MD5 cipher authentication mode.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ospf 1
[SW7750-ospf-1] area 10.0.0.0
[SW7750-ospf-1-area-10.0.0.0] vlink-peer 10.110.0.3 md5 3 345
392 CHAPTER 31: OSPF CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION
32 COMMANDS
n The router in this document refers to a generic router and an Ethernet switch
running routing protocols.
area-authentication-mode
Syntax area-authentication-mode { simple | md5 } password [ ip | osi ]
undo area-authentication-mode { simple | md5 } [ ip | osi ]
View IS-IS view
Parameter simple: Specifies to send the password in plain text.
md5: Specifies to send the password encrypted with MD5.
password: Specifies the password to be set. For the simple authentication mode,
the password must be plain text. For the md5 authentication mode, the password
can be either plain text or ciphertext, and the result depends on the input. A plain
password can be a string no longer than 16 bytes, such as user918. A cipher
password must be a ciphertext of 24 bytes, such as (TT8F]Y5SQ=^Q‘MAF4<1!!.
ip: Specifies the system to check the configuration for the corresponding field of
IP in LSP.
osi: Specifies the system to check the configuration for the corresponding field of
OSI in LSP.
Whether a password should use the ip keyword or the osi keyword is not affected
by the actual network environment.
Description Use the area-authentication-mode command to configure IS-IS to
authenticate the packets (LSP, CSNP and PSNP) received from level-1 route using
the predefined mode and password.
Use the undo area-authentication-mode command to disable IS-IS from
authenticating the received packets above.
The system will neither authenticate the packets received from level-1 route nor
check its password by default.
We can use this command to clear all leve-1 routing packets not compatible with
the area authentication password set by the command. And at the same time, we
394 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
also instruct the system to follow a specific mode to insert the area authentication
password in all the level-1 routing packets sent from the local node.
Related command: reset isis all, domain-authentication-mode, and isis authentication-mode.
Example # Set the area authentication password to hello, and the authentication mode to
simple.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] area-authentication-mode simple hello
cost-style
Syntax cost-style { narrow | wide | wide-compatible | { compatible |
narrow-compatible } [ relax-spf-limit ] }
undo cost-style
View IS-IS view
Parameter narrow: Specifies to receive and send narrow packets only.
wide: Specifies to receive and send wide packets only.
compatible: Specifies to receive or send both wide and narrow packets.
narrow-compatible: Specifies to receive both narrow and wide packets, but send
only narrow packets.
wide-compatible: Specifies to receive both narrow and wide packets, but send
only wide packets.
relax-spf-metric: Specifies to allow receiving routes with cost bigger than 1,024.
If this keyword is not configured, any route with cost larger than 1,024 will be
dropped. This configuration is only available when the compatible keyword or
when the narrow-compatible keyword is provided.
Description Use the cost-style command to set the cost style of packets received or sent by
IS-IS router.
Use the undo cost-style command to restore the default cost style.
Only narrow packets can be received and sent by default.
Related command: isis cost.
Example # Set the router to send only narrow packets, but receive both narrow and wide
ones.
default-route-advertise 395
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] cost-style narrow-compatible
default-route-advertise
Syntax default-route-advertise [ route-policy route-policy-name ]
undo default-route-advertise [ route-policy route-policy-name ]
View IS-IS view
Parameter route-policy-name: Name of the specified route-policy, which is a string containing
1 to 19 characters.
Description Use the default-route-advertise command to enable the L1 and L2 routers to
generate default routes.
Use the undo default-route-advertise command to disable the function.
By default, L2 routers generate default routes.
This command can be executed on L1 routers or L2 routers. Defaults routes are
generated in L2 LSP by default. Carrying out the apply isis level-1 command in
routing policy view will generate default routes in L1 LSP. Carrying out the apply
isis level-2 command in routing policy view will generate default routes in L2 LSP.
Carrying out the apply isis level-1-2 command in routing policy will generate
default routes in L1 LSP and L2 LSP respectively.
Example # Configure the current router to generate default route in LSP.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750-isis] default-route-advertise
display isis brief
Syntax display isis brief
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display isis brief command to display the brief information about IS-IS.
Example # Display the brief information about IS-IS.
<SW7750> display isis brief
ISIS Protocol Brief Information:
396 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
System protocol supported by IS-IS: none
Is-level: level-1-2
Cost-style: narrow
Preference: 15
CLNS Preference: 15
Timers:
spf-delay-interval: 5000
spf-slice-size: 0
lsp-max-age: 1200
lsp-refresh: 900
interval between SPFs: level-1 10
level-2 10
display isis interface
Syntax display isis interface [ verbose ]
View Any view
Parameter verbose: Displays the detailed information about the interface.
Description Use the display isis interface command to view the information about the
IS-IS-enabled interfaces.
The information displayed by this command includes the interface name, interface
IP address, interface link state and so on. Besides all the information displayed by
the display isis interface command, the display isis interface verbose
command will display the IS-IS configuration information related to the interface,
such as CSNP packets broadcast intervals, Hello packets broadcast intervals and
the number of invalid Hello packets.
Example # Display the information about the IS-IS-enabled interface.
<SW7750> display isis interface
Interface IP Address Id Link.Sta IP.Sta MTU Type DIS
Vlan-interface1 172.16.1.2 001 Up Up 1497 L1 No/No
# Display the detailed information about the IS-IS-enabled interface.
<SW7750> display isis interface verbose
Interface IP Address Id Link.Sta IP.Sta MTU Type DIS
Vlan-interface1 172.16.1.2 001 Up Up 1497 L1 No/No
Secondary IP Address :
Csnp Interval : L1 10 L2 10
Hello Interval : L1 10 L2 10
Hold Time : L1 30 L2 30
Lsp Interval : 33
Cost : L1 10 L2 10
Priority : L1 64 L2 64
Retransmission interval : 5
display isis lsdb 397
display isis lsdb
Syntax display isis lsdb [ [ l1 | l2 | level-1 | level-2 ] | [ lsp-id | local ] | verbose ]*
View Any view
Parameter l1, level-1: Specifies level-1 routing connection state database.
l2, level-2: Specifies level-2 routing connection state database.
lsp-id: LSP ID of the network-entity-title.
local: Specifies to display LSP information generated locally.
verbose: Specifies to display the detailed information of link state database.
Description Use the display isis lsdb command to display IS-IS link state database.
Example # Display a piece of LSP information.
<SW7750> display isis lsdb 0050.0500.5005.00-00
IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database
Lsp ID Sequence Holdtime A_P_O Checksum
>0050.0500.5005.00-00 0x00000328 780 0_0_0 0xf211
display isis mesh-group
Syntax display isis mesh-group
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display isis mesh-group command to display the mesh-group of IS-IS.
You can use this command to view the mesh-group configuration of the current
routing interface.
Example # Configure the IS-IS-enabled Vlan-interface 10 and Vlan-interface 20 of the
router to belong to mesh group 100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] isis mesh-group 100
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] interface Vlan-interface 20
[SW7750-Vlan-interface20] isis mesh-group 100
# Display the configuration information of the IS-IS mesh group.
398 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750-Vlan-interface20] display isis mesh-group
Interface Mesh-group/Blocked
Vlan-interface 10 100
Vlan-interface 20 100
display isis peer
Syntax display isis peer [ verbose ]
View Any view
Parameter verbose: Displays the area address advertised in a neighbor’s Hello packet when
this keyword is provided; displays only the brief information if this keyword is not
specified.
Description Use the display isis peer command to display the information of the IS-IS
neighbor.
Besides all the information displayed by the display isis peer command, the
display isis peer verbose command will display the neighbor’s area address,
holdtime of Up state and the IP address of the directly-connected interface.
Example # Display the detailed information about IS-IS neighbors.
<SW7750> display isis peer verbose
System ID Interface Circuit ID State HoldTime Type Pri
0000.0000.6502 Vlan-interface1000 0000.0000.6502.02 Up 8s L1 64
Area Address: 01 IP Address: 7.7.7.7 Period: 01:51:13
System ID Interface Circuit ID State HoldTime Type Pri
0000.0000.6502 Vlan-interface1001 0001.0000.6506.02 Up 24s L1 64
Area Address: 01 IP Address: 6.6.6.6 Period: 00:53:50
# Display the information about IS-IS neighbors.
<SW7750> display isis peer
System ID Interface Circuit ID State HoldTime Type Pri
0000.0000.6502 Vlan-interface1000 0000.0000.6502.02 Up 9s L1 64
0000.0000.6502 Vlan-interface1001 0001.0000.6506.02 Up 24s L1 64
display isis route
Syntax display isis route { clns | ip }
View Any view
Parameter ip: Displays IP-based IS-IS routing information.
clns: Displays OSI-based IS-IS routing information.
display isis spf-log 399
Description Use the display isis route command to display the IS-IS routing information.
Example # Display the output information of the display isis ip route command.
<SW7750> display isis route
ISIS IP Level - 2 Routing Table :
Type - D -Direct, C -Connected, I -ISIS, S -Static, O -OSPF
B -BGP, R -RIP
Flags: R-Added to RM, L-Advertised in LSPs, U-Up/Down Bit Set
Destination/Mask In.Met Ex.Met NextHop Interface Flags
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
D 111.1.0.0/16 10 Direct Vlan-interface111 R/L/-
D 170.1.1.0/24 10 Direct Vlan-interface170 R/L/-
I 131.1.0.0/16 20 111.1.1.1 Vlan-interface111 R/-/-
I 133.1.0.0/16 20 111.1.1.1 Vlan-interface111 R/-/-
I 135.1.0.0/16 20 111.1.1.1 Vlan-interface111 R/-/-
D 145.1.0.0/16 10 Direct Vlan-interface145 R/L/-
display isis spf-log
Syntax display isis spf-log
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display isis spf-log command to display the log record of IS-IS SPF
calculation.
Example # Display the log record of IS-IS SPF calculation.
<SW7750> display isis spf-log
Details of Level 2 SPF Run:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Trig.Event No.Of Nodes Duration(ms) StartTime
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 74 0:10:55
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 670 0:10:24
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 23 0:10:2
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 30 0:9:32
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 34 0:9:1
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 111 0:7:59
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 302 0:25:1
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 60 0:24:30
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 232 0:20:31
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 42 0:19:58
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 37 0:19:32
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 34 0:19:0
IS_SPFTRIG_CIRC_UP 2 633 0:18:51
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 78 0:17:59
IS_SPFTRIG_ADJDOWN 0 -59863 0:15:7
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 30 0:15:3
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 32 0:14:2
IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 202 0:13:34
IS_SPFTRIG_CIRC_DOWN 2 215 0:12:17
IS_SPFTRIG_CIRC_UP 2 27 0:12:7
400 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
domain-authentication-mode
Syntax domain-authentication-mode { simple | md5 } password [ ip | osi ]
undo domain-authentication-mode { simple | md5 } [ ip | osi ]
View IS-IS view
Parameter simple: Specifies to send the password in plain text.
md5: Specifies to send the password after encrypted with MD5.
password: Specifies the password to be set. For the simple authentication mode,
the password must be plain text. For md5 authentication mode, the password can
be either plain text or ciphertext, and the result depends on the input. A plain
password can be a string no longer than 16 bytes, such as user918. A cipher
password must be a ciphertext of 24 bytes, such as _(TT8F]Y5SQ=^Q‘MAF4<1!!.
ip: Specifies the system to check the configuration for the corresponding field of
IP in LSP.
osi: Specifies the system to check the configuration for the corresponding field of
OSI in LSP.
Whether a password should use the ip keyword or the osi keyword is not affected
by the actual network environment.
Description Use the domain-authentication-mode command to configure IS-IS routing
domain to authenticate the received level-2 packets (LSP, CSNP and PSNP) using
the predefined mode and password.
Use the undo domain-authentication-mode command to disable IS-IS from
authenticating the received packets above.
The system will neither authenticate the received level-2 routing packet nor check
its password by default.
You can use this command to clear all leve-2 routing packets not matching the
domain-authentication password set by the command. At the same time, we also
instruct the system to follow a specific mode to insert the area-authentication
password in all the level-2 routing packets sent from the local node.
Related command: area-authentication-mode, and isis authentication-mode.
Example # Use the simple mode and set the password to abc to authenticate level-2 routing
packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] domain-authentication-mode simple abc
filter-policy export 401
filter-policy export
Syntax filter-policy acl-number export [ protocol ]
undo filter-policy acl-number export [ protocol ]
View IS-IS view
Parameter acl-number: ACL number in the range of 2,000 to 3,999.
protocol: Protocol used to advertise routing information, including direct, static,
rip, bgp, ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa currently.
Description Use the filter-policy export command to enable IS-IS to filter the routes
advertised by other routing protocols.
Use the undo filter-policy export command to disable the configured filter
rules.
IS-IS does not filter the routes advertised by other routing protocols by default.
n ■ The filter-policy export command takes effect only on the routes imported
through the import-route command. If the filter-policy export command is
configured while the import-route command is not configured to import
other non-IS-IS routes, the filter-policy export command does not take
effect.
■ If the protocol argument is not provided in the filter-policy export command,
the command takes effect on all the routes imported to the local device using
the import-route command.
Related command: filter-policy import.
Example # Use ACL 2000 to filter the routes imported through IS-IS.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] filter-policy 2000 export
filter-policy import
Syntax filter-policy acl-number import
undo filter-policy acl-number import
View IS-IS view
Parameter acl-number: ACL number in the range of 2,000 to 3,999.
402 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the filter-policy import command to enable IS-IS to filter the received
routes.
Use the undo filter-policy import command to disable IS-IS from filtering the
received routes.
IS-IS does not filter the received routes by default.
In some circumstances, only the routing information satisfying certain conditions
will be received. You can configure the filtering condition by setting the
filter-policy parameters.
Related command: filter-policy export.
Example # Use ACL 2000 to filter the received routes.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] filter-policy 2000 import
ignore-lsp-checksum-error
Syntax ignore-lsp-checksum-error
undo ignore-lsp-checksum-error
View IS-IS view
Parameter None
Description Use the ignore-lsp-checksum-error command to set IS-IS to drop the LSP when
it detects LSP checksum errors.
Use the undo ignore-lsp-checksum-error command to set IS-IS to ignore LSP
checksum errors.
IS-IS ignores LSP checksum errors by default.
When the local IS-IS receives a LSP packet, it will check the LSP packet and
compare the checksum calculated with that in the LSP packet. By default, the LSP
packets will not be dropped even if the checksum is wrong. You can use the
ignore-lsp-checksum-error to configure IS-IS to drop the LSP packet in case of
checksum error.
Example # Configure IS-IS to drop the LSP packet in case of checksum error.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] ignore-lsp-checksum-error
import-route 403
import-route
Syntax import-route protocol [ allow-ibgp ] [ cost value | type { external | internal } |
[ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ] | route-policy route-policy-name ]*
undo import-route protocol [ cost value | type { external | internal } | [ level-1
| level-1-2 | level-2 ] | route-policy route-policy-name ]*
View IS-IS view
Parameter protocol: Redistributes routes from the routing protocol, which can be direct,
static, rip, bgp, ospf, ospf-ase, or ospf-nssa.
value: Cost of the imported route, in the range of 0 to 63.
allow-ibgp: Redistributes iBGP routes.
type: Specifies the type of the routing cost. If it is internal, then it is a route
within an area; if it is external, it is a route between areas. The type is internal by
default.
level-1: Redistributes routes to Level-1 routing table.
level-2: Redistributes routes to Level-2 routing table. If no level is specified, the
routes are imported to level-2 routing table by default.
level-1-2: Redistributes routes to Level-1 and level-2 routing tables.
route-policy route-policy-name: Redistributes only routes satisfying the matching
conditions of the designated route-policy. The route-policy-name argument is a
string containing 1 to 19 characters.
Description Use the import-route command to enable IS-IS to filter the imported routes.
Use the undo import-route command to disable IS-IS from importing other
protocols’ routing information.
IS-IS does not import other protocols’ routing information by default.
IS-IS takes all the routes imported to the routing domain as external routes, which
describe how to select a routes to a destination outside of the routing domain.
n Note that:
The import-route bgp command redistributes only eBGP routes, while the
import-route bgp allow-ibgp command redistributes both iBGP and eBGP
routes. Because the redistributed iBGP routes have the AS-PATH attribute
removed, routing loops may occur. Therefore, use the allow-ibgp keyword with
caution.
Related command: import-route isis level-2 into level-1.
404 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Import a static route with the cost of 15.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] import-route static cost 15
import-route isis level-2 into level-1
Syntax import-route isis level-2 into level-1 [ acl acl-number ]
undo import-route isis level-2 into level-1
View IS-IS view
Parameter acl-number: ACL number in the range of 2000 to 3999. It can be either basic ACLs
or advanced ACLs.
Description Use the import-route isis level-2 into level-1 command to import the routing
information of Level-2 area to Level-1 area.
Use the undo import-route isis level-2 into level-1 command to disable this
function.
By using the filter policy to filter the routes during the route penetration from
Level-2 to Level-1, you call advertise in the Level-1 area only those routes that have
passed the filter.
The routing information in Level-2 area will not be advertised in Level-1 area by
default.
Related command: import-route.
Example # Set the router to penetrate routes from Level-2 to Level-1 through ACL.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] import-route isis level-2 into level-1 acl 2100
isis
Syntax isis [ tag ]
undo isis [ tag ]
View System view
Parameter tag: Name of an IS-IS routing process, consisting of no more than 128 characters.
Its length can be 0, that is, the tag argument can be null.
isis authentication-mode 405
Description Use the isis command to start a corresponding IS-IS routing process and enter the
IS-IS view.
Use the undo isis command to delete the specified IS-IS routing process.
IS-IS routing processes are disabled by default.
Before running IS-IS protocol normally, you must first use the isis command to
enable IS-IS process, then use the network-entity command to configure a
network entity title (NET) for the router, and then use the isis enable command to
enable each interface that need to run the IS-IS process.
n Only one IS-IS routing process can be enabled on a router.
Related command: isis enable, and network-entity.
Example # Start the IS-IS routing process, with the system ID as 0000.0000.0002, and area
ID as 01.0001.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] network-entity 01.0001.0000.0000.0002.00
isis authentication-mode
Syntax isis authentication-mode { simple | md5 } password [ { level-1 | level-2 } [ ip |
osi ] ]
undo isis authentication-mode { simple | md5 } password [ { level-1 | level-2 }
[ ip | osi ] ]
View Interface view
Parameter simple: Specifies to send the password in plain text.
md5: Specifies to send the password in ciphertext.
password: Specifies a password. For simple authentication mode, the password
must be plain text. For md5 authentication mode, the password can be either
plain text or ciphertext, and the result depends on the input. A plain password can
be a string no longer than 16 bytes, such as user918. A cipher password must be a
ciphertext of 24 bytes, such as _(TT8F]Y5SQ=^Q‘MAF4<1!!.
level-1: Specifies to set a password for L1.
level-2: Specifies to set a password for L2.
ip: Specifies the system to check the configuration for the corresponding field of
IP in LSP.
406 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
osi: Specifies the system to check the configuration for the corresponding field of
OSI in LSP.
Whether a password should use the ip keyword or the osi keyword is not affected
by the actual network environment.
Description Use the isis authentication-mode command to authenticate the IS-IS hello
packets of the specified level using the specified authentication mode and
password on the IS-IS interface.
Use the undo isis authentication-mode command to disable the
authentication and remove the password.
There is no password or authentication by default.
If there is no other parameter but the password, then only level-1 and osi are
available.
Related command: area-authentication-mode, and domain-authentication-mode.
Example # Set the plain password as tangshi for Level-1 adjacency on Vlan-interface 10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] isis authentication-mode simple tangshi level-1
isis circuit-level
Syntax isis circuit-level [ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ]
undo isis circuit-level
View Interface view
Parameter level-1: Specifies to set up only level-1 adjacency for the interface.
level-1-2: Specifies to set up level-1-2 adjacency for the interface.
level-2: Specifies to set up only level-2 adjacency for the interface.
Description Use the isis circuit-level command to set link adjacency for the level-1-2 router.
Use the undo isis circuit-level command to resume the default configuration of
link adjacency for the level-1-2 router.
An interface can be configured level-1-2 adjacency by default.
This command is only available for a level-1-2 router. If the local host is level-1-2
router and it need to set up some adjacency (level-1 or level-2) with a peer
router, then you can use this command to prescribe the local interface to receive
and send only the hello packets. An interface can receive and send only one type
isis cost 407
of hello packet on a point-to-point link. You can use this command to reduce the
router’s processing time to save bandwidth.
Related command: is-level.
Example # Set the level-1 attributes for Vlan-interface 10 to prohibit sending and receiving
level-2 Hello packets when the interface is connected to a non-backbone router
within the same area.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] isis enable
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] isis circuit-level level-1
isis cost
Syntax isis cost value [ level-1 | level-2 ]
undo isis cost [ level-1 | level-2 ]
View Interface view
Parameter value: Specifies the link cost value for corresponding SPF calculation, in the range
of 0 to 63. It is 10 by default.
level-1: Indicates the link cost corresponding to Level-1 layer.
level-2: Indicates the link cost corresponding to Level-2 layer.
Description Use the isis cost command to set the interface link cost for SPF calculation.
Use the undo isis cost command to resume the default link cost value.
If neither level-1 nor level-2 is assigned in the configuration, then both level-1 and
level-2 are configured by default.
You are recommended to configure a proper link cost for each interface;
otherwise, the link cost for IS-IS route calculation may not reflect the correct cost.
Example # Set the Level-2 link cost to 5 for Vlan-interface10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] isis cost 5 level-2
isis dis-priority
Syntax isis dis-priority value [ level-1 | level-2 ]
408 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
undo isis dis-priority [ level-1 | level-2 ]
View Interface view
Parameter value: Specifies the priority for selecting DIS, ranging from 0 to 127, with the
default as 64.
level-1: Specifies the priority for selecting level-1 DIS.
level-2: Specifies the priority for selecting level-2 DIS.
If neither level-1 nor level-2 is specified in this command, then the level-1 and
level-2 priority is configured by default.
Description Use the isis dis-priority command to specify the priority for selecting
corresponding DIS.
Use the undo isis dis-priority command to resume the default priority.
Unlike DR of OSPF, there is no backup DIS for IS-IS and the router with 0 priority
can also select DIS.
Related command: area-authentication-mode, and domain-authentication-mode.
Example # Configure the priority as 127 for Vlan-interface 10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] isis dis-priority 127 level-2
isis enable
Syntax isis enable [ clns | ip ] [ tag ]
undo isis enable [ clns | ip ] [ tag ]
View Interface view
Parameter tag: Name assigned to the IS-IS routing process when the isis command is
executed in system view. If this argument is not specified, it is null.
clns: Specifies to enable IS-IS routing processes based on OSI protocol stack on the
interface.
ip: Specifies to enable IS-IS routing processes based on TCP/IP protocol stack on
the interface. By default, IS-IS routing processes based on TCP/IP protocol stack are
enabled.
Description Use the isis enable command to enable the corresponding IS-IS routing process
for the interface.
isis mesh-group 409
Use the undo isis enable command to disable this configuration.
The interface does not enable the IS-IS routing process by default.
Before running IS-IS protocol normally, you must use the isis command to enable
IS-IS process, and use the network-entity command to configure a network
entity title (NET) for the router, and then use the isis enable command to enable
each interface that need to run the IS-IS process.
Related command: isis, and network-entity.
Example # Enable the IS-IS routing process on Vlan-interface 10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis abc
[SW7750-isis] network-entity 10.0001.1010.1020.1030.00
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] isis enable abc
isis mesh-group
Syntax isis mesh-group { mesh-group-number | mesh-blocked }
undo isis mesh-group
View Interface view
Parameter mesh-group-number: Mesh group number, ranging from 1 to 4,294,967,295.
mesh-blocked: After this parameter is configured, the interface will be blocked to
flood the received LSP to other interfaces.
Description Use the isis mesh-group command to add an interface to a specified mesh
group.
Use the undo isis mesh-group command to delete an interface from a mesh
group.
An interface is not in any mesh group and can flood LSP normally by default.
For an interface not in a mesh group, it follows the normal process to flood the
received LSP to other interfaces. For the NBMA network with high connectivity
and multiple point-to-point links, this will cause repeated LSP flooding and
bandwidth waste.
After an interface is added to a mesh group, it will only flood a received LSP to
interfaces not belonging to the same mesh group.
When you add an interface to a mesh group or block the interface, make sure to
retain some redundancy so that a link failure will not affect the normal LSP packet
flooding.
410 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Add the IS-IS-enabled Vlan-interface 20 to mesh-group 3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750-Vlan-interface20] isis mesh-group 3
isis timer csnp
Syntax isis timer csnp seconds [ level-1 | level-2 ]
undo isis timer csnp [ level-1 | level-2 ]
View Interface view
Parameter seconds: Interval in seconds of sending CSNP packets over broadcast network,
ranging from 1 to 65,535, with the default as 10 seconds.
level-1: Specifies the Level-1 time interval for sending CSNP packets.
level-2: Specifies the Level-2 time interval for sending CSNP packets.
If neither the level-1 keyword nor the level-2 keyword is specified, both the
level-1 interval and the level-2 interval are set.
Description Use the isis timer csnp command to specify the time interval for sending CSNP
packet over broadcast network.
Use the undo isis timer csnp command to resume the default value of 10
seconds.
This command only applies to the DIS router, which sends CSNP packets
periodically. Besides, DIS is separated to Level-1 and Level-2, and their time
intervals should be configured respectively.
Example # Configure Level-2 CSNP packets to be sent every 15 seconds over Vlan-interface
10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] isis timer csnp 15 level-2
isis timer hello
Syntax isis timer hello seconds [ level-1 | level-2 ]
undo isis timer hello [ level-1 | level-2 ]
View Interface view
isis timer holding-multiplier 411
Parameter seconds: Interval in seconds for sending Hello packets, ranging from 3 to 255,
with the default as 10 seconds.
level-1: Specifies the time interval for sending Level-1 Hello packets.
level-2: Specifies the time interval for sending Level-2 Hello packets.
If neither the level-1 keyword nor the level-2 keyword is specified, both the
level-1 interval and the level-2 interval are set.
Description Use the isis timer hello command to specify the time interval for sending the
corresponding level Hello packets.
Use the undo isis timer hello command to resume the default value of 10
seconds.
The hello time interval must be configured respectively for the Level-1 and Level-2
packets on a broadcast network, because these two types of hello packets are sent
separately. A point-to-point link does not require this. The shorter the time interval
is, the more system resources will be occupied to send Hello packets, so you
should configure a proper time interval depending on the specific requirements.
Related command: isis timer holding-multiplier.
Example # Configure Level-2 Hello packets to be sent every 20 seconds over Vlan-interface
10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] isis timer hello 20 level-2
isis timer holding-multiplier
Syntax isis timer holding-multiplier value [ level-1 | level-2 ]
undo isis timer holding-multiplier [ level-1 | level-2 ]
View Interface view
Parameter value: Number of invalid Hello packets of an IS-IS neighbor, in the range of 3 to
1,000.
level-1: Specifies the number of invalid Hello packets of a Level-1 IS-IS neighbor.
level-2: Specifies the number of invalid Hello packets of a Level-2 IS-IS neighbor.
If neither the level-1 keyword nor the level-2 keyword is specified, the command
takes effect on both level-1 and level-2 IS-IS neighbors.
412 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the isis timer holding-multiplier command to configure the number of
invalid Hello packets for an IS-IS neighbor. When a specified number of Hello
packets are not received from a neighbor, the neighbor will be considered as
invalid.
Use the undo isis timer holding-multiplier command to resume the default
configuration.
The number of invalid Hello packets is three by default.
You can configure the time intervals of Hello packets separately for Level-1 and
Level-2 peers. But for point-to-point link, as there is only one kind of Hello packet,
so you need not specify Level-1 or Level-2.
In fact, the number of invalid Hello packets is used to configure Holddown time. If
a router receives no Hello packet from peer router within Holddown time, it will
take the peer router as invalid. Depending on the interface configuration, the
Holddown time can be configured differently for different routers within an area.
You can adjust the Holddown time by changing either the time interval for
sending Hello packets or the number of invalid Hello packets.
Related command: isis timer hello.
Example # Configure the number of Level-2 Hello packets signifying peer invalid as 5 for
Vlan-interface, that is, if no Hello packet is received from the interface within 5
Hello packet time intervals, the IS-IS peer is considered as invalid.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] isis timer holding-multiplier 5
isis timer lsp
Syntax isis timer lsp time
undo isis timer lsp
View Interface view
Parameter time: Minimum time interval in millisecond for sending link-state packets, ranging
from 1 to 1000, with the default as 33 milliseconds.
Description Use the isis timer lsp command to configure the time interval for sending
link-state packets over interface.
Use the undo isis timer lsp command to resume the default configuration.
Related command: isis timer retransmit.
Example # Configure the time interval as 500 milliseconds for Vlan-interface 10 to send LSP.
isis timer retransmit 413
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] isis timer lsp 500
isis timer retransmit
Syntax isis timer retransmit seconds
undo isis timer retransmit
View Interface view
Parameter seconds: Interval in seconds for retransmitting LSP packets, ranging from 1 to 300,
with the default as 5 seconds.
Description Use the isis timer retransmit command to configure the time interval for
retransmitting LSP packets over point-to-point link.
Use the undo isis timer retransmit command to resume the default
configuration.
You should be careful when configuring this parameter to avoid unnecessary
retransmission.
You need not use this command over a broadcast link, because a LAP packet
requires response from the peer only over a point-to-point link, but not over a
broadcast link,
Related command: isis timer lsp.
Example # Configure the time interval as 10 seconds for Vlan-interface 10 to retransmit LSP.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z..
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] isis timer retransmit 10
is-level
Syntax is-level { level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 }
undo is-level
View IS-IS view
Parameter level-1: Indicates the router works in Level-1, which means it only calculates
routes within the area, and maintains L1 LSDB.
414 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
level-1-2: Indicates the router works in Level-1-2, which means it calculates routes
and maintains LSDB for both L1 and L2.
level-2: Indicates the router works in Level-2, which means it calculates LSP
switching and routes and maintains LSDB for L2 only.
Description Use the is-level command to configure IS-IS router type.
Use the undo is-level command to resume the default configuration.
The configuration is level-1-2 by default.
It is recommended to configure system level when you configure IS-IS.
You can configure all the routers as either Level-1 or Level-2 if there is only one
area, because there is no need for all routers to maintain two identical databases
at the same time. You are advised to configure all routers as Level-2 in IP network
so as to facilitate extending later.
Related command: isis circuit-level.
Example # Configure the current route to work in Level-1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] is-level level-1
log-peer-change
Syntax log-peer-change
undo log-peer-change
View IS-IS view
Parameter None
Description Use the log-peer-change command to enable the IS-IS adjacency state change
output.
Use the undo log-peer-change command to disable the output.
The output is disabled by default.
When the adjacency state output is enabled, the IS-IS adjacency state change will
be sent to the configuration terminal.
Example # Enable the IS-IS adjacency state change output on the current router.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
md5-compatible 415
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] log-peer-change
md5-compatible
Syntax md5-compatible
undo md5-compatible
View IS-IS view
Parameter None
Description Use the md5-compatible command to specify IS-IS to adopt the MD5 algorithm
compatible with other manufacturers.
Use the undo md5-compatible command to specify IS-IS to adopt the default
MD5 algorithm.
By default, IS-IS adopt the private MD5 algorithm.
This command must be configured when the switch needs to perform IS-IS MD5
authentication with the devices of others manufacturers.
Example # Specify IS-IS to adopt the MD5 algorithm compatible with other manufacturers.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] md5-compatible
network-entity
Syntax network-entity network-entity-title
undo network-entity network-entity-title
View IS-IS view
Parameter network-entity-title: Network entity title in the form of X...X.XXXX....XXXX.00,
with the 12 "X" in the middle as system ID of the router, the last "00" as the SEL
and the "X...X" in the front as the area address.
Description Use the network-entity command to configure the network entity title (NET) for
an IS-IS routing process.
Use the undo network-entity command to delete a NET.
There is no NET by default.
416 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
A NET is a network service access point (NSAP), and it is in the range of 8 to 20
bytes for IS-IS.
A NET has three parts: The first part is area ID, which ranges from 1 to 13 bytes.
The routes of the same area have the same area ID. The second part is the router’s
system ID of 6 bytes, which is unique within the whole area and backbone area.
The third part is SEL, the ending byte with the value of 00. You need to configure
only 1 NET for a router. When repartitioning an area, such as merging or splitting,
you can reconfigure the router to ensure correct and continuous routing.
Related command: isis, and isis enable.
Example # Specify the NET as 10.0001.1010.1020.1030.00, of which 10.0001 is the area
ID and 1010.1020.1030 is the system ID.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] network-entity 10.0001.1010.1020.1030.00
preference
Syntax preference [ clns | ip ] value
undo preference [ clns | ip ]
View IS-IS view
Parameter value: Preference value in the range of 1 to 255. It is 15 by default.
clns: Specifies IS-IS routing preference based on OSI protocol stack, in the range of
1 to 255. It is IP-based preference by default.
ip: Specifies IS-IS routing preference based on TCP/IP protocol stack, in the range
of 1 to 255. By default, IS-IS routing preference based on TCP/IP protocol stack is
used.
Description Use the preference command to configure IS-IS protocol preference.
Use the undo preference command to resume the default IS-IS protocol
preference.
When a router runs multiple dynamic routing protocols at the same time, the
system will configure a preference for each routing protocol. If several protocols
find routes to the same destination, the one with the highest preference
dominates.
Example # Configure the preference of IS-IS protocol as 25.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
reset isis all 417
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] preference 25
reset isis all
Syntax reset isis all
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset isis all command to clear all ISIS data structure information.
The IS-IS data information will not be cleared by default.
This command is used when a LSP need to be updated immediately. For example,
after performing the area-authentication-mode and
domain-authentication-mode commands, if the router still has some old LSPs,
you can use this command to clear these LSPs.
Related command: area-authentication-mode, and domain-authentication-mode.
Example # Clear all IS-IS data structure.
<SW7750> reset isis all
reset isis peer
Syntax reset isis peer system-id
View User view
Parameter system-id: System ID for an IS-IS peer, containing 12 to 32 characters.
Description Use the reset isis peer command to clear the data information of a specific IS-IS
peer.
The IS-IS peer is not cleared by default.
This command is used when you need to re-establish a specific peer.
Example # Clear the IS-IS peer with system ID as 0000.0c11.1111.
<SW7750> reset isis peer 0000.0c11.1111
set-overload
Syntax set-overload
418 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
undo set-overload
View IS-IS view
Parameter None
Description Use the set-overload command to set overload flag for the current router.
Use the undo set-overload command to clear overload flag.
No overload flag is set by default.
When the overload flag is set for a router, the routes calculated by the router will
be ignored by other routes when they calculate SPF. (But the routes directly
connected to the router will not be ignored.)
When a router is set overload flag, other routers will not transmit the packets that
should be forwarded by the router.
Example # Set overload flag on the current router.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] set-overload
silent-interface
Syntax silent-interface interface-type interface-number
undo silent-interface interface-type interface-number
View IS-IS view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Interface index.
Description Use the silent-interface command to prohibit IS-IS packet sending on the
specified interface.
Use the undo silent-interface command to permit IS-IS packet sending on the
specified interface.
By default, IS-IS packet sending is permitted on all interfaces.
The silent-interface command just suppresses IS-IS packet sending. However,
these IS-IS packets can still be sent on other interfaces.
Example # Prohibit IS-IS packet sending on Vlan-interface 3.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
spf-delay-interval 419
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] silent-interface Vlan-interface 3
spf-delay-interval
Syntax spf-delay-interval number
undo spf-delay-interval
View IS-IS view
Parameter number: Interval of releasing CPU during routing calculation, in the range of 1,000
routes to 50,000 routes. It is 5,000 routes by default.
Description Use the spf-delay-interval command to set the interval of releasing CPU during
SPF calculation.
Use the undo spf-delay-interval command to restore the default value.
When there are two many routes in the routing table, you can use this command
to release CPU automatically after a certain number of routes are processed in
order to prevent the SPF calculation from occupying the system resources for a
long time to affect the response of the console. The unprocessed routes are to be
processed in one second.
You can adjust the number argument according to the size of the routing table. If
the spf-slice-size command is configured at the same time, the SPF calculation
will be paused if the SPF calculation matches any of the setting.
By default, CPU is released when every 5,000 routes are processed.
Related command: spf-slice-size.
Example # Set IS-IS to release CPU when every 3,000 routes are processed.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] spf-delay-interval 3000
spf-slice-size
Syntax spf-slice-size seconds
undo spf-slice-size
View IS-IS view
Parameter seconds: Duration time in milliseconds during SPF calculation, ranging from 150 to
50,000. A calculation is ended when the duration time is reached or exceeded. If
420 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
the second argument is set to 0, then the SPF calculation will continue until it
finishes. It is 0 by default.
Description Use the spf-slice-size command to configure whether the SPF routing calculation
is fragmented and the duration time for each fragment.
Use the undo spf-slice-size command to resume the default configuration.
When there are too many routes in the routing table, you can use this command
to fragment the SPF calculation to avoid taking up the system resources for too
long. You are not recommended to change the default configuration.
If the spf-delay-interval command is configured at the same time, the SPF
calculation will be paused if the SPF calculation matches any of the setting.
Related command: spf-delay-interval.
Example # Set SPF duration time to one second.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] spf-slice-size 1
summary
Syntax summary ip-address mask [ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ]
undo summary ip-address mask [ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ]
View IS-IS view
Parameter ip-address: Address range to generate summarized routes, in dotted decimal
notation.
mask: Mask of an aggregate route, in dotted decimal notation.
level-1: Specifies to summarize only the routes imported to level-1 area.
level-1-2: Specifies to summarize all the routes imported to level-1 area and
backbone area.
level-2: Specifies to summarize only the routes imported to backbone area.
If none of the level-1 keyword, level-2 keyword, and level-1-2 keyword is
specified, the routes imported to backbone area are summarized.
Description Use the summary command to configure IS-IS to generate summarized routes.
Use the undo summary command to disable summary.
No route is summarized by default.
timer lsp-max-age 421
You can summarize the routes having the same next hop into one to reduce the
routing table size, as well as the LSP and LSDB generated by the router. It is
possible to summarize native IS-IS routes and imported routes. After
summarization, the route cost is the minimum cost of those summarized routes.
Example # Set an aggregate route 202.0.0.0/8.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] summary 202.0.0.0 255.0.0.0
timer lsp-max-age
Syntax timer lsp-max-age seconds
undo timer lsp-max-age
View IS-IS view
Parameter seconds: Maximum valid time of a LSP, in the range of 1 to 65,535 in seconds. It is
1,200 seconds by default.
Description Use the timer lsp-max-age command to set the maximum valid time of the LSPs
generated on the current router.
Use the undo timer lsp-max-age command to restore the default setting.
When the router generates system LSPs, the LSPs are generated with the
maximum valid time in them. When a LSP is received by other routers, the
maximum valid time will be smaller and smaller. If the maximum valid time
decreases to 0, this LSP will be removed from LSDB.
Related command: timer lsp-refresh.
Example # Set the maximum valid time of the LSPs generated by the current system to 25
minutes, namely, 1,500 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] timer lsp-max-age 1500
timer lsp-refresh
Syntax timer lsp-refresh seconds
undo timer lsp-refresh
View IS-IS view
422 CHAPTER 32: INTEGRATED IS-IS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter seconds: LSP updating period in seconds, ranging from 1 to 65,535. It is 900
seconds by default.
Description Use the timer lsp-refresh command to set LSP updating period.
Use the undo timer lsp-refresh to resume the default configuration.
You can keep LSP in synchronization for the whole area with this mechanism.
Related command: timer lsp-max-age.
Example # Set the updating period to 1,500 seconds for the current system LSP.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] timer lsp-refresh 1500
timer spf
Syntax timer spf seconds [ level-1 | level-2 ]
undo timer spf [ level-1 | level-2 ]
View IS-IS view
Parameter seconds: Maximum time interval (in seconds) for SPF calculation, ranging from 1 to
120, with the default as 10.
level-1: Specifies to set the time interval for only Level-1 SPF calculation.
level-2: Specifies to set the time interval for only Level-2 SPF calculation.
If neither the level-1 keyword nor the level-2 keyword is specified, the interval of
both level-1 SPF calculation and the level-2 SPF calculation are set.
Description Use the timer spf command to set the time interval for SPF calculation.
Use the undo timer spf command to resume the default configuration.
In the IS-IS protocol, the short path must be calculated again when the LSDB
changes. If the SPF calculation is performed frequently, plenty of system resources
will be occupied and the router efficiency will be affected. Comparatively,
performing SPF calculation periodically can improve the efficiency. You can set the
time interval of performing SPF calculation as required.
Example # Set the time interval of performing SPF calculation to three seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] isis
[SW7750-isis] timer spf 3
BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
33
n Routers in this manual refer to common routers or Ethernet switches that run
routing protocols, unless otherwise specified.
For the commands for defining routing policies in BGP, see Chapter 34 “IP Routing
Policy Configuration Commands” on page 469.
aggregate
Syntax aggregate ip-address mask [ as-set | attribute-policy route-policy-name |
detail-suppressed | origin-policy route-policy-name | suppress-policy
route-policy-name ]*
undo aggregate ip-address mask [ as-set | attribute-policy route-policy-name |
detail-suppressed | origin-policy route-policy-name | suppress-policy
route-policy-name ]*
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter ip-address: Address of the aggregated route.
mask: Network mask of the aggregated route.
as-set: Creates a route with segment of AS_SET.
detail-suppressed: Only advertises the aggregated route.
suppress-policy route-policy-name: Suppresses the specific route selected.
origin-policy route-policy-name: Selects the original routes used for aggregation.
attribute-policy route-policy-name: Sets the attributes of the aggregated route.
The length of route-policy-name parameter ranges from 1 to 16 character string.
Description Use the aggregate command to establish an aggregated record in the BGP
routing table.
Use the undo aggregate command to disable the function.
By default, there is no route aggregation.
The keywords are explained as follows:
424 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 70 Description on keywords of the aggregate command
keywords Description
as-set Used to produce an aggregated route whose AS path information
includes detailed routes. Use this keyword carefully when many AS
paths need to be aggregated, for frequent change of routes may lead to
route vibration.
detail-suppressed This keyword does not establish any aggregated route, but it restrains
the advertisement of all the specific routes. If only some specific routes
are to be restrained, use the peer filter-policy command carefully.
suppress-policy Create an aggregated route with this keyword, at the same time, the
advertisement of the specified route is restrained. If you want to restrain
some specific routes selectively and leaves other routes still being
advertised, use the if-match sub-statement of the route-policy
command.
origin-policy This keyword is used to select only the specific routes in accordance with
the route-policy to create an aggregated route.
attribute-policy This keyword is used to set attributes of the aggregated route. The same
work can be done by using peer route-policy, etc.
Example # Create an aggregated route in BGP routing table.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] aggregate 192.213.0.0 255.255.0.0
bgp
Syntax bgp as-number
undo bgp [ as-number ]
View System view
Parameter as-number: Specified local AS number, in the range of 1 to 65,535.
Description Use the bgp command to enable BGP and enter the BGP view.
Use the undo bgp command to disable BGP.
By default, the BGP is disabled.
This command is used to enable/disable BGP and specify the local AS number of
BGP.
Example # Enable BGP.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp]
balance 425
balance
Syntax balance num
undo balance
View BGP view
Parameter num: Number of BGP routes used for load balance. This argument ranges from 1
to 4. Value 1 means the system does not adopt load balance.
Description Use the balance command to configure BGP load balance.
Use the undo balance command to cancel the load balance configuration.
By default, the system does not adopt BGP load balance.
Example # Configure BGP load balance.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] balance 2
compare-different-as-med
Syntax compare-different-as-med
undo compare-different-as-med
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter None
Description Use the compare-different-as-med command to enable comparison of MED
values from different AS neighboring routes when determining the best route.
Use the undo compare-different-as-med command to disable the
comparison.
By default, it is not allowed to compare the MED attribute values from the routing
paths of different AS peers.
If there are several routes available to one destination address, the route with a
smaller MED can be selected as the final route.
Do not use this command unless it is determined that the same IGP and routing
selection mode are adopted by different autonomous systems.
Example # Enable comparison of MED values from different AS neighboring routes.
426 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] compare-different-as-med
confederation id
Syntax confederation id as-number
undo confederation id
View BGP view
Parameter as-number: The ID of BGP AS confederation. It is equal to the AS number which
contains the AS numbers of multiple sub-ASs. The range is 1 to 65,535.
Description Use the confederation id command to configure confederation identifier.
Use the undo confederation id command to cancel the BGP confederation
specified by the as-number argument.
By default, no confederation ID is configured.
Confederation can be adopted to solve the problem of too many IBGP full
connections in a large AS domain. The solution is, first dividing the AS domain into
several smaller sub-ASs, and each sub-ASs remains full-connected. These sub-ASs
form a confederation. Key BGP attributes of the route, such as next hop, MED,
local preference, are not discarded across each sub-ASs. The sub-ASs still look like
a whole from the point of view of a confederation although these sub-ASs have
EBGP relations. This can assure the integrality of the former AS domain, and ease
the problem of too many connections in the domain
Related command: confederation nonstandard, confederation peer-as.
Example # Confederation 9 consists of four sub-ASs, namely, 38, 39, 40, and 41. Here, the
peer 10.1.1.1 is an internal member of the AS confederation while the peer
200.1.1.1 is an external member of the AS confederation. For external members,
Confederation 9 is a unified AS domain. The following gives an example of the
configuration of AS 41.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 41
[SW7750-bgp] confederation id 9
[SW7750-bgp] confederation peer-as 38 39 40
[SW7750-bgp] group Confed38 external
[SW7750-bgp] peer Confed38 as-number 38
[SW7750-bgp] peer 10.1.1.1 group Confed 38
[SW7750-bgp] group Remote98 external
[SW7750-bgp] peer Remote98 as-number 98
[SW7750-bgp] peer 200.1.1.1 group Remote98
confederation nonstandard 427
confederation nonstandard
Syntax confederation { nonstandard | standard1965 | standard3065 }
undo confederation { nonstandard | standard1965 | standard3065 }
View BGP view.
Parameter None
Description Use the confederation { nonstandard | standard1965 | standard3065 }
command to configure the standard type of confederation.
Use the undo confederation { nonstandard | standard1965 | standard3065 }
command to cancel the configuration.
By default, the configured confederations are in compliance with RFC1965.
For the communication with nonstandard devices, you must execute the
confederation nonstandard command on all the 3Com routers in the
confederation.
Related command: confederation id and confederation peer-as.
Example # AS100 contains routers following nonstandard, which is composed of two
sub-ASs, 64000 and 65000.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 64000
[SW7750-bgp] confederation id 100
[SW7750-bgp] confederation peer-as 65000
[SW7750-bgp] confederation nonstandard
confederation peer-as
Syntax confederation peer-as as-number-list
undo confederation peer-as [ as-number-list ]
View BGP view
Parameter as-number-list: List of sub-AS numbers. A maximum of 32 sub-ASs can be
configured for a confederation in the command.
Description Use the confederation peer-as command to configure a confederation
consisting of which Sub-ASs.
Use the undo confederation peer-as command to delete the specified Sub-AS
in the confederation.
428 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
By default, no autonomous system is configured as a member of the
confederation.
Before this command is performed, the confederation ID should be configured by
using the confederation id command. Otherwise this configuration is invalid. The
configured ASs in this command are inside the confederation and each AS uses
fully meshed network. The confederation appears as a single AS to the routers
outside it.
Related command: confederation nonstandard and confederation id.
Example # Configure the confederation contains AS 2001 and 2002.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] confederation peer-as 2000 2001
dampening
Syntax dampening [ half-life-reachable half-life-unreachable reuse suppress ceiling ] [
route-policy route-policy-name ]
undo dampening
View BGP view
Parameter half-life-reachable: Semi-dampening of a reachable route, in the range of 1 to 45
minutes. The default value is 15 minutes.
half-life-unreachable: Semi-dampening of an unreachable, in the range of 1 to 45
minutes. The default value is 15 minutes.
reuse: Threshold, in seconds, for disabling route suppression. When the penalty
value is below this threshold, the route will be reused. The range is 1 to 20,000.
The default value is 750.
suppress: Threshold, in seconds, for enabling route suppression. When the penalty
value is above the threshold, the route is suppressed. The range is 1 to 20,000.
The default value is 2,000.
ceiling: Upper penalty threshold in seconds, that is, the penalty value stops
increasing when it reaches the upper threshold. The range is 1001 to 20,000. The
default value is 16,000.
route-policy-name: Name of a route policy, in the range of 1 to 19 characters.
If no value is specified for the arguments, their default values will take effect. The
half-life-reachable, half-life-unreachable, reuse, suppress, and ceiling arguments
are independent of each other.. Therefore, if you specify a value for any of these
arguments, you must specify a value for all the others.
default local-preference 429
Description Use the dampening command to make BGP route attenuation valid or modify
various BGP route attenuation parameters.
Use the undo dampening command to make the characteristics invalid.
By default, no route attenuation is configured.
Related command: reset bgp dampening, reset bgp flap-info, display bgp routing-table
dampened, and display bgp routing-table flap-info.
Example # Configure BGP route dampening parameters.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] dampening 15 15 1000 2000 10000
default local-preference
Syntax default local-preference value
undo default local-preference
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter value: Default local preference to be configured. The range is 0 to 4294967295.
By default, its value is 100.
Description Use the default local-preference command to configure the default local
preference.
Use the undo default local-preference command to restore the default value.
Configuring different local preferences will affect BGP routing selection.
Example <SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] default local-preference 180
default med
Syntax default med med-value
undo default med
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
430 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter med-value: Specified MED value, in the range of 0 to 4294967295. The default
med-value is "0".
Description Use the default med command to configure the default MED value of the
system.
Use the undo default med command to restore the default MED value of the
system.
The multi-exit discriminator (MED) is an external route metric. Different from the
local preference, the MED is exchanged between autonomous systems. After the
MED enters an autonomous system, it will not be sent out of this autonomous
system. The MED attribute is used to select the optimal route, that is, the route
with a smaller MED value is selected. When a router running the BGP obtains
routes with the same destination address but different next hops through different
external peers, the route selection will be based on the MED value. In the case that
all other conditions are the same, the system first selects the route with the smaller
MED value as an external route of the autonomous system.
Example # Set the MED value to "25"..
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750-bgp] default med 25
display bgp group
Syntax display bgp [ multicast ] group [ group-name ]
View Any view
Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
group-name: Name of a peer group, a string of 1 to 47 alphanumeric characters.
Description Use the display bgp group command to view the information of peer groups.
Example # Display the information of the peer group aaa.
<SW7750> display bgp group aaa
Group : aaa type : external
as-number : 200
members in this group :
10.1.1.1 11.1.1.1
configuration within the group :
no export policy route-policy
no export policy filter-policy
no export policy acl
no export policy ip-prefix
no import policy route-policy
no import policy filter-policy
no import policy acl
display bgp network 431
no import policy ip-prefix
no default route produce
Table 71 Description on fields of the display bgp group command
Field Description
Group Name of peer group
type Type of peer group: IBGP or EBGP
as-number AS number of peer group
members in this group Members in this peer group
route-policy Name of configured route policy
filter-policy Configured export and import route filter for BGP
acl Configured access control list
ip-prefix Configured IP address prefix list
default route produce Whether or not to advertise default routing information
display bgp network
Syntax display bgp [ multicast ] network
View Any view
Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
Description Use the display bgp network command to view the routing information that
has been configured.
Example # Display the routing information that has been configured.
<SW7750> display bgp network
Network Mask Route-policy
---------------------------------------------------------
168.10.24.0 255.255.255.0 None
10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 None
Table 72 Description on fields of the display bgp network command
Field Description
Network Network address
Mask Mask
Route-policy Configured route policy
display bgp paths
Syntax display bgp paths as-regular-expression
View Any view
Parameter as-regular-expression: Matched AS path regular expression.
432 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the display bgp paths command to view the information about AS paths
Example # Display the information about the AS paths.
<SW7750> display bgp paths 500
Id Hash-index References Aggregator Origin As-Path
---------------------------------------------------
153 80 100 <null> IGP 500 {500,400,600}
Table 73 Description on fields of the display bgp paths command
Field Description
Id Value of sequence number
Hash-Index Value of Hash-index
References Number of routes with reference
Aggregator Mask length of aggregate route
Origin Origin attribute of route, which indicates that the route updates its origin relative
to the route originating it from AS. It has three optional values:
IGP The route belongs to inside of AS. BGP treats aggregate route and the
route defined by the command network as inside of AS, and origin type
as IGP.
EGP The route is learned from exterior gateway protocol (EGP).
INC Short for INCOMPLETE: indicates that the original source of the route
information is unknown (learned by other methods). BGP sets the origin
of the route imported through other IGP protocols as INCOMPLETE
As-path AS-path attribute of route, which records all AS areas that the route passes.
With it, route loop can be avoided
display bgp peer
Syntax display bgp [ multicast ] peer [ ip-address [ verbose ] ]
display bgp [ multicast ] peer [ verbose ]
View Any view
Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
ip-address: IP address of the peer to be displayed, in dotted decimal notation.
verbose: Displays detailed information of the specified peer.
Description Use the display bgp peer command to display the information about the
specified BGP peer.
Example # Display detailed information of the peer 10.110.25.20.
<SW7750> display bgp peer 10.110.25.20 verbose
Peer: 10.110.25.20 Local: Unspecified
Type: External
State: Idle Flags: <Idled>
Last State: NoState Last Event: NoEvent
Last Error: None
display bgp routing-table 433
Options: <>
Configuration within the peer :
no export policy route-policy
no export policy ip-prefix
no export policy filter-policy
no export policy acl
no import policy route-policy
no import policy ip-prefix
no import policy filter-policy
no import policy acl
no default route produce
Table 74 Description on fields of the display bgp peer command
Field Description
Peer IP address of peer and port number used by the peer to establish TCP
connection
Local IP address and port number used to establish TCP connection of local end
Type Type of peer: Internal for IBGP, and External for EBGP
State State of peer
Flags Flags of peer
Last State Last state before entering current state
Last Event Last event of neighbor state machine
Last Error Last error of neighbor state machine
Options Options
display bgp routing-table
Syntax display bgp [ multicast ] routing-table [ ip-address [ mask ] ]
View Any view
Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
ip-address: Destination of the network, in dotted decimal notation.
mask: Mask of the network.
Description Use the display bgp routing-table command to display all the BGP routing
information.
Example # Display all the BGP routing information.
<SW7750> display bgp routing-table
Flags: # - valid ^ - active I - internal
D - damped H - history S - aggregate suppressed
Dest/Mask Next-hop Med Local-pref Origin As-path
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
#^ 129.1.1.0/24 5.5.5.5 IGP 600
#^ 129.1.2.0/24 5.5.5.5 IGP 600
#^ 129.1.3.0/24 5.5.5.5 IGP 600
434 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
#^ 129.1.4.0/24 5.5.5.5 IGP 600
#^ 129.1.5.0/24 5.5.5.5 IGP 600
#^ 129.1.6.0/24 5.5.5.5 IGP 600
#^ 129.1.7.0/24 5.5.5.5 IGP 600
#^ 129.1.8.0/24 5.5.5.5 IGP 600
#^ 129.1.9.0/24 5.5.5.5 IGP 600
#^ 129.1.10.0/24 5.5.5.5 IGP 600
Routes total: 10
Table 75 Description on fields of the display bgp routing-table command
Field Description
Flags Status code:
# - valid (valid route)
^ - active (selected optimal route)
I - internal (IBGP route)
D - damped (attenuation dampened)
H - history (history record)
S - aggregate suppressed (aggregation suppressed)
Dest/Mask Destination address/mask
Next Hop IP address of the next hop
Med Value of the MULTI_EXIT_DISC attribute, which ranges from 0 to 4294967295
Local-Pref Local preference, which ranges from 0 to 4294967295
Origin Origin attribute of a route, which indicates that the route updates its origin
relative to the route originating it from the AS. It has three optional values:
IGP The route is inside the AS. BGP treats the aggregation route and the route
defined by the network command inside AS, and the origin type as IGP.
EGP The route is learned from exterior gateway protocol (EGP).
INC Short for INCOMPLETE: indicates that the original source of the route
information is unknown (learned by other methods). BGP sets the origin of
the route imported through other IGP protocols as INCOMPLETE
As-path AS-path attribute of a route, which records all AS areas that the route passes to
void route loop.
display bgp routing-table as-path-acl
Syntax display bgp [ multicast ] routing-table as-path-acl acl-number
View Any view
Parameter acl-number: Matched AS path list number, in the range of 1 to 199.
multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
Description Use the display bgp routing-table as-path-acl command to view routes that
match an as-path acl.
Example # Display routes that match as-path-acl 1.
<SW7750> display bgp routing-table as-path-acl 1
Flags: # - valid ^ - active I - internal
display bgp routing-table cidr 435
D - damped H - history S - aggregate suppressed
Dest/Mask Next-Hop Med Local-pref Origin As-path
--------------------------------------------------------------------
#^ 1.1.1.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
#^ 1.1.2.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
#^ 1.1.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
#^ 2.2.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
#^ 4.4.4.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
#^ 9.9.9.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
#^ 10.10.10.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
#^ 22.1.0.0/16 200.1.7.2 100 INC 200
# 88.1.0.0/16 60 0.0.0.0 IGP
Table 76 Description on fields of the display bgp routing-table as-path-acl command
Field Description
Dest/Mask Destination address/Mask
Pref Preference
Nexthop IP address of next hop
Med MULTI_EXIT_DISC attribute value
Local-pref Local preference
Origin Origin attribute of route, which indicates that the route updates its origin relative
to the route originating it from AS. It has three optional values:
IGP The route belongs to inside of AS. BGP treats aggregate route and the
route defined by the command network as inside of AS, and origin type
as IGP.
EGP The route is learned from exterior gateway protocol (EGP).
INC Short for INCOMPLETE: indicates that the original source of the route
information is unknown (learned by other methods). BGP sets the origin of
the route imported through other IGP protocols as INCOMPLETE
As-path AS-path attribute of route, which records all AS areas that the route passes. With
it, route loop can be avoided
display bgp routing-table cidr
Syntax display bgp [ multicast ] routing-table cidr
View Any view
Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
Description Use the display bgp routing-table cidr command to view the routing
information about the non-natural mask (namely the classless inter-domain
routing, CIDR).
Example # Display BGP CIDR routing information.
<SW7750> display bgp routing-table cidr
Flags: # - valid ^ - active I - internal
D - damped H - history S - aggregate suppressed
Dest/Mask Next-Hop Med Local-pref Origin As-path
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
436 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
#^ 22.1.0.0/16 200.1.7.2 30 100 INC 200
# 88.1.0.0/16 0.0.0.0 30 IGP
For detailed description of the fields in the output information, see Table 75.
display bgp routing-table community
Syntax display bgp [ multicast ] routing-table community [ aa:nn ]&<1-13> [
no-export-subconfed | no-advertise | no-export ]* [ whole-match ]
View Any view
Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
aa:nn: Community number. &<1-13> means that you need to provide at least one
and can provide up to 13 community numbers.
no-export-subconfed: Specifies not to export a route to the outside of the local
AS or to other sub-ASs in the confederation after the route is received.
no-advertise: Specifies not to advertise a route to other BGP peers after the route
is received.
no-export: Specifies not to export a route to the outside of the local AS after the
route is received. If the confederation is used, the router cannot be exported to the
outside of the confederation, but can be exported to other sub-ASs in the
confederation.
whole-match: Displays the exactly matched routes.
Description Use the display bgp routing-table community command to view the routing
information related to the specified BGP community number in the routing table.
Example # Display the routing information matching BGP community number 11:22.
<SW7750> display bgp routing-table community 11:22
Flags: # - valid ^ - active I - internal
D - damped H - history S - aggregate suppressed
Dest/Mask Next-Hop Med Local-pref Origin As-path
-------------------------------------------------------------------
#^ 1.0.0.0/8 172.10.0.2 100 IGP
#^ 2.0.0.0/8 172.10.0.2 100 IGP
For detailed description of the fields in the output information, see Table 75.
display bgp routing-table community-list
Syntax display bgp [ multicast ] routing-table community-list community-list-number
[ whole-match ]
display bgp routing-table dampened 437
View Any view
Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
community-list-number: Community list number, in the range of 1 to 999.
whole-match: Displays the exactly matched routes.
Description Use the display bgp routing-table community-list command to view the
routing information matching the specified BGP community list.
Example # Display the routing information matching BGP community list 1.
<SW7750> display bgp routing-table community-list 1
Flags: # - valid ^ - active I - internal
D - damped H - history S - aggregate suppressed
Destination/Mask Next-hop Med Local-Pref Origin As-Path
-------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
1.1.2.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
1.1.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
2.2.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
4.4.4.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
9.9.9.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
10.10.10.0/24 10.10.10.2 0 IGP
10.10.10.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
For detailed description of the fields in the output information, see Table 75.
display bgp routing-table dampened
Syntax display bgp routing-table dampened
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display bgp routing-table dampened command to display BGP
dampened routes.
Example # Display BGP dampened routes.
<SW7750> display bgp routing-table dampened
Flags: # - valid ^ - active I - internal
D - damped H - history S - aggregate suppressed
Dest/Mask Source Damping-limit Origin As-path
-----------------------------------------------------------------
#D 11.1.0.0 133.1.1.2 1:20:00 IGP 200
438 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 77 Field descriptions of the display bgp routing-table dampened command
Field Description
Flags Status code:
# - valid (valid route)
^ - active (optimal route selected)
I - internal (IBGP route)
D - damped
H - history
S - aggregate suppressed
B - balance (load balance)
#D Valid and dampened route
Dest/Mask The route to this network segment is dampened.
Source Next hop of the route
Damping-limit Time when damping is invalid, that is, time when the route can be reused.
Origin The ORIGIN attribute of the route, which indicates the routing update
origination of the route relative to the AS the route sourced from. It can be
one of the three value:
IGP This is an AS interior route. BGP regards both aggregated routes and
routes defined by the network command as AS interior routes and set
their origin type to IGP.
EGP This route is learned from EGP (exterior gateway protocol).
INC INCOMPLETE: indicates the route is obtained from an unknown source
(that is, learned from a different source). BGP set the origin of the
routes imported from other IGP protocols to INCOMPLETE
As-path AS_PATH attribute of the route, which records all the ASs the route passes
through and can be used to avoid route ring.
display bgp routing-table different-origin-as
Syntax Display bgp [ multicast ] routing-table different-origin-as
View Any view
Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
Description Use the display bgp routing-table different-origin-as command to display
routes that have different source autonomous systems.
Example # Display the routes that have different source ASs.
<SW7750> display bgp routing-table different-origin-as
Flags: # - valid ^ - active I - internal
D - damped H - history S - aggregate suppressed
Destination/Mask Next-hop Med Local-Pref Origin As-Path
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.10.10.0/24 10.10.10.2 0 IGP
10.10.10.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
display bgp routing-table flap-info 439
For detailed description of the fields in the output information, see Table 75.
display bgp routing-table flap-info
Syntax display bgp routing-table flap-info [ { regular-expression
as-regular-expression } | { as-path-acl acl-number } | { network-address [ mask [
longer-match ] ] } ]
View Any view
Parameter as-regular-expression: Route flap-info matching AS path regular expression.
acl-number: Number of the specified AS path to be matched, in the range of 1 to
199.
network-address: Network IP address related to the flap-info to be shown
mask: Network mask, in dotted decimal notation.
longer-match: Displays the flap-info of the route that has a mask longer than
that specified by the network-address mask argument.
Description Use the display bgp routing-table flap-info command to display BGP
flap-info.
Example # Display BGP flap-info.
<SW7750> display bgp routing-table flap-info
Flags: # - valid ^ - active I - internal
D - damped H - history S - aggregate suppressed
Dest/Mask Source Keepup-time Damping-limit Flap-times Origin As-path
--------------------------------------------------------------------
#D 11.1.0.0/16 133.1.1.2 48 1:20:30 4 IGP 200
Table 78 Description on fields of the display bgp routing-table flap-info command
Field Description
Flags State flags:
# - valid (valid)
^ - active (selected)
D - damped (discarded)
H - history (history)
I - internal (interior gateway protocol)
S - aggregate suppressed (suppressed)
B - balance (load balance)
#D The valid and damped route
Dest/Mask The dampened route to the destination network 11.1.0.0
Source The nexthop of the route
Keepup-time The time that route damping has continued
Damping-limit The time before dampening turns invalid and the route can be reused.
440 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 78 Description on fields of the display bgp routing-table flap-info command
Field Description
Flap-times The times of the route flap
Origin Origin attribute of route, which indicates that the route updates its origin
relative to the route originating it from AS. It has three optional values:
IGP The route belongs to inside of AS. BGP treats aggregate route and the
route defined by the command network as inside of AS, and origin
type as IGP.
EGP The route is learned from exterior gateway protocol (EGP).
INC Short for INCOMPLETE: indicates that the original source of the route
information is unknown (learned by other methods). BGP sets the
origin of the route imported through other IGP protocols as
INCOMPLETE
As-path AS-path attribute of route, which records all AS areas that the route passes.
With it, route loop can be avoided
display bgp routing-table peer
Syntax display bgp [ multicast ] routing-table peer ip-address { advertised | received
} [ network-address [ mask ] | statistic ]
View Any view
Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
ip -address: Specifies the peer to be displayed, in dotted decimal notation.
advertised: Routing information advertised by the specified peer.
received: Routing information the specified peer received.
network-address mask : IP address and address mask of destination network, in
dotted decimal notation.
statistic: Specifies to display the statistic routing information of peer.
Description Use the display bgp routing-table peer command to view the routing
information the specified BGP peer advertised or received.
Example # Display the routing information advertised by BGP peer 1.1.1.2.
<SW7750> display bgp routing table peer 1.1.1.2 advertised
Dest/Mask Next-hop Med Local-pref Origin As-path
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Appendant Flags: @ - Queued
1.1.1.0/24 1.1.1.1 0 100 INC
Here, Appendant Flags indicates the appended flag, @ the route to be sent, ! the
reachable route, and ~ to cancel route. For detailed description of the fields in the
output information, see Table 75.
display bgp routing-table regular-expression 441
display bgp routing-table regular-expression
Syntax display bgp [ multicast ] routing-table regular-expression
as-regular-expression
View Any view
Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
as-regular-expression: Matched AS regular expression.
Description Use the display bgp routing-table regular-expression command to view the
routing information matching the specified AS regular expression
Example # Display the routing information matched with ^200$.
<SW7750> display bgp routing-table regular-expression ^200$
Flags: # - valid ^ - active I - internal
D - damped H - history S - aggregate suppressed
Dest/Mask Next-hop Med Local-Pref Origin AS-Path
--------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.1.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
1.1.2.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
1.1.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
2.2.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
4.4.4.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
9.9.9.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200
10.10.10.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200
For detailed description of the fields in the output information, see Table 75.
display bgp routing-table statistic
Syntax display bgp [ multicast ] routing-table statistic
View Any view
Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
Description Use the display bgp routing-table statistic command to view the statistics of
BGP routing information.
Example # Display the statistics of BGP routing information.
<SW7750> display bgp routing-table statistic
Routes total: 4
442 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
filter-policy export
Syntax filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol [
process-id ] ]
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol [
process-id ] ]
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter acl-number: Number of IP access control list.
ip-prefix-name: Name of ip prefix list, containing 1 to 19 characters.
protocol: Routing protocol, specifying a protocol whose routing information is
filtered. Currently, the routing protocols includes direct, ospf, ospf-ase,
ospf-nssa, rip, isis, and static.
process-id: Routing protocol process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. This
argument is available only when the protocol is ospf, ospf-ase, or ospf-nssa.
Description Use the filter-policy export command to filter the advertised routes and only
the routes passing the filter can be advertised by BGP.
Use the undo filter-policy export command to cancel the filtration to the
advertised routes.
By default, filtration to the received routing information is not configured.
If a value is specified for the protocol argument, only the imported route
generated by the specified protocol is filtered and the imported routes generated
by other protocols are not affected. If no value is specified for the protocol
argument, the imported route generated by any protocol will be filtered.
Example # Use ACL 2000 to filter the routing information advertised by BGP.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] filter-policy 2000 export
filter-policy import
Syntax filter-policy gateway ip-prefix-name import
undo filter-policy gateway ip-prefix-name import
filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } import
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } import
group 443
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter acl-number: Number of IP access control list, in the range of 2000 to 3999.
ip-prefix-name: Name of address prefix list, containing 1 to 19 characters.
Description Use the filter-policy gateway import command to filter the learned routing
information advertised by the peer with the specified address.
Use the undo filter-policy gateway import command to cancel the filtration
to the routing information advertised by the peer with specified address.
Use the filter-policy import command to filter the received global routing
information. Use the undo filter-policy import command to remove the
filtration to the received global routing information.
By default, filtration to the received routing information is not configured.
This command can be used to filter the routes received by BGP and determines
whether to add the routes to the BGP routing table.
Example # Use ACL 2000 to filter all imported BGP routes.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] filter-policy 2000 import
group
Syntax group group-name [ internal | external ]
undo group group-name
View BGP view
Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, an alphanumeric string of 1 to 47
characters. It means only locally.
internal: Creates an IBGP peer group.
external: Creates an EBGP peer group, including other sub-ASs in the
confederation.
Description Use the group group-name command to configure a peer group.
Use the undo group group-name command to cancel the configuration.
If no parameter is specified with the group command, an IBGP peer group is
created.
444 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
The basic configurations of members in a peer group must be the same as those
of the peer group. The BGP peer cannot exist independently, and it must belong to
a peer group. Therefore, when configuring a BGP peer, create a peer group first
and then add the BGP peer to the group.
Routing update policies of peer members must be the same as those of the peer
group. However, entry policies can be different.
Example # Create a BGP group named test.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] group test
import-route
Syntax import-route protocol [ process-id ] [ med med-value | route-policy
route-policy-name ]*
undo import-route protocol [ process-id ]
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter protocol: Redistributes routes from the routing protocol, which can be direct,
ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa, rip, isis or static at present.
process-id: Specific process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. This argument is valid
only when the protocol argument is ospf, ospf-ase, or ospf-nssa.
med med-value: MED value of redistributed routes, in the range of 0 to
4294967295.
Route-policy-name: Name of a route policy used for filtering redistributed routes,
containing 1 to 19 characters.
Description Use the import-route command to enable route redistribution from another
routing protocol.
Use the undo import-route command to disable route redistribution from
another routing protocol.
By default, no route redistribution is configured.
Example # Redistribute routes from RIP.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] import-route rip
ipv4-family 445
ipv4-family
Syntax ipv4-family multicast
undo ipv4-family multicast
View BGP view
Description Use the ipv4-family multicast command to enter IPv4 multicast address family
view.
Use the undo ipv4-family multicast command to remove all the configuration
performed in IPv4 multicast address family view.
Example # Enter IPv4 multicast address family view.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] ipv4-family multicast
[SW7750-bgp-af-mul]
network
Syntax network network-address [ mask ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]
undo network network-address [ mask ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter network-address: IP address of the destination network segment, in dotted
decimal notation.
mask: Subnet mask, in dotted decimal notation.
route-policy-name: Route policy used for the advertised route, containing 1 to 19
characters.
Description Use the network command to advertise the network segment route to the BGP
routing table.
Use the undo network command to cancel the existing configuration.
By default, the BGP does not advertise any network segment routes.
Example # Advertise routes to the network segment 10.0.0.0/16.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] network 10.0.0.0 255.255.0.0
446 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
peer advertise-community
Syntax peer group-name advertise-community
undo peer group-name advertise-community
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter group-name: Name of a peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
Description Use the peer advertise-community command to enable the transmission of
the community attribute to a peer group.
Use the undo peer advertise-community command to cancel the existing
configuration.
By default, the community attribute is not transmitted to any peer group.
Related command: ip community-list and apply community.
Example # Transmit the community attribute to the peer group named test.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test advertise-community
peer allow-as-loop
Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } allow-as-loop [ number ]
undo peer { group-name | ip-address } allow-as-loop
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter group-name: Name of a peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-address: IP address of the peer, in dotted decimal notation.
number: Times of repeating the local AS number, in the range of 1 to 10.
Description Use the peer allow-as-loop command to allow the local AS number to appear
in the AS_Path attribute of the received route and configure the repeated times.
Use the undo peer allow-as-loop command to cancel the function.
Related command: display current-configuration, display bgp routing-table peer, and display
bgp routing-table group.
peer as-number 447
Example # Set the times of repeating the local AS that learns routes from 1.1.1.1 to 2.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer 1.1.1.1 allow-as-loop 2
peer as-number
Syntax peer group-name as-number as-number
undo peer group-name as-number
View BGP view
Parameter group-name: Name of a peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
as-number: AS number of the peer or peer group, in the range of 1 to 65,535.
Description Use the peer as-number command to configure the AS number of a peer group.
Use the undo peer as-number command to delete the AS number of a peer
group.
By default, no AS number is configured for a peer group.
Example # Set the AS number for the peer named test to 100.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test as-number 100
peer as-path-acl export
Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } as-path-acl acl-number export
undo peer { group-name | ip-address } as-path-acl acl-number export
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-address: IP address of a peer.
acl-number: AS path ACL number, in the range of 1 to 199.
export: Specifies to filter the advertised routes.
Description Use the peer as-path-acl export command to configure filtering Policy of BGP
advertised routes based on AS path list.
448 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo peer as-path-acl command to cancel the existing configuration.
By default, no AS path ACL is configured for a peer group.
You can use the peer as-path-acl export command on a peer group. In the peer
as-path-acl export command, the acl-number argument is the AS path list
number. It is configured by using the ip as-path-acl command, instead of the acl
command.
Related command: peer as-path-acl import and ip as-path-acl.
Example # Filter routes exported to the peer group (named test) based on AS path ACL 1.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test as-path-acl 1 export
peer as-path-acl import
Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } as-path-acl acl-number import
undo peer { group-name | ip-address } as-path-acl acl-number import
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-address: IP address of the peer, in dotted decimal notation.
acl-number: AS path list number, in the range of 1 to 199.
import: Applies the AS path list in filtering the received routes.
Description Use the peer as-path-acl import command to configure filtering Policy of BGP
received routes based on AS path list.
Use the undo peer as-path-acl import command to cancel the existing
configuration.
By default, the peer/peer group has no AS path list.
Related command: peer as-path-acl export and ip as-path-acl
Example # Apply AS path ACL 1 in the peer group named test to filter BGP received routes.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test as-path-acl 1 import
peer connect-interface 449
peer connect-interface
Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } connect-interface interface-type
interface-number
undo peer { group-name | ip-address } connect-interface
View BGP view
Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-address: IP address of the peer, in dotted decimal notation.
interface-type interface-num: Interface type and interface number.
Description Use the peer connect-interface command to specify the source interface of a
route update packet.
Use the undo peer connect-interface command to restore the best source
interface.
By default, BGP uses the interface directly connected to the peer as the source
interface of route update packets.
Generally, BGP uses the optimal source interface for route update packets. In order
for the system to be able to send route update packets in the case that this
interface is faulty, you can configure the loopback interface as the source interface
of route update packets.
Example # Specify the source interface that sends route update packets to the peer group
named test as Loopback 0.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test connect-interface loopback 0
peer default-route-advertise
Syntax peer group-name default-route-advertise
undo peer group-name default-route-advertise
View BGP view
Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
Description Use the peer default-route-advertise command to send the default route to
the peer group.
450 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo peer default-route-advertise command to cancel the sending
of the default route to the peer group.
By default, the default route is not sent to the peer group.
For this command, no default route needs to exist in the routing table. A default
route is sent unconditionally to a peer/peer group with the next hop as itself.
Example # Configure a peer group named test to generate a default route.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test default-route-advertise
peer description
Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } description description-text
undo peer { group-name | ip-address } description
View BGP view
Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-address: IP address of the peer, in dotted decimal notation.
description-text: Description information configured, , containing 1 to 79
characters.
Description Use the peer description command to configure the description information of
the peer/peer group.
Use the undo peer description command to cancel the description information
of the peer/peer group.
By default, no description information is configured for peers/peer group.
You need to create a peer group before you can configure the description of the
peer group.
Related command: display current-configuration, display bgp peer, and display bgp
routing-table group.
Example # Configure the description information of an existing peer group named group1
as ISP1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer group1 description ISP1
peer ebgp-max-hop 451
peer ebgp-max-hop
Syntax peer group-name ebgp-max-hop [ hop-count ]
undo peer group-name ebgp-max-hop
View BGP view
Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
hop-count: Maximum hop value, in the range of 1 to 255. By default, the value is
64.
Description Use the peer ebgp-max-hop command to establish EBGP connection with the
peer on indirectly connected network.
Use the undo peer ebgp-max-hop command to cancel the existing
configuration.
By default, it is not allowed to establish any EBGP connection with a peer on an
indirectly connected network.
By setting hop-count, you can also configure the maximum hop value of an EBGP
connection.
Example # Allow the establishment of an EBGP connection with the peer group named test
indirectly connected.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test ebgp-max-hop
peer enable
Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } enable
undo peer { group-name | ip-address } enable
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-address: IP address of the peer, in dotted decimal notation.
Description Use the peer enable command to enable the specified peer/peer group.
Use the undo peer enable command to disable the specified peer/peer group.
By default, BGP peer/peer group is enabled.
452 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
If the specified peer/peer group is disabled, the router will not exchange routing
information with the specified peer/peer group.
Example # Disable the specified peer 18.10.0.9. After the configuration, the local router
does not exchange BGP routing information with the peer 18.10.0.9..
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer 18.10.0.9 group group1
[SW7750-bgp] undo peer 18.10.0.9 enable
peer filter-policy export
Syntax peer group-name filter-policy acl-number export
undo peer group-name filter-policy acl-number export
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
acl-number: Basic or advanced ACL number, ranging from 2000 to 3999.
export: Applies a filtering policy on advertised routes. It applies to a peer group
only.
Description Use the peer filter-policy export command to configure the filter-policy list of
routes advertised by a peer group.
Use the undo peer filter-policy export command to cancel the existing
configuration.
By default, a peer/peer group has no access control list (acl).
You can configure the peer filter-policy export command on a peer group only.
Related command: acl and peer filter-policy import.
Example # Configure to filter the routes advertised by the peer group named test by using
ACL 2000..
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test filter-policy 2000 export
peer filter-policy import
Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } filter-policy acl-number import
peer group 453
undo peer { group-name | ip-address } filter-policy acl-number import
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-address: IP address of the peer, in dotted decimal notation.
acl-number: Basic or advanced ACL number, ranging from 2000 to 3999.
Description Use the peer filter-policy import command to configure the filter-policy list of
the routes received by a peer/peer group.
Use the undo peer filter-policy import command to cancel the existing
configuration.
By default, a peer/peer group has no access control list (acl).
Related command: peer filter-policy export, ip as-path-acl, peer as-path-acl export and peer
as-path-acl import.
Example # Set the filter-policy list of a peer group named test.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test filter-policy 2000 import
peer group
Syntax peer ip-address group group-name [ as-number as-number ]
undo peer ip-address
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-address: IP address of the peer, in dotted decimal notation.
as-number: Peer AS number of the peer/peer group, in the range of 1 to 65,535.
Description Use the peer group command to add a peer to the existing peer group.
Use the undo peer ip-address command to delete a peer.
When adding a peer to a EBGP peer group without AS number, you should also
specify the peer’s AS number. While adding a peer to a IBGP peer group or to a
EBGP peer group with AS number, you need not specify the AS number for the
peer.
454 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Add a peer to the peer group test.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] group test external
[SW7750-bgp] peer test as-number 2004
[SW7750-bgp] peer 10.1.1.1 group test
peer ip-prefix export
Syntax peer group-name ip-prefix ip-prefix-name export
undo peer group-name ip-prefix ip-prefix-name export
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter group-name: Name of peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-prefix-name: Name of the specified ip-prefix, containing 1 to 19 characters.
Description Use the peer ip-prefix export command to configure the route filtering policy
of routes advertised by the peer group based on the ip-prefix.
Use the undo peer ip-prefix export command to cancel the route filtering
policy of the peer/peer group based on the ip-prefix.
By default, the route filtering policy of the peer group is not specified.
Related command: ip ip-prefix, peer ip-prefix import.
Example # Configure the route filtering policy of the peer group based on the ip-prefix 1.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer group1 ip-prefix list1 export
peer ip-prefix import
Syntax peer { group-name | ip-addess } ip-prefix ip-prefix-name import
undo peer { group-name | ip-addess } ip-prefix ip-prefix-name import
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter group-name: Name of peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-address: IP address of the peer, in dotted decimal notation.
ip-prefix-name: Name of the specified ip-prefix, containing 1 to 19 characters.
peer next-hop-local 455
Description Use the peer ip-prefix import command to configure the route filtering policy
of routes received by the peer/peer group based on the ip-prefix.
Use the undo peer ip-prefix import command to cancel the route filtering
policy of the peer/peer group based on the ip-prefix.
By default, the route filtering policy of the peer/peer group is not specified.
Related command: ip ip-prefix, peer ip-prefix export.
Example # Configure the route filtering policy of the peer group based on the ip-prefix 1.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer group1 ip-prefix list1 import
peer next-hop-local
Syntax peer group-name next-hop-local
undo peer group-name next-hop-local
View
BGP view
Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
Description Use the peer next-hop-local command to configure the peer group to take its
own address as the next hop when routes are advertised to the peer group..
Use the undo peer next-hop-local command to cancel the existing
configuration.
Example # When BGP distributes the routes to the peer group "test", it will take its own
address as the next hop.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test next-hop-local
peer password
Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } password { cipher | simple } password
undo peer { group-name | ip-address } password
View BGP view
456 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-address: IP address of the peer, in dotted decimal notation.
cipher: Displays the configured password in cipher text mode.
simple: Displays the configured password in simple text mode.
password: Password in character string form with 1 to 16 characters when
parameter simple is configured in the command or in the event of inputting the
password in simple text mode but parameter cipher is configured in the
command; with 24 characters in the event of inputting the password in cipher text
mode when parameter cipher is configured in the command.
Description Use the peer password command to configure MD5 authentication for BGP
during TCP connection setup.
Use the undo peer password command to cancel the configuration.
By default, BGP does not perform MD5 authentication when TCP connection is set
up.
Once MD5 authentication is enabled, both parties involved in the authentication
must be configured with identical authentication modes and passwords.
Otherwise, TCP connection will not be set up because of the failed authentication.
This command is used to configure MD5 authentication for the specific peer only
when the peer group to which the peer belongs is not configured with MD5
authentication. Otherwise, the peer should be consistent with the peer group.
Example # Adopt MD5 authentication on the TCP connection set up between the local
router at 10.1.100.1 and the peer router at 10.1.100.2.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer 10.1.100.2 password simple abc
# Perform the similar configuration on the peer.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer 10.1.100.1 password simple abc
peer public-as-only
Syntax peer group-name public-as-only
undo peer group-name public-as-only
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
peer reflect-client 457
Parameter group-name: Name of a peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
Description Use the peer public-as-only command to configure not to carry the AS number
when transmitting BGP update packets.
Use the undo peer public-as-only command to configure to carry the AS
number when transmitting BGP update packets.
By default, private AS number is carried when transmitting BGP update packets.
Generally, BGP transmits BGP update packets with the AS number (either public
AS number or private AS number). To enable some outbound routers to ignore the
AS number when transmitting update packets, you can configure not to carry the
AS number when transmitting BGP update packets.
Example # Configure not to carry the private AS number when transmitting BGP update
packets to the peer group named test.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test public-as-only
peer reflect-client
Syntax peer group-name reflect-client
undo peer group-name reflect-client
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter group-name: Name of peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
Description Use the peer reflect-client command to configure the local device as a route
reflector and configure a peer/peer group as the route reflector client.
Use the undo peer reflect-client command to cancel the existing
configuration.
By default, no route reflector or client is configured.
This command only applies to peer group.
Related command: reflect between-clients, reflector cluster-id.
Example # Configure the peer group "test" as the route reflector client.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test reflect-client
458 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
peer route-limit
Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } route-limit prefix-number [ [ alert-only |
reconnect reconnect-time ] | percentage-value ] *
undo peer { group-name | ip-address } route-limit
View BGP view
Parameter group-name: Name of peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-address: IP address of the peer, in dotted decimal notation.
prefix-number: Number of the route prefixes to be received by the router, in the
range of 1 to 262,144. If the number of route prefixes received from the specified
peer/peer group exceeds the value of prefix-number, the router is automatically
disconnected from the specified peer/peer group.
alert-only: Specifies to only print alert information and maintain the connection
between the router and the specified peer/peer group if the number of route
prefixes received from the peer/peer group exceeds prefix-number.
reconnect reconnect-time: Sets the interval at which the router reconnects to the
specified peer/peer group. reconnect-time is the interval, in seconds, at which the
router reconnects to the specified peer/peer group. The value of this argument
ranges from 1 to 65,535, with no default.
percentage-value: Threshold value for the router to send a notification (that is, the
router sends a notification when the percentage of the number of route prefixes
received to prefix-number reaches percentage-value). It ranges from 1 to 100 and
defaults to 75.
Description Use the peer route-limit command to set a limit on the number of route
prefixes to be received from the specified peer/peer group.
Use the undo peer route-limit command to cancel the configuration.
By default, there is no limit on the number of route prefixes to be received from a
peer/peer group.
Example # With peer 100.1.1.1 not configured, limit the number of route prefixes to be
received from peer 100.1.1.1 to 10,000
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp]peer 100.1.1.1 route-limit 10000
Warning: No such peer
# With peer 100.1.1.1 configured, limit the number of route prefixes to be
received from peer 100.1.1.1 to 10,000.
[SW7750-bgp]peer 100.1.1.1 route-limit 10000
peer route-policy export 459
# Limit the number of route prefixes to be received from the peer group named
external to 10,000, specifying to print alert information when the number of route
prefixes received from external reaches 10,000 and to print notification
information when this number reaches 8,000.
[SW7750-bgp]peer external route-limit 10000 alert-only 80
# Limit the number of route prefixes to be received from the peer group named
external to 10,000, specifying to reconnect the router to external every 120
seconds and to print notification information when the number of route prefixes
received from external reaches 8,000.
[SW7750-bgp]peer external route-limit 10000 reconnect 120 80
# Limit the number of route prefixes to be received from the peer group named
external to 10,000, specifying to print notification information when this number
reaches 8,000.
[SW7750-bgp]peer external route-limit 10000 80
# Cancel the limit on the number of route prefixes to be received from peer
100.1.1.1.
[SW7750-bgp]undo peer 100.1.1.1 route-limit
peer route-policy export
Syntax peer group-name route-policy route-policy-name export
undo peer group-name route-policy route-policy-name export
View BGP view
Parameter group-name: Name of peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
route-policy-name: The specified Route-policy. The length of route-policy-name
parameter ranges from 1 to 19 character string.
Description Use the peer route-policy export command to assign the Route-policy to the
routes advertised to the peer group.
Use the undo peer route-policy export command to delete the specified
Route-policy.
By default, the peer/peer group has no Route-policy association.
Related command: peer route-policy import.
Example # Apply the Route-policy named test-policy to the route advertised from the peer
group named test.
460 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test route-policy test-policy export
peer route-policy import
Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } route-policy route-policy-name import
undo peer { group-name | ip-address } route-policy route-policy-name import
View BGP view
Parameter group-name: Name of peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-address: IP address of the peer, in dotted decimal notation.
route-policy-name: Specified Route-policy. The length of route-policy-name
parameter ranges from 1 to 19 character string.
Description Use the peer route-policy import command to assign the Route-policy to the
route coming from the peer/peer group.
Use the undo peer route-policy import command to delete the specified
Route-policy.
By default, the peer/peer group has no Route-policy association.
The priority of the ingress routing policy configured for the peer is higher than that
for the peer group.
Related command: peer route-policy export.
Example # Apply the Route-policy named test-policy to the route coming from the
peer/peer group test.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test route-policy test-policy import
peer route-update-interval
Syntax peer group-name route-update-interval seconds
undo peer group-name route-update-interval
View BGP view
Parameter group-name: Peer group name, containing 1 to 47 characters.
peer timer 461
seconds: Minimum interval at which UPDATE packets are sent. It is in the range of
0 to 600 seconds. By default, the advertisement interval is 5 seconds for internal
peer group and 30 seconds for external peer group.
Description Use the peer route-update-interval command to configure the interval at
which the same route update packet is sent to the peer group. .
Use the undo peer route-update-interval command to restore the default
interval.
Example # Configure the interval of the BGP peer group "test" sending the route update
packet as 10 seconds.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test route-update-interval 10
peer timer
Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } timer keep-alive keepalive-interval hold
holdtime-interval
undo peer { group-name | ip-address } timer
View BGP view
Parameter group-name: Name of peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
ip-address: IP address of the peer.
Keepalive-interval: Keepalive timer in seconds. It is in the range of 1 to 65,535 and
defaults to 60 seconds.
Holdtime-interval: Holdtime timer in seconds. It is in the range of 3 to 65,535 and
defaults to 180 seconds.
Description Use the peer timer command to configure the Keepalive and holdtime timers for
a peer/peer group.
Use the undo peer timer command to restore the default value of the timer.
The timer configured by using this command has a higher priority than the one
configured by using the timer command.
Example # Configure Keepalive and Holdtime intervals of the peer group "test".
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] peer test timer keep-alive 60 hold 180
462 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
preference
Syntax preference ebgp-value ibgp-value local-value
undo preference
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter ebgp-value: Preference value for EBGP. It is in the range of 1 to 256 and defaults
to 256.
ibgp-value: Preference value for IBGP routes. It is in the range of 1 to 256 and
defaults to 256.
local-value: Preference value for locally-originated routes. It is in the range of 1 to
256 and defaults to 130.
Description Use the preference command to set preference values for. routes learned from
external peers, routes learned from internal peers, and local-originated routes.
Use the undo preference command to restore the default preference values.
Example # Set the preferences of EBGP, IBGP and locally generated routes to 170.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] preference 170 170 170
reflect between-clients
Syntax reflect between-clients
undo reflect between-clients
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter None
Description Use the reflect between-clients command to configure the between-client
reflection of a route.
Use the undo reflect between-clients command to disable this function.
After a route reflector is configured, it reflects the route of a client to another
client.
By default, the clients of a route reflector are not fully interconnected and the
route is reflected from a client to another client by default via the route reflector. If
the clients are fully interconnected, you do not need to configure route reflection.
reflector cluster-id 463
Related command: reflector cluster-id, and peer reflect-client.
Example # Disable the reflection between clients.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] undo reflect between-clients
reflector cluster-id
Syntax reflector cluster-id cluster-id
undo reflector cluster-id
View BGP view
Parameter cluster-id: Cluster ID of the route reflector, an integer number ranging from 1 to
4,294,967,295, or an IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Description Use the reflector cluster-id command to configure the cluster ID of the route
reflector.
Use the undo reflector cluster-id command to delete the cluster ID of the route
reflector.
By default, each route reflector uses its Router ID as the cluster ID.
Generally, there is only one route reflector in a cluster. In this case, Router ID of the
route reflector is used to identify the cluster. Setting multiple route reflectors
enhances network stability. If multiple route reflectors are in a cluster, use this
command to configure the same cluster ID for all the route reflectors to prevent
route loop.
Related command: reflect between-clients, and peer reflect-client.
Example # A local router is one of the route reflectors in a cluster. Set the cluster ID of the
route reflector as 80.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] reflector cluster-id 80
refresh bgp
Syntax refresh bgp { all | ip-address | group group-name } [ multicast ] { import |
export }
View User view
464 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter all: Refreshes all peers.
ip-address: Refreshes connection with a BGP peer with the specified IP address in
dotted decimal notation.
group-name: Peer group name, containing 1 to 47 characters.
multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
import: Sends a ROUTE-REFRESH packet to the peer, requesting the peer to
refresh the routes.
export: Refreshes routes advertised to the peers.
Description Use the refresh bgp command to manually refresh BGP connections. Refreshing
BGP connections can refresh the BGP routing table without interruption any BGP
connection and apply a new policy.
After a BGP connection is created, only incremental routes are sent. However, in
some cases, such as when BGP routing policy changes, the peer needs to
re-advertise .routes or to be resent routes so that the routes are filtered again
according to the new policy.
Example # Refresh all BGP connections.
<SW7750> refresh bgp all import
reset bgp
Syntax reset bgp { all | ip-address | group group-name }
View User view
Parameter all: Resets all the connections with BGP.
ip-address: Resets connection with a specified BGP peer.
group group-name: Resets the connection with a specified peer group.
Description Use the reset bgp ip-address command to reset the connection of BGP with a
specified BGP peer.
Use the reset bgp all command to reset all the connections with BGP.
Use the reset bgp group group-name command to reset the BGP connection
with a specified peer group.
After a BGP routing policy or protocol configuration changes, resetting the BGP
connection will make the new configured policy take effect immediately.
reset bgp dampening 465
Example # After using the timer command to configure new Keepalive and Holdtime
intervals, you can reset all BGP connections for the new configuration to take
effects immediately.
<SW7750> reset bgp all
reset bgp dampening
Syntax reset bgp dampening [ network-address [ mask ] ]
View User view
Parameter network-address: IP address of a network segment, in dotted decimal notation.
mask: Network mask, in dotted decimal notation.
Description Use the reset bgp dampening command to reset the flapping attenuation
information of a route and release the suppression of a suppressed route.
Related command: dampening, and display bgp routing-table dampened.
Example # Reset the route attenuation information of the specified route.
<SW7750> reset bgp dampening 20.1.0.0 255.255.0.0
reset bgp flap-info
Syntax reset bgp flap-info [ regular-expression as-regular-expression | as-path-acl
acl-number | network-address [ mask ] ]
View User view
Parameter regular-expression as-regular-expression: Resets the flap-info matching the AS
path regular expression.
as-path-acl acl-number: Resets the flap-info consistent with a specified filter list.
The range of the parameter acl-number is 1 to 199.
network-address: Resets the flap-info of a record at this IP address.
mask: Network mask, in dotted decimal notation.
Description Use the reset bgp flap-info command to reset the flap info of a route.
If no value is specified, the flap info of all routes will be reset.
Related command: dampening.
Example # Reset the flap-info of all the routes that go through filter list 1.
466 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> reset bgp flap-info as-path-acl 1
router id
Syntax router id router-id
undo router id
View System view
Parameter router-id: Router ID, in dotted decimal notation.
Description Use the router id command to configure the ID of a BGP router.
Use the undo router id command to cancel the router ID that has been set.
Example # Set the router ID to 10.1.1.3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] router id 10.1.1.3
summary
Syntax summary
undo summary
View BGP view/BGP multicast address family view
Parameter None
Description Use the summary command to configure auto aggregation of sub-network
routes.
Use the undo summary command to disable it.
By default, no auto aggregation of sub-network routes is executed.
After the summary is configured, BGP cannot receive the sub-network routes
imported from the IGP, so the amount of the routing information can be reduced.
Example # Make the auto aggregation of the sub-network routes.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] summary
timer 467
timer
Syntax timer keep-alive keepalive-interval hold holdtime-interval
undo timer
View BGP view
Parameter keepalive-interval: Set the interval time value for keepalive time. The range is 1 to
65,535. By default, its value is 60 seconds.
holdtime-interval: Set the interval time value for hold time. The range is 3 to
65,535. By default, its value is 180 seconds.
Description Use the timer command to configure the Keep-alive and Hold-time timer of BGP.
Use undo timer command to restore the default value of the Keep-alive and
Hold-time of the timer.
Example # Configure the Keep-alive timer as 30 seconds and Hold-time timer as 90
seconds.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] timer keepalive 120 hold 360
undo synchronization
Syntax undo synchronization
View BGP view
Parameter None
Description Use the undo synchronization command to cancel the synchronization of BGP
and IGP.
By default, BGP does not synchronize with IGP.
If the local BGP is not set synchronous with the IGP and the next hop of the
learned BGP route is reachable, the local BGP will add this BGP route into its
routing table immediately after it learns the route, rather than waiting till the IGP
also learns the route.
This command means BGP does not synchronize with IGP in the current system.
You need not configure it because the the Switch 7750 Family does not support
the synchronization of BGP and IGP.
468 CHAPTER 33: BGP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Cancel the synchronization of BGP and IGP.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bgp 100
[SW7750-bgp] undo synchronization
IP ROUTING POLICY CONFIGURATION
34 COMMANDS
n The word "router" covered in the following text represent routers in common
sense and Ethernet switches running a routing protocol. To improve readability,
this will not be mentioned again in this manual.
apply as-path
Syntax apply as-path as-number-list
undo apply as-path
View Route policy view
Parameter as-number-list: AS number list, in the form of as-number&<1-10>. Here,
as-number is an AS number, which ranges from 1 to 65,535, and &<1-10> means
you can input 1 to 10 AS numbers in one command.
Description Use the apply as-path command to add AS number before original AS path in
Router-policy.
Use the undo apply as-path command to remove the added AS number.
By default, AS number is not set.
If the Route-policy matching conditions are met, AS attributes of the transmission
route will be changed by the apply as-path command. A maximum of ten AS
numbers can be added.
Example # Add AS number 200 before the original AS path
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]route-policy 10 permit node 10
[SW7750-route-policy] apply as-path 200
apply community
Syntax apply community { none | [ aa:nn ] &<1-13> [ no-export-subconfed |
no-export | no-advertise ]* [ additive ] }
undo apply community
470 CHAPTER 34: IP ROUTING POLICY CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View Route policy view
Parameter none: No community attribute
aa:nn: Community number. The value ranges of aa and nn are both from 1 to
65,535. &<1-13> means that you need to provide at least one and can provide up
to 13 community numbers.
no-export-subconfed: Specifies not to send matching routes out of
sub-autonomous system.
no-advertise: Specifies not to send matching routes to any peer entities.
no-export: Specifies not to send routes out of sub-autonomous system or
federation but to send to the other sub-autonomous systems in the federation.
additive: Additive community attributes
Description Use the apply community command to set BGP community attributes in
Route-policy.
Use the undo apply community command to cancel the BGP community
attribute setting .
By default, BGP community attributes are not set.
If the Route-policy matching conditions are met, BGP community attributes will be
changed by the apply community command.
Related command: ip community-list, if-match community, route-policy and display bgp
routing-table community.
Example # Create a Route-policy named setcommunity and set its node sequence number
as 16 and matching mode as permit. Enter route policy view and set matching
conditions and execute attribute change command
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] route-policy setcommunity permit node 16
[SW7750-route-policy] if-match as-path 8
[SW7750-route-policy] apply community no-export
apply cost
Syntax apply cost value
undo apply cost
View Route policy view
apply cost-type 471
Parameter value: Route cost value of route information. The value ranges from 0 to
4294967295.
Description Use the apply cost command to configure the route cost value of route
information.
Use the undo apply cost command to cancel the apply statement.
By default, no apply statement is defined.
An apply statement of Route-policy sets the cost of the routes passing the
filtering.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match { acl | ip-prefix }, if-match ip next-hop, if-match
cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip next-hop, apply local-preference,
apply origin, and apply tag.
Example # Define an apply statement. When it is used for setting route information
attribute, it sets the route cost value of route information as 120.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]route-policy policy_10 permit node 12
[SW7750-route-policy] apply cost 120
apply cost-type
Syntax apply cost-type [ internal | external ]
undo apply cost-type
View Route policy view
Parameter internal: Used in BGP, indicates that the IGP cost will be used as the BGP MED
value when BGP peer entity advertises routes to the EBGP peer entity. This
keyword is used only for IS-IS (representing that IS-IS interior cost will be used) and
is invalid for other protocols.
External: This keyword is used only for IS-IS and is invalid for other protocols.
Description Use the apply cost-type command to set the routing cost type of routing
information.
Use the undo apply cost-type command to cancel the setting argument.
By default, routing cost is not set.
Example # Set IGP cost as the BGP MED value.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
472 CHAPTER 34: IP ROUTING POLICY CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
[SW7750]route-policy 10 permit node 10
[SW7750-route-policy] apply cost-type internal
apply ip next-hop
Syntax apply ip next-hop ip-address
undo apply ip next-hop
View Route policy view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of next hop, in dotted decimal notation.
Description Use the apply ip next-hop command to set the IP address of next hop.
Use the undo apply ip next-hop command to cancel the setting argument.
By default, no next hop is defined.
An apply statement of Route-policy sets the next hop of the filtered packets.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match { acl | ip-prefix }, if-match ip next-hop, if-match
cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply local-preference, apply cost, apply
origin and apply tag.
Example # Define an apply statement to set the next hop in the routing information to
193.1.1.8.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]route-policy 10 permit node 10
[SW7750-route-policy] apply ip next-hop 193.1.1.8
apply isis
Syntax apply isis [ level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2 ]
undo apply isis
View Route-policy view
Parameter level-1: Imports routes to level-1 area.
level-2: Imports routes to level-2 area.
level-1-2: Imports routes to both level-1 area and level-2 area.
Description Use the apply isis command to define an apply clause to import routing
information into the IS-IS area(s) at specified level(s).
apply local-preference 473
Use the command to cancel the clause setting.
By default, no apply clause is defined.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match { acl | ip-prefix }, if-match ip next-hop, if-match
cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply cost, apply origin and apply tag.
Example # Define an apply clause to import routes to level-2 area.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]route-policy 10 permit node 10
[SW7750-route-policy] apply isis level-2
apply local-preference
Syntax apply local-preference local-preference
undo apply local-preference
View Route policy view
Parameter local-preference: local preference, ranging from 0 to 4294967295.
Description Use the apply local-preference command to set local preference for routing
information.
Use the undo apply local-preference command to cancel the apply statement
setting.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match { acl | ip-prefix }, if-match ip next-hop, if-match
cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip next-hop, apply local-preference,
apply origin and apply tag.
Example # Define an apply statement to set local preference for the routing information to
130.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]route-policy 10 permit node 10
[SW7750-route-policy] apply local-preference 130
apply origin
Syntax apply origin { igp | egp as-number | incomplete }
undo apply origin
View Route policy view
474 CHAPTER 34: IP ROUTING POLICY CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter igp: Specifies that BGP routing information source is internal route
egp: Specifies that BGP routing information source is external route
as-number: Specifies autonomous system number of external routes. The value
ranges from 1 to 65,535.
incomplete: Specifies that BGP routing information source is unknown.
Description Use the apply origin command to set BGP routing information source.
Use the undo apply origin command to cancel the apply statement setting.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match { acl | ip-prefix }, if-match ip next-hop, if-match
cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip next-hop, apply local-preference,
apply cost and apply tag.
Example # Define an apply statement to specify that the BGP routing information source is
igp.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]route-policy 10 permit node 10
[SW7750-route-policy] apply origin igp
apply tag
Syntax apply tag value
undo apply tag
View Route policy view
Parameter value: Tag value of route information. The value ranges from 0 to 4294967295.
Description Use the apply tag command to configure to set the tag area of RIP or OSPF route
information.
Use the undo apply tag command to cancel the apply statement.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match { acl | ip-prefix }, if-match ip next-hop, if-match
cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip next-hop, apply local-preference,
apply cost, and apply origin.
Example # Define an apply statement. When it is used for setting route information
attribute, it sets the tag area of route information as 100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]route-policy policy_10 permit node 12
[SW7750-route-policy] apply tag 100
display ip ip-prefix 475
display ip ip-prefix
Syntax display ip ip-prefix [ ip-prefix-name ]
View Any view
Parameter ip-prefix-name: Name of the address prefix list to be displayed, containing 1 to 19
characters.
Description Use the display ip ip-prefix command to display an address prefix list.
Related command: ip ip-prefix.
Example # Display the information about the address prefix list named p1.
<SW7750> display ip ip-prefix p1
name index conditions ip-prefix / mask GE LE
p1 10 permit 10.1.0.0/16 17 18
Table 79 Field descriptions of the display ip ip-prefix command
Field Description
name Name of ip-prefix
index Internal sequence number of ip-prefix
conditions Mode: permit or deny
ip-prefix / mask Address and network segment length of ip-prefix
GE Greater-equal value of ip-prefix network segment length
LE Less-equal value of ip-prefix network segment length
display route-policy
Syntax display route-policy [ route-policy-name ]
View Any view
Parameter route-policy-name: Name of the route-policy to be displayed, containing 1 to 19
characters.
Description Use the display route-policy command to display the configured Route-policy.
If you do not specify a route policy name, this command displays all route-policies
configured.
Related command: route-policy.
Example # Display the information about Route-policy named policy1.
<SW7750> display route-policy policy1
Route-policy : policy1
476 CHAPTER 34: IP ROUTING POLICY CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Permit 10 : if-match (prefixlist) p1
apply cost 100
matched : 0 denied : 0
Table 80 Field descriptions of the display route-policy command
Field Description
Route-policy Name of ip-prefix
Permit 10 Information about the route-policy with the mode configured as permit and the
node as 10:
if-match (prefixlist) p1 if-match statement configured
apply cost 100 Apply routing cost 100 to the routes matching the
conditions defined by if-match statement
matched Number of routes matching the conditions set by
if-match statement
denied Number of routes not matching the conditions set by
if-match statement
if-match { acl | ip-prefix }
Syntax if-match { acl acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name }
undo if-match { acl | ip-prefix }
View Route policy view
Parameter acl-number: Number of the ACL used for filter
ip-prefix-name: Name of the prefix address list used for filter, containing 1 to 19
characters.
Description Use the if-match { acl | ip-prefix } command to configure a rule for the
route-policy and specify an matching IP address range.
Use the undo if-match { acl | ip-prefix } command to cancel the setting of the
rule.
The if-match { acl | ip-prefix } command implements a filter by referencing an
ACL or a prefix address list.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag,
route-policy, apply ip next-hop, apply cost, apply local-preference, apply
origin, and apply tag.
Example # Define an if-match statement. When the statement is used for filtering route
information, the route information filtered by route destination address through
address prefix list p1 is permitted to pass the if-match statement.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] route-policy policy_10 permit node 12
if-match as-path 477
%New sequence of this list
[SW7750-route-policy] if-match ip-prefix p1
if-match as-path
Syntax if-match as-path as-path-number
undo if-match as-path
View Route policy view
Parameter as-path-number: AS path number, ranging from 1 to 199.
Description Use the if-match as-path command to match the AS path field of BGP routing
information.
Use the undo if-match as-path command to cancel the AS path field matching.
By default, AS regular expression is not set for matching in Route-policy.
An if-match statement of Route-policy sets AS path attributes as matching
conditions to filter BGP routing information.
Example # Create as-path 2, which permits the routing information of AS 200 and AS 300.
Then create a Route-policy named test, and define an if-match statement quoting
the definitions of as-path 2 for node 10 of the Route-policy.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip as-path-acl 2 permit 200:300
[SW7750] route-policy test permit node 10
[SW7750-route-policy] if-match as-path 2
if-match community
Syntax if-match community { basic-community-list-number [ whole-match ] |
adv-community-list-number }
undo if-match community
View Route policy view
Parameter basic-community-list-number: Basic community list number, ranging from 1 to 99.
adv-community-list-number: Advanced community list number, ranging from 100
to 199.
whole-match: Exact match, which means that all communities and only these
communities must be displayed.
478 CHAPTER 34: IP ROUTING POLICY CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the if-match community command to match community attributes of BGP
routing information.
Use the undo if-match community command to cancel community attribute
matching settings.
Be default, community attributes are not set for matching.
An if-match statement of Route-policy sets community attributes as matching
conditions to filter BGP routing information.
Related command: route-policy and ip community-list.
Example # Create community-list 1, which permits routing information of AS 100 and AS
200. Then create a Route-policy named test and define an if-match statement
quoting the definitions of community-list 1 for node 10 of the Route-policy.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip community-list 1 permit 100:200
[SW7750] route-policy test permit node 10
[SW7750-route-policy] if-match community 1
if-match cost
Syntax if-match cost value
undo if-match cost
View Route policy view
Parameter value: Route cost value, ranging from 0 to 4,294,967,295.
Description Use the if-match cost command to configure one of the match rules of the
route-policy to match the cost of routing information.
Use the undo if-match cost command to cancel the configuration of the match
rule.
By default, no if-match statement is defined.
An if-match statement of the route-policy specifies the route cost of the routing
information meeting the condition.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match { acl | ip-prefix }, if-match ip next-hop, if-match
tag, route-policy, apply ip next-hop, apply cost, apply local-preference,
apply origin, and apply tag.
Example # Define an if-match statement and allow the routing information with a routing
cost of 8 to pass this if-match statement.
if-match interface 479
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] route-policy policy permit node 1
%New sequence of this list
[SW7750-route-policy] if-match cost 8
if-match interface
Syntax if-match interface { interface-type interface-number }
undo if-match interface
View Route policy view
Parameter interface-type: Interface type.
interface-number: Interface number.
Description Use the if-match interface command to configure to match the route whose
next hop is the designated interface.
Use the undo if-match interface command to cancel the setting of matching
condition.
By default, no if-match statement is defined.
As an if-match statement of route-policy, it matches the corresponding interface
of route next hop when filtering route.
Related command: if-match { acl | ip-prefix }, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag,
route-policy, apply ip next-hop, apply cost, apply local-preference, apply
origin, and apply tag.
Example # Define an if-match statement to match the route whose next hop interface is
Vlan-interface 1
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] route-policy policy permit node 1
%New sequence of this list
[SW7750-route-policy] if-match interface Vlan-interface 1
if-match ip next-hop
Syntax if-match ip next-hop { acl acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name }
undo if-match ip next-hop [ ip-prefix ]
View Route policy view
480 CHAPTER 34: IP ROUTING POLICY CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter acl-number: Number of the ACL used for filter. It ranges from 2,000 to 2,999.
ip-prefix-name: Name of the prefix address list used for filter.
Description Use the if-match ip next-hop command to configure one of the match rules of
route-policy on the next hop address of the routing information.
Use the undo if-match ip next-hop command to cancel the setting of ACL
matching condition.
Use the undo if-match ip next-hop ip-prefix command to cancel the setting
of address prefix list matching condition.
By default, no if-match statement is defined.
An if-match statement of route-policy is used to specify the next hop matching the
routing information when filtering the routes. It performs filter by referencing an
ACL or an address prefix list.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match { acl | ip-prefix }, if-match cost, if-match tag,
route-policy, apply ip next-hop, apply cost, apply local-preference, apply
origin, and apply tag.
Example # Define an if-match statement. It permits the routing information whose route
next hop address filtered through prefix address list p1 to pass this if-match
statement.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] route-policy policy permit node 1
%New sequence of this list
[SW7750-route-policy] if-match ip next-hop ip-prefix p1
if-match tag
Syntax if-match tag value
undo if-match tag
View Route policy view
Parameter value: Tag field value, ranging from 0 to 4,294,967,295.
Description Use the if-match tag command to configure to match the tag field of route
information.
Use the undo if-match tag command to cancel the existing matching rules.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match { acl | ip-prefix }, if-match ip next-hop, if-match
cost, route-policy, apply ip next-hop, apply cost, apply local-preference,
apply origin, and apply tag.
ip as-path-acl 481
Example # Define an if-match statement to permit the OSPF route information whose tag
value is 8 to pass the if-match statement.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] route-policy policy permit node 1
%New sequence of this list
[SW7750-route-policy] if-match tag 8
ip as-path-acl
Syntax ip as-path-acl acl-number { permit | deny } as-regular-expression
undo ip as-path-acl acl-number
View System view
Parameter acl-number: AS path list number, ranging from 1 to 199.
as-regular-expression: AS path regular expression
Description Use the ip as-path-acl command to configure an AS regular expression.
Use the undo ip as-path-acl command to cancel the defined regular expression.
The defined AS path list can be used in BGP policy.
Related command: peer as-path-acl export, peer as-path-acl import and display bgp
routing-table as-path-acl.
Example # Configure an AS path list
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip as-path-acl 10 permit 200,300
ip community-list
Syntax ip community-list basic-comm-list-number { permit | deny } [ aa:nn ] &<1-12> [
internet | no-export-subconfed | no-advertise | no-export ]*
ip community-list adv-comm-list-number { permit | deny }
comm-regular-expression
undo ip community-list { basic-comm-list-number | adv-comm-list-number }
View System view
Parameter basic-comm-list-number: Basic community list number, ranging from 1 to 99.
482 CHAPTER 34: IP ROUTING POLICY CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
adv-comm-list-number: Advanced community list number, ranging from 100 to
199.
permit: Specifies to allow access to matching conditions.
deny: Specifies to deny access to matching conditions.
aa:nn: Community number. The value ranges of aa and nn are both from 1 to
65,535. &<1-12> means that you need to provide at least one and can provide up
to 12 community numbers.
internet: Specifies to advertise all routes.
no-export-subconfed: Specifies not to send matching routes out of
sub-autonomous system.
no-advertise: Specifies not to send matching routes to any peer entities.
no-export: Specifies not to send routes out of sub-autonomous system or
federation but to send to the other sub-autonomous systems in the federation.
comm-regular-expression: Community attribute in regular expression.
Description Use the ip community-list command to set a BGP community list.
Use the undo ip community-list command to cancel the community list
settings.
The defined community list can be used in BGP policy.
Related command: apply community, display bgp routing-table community-list.
Example # Define a community list, and specify not to send the routes with the community
attributes out of the local autonomous system.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip community-list 6 permit no-export-subconfed
ip ip-prefix
Syntax ip ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ index index-number ] { permit | deny } network len
[ greater-equal greater-equal | less-equal less-equal ] *
undo ip ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ index index-number | permit | deny ]
View System view
Parameter ip-prefix-name: Name of address prefix list, containing 1 to 19 characters. It
identifies an address prefix list uniquely.
ip ip-prefix 483
index-number: Identifier of an item in the prefix address list. The item with a
smaller index-number will be tested first.
permit: Specifies the match mode of the defined address prefix list items as
permit mode. If the permit mode is specified and the IP address to be filtered is in
the ip-prefix range specified by the item, the item is filtered through and the next
item is not tested. If the IP address to be filtered is not in the ip-prefix range
specified by the item, the next item is tested
deny: Specifies the match mode of the defined address prefix list items as deny
mode. If the deny mode is specified and the IP address to be filtered is in the
ip-prefix range specified by the item, the item is not filtered through and the next
item is not tested; otherwise, the next item is tested.
network: IP address prefix range (IP address). If it is specified as 0.0.0.0 0, all the IP
addresses are matched.
len: IP address prefix range (mask length). If it is specified as 0.0.0.0 0, all the IP
addresses are matched.
greater-equal, less-equal: Address prefix range [greater-equal, less-equal] to be
matched after the address prefix network len has been matched. The meaning of
greater-equal is "greater than or equal to" , and the meaning of less-equal is
"less than or equal to". The range is len <= greater-equal <= less-equal <= 32.
When only greater-equal is used, it denotes the prefix range [greater-equal, 32].
When only less-equal is used, it denotes the prefix range [len, less-equal].
Description Use the ip ip-prefix command to configure an address prefix list or one of its
items. Use the undo ip ip-prefix command to delete an address prefix list or one
of its items.
An address prefix list is used for IP address filtering. An address prefix list may
contain several items, and each item specifies one address prefix range. The
inter-item filtering relation is "OR". That is, passing an item means filtering
through this address prefix list. Not filtering through any item means not filtering
through this prefix address list.
The address prefix range may contain two parts, which are determined by len and
[greater-equal, less-equal], respectively. If the prefix ranges of these two parts are
both specified, the IP to be filtered must match the prefix ranges of these two
parts.
If you specify network len as 0.0.0.0 0, it matches the default route only.
Example # Define an ip-prefix named p1 to permit only the routes whose mask lengths are
17 or 18 on network segment 10.0.192.0 8 to pass.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip ip-prefix p1 permit 10.0.192.0 8 greater-equal 17 less-e
qual 18
484 CHAPTER 34: IP ROUTING POLICY CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
route-policy
Syntax route-policy route-policy-name { permit | deny } node { node-number }
undo route-policy route-policy-name [ permit | deny | node node-number ]
View System view
Parameter route-policy-name: Name of the Route-policy, containing 1 to 19 characters. It
identifies a Route-policy uniquely.
permit: Specifies the match mode of the defined Route-policy node as permit
mode. When a route entry meets all the if-match statements of the node, the
entry is permitted to filter through the node and the apply statement of the node
will be performed. If a route entry does not meet the if-match statement of the
node, the next node of the route-policy will be tested.
deny: Specifies the match mode of the defined Route-policy node as deny mode.
When a route entry meets all the if-match statements of the node, the entry is
prohibited from filtering through the node and the next node will not be tested.
node: Specifies the node of the route policy.
node-number: Index of the node in the route-policy. When this route-policy is used
for routing information filter, the node with smaller node-number will be tested
first.
Description Use the route-policy command to enter the Route-policy view.
Use the undo route-policy command to delete the created Route-policy.
By default, no Route-policy is defined.
Route-policy is used for route information filter or route policy. A Route-policy
comprises some nodes and each node comprises some if-match statements and
apply statements.
An if-match statement defines the match rules of this node. An apply statement
defines the actions after filtering through this node. The filtering relationship
between the if-match statements of the node is "and". That is, all if-match
statements of the node must be met.
The filtering relation between Route-policy nodes is "OR". That is, filtering
through one node means filtering through this Route-policy. If the information
does not filter through any node, it cannot filter through this Route-policy.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match { acl | ip-prefix }, if-match ip next-hop, if-match
cost, if-match tag, apply ip next-hop, apply local-preference, apply cost,
apply origin, and apply tag.
route-policy 485
Example # Configure Route-policy policy_10, with the node number of 12 and the match
mode of permit, and enter Route policy view.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]route-policy policy_10 permit node 12
%New sequence of this list
[SW7750-route-policy]
486 CHAPTER 34: IP ROUTING POLICY CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
ROUTE CAPACITY CONFIGURATION
35 COMMANDS
n The word "router" covered in the following text represent routers in common
sense and Ethernet switches running a routing protocol. To improve readability,
this will not be mentioned again in this manual.
display memory
Syntax display memory [ slot slot_number ]
View Any view
Parameter slot_number: Number of the slot whose route capacity information is displayed.
Description Use the display memory command to display the memory setting.
Example # Display the current memory setting of the switch.
<SW7750> display memory
System Total Memory(bytes): 203563008
Total Used Memory(bytes): 77852012
Used Rate: 38%
The following table shows describes the fields of the command:
Table 81 Field descriptions of the display memory command
Field Description
System Total Memory(bytes) Free memory size, in bytes, of the switch
Total Used Memory(bytes) Occupied memory size, in bytes, of the switch
Used Rate Memory occupation rate
display memory limit
Syntax display memory limit
View Any view
Parameter None
488 CHAPTER 35: ROUTE CAPACITY CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the display memory limit command to display the memory setting and
state information related to route capacity.
This command displays the current memory limit configuration, free memory, and
state information about connections, such as times of disconnection, times of
reconnection, and whether the current state is normal.
Example # Display the current memory setting and state information.
<SW7750>display memory limit
Current memory limit configuration information:
system memory safety: 40 (MBytes)
system memory limit: 30 (MBytes)
auto-establish enabled
Free Memory: 111571652 (Bytes)
The state information about connection:
The times of disconnect: 0
The times of reconnect: 0
The current state: Normal
The information displayed by this command includes Ethernet switch memory
limit, size of free memory, times of disconnection, times of reconnection, and the
current state.
The following table describes the fields of the command:
Table 82 Field descriptions of the display memory limit command
Field Description
system memory safety Safety value of the switch memory.
system memory limit Lower limit of the switch memory.
auto-establish enabled Automatic connection restoration is enabled (If automatic
connection restoration is disabled, "auto-establish disabled"
is displayed).
Free Memory Size of the current free memory in bytes
The times of disconnect: 0 The times of the disconnection of the routing protocol is 0.
The times of reconnect: 0 The times of reconnection of the routing protocol is 0.
The current state: Normal The current state is normal (If the current state is emergent,
"Exigence" is displayed).
memory auto-establish disable
Syntax memory auto-establish disable
View System view
Parameter None
memory auto-establish enable 489
Description Use the memory auto-establish disable command to disable the automatic
restoration of routing protocol connection (even if the free memory recovers to a
safety value).
By default, when the free memory of the switch recovers to a safety value,
connections of all the routing protocols will always recover (when the free memory
of the switch decreases to a lower limit, the connection will be disconnected
forcibly).
After this command is used, connections of all the routing protocols will not
recover when the free memory of the switch recovers to a safety value. In this
case, you need to restart the routing protocol to recover the connections.
Use this command with caution.
Related command: memory auto-establish enable, memory { safety | limit }*, display memory
limit.
Example # Disable automatic restoration of the routing protocol connections when the free
memory of the current switch recovers.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] memory auto-establish disable
memory auto-establish enable
Syntax memory auto-establish enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the memory auto-establish enable command to enable automatic
restoration of routing protocol connections when the free memory of the switch
recovers to the specified value.
Use the memory auto-establish disable command to disable this function.
By default, when the free memory of the switch recovers to a safety value,
connections of all the routing protocols will always recover (when the free memory
of the switch decreases to a lower limit, the connection will be disconnected
forcibly).
By default, this function is enabled.
Related command: memory auto-establish disable, memory { safety | limit }*, display memory
limit.
Example # Enable automatic restoration of the connections of all the routing protocols
when the free memory of the current switch recovers..
490 CHAPTER 35: ROUTE CAPACITY CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] memory auto-establish enable
memory { safety | limit }*
Syntax memory { safety safety-value | limit limit-value }*
undo memory [ safety | limit ]
View System view
Parameter safety-value: Safety free memory of the switch , in Mbytes. Its value range
depends on the free memory of the current switch. The default is 40.
limit-value: Lower limit of the switch free memory, in Mbytes. Its value range
depends on the free memory of the current switch. The default is 30.
Description Use the memory limit limit-value command to configure the lower limit of the
switch free memory.
When the free memory of the switch is less than this limit, all the routing protocol
connections will be disconnected forcibly. The limit-value argument in the
command must be less than the current free memory safety value; otherwise, the
configuration will fail.
Use the memory safety safety-value command to configure the safety value of
the switch free memory.
If you use the memory auto-establish enable command (the default
configuration), the routing protocol connection that is forcibly disconnected
automatically recovers when the free memory of the switch reaches this value. The
safety-value argument in the command must be greater than the current free
memory lower limit; otherwise, the configuration will fail.
Use the memory safety safety-value limit limit-value command to change both
the safety value and lower limit of the switch free memory. The value of
safety-value must be greater than that of limit-value; otherwise, the configuration
will fail.
Use the undo memory command to restore the default safety value and lower
limit of the switch free memory.
Related command: memory auto-establish disable, memory auto-establish enable, and display
memory limit.
Example # Set the lower limit of the switch free memory to 2 MB and the safety value to 4
MB.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] memory safety 4 limit 2
GMRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
36
n Ethernet switches serve as routers when an IP multicast protocol is running on
them. The routers mentioned here refer to common routers and Layer 3 Ethernet
switches running an IP multicast protocol.
display gmrp statistics
Syntax display gmrp statistics [ interface interface-list ]
View Any view
Parameter interface interface-list: Specifies Ethernet port list, expressed as interface-list={
interface-type interface-number [ to { interface-type interface-number } ]
}&<1-10>.
Description Use the display gmrp statistics command to view the statistics information
about GMRP.
This command is used for displaying the statistics information about GMRP,
including the list of ports with GMRP enabled, GMRP status information, GMRP
failed registrations and last origin of GMRP packet data unit (PDU).
If an interface is specified, the system displays the GMRP statistics information of
the specified interface.
Example # Display the statistics information about GMRP on Ethernet 2/0/1.
<SW7750> display gmrp statistics interface Ethernet 2/0/1
GMRP statistics on port Ethernet2/0/1
Gmrp Status : Enabled
Gmrp Running :Yes
Gmrp Failed Registrations : 0
Gmrp Last Pdu Origin : 0000-0000-0000
display gmrp status
Syntax display gmrp status
View Any view
Parameter None
492 CHAPTER 36: GMRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the display gmrp status command to view the status of global GMRP.
Example # Display the status of global GMRP.
<SW7750> display gmrp status
GMRP is enabled
gmrp
Syntax gmrp
undo gmrp
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the gmrp command to enable GMRP globally or enable GMRP on a port.
Use the undo gmrp command to disable GMRP globally or disable GMRP on a
port..
By default, GMRP is disabled globally and on each port.
Executed in system view, this command will enable the global GMRP. After
performing this command in Ethernet port view, GMRP will be enabled on a port.
Before enabling GMRP on a port, you shall enable GMRP globally.
Related command: display gmrp status, display gmrp statistics.
Example # Enable GMRP globally.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] gmrp
GMRP is enabled globally.
IGMP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION
37 COMMANDS
n Ethernet switches serve as routers when an IP multicast protocol is running on
them. The routers mentioned here refer to common routers and Layer 3 Ethernet
switches where the IP multicast protocol is running.
display igmp-snooping configuration
Syntax display igmp-snooping configuration
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display igmp-snooping configuration command to display IGMP
Snooping configuration information.
When IGMP Snooping is enabled on the switch, this command displays the
following information: IGMP Snooping status, aging time of the router port, query
response timeout time, and aging time of multicast member ports.
Related command: igmp-snooping.
Example # Display IGMP Snooping configuration information on the switch.
<SW7750> display igmp-snooping configuration
Enable IGMP-Snooping.
The router port timeout is 105 second(s).
The max response timeout is 1 second(s).
The host port timeout is 260 second(s).
The above information shows: IGMP Snooping is enabled, the aging time of the
router port is 105 seconds, the query response timeout time is one second, and
the aging time of multicast member ports is 260 seconds.
display igmp-snooping group
Syntax display igmp-snooping group [ vlan vlan-id ]
View Any view
Parameter vlan-id: ID of the specified VLAN.
494 CHAPTER 37: IGMP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the display igmp-snooping group command to display information about
the IP and MAC multicast groups under one specified VLAN (with vlan vlan-id) or
all VLANs (without vlan vlan-id).
This command displays the following information: VLAN ID, router port, IP
multicast group address, member ports included in the IP multicast group, MAC
multicast group, MAC multicast group address, and member ports included in the
MAC multicast group.
Example # Display information about the multicast groups under VLAN 2.
<SW7750> display igmp-snooping group vlan 2
Total 1 IP Group(s).
Total 1 MAC Group(s).
Vlan(id):2.
Total 1 IP Group(s).
Total 1 MAC Group(s).
Static router port(s):
Dynamic router port(s):
IP group(s):the following ip group(s) match to one mac group.
IP group address:225.1.1.1
Host port(s):GigabitEthernet2/0/1
MAC group(s):
MAC group address:0100-5e01-0101
Host port(s):GigabitEthernet2/0/1
The information above means:
■ Multicast groups exist in VLAN 2.
■ The address of the IP multicast group is 255.1.1.1.
display igmp-snooping statistics
Syntax display igmp-snooping statistics
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display igmp-snooping statistics command to display IGMP
Snooping message statistics.
This command displays the following information: the numbers of the IGMP
general query messages, IGMP group-specific query messages, IGMP V1 report
messages, IGMP V2 report messages, IGMP leave messages and error IGMP
messages received, and the number of the IGMP group-specific query messages
sent.
Related command: igmp-snooping.
display multicast-vlan 495
Example # Display IGMP Snooping message statistics.
<SW7750> display igmp-snooping statistics
Received IGMP general query packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP specific query packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP V1 report packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP V2 report packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP leave packet(s) number:0.
Received error IGMP packet(s) number:0.
Sent IGMP specific query packet(s) number:0.
The information above shows that IGMP receives:
■ zero IGMP general query packets
■ zero IGMP specific query packets
■ zero IGMP V1 report packets
■ zero IGMP V2 report packets
■ zero IGMP leave packets
■ zero IGMP error packets
IGMP Snooping sends:
■ zero IGMP specific query packets
display multicast-vlan
Syntax display multicast-vlan [ vlan-id ]
View Any view
Parameter vlan-id: ID of the specified VLAN.
Description Use the display multicast-vlan command to display the configuration of the
multicast VLAN.
If the vlan-id argument is not provided when the command is executed, the
configuration information about all the VLANs in the network is displayed.
Example # Display the configuration of multicast VLAN 2.
<SW7750> display multicast-vlan 2
multicast vlan 2’s subvlan list:
Vlan 1024
The information above means:
■ VLAN 2 exists
■ VLAN 1024 is the subvlan of VLAN 2
496 CHAPTER 37: IGMP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
igmp-snooping
Syntax igmp-snooping { enable | disable }
View System view
Parameter enable: Enables the IGMP Snooping feature.
disable: Disables the IGMP Snooping feature.
Description Use the igmp-snooping enable command to enable the IGMP Snooping
feature.
Use the igmp-snooping disable command to disable the IGMP Snooping
feature.
By default, the IGMP Snooping feature is disabled.
Example # Enable the IGMP Snooping feature on the switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] igmp-snooping enable
Enable IGMP-Snooping ok.
igmp-snooping fast-leave
Syntax igmp-snooping fast-leave [ vlan vlan-list ]
undo igmp-snooping fast-leave [ vlan vlan-list ]
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter vlan-list: Multiple VLANs in the form of vlan-list = { vlan-id [ to vlan-id ] } & < 1-10
>. The vlan-id argument is the ID of the VLAN, in the range of 1 to 4,094.
&<1-10> means that you can provide the argument repeatedly for up to ten
times.
Description Use the igmp-snooping fast-leave command to enable IGMP fast leave
processing.
Use the undo igmp-snooping fast-leave command to cancel the
configuration.
By default, IGMP fast leave processing is disabled.
Normally, when receiving an IGMP Leave message, IGMP Snooping does not
immediately remove the port from the multicast group, but sends a group-specific
query message. If no response is received in a given period, it then removes the
port from the multicast group.
igmp-snooping general-query source-ip 497
If this command is executed, when receiving an IGMP Leave packet, IGMP
Snooping removes the port from the multicast group directly. When the port has
only one user, enabling IGMP fast leave processing can save bandwidth.
n ■
■
This feature is effective for IGMP-V2-enabled clients.
When this feature is enabled, if one of the multiple users on a port leaves, the
multicast services for the other users in the same multicast group may be
interrupted.
Example # Enable IGMP fast leave processing on Ethernet 2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] igmp-snooping fast-leave
igmp-snooping general-query source-ip
Syntax igmp-snooping general-query source-ip { current-interface | ip-address }
undo igmp-snooping general-query source-ip
View VLAN view
Parameters current-interface: Configures to use the IP address of the virtual interface of the
current VLAN as the source IP address of IGMP general queries.
ip-address: Specifies a source IP address for IGMP general queries.
Description Use the igmp-snooping general-query command to configure the source IP
address of IGMP general queries.
Use the undo igmp-snooping general-query source-ip command to restore
the system default.
This command can take effect only if the IGMP Snooping querier function is
enabled on the switch.
By default, the Layer 2 multicast switch sends general query messages with the
source IP address of 0.0.0.0.
Examples # Configure the Layer 2 multicast switch to send general query messages with the
source IP address 2.2.2.2 in VLAN 3.
<SW7750> system-view
System view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] igmp-snooping enable
[SW7750] vlan 3
[SW7750-vlan3] igmp-snooping enable
[SW7750-vlan3] igmp-snooping querier
[SW7750-vlan3] igmp-snooping general-query source-ip 2.2.2.2
498 CHAPTER 37: IGMP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
igmp-snooping group-limit
Syntax igmp-snooping group-limit limit [ vlan vlan-list [ overflow-replace ] ||
overflow-replace ]
undo igmp-snooping group-limit [ vlan vlan-list ]
View Ethernet port view
Parameter limit: Maximum number of multicast groups the port can join, in the range of 1 to
256.
overflow-replace: Permits the new multicast group to replace the previous
multicast group. If this keyword is not specified in the specific VLAN, all the
previous multicast groups are replaced by default. If this keyword is specified in the
specific VLAN, the multicast group with the lowest IP address is replaced
preferentially.
vlan-list: List of VLANs. You need to provide this argument in the form of vlan-list
= { vlan-id [ to vlan-id ] }&<1-10>, where &<1-10> means that you can provide up
to 10 VLAN IDs/VLAN ID ranges for this argument. Normally, a VLAN ID can be a
number ranging from 1 to 4,094.
Description Use the igmp-snooping group-limit command to define the maximum
number of multicast groups the port can join.
Use the undo igmp-snooping group-limit command to restore the default
setting.
By default, the number of multicast groups on a port is 256
Example # Allow the Ethernet 2/0/1 port to join at most 200 multicast groups.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] igmp-snooping group-limit 200
igmp-snooping group-policy
Syntax igmp-snooping group-policy acl-number [ vlan vlan-list ]
undo igmp-snooping group-policy [ vlan vlan-list ]
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter acl-number: Basic ACL number, in the range of 2000 to 2999.
vlan-id: ID of the VLAN for the Ethernet port, in the range of 1 to 4094.
igmp-snooping group-policy 499
Description Use the igmp-snooping group-policy command to configure an IGMP
Snooping filtering ACL.
Use the undo igmp-snooping group-policy command to remove the IGMP
Snooping filtering ACL.
By default, no IGMP Snooping filtering ACL is configured.
You can configure multicast filtering ACLs globally or on the switch ports
connected to user ends so as to use the IGMP Snooping filter function to limit the
multicast streams that the users can access. With this function, you can treat
different VoD users in different ways by allowing them to access the multicast
streams in different multicast groups.
In practice, when a user orders a multicast program, an IGMP host report message
is generated. When the message arrives at the switch, the switch examines the
multicast filtering ACL configured on the access port to determine if the port can
join the corresponding multicast group or not. If yes, it adds the port to the
forward port list of the multicast group. If not, it drops the IGMP host report
message and does not forward the corresponding data stream to the port. In this
way, you can control the multicast streams that users can access.
An ACL rule defines a multicast address or a multicast address range (for example
224.0.0.1 to 239.255.255.255) and is used to.
■ Allow the port(s) to join only the multicast group(s) defined in the rule by a
permit statement.
■ Inhibit the port(s) from joining the multicast group(s) defined in the rule by a
deny statement.
n ■ One port can belong to multiple VLANs. But for each VLAN on the port, you
can configure only one ACL.
■ If the port does not belong to the specified VLAN, the filter ACL you configured
does not take effect on the port.
■ If no ACL rule is configured in the command, the system will reject the
multicast packets from all the multicast groups.
Example # Configure ACL 2000 to allow users under port Ethernet 2/0/1 to access the
multicast streams in groups 225.0.0.0 to 225.255.255.255.
■ Configure ACL 2000.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl number 2000
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 225.0.0.0 0.255.255.255
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] quit
■ Create VLAN 2 and add Ethernet 2/0/1 port to VLAN 2.
[SW7750] vlan 2
[SW7750-vlan2] port Ethernet 2/0/1
Gigabit[SW7750-vlan2] quit
■ Configure ACL 2000 on Ethernet 2/0/1 to allow this VLAN 2 port to join only
the IGMP multicast groups defined in the rule of ACL 2000.
500 CHAPTER 37: IGMP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] igmp-snooping group-policy 2000 vlan 2
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] quit
# Configure ACL 2001 to allow users under Ethernet 2/0/2 to access the multicast
streams in any groups except groups 225.0.0.0 to 225.0.0.255.
■ Configure ACL 2001.
[SW7750] acl number 2001
[SW7750-acl-basic-2001] rule deny source 225.0.0.0 0.0.0.255
[SW7750-acl-basic-2001] rule permit source any
[SW7750-acl-basic-2001] quit
■ Create VLAN 2 and add Ethernet 2/0/2 to VLAN 2.
[SW7750] vlan 2
[SW7750-vlan2] port Ethernet 2/0/2
[SW7750-vlan2] quit
■ Configure ACL 2001 on Ethernet 2/0/2 to allow this VLAN 2 port to join any
IGMP multicast groups except those defined in the deny rule of ACL 2001.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/2
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/2] igmp-snooping group-policy 2001 vlan 2
igmp-snooping host-aging-time
Syntax igmp-snooping host-aging-time seconds
undo igmp-snooping host-aging-time
View System view
Parameter seconds: Aging time of multicast member ports, in the range of 200 to 1000 in
seconds.
Description Use the igmp-snooping host-aging-time command to configure the aging
time of multicast member port.
Use the undo igmp-snooping host-aging-time command to restore the
default aging time.
By default, the aging time of multicast member ports is 260 seconds.
The aging time of multicast member ports determines the refresh frequency of
multicast group members. In an environment where multicast group members
change frequently, a relatively shorter aging time is required.
Related command: igmp-snooping.
Example # Set the aging time of multicast member ports to 300 seconds.
igmp-snooping max-response-time 501
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] igmp-snooping host-aging-time 300
igmp-snooping max-response-time
Syntax igmp-snooping max-response-time seconds
undo igmp-snooping max-response-time
View System view
Parameter seconds: Query response timeout time, in the range of 1 to 25 in seconds.
Description Use the igmp-snooping max-response-time command to configure the query
response timeout time.
Use the undo igmp-snooping max-response-time command to restore the
default timeout time.
By default, the query response timeout time is 10 seconds.
The maximum response time you configured determines how long the switch can
wait for a response to an IGMP Snooping query message.
Related command: igmp-snooping, igmp-snooping router-aging-time.
Example # Set the query response timeout time to 15 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] igmp-snooping max-response-time 15
igmp-snooping querier
Syntax igmp-snooping querier
undo igmp-snooping querier
View VLAN view
Parameters None
Description Use the igmp-snooping querier command to enable the IGMP Snooping querier
feature in the current VLAN of the Layer 2 multicast switch.
Use the undo igmp-snooping querier command to disable the IGMP Snooping
querier feature in the current VLAN of the Layer 2 multicast switch.
502 CHAPTER 37: IGMP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
By default, the IGMP Snooping querier feature of the Layer 2 multicast switch is
disabled.
Examples # Enable the IGMP Snooping feature in VLAN 3.
<SW7750> system-view
System view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] igmp-snooping enable
[SW7750] vlan 3
[SW7750-vlan3] igmp-snooping enable
[SW7750-vlan3] igmp-snooping querier
igmp-snooping query-interval
Syntax igmp-snooping query-interval seconds
undo igmp-snooping query-interval
View VLAN view
Parameters seconds: Interval for the Layer 2 multicast switch to send general queries, ranging
from 1 to 300, in seconds.
Description Use the igmp-snooping query-interval command to configure the interval
between IGMP general queries sent by the Layer 2 switch.
Use the undo igmp-snooping query-interval command to restore the interval
to the default value.
By default, the Layer 2 multicast switch sends general queries at the interval of 60
seconds.
These commands are effective only after the IGMP Snooping querier feature is
enabled. The configured query interval must be longer than the maximum
response time for general queries.
Examples # Configure the Layer 2 multicast switch to send general queries at the interval of
100 seconds in VLAN 3.
<SW7750> system-view
System view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] igmp-snooping enable
[SW7750] vlan 3
[SW7750-vlan3] igmp-snooping enable
[SW7750-vlan3] igmp-snooping querier
[SW7750-vlan3] igmp-snooping query-interval 100
igmp-snooping report-aggregation
Syntax igmp-snooping report-aggregation
igmp-snooping router-aging-time 503
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the igmp-snooping report-aggregation command to enable suppression
on Layer 2 multicast IGMP report packets. In the IGMP-snooping-enabled VLAN,
only one IGMP report packet is sent to the upstream router port in an interval.
Use the undo igmp-snooping report-aggregation command to disable
suppression on Layer 2 multicast IGMP report packets.
By default, suppression on IGMP report packets is disabled.
n ■ IGMP snooping must be enabled globally before the suppression on IGMP
report packets is enabled.
■ If IGMP snooping is disabled globally, the suppression on IGMP report packets
is disabled simultaneously.
Example # Enable suppression on Layer 2 multicast IGMP report packets on the switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] igmp-snooping enable
[SW7750] igmp-snooping report-aggregation
igmp-snooping router-aging-time
Syntax igmp-snooping router-aging-time seconds
undo igmp-snooping router-aging-time
View System view
Parameter seconds: Aging time of the router port, in the range of 1 to 1000 in seconds.
Description Use the igmp-snooping router-aging-time command to configure the aging
time of the router port.
Use the undo igmp-snooping router-aging-time command to restore the
default aging time.
By default, the aging time of the router port is 105 seconds.
The router port here refers to the port connecting the Layer 2 switch to the router.
The Layer 2 switch receives IGMP general query messages from the router through
this port. The aging time of the router port should be a value about 2.5 times of
the general query interval.
Related command: igmp-snooping max-response-time, igmp-snooping.
504 CHAPTER 37: IGMP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Set the aging time of the router port to 500 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] igmp-snooping router-aging-time 500
igmp-snooping version
Syntax igmp-snooping version version-number
undo igmp-snooping version
View VLAN view
Parameters version-number: IGMP version, in the range of 2 to 3 and defaulting to 2.
Description Use the igmp-snooping version command to configure the IGMP Snooping
version in the current VLAN.
Use the undo igmp-snooping version command to restore the default IGMP
Snooping version.
Examples # Set IGMP Snooping version to version 3 in VLAN 100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] igmp-snooping enable
Enable IGMP-Snooping ok.
[SW7750] vlan 100
[SW7750-vlan100] igmp-snooping enable
[SW7750-vlan100] igmp-snooping version 3
igmp host-join port
Syntax igmp host-join group-address [ source-ip source-address ] port interface-list
undo igmp host-join group-address [ source-ip source-address ] port
interface-list
View VLAN interface view
Parameters group-address: Address of the multicast group that the simulated host will join.
source-address: Address of the multicast source that the simulated host will join.
This parameter is valid only when IGMPv3 Snooping is enabled in the VLAN.
port: Specifies one or more ports.
interface-list: Forwarding port list, in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to { interface-type interface-number } ] } &<1-10>. For their
meanings and value ranges, see interface on page 205.
igmp host-join 505
Description Use the igmp host-join port command to enable simulated joining on the
specified port(s) in VLAN interface view.
Use the undo igmp host-join port command to remove the configuration.
By default, simulated joining is disabled.
Examples # Configure Ethernet 2/0/1 in the VLAN corresponding to VLAN-interface 10 as a
simulated host member of multicast group 225.0.0.1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] igmp host-join 225.0.0.1 port Ethernet 2/0/1
igmp host-join
Syntax igmp host-join group-address [source-ip source-address] vlan vlan-id
undo igmp host-join group-address [source-ip source-address] vlan vlan-id
View Ethernet port view
Parameters group-address: Address of the multicast group the simulated host is to join.
source-address: Address of the multicast source the simulated host is to join. This
parameter is valid only when IGMPv3 Snooping is enabled in a VLAN.
vlan-id: ID of the VLAN to which the port belongs, in the range of 1 to 4094.
Description Use the igmp host-join command to configure the current port as a simulated
multicast group member host.
Use the undo igmp host-join command to remove the current port as a
simulated multicast group member host.
c CAUTION:
■ Before configuring a simulated host, enable IGMP Snooping in VLAN view first.
■ The current port must belong to the specified VLAN; otherwise this
configuration does not take effect.
Examples # Configure Ethernet 2/0/1 as a simulated host for multicast source 1.1.1.1 and
multicast group 225.0.0.1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]igmp-snooping enable
Enable IGMP-Snooping ok.
[SW7750]vlan 1
[SW7750-vlan1]igmp-snooping enable
[SW7750-vlan1]igmp-snooping version 3
[SW7750-vlan1]quit
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet 2/0/1] igmp host-join 225.0.0.1 source-ip 1.1.1.1 vlan 10
506 CHAPTER 37: IGMP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
multicast-vlan enable
Syntax multicast-vlan enable
undo multicast-vlan enable
View VLAN view
Parameter None
Description Use the multicast-vlan enable command to configure the current VLAN as a
multicast VLAN.
Use the undo multicast-vlan enable command to disable the current VLAN
from being a multicast VLAN.
By default, the multicast VLAN feature is disabled.
c CAUTION:
■ You can configure up to 5 multicast VLANs for the device.
■ A multicast VLAN cannot be configured as a multicast sub-VLAN.
■ A multicast sub-VLAN cannot be configured as a multicast VLAN.
■ A multicast sub-VLAN cannot be configured as the sub-VLAN of other
multicast VLANs.
■ One multicast sub-VLAN is corresponding to only one multicast VLAN.
■ If multicast routing is enabled on a VLAN interface, the corresponding VLAN
cannot be configured as a multicast VLAN.
Example # Configure VLAN 2 as a multicast VLAN.
<SW7750> system-view
Enter system view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z
[SW7750] igmp-snooping enable
[SW7750] vlan 2
[SW7750-vlan2] multicast-vlan enable
multicast-vlan subvlan
Syntax multicast-vlan vlan-id subvlan vlan-list
undo multicast-vlan vlan-id subvlan vlan-list
View System view
Parameter vlan-id: ID of the specified VLAN.
vlan-list: Multiple VLANs in the form of vlan-list = { vlan-id [ to vlan-id ] } & < 1-10
>. The vlan-id argument is the ID of the VLAN, in the range of 1 to 4,094.
reset igmp-snooping statistics 507
&<1-10> means that you can provide the argument repeatedly for up to ten
times.
Description Use the multicast-vlan subvlan command to configure one or multiple VLANs
as the sub-VLAN(s) of the multicast VLAN.
Use the undo multicast-vlan subvlan command to cancel the sub-VLANs of
the multicast VLAN.
By default, no sub-VLAN is configured for a multicast VLAN.
c CAUTION:
■ A multicast VLAN cannot be configured as a multicast sub-VLAN.
■ A multicast sub-VLAN cannot be configured as a multicast VLAN.
■ A multicast sub-VLAN cannot be configured as the sub-VLAN of other
multicast VLANs.
■ One multicast sub-VLAN is corresponding to only one multicast VLAN.
■ If multicast routing is enabled on a VLAN interface, the corresponding VLAN
cannot be configured as a multicast VLAN.
Example # Configure VLAN 2 to VLAN 5 as the sub-VLANs of the multicast VLAN 10.
<SW7750> system-view
Enter system view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z
[SW7750] igmp-snooping enable
[SW7750] vlan 10
[SW7750-vlan10] igmp-snooping enable
[SW7750-vlan10] multicast-vlan enable
[SW7750-vlan10] quit
[SW7750] multicast-vlan 10 subvlan 2 to 5
reset igmp-snooping statistics
Syntax reset igmp-snooping statistics
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset igmp-snooping statistics command to clear IGMP Snooping
statistics.
Related command: igmp-snooping.
Example # Clear IGMP Snooping statistics.
<SW7750> reset igmp-snooping statistics
508 CHAPTER 37: IGMP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
COMMON IP MULTICAST
38 CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display mpm forwarding-table
Syntax display mpm forwarding-table [ group-address | source-address ]
View Any view
Parameter group-address: Multicast group address to specify a multicast group, in the range
of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
source-address: IP address of the multicast source.
Description Use the display mpm forwarding-table command to display the information
about multicast forwarding tables containing port information.
Only the (S, G) entry is displayed when the group address or source address is
specified. Otherwise, the command displays all the entries.
If you want to query the information about multicast forwarding tables without
port information, you can use the display multicast forwarding-table
command.
Example # Query the information about the multicast forwarding table containing port
information.
<SW7750> display mpm forwarding-table
Multicast Forwarding Cache Table
Total 1 entry(entries)
00001. (120.0.0.2, 225.0.0.2)
iif Vlan-interface1200
1 oif(s):
Vlan-interface32
GigabitEthernet3/0/19
Total 1 entry(entries) Listed
Table 83 describes the fields in the displayed information above:
Table 83 Field descriptions of the display mpm forwarding-table command
Field Description
Multicast Forwarding Cache Table Multicast forwarding table
Total 1 entry(entries) Total number of entries
00001 Serial number of an entry
510 CHAPTER 38: COMMON IP MULTICAST CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 83 Field descriptions of the display mpm forwarding-table command
Field Description
(120.0.0.2, 225.0.0.2) (S, G), namely, (source address, group address)
iif Vlan-interface1200 The ingress VLAN of the multicast forwarding table is
VLAN 1200.
1 oif(s): There is one egress VLAN in the multicast forwarding
table.
Vlan-interface32 The outgoing interface is VLAN-interface 32, with the
outgoing port of GigabitEthernet 3/0/19.
GigabitEthernet3/0/19...
Total 1 entry(entries) Listed One (S, G) entry is listed.
display mpm group
Syntax display mpm group [ vlan vlan-id [ ip-address ] ]
View Any view
Parameter vlan vlan-id: Displays the VLAN where the multicast group information lies. If this
keyword is not specified, the command displays the multicast group information in
all VLANs.
ip-address: IP address of the multicast group to be displayed.
Description Use the display mpm group command to display the information about the IP
multicast groups and MAC multicast groups in the specified VLAN or all the VLANs
on the switch.
The displayed information includes:
■ VLAN identifier
■ Router port
■ Address of the IP multicast group
■ Member ports in the IP multicast group
■ MAC multicast group
■ Address of the MAC multicast group
■ Member ports in the MAC multicast group
c CAUTION:
■ The fields of this command are similar to those of the display igmp group
command, except that the information of the specific ports is added.
■ The fields of this command are the same as those of the display
igmp-snooping group command except that the displayed VLANs are of
different attributes.
■ The display igmp-snooping group command displays the information about
ports joining in layer-2 multicast groups in IGMP-snooping-enabled VLANs,
display multicast forwarding-table 511
while the display mpm group command displays the information about ports
joining in layer-3 multicast groups in IGMP-enabled VLANs.
Example # Display the information about multicast groups in VLAN 1200.
<SW7750> display mpm group vlan 1200
Total 1 IP Group(s).
Total 1 MAC Group(s).
Vlan(id):1200
Total 1 IP Group(s).
Total 1 MAC Group(s).
Static router port(s):
Dynamic router port(s):
IP group(s):the following ip group(s) match to one mac group.
IP group address:225.0.0.1
Host port(s):Ethernet2/0/1
MAC group(s):
MAC group address:0100-5e00-0001
Host port(s):Ethernet2/0/1
Table 84 Field descriptions of the display mpm group command
Field Description
Vlan(id):1200. The information about the multicast groups in VLAN
1200 is displayed.
Static router port(s): Static router ports
Dynamic router port(s): Dynamic router ports
IP group(s):the following ip group(s) IP multicast groups corresponding to the same MAC
match to one mac group multicast group
IP group address:225.0.0.1 Address of the IP multicast group: 225.0.0.1
Host port(s): Ethernet2/0/1 Member ports of an IP multicast group: Ethernet 2/0/1
MAC group(s) MAC multicast group(s)
MAC group address:0100-5e00-0001 MAC multicast group address: 0100-5e00-0001
Host port(s): Ethernet2/0/1 Member ports of a MAC multicast group: Ethernet
2/0/1
display multicast forwarding-table
Syntax display multicast forwarding-table [ group-address [ mask { group-mask |
mask-length } ] | source-address [ mask { group-mask | mask-length } ] |
incoming-interface { interface-type interface-number ] register } ]*
View Any view
Parameter group-address: Address of the specified multicast group, in the range of 224.0.0.0
to 239.255.255.255.
source-address: Unicast IP address of the multicast source.
incoming-interface: Incoming interface of the specified multicast forwarding
entry.
register: Registration VLAN interface of the PIM-SM protocol.
512 CHAPTER 38: COMMON IP MULTICAST CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the display multicast forwarding-table command to display the
information about MAC forwarding tables.
Related command: display multicast routing-table.
Example # Display the information about MAC forwarding tables.
<SW7750> display multicast forwarding-table
Multicast Forwarding Cache Table
Total 1 entry: 0 entry created by IP, 1 entry created by protocol
00001. (10.0.0.4, 225.1.1.1), iif Vlan-interface2, 0 oifs,
Protocol Create
Matched 122 pkts(183000 bytes), Wrong If 0 pkts
Forwarded 122 pkts(183000 bytes)
Total 1 entry Listed
Table 85 describes the displayed information above.
Table 85 Field descriptions of the display multicast forwarding-table command
Field Description
Multicast Forwarding Cache Table Multicast forwarding table
Total 1 entries Total number of entries
00001 Serial number of an entry
(10.0.0.4, 225.1.1.1) (s,g)
iif Vlan-interface2, 0 oifs The incoming interface of the multicast forwarding
table is Vlan-interface 2, and the multicast forwarding
table does not have an outgoing interface.
Matched 122 pkts(183000 bytes), 122 packets which are 183,000 bytes in all match the
Wrong If 0 pkts (s, g) entry, and 0 wrong packets match with the (s, g)
entry.
Forwarded 122 pkts(183000 bytes)
122 packets which are 183,000 bytes in all are
forwarded.
display multicast routing-table
Syntax display multicast routing-table [ group-address [ mask { mask | mask-length } ]
| source-address [ mask { mask | mask-length } ] | incoming-interface {
interface-type interface-number | register } ]*
View Any view
Parameter group-address: Multicast group address to specify a multicast group and display
the routing table information corresponding to this group, in the range of
224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
source-address: Unicast IP address of the multicast source.
incoming-interface: Specifies the incoming interface of the multicast routing
entry.
display multicast routing-table 513
register: Registration interface of PIM-SM.
Description Use the display multicast routing-table command to display the information
about the IP multicast routing table.
This command is used to display the information about the multicast routing table,
while the display multicast forwarding-table command is used to display the
information about the multicast forwarding table.
Example # View the information in the multicast routing table.
<SW7750> display multicast routing-table
Multicast Routing Table
Total 3 entries
(4.4.4.4, 224.2.149.17)
Uptime: 00:15:16, Timeout in 272 sec
Upstream interface: Vlan-interface1(4.4.4.6)
Downstream interface list:
1 oifs
Vlan-interface2(2.2.2.4)
(4.4.4.4, 224.2.254.84)
Uptime: 00:15:16, Timeout in 272 sec
Upstream interface: Vlan-interface1(4.4.4.6)
Downstream interface list: NULL
(4.4.4.4, 239.255.2.2)
Uptime: 00:02:57, Timeout in 123 sec
Upstream interface: Vlan-interface1(4.4.4.6)
Downstream interface list: NULL
Matched 3 entries
The following table describes the fields in the displayed information.
Table 86 Field descriptions of the display multicast routing-table command
Field Description
Multicast Routing Table Multicast routing table
Total 3 entries There are 3 entries in all in the multicast routing
table.
(4.4.4.4, 224.2.149.17) (S, G) of the multicast routing table
Uptime: 00:15:16, Timeout in 272 sec The entry is up for 15 minutes and 16 seconds,
and it times out in 272 seconds.
Upstream interface: Vlan-interface1(4.4.4.6)
The IP address of the upstream interface is
Downstream interface list:
4.4.4.6.
1 oifs
Downstream interface list:
Vlan-interface2(2.2.2.4)
The IP address of the downstream interface is
2.2.2.4.
Matched 3 entries Three entries match the configuration.
514 CHAPTER 38: COMMON IP MULTICAST CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display multicast-source-deny
Syntax display multicast-source-deny [ interface interface-type [ interface-number ] ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.
Description Use the display multicast-source-deny command to display the configuration
information about the multicast source port check.
When you use this command to display the information,
■ If you specify neither the port type nor the port number, the multicast source
port check information about all the ports on the switch is displayed.
■ If you specify the port type only, the multicast source port check information
about all ports of this type is displayed.
■ If you specify both the port type and the port number, the multicast source port
check information about the specified port is displayed.
Example # Display the multicast source port suppression state of Ethernet 2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] display multicast-source-deny Ethernet 2/0/1
# Display the multicast source port suppression state of all the 100M Ethernet
ports.
[SW7750] display multicast-source-deny interface Ethernet
multicast route-limit
Syntax multicast route-limit limit
undo multicast route-limit
View System view
Parameter limit: Limit on the capacity of the multicast routing table, in the range of 0 to
1,024.
Description Use the multicast route-limit command to limit the capacity of the multicast
routing table. The router will drop the protocols and packets of the new (S, G).
Use the undo multicast route-limit command to restore the default limit on
the capacity of the multicast routing table.
multicast routing-enable 515
The limit on the capacity of the multicast routing table is 1024 by default.
If the number of existing routing entries exceeds the value to be configured when
you configure this command, the existing entries in the routing table will not be
removed. Instead, the system will prompt that the number of existing routing
entries is more than the limit to be configured.
If you execute this command again, the new configuration will overlap the former
configuration.
Example # Set the limit on the capacity of the multicast routing table to 100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast route-limit 100
multicast routing-enable
Syntax multicast routing-enable
undo multicast routing-enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the multicast routing-enable command to enable the IP multicast routing
feature.
Use the undo multicast routing-enable command to disable the IP multicast
routing feature.
The IP multicast routing feature is disabled by default.
Example # Enable the IP multicast routing feature.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
multicast static-router-port
Syntax multicast static-router-port interface-type interface-number
undo multicast static-router-port interface-type interface-number
View VLAN view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
516 CHAPTER 38: COMMON IP MULTICAST CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
interface-number: Port number.
Description Use the multicast static-router-port command to specify the Ethernet port as
the static router port of the current VLAN.
Use the undo multicast static-router-port command to disable the static
router port configuration.
By default, no static router port is configured for the VLAN.
c CAUTION:
■ Up to 256 static router ports can be configured in a system.
■ Reflection ports cannot be configured as static router ports.
■ A port in a multicast sub-VLAN cannot be configured as a static router port.
Example # Configure Ethernet 2/0/1 in VLAN 2 as a static router port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 2
[SW7750-vlan2] multicast static-router-port Ethernet 2/0/1
multicast static-router-port vlan
Syntax multicast static-router-port vlan vlan-id
undo multicast static-router-port vlan vlan-id
View Ethernet port view
Parameter vlan-id: ID of the specified VLAN, in the range of 1 to 4,094.
Description Use the multicast static-router-port vlan command to specify the current port
in the VLAN as a static router port.
Use the undo multicast static-router-port vlan command to disable the
static router port configuration.
By default, an Ethernet port is not specified as a static router port.
c CAUTION:
■ Up to 256 static router ports can be configured in a system.
■ Reflection ports cannot be configured as static router ports.
■ A port in a multicast sub-VLAN cannot be configured as a static router port.
Example # Configure Ethernet 2/0/1 in VLAN 2 as a static router port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
multicast wrongif-holdtime 517
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] multicast static-router-port vlan 2
multicast wrongif-holdtime
Syntax multicast wrongif-holdtime seconds
undo multicast wrongif-holdtime
View System view
Parameter seconds: Holdtime to prevent wrongif packets from being reported to the CPU, in
the range of 0 to 300 seconds. During the configuration, if the seconds argument
is less than 15, the system sets the holdtime to 15; if the seconds argument is
more than 15, the system sets the holdtime to the multiples of 15 according to the
user-defined range. For example, if you set the seconds argument to 14, the
system sets the holdtime to 15; if you set the seconds argument to 16, the system
sets the holdtime to 30; if you set the seconds argument to 31, the system sets the
holdtime to 45, and so on.
Description Use the multicast wrongif-holdtime command to set the holdtime to prevent
wrongif packets from being reported to the CPU.
Use the undo multicast wrongif-holdtime command to restore the default
holdtime.
By default, the holdtime to prevent wrongif packets from being reported to the
CPU is 15 seconds.
When the switch receives a multicast packet, the switch will search the multicast
forwarding entry according to the source address and destination address of the
packet. If the matching forwarding entry is found and the packet is received on
the right ingress of the forwarding entry, the packet will be forwarded according
to the forwarding entry. If the packet is not received on the right ingress of the
forwarding entry, the packet is regarded as a wrongif packet. The wrongif packet
will be reported to the CPU.
In some network, many wrongif packets will be reported to the CPU of the switch,
thus aggravating the workload of the switch. In this case, you can configure the
holdtime of wrongif packets, so that the wrongif packets will be dropped instead
of being forwarded to the CPU of the switch, and the CPU will be prevented from
being stricken by too many packets.
In the configured holdtime, wrongif packets are not reported to the CPU, so that
the CPU can be prevented from being stricken by too many multicast packets.
Example # Set the holdtime of wrongif packets to 60 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast wrongif-holdtime 60
518 CHAPTER 38: COMMON IP MULTICAST CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
multicast-source-deny enable interface
Syntax multicast-source-deny enable [ interface interface-list ]
undo multicast-source-deny enable [ interface interface-list ]
View System view
Parameter interface-list: Specifies Ethernet port list, expressed in the form of interface-list = {
{ interface-type interface-num | interface-name } [ to { interface-type
interface-num | interface-name } ] }&<1-10>. The interface-number argument
refers to one single Ethernet port, expressed in the form of interface-number = {
interface-type interface-number | interface-name }, where the interface-type
argument refers to the port type, the interface-number argument refers to the
port number, and the interface-name argument refers to the port name. For
meanings and value ranges of interface-type, interface-number and
interface-name, refer to “interface” on page 205.
Description Use the multicast-source-deny enable command to enable the multicast
source port suppression feature.
Use the undo multicast-source-deny enable command to restore the default
setting.
By default, the multicast source port suppression feature is disabled on all the
ports.
The multicast source port suppression feature can filter multicast packets on the
unauthorized multicast source port in order to avoid the case that the user
connected to the port sets the multicast server privately.
In the system view, if the interface-list argument is not specified, the multicast
source port suppression feature is enabled globally, that is, the feature is enabled
on all the ports of the switch; if the interface-list argument is specified, the
multicast source port suppression feature is enabled on the specified ports. In
Ethernet port view, the interface-list argument cannot be specified in the
command and you can use the command to enable the multicast source port
suppression feature on the current port only.
c CAUTION: The multicast source port suppression feature is not supported on the
following I/O Modules: 3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A, 3C16859, and 3C16858.
Example # Enable the multicast source port suppression feature on Ethernet 2/0/1 and
Ethernet 2/0/2.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast-source-deny enable interface Ethernet 2/0/1 to Ethernet 2/0/2
multicast-source-deny enable 519
multicast-source-deny enable
Syntax multicast-source-deny enable
undo multicast-source-deny enable
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the multicast-source-deny enable command to enable multicast source
port suppression.
Use the undo multicast-source-deny enable command to restore multicast
source port suppression to the default settings.
By default, the multicast source port suppression feature is disabled on a port.
The multicast source port suppression feature can filter multicast packets on the
unauthorized multicast source port in order to avoid the case that the user
connected to the port sets the multicast server privately.
c CAUTION: The multicast source port suppression feature is not supported on the
following I/O Modules: 3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A, 3C16859, and 3C16858.
Example # Enable the multicast source port suppression feature on Ethernet 2/0/1.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] multicast-source-deny enable
reset multicast forwarding-table
Syntax reset multicast forwarding-table [ statistics ] { all | { group-address [ mask {
group-mask | group-mask-length } ] | source-address [ mask { source-mask |
source-mask-length } ] | incoming-interface interface-type interface-number } * }
View User view
Parameter statistics: Clears the statistics information about MFC forwarding entries if this
keyword is specified. Otherwise, MFC forwarding entries will be cleared.
all: Refers to all MFC forwarding entries.
group-address: Specifies the group address.
group-mask: Specifies the mask of the group address.
group-mask-length: Specifies the mask length of the group address.
520 CHAPTER 38: COMMON IP MULTICAST CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
source-address: Specifies the source address.
source-mask: Specifies the mask of the source address.
source-mask-length: Specifies the mask length of the source address.
incoming-interface: Specifies the incoming interface of the forwarding entry.
interface-type interface-number: VLAN interface type and VLAN interface number.
Description Use the reset multicast forwarding-table command to clear MFC forwarding
entries or the statistics information about MFC forwarding entries.
The order of the group-address argument and the source-address argument can
be turned over. However, you must input valid group addresses and source
addresses. Otherwise, the system prompts error.
Related command: reset pim routing-table, reset multicast routing-table, and reset multicast
forwarding-table.
Example # Clear the forwarding entries whose group address is 225.5.4.3 in the MFC
forwarding table.
<SW7750> reset multicast forwarding-table 225.5.4.3
# Clear the statistics information about the forwarding entries whose group
address is 225.5.4.3 in the MFC forwarding table.
<SW7750> reset multicast forwarding-table statistics 225.5.4.3
reset multicast routing-table
Syntax reset multicast routing-table { all | { group-address [ mask { group-mask |
group-mask-length } ] | source-address [ mask { source-mask | source-mask-length
} ] | incoming-interface interface-type interface-number } * }
View User view
Parameter all: All routing entries in the multicast core routing table.
group-address: Specifies the group address.
group-mask: Specifies the mask of the group address.
group-mask-length: Specifies the mask length of the group address.
source-address: Specifies the source address.
source-mask: Specifies the mask of the source address.
source-mask-length: Specifies the mask length of the source address.
reset multicast routing-table 521
incoming-interface: Specifies the incoming interface of the routing entry.
interface-type interface-number: VLAN interface type and VLAN interface number.
Description Use the reset multicast routing-table command to clear the routing entries in
the multicast core routing table and remove the corresponding forwarding entries
in the MFC forwarding table.
The order of the group-address argument and the source-address argument can
be turned over. However, you must input valid group addresses and source
addresses. Otherwise, the system prompts error.
Related command: reset pim routing-table, reset multicast forwarding-table and display
multicast forwarding-table.
Example # Clear the routing entries whose group address is 225.5.4.3 from the multicast
core routing table.
<SW7750> reset multicast routing-table 225.5.4.3
522 CHAPTER 38: COMMON IP MULTICAST CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
STATIC MULTICAST MAC ADDRESS
39 TABLE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display mac-address multicast
Syntax display mac-address multicast [ count ]
View Any view
Parameter count: Number of MAC entries.
Description Use the display mac-address multicast static command to display the
multicast MAC address entry/entries configured on the switch.
Executing this command with the count keyword will display the information
about the number of multicast MAC address entries configured on the switch.
Example # Display all the multicast MAC address entries manually added in VLAN 1.
<SW7750> display mac-address multicast count
1 mac address(es) found
mac-address multicast interface
Syntax mac-address multicast mac-address interface interface-list vlan vlan-id
undo mac-address multicast [ mac-address [ interface interface-list ] vlan
vlan-id ]
View System view
Parameter mac-address: Multicast MAC address.
vlan-id: VLAN ID.
interface-list: Forwarding port list, in the format of { { interface-type interface-num
} [ to { interface-type interface-num } ] }&<1-10>. Where, interface-type is a port
type, interface-number is a port number (refer to interface on page 205), to is
used to specify a port range, and &<1-10> represents you can totally specify up to
10 ports and port ranges.
Description Use the mac-address multicast command to manually add a multicast MAC
address entry.
524 CHAPTER 39: STATIC MULTICAST MAC ADDRESS TABLE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo mac-address multicast command to remove a multicast MAC
address entry.
Each multicast MAC address entry contains: multicast address, forward port, VLAN
ID, and so on.
Related command: display mac-address multicast.
Example # Add a multicast MAC address entry, with the multicast address being
0100-5e0a-0805, the forwarding port being Ethernet 2/0/1, and the native VLAN
being VLAN 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mac-address multicast 0100-5e0a-0805 interface Ethernet 2/0/1 vlan 1
IGMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
40
n When running IP multicast protocols, Ethernet switches also provide the functions
of switches. We use routers in this manual to stand for not only the common
routers but also the layer 3 Ethernet switches running IP multicast protocols.
display igmp group
Syntax display igmp group [ group-address | interface interface-type interface-number
]
View Any view
Parameter group-address: Address of the multicast group.
interface-type interface-number: VLAN interface type and VLAN interface number
of the router which are used to specify a VLAN interface. .
Description Use the display igmp group command to view the member information of the
IGMP multicast group.
You can specify to show the information of a group or the member information of
the multicast group on a VLAN interface. The displayed information contains the
multicast groups which are joined by the downstream hosts through IGMP or
through command line.
Related command: igmp host-join.
Example # View the member information of multicast group in the system.
<SW7750> display igmp group
LoopBack0 (20.20.20.20): Total 3 IGMP Groups reported:
Group Address Last Reporter Uptime Expires
225.1.1.1 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:15
225.1.1.3 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:15
225.1.1.2 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:17
Table 87 Output description of the display igmp group command
Field Description
Group address Multicast group address
Last Reporter The last host reporting to join in the multicast group
Uptime Time passed since multicast group is discovered (hh: mm: ss).
526 CHAPTER 40: IGMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 87 Output description of the display igmp group command
Field Description
Expires Specifies when the member will be removed from the multicast group (hh:
mm: ss).
display igmp interface
Syntax display igmp interface [ interface-type interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: VLAN interface type and VLAN interface number
of the router which are used to specify a VLAN interface. If this argument is not
specified, the information about all the VLAN interfaces where IGMP is running is
displayed.
Description Use the display igmp interface command to view the IGMP configuration and
running information on a VLAN interface.
Example # View the IGMP configuration and running information of all VLAN interfaces.
<SW7750> display igmp interface
Vlan-interface1 (10.153.17.99):
IGMP is enabled
Current IGMP version is 2
Value of query interval for IGMP(in seconds): 60
Value of other querier time out for IGMP(in seconds): 120
Value of maximum query response time for IGMP(in seconds): 10
Value of robust count for IGMP: 2
Value of startup query interval for IGMP(in seconds): 15
Value of last member query interval for IGMP(in seconds): 1
Value of query timeout for IGMP version 1(in seconds): 400
Policy to accept IGMP reports: none
Querier for IGMP: 10.153.17.99 (this router)
IGMP group limit is 256
No IGMP group reported
Table 88 Field descriptions of the display igmp interface command
Field Description
IGMP version IGMP version
query interval Interval of general query
querier timeout Timeout time of the querier
max query response time Maximum time of response to query
robust count IGMP robust count, that is, the times of sending IGMP
group-specific query packets before the IGMP querier receives
the IGMP leave packet from the host
startup query interval The startup interval of IGMP to send query packets
last member query interval The interval of sending IGMP group-specific query packets
when the IGMP querier receives the IGMP leave packets from
the host
query timeout Query timeout in IGMP version 1
igmp enable 527
Table 88 Field descriptions of the display igmp interface command
Field Description
Policy to accept IGMP reports The filtering policy of the IGMP multicast group to control the
access to IP multicast groups
Querier for IGMP IGMP querier
IGMP group limit Limit on the number of IGMP groups added to the VLAN
interface. The router does not process new IGMP packets
when the number of IGMP packet exceeds the limit
igmp enable
Syntax igmp enable
undo igmp enable
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use igmp enable command to enable IGMP on an interface.
Use the undo igmp enable command to disable IGMP on the interface.
By default, IGMP is disabled on a VLAN interface. .
These commands do not take effect until the multicast routing feature is enabled.
After this configuration, start to configure other IGMP features.
Related command: multicast routing-enable.
Example # Enable IGMP on Vlan-interface 10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] igmp enable
igmp group-limit
Syntax igmp group-limit limit
undo igmp group-limit
View VLAN interface view
Parameter limit: Quantity of multicast groups, in the range of 0 to 256.
528 CHAPTER 40: IGMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the igmp group-limit command to limit the number of multicast groups on
an interface. The router does not process new packets when number of IGMP
groups exceeds the limit.
Use the undo igmp group-limit command to restore the default setting.
By default, 256 IGMP groups are added to a VLAN interface.
The new configuration overwrites the old one if you run the command for a
second time.
c CAUTION:
■ New groups cannot be added when the number of IGMP multicast groups has
exceeded the configured limit.
■ If the number of existing multicast groups on the interface is more than the
configured limit, the system will remove some old groups automatically to
satisfy the configured limit.
Example # Limit the maximum number of IGMP groups on Vlan-interface10 to 100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] igmp group-limit 100
igmp group-policy
Syntax igmp group-policy acl-number [ 1 | 2 | port interface-list ]
undo igmp group-policy [ port interface-list ]
View VLAN interface view
Parameter acl-number: Number of the basic IP access control list number, defining a multicast
group range. The value ranges from 2000 to 2999.
1: IGMP version 1.
2: IGMP version 2. If IGMP version is not specified, version 2 will be used by
default.
port: Limits the IGMP packets passing the port and matching with the ACL rules.
interface-list: Forwarding port list in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to { interface-type interface-number } ] }&<1-10>. The
interface-type argument refers to the port type, and the interface-number
argument refers to the port number. For the meanings and ranges of the two
arguments, refer to “interface” on page 205.
Description Use the igmp group-policy command to set the filter of multicast groups on the
VLAN interface to control the access to IP multicast groups.
igmp group-policy vlan 529
Use undo igmp group-policy command to remove the filter configured.
By default, no filter is configured, that is, a host can join any multicast group.
If you do not want the hosts on the network that the VLAN interface is on to join
some multicast groups and receive packets from the multicast groups to use this
command to limit the range of the multicast groups serviced by the VLAN
interface.
Related command: igmp host-join.
c CAUTION: Ethernet ports must belong to the igmp-group-policy-enabled VLAN
interfaces only.
Example # Configure the access-list 2000.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl number 2000
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 225.0.0.0 0.255.255.255
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] quit
# Configure that only the hosts matching ACL 2000 rules on VLAN-interface10
can be added to the multicast group whose IGMP version is specified to 2.
[SW7750-vlan-interface10] igmp group-policy 2000 2
igmp group-policy vlan
Syntax igmp group-policy acl-number vlan vlan-id
undo igmp group-policy vlan vlan-id
View Port view
Parameter acl-number: Number of the basic IP access control list number, defining a multicast
group range. The value ranges from 2000 to 2999.
vlan-id: Specifies the ID for the VLAN to which the port belongs.
Description Use the igmp group-policy vlan command to set the filter of multicast groups
on a port to control the access to the IP multicast groups.
Use the undo igmp group-policy vlan command to remove the configured
filter.
By default, no filter is configured, that is, a host can join any multicast group.
This command has the same function with the igmp group-policy command.
Note that the configured port must belong to the specified VLAN, and the IGMP
protocol must be enabled on this port; otherwise, the configuration does not
function.
530 CHAPTER 40: IGMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Related command: igmp group-policy, igmp host-join vlan, and igmp host-join port.
Example # Configure that only the hosts matching ACL 2000 rules on Ethernet 2/0/1 in
VLAN-interface 10 can be added to the multicast group.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] igmp enable
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] quit
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port access vlan 10
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] igmp group-policy 2000 vlan 10
igmp host-join port
Syntax igmp host-join group-address port interface-list
undo igmp host-join group-address port interface-list
View VLAN interface view
Parameter group-address: Multicast address of the multicast group that an interface will join.
port: Specifies the port in the VLAN interface.
interface-list: Forwarding port list in the form of interface-list = { interface-type
interface-number [ to { interface-type interface-number } ] }&<1-10>. The
interface-type argument refers to the port type, and the interface-number
argument refers to the port number. For the meanings and ranges of the two
arguments, refer to “interface” on page 205.
Description Use the igmp host-join port command to configure simulated joining in VLAN
interface view.
Use undo igmp host-join port command to restore the default.
By default, VLAN interfaces of a switch do not belong to any multicast group.
Related command: igmp group-policy.
Example # Add port Ethernet 2/0/1 in VLAN 10 to the multicast group 225.0.0.1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] igmp host-join 225.0.0.1 port Ethernet 2/0
/1
igmp host-join vlan 531
igmp host-join vlan
Syntax igmp host-join group-address vlan vlan-id
undo igmp host-join group-address vlan vlan-id
View Port view
Parameter group-address: Multicast address of the multicast group that an interface will join.
vlan-id: Specifies the ID for the VLAN to which the port belongs.
Description Use the igmp host-join vlan command to configure simulated joining in port
view.
Use the undo igmp host-join vlan command to restore the default.
By default, an Ethernet port does not join any multicast group.
Related command: igmp group-policy.
Example # Add Ethernet 2/0/1 in VLAN 10 to the multicast group at 225.0.0.1.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] igmp enable
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] quit
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] port access vlan 10
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] igmp host-join 225.0.0.1 vlan 10
igmp lastmember-queryinterval
Syntax igmp lastmember-queryinterval seconds
undo igmp lastmember-queryinterval
View VLAN interface view
Parameter seconds: Interval for the IGMP querier to send IGMP group-specific query packets
when it receives IGMP leave packets from the host. It is in the range of 1 second to
5 seconds.
Description Use the igmp lastmember-queryinterval command to set the Interval for the
IGMP querier to send IGMP group-specific query packets when it receives IGMP
leave packets from the host.
Use the undo igmp lastmember-queryinterval command to restore the
default value.
532 CHAPTER 40: IGMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
The interval for the IGMP querier to send IGMP group-specific query packets is one
second by default.
In the shared network, that is, a same network segment including multiple hosts
and multicast routers, the query router (also known as querier) is responsible for
maintaining the IGMP group membership on the interface. When the IGMP v2
host leaves a group, it sends an IGMP Leave message.
When receiving the IGMP Leave message, the IGMP querier must send the IGMP
group-specific query messages for specified times (by the robust-value argument
in the igmp robust-count command, with default value as 2) in a specified time
interval (by the seconds argument in the igmp lastmember-queryinterval
command, with default value as 1 second). If other hosts which are interested in
the specified group receive the IGMP query message from the IGMP query router,
they will send back the IGMP Membership Report message within the specified
maximum response time interval. If it receives the IGMP Membership Report
message within the defined period (equal to robust-value × seconds), the IGMP
query router continue to maintain the membership of this group. When receiving
no IGMP Membership Report message from any hosts within the defined period,
the IGMP query router considers it as timeout and stops membership maintenance
for the group.
This command is only available on the IGMP query router running IGMP v2. For
the host running IGMP v1, this command cannot take effect because the host
does not send the IGMP Leave message when it leaves a group.
Related command: igmp robust-count and display igmp interface.
Example # Set the query interval at the Vlan-interface10 as 3 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] igmp lastmember-queryinterval 3
igmp max-response-time
Syntax igmp max-response-time seconds
undo igmp max-response-time
View VLAN interface view
Parameter seconds: Maximum response time in the IGMP query messages in second in the
range from 1 to 25. By default, the value is 10 seconds.
Description Use the igmp max-response-time command to configure the maximum
response time contained in the IGMP query messages.
igmp proxy 533
Use the undo igmp max-response-time command to restore the default
value.
The maximum query response time is 10 seconds by default.
The maximum query response time determines the period for a router to quickly
detect that there are no more directly connected group members in a LAN.
Related command: display igmp group.
Example # Set the maximum response time carried in host-query packets to 8 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] igmp max-response-time 8
igmp proxy
Syntax igmp proxy Vlan-interface interface-number
undo igmp proxy
View Interface view
Parameter interface-number: Proxy interface number.
Description Use the igmp proxy command to specify an interface of the Layer 3 endpoint
switch as the IGMP proxy interface of another interface.
Use the undo igmp proxy command to disable this configuration.
The IGMP proxy feature is disabled by default.
You must enable the PIM protocol on the interface first before enabling the igmp
proxy command on the interface. Only one IGMP proxy interface can be
configured for an interface.
One interface cannot serve as the IGMP proxy interface of two or more interfaces.
If the IGMP proxy feature is configured on the same interface for multiple times,
the latest configuration takes effect.
Related command: pim neighbor-policy.
c CAUTION:
■ Both multicast routing and IGMP must be enabled on a proxy interface.
■ Before configuring the igmp proxy command on an interface, make sure that
PIM DM is enabled on this interface. Otherwise, the IGMP proxy feature does
not take effect.
534 CHAPTER 40: IGMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
■ Only one IGMP proxy interface can be configured for an interface.
Example # Configure VLAN-interface 2 as the IGMP proxy interface of VLAN-interface 1 on
the Layer 3 switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] interface vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] igmp enable
[SW7750- Vlan-interface1] igmp proxy vlan-interface 2
igmp report-aggregation
Syntax igmp report-aggregation
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the igmp report-aggregation command to enable suppression on Layer 3
multicast IGMP report packets. On an IP-multicast-routing-enabled switch, the
VLAN interface receives only the first IGMP report packet from a multicast group in
a query interval.
Use the undo igmp-snooping report-aggregation command to disable
suppression on Layer 3 multicast IGMP report packets.
By default, suppression on IGMP report packets is disabled.
n ■ You must enable IP multicast routing globally before configuring suppression
on IGMP report packets.
■ If IP multicast routing is disabled globally, suppression on IGMP report packets
is disabled simultaneously.
Example # Enable suppression on Layer 3 multicast IGMP report packets on the switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] igmp report-aggregation
igmp robust-count
Syntax igmp robust-count robust-value
undo igmp robust-count
View VLAN interface view
igmp timer other-querier-present 535
Parameter robust-value: IGMP robust value, number of sending the IGMP group-specific
query packets after the IGMP querier receives the IGMP Leave packet from the
host. It is in the range of 2 times to 5 times.
Description Use the igmp robust-count command to set the number of sending the IGMP
group query message after the IGMP query router receives the IGMP Leave
message from the host.
Use the undo igmp robust-count command to restore the default value.
By default, an IGMP querier sends IGMP group-specific query packets twice.
In the shared network, that is, a same network segment including multiple hosts
and multicast routers, the query router is responsible for maintaining the IGMP
group membership on the interface. When the IGMP v2 host leaves a group, it
sends an IGMP Leave message. When receiving the IGMP Leave message, IGMP
query router must send the IGMP group-specific query message for specified times
(by the robust-value parameter in the igmp robust-count command, with default
value as 2) in a specified time interval (by the seconds parameter in the igmp
lastmember-queryinterval command, with default value as 1 second). If other
hosts which are interested in the specific group receive the IGMP group-specific
query packets from the IGMP query router, they will send back the IGMP
Membership Report packets within the specified maximum response time interval.
If it receives the IGMP Membership Report packets within the defined period
(equal to robust-value × seconds), the IGMP query router continue to maintain the
membership of this group. When receiving no IGMP Membership Report packet
from any hosts within the defined period, the IGMP query router considers it as
timeout and stops membership maintenance for the group.
This command is only available on the IGMP query router running IGMP v2. For
the host running IGMP v1, this command cannot take effect because the host
does not send IGMP Leave packets when it leaves a group.
Related command: igmp lastmember-queryinterval and display igmp interface.
Example # Set the robust value of the Vlan-interface 10 to 3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] igmp robust-count 3
igmp timer other-querier-present
Syntax igmp timer other-querier-present seconds
undo igmp timer other-querier-present
View VLAN interface view
536 CHAPTER 40: IGMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter seconds: Presence time of the IGMP querier, in the range of 1 to 131,070 in
seconds.
Description Use the igmp timer other-querier-present command to configure the
presence time of the IGMP querier.
Use the undo igmp timer other-querier-present command to restore the
default value.
By default, the presence time of the IGMP querier is twice the value of IGMP query
message interval, that is, 120 seconds.
On a shared network, i.e., there are multiple multicast routers on the same
network segment, the query router (querier for short) takes charge of sending
query messages periodically on the interface. If other non-queriers receive no
query messages within the valid period, the router will consider the previous
querier to be invalid and the router itself becomes a querier.
In IGMP version 1, the selection of a querier is determined by the multicast routing
protocol. In IGMP version 2, the router with the lowest IP address on the shared
network segment acts as the querier.
Related command: igmp timer query, and display igmp interface.
Example # Set the querier to expire after 300 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] igmp timer other-querier-present 300
igmp timer query
Syntax igmp timer query seconds
undo igmp timer query
View VLAN interface view
Parameter seconds: Interval at which a router transmits IGMP query messages, in the range
of 1 to 65,535 seconds.
Description Use the igmp timer query command to configure the interval at which a router
interface sends IGMP query messages.
Use the undo igmp timer query command to restore the default value.
By default, a router interface transmits IGMP query messages at the interval of 60
seconds.
igmp version 537
A multicast router periodically sends out IGMP query messages to attached
segments to find hosts that belong to different multicast groups. The query
interval can be modified according to the practical conditions of the network.
Related command: igmp timer other-querier-present.
Example # Configure to transmit the host-query message every 150 seconds via
VLAN-interface2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] igmp timer query 150
igmp version
Syntax igmp version { 1 | 2 }
undo igmp version
View VLAN interface view
Parameter 1: IGMP Version 1.
2: IGMP Version 2.
Description Use the igmp version command to specify the version of IGMP that a router
uses.
Use the undo igmp version command to restore the default value.
The default IGMP version is IGMP version 2.
All routers on a subnet must support the same version of IGMP. After detecting
the presence of IGMP Version 1 system, a router cannot automatically switch to
Version 1.
Example # Run IGMP Version 1 on VLAN-interface10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] igmp version 1
reset igmp group
Syntax reset igmp group { all | interface interface-type interface-number { all |
group-address [ group-mask ] } }
View User view
538 CHAPTER 40: IGMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter all: All IGMP groups.
interface-type interface-number: VLAN interface type and VLAN interface number.
group-address: IGMP group address.
group-mask: Mask of IGMP group address.
Description Use the reset igmp group command to delete an existing IGMP group from the
VLAN interface. The deleted group can be added to the VLAN interface again.
Example # Delete all IGMP groups on all the VLAN interfaces.
<SW7750> reset igmp group all
# Delete all IGMP groups on Vlan-interface10.
<SW7750> reset igmp group interface Vlan-interface10 all
# Delete the group 225.0.0.1 from Vlan-interface10.
<SW7750> reset igmp group interface Vlan-interface10 225.0.0.1
# Delete the IGMP groups ranging from 225.1.1.0 to 225.1.1.255 on
Vlan-interface10.
<SW7750> reset igmp group interface Vlan-interface10 225.1.1.0 255.2
55.255.0
PIM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
41
bsr-policy
Syntax bsr-policy acl-number
undo bsr-policy
View PIM view
Parameter acl-number: ACL number imported in BSR filtering policy, in the range of 2,000 to
2,999.
Description Use the bsr-policy command to limit the range of legal BSRs to prevent BSR
proofing.
Use the undo bsr-policy command to restore the default setting, that is, no
range limit is set and all received messages are taken as legal.
In the PIM SM network using BSR (bootstrap router) mechanism, every router can
set itself as C-BSR (candidate BSR) and take the authority to advertise RP
information in the network once it wins in the contention. To prevent malicious
BSR proofing in the network, the following two measures need to be taken:
■ Prevent the router from being spoofed by hosts though faking legal BSR
messages to modify RP mapping. BSR messages are of multicast type and their
TTL is 1, so this type of attacks often hit edge routers. Fortunately, BSRs are
inside the network, while assaulting hosts are outside, therefore neighbor and
RPF checks can be used to stop this type of attacks.
■ If a router in the network is manipulated by an attacker, or an illegal router is
accessed into the network, the attacker may set itself as C-BSR and try to win
the contention and gain authority to advertise RP information among the
network. Since the router configured as C-BSR shall propagate BSR messages,
which are multicast messages sent hop by hop with TTL as 1, among the
network, then the network cannot be affected as long as the peer routers do
not receive these BSR messages. One way is to configure bsr-policy on each
router to limit legal BSR range, for example, only 1.1.1.1/32 and 1.1.1.2/32 can
be BSR, thus the routers cannot receive or forward BSR messages other than
these two. Even legal BSRs cannot contest with them.
Problems may still exist if a legal BSR is attacked, though these two measures can
effectively guarantee high BSR security.
540 CHAPTER 41: PIM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
The source parameter in the rule command is translated as BSR address in the
bsr-policy command.
Related command: acl, rule (Basic ACL), rule (Advanced ACL), rule (Layer 2 ACL), and rule
(user-defined ACL).
Example # Configure BSR filtering policy on routers, only 101.1.1.1/32 can be BSR.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] pim
[SW7750-pim] bsr-policy 2000
[SW7750-pim] quit
[SW7750] acl number 2000
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule 0 permit source 101.1.1.1 0
c-bsr
Syntax c-bsr interface-type interface-number hash-mask-len [ priority ]
undo c-bsr
View PIM view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Specifies the VLAN interface. The candidate BSR
is configured on the VLAN interface. PIM-SM must be enabled on the VLAN
interface first.
hash-mask-len: Length of the mask. The value ranges from 0 to 32.
priority: Priority of the candidate BSR. The larger the value of the priority, the
higher the priority of the BSR. The value ranges from 0 to 255. By default, the
priority is 0.
Description Use the c-bsr command to configure a candidate BSR.
Use the undo c-bsr command to remove the candidate BSR configured.
By default, no candidate BSR is set.
When configure the candidate BSR, the larger bandwidth should be guaranteed
since a great amount of information will be exchanged between BSR and other
devices in the PIM domain.
Related command: pim sm.
Example # Configure the switch as a BSR with priority 2 (and the C-BSR address is
designated as the IP address of VLAN-interface10).
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
c-rp 541
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] pim
[SW7750-pim] c-bsr vlan-interface 10 24 2
c-rp
Syntax c-rp interface-type interface-number [ group-policy acl-number | priority
priority-value ]*
undo c-rp { interface-type interface-number | all }
View PIM view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Specifies the VLAN interface whose IP address is
advertised as a candidate RP address.
acl-number: Number of the basic ACL that defines a group range, which is the
service range of the advertised RP. The value ranges from 2000 to 2999.
priority-value: Priority value of candidate RP, in the range of 0 to 255. The greatest
value corresponds to the lowest priority level
all: Remove all candidate RP configurations.
Description Use the c-rp command to configure the router to advertise itself as a candidate RP.
Use the undo c-rp command to remove the configuration.
By default, no candidate RP is configured, and the value of RP priority is 0.
When configuring the candidate RP, a relatively large bandwidth should be
reserved for the router and other devices in the PIM domain.
Related command: c-bsr.
Example # Configure the switch to advertise the BSR that the switch itself is the C-RP in the
PIM. The standard access list 2000 defines the groups related to the RP. The
address of C-RP is designated as the IP address of VLAN-interface10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] acl number 2000
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 225.0.0.0 0.255.255.255
[SW7750] pim
[SW7750-pim] c-rp vlan-interface 10 group-policy 2000
crp-policy
Syntax crp-policy acl-number
542 CHAPTER 41: PIM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
undo crp-policy
View PIM view
Parameter acl-number: ACL number imported in C-RP filtering policy, ranging from 3000 to
3999.
Description Use the crp-policy command to limit the range of legal C-RP, as well as target
service group range of each C-RP, prevent C-RP proofing.
Use the undo crp-policy command to restore the default setting, that is, no
range limit is set and all received messages are taken as legal.
In the PIM SM network using BSR mechanism, every router can set itself as C-RP
(candidate rendezvous point) servicing particular groups. If elected, a C-RP
becomes the RP servicing the current group.
In BSR mechanism, a C-RP router unicast C-RP messages to the BSR, which then
propagates the C-RP messages among the network by BSR message. To prevent
C-RP spoofing, you need to configure crp-policy on the BSR to limit legal C-RP
range and their service group range. Since each C-BSR has the chance to become
BSR, you must configure the same filtering policy on each C-BSR router.
This command uses the ACLs numbered between 3000 and 3999. The source
parameter in the rule command is translated as C-RP address in the crp-policy
command, and the destination parameter as the service group range of this C-RP
address. For the C-RP messages received, only when their C-RP addresses match
the source address and their server group addresses are subset of those in ACL,
can the be considered as matched.
Related command: acl, rule (Basic ACL), rule (Advanced ACL), rule (Layer 2 ACL), and rule
(user-defined ACL).
Example # Configure C-RP filtering policy on the C-BSR routers, allowing only 1.1.1.1/32 as
C-RP and to serve only for the groups 225.1.0.0/16.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] pim
[SW7750-pim] crp-policy 3000
[SW7750-pim] quit
[SW7750] acl number 3000
[SW7750-acl-adv-3000] rule 0 permit source 1.1.1.1 0 destination 225.1.0.0 0.0.255.255
display pim bsr-info
Syntax display pim bsr-info
View Any view
Parameter None
display pim interface 543
Description Use the display pim bsr-info command to view the BSR information.
Related command: c-bsr, and c-rp.
Example # Display the BSR information.
<SW7750> display pim bsr-info
Current BSR Address: 20.20.20.30
Priority: 0
Mask Length: 30
Expires: 00:01:55
Local host is BSR
Table 89 Field descriptions of the display pim bsr-info command
Field Description
BSR Bootstrap router
Priority Priority of BSR
Mask Length: 30 Length of mask
Expires: 00:01:55 Value of the timer
display pim interface
Syntax display pim interface [ interface-type interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number, used to
specify the VLAN interface.
Description Use the display pim interface command to view the PIM configuration
information of the interface.
If neither the VLAN interface type nor the VLAN interface number is specified, the
PIM configuration information of all VLAN interfaces is displayed; if both the VLAN
interface type and the VLAN interface number are specified, the PIM configuration
information about the specified VLAN interface is displayed.
Example # Display the PIM configuration information about the VLAN interface.
<SW7750> display pim interface
PIM information of VLAN-interface 2:
IP address of the interface is 10.10.1.20
PIM is enabled on interface
PIM version is 2
PIM mode is Sparse
PIM query interval is 30 seconds
PIM neighbor limit is 128
PIM neighbor policy is none
Total 1 PIM neighbor on interface
PIM DR(designated router) is 10.10.1.20
544 CHAPTER 41: PIM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 90 Field descriptions of the display pim interface command
Field Description
PIM version Version of PIM
PIM mode PIM mode enabled on the VLAN interface (DM or SM)
PIM query interval Hello packet interval
PIM neighbor limit Limit of the PIM neighbors on the VLAN interface. No neighbor can be
added any more when the limit is reached
PIM neighbor policy Filtering policy of the PIM neighbors on the current interface
PIM DR Designated router
display pim neighbor
Syntax display pim neighbor [ interface interface-type interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number, used to
specify the VLAN interface.
Description Use the display pim neighbor command to view the PIM neighbor information
discovered by the VLAN interface of the switch. If the VLAN interface parameter is
specified, only the PIM neighbor information about the specified VLAN interface is
displayed.
Example # Display the PIM neighbor information discovered by the VLAN interface of the
neighbor.
<SW7750> display pim neighbor
Neighbor’s Address Interface Name Uptime Expires
8.8.8.6 VLAN-interface10 01:29:18 00:01:34
Table 91 Field descriptions of the display pim neighbor command
Field Description
Neighbor’s Address Neighbor address
Interface name VLAN interface where the neighbor has been discovered
Uptime Time passed since the multicast group has been discovered
Expires Specifies when the member will be removed from the group
display pim routing-table
Syntax display pim routing-table [ { { *g [ group-address [ mask { mask-length | mask }
] ] | **rp [ rp-address [ mask { mask-length | mask } ] ] } | { group-address [ mask {
mask-length | mask } ] | source-address [ mask { mask-length | mask } ] } * } |
incoming-interface { interface-type interface-number | null } | { dense-mode |
sparse-mode } ] *
View Any view
display pim routing-table 545
Parameter **rp: (*, *, RP) route entry.
*g: (*, G) route entry.
group-address: Address of the multicast group.
source-address: IP address of the multicast source.
incoming-interface interface-type interface-number: View the route entry whose
incoming VLAN interface is the specified VLAN interface.
null: Specifies the VLAN interface type as Null.
dense-mode: Specifies the multicast routing protocol as PIM-DM.
sparse-mode: Specifies the multicast routing protocol as PIM-SM.
Description Use the display pim routing-table command to view information about the
PIM multicast routing table.
The displayed information about the PIM multicast routing table includes the SPT
information and RPF information.
Example # Display the information about the PIM multicast routing table.
<SW7750> display pim routing-table
PIM-SM Routing Table
Total 0 (*,*,RP)entry, 0 (*,G)entry, 2 (S,G)entries
(192.168.1.2, 224.2.178.130),
Protocol 0x20: PIMSM, Flag 0x4: SPT
UpTime: 23:59, Timeout after 196 seconds
Upstream interface: VLAN-interface2, RPF neighbor: NULL
Downstream interface list: NULL
(192.168.1.2, 224.2.181.90),
Protocol 0x20: PIMSM, Flag 0x4: SPT
UpTime: 23:59, Timeout after 196 seconds
Upstream interface: VLAN-interface2, RPF neighbor: NULL
Downstream interface list: NULL
Total 2 entries listed
Table 92 Field descriptions of the display routing-table command
Field Description
RP Rendezvous Point
(S,G) (source address, multicast group)
PIM-SM PIM Sparse Mode
SPT Shortest Path Tree
RPF Reverse Path Forwarding
546 CHAPTER 41: PIM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display pim rp-info
Syntax display pim rp-info [ group-address ]
View Any view
Parameter group-address: Specifies the group address to display. If no multicast group is
specified, the RP information about all multicast groups will be displayed.
Description Use the display pim rp-info command to view the RP information of the
multicast group.
In addition, this command can also display the BSR and static RP information.
Example # View the RP information of the multicast group
<SW7750> display pim rp-info
PIM-SM RP-SET information:
BSR is: 4.4.4.6
Group/MaskLen: 224.0.0.0/4
RP 4.4.4.6
Version: 2
Priority: 0
Uptime: 00:39:50
Expires: 00:01:40
Table 93 Field descriptions of the display pim rp-info command
Field Description
PIM-SM RP-SET information: Combination of RP information sets
BSR is: 4.4.4.6 BSR is the VLAN interface of 4.4.4.6 in the network
Group/MaskLen: 224.0.0.0/4 The RP whose group address is 224.0.0.0 and mask length is 4
is the virtual interface of the IP address 4.4.4.6.
RP 4.4.4.6
The priority of the version 2 RP is 0. It is up for 39 minutes and
Version: 2
50 seconds and expires in one minutes and forty seconds
Priority: 0
Uptime: 00:39:50
Expires: 00:01:40
pim
Syntax pim
undo pim
View System view
Parameter None
pim bsr-boundary 547
Description Use the pim command to enter PIM view to configure the global PIM parameters.
You cannot use the pim command to enable the PIM protocol.
Use the undo pim command to exit PIM view to system view and clear the global
PIM configuration parameters.
Example # Enter PIM view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] pim
[SW7750-pim]
pim bsr-boundary
Syntax pim bsr-boundary
undo pim bsr-boundary
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the pim bsr-boundary command to configure a VLAN interface of the
switch as the PIM domain boundary.
Use the undo pim bsr-boundary command to remove the configured PIM
domain boundary.
The switch does not set any PIM domain boundary by default.
After you use this command to set a PIM area boundary on a VLAN interface, all
Bootstrap messages cannot cross this domain boundary. However, the other PIM
packets can pass this domain boundary. In this way, you can divide the
PIM-SM-running network into multiple domains, each of which uses a different
Bootstrap router.
Note that you cannot use this command to set up a multicast boundary. Instead,
what you use this command to set up is just a PIM Bootstrap packet boundary.
Related command: c-bsr.
Example # Configure domain boundary on VLAN-interface10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] pim
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] pim bsr-boundary
548 CHAPTER 41: PIM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
pim dm
Syntax pim dm
undo pim dm
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the pim dm command to enable PIM-DM.
Use the undo pim dm command to disable PIM-DM.
By default, PIM-DM is disabled.
Once enabled PIM-DM on an interface, PIM-SM cannot be enabled on the same
interface and vice versa.
Example # Enable the PIM-DM protocol on VLAN-interface10 of the Ethernet switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] pim dm
pim neighbor-limit
Syntax pim neighbor-limit limit
undo pim neighbor-limit
View VLAN interface view
Parameter limit: Upper limit of PIM neighbors on the VLAN interface, in the range of 0~128.
Description Use the pim neighbor-limit command to limit the number PIM neighbors on a
router interface. No neighbor can be added to the router any more when the limit
is reached.
Use the undo pim neighbor-limit command to restore the default setting.
By default, the number of PIM neighbors on a VLAN interface is limited within
128.
If the number of existing PIM neighbors exceeds the configured limit, they will not
be deleted.
Example # Limit the number of PIM neighbors on Vlan-interface10 within 50.
pim neighbor-policy 549
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] pim neighbor-limit 50
pim neighbor-policy
Syntax pim neighbor-policy acl-number
undo pim neighbor-policy
View VLAN interface view
Parameter acl-number: Basic ACL number, in the range of 2000 to 2999.
Description Use the pim neighbor-policy command to configure the router to filter the PIM
neighbors on the current VLAN interface.
Use the undo pim neighbor-policy command to disable the filtering.
Only the routers that match the filtering rule in the ACL can serve as a PIM
neighbor of the current VLAN interface.
The new configuration overwrites the old one if you run the command for a
second time.
Example # Configure that 10.10.1.2 can serve as a PIM neighbor of the Vlan-interface10,
but not 10.10.1.1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] pim neighbor-policy 2000
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] quit
[SW7750] acl number 2000
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 10.10.1.2 0
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule deny source 10.10.1.1 0
pim sm
Syntax pim sm
undo pim sm
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
550 CHAPTER 41: PIM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the pim sm command to enable the PIM-SM protocol.
Use the undo pim sm command to disable the PIM-SM protocol.
By default, the switch disables the PIM-SM protocol.
You must enable the PIM-SM protocol on each VLAN interface respectively.
Generally, the PIM-SM protocol is enabled on each VLAN interface.
Related command: multicast routing-enable.
Example # Enable the PIM-SM protocol on VLAN-interface10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] pim sm
pim timer hello
Syntax pim timer hello seconds
undo pim timer hello
View VLAN interface view
Parameter seconds: Interval at which a VLAN interface sends Hello packets, in the range of 1
second to 18,000 seconds.
Description Use the pim timer hello command to set the interval at which a VLAN interface
sends Hello packets.
Use the undo pim timer hello command to restore the default value of the
interval.
By default, a VLAN interface sends Hello packets at the interval of 30 seconds.
When the PIM-SM protocol is enabled on a VLAN interface, the switch will
periodically send Hello packets to the network devices supporting PIM. If the VLAN
interface receives Hello packets, it means that the VLAN interface has neighboring
network devices supporting PIM, and the VLAN interface will add the neighbors
into its own neighbor list. If the VLAN interface does not receive any Hello packet
from a neighbor in its neighbor list within the specified time, the neighbor is
considered to have left the multicast group.
Example # Configure to VLAN-interface 10 of the switch to send Hello packet at the
interval of 40 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
register-policy 551
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] pim timer hello 40
register-policy
Syntax register-policy acl-number
undo register-policy
View PIM view
Parameter acl-number: Number of IP advanced ACL, defining the rule of filtering the source
and group addresses. The value ranges from 3000 to 3999.
Description Use the register-policy command to configure a RP to filter the register packets
sent by the DR in the PIM-SM network and to accept the specified packets only.
Use the undo register-policy command to remove the configured packet
filtering.
Example # If the local device is the RP in the network, using the following command can
only accept multicast message register of the source sending multicast address in
the range of 225.1.0.0/16 on network segment 10.10.0.0/16.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl number 3010
[SW7750-acl-adv-3010] rule permit ip source 10.10.0.0 0.0.255.255 destination 225.1.0.0 0.0.25
5.255
[SW7750-acl-adv-3010] quit
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] pim
[SW7750-pim] register-policy 3010
spt-switch-threshold
Syntax spt-switch-threshold { traffic-rate | infinity } [ group-policy acl-number [ order
order-value ] ]
undo spt-switch-threshold { traffic-rate | infinity } [ group-policy acl-number ]
View PIM view
Parameter traffic-rate: Rate of sending multicast packets, in kbps ranging from 0 to 65,535.
infinity: Specifies that RPT-to-SPT switchover never takes place.
acl-number: Basic ACL number, in the range of 2000 to 2999. It defines a group
range in which the rate of sending multicast packets is suppressed.
Description Use the spt-switch-threshold command to configure the threshold for
performing RPT-to-SPT switchover.
552 CHAPTER 41: PIM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo spt-switch-threshold command to restore the threshold for
performing RPT-to-SPT switchover to the default value.
By default, the threshold for performing RPT-to-SPT switchover is 0.
In PIM-SM, Ethernet switches forward multicast packets through the RPT initially. If
the rate of sending multicast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the last-hop
switch of the multicast packets will perform RPT-to-SPT switchover.
n Only the threshold 0 and the infinity keyword are supported currently.
■ If the threshold is set to 0, the last-hop switch performs RPT-to-SPT switchover
upon receiving the first multicast packet.
■ The infinity keyword specifies that RPT-to-SPT switchover never takes place.
Example # Set the threshold for perform RPT-to-SPT switchover to 0, that is, specify the
last-hop switch to perform RPT-to-SPT switchover upon receiving the first multicast
packet.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] pim
[SW7750-pim] spt-switch-threshold 0
reset pim neighbor
Syntax reset pim neighbor { all | { neighbor-address | interface interface-type
interface-number } * }
View User view
Parameter all: All PIM neighbors
neighbor-address: Specifies neighbor address.
interface interface-type interface-number: Specifies VLAN interface.
Description Use the reset pim neighbor command to clear all PIM neighbors or PIM
neighbors on the specified VLAN interface.
Related command: display pim neighbor.
Example # Clear the PIM neighbor 25.5.4.3.
<SW7750> reset pim neighbor 25.5.4.3
reset pim routing-table
Syntax reset pim routing-table { all | { group-address [ mask group-mask |
mask-length group-mask-length ] | source-address [ mask source-mask |
reset pim routing-table 553
mask-length source-mask-length ] | { incoming-interface interface-type
interface-number } } * }
View User view
Parameter all: All PIM neighbors
group-address: Specifies group address.
mask group-mask: Specifies group mask.
group-mask-length: Specifies mask length of the group address.
source-address: Specifies source address.
mask source-mask: Specifies source mask.
source-mask-length: Specifies mask length of the group address.
incoming-interface: Specifies incoming interface for the route entry in PIM
routing table.
interface-type interface-number: Specifies the VLAN interface.
Description Use the reset pim routing-table command to clear all PIM route entries or the
specified PIM route entry.
You can type in source address first and group address after in the command, as
long as they are valid. Error information will be given if you type in invalid
addresses.
If in this command, the group-address is 224.0.0.0/4 and source-address is the RP
address (where group address can have a mask, but the resulted IP address must
be 224.0.0.0, and source address has no mask), then it means only the (*, *, RP)
item will be cleared.
If in this command, the group-address is any a group address, and source-address
is 0 (where group address can have a mask, and source address has no mask), then
only the (*, G) item will be cleared.
This command shall clear not only multicast route entries from PIM routing table,
but also the corresponding route entries and forward entries in the multicast core
routing table and MFC.
Related command: reset multicast routing-table, reset multicast forwarding-table, and display
pim routing-table.
Example # Clear the route entries with group address 225.5.4.3 from the PIM routing table.
<SW7750> reset pim neighbor 25.5.4.3
554 CHAPTER 41: PIM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
source-policy
Syntax source-policy acl-number
undo source-policy
View PIM view
Parameter acl-number: Basic or advanced ACL, in the range of 2000 to 3999.
Description Use the source-policy command to configure the router to filter the received
multicast data packets according to the source address or group address.
Use the undo source-policy command to remove the configuration.
If resource address filtering is configured, as well as basic ACLs, then the router
filters the resource addresses of all multicast data packets received. Those not
matched will be discarded.
If resource address filtering is configured, as well as advanced ACLs, then the
router filters the resource and group addresses of all multicast data packets
received. Those not matched will be discarded.
When this feature is configured, the router filters not only multicast data, but the
multicast data encapsulated in the registration packets.
The new configuration overwrites the old one if you run the command for a
second time.
Example # Set to receive the multicast data packets from source address 10.10.1.2, but
discard those from 10.10.1.1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] pim
[SW7750-pim] source-policy 2000
[SW7750-pim] quit
[SW7750] acl number 2000
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 10.10.1.2 0
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule deny source 10.10.1.1 0
static-rp
Syntax static-rp rp-address [ acl-number ] [ preferred ]
undo static-rp rp-address
View PIM view
Parameter rp-address: Static RP address, only being legal unicast IP address.
static-rp 555
acl-number: Basic ACL, used to control the range of multicast group served by
static RP, which ranges from 2000 to 2999. If an ACL is not specified upon
configuration, static RP will serve all multicast groups; if an ACL is specified, static
RP will only serve the multicast group passing the ACL.
preferred: If both a dynamic RP and a static RP exist simultaneously, and if you
have configured the keyword preferred, the static RP is preferred.
Description Use the static-rp command to configure static RP.
Use the undo static-rp command to remove the configuration.
If both C-RPs and static RPs exist simultaneously, an RP is selected from them as
follows:
First, an RP is dynamically elected from the C-RPs based on the BSR mechanism
and the first eligible static RP is selected from the static RPs.
Then, a comparison takes places between the dynamic RP and the static RP. If the
preferred keyword is configured for the static RP, the static RP is preferred;
otherwise, the dynamic RP is preferred.
The new configuration overwrites the old one if you execute the command for a
second time.
Related command: display pim rp-info.
Example # Configure 10.110.0.6 as a static RP.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] multicast routing-enable
[SW7750] pim
[SW7750-pim] static-rp 10.110.0.6
556 CHAPTER 41: PIM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
MSDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
42
cache-sa-enable
Syntax cache-sa-enable
undo cache-sa-enable
View MSDP view
Parameter None
Description Use the cache-sa-enable command to enable the SA message cache
mechanism.
Use the undo cache-sa-enable command to disable the cache mechanism.
By default, the SA message cache mechanism is enabled by default.
If the router is in the cache state, it sends no SA request message to the specified
MSDP peer when it receives a Join message.
Example # Enable the SA message cache mechanism.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] cache-sa-enable
display msdp brief
Syntax display msdp brief
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display msdp brief command to display the brief information of the
MSDP peer state.
Example # Display the brief information of the MSDP peer state.
558 CHAPTER 42: MSDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> display msdp brief
MSDP Peer Brief Information
Peer’s Address State Up/Down time AS SA Count Reset Count
20.20.20.20 Up 00:00:13 100 0 0
Table 94 Field descriptions of the display msdp brief command
Field Description
Peer’s Address Address of the MSDP peer
State State
Up/Down time Up/down time
AS AS number
SA Count SA count
Reset Count Times of peer connection resets
display msdp peer-status
Syntax display msdp peer-status [ peer-address ]
View Any view
Parameter peer-address: IP address of an MSDP peer. This argument is expressed in dotted
decimal notation.
Description Use the display msdp peer-status command to display the detailed
information of the MSDP peer state.
Related command: peer description.
Example # Display the detailed information of MSDP peer 10.110.11.11.
<SW7750> display msdp peer-status 10.110.11.11
MSDP Peer 20.20.20.20, AS 100
Description:
Information about connection status:
State: Up
Up/down time: 14:41:08
Resets: 0
Connection interface: LoopBack0 (20.20.20.30)
Number of sent/received messages: 867/947
Number of discarded output messages: 0
Elapsed time since last connection or counters clear: 14:42:40
Information about (Source, Group)-based SA filtering policy:
Import policy: none
Export policy: none
Information about SA-Requests:
Policy to accept SA-Request messages: none
Sending SA-Requests status: disable
Minimum TTL to forward SA with encapsulated data: 0
SAs learned from this peer: 0, SA-cache maximum for the peer: none
Input queue size: 0, Output queue size: 0
Counters for MSDP message:
Count of RPF check failure: 0
display msdp sa-cache 559
Incoming/outgoing SA messages: 0/0
Incoming/outgoing SA requests: 0/0
Incoming/outgoing SA responses: 0/0
Incoming/outgoing data packets: 0/0
display msdp sa-cache
Syntax display msdp sa-cache [ group-address | [ source-address ] ] [
autonomous-system-number ]
View Any view
Parameter group-address: Group address of the (S, G) entry.
source-address: Source address of the (S, G) entry. If you do not specify a source
address, the system displays all source information of the specified group. If you
specify neither a group address nor a source address, the system displays all SA
caches.
autonomous-system-number: Number of the AS from which the (S,G) entry
comes. The value ranges from 1 to 65535.
Description Use the display msdp sa-cache command to display (S, G) state learned from
an MSDP peer.
You must configure the cache-sa-enable command before the system can display
the cache state information.
Example # Display SA messages learned from the MSDP peer.
<SW7750> display msdp sa-cache
MSDP Total Source-Active Cache - 5 entries
(Source, Group) Origin RP Pro AS Uptime Expires
(10.10.1.2, 225.1.1.1) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:10 00:05:50
(10.10.1.3, 225.1.1.1) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:11 00:05:49
(10.10.1.2, 225.1.1.2) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:11 00:05:49
(10.10.2.1, 225.1.1.2) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:11 00:05:49
(10.10.1.2, 225.1.2.2) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:11 00:05:49
MSDP matched 5 entries
Table 95 Field descriptions of the display msdp sa-cache command
Field Description
(Source, Group) (S, G) entry
Origin RP Source RP address
Pro Inter-domain unicast routing protocol
AS AS number
Uptime Up time
Expires Expiry of a (S, G) entry
560 CHAPTER 42: MSDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display msdp sa-count
Syntax display msdp sa-count [ autonomous-system-number ]
View Any view
Parameter autonomous-system-number: AS from which a source and group come The value
ranges from 1 to 65535.
Description Use the display msdp sa-count command to display the number of sources and
groups in MSDP cache.
The debugging output of this command is available only after the
cache-sa-enable command is configured.
Example # Display the number of sources and groups in MSDP cache.
<SW7750> display msdp sa-count
Number of cached Source-Active entries, counted by Peer
Peer’s Address Number of SA
10.10.10.10 5
Number of source and group, counted by AS
AS Number of source Number of group
100 3 3
Total Source-Active entries: 5
Table 96 Field descriptions of the display msdp sa-count command
Field Description
Peer’s Address Address of an MSDP peer
Number of SA Number of SA messages
AS AS number
Number of source Number of sources
Number of group Number of groups
import-source
Syntax import-source [ acl acl-number ]
undo import-source
View MSDP view
Parameter acl-number: Basic or advanced IP ACL number, ranging from 2000 to 3999. An
ACL controls SA message advertisement by filtering sources (with a basic ACL) and
filtering sources or groups (with an advanced ACL). If you do not specify this
argument, no multicast source is advertised.
msdp 561
Description Use the import-source command to specify the (S, G) entries in this domain that
need to be advertised when an MSDP peer creates an SA message.
Use the undo import-source command to cancel the configuration.
By default, an SA message advertise all the (S, G) entries in the domain.
In addition, you can use the peer sa-policy import command or the peer
sa-policy export command to filter forwarded SA messages.
Example # Configure the specific (S, G) entry in the multicast routing table to be advertised
when an MSDP peer creates an SA message. For the specific (S, G) entry, the
multicast source is on the 10.10.0.0/16 segment, and the multicast group address
is 225.1.0.0/16.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl number 3101
[SW7750-acl-adv-3101] rule permit ip source 10.10.0.0 0.0.255.255 destination 225.1.0.0 0.0.25
5.255
[SW7750-acl-adv-3101] quit
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] import-source acl 3101
msdp
Syntax msdp
undo msdp
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the msdp command to enable MSDP and enter MSDP view.
Use the undo msdp command to clear all configurations in MSDP view, release
resources occupied by MSDP, and restore the initial state.
Related command: peer description.
Example # Enable MSDP and enter MSDP view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp]
msdp-tracert
Syntax msdp-tracert source-address group-address rp-address [ max-hops max-hops ] [
next-hop-info | sa-info | peer-info ]* [ skip-hops skip-hops ]
562 CHAPTER 42: MSDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View Any view
Parameter source-address: Multicast source address
group-address: Multicast group address
rp-address: IP address of an RP
max-hops: Maximum number of hops to be traced, ranging from 1 to 255. The
default value is 16.
next-hop-info: Collects the next hop information.
sa-info: Collects the SA entity information.
peer-info: Collects the MSDP peer information.
skip-hops: Number of hops to be skipped before the detailed information is
collected, in the range of 0 to 255. This argument is 0 by default.
Description Use the msdp-tracert command to trace the path along which an SA message
travels, so as to locate message loss and minimize configuration errors. After
determining the path of the SA message, you can prevent SA flooding through
correct configuration.
Example # Trace path information of 10.10.1.1, 225.2.2.2, and 20.20.20.20.
<SW7750> msdp-tracert 10.10.1.1 225.2.2.2 20.20.20.20
# Specify the maximum number of hops to be traced and collect the detailed SA
and MSDP peer information.
<SW7750> msdp-tracert 10.10.1.1 225.2.2.2 20.20.20.20 max-hops 10 sa-info peer-info
MSDP tracert: press CTRL_C to break
D-bit: set if have this (S,G) in cache but with a different RP
RP-bit: set if this router is an RP
NC-bit: set if this router is not caching SA’s
C-bit: set if this (S,G,RP) tuple is in the cache
MSDP trace route path information:
Router Address: 20.20.1.1
Fixed-length response info:
Peer Uptime: 10 minutes, Cache Entry Uptime: 30 minutes
D-bit: 0, RP-bit: 1, NC-bit: 0, C-bit: 1
Return Code: Reached-max-hops
Next Hop info:
Next-Hop Router Address: 0.0.0.0
SA info:
Count of SA messages received for this (S,G,RP): 0
Count of encapsulated data packets received for this (S,G,RP):0
SA cache entry uptime: 00:30:00 , SA cache entry expiry time: 00:03:32
Peering info:
Peering Uptime: 10 minutes, Count of Peering Resets: 3
Table 97 Field descriptions of the msdp-tracert command
Field Description
Router Address The address used by the local router to establish a
peering session with the Peer-RPF neighbor
Peer Uptime The time of the peering session between the local router
and a Peer-RPF neighbor, in minutes. The maximum
value is 255.
originating-rp 563
Table 97 Field descriptions of the msdp-tracert command
Field Description
Cache Entry Uptime Up time of the (S, G, RP) entry in SA cache of the local
router, in minutes. The maximum value is 255.
D-bit: 1 An (S, G, RP) entry exists in the SA cache of the local
router, but the RP is different from the RP specified in
the request message.
RP-bit: 1 The local router is an RP, but it may be another RP than
the source RP in the (S, G, RP) entry.
NC-bit: 0 SA cache is enabled on the local router.
C-bit: 1 A (S, G, RP) entry exists in SA cache of the local router.
Return Code: Reached-max-hops Maximum number of hops is reached. Another possible
value is:
Hit-src-RP: The router of this hop is the source RP in the
(S, G, RP) entry.
Next-Hop Router Address: 0.0.0.0 If you use the next-hop-info keyword, the address of
Peer-RPF neighbor is displayed.
Count of SA messages received for The number of SA messages received to trace the (S, G,
this (S,G,RP) RP) entry.
Count of encapsulated data packets The number of packets received to trace the (S, G, RP)
received for this (S,G,RP) entry.
SA cache entry uptime The up time of an SA cache entry
SA cache entry expiry time The expiry time of an SA cache entry
Peering Uptime: 10 minutes The time of the peering session between the local router
and a Peer-RPF neighbor
Count of Peering Resets Count of session resets
originating-rp
Syntax originating-rp interface-type interface-number
undo originating-rp
View MSDP view
Parameter interface-type: Interface type
interface-number: Interface number
Description Use the originating-rp command to allow MSDP peer to use the specified
interface IP address as the RP address in the SA message when the MSDP peer
creates SA messages.
Use the undo originating-rp command to cancel configuration.
By default, the RP address in an SA message is the RP address configured by PIM.
Example # Configure the IP address of Vlan-interface100 as the RP address of the created
SA message.
564 CHAPTER 42: MSDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] originating-rp Vlan-interface 100
peer connect-interface
Syntax peer peer-address connect-interface interface-type interface-number
undo peer peer-address
View MSDP view
Parameter peer-address: IP address of the MSDP peer. This argument is expressed in dotted
decimal notation.
interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number. The local
router uses the primary address of this interface as the source IP to establish a TCP
connection with the remote MSDP peer.
Description Use the peer connect-interface command to configure an MSDP peer.
Use the undo peer connect-interface command to disable the configured
MSDP peer.
If the MSDP peer of the local router is also a BGP peer, the MSDP peer and the BGP
peer must use the same IP addresses.
Related command: static-rpf-peer.
Example # Configure the router whose IP address is 125.10 .7.6 as the MSDP peer of the
local router.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 connect-interface Vlan-interface 100
peer description
Syntax peer peer-address description text
undo peer peer-address description
View MSDP view
Parameter peer-address: IP address of the MSDP peer. This argument is expressed in dotted
decimal notation.
text: Description text, case-sensitive. The maximum length is 80 characters.
peer mesh-group 565
Description Use the peer description command to configure the description text for an
MSDP peer. Use the undo peer description command to delete the configured
description text.
By default, an MSDP peer has no description text.
An administrator can distinguish MSDP peers by means of the description texts.
Related command: display msdp peer-status.
Example # Add the description text "router CstmrA" for the router with the IP address
125.10.7.6 to specify that the router is customer A.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 description router CstmrA
peer mesh-group
Syntax peer peer-address mesh-group name
undo peer peer-address mesh-group name
View MSDP view
Parameter peer-address: IP address of an MSDP peer in a mesh group. This argument is
expressed in dotted decimal notation.
name: Name of a mesh group, case-sensitive and containing 1 to 32 characters.
Description Use the peer mesh-group command to add an MSDP peer to a mesh group.
Use the undo peer mesh-group command to cancel the configuration.
By default, an MSDP peer does not belong to any mesh group.
Example # Configure the MSDP peer whose address is 125.10.7.6 as a member of the
mesh group Grp1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 mesh-group Grp1
peer minimum-ttl
Syntax peer peer-address minimum-ttl ttl-value
undo peer peer-address minimum-ttl
566 CHAPTER 42: MSDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View MSDP view
Parameter peer-address: IP address of the MSDP peer to which the TTL threshold applies. This
argument is expressed in dotted decimal notation.
ttl-value: TTL threshold, ranging from 0 to 255.
Description Use the peer minimum-ttl command to configure the minimum TTL value of
the multicast data packets encapsulated in SA messages and to be sent to the
specified MSDP peer.
Use the undo peerminimum-ttl command to restore the default TTL threshold.
By default, the value of TTL threshold is 0.
Related command: peer description.
Example # Set the TTL threshold to 10 so that only those multicast data packets with a TTL
value greater than or equal to 10 can be forwarded to the MSDP peer
110.10.10.1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] peer 110.10.10.1 minimum-ttl 10
peer request-sa-enable
Syntax peer peer-address request-sa-enable
undo peer peer-address request-sa-enable
View MSDP view
Parameter peer-address: IP address of the MSDP peer. This argument is expressed in dotted
decimal notation.
Description Use the peer request-sa-enable command to enable the router to send an SA
request message to the specified MSDP peer upon receipt of a Join message.
Use the undo peer request-sa-enable command to remove the configuration.
By default, upon receipt of a Join message, the router sends no SA request
message to the MSDP peer but waits for the next SA message.
Related command: cache-sa-enable.
Example # Configure to send an SA request message to the MSDP peer 125.10.7.6.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
peer sa-cache-maximum 567
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 request-sa-enable
peer sa-cache-maximum
Syntax peer peer-address sa-cache-maximum sa-limit
undo peer peer-address sa-cache-maximum
View MSDP view
Parameter peer-address: IP address of the MSDP peer. This argument is expressed in dotted
decimal notation.
sa-limit: Maximum number of SA messages cached, ranging from 1 to 2,048.
Description Use the peer sa-cache-maximum command to set the maximum number of SA
messages cached on the router.
Use the undo peer sa-cache-maximum command to restore the default
configuration.
By default, the maximum number of SA messages cached on a router is 2,048.
You are recommended to perform this configuration on all MSDP peers on a
network that is vulnerable to DoS attacks.
Related command: display msdp sa-count, display msdp peer-status, display msdp brief.
Example # Configure the SA cache of the router so that it caches a maximum of 100 SA
messages received from the MSDP peer 125.10.7.6.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 sa-cache-maximum 100
peer sa-policy
Syntax peer peer-address sa-policy { import | export } [ acl acl-number ]
undo peer peer-address sa-policy { import | export }
View MSDP view
Parameter import: Receives the SA messages from the specified MSDP peer.
export: Forwards the SA messages from the specified MSDP peer.
peer-address: IP address of the MSDP peer whose SA messages need to be filtered.
568 CHAPTER 42: MSDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
acl acl-number: Specifies an advanced IP ACL number ranging from 3000 to 3999.
If no ACL is specified, all (S, G) entries are filtered out.
Description Use the peer sa-policy command to configure the filtering list for receiving or
forwarding the SA messages from the specified MSDP peer.
Use the undo peer sa-policy command to remove the configuration.
By default, no filtering is imposed on SA messages to be received or forwarded;
namely, all SA messages from MSDP peers are received or forwarded.
Related command: peer sa-request-policy.
Example # Configure a filtering list so that only those SA messages permitted by the
advanced IP ACL 3100 are forwarded.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl number 3100
[SW7750-acl-adv-3100] rule permit ip source 170.15.0.0 0.0.255.255 destination 225.1.0.0 0.0.255.255
[SW7750-acl-adv-3100] quit
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 connect-interface Vlan-interface 100
[SW7750-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 sa-policy export acl 3100
peer sa-request-policy
Syntax peer peer-address sa-request-policy [ acl acl-number ]
undo peer peer-address sa-request-policy
View MSDP view
Parameter peer-address: IP address of an MSDP peer, the SA request messages sent from
which will be filtered
acl-number: Basic IP ACL number, describing a multicast group address and in the
range of 2000 to 2999. If no ACL is specified, all SA request messages will be
ignored.
Description Use the peer sa-request-policy command to limit the SA request messages that
the router receives from an MSDP peer.
Use the undo peer sa-request-policy command to remove the limitation.
By default, the router receives all SA request messages from the MSDP peer.
If no ACL is specified, all SA requests will be ignored. If an ACL is specified, only
those SA request messages from the groups that match the ACL rule will be
processed and others are ignored.
Related command: peer sa-policy.
reset msdp peer 569
Example # Configure an ACL so that SA request messages from the group address range of
225.1.1.0/24 and from the MSDP peer 175.58.6.5 are received and other SA
messages are ignored.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl number 2001
[SW7750-acl-basic-2001] rule permit source 225.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
[SW7750-acl-basic-2001] quit
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] peer 175.58.6.5 sa-request-policy acl 2001
reset msdp peer
Syntax reset msdp peer peer-address
View User view
Parameter peer-address: IP address of the MSDP peer. This argument is expressed in dotted
decimal.
Description Use the reset msdp peer command to reset the TCP connection with the
specified MSDP peer and clear all statistics information of that MSDP peer.
Related command: peer description.
Example # Reset the TCP connection with the MSDP peer 125.10.7.6 and the statistics of
the MSDP peer.
<SW7750> reset msdp peer 125.10.7.6
reset msdp sa-cache
Syntax reset msdp sa-cache [ group-address ]
View User view
Parameter group-address: Group address; the cached (S, G) entries matching this address are
to be deleted from the SA cache. If no multicast group address is specified, all
cached SA entries will be cleared.
Description Use the reset msdp sa-cache command to clear cached SA entries of the MSDP
peer.
Related command: cache-sa-enable, display msdp sa-cache.
Example # Clear the cached entries whose group address is 225.5.4.3 from the SA cache.
<SW7750> reset msdp sa-cache 225.5.4.3
570 CHAPTER 42: MSDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
reset msdp statistics
Syntax reset msdp statistics [ peer-address ]
View User view
Parameter peer-address: Address of the MSDP peer whose statistics, reset information and
input/output information will be cleared. If no MSDP peer address is specified, the
statistics information of all MSDP peers will be cleared.
Description Use the reset msdp statistics command to clear the statistics information of
one or more MSDP peers without resetting the MSDP peer(s).
Example # Clear the statistics information of the MSDP peer 125.10.7.6.
<SW7750> reset msdp statistics 125.10.7.6
shutdown
Syntax shutdown peer-address
undo shutdown peer-address
View MSDP view
Parameter peer-address: IP address of an MSDP peer.
Description Use the shutdown command to shut down the specified MSDP peer.
Use the undo shutdown command to remove the configuration.
By default, no MSDP peer is shut down.
Related command: peer description.
Example # Shut down the MSDP peer 125.10.7.6.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] shutdown 125.10.7.6
static-rpf-peer
Syntax static-rpf-peer peer-address [ rp-policy ip-prefix-name ]
undo static-rpf-peer peer-address
timer retry 571
View MSDP view
Parameter peer-address: Address of the static RPF peer receiving SA messages.
rp-policy ip-prefix-name: Specifies a filtering policy based on RP addresses to filter
RPs in SA messages. ip-prefix-name is the IP address prefix list containing 1 to 19
characters.
Description Use the static-rpf-peer command to configure a static RPF peer.
Use the undo static-rpf-peer command to remove a static RPF peer.
By default, no static RPF peer is configured.
If only one MSDP peer is configured with the peer command, the MSDP peer will
be regarded as a static RPF peer. When configuring multiple static RPF peers for
the same router, make sure you follow the following two configuration methods::
■ In the case that all the peers use the rp-policy keyword: Multiple static RPF
peers take effect at the same time. RPs in SA messages are filtered according to
the prefix list configured; only SA messages whose RP addresses pass the
filtering are received. If multiple static RPF peers using the same rp-policy
keyword are configured, when any of the peers receives an SA message, it will
forward the SA message to the other peers.
■ In the case that none of the peers use the rp-policy keyword: According to the
configuration sequence, only the first static RPF peer whose connection state is
UP is active. All the SA messages from this peer will be received and those from
other static RPF peers will be discarded. Once the active static RPF peer fails
(because the configuration is removed or the connection is terminated), based
on the configuration sequence, the subsequent first static RPF peer whose
connection is in the UP state will be selected as the active static RPF peer.
Related command: peer description, ip ip-prefix.
Example # Configure a static RPF peer.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip ip-prefix list1 permit 130.10.0.0 16 greater-equal 16 less-equal 32
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] peer 130.10.7.6 connect-interface Vlan-interface 100
[SW7750-msdp] static-rpf-peer 130.10.7.6 rp-policy list1
timer retry
Syntax timer retry seconds
undo timer retry
View MSDP view
Parameter seconds: Connection request retry interval in seconds, ranging from 1 to 60.
572 CHAPTER 42: MSDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the timer retry command to configure a connection request retry interval.
Use the undo timer retry command to restore the default value.
By default, the connection request retry interval is 30 seconds.
Related command: peer description.
Example # Set the connection request retry interval to 60 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] msdp
[SW7750-msdp] timer retry 60
802.1X CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
43
display dot1x
Syntax display dot1x [ sessions | statistics ] [ interface interface-list ]
View Any view
Parameter sessions: Displays the formation about 802.1x sessions.
statistics: Displays the statistics information about 802.1x.
interface: Display the 802.1x-related information about a specified port.
interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-name [ to
interface- name] & < 1-10 >. The interface-name argument is the port index of an
Ethernet port and can be specified in this form: interface-name = { interface-type
interface-num }, where interface-type specifies the type of an Ethernet port and
interface-num identifies the number of the port. "&<1-10>" means that up to 10
port indexes/port index lists can be provided.
Description Use the display dot1x command to display 802.1x-related information, such as
configuration information, operation information (session information), and
statistics.
By default, this command displays all 802.1x-related information of each port.
When the interface-list argument is not provided, this command displays
802.1x-related information on all ports. The output information can be used to
verify 802.1 x-related configurations and to troubleshoot.
Related commands: reset dot1x statistics, dot1x, dot1x retry, dot1x max-user, dot1x
port-control, dot1x port-method, and dot1x timer.
Example # Display 802.1x-related configuration information.
<SW7750> display dot1x
Equipment 802.1X protocol is enabled
CHAP authentication is enabled
DHCP-launch is disabled
Proxy trap checker is disabled
Proxy logoff checker is disabled
Guest Vlan is disabled
Configuration: Transmit Period 30 s, Handshake Period 15 s
574 CHAPTER 43: 802.1X CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
ReAuth Period 003600 s
Quiet Period 60 s, Quiet Period Timer is disabled
Supp Timeout 30 s, Server Timeout 100 s
Interval between version requests is 30s
maximal request times for version information is 3
The maximal retransmitting times 2
Total maximum 802.1x user resource number is 4096
Total current used 802.1x resource number is 0
GigabitEthernet2/0/1 is link-up
802.1X protocol is disabled
Proxy trap checker is disabled
Proxy logoff checker is disabled
Guest Vlan is disabled
Version-Check is disabled
The port is a(n) authenticator
Authenticate Mode is auto
Port Control Type is Mac-based
ReAuthenticate is disabled
Max on-line user number is 1024
......
(Display omitted here)
Table 98 Field descriptions of the display dot1x command
Field Description
Equipment 802.1x protocol is 802.1x protocol (802.1x for short) is enabled on the
enabled switch.
CHAP authentication is enabled CHAP authentication is enabled.
DHCP-launch is disabled With DHCP enabled, manually configuring a static IP
address triggers 802.1x authentication on the switch.
Proxy trap checker is disabled Whether to check a supplicant system that logs in
through a proxy:
■ Disable means the switch does not send Trap
packets when it detects that a supplicant system
logs in through a proxy.
■ Enable means the switch sends Trap packets when it
detects that a supplicant system logs in through a
proxy.
Proxy logoff checker is disabled Whether to check a supplicant system that logs in
through a proxy:
■ Disable means the switch does not disconnect a
supplicant system when it detects that the latter logs
in through a proxy.
■ Enable means the switch disconnects a supplicant
system when it detects that the latter logs in
through a proxy.
Guest Vlan is disabled The Guest VLAN function is disabled.
Transmit Period Setting of the Transmission period timer (the tx-period)
Handshake Period Setting of the handshake period timer (the
handshake-period)
ReAuth Period 802.1x re-authentication
Quiet Period Setting of the quiet period timer (the quiet-period)
Quiet Period Timer is disabled The quiet period timer is disabled.
Supp Timeout Setting of the supplicant timeout timer (supp-timeout)
Server Timeout Setting of the server-timeout timer (server-timeout)
dot1x 575
Table 98 Field descriptions of the display dot1x command
Field Description
Interval between version requests Client version request timer
maximal request times for version The maximum number of times that the switch can
information send version request packets to an access user
The maximal retransmitting times The maximum number of times that the switch can
send authentication request packets to a supplicant
system
Total maximum 802.1x user The maximum number of 802.1x users that a switch
resource number can accommodate
Total current used 802.1x resource The number of online supplicant systems
number
GigabitEthernet2/0/1 is link-up The GigabitEthernet 2/0/1 port is in up state.
802.1x protocol is disabled 802.1x is disabled on the port
Proxy trap checker is disabled Whether to check a supplicant system that logs in
through a proxy:
■ Disable means the switch does not detect supplicant
login through a proxy
■ Enable means the switch sends Trap packets when it
detects that a supplicant system logs in through a
proxy.
Proxy logoff checker is disabled Whether to check a supplicant system that logs in
through a proxy:
■ Disable means the switch does not detect supplicant
login through a proxy
■ Enable means the switch disconnects a supplicant
system when it detects that the latter logs in
through a proxy.
Guest Vlan is disabled The Guest VLAN function is disabled.
Version-Check is disabled The client version check function is disabled.
The port is a(n) authenticator The port acts as an authenticator.
Authenticate Mode is auto The port access control mode is auto.
Port Control Type is Mac-based The port access control method is MAC-based. That is,
supplicant systems are authenticated based on their
MAC addresses.
Max on-line user number The maximum number of online users that the port can
accommodate
... Information omitted here
dot1x
Syntax dot1x [ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x [ interface interface-list ]
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-name [ to
interface- name] & < 1-10 >. The interface-name argument is the port index of an
576 CHAPTER 43: 802.1X CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Ethernet port and can be specified in this form: interface-name = { interface-type
interface-num }, where interface-type specifies the type of a port and
interface-num identifies the port number. "&<1-10>" means that up to 10 port
indexes/port index lists can be provided,
Description Use the dot1x command to enable 802.1x globally or for specified Ethernet ports.
Use the undo dot1x command to disable 802.1x globally or for specified
Ethernet ports.
By default, 802.1x is disabled globally and also on all ports
When being executed in system view, the dot1x command enables 802.1x
globally if you do not provide the interface-list argument. And if you specify the
interface-list argument, the command enables 802.1x for the specified Ethernet
ports. When being executed in Ethernet port view, this command enables 802.1x
for the current Ethernet port only. In this case, the interface-list argument is not
needed.
You can perform 802.1x-related configurations (globally or on specified ports)
either before or after 802.1x is enabled. If you do not previously perform other
802.1x-related configurations when enabling 802.1x globally, the switch adopts
the default 802.1x settings.
802.1x-related configurations take effect on a port only after 802.1x is enabled
both globally and on the port.
Configurations of 8021.x and the maximum number of MAX addresses that can
be learnt are mutually exclusive. This means that when 802.1x is enabled for a
port, it cannot also have the maximum number of MAX addresses to be learned
configured at the same time. And if you configure the maximum number of MAX
addresses that can be learnt for a port, 802.1x is unavailable to it.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example # Enable 802.1x for Ethernet 2/0/1 port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dot1x interface Ethernet 2/0/1
# Enable 802.1x globally.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dot1x
dot1x authentication-method
Syntax dot1x authentication-method { chap | pap | eap }
undo dot1x authentication-method
dot1x dhcp-launch 577
View System view
Parameter chap: Authenticates with the help of challenge handshake authentication
protocol (CHAP).
pap: Authenticates with the help of password authentication protocol (PAP).
eap: Authenticates with the help of extensible authentication protocol (EAP).
Description Use the dot1x authentication-method command to set the 802.1x
authentication method.
Use the undo dot1x authentication-method command to revert to the
default 802.1x authentication method.
The default 802.1x authentication method is CHAP.
PAP applies a two-way handshaking procedure. In this method, passwords are
transmitted in plain text.
CHAP applies a three-way handshaking procedure. In this method, user names are
transmitted rather than passwords. Therefore this method is safer.
In an EAP authentication method, a switch sends 802.1x authentication
information directly to the RADIUS server in EAP packets, instead of having to
convert them into RADIUS packets before forwarding to the RADIUS server. EAP
authentication can be realized in one of the three sub-methods: PEAP, EAP-TLS,
and EAP-MD5.
Note that the RADIUS server must support PAP, CHAP, or EAP authentication
before the corresponding authentication can be implemented.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example # Specify the authentication method for 802.1x users to be PAP.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dot1x authentication-method pap
dot1x dhcp-launch
Syntax dot1x dhcp-launch
undo dot1x dhcp-launch
View System view
Parameter None
578 CHAPTER 43: 802.1X CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the dot1x dhcp-launch command to specify an 802.1x-enqbled switch to
launch the process to authenticate a supplicant system when the supplicant
system applies for a dynamic IP address through DHCP.
Use the undo dot1x dhcp-launch command to disable an 802.1x-enqbled
switch from authenticating a supplicant system when the supplicant system
applies for a dynamic IP address through DHCP.
By default, an 802.1x-enabled switch does not authenticate a supplicant system
when the latter applies for a dynamic IP address through DHCP.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example # Configure to authenticate a supplicant system when it applies for a dynamic IP
address through DHCP.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dot1x dhcp-launch
dot1x guest-vlan
Syntax dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id [ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id [ interface interface-list ]
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID of a Guest VLAN, in the range from 1 to 4,094.
interface-list: List of Ethernet ports, expressed as interface-list = { interface-name [
to interface-name ] } & < 1-10 >. The interface-name argument is the port index
of a port and can be specified in this form: interface-name = { interface-type
interface-num }, where interface-type specifies the type of a port and
interface-num identifies the port number. "&<1-10>" means that up to 10 port
indexes/port index lists can be provided.
Description Use the dot1x guest-vlan command to enable the Guest VLAN function for
specified ports.
Use the undo dot1x guest-vlan command to disable the Guest VLAN function
for specified ports.
When being executed in system view:
■ If you do not provide the interface-list argument, these two commands apply
to all ports of the switch.
■ If you specify the interface-list argument, these two commands apply to the
specified Ethernet ports.
dot1x max-user 579
When being executed in Ethernet port view, these two commands apply to the
current Ethernet port only. In this case, the interface-list argument is not needed.
c CAUTION:
■ The Guest VLAN function is available only when the switch operates in a
port-based authentication mode.
■ Only one Guest VLAN can be configured for each switch.
■ The Guest VLAN function is unavailable when the dot1x dhcp-launch
command is configured on the switch, because the switch does not send
authentication request packets.
Related commands: name, vlan-assignment-mode.
Example # Specify the authentication method to be port-based authentication.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dot1x port-method portbased
# Enable the Guest VLAN function for all ports.
[SW7750] dot1x guest-vlan 1
dot1x max-user
Syntax dot1x max-user user-number [ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x max-user [ interface interface-list ]
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter user-number: Maximum number of users a port can accommodate, ranging from
1 to 1024. The default number is 1024.
interface-list: List of Ethernet ports, expressed as interface-list = { interface-name [
to interface-name ] } & < 1-10 >. The interface-name argument specifies the port
index of an Ethernet port and can be specified in this form: interface-name = {
interface-type interface-num }, where interface-type specifies the type of a port
and interface-num identifies the port number. "&<1-10>" means that up to 10
port indexes/port index lists can be provided.
Description Use the dot1x max-user command to set the maximum number of supplicant
systems an Ethernet port can accommodate.
Use the undo dot1x max-user command to revert to the default maximum
supplicant system number.
When being executed in system view, these two commands apply to all Ethernet
ports of the switch if you do not provide the interface-list argument. And if you
580 CHAPTER 43: 802.1X CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
specify the interface-list argument, these commands apply to the specified
Ethernet ports.
When being executed in Ethernet port view, these two commands apply to the
current Ethernet port only. In this case, the interface-list argument is not needed.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example # Configure the maximum number of users that Ethernet 3/01 can accommodate
to be 32.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dot1x max-user 32 interface Ethernet 2/0/1
dot1x port-control
Syntax dot1x port-control { auto | authorized-force | unauthorized-force } [
interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x port-control [ interface interface-list ]
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter auto: Specifies to operate in auto access control mode. In this mode, a port is
initialized to take all users as unauthorized: it only allows EAPoL packets to pass
through and grants users no permission to network resources. Only after the users
have passed the authentication will the port classify them as authorized and allow
them access to the network resources, which is often the case.
authorized-force: Specifies to operate in authorized-force access control mode.
unauthorized-force: Specifies to operate in unauthorized-force access control
mode. Ports in this mode are constantly in unauthorized state. Supplicant systems
connected to them cannot access the network.
interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-name [ to
interface- name] & < 1-10 >. The interface-name argument is the port index of an
Ethernet port and can be specified in this form: interface-name = { interface-type
interface-num }, where interface-type specifies the type of a port and
interface-num identifies the port number. "&<1-10>" means that up to 10 port
indexes/port index lists can be provided.
Description Use the dot1x port-control command to specify the access control method for
specified Ethernet ports.
Use the undo dot1x port-control command to revert to the default access
control method.
The default access control method is auto.
dot1x port-method 581
Use the dot1x port-control command to configure the access control method
for specified 802.1x-enabled ports.
When being executed in system view, these two commands apply to all Ethernet
ports of the switch if you do not provide the interface-list argument. And if you
specify the interface-list argument, these commands apply to the specified
Ethernet ports.
When being executed in Ethernet port view, these two commands apply to the
current Ethernet port only. In this case, the interface-list argument is not needed.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example # Specify Ethernet 2/0/1 port to operate in unauthorized-force access control
mode.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dot1x port-control unauthorized-force interface Ethernet 2/0/1
dot1x port-method
Syntax dot1x port-method { macbased | portbased } [ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x port-method [ interface interface-list ]
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter macbased: Authenticates supplicant systems by MAC addresses.
portbased: Authenticates supplicant system by port numbers.
interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-name [ to
interface- name] & < 1-10 >. The interface-name argument is the port index of an
Ethernet port and can be specified in this form: interface-name = { interface-type
interface-num }, where interface-type specifies the type of a port and
interface-num identifies the port number. "&<1-10>" means that up to 10 port
indexes/port index lists can be provided.
The default access control method is MAC address-based. That is, the macbased
keyword is specified by default.
Description Use the dot1x port-method command to specify the access control method for
specified Ethernet ports.
Use the undo dot1x port-method command to revert to the default access
control method.
■ If you specify to authenticate supplicant systems by MAC addresses (that is, the
macbased keyword is specified), all supplicant systems connected to the
582 CHAPTER 43: 802.1X CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
specified Ethernet ports are authenticated separately. And if an online user logs
off, others are not affected.
■ If you specify to authenticate supplicant systems by port numbers (that is, the
portbased keyword is specified), all supplicant systems connected to a
specified Ethernet port are able to access the network without being
authenticated if a supplicant system among them passes the authentication.
And when the supplicant system logs off, the network is inaccessible to all
other supplicant systems either.
■ Changing the access control method on a port by the dot1x port-method
command will forcibly log out the online 802.1x users on the port.
When being executed in system view, these two commands apply to all Ethernet
ports of the switch if you do not provide the interface-list argument. And if you
specify the interface-list argument, these commands apply to the specified
Ethernet ports. When being executed in Ethernet port view, these two commands
apply to the current Ethernet port only. In this case, the interface-list argument is
not needed.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example # Specify to authenticate supplicant systems connected to Ethernet 2/0/1 port by
port numbers.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dot1x port-method portbased interface Ethernet 2/0/1
dot1x quiet-period
Syntax dot1x quiet-period
undo dot1x quiet-period
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the dot1x quiet-period command to enable the quiet-period timer.
Use the undo dot1x quiet-period command to disable the quiet-period timer.
When a supplicant system fails to pass the authentication, the authenticator
system (such as a 3Com Ethernet switch) will stay quiet for a period (determined
by the quiet-period timer) before it performs another authentication. During the
quiet period, the authenticator system performs no 802.1x authentication.
By default, the quiet-period timer is disabled.
Related commands: display dot1x, dot1x timer.
dot1x re-authenticate 583
Example # Enable the quiet-period timer.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dot1x quiet-period
dot1x re-authenticate
Syntax dot1x re-authenticate [ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x re-authenticate [ interface interface-list ]
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter interface-list: List of Ethernet ports, expressed as interface-list = { interface-name [
to interface-name ] } & < 1-10 >. The interface-name argument specifies the port
index of an Ethernet port and can be specified in this form: interface-name = {
interface-type interface-num }, where interface-type specifies the type of a port
and interface-num identifies the port number. "&<1-10>" means that up to 10
port indexes/port index lists can be provided.
Description Use the dot1x re-authenticate command to enable 802.1x re-authentication
on the specified port or on all Authenticator ports of the switch.
Use the undo dot1x re-authenticate command to disable 802.1x
re-authentication on the specified port or on all Authenticator ports of the switch.
By default, 802.1x re-authentication is disabled on all ports.
When you use this command in system view, if you do not specify a port, this
command will enable 802.1x re-authentication on all ports; if you provide a value
for the interface-list argument, this command will enable 802.1x on the specified
port.
When you use this command is Ethernet port view, the interface-list argument is
not available and 8021.x re-authentication is enabled on the current port only.
n ■ 802.1x must be enabled globally and on the current port before 802.1x
re-authentication can be configured on the port.
■ After re-authentication is enabled on a port, you cannot change the dynamic
VLAN delivery attribute value for the port; if you do so, the re-authentication
will cause users to be offline.
Example # Enable 802.1x re-authentication on the port Ethernet 2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] dot1x re-authenticate
584 CHAPTER 43: 802.1X CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
dot1x retry
Syntax dot1x retry max-retry-value
undo dot1x retry
View System view
Parameter max-retry-value: Maximum number of times that a switch sends authentication
request packets to online supplicant systems. This argument ranges from 1 to 10
and defaults to 2.
Description Use the dot1x retry command to specify the maximum number of times that a
switch will send authentication request packets to supplicant systems.
Use the undo dot1x retry command to revert to the default value.
Having sent authentication request packets to a supplicant system, a switch will
resend the packets if within a preset period it still has not received any response
from the supplicant system. The dot1x retry command is used to set the
maximum number of times that a switch will resend the request packets. When
set to 1, it means that the switch will send request packets only once, and when
set to 2, it means that the switch will resend the packets once if no response
comes back, and so on. This command applies to all ports.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example # Specify the maximum number of times that the switch will resend authentication
request packets to be 9.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dot1x retry 9
dot1x retry-version-max
Syntax dot1x retry-version-max max-retry-version-value
undo dot1x retry-version-max
View System view
Parameter max-retry-version-value: Maximum number of times that a switch will resend
version request packets to a supplicant system. This argument ranges from 1 to
10.
Description Use the dot1x retry-version-max command to set the maximum number of
times that a switch will resend version request packets to a connected supplicant
system.
dot1x supp-proxy-check 585
Use the undo dot1x retry-version-max command to revert to the default
value.
By default, the switch can send version request packets to an access user for up to
three times repeatedly.
Having sent a version request packet to the supplicant system, the switch will
resend the packet if within a preset period (as determined by the client version
timer) it still has not received any response from the supplicant system. When the
number set by this command has reached and there is still no response from the
supplicant system, the switch will continue its following authentication without
sending further version requests. This command applies to all ports.
Related commands: display dot1x, dot1x timer.
Example # Configure the maximum number of times that the switch will resend version
request packets to be 6.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dot1x retry-version-max 6
dot1x supp-proxy-check
Syntax dot1x supp-proxy-check { logoff | trap } [ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x supp-proxy-check { logoff | trap } [ interface interface-list ]
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter logoff: Disconnects a supplicant system if it logs in through a proxy or through
multiple network modules.
trap: Sends Trap packets if a supplicant system logs in through a proxy or through
multiple network modules.
interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-name [ to
interface- name] & < 1-10 >. The interface-name argument is the port index of an
Ethernet port and can be specified in this form: interface-name = { interface-type
interface-num }, where interface-type specifies the type of a port and
interface-num identifies the port number. "&<1-10>" means that up to 10 port
indexes/port index lists can be provided.
Description Use the dot1x supp-proxy-check command to enable the checking and access
control of the users who log in through a proxy.
Use the undo dot1x supp-proxy-check command to cancel the setting.
By default, supplicant proxy checking is disabled.
586 CHAPTER 43: 802.1X CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
In system view, execution of the dot1x supp-proxy-check command enables the
supplicant system proxy checking function for specified ports if the interface-list
argument is provided; in Ethernet port view, the interface-list argument is not
needed, only the current port can have the function.
In system view, after enabling global supplicant proxy checking, you also need to
enable this function on specific ports for the function to take effect on these ports.
802.1x proxy checking checks for:
■ Supplicant systems logging in through proxies
■ Supplicant systems logging in through IE proxies
■ Whether or not a supplicant system logs in through multiple network modules
(that is, when supplicant system attempts to log in, it contains more than one
active network modules)
A switch may take the following actions in response to any of the above three
cases:
■ Disconnects the supplicant system and sends Trap packets (using the dot1x
supp-proxy-check logoff command.)
■ Sends Trap packets without disconnecting the supplicant system (using the
dot1x supp-proxy-check trap command.)
This function needs the support of 802.1x clients and CAMS:
■ The 802.1x supplicant system must be able to detect whether the client uses
multiple network modules, a proxy, or IE proxy;
■ CAMS has disabled the use of multiple network modules, a proxy server, and
an IE proxy server.
By default, an 802.1x supplicant system enables the use of multiple network
modules, proxies, or IE proxies. If CAMS has these features disabled, it would
notify the 802.1 supplicant system to have the corresponding features disabled as
well after the latter has successfully passed the authentication.
n ■ The supplicant system proxy checking function needs the support of 3Com’s
802.1x client program (V1.29 or later version).
■ The supplicant system proxy checking function takes effect only after it has
been enabled on CAMS and the client version checking function is enabled on
the switch (using the dot1x version-check command).
Related command: display dot1x.
Example # Configure to disconnect any supplicant system connected to Ethernet2/0/1
through Ethernet2/0/8 ports if it has been detected logging in through a proxy.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dot1x supp-proxy-check logoff
[SW7750] dot1x supp-proxy-check logoff interface Ethernet 2/0/1 to Ethernet 2/0/8
dot1x timer 587
# Configure the switch to send Trap packets if a supplicant system connected to
Ethernet 2/0/9 port is detected logging in through a proxy.
[SW7750] dot1x supp-proxy-check trap
[SW7750] dot1x supp-proxy-check trap interface Ethernet 2/0/9
Or
[SW7750] dot1x supp-proxy-check trap
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/9
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/9] dot1x supp-proxy-check trap
dot1x timer
Syntax dot1x timer { handshake-period handshake-period-value | reauth-period
reauth-period-value | quiet-period quiet-period-value | tx-period tx-period-value
| supp-timeout supp-timeout-value | server-timeout server-timeout-value |
ver-period ver-period-value }
undo dot1x timer { handshake-period | reauth-period | quiet-period |
tx-period | supp-timeout | server-timeout | ver-period }
View System view
Parameter handshake-period: Handshake period timer, triggered when the user has
successfully passed the authentication. It sets the time interval for the switch to
resend handshake request packets to check whether the user is still online. If, after
N times (as specified by the dot1x retry command) of retries, the switch still has
not received any response packet from the supplicant system, it will assume that
the user is offline.
handshake-period-value: Value of the handshake timer, in seconds. This value can
range from 1 to 1024 and defaults to 15.
reauth-period: Re-authentication period timer. Within this timer period, a
supplicant system initializes 802.1x re-authentication.
reauth-period-value: Value (in seconds) of the re-authentication period timer. This
value ranges from 1 to 86400 and defaults to 3600.
quiet-period: Quiet-period timer, triggered after the user has failed the
authentication. After the time (as specified by the quiet-period timer) has elapsed,
the user can resend the authentication request. During the period, the switch will
perform no authentication.
quiet-period-value: Value of the quiet-period timer, in seconds. This value can
range from 10 to 120 and defaults to 60.
tx-period: This timer sets the tx-period and is triggered by the switch in one of
the following two cases: The first case is when the client requests for
authentication. The switch sends a unicast request/identity packet to a supplicant
system and then enables the transmission timer. The switch sends another
request/identity packet to the supplicant system if the supplicant system fails to
588 CHAPTER 43: 802.1X CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
send a reply packet to the switch when this timer times out. The second case is
when the switch authenticates the 802.1x client who does not request for
authentication actively. The switch sends multicast request/identity packets
continuously through the port enabled with 802.1x function, with the interval of
tx-period.
tx-period-value: Value of the tx-period, in seconds. This value ranges from 10 to
120 and defaults to 30.
supp-timeout: Supplicant timeout timer, triggered when the switch sends a
request/challenge packet (for MD5 ciphered text) to the supplicant system. If
within the period, no response has been sent back from the supplicant system, the
switch will resend the request/challenge packet.
supp-timeout-value: Time interval of the authentication timer, in seconds. This
value can range from 10 to 120 with a default value of 30.
server-timeout: Server-timeout timer, if within the period, no response has been
sent back from the Authentication server, the switch will resend the
request/Identity packet.
server-timeout-value: Value of the server timeout timer, in seconds. This value can
range from 100 to 300 with a default value of 100.
ver-period: Client-version-checking period timer, if within the period, no response
packet has been sent back from the supplicant system, the switch will resend the
client version checking request packet.
ver-period-value: Value of the client-version-checking period timer, in seconds. This
value can range from 1 to 30 with a default value of 30.
Description Use the dot1x timer command to set a specified 802.1x timer.
Use the undo dot1x timer command to resume the default value of a specified
802.1x timer.
During an 802.1x authentication process, multiple timers are triggered to ensure
that the supplicant systems, the authenticator systems, and the Authentication
servers interact with each other in an arranged way. To make authentications
being processed in a desired way, you can use the dot1x timer command to set
values for these timers as needed. This may be necessary in certain situations or for
some tough network environments. Normally, the defaults are recommended.
(Note that some timers cannot be adjusted.)
Related command: display dot1x.
Example # Set the server-timeout to 150 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dot1x timer server-timeout 150
dot1x version-check 589
dot1x version-check
Syntax dot1x version-check [ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x version-check [ interface interface-list ]
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-name [ to
interface- name] & < 1-10 >. The interface-name argument is the port index of an
Ethernet port and can be specified in this form: interface-name = { interface-type
interface-num }, where interface-type specifies the type of a port and
interface-num identifies the port number. "&<1-10>" means that up to 10 port
indexes/port index lists can be provided.
Description Use the dot1x version-check command to enable 802.1x client version
checking for specified Ethernet ports.
Use the undo dot1x version-check command to disable 802.1x client version
checking for specified Ethernet ports.
By default, 802.1x client version checking is disabled on all Ethernet ports.
In system view, execution of the dot1x version-check command enables the
client version checking function for specified ports if the interface-list argument is
specified, otherwise it enables the function globally. In Ethernet port view, only the
current port can have their client version checking function enabled by executing
this command and the interface-list argument is not needed.
Example # Configure Ethernet 2/0/1 port to check the version of the 802.1x client upon
receiving authentication packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] dot1x version-check
reset dot1x statistics
Syntax reset dot1x statistics [ interface interface-list ]
View User view
Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by
providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-name [ to
interface- name] & < 1-10 >. The interface-name argument is the port index of an
Ethernet port and can be specified in this form: interface-name = { interface-type
interface-num }, where interface-type specifies the type of a port and
590 CHAPTER 43: 802.1X CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
interface-num identifies the port number. "&<1-10>" means that up to 10 port
indexes/port index lists can be provided.
Description Use the reset dot1x statistics command to clear 802.1x-related statistics.
Use this command to reset 802.1x-related statistics.
In this command:
If the interface-list argument is not specified, this command clears statistics
globally and the 802.1x statistics on all ports. If the interface-list argument is
specified, this command clears statistics on the ports specified by the argument.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example # Clear 802.1x-related statistics on Ethernet 2/0/1 port.
<SW7750> reset dot1x statistics interface Ethernet 2/0/1
HABP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
44
display habp
Syntax display habp
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display habp command to display HABP configuration and status
information.
Example # Display HABP configuration and status information.
<SW7750> display habp
Global HABP information:
HABP Mode: Server
Sending HABP request packets every 20 seconds
Bypass VLAN: 2
Table 99 Field descriptions of the display habp command
Field Description
HABP Mode Indicates the HABP mode of the switch. A switch can operate
as an HABP server (displayed as Server) or an HABP client
(displayed as Client).
Sending HABP request HABP request packets are sent once in every 20 seconds.
packets every 20 seconds
Bypass VLAN Indicates the ID(s) of the VLAN(s) to which HABP request
packets are sent
display habp table
Syntax display habp table
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display habp table command to display the MAC address table
maintained by HABP.
592 CHAPTER 44: HABP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Display the MAC address table maintained by HABP.
<SW7750> display habp table
MAC Holdtime Receive Port
001f-3c00-0030 53 Ethernet2/0/1
Table 100 Field descriptions of the display habp table command
Field Description
MAC MAC addresses listed in the HABP MAC address table.
Holdtime Hold time of the entries in the HABP MAC address table. An address
will be removed from the table if it has not been updated during the
hold time.
Receive Port The port from which a MAC address is learned
display habp traffic
Syntax display habp traffic
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display habp traffic command to display statistics on HABP packets.
Example # Display statistics on HABP packets.
<SW7750> display habp traffic
HABP counters :
Packets output: 0, Input: 0
ID error: 0, Type error: 0, Version error: 0
Sent failed: 0
Table 101 Field descriptions of the display habp traffic command
Field Description
Packets output Number of the HABP packets sent
Input Number of the HABP packets received
ID error Number of HABP packets with ID errors
Type error Number of HABP packets with type errors
Version error Number of HABP packets with version errors
Sent failed Number of HABP packets that failed to be sent
habp enable
Syntax habp enable
undo habp enable
View System view
habp server vlan 593
Parameter None
Description Use the habp enable command to enable HABP for a switch.
Use the undo habp enable command to disable HABP for a switch.
By default, HABP is enabled on a switch.
If an 802.1x-enabled switch does not have HABP enabled, it cannot manage the
switches attached to it.
Example # Enable HABP.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] habp enable
habp server vlan
Syntax habp server vlan vlan-id
undo habp server
View System view
Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4,094.
Description Use the habp server vlan command to configure a switch to operate as an
HABP server and HABP packets to be broadcast in specified VLAN.
Use the undo habp server vlan command to revert to the default HABP mode.
By default, a switch operates as an HABP client.
To specify a switch to operate as an HABP server, you need to enable HABP (using
the habp enable command) for the switch first. Even if HABP is not enabled, the
client can still configure the switch to work as an HABP client, although this has no
effect.
Example # Specify the switch to operate as an HABP server and the HABP packets to be
broadcast in VLAN 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] habp server vlan 2
habp timer
Syntax habp timer interval
undo habp timer
594 CHAPTER 44: HABP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View System view
Parameter interval: Interval (in seconds) to send HABP request packets. This argument ranges
from 5 to 600.
Description Use the habp timer command to set the interval for a switch to send HABP
request packets.
Use the undo habp timer command to revert to the default interval.
The default interval for a switch to send HABP request packets is 20 seconds.
Use these two commands on switches operating as HABP servers only.
Example # Configure the switch to send HABP request packets once in every 50 seconds
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] habp timer 50
AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
45
access-limit
Syntax access-limit { disable | enable max-user-number }
undo access-limit
View ISP domain view
Parameter disable: Specifies not to limit the number of access users that can be contained in
current ISP domain.
enable max-user-number: Specifies the maximum number of access users that
can be contained in current ISP domain. The value of max-user-number ranges
from 1 to 4120.
Description Use the access-limit command to set the maximum number of access users that
can be contained in current ISP domain.
Use the undo access-limit command to restore the default maximum number.
By default, the number of access users that can be contained in current ISP
domain is unlimited.
Because resource contention may occur between access users, there is a need to
properly limit the number of access users in an ISP domain to provide reliable
performance to the users in the ISP domain.
Example # Allow ISP domain aabbcc.net to contain up to 500 access users.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[SW7750-isp-aabbcc.net] access-limit enable 500
attribute
Syntax attribute { ip ip-address | mac mac-address | idle-cut second | access-limit
max-user-number | vlan vlan-id | location { nas-ip ip-address port port-number |
port port-number } }*
undo attribute { ip | mac | idle-cut | access-limit | vlan | location }*
596 CHAPTER 45: AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View Local user view
Parameter ip: Sets the IP address to which the user is bound.
mac: Sets the MAC address to which the user is bound. mac-address is in
dash-delimited hexadecimal notation, that is, in the H-H-H format.
idle-cut second: Allows/disallows the enabling of the idle-cut function by the local
user (The data for idle-cut operation depends on the configuration in the ISP
domain). The second argument is the idle time (in seconds) before cutting down. It
ranges from 60 to 7200.
access-limit max-user-number: Sets the maximum number of users who can
access the switch with current user name. The value of max-user-number ranges
from 1 to 4096.
vlan vlan-id: Sets the VLAN to which the user is bound; that is, sets which VLAN
the user belongs to. vlan-id is an integer ranging from 1 to 4094.
location: Sets the port binding attribute of the user.
nas-ip ip-address: Sets the permitted IP address of the network access server
(RADIUS client) when the local device serves as the RADIUS sever. ip-address is in
dotted decimal notation and is 127.0.0.1 (representing this device) by default.
port port-number: Sets the access limit on the specified port of the network
access server when the local device serves as the RADIUS server. If this parameter is
specified, the RADIUS sever accepts the authentication requests only from the
specified port and drops those from other ports. port-number is in the format of
"slot number subslot number port number". If the port has no subslot number,
just input 0 for this item.
Description Use the attribute command to set the attributes of a local user.
Use the undo attribute command to cancel attribute settings of the local user.
Note that if the user is bound to a remote port, you must specify the nas-ip
keyword. If the user is bound to a local port, you need not specify the nas-ip
keyword.
n If the accounting optional switch is turned on (with the accounting optional
command) in the ISP domain to which the local user belongs or the RADIUS
scheme referenced by the ISP, you cannot limit the number of accesses by the local
user. That is, the attribute access-limit command does not take effect.
Related command: display local-user.
Example # Set the IP address of user1 to 10.110.50.1.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] local-user user1
[SW7750-luser-user1] attribute ip 10.110.50.1
accounting 597
accounting
Syntax accounting { none | radius-scheme radius-scheme-name | hwtacacs-scheme
hwtacacs-scheme-name }
undo accounting
View ISP domain view
Parameter none: Specifies not to perform user accounting.
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Name of a RADIUS scheme, a character
string of up to 32 characters.
hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name: Name of a HWTACACS scheme, a
string of up to 32 characters.
Description Use the accounting command to configure the accounting scheme that will be
used by current ISP domain.
Use the undo accounting command to remove the accounting scheme used by
current ISP domain.
By default, no accounting scheme is configured for the ISP domain.
When you use the accounting command to reference a RADIUS scheme or
HWTACACS scheme for current ISP domain, the RADIUS scheme or HWTACACS
scheme must have already been configured.
If the accounting command is used in ISP domain view, the system uses the
scheme referenced in this command to charge the users. Or else, the system uses
the scheme referenced in the scheme command to charge the users.
Related command: scheme, radius scheme, hwtacacs scheme
Example # Specify "radius" as the RADIUS accounting scheme that will be referenced by
current ISP domain.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[SW7750-isp-aabbcc.net] accounting radius-scheme radius
accounting optional
Syntax accounting optional
undo accounting optional
598 CHAPTER 45: AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View ISP domain view
Parameter None
Description Use the accounting optional command to open the accounting-optional
switch.
Use the undo accounting optional command to close the accounting-optional
switch.
By default, the accounting-optional switch is closed.
Note the following:
When the system charges an online user but it does not find any available RADIUS
accounting server or fails to communicate with any RADIUS accounting server, the
user can continue the access to network resources if the accounting optional
command has been used; otherwise, the user is disconnected from the system.
The accounting optional command is often used in the cases where only
authentication is needed and no accounting is needed.
Example # Turn on the accounting-optional switch for the ISP domain named aabbcc.net.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[SW7750-isp-aabbcc.net] accounting optional
authentication
Syntax authentication { radius-scheme radius-scheme-name [ local ] |
hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name [ local ] | local | none }
undo authentication
View ISP domain view
Parameter radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Specifies to use a RADIUS authentication
scheme.
hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name: Name of a HWTACACS scheme, a
string of up to 32 characters.
local: Specifies to use local authentication scheme.
none: Specifies not to perform authentication.
Description Use the authentication command to configure an authentication scheme for
current ISP domain.
authorization 599
Use the undo authentication command to restore the default authentication
scheme of current domain.
By default, no separate authentication scheme is configured.
Before you use the authentication command to specify a RADIUS scheme to be
referenced by current ISP domain, the RADIUS scheme must has already been
configured.
If you execute the authentication radius-scheme radius-scheme-name local
command, the local scheme is used as the secondary authentication scheme in
case the RADIUS server does not respond normally. That is, if the communication
between the switch and the RADIUS server is normal, no local authentication is
performed; otherwise, local authentication is performed.
If you execute the authentication hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name
local command, the local scheme is used as the secondary authentication scheme
in case the TACACS server does not respond normally. That is, if the
communication between the switch and the TACACS server is normal, no local
authentication is performed; otherwise, local authentication is performed.
If you execute the authentication local command, the local scheme is used as
the primary scheme. In this case, only local authentication is performed. If you
execute the authentication none command, no authentication is performed.
With the authentication command configured in an ISP domain view, the system
adopts the authentication scheme referenced in the command to authenticate the
users in the domain, or else it adopts the scheme referenced in the scheme
command.
Related command: scheme and radius scheme, hwtacacs scheme.
Example # Specify "radius" as the RADIUS authentication scheme to be referenced by the
ISP domain aabbcc.net.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[SW7750-isp-aabbcc.net] authentication radius-scheme radius
# Specify "rd" as the RADIUS authentication scheme to be referenced by the ISP
domain aabbcc, and the local scheme as the secondary authentication scheme.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain aabbcc
New Domain added.
[SW7750-isp-aabbcc] authentication radius-scheme rd local
authorization
Syntax authorization { none | hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name }
600 CHAPTER 45: AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
undo authorization
View ISP domain view
Parameter none: Specifies that no authentication scheme is to be adopted.
hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name: Specifies the name of a HWTACACS
scheme, a string of up to 32 characters.
Description Use the authorization command to configure the authorization scheme of the
current ISP domain.
Use the undo authorization command to restore the default authorization
scheme of the ISP domain.
By default, no separate authorization scheme is configured.
Related command: scheme and radius scheme, hwtacacs scheme.
Example # Allow users in current ISP domain to access the network services without being
authorized.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[SW7750-isp-aabbcc.net] authorization none
cut connection
Syntax cut connection { all | access-type dot1x | domain domain-name | interface
interface-type interface-number | ip ip-address | mac mac-address |
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name | vlan vlan-id | ucibindex ucib-index |
user-name user-name }
View System view
Parameter all: Cuts down all user connections
access-type dot1x: Cuts down all 802.1x user connections.
domain isp-name: Cuts down all user connections in the specified ISP domain.
isp-name is the name of an ISP domain. It is a character string of up to 24
characters. You can only specify an existing ISP domain.
interface interface-type interface-number: Cuts down all user connections to the
specified port.
ip ip-address: Cuts down the connection of the user with the specified IP address.
display connection 601
mac mac-address: Cuts down the user connection with the specified MAC
address. mac-address is in dash-delimited hexadecimal notation, that is, in the
H-H-H format.
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Cuts down all user connections using the
specified RADIUS scheme. radius-scheme-name is a character string of up to 32
characters.
vlan vlan-id: Cuts down all user connections of the specified VLAN. vlan-id ranges
from 1 to 4094.
ucibindex ucib-index: Cuts down the user connection with the specified
connection index. The value of ucib-index ranges from 0 to 4119.
user-name user-name: Cuts down the user connection of the specified user.
user-name is a character string of up to 80 characters. The string cannot contain
the following characters: /:*?<>. It can contain no more than one @ character. The
pure user name (user ID, that is, the part before @) can contain no more than 55
characters.
Description Use the cut connection command to cut down one user connection or one type
of user connections forcibly.
This command cuts down the connections of 802.1x users only.
Related command: display connection.
Example # Cut down all 802.1x user connections in the ISP domain named aabbcc.net.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] cut connection domain aabbcc.net
display connection
Syntax display connection [ access-type dot1x | domain domain-name | interface
interface-type interface-number | ip ip-address | mac mac-address |
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name | vlan vlan-id | ucibindex ucib-index |
user-name user-name ]
View Any view
Parameter access-type dot1x: Displays all 802.1x user connections.
domain isp-name: Displays all user connections in the specified ISP domain.
isp-name is the name of an ISP domain, a character string of up to 24 characters.
You can only specify an existing ISP domain.
interface interface-type interface-number: Displays all user connections on the
specified port.
ip ip-address: Displays all user connections with the specified IP address.
602 CHAPTER 45: AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
mac mac-address: Displays the connection of the user with the specified MAC
address. mac-address is in dash-delimited hexadecimal notation (in the form of
H-H-H).
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Displays all user connections using the
specified RADIUS scheme. radius-scheme-name is a character string of up to 32
characters.
vlan vlan-id: Displays all user connections of the specified VLAN. The value of
vlan-id ranges from 1 to 4094.
ucibindex ucib-index: Displays the user connection with the specified connection
index.
user-name user-name: Displays the user connection with the specified user name.
user-name is a character string of up to 32 characters. The string cannot contain
the following characters: /:*?<>. It can contain no more than one @ character. The
pure user name (user ID, that is, the part before @) can contain no more than 24
characters.
Description Use the display connection command to display information about the
specified user connection or all user connections, so as to troubleshoot user
connections.
If you execute this command without specifying any argument, all user
connections will be displayed.
This command displays information about the connections of 802.1x users only.
Related command: cut connection.
Example # Display information about all 802.1x user connections.
<SW7750> display connection
Total 0 connections matched ,0 listed.
display domain
Syntax display domain [ isp-name ]
View Any view
Parameter isp-name: Name of an ISP domain, a character string of up to 24 characters. This
must be the name of an existing ISP domain.
Description Use the display domain command to display the configuration information
about one specific or all ISP domains.
If you execute this command without specifying any argument, the configuration
of all ISP domains will be displayed.
display local-user 603
The output information helps ISP domain diagnosis and troubleshooting
Related command: access-limit, domain, radius-scheme, user-template, state, display domain.
Example # Display the configuration information about all ISP domains.
<SW7750> display domain
0 Domain = system
State = Active
Scheme = LOCAL
Access-limit = Disable
Vlan-assignment-mode = Integer
accounting-mode = time
Domain User Template:
Idle-cut = Disable
Self-service = Disable
Messenger Time = Disable
Default Domain Name: system
Total 1 domain(s).1 listed.
Table 102 Field descriptions of the display domain command
Field Description
0 Domain ISP domain index...Domain name
State State
Scheme AAA scheme: LOCAL (local authentication), NONE (no
authentication), or RADIUS scheme name
Access-Limit Limit on the number of access users
Vlan-assignment-mode Dynamic VLAN assignment mode: integer or string
accounting-mode Accounting mode: time (time-based accounting) and traffic
(traffic-based accounting)
Domain User Template Domain user template
Idle-cut Sets the idle-cut function. Disable means the idle-cut function is
disabled; enable means the function is enabled.
Self-service URL of the self-service server. Disable means the self-service
server location function is disabled. After the self-service server
location function is enabled, the URL of the configured
self-service server.
Messenger Time State of the messenger time service. Disable means the
messenger time service is disabled. After the messenger time
service is configured, the time and interval of the prompt
messages.
display local-user
Syntax display local-user [ domain isp-name | idle-cut { enable | disable } |
service-type { telnet | ftp | ssh | terminal | lan-access } | state { active | block }
| user-name user-name | vlan vlan-id ]
View Any view
604 CHAPTER 45: AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter domain isp-name: Displays all local users belonging to the specified ISP domain.
isp-name is the name of an ISP domain, a character string of up to 24 characters.
You can only specify an existing ISP domain.
idle-cut: Displays the local users who are inhibited from enabling the idle-cut
function, or the local users who are allowed to enable the idle-cut function.
disable specifies the inhibited local users and enable specifies the allowed local
users. This argument only applies to the users configured with lan-access service.
For users configured with any other type of service, the display local-user
idle-cut enable and display local-user idle-cut disable commands do not
output any user information.
service-type: Displays the local users of the specified type. You can specify one of
the following user types: telnet, ftp, lan-access (generally, this type of users are
Ethernet access users, for example, 802.1x users), ssh, terminal (this type of users
are terminal users who log into the switch through the Console port).
state { active | block }: Displays the local users in the specified state. active
represents the users allowed to request network services, and block represents the
users inhibited to request network services.
user-name user-name: Displays the local user who has the specified user name.
user-name is a character string of up to 80 characters. The string cannot contain
the following characters: /:*?<>. It can contain no more than one @ character. The
pure user name (user ID, that is, the part before @) can contain no more than 55
characters.
vlan vlan-id: Displays the local users belonging to the specified VLAN. The value of
vlan-id ranges from 1 to 4094.
Description Use the display local-user command to display information about a specific or
all local users, so as to troubleshoot local user configuration.
By default, this command displays the information about all local users.
Related command: local-user, service-type.
Example # Display information about all local users.
<SW7750> display local-user
The contents of local user user1:
State: Active ServiceType Mask: T
Idle-cut: Disable
Access-limit: Disable Current AccessNum: 0
Bind location: Disable
Vlan ID: Disable
IP address: Disable
MAC address: Disable
User Privilege: 0
Total 1 local user(s) Matched, 1 listed.
domain 605
Table 103 Field descriptions of the display local-user command
Field Description
State State of the local user
ServiceType Mask Service type mark of local user:
T: Telnet
S: SSH
C: Terminal service
LM: lan-access
F: FTP
None: No service type is set.
Idle Cut State of the idle-cut function
Access-Limit Limit on the number of access users
Bind location Whether or not bound to a port
VLAN ID VLAN of the user
IP address IP address of the user
MAC address MAC address of the user
User Privilege User privilege
domain
Syntax domain { isp-name | default { disable | enable isp-name } }
undo domain isp-name
View System view
Parameter isp-name: Name of a ISP domain, a character string of up to than 24 characters.
This string cannot contain the following characters: /:*?<>.
default enable isp-name: Specifies the default ISP domain.
disable: Restores the default ISP domain to "system".
Description Use the domain command to create an ISP domain or enter the view of an
existing ISP domain.
Use the undo domain command to delete a specified ISP domain.
The default ISP domain is "system".
An ISP domain is an ISP user group comprising the users of the same ISP. Normally,
in a username (such as [email protected]) in the userid@isp-name format,
isp-name (such as aabbcc.net in the above example) after "@" is the name of the
ISP domain. When implementing access control, for ISP users with the name
format userid@isp-name, a 3Com series Ethernet switch uses the userid as the
username for authentication and uses "isp-name" for domain name.
606 CHAPTER 45: AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
ISP domains are intended to support a multi-ISP application environment where an
access device may be accessed by users of different ISPs. The user attributes, such
as username/password formation and service type/privilege, of ISP users may vary.
Therefore, it is necessary to distinguish between them by setting ISP domains. You
can configure a complete set of independent ISP domain attributes, including AAA
schemes (such as the RADIUS scheme used), for each ISP domain in ISP domain
view.
For the switch, each access user belongs to an ISP domain.
You can configure up to 16 ISP domains in the system. If the specified ISP domain
does not exist when you issue this command, the system creates a new ISP
domain. An ISP domain is active immediately after being created.
Related command: access-limit, scheme, state, display domain
Example # Create an ISP domain named aabbcc.net and enter its view.
[SW7750] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[SW7750-isp-aabbcc.net]
idle-cut
Syntax dle-cut { disable | enable minute flow }
View ISP domain view
Parameter disable: Inhibits users from enabling the idle-cut function.
enable: Allows users to enable the idle-cut function.
minute: Maximum idle time, ranging from 1 minute to 120 minutes.
flow: Minimum data flow, ranging from 1 byte to 10,240,000 bytes (10 M).
Description Use the idle-cut command to set the user idle-cut function in current ISP domain.
By default, this function is disabled.
A user template is a set of default user attributes. If a user requesting for a
network service does not possess a required attribute, the attribute in a user
template is used as the user’s default attribute. If neither the user nor the RADIUS
server specifies whether its idle-cut function is enabled, the idle-cut function state
of the user template is specified as that of the user.
A user template applies to only one ISP domain. Therefore, you need to configure
different user template attributes for users in different ISP domains.
Related command: domain.
level 607
Example # Allow users in ISP domain aabbcc.net to enable the idle-cut attribute in user
template (that is, allow the user to use the idle-cut function), with the maximum
idle time of 50 minutes and the minimum data flow of 500 bytes.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[SW7750-isp-aabbcc.net] idle-cut enable 50 500
level
Syntax level level
undo level
View Local user view
Parameter level: Priority level of the user. It is an integer ranging from 0 to 3 and defaulting to
0.
Description Use the level command to set the priority level of the user.
Use the undo level command to restore the default priority level of the user.
n The commands that a user can access after login is determined by the priority level
of the user and the level set on the user interface. If the two levels are different
■ The command level that a user passing AAA/RADIUS authentication can access
is determined by the priority level of the user. For example, if the priority level
of a user is 3 and the command level set on the VTY 0 user interface is 1, the
user can access the commands under level 3 after logging in to the system
from VTY 0.
■ The command level that a user passing RSA authentication can access is
determined by the level set on the user interface.
Example # Set the level of user1 to 3.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] local-user user1
[SW7750-luser-user1] level 3
local-user
Syntax local-user user-name
undo local-user { user-name | all [ service-type { telnet | ftp | lan-access | ssh |
terminal } ] }
View System view
608 CHAPTER 45: AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter user-name: Name of the local user, a character string of up to 80 characters. This
string cannot contain the following characters: /:*?<>. It can contain no more
than one @ character. The pure user name (user ID, that is, the part before @)
cannot be longer than 55 characters. The local user name is case insensitive.
service-type: Specifies the local users of the specified type. You can specify one
of the following user types: telnet, ftp, and lan-access (generally, this type of
users are Ethernet access users, for example, 802.1x users), ssh, and terminal
(this type of users are terminal users who log into the switch through the Console
port).
all: Specifies all local users.
Description Use the local-user command to add a local user and enter local user view.
Use the undo local-user command to delete one or more specified local users.
By default, there is no local user in the system.
Related command: display local-user and service-type.
Example # Add a local user named user1.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] local-user user1
[SW7750-luser-user1]
local-user password-display-mode
Syntax local-user password-display-mode { cipher-force | auto }
undo local-user password-display-mode
View System view
Parameter cipher-force: Adopts the forcible cipher mode so that the passwords of all local
users must be displayed in cipher text.
auto: Adopts the automatic mode so that the passwords of local users are
displayed in the modes set with the password command.
Description Use the local-user password-display-mode command to set the password
display mode of all local users
Use the undo local-user password-display-mode command to restore the
default password display mode of all local users.
When the cipher-force mode is adopted, all passwords will be displayed in cipher
text even through some users have specified to display their passwords in plain
text by using the password command with the simple keyword.
messenger 609
By default, the password display mode of all access users is auto.
Related command: display local-user and password.
Example # Specify to display all local user passwords in cipher text forcibly.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] local-user password-display-mode cipher-force
messenger
Syntax messenger time { enable limit interval | disable }
undo messenger time
View ISP domain view
Parameter limit: Time limit in minutes, ranging from 1 to 60. The switch will send prompt
messages at regular intervals to users whose remaining online time is less than this
limit.
interval: Interval to send prompt messages (in minutes). This argument ranges
from 5 to 60 and must be a multiple of 5.
Description Use the messenger time enable command to enable the messenger function
and set the related parameters.
Use the messenger time disable command to disable the messenger function.
Use the undo messenger time command to restore the messenger function to
its default state.
By default, the messenger function is disabled on the switch.
The purpose of this function is to remind online users of their remaining online
time through clients in the form of message dialog.
You can use messenger time enable command to set a remaining online time
limit and the interval to send prompt messages. After that, the switch regularly
sends prompt messages at the set interval to the clients of the users whose
remaining online time is less than the set limit, and the clients inform the users of
their remaining online time in the form of message dialog.
Example # Enable the switch to send prompt messages at intervals of 5 minutes to users
after their remaining online time is less than 30 minutes.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain system
New Domain added.
[SW7750-isp-system] messenger time enable 30 5
610 CHAPTER 45: AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
name
Syntax name string
undo name
View VLAN view
Parameter string: VLAN Name for VLAN assignment, a character string of up to 32
characters.
Description Use the name command to set a VLAN name, which will be used for VLAN
assignment.
Use the undo name command to cancel the VLAN name.
By default, an VLAN uses its VLAN ID (like VLAN 0001) as its name.
This command is used for the dynamic VLAN assignment function. For details
about this function, refer to the vlan-assignment-mode command.
Related command: dot1x guest-vlan and vlan-assignment-mode.
Example # Set the name of VLAN 100 to test.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 100
[SW7750-vlan100] name test
password
Syntax password { simple | cipher } password
undo password
View Local user view
Parameter simple: Specifies to display the password in plain text.
cipher: Specifies to display the password in cipher text.
password: Password you want to set, a character string.
■ For simple mode, the password must be in plain text.
■ For cipher mode, the password can be either in cipher text or in plain text,
depending on your input.
radius-scheme 611
A password in plain text can be a string with of up to 16 consecutive characters,
for example, user918. A password in cipher text can be 24 characters in length,
for example, _(TT8F]Y5SQ=^Q‘MAF4<1!!.
Description Use the password command to set a password for the local user.
Use the undo password command to cancel the password configured.
Note that, after the local-user password-display-mode cipher-force command
is executed, the password will be displayed in cipher text even though you use the
password command to set the password to be displayed in plain text, that is, in
the simple mode.
Related command: display local-user.
Example # Set the password of a user named user1 to 20030422 and specify to display the
password in plain text.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] local-user user1
[SW7750-luser-user1] password simple 20030422
radius-scheme
Syntax radius-scheme radius-scheme-name
View ISP domain view
Parameter radius-scheme-name: Name of a RADIUS scheme, a character string of up to 32
characters.
Description Use the radius-scheme command to specify the RADIUS scheme to be used by
current ISP domain.
Once an ISP domain is created, it uses the local AAA scheme instead of any
RADIUS scheme by default.
The RADIUS scheme you specified in the radius-scheme command must be an
existing scheme. This command is equivalent to the scheme radius-scheme
command.
Related command: radius scheme, display radius.
Example # Specify the scheme "radius1" as the RADIUS scheme to be used by current ISP
domain "aabbcc.net".
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain aabbcc.net
612 CHAPTER 45: AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
New Domain added.
[SW7750-isp-aabbcc.net] radius-scheme radius1
scheme
Syntax scheme { local | none | radius-scheme radius-scheme-name [ local ] |
hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name [ local ] }
undo scheme { none | radius-scheme | hwtacacs-scheme }
View ISP domain view
Parameter radius-scheme-name: RADIUS scheme name, a string of up to 32 characters.
hwtacacs-scheme-name: HWTACACS scheme name, a string of up to 32
characters.
local: Specifies to use local authentication.
none: Specifies not to perform authentication.
Description Use the scheme command to specify the AAA scheme used by current ISP
domain.
Use the undo scheme command to restore the default AAA scheme used by the
ISP domain.
By default, the ISP domain uses the local AAA scheme.
n Note the following:
■ The scheme command is used to specify a RADIUS scheme to be used by the
current ISP domain. Make sure you specify an existing RADIUS scheme.
■ If you execute the scheme radius-scheme radius-scheme-name local
command, the local scheme becomes the secondary scheme in case the
RADIUS server does not response normally. That is, if the communication
between the switch and the RADIUS server is normal, no local authentication is
performed; otherwise, local authentication is performed.
■ If you execute the scheme hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name local
command, the local scheme becomes the secondary scheme in case the
TACACS server does not response normally. That is, if the communication
between the switch and the TACACS server is normal, no local authentication is
performed; otherwise, local authentication is performed.
■ If the primary scheme is specified as local or none, the system uses local
authentication only or performs no authentication; no RADIUS scheme can be
used at the same time.
Related command: radius scheme and display radius
self-service-url 613
Example # Specify the RADIUS scheme "radius1" as the AAA scheme referenced by the ISP
domain "aabbcc.net".
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[SW7750-isp-aabbcc.net] scheme radius-scheme radius1
self-service-url
Syntax self-service-url enable url-string
self-service-url disable
View ISP domain view
Parameter url-string: URL of the web page used to modify user password on the self-service
server. It is a character string with 1 character to 64 characters. This string cannot
contain a question mark "?". If the actual URL of the self-service server contains
any question mark, you should change it to an elect bar "|".
Description Use the self-service-url enable command to enable the self-service server
location function
Use the self-service-url disable command to disable the self-service server
location function
By default, this function is disabled.
This command must be used with the cooperation of a self-service-supported
RADIUS server (such as CAMS). Through self-service, users can manage and
control their accounts or module numbers by themselves. A server installed with
the self-service software is called a self-service server.
After this command is executed on the switch, users can locate the self-service
server through the following operation:
■ Choose [change user password] on the 802.1x client.
■ The client opens the default browser (for example, IE or Netscape) and locates
the specified URL page used to change user password on the self-service server.
■ Then, the user can change the password.
A user can choose the [change user password] option on the client only after
passing the authentication. If the user fails the authentication, this option is in
grey and is unavailable.
Example # Under the default ISP domain "system", set the URL of the web page used to
modify user password on the self-service server to
http://10.153.89.94/selfservice/modPasswd1x.jsp|userName.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
614 CHAPTER 45: AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
[SW7750] domain system
[SW7750-isp-system] self-service-url enable http://10.153.89.94/selfservice/modPasswd1x.jsp|us
erName
service-type
Syntax service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory directory ] | lan-access | { ssh | telnet |
terminal }* [ level level ] }
undo service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory ] | lan-access | { ssh | telnet | terminal
}* }
View Local user view
Parameter ftp: Specifies that this is a ftp user.
ftp-directory directory: Specifies the path for FTP users. directory is a string of up
to 64 characters.
lan-access: Specifies that this is a LAN access user (who is generally an Ethernet
access user, for example, 802.1x user).
ssh: Specifies that this is an ssh user.
telnet: Specifies that this is a Telnet user.
terminal: Authorizes the user to access the terminal service (that is, allows the
user to log into the switch through the Console port).
level level: Specifies the level of the Telnet, terminal or SSH user. Where, level is an
integer ranging from 0 to 3 and defaulting to 0.
Description Use the service-type command to authorize the user to access the specified
type(s) of service(s).
Use the undo service-type command to inhibit the user from accessing the
specified type(s) of service(s).
By default, the user is inhibited from accessing any type of service.
Example # Authorize user1 to access the lan-access service.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] local-user user1
[SW7750-luser-user1] service-type lan-access
state
Syntax state { active | block }
View ISP domain view or local user view
vlan-assignment-mode 615
Parameter active: Activates the current ISP domain (in ISP domain view) or current user (in
local user view), to allow users in current ISP domain or current user to access the
network.
block: Hangs up the current ISP domain (in ISP domain view) or current user (in
local user view), to inhibit users in current ISP domain or current user from
accessing the network.
Description Use the state command to set the status of current ISP domain or the status of
the local user.
By default, an ISP domain is in the active state once it is created (in ISP domain
view), and a local user is in the active state once the user is created (in local user
view).
In ISP domain view, each ISP domain can be in one of two states: active and
block. Users in an active ISP domain are allowed to access the network. After an
ISP domain is set to the block state, except the online users, the users under this
domain are not allowed to access the network.
Related command: domain.
Example # Set the ISP domain aabbcc.net to the block state, so that all its offline users
cannot access the network.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[SW7750-isp-aabbcc.net] state block
# Set user1 to the block state.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] local-user user1
[SW7750-luser-user1] state block
vlan-assignment-mode
Syntax vlan-assignment-mode { integer | string }
View ISP domain name
Parameter integer: Sets the VLAN assignment mode to integer.
string: Sets the VLAN assignment mode to string.
Description Use the vlan-assignment-mode command to set the VLAN assignment mode
(integer or string) on the switch.
616 CHAPTER 45: AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
By default, the VLAN assignment mode is integer, that is, the switch supports its
RADIUS authentication server to assign integer VLAN IDs.
The dynamic VLAN assignment feature enables a switch to dynamically add the
ports of the successfully authenticated users to different VLANs according to the
attributes assigned by the RADIUS server, so as to control the network resources
that different users can access. In actual applications, to use this feature together
with Guest VLAN, you should better set port control to port-based mode.
Currently, the switch supports the RADIUS authentication server to assign the
following two types of VLAN IDs: integer and string.
■ Integer: If the RADIUS server assigns integer type of VLAN IDs, you can set the
VLAN assignment mode to integer on the switch (this is also the default mode
on the switch). Then, upon receiving an integer ID assigned by the RADIUS
authentication server, the switch adds the port to the VLAN whose VLAN ID is
equal to the assigned integer ID. If no such a VLAN exists, the switch first
creates a VLAN with the assigned ID, and then adds the port to the newly
created VLAN.
■ String: If the RADIUS server assigns string type of VLAN IDs, you can set the
VLAN assignment mode to string on the switch. Then, upon receiving a string
ID assigned by the RADIUS authentication server, the switch compares the ID
with existing VLAN names on the switch. If it finds a match, it adds the port to
the corresponding VLAN. Otherwise, the VLAN assignment fails and the user
cannot pass the authentication.
The two dynamic VLAN assignment modes, integer and string, supported by the
switch are set according to the authentication server. Different authentication
servers adopt different dynamic VLAN assignment modes, you are recommended
to configure the device according to the dynamic VLAN assignment mode in use.
Table 104 lists some common dynamic VLAN assignment modes.
Table 104 Common dynamic VLAN assignment modes
Server type Dynamic VLAN assignment mode
CAMS Integer (the latest version is determined by the attribute)
ACS String
FreeRADIUS Determined by the attribute (100 is integer; "100" is
string)
Shiva Access Manager String
Steel-Belted Radius Administrator String
c CAUTION:
■ You are recommended to configure the VLAN assignment mode for the switch
the same as that of the assignment attribute value of the RADIUS
authentication server. Configure the correct assignment mode with the
vlan-assignment-mode command so that the switch correctly identifies the
dynamic VLAN assigned by the server. If the assignment modes are different,
the expected configuration may not take effect.
vlan-assignment-mode 617
■ In string mode, the VLAN to be assigned must exist on the switch and must
have been configured with a VLAN name. This is not required in integer mode.
■ In string mode, if the VLAN ID assigned by the RADIUS server is a character
string containing only digits (for example, 1024), the switch first regards it as
an integer VLAN ID: the switch transforms the string to an integer value and
judges if the value is in the valid VLAN ID range; if it is, the switch adds the
authenticated port to the VLAN with the value as the VLAN ID (VLAN 1024, for
example).
Related command: name, dot1x guest-vlan
Example # Set the VLAN assignment mode to string.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[SW7750-isp-aabbcc.net] vlan-assignment-mode string
618 CHAPTER 45: AAA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
RADIUS CONFIGURATION
46 COMMANDS
accounting-on enable
Syntax accounting-on enable [ send times | interval interval ]
undo accounting-on { enable | send | interval }
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter times: Maximum number of attempts to send Accounting-On packets, ranging
from 1 to 256 and defaulting to 40.
interval: Interval to send Accounting-On packets, ranging from 1 to 30 and
defaulting to 3 seconds.
Description Use the accounting-on enable command to enable the user re-authentication
upon device restart function.
Use the undo accounting-on enable command to disable the user
re-authentication upon device restart function and restore the default interval and
maximum number of attempts to transmit Accounting-On packets.
Use the undo accounting-on send command to restore the default maximum
number of attempts to transmit Accounting-On packets.
Use the undo accounting-on interval command to restore the default interval
to transmit Accounting-On packets.
By default, this function is disabled.
The purpose of this function is to resolve this problem: users cannot re-log into the
switch after the switch restarts because they are already online. After this function
is enabled, every time the switch restarts:
■ The switch generates an Accounting-On packet, which mainly contains the
following information: NAS-ID, NAS-IP address (source IP address), and session
ID.
■ The switch sends the Accounting-On packet to CAMS at regular intervals.
■ Once the CAMS receives the Accounting-On packet, it sends a response to the
switch. At the same time it finds and deletes the original online information of
the users who accessed the network through the switch before the restart
according to the information contained in this packet (NAS-ID, NAS-IP address
620 CHAPTER 46: RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
and session ID), and ends the accounting of the users based on the last
accounting update packet.
■ Once the switch receives the response from the CAMS, it stops sending other
Accounting-On packets.
■ If the switch does not receives any response from the CAMS after the times it
transmit Accounting-On packet reaches the configured maximum times, it
does not send any more Accounting-On packets.
n The switch can automatically generate the main attributes (NAS-ID, NAS-IP
address and session ID) in the Accounting-On packets. However, you can also
manually configure the NAS-IP address with the nas-ip command. If you choose
to manually configure this attribute, be sure to configure an appropriate and legal
IP address. If this attribute is not configured, the switch will automatically use the
IP address of the VLAN interface as the NAS-IP address.
Related command: nas-ip.
Example # Enable the user re-authentication upon device restart function for the RADIUS
scheme named CAMS.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] radius scheme CAMS
[SW7750-radius-CAMS] accounting-on enable
accounting optional
Syntax accounting optional
undo accounting optional
View RADIUS scheme view/ISP domain view
Parameter None
Description Use the accounting optional command to open the accounting-optional
switch.
Use the undo accounting optional command to close the accounting-optional
switch so that users are charged forcibly.
By default, once an ISP domain is created, the accounting-optional switch is
closed.
n Note that:
■ When the system charges an online user but it does not find any available
RADIUS accounting server or fails to communicate with any RADIUS
accounting server, the user can continue the access to network resources if the
accounting optional command has been used.
data-flow-format 621
■ After the accounting optional command is used for a RADIUS scheme, the
system will no longer send real-time accounting update packets and
stop-accounting packets for any user who adopts the RADIUS scheme.
■ This configuration takes effect only on the accounting using this RADIUS
scheme.
Example # Execute the accounting-optional command for the RADIUS scheme CAMS.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme CAMS
[SW7750-radius-cams] accounting optional
data-flow-format
Syntax data-flow-format data { byte | giga-byte | kilo-byte | mega-byte } packet {
giga-packet | kilo-packet | mega-packet | one-packet }
undo data-flow-format
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter data: Sets the unit of measure for data.
byte: Specifies to measure data in bytes.
giga-byte: Specifies to measure data in gigabytes.
kilo-byte: Specifies to measure data in kilobytes.
mega-byte: Specifies to measure data in megabytes.
packet: Sets the unit of measure for packets.
giga-packet: Specifies to measure packets in giga-packets.
kilo-packet: Specifies to measure packets in kilo-packets.
mega-packet: Specifies to measure packets in mega-packets.
one-packet: Specifies to measure packets in packets.
Description Use the data-flow-format command to set the units of measure for data flows
sent to RADIUS servers.
Use the undo data-flow-format command to restore the default units of
measure.
By default, the unit of measure for data is byte and that for packets is one-packet.
Related command: display radius.
622 CHAPTER 46: RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Specify to measure data and packets in data flows sent to RADIUS server in
kilobytes and kilo-packets respectively.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] data-flow-format data kilo-byte packet kilo-packet
display local-server statistics
Syntax display local-server statistics
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display local-server statistics command to display the statistics about
all local RADIUS authentication servers.
Related command: local-server.
Example # Display the statistics about local RADIUS authentication server.
<SW7750> display local-server statistics
The localserver packet statistics:
Receive: 30 Send: 30
Discard: 0 Receive Packet Error: 0
Auth Receive: 10 Auth Send: 10
Acct Receive: 20 Acct Send: 20
display radius
Syntax display radius [ radius-scheme-name ]
View Any view
Parameter radius-scheme-name: Name of a RADIUS scheme, a character string of up to 32
characters. If this argument is not specified, this command displays the
configuration information about all RADIUS schemes.
Description Use the display radius command to display the configuration information about
one specific or all RADIUS schemes.
By default, this command displays the configuration information about all RADIUS
schemes.
Related command: radius scheme.
Example # Display the configuration information about all RADIUS schemes.
display radius statistics 623
<SW7750> display radius
------------------------------------------------------------------
SchemeName =system Index=0 Type=extended
Primary Auth IP =127.0.0.1 Port=1645 State=active
Primary Acct IP =127.0.0.1 Port=1646 State=active
Second Auth IP =0.0.0.0 Port=1812 State=block
Second Acct IP =0.0.0.0 Port=1813 State=block
Auth Server Encryption Key= Not configured
Acct Server Encryption Key= Not configured
Accounting method = required
TimeOutValue(in second)=3 RetryTimes=3 RealtimeACCT(in minute)=12
Permitted send realtime PKT failed counts =5
Retry sending times of noresponse acct-stop-PKT =500
Source-IP-address =0.0.0.0
Quiet-interval(min) =5
Username format =without-domain
Data flow unit =Byte
Packet unit =1
------------------------------------------------------------------
Total 1 RADIUS scheme(s). 1 listed
Table 105 Field descriptions of the display radius command
Field Description
SchemeName Name of the RADIUS scheme
Index Index number of the RADIUS scheme
Type Type of the RADIUS servers
Primary Auth IP/ Port/ State IP address/access port number/state of the primary
authentication server
Primary Acct IP/ Port/ State IP address/access port number/state of the primary
accounting server
Second Auth IP/ Port/ State IP address/access port number/state of the secondary
authentication server
Second Acct IP/ Port/ State IP address/access port number/state of the secondary
accounting server
Auth Server Encryption Key Login password for the authentication servers
Acct Server Encryption Key Login password for the accounting servers
TimeOutValue (seconds) RADIUS server response timeout time
RetryTimes Maximum number of transmission attempts
Permitted send realtime PKT failed Maximum allowed number of continuous no-response
counts real-time accounting requests
Retry sending times of non-response Maximum number of transmission attempts of the
acct-stop-PKT buffered stop-accounting requests
Username format User name format
Data flow unit Unit of measure for data in data flows
Packet unit Unit of measure for packets
display radius statistics
Syntax display radius statistics
View Any view
624 CHAPTER 46: RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter None
Description Use the display radius statistics command to display the statistics about
RADIUS packets, so as to troubleshoot RADIUS configuration.
Related command: radius scheme.
Example # Display the statistics about RADIUS packets.
<SW7750> display radius statistics
state statistic(total=4120):
DEAD=4120 AuthProc=0 AuthSucc=0
AcctStart=0 RLTSend=0 RLTWait=0
AcctStop=0 OnLine=0 Stop=0
StateErr=0
Received and Sent packets statistic:
Sent PKT total :0 Received PKT total:0
RADIUS received packets statistic:
Code= 2,Num=0 ,Err=0
Code= 3,Num=0 ,Err=0
Code= 5,Num=0 ,Err=0
Code=11,Num=0 ,Err=0
Running statistic:
RADIUS received messages statistic:
Normal auth request , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
EAP auth request , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
Account request , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
Account off request , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
PKT auth timeout , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
PKT acct_timeout , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
(The following display is omitted.)
display stop-accounting-buffer
Syntax display stop-accounting-buffer { radius-scheme radius-scheme-name |
session-id session-id | time-range start-time stop-time | user-name user-name }
View Any view
Parameter radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Displays the buffered stop-accounting
requests of the specified RADIUS scheme. Where, radius-scheme-name is a
character string of up to 32 characters.
session-id session-id: Displays the buffered stop-accounting requests of the
specified session ID. Where, session-id is a character string of up to 50 characters.
time-range start-time stop-time: Displays the buffered stop-accounting requests
in the specified request time range. Where, start-time is the start time of the
request time range, stop-time is the end time of the request time range, and both
are in the format hh:mm:ss-mm/dd/yyyy or hh:mm:ss-yyyy/mm/dd. With this
key 625
argument specified, this command displays the buffered stop-accounting requests
from the start time to the end time.
user-name user-name: Displays the buffered stop-accounting requests of the
specified user. Where, user-name is a character string of up to 32 characters.
Description Use the display stop-accounting-buffer command to display the no-response
stop-accounting request packets buffered in the switch.
■ You can choose to display the buffered stop-accounting packets of a specified
RADIUS scheme, session ID, or user name. You can also specify a time range to
display those which are sent within the specified time range. The displayed
packet information helps you to diagnose and resolve problems relevant to
RADIUS.
■ When the switch sends out a stop-accounting packet but gets no response
from the RADIUS server, it first buffers the packet and then retransmits it until
the maximum number of retransmission attempts (set by the retry
stop-accounting command) is reached.
Related command: reset stop-accounting-buffer, stop-accounting-buffer enable and retry
stop-accounting.
Example # Display the buffered stop-accounting requests from 0:0:0 08/31/2003 to
23:59:59 08/31/2003.
<SW7750> display stop-accounting-buffer time-range 0:0:0-2003/08/31 23:59:59-2003/08/31
Total find 0 record
key
Syntax key { accounting | authentication } string
undo key { accounting | authentication }
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter accounting: Sets a shared key for the RADIUS accounting packets.
authentication: Sets a shared key for the RADIUS authentication/authorization
packets.
string: Shared key, a string of up to 16 characters.
Description Use the key command to set a shared key for the RADIUS
authentication/authorization packets or accounting packets.
Use the undo key command to restore the corresponding default shared key.
By default, no shared key is configured.
The RADIUS client (that is, the switch) and server adopt MD5 algorithm to encrypt
the RADIUS packets exchanged with each other. The two parties verify the validity
626 CHAPTER 46: RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
of the exchanged packets by using the encrypted keys that have been set on
them, and can accept and respond to the packets sent from each other only if
both of them have the same encrypted keys. If the authentication/authorization
server and the accounting server are two separate devices and the two servers
have different encrypted keys, you must set the encrypted keys for
authentication/authorization packets and accounting packets respectively on the
switch.
Related command: primary accounting, primary authentication, and radius scheme.
Example # Set the encrypted key for the RADIUS authentication/authorization packets in
RADIUS scheme radius1 to hello.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] key authentication hello
# Set the encrypted key for the RADIUS accounting packets in RADIUS scheme
radius1 to ok.
[SW7750-radius-radius1] key accounting ok
local-server
Syntax local-server nas-ip ip-address [ key password ]
undo local-server nas-ip ip-address
View System view
Parameter nas-ip ip-address: Specifies the NAS-IP address of the local RADIUS server. Where,
ip-address is in dotted decimal notation.
key password: Specifies the shared key of the authentication server and access
server. Where, password is a character string of up to 16 characters.
Description Use the local-server command to create a local RADIUS authentication server
(that is, set the related parameters of the server).
Use the undo local-server command to delete the specified local RADIUS
authentication server.
By default, a local RADIUS authentication server is used, whose default NAS-IP is
127.0.0.1. That is, the local device serves as a RADIUS authentication server and a
network access server, and all authentications are performed locally.
n Note that:
■ The switch not only supports the traditional RADIUS client service to
accomplish user AAA management through foreign
authentication/authorization server and accounting server, but also provides a
nas-ip 627
simple local RADIUS server function for authentication and authorization. This
function is called local RADIUS authentication server function.
■ When you use the local RADIUS authentication server function, the UDP port
number for the authentication/authorization service must be 1645, the UDP
port number for the accounting service is 1646.
■ The packet encryption key set by the local-server command with the key
password parameter must be identical with the authentication/authorization
packet encryption key set by the key authentication command in RADIUS
scheme view.
■ The switch supports at most 16 IP addresses and shared keys of the network
access server (including the default local RADIUS authentication server); that is,
when the switch serves as a RADIUS authentication server, it can support at
most 16 network access servers simultaneously to provide authentication.
■ As a local RADIUS authentication server, the switch does not support EAP
authentication.
Related command: radius scheme and state.
Example # Create a network access server granted by the RADIUS authentication server
with an IP address of 10.110.1.2 and a shared key of aabbcc.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] local-server nas-ip 10.110.1.2 key aabbcc
nas-ip
Syntax nas-ip ip-address
undo nas-ip
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter ip-address: Source IP address for RADIUS packets, an IP address of this device. This
address can neither be the all zero address nor be a Class-D address.
Description Use the nas-ip command to set the source IP address used by the switch to send
RADIUS packets.
Use the undo nas-ip command to remove the source IP address setting.
n The nas-ip command in RADIUS scheme view has the same function as the
radius nas-ip command in system view; and the priority of configuration in
RADIUS scheme view is higher than in system view.
You can specify the source address used to send RADIUS packets to prevent the
unreachability of the packets returned from the server due to physical interface
trouble. It is recommended to use the loopback interface address as the source IP
address.
628 CHAPTER 46: RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
By default, the IP address of the outbound interface is used as the source IP
address of the packet.
Related command: display radius and radius nas-ip.
Example # Set the source IP address used by the switch to send the RADIUS packets to
10.1.1.1.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme test1
[SW7750-radius-test1] nas-ip 10.1.1.1
primary accounting
Syntax primary accounting ip-address [ port-number ]
undo primary accounting
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter ip-address: IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
port-number: UDP port number, ranging from 1 to 65535.
Description Use the primary accounting command to set the IP address and port number of
the primary RADIUS accounting server.
Use the undo primary accounting command to restore the default IP address
and port number of the primary RADIUS accounting server.
The IP address and UDP port number of the primary accounting server used by the
default RADIUS scheme "system" are 127.0.0.1 and 1646. The IP address and the
UDP port number of the primary accounting server used by a newly created
RADIUS scheme are 0.0.0.0 and 1813.
After creating a new RADIUS scheme, you should configure the IP address and
UDP port number of each RADIUS server you want to use in this scheme. These
RADIUS servers fall into two types: authentication/authorization, and accounting.
And for each kind of server, you can configure two servers in a RADIUS scheme:
primary and secondary servers.
In an actual network environment, you can configure the above parameters as
required. But you should configure at least one authentication/authorization server
and one accounting server. At the same time, you should keep the RADIUS service
port settings on the switch consistent with those on the RADIUS servers.
Related command: key, radius scheme and state.
Example # Set the IP address and UDP port number of the primary accounting server of the
RADIUS scheme radius1 to 10.110.1.2 and 1813.
primary authentication 629
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] primary accounting 10.110.1.2 1813
primary authentication
Syntax primary authentication ip-address [ port-number ]
undo primary authentication
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter ip-address: IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
port-number: UDP port number, ranging from 1 to 65535.
Description Use the primary authentication command to set the IP address and port
number of the primary RADIUS authentication/authorization server.
Use the undo primary authentication command to restore the default IP
address and port number of the primary RADIUS authentication/authorization
server.
The IP address and UDP port number of the primary authentication server used by
the default RADIUS scheme "system" are 127.0.0.1 and 1645. The IP address and
UDP port number of the secondary authentication server is 0.0.0.0 and 1812. The
IP address and the UDP port number of the primary/secondary authentication
server used by a newly created RADIUS scheme are 0.0.0.0 and 1812.
After creating a new RADIUS scheme, you should configure the IP address and
UDP port number of each RADIUS server you want to use in this scheme. These
RADIUS servers fall into two types: authentication/authorization, and accounting.
And for each kind of server, you can configure two servers in a RADIUS scheme:
primary and secondary servers.
In an actual network environment, you can configure the above parameters as
required. But you should configure at least one authentication/authorization server
and one accounting server. At the same time, you should keep the RADIUS service
port settings on the switch consistent with those on the RADIUS servers.
Related command: key, radius scheme and state.
Example # Set the IP address and UDP port number of the primary
authentication/authorization server used by the RADIUS scheme radius1 to
10.110.1.1 and 1812.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] primary authentication 10.110.1.1 1812
630 CHAPTER 46: RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
radius nas-ip
Syntax radius nas-ip ip-address
undo radius nas-ip
View System view
Parameter ip-address: Source IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
Description Use the radius nas-ip command to set the source address used by the NAS to
send RADIUS packets.
Use the undo radius nas-ip command to restore the default setting.
By default, no source address is specified, and the address of the outbound
interface is used as the source address of the packet.
n The nas-ip command in RADIUS scheme view has the same function as the
radius nas-ip command in system view; and the priority of configuration in
RADIUS scheme view is higher than in system view.
n Note that:
■ You can specify the source IP address used to send RADIUS packet to prevent
the unreachability of the packets returned from the server due to physical
interface trouble. It is recommended to use the loopback interface address as
the source IP address.
■ You can specify only one source IP address by using this command. When you
use this command again, the newly specified source IP address will overwrite
the old one.
Related command: nas-ip.
Example # Set the source address used by the switch to send the RADIUS packets to
129.10.10.1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius nas-ip 129.10.10.1
radius scheme
Syntax radius scheme radius-scheme-name
undo radius scheme radius-scheme-name
View System view
reset radius statistics 631
Parameter radius-scheme-name: Name of the RADIUS scheme, a character string of up to 32
characters.
Description Use the radius scheme command to create a RADIUS scheme and enter its view.
Use the undo radius scheme command to delete the specified RADIUS scheme.
By default, a RADIUS scheme named "system" has already been created in the
system. All attributes of the scheme take the default values.
The RADIUS protocol configuration is performed on a RADIUS scheme basis. For
each RADIUS scheme, you should specify at least the IP addresses and UDP port
numbers of the RADIUS authentication/authorization and accounting servers, and
the parameters required for the RADIUS client (that is, the switch) to interact with
the RADIUS servers. Therefore, you should first create a RADIUS scheme and enter
its view before performing other RADIUS protocol configurations.
A RADIUS scheme can be referenced by multiple ISP domains simultaneously. You
can configure up to 16 RADIUS schemes, including the default scheme "system".
The undo radius scheme command cannot be used to delete the default RADIUS
scheme. Note that you cannot delete a RADIUS scheme which is being used by an
online user.
Related command: key, retry realtime-accounting, radius-scheme, timer realtime-accounting,
stop-accounting-buffer enable, retry stop-accounting, server-type, state,
user-name-format, retry, display radius, and display radius statistics.
Example # Create a RADIUS scheme named radius1 and enter its view.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1]
reset radius statistics
Syntax reset radius statistics
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset radius statistics command to clear the statistics about the
RADIUS protocol.
Related command: display radius.
Example # Clear the statistics about the RADIUS protocol.
<SW7750> reset radius statistics
632 CHAPTER 46: RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
reset stop-accounting-buffer
Syntax reset stop-accounting-buffer { radius-scheme radius-scheme-name |
session-id session-id | time-range start-time stop-time | user-name user-name }
View User view
Parameter radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Deletes the buffered stop-accounting
requests depending on the specified RADIUS scheme. radius-scheme-name is the
name of a RADIUS scheme. This name is a character string of up to 32 characters.
session-id session-id: Deletes the buffered stop-accounting requests depending
on the specified session ID. Where, session-id is a character string of up to 50
characters.
time-range start-time stop-time: Deletes the buffered stop-accounting requests
depending on the time of the stop-accounting request. Where, start-time is the
start time of the request period, the stop-time is the end time of the request
period, and both are in the format hh:mm:ss-mm/dd/yyyy or
hh:mm:ss-yyyy/mm/dd. With this argument specified, this command displays the
buffered stop-accounting requests from the start time to the end time.
user-name user-name: Deletes the buffered stop-accounting request packets
depending on the specified user name. user-name is a character string of up to 32
characters.
Description Use the reset stop-accounting-buffer command to delete the buffered
no-response stop-accounting request packets.
When the switch sends out a stop-accounting packet but gets no response from
the RADIUS server, it first buffers the packet and then retransmits it until the
maximum number of retransmission attempts (set by the retry stop-accounting
command) is reached.
The reset stop-accounting-buffer command is used to delete the
stop-accounting request packets buffered in the switch. You can choose to delete
the buffered stop-accounting packets of a specified RADIUS scheme, session ID, or
user name. You can also specify a time range to delete the stop-accounting
packets sent within the specified time range.
Related command: stop-accounting-buffer enable, retry stop-accounting and display
stop-accounting-buffer.
Example # Delete the stop-accounting request packets buffered in the system for the user
[email protected].
<SW7750> reset stop-accounting-buffer user-name [email protected]
# Delete the stop-accounting request packets buffered from 0:0:0 08/31/2002 to
23:59:59 08/31/2002 in the system.
<SW7750> reset stop-accounting-buffer time-range 0:0:0-2002/08/31 23:59:59-2002/08/31
retry 633
retry
Syntax retry retry-times
undo retry
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter retry-times: Maximum number of transmission attempts, ranging from 1 to 20 and
defaulting to 3.
Description Use the retry command to set the maximum number of transmission attempts of
RADIUS requests.
Use the undo retry command to restore the default maximum number of
transmission attempts.
n Note that:
■ The communication in RADIUS is unreliable because this protocol adopts UDP
packets to carry data. Therefore, it is necessary for the switch to retransmit a
RADIUS request if it gets no response from the RADIUS server after the
response timeout timer expires. If the maximum number of transmission
attempts is reached but the switch still receives no response, the switch
considers that the request fails.
■ Appropriately set this maximum number of transmission attempts according to
the network situation can improve the reacting speed of the system.
Related command: radius scheme.
Example # Set the maximum transmission times of RADIUS requests in the RADIUS scheme
radius1 to five.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] retry 5
retry realtime-accounting
Syntax retry realtime-accounting retry-times
undo retry realtime-accounting
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter retry-times: Maximum number of real-time accounting request attempts, ranging
from 1 to 255.
634 CHAPTER 46: RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the retry realtime-accounting command to set the maximum number of
real-time accounting request attempts.
Use the undo retry realtime-accounting command to restore the default
maximum number of real-time accounting request attempts.
By default, the system can allow five real-time accounting request attempts at
most.
n Note that:
■ Generally, the RADIUS server uses the connection timeout timer to determine
whether a user is online or not. If the RADIUS server receives no real-time
accounting packet for a specified period of time, it will consider that the line or
the switch is in trouble and stop the accounting of the user. To make the switch
cooperate with this feature on the RADIUS server, it is necessary to cut down
the user connection on the switch as soon as possible after the RADIUS server
terminates the charging and connection of the user in the case of unforeseen
trouble. For this purpose, you can limit the number of continuous real-time
no-response accounting requests, and the switch will cut down the user
connection if it sends out the maximum number of real-time accounting
requests but does not receive any response.
■ A real-time account request may be sent multiple times (set by the retry
command in RADIUS scheme view) for an accounting attempt. If no response is
received even after the number of transmission attempts reaches the
maximum, the accounting attempt fails. Suppose that the response timeout
time of the RADIUS server is three seconds (set by the timer
response-timeout command), that the maximum number of transmission
attempts (set by the retry command) is 3, and that the real-time accounting
interval is 12 minutes (set by the timer realtime-accounting command), the
maximum number of real-time accounting request attempts is 5 (set by the
retry realtime-accounting command). In this case, the switch sends an
accounting request every 12 minutes; if the switch does not receive a response
within 3 seconds after it sends out an accounting request, it resends the
request; if the switch continuously sends the accounting request for three
times but does not receive any response; it considers this real-time accounting
a failure. Then, the switch sends the accounting request every 12 minutes; if
the number of accounting failures exceeds five, the user connection is cut
down.
Related command: radius scheme and timer realtime-accounting.
Example # Allow the switch to continuously send at most 10 real-time accounting requests
for the RADIUS scheme radius1.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] retry realtime-accounting 10
retry stop-accounting 635
retry stop-accounting
Syntax retry stop-accounting retry-times
undo retry stop-accounting
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter retry-times: Maximum number of transmission attempts of the buffered
stop-accounting requests, ranging from 10 to 65535 and defaulting to 500.
Description Use the retry stop-accounting command to set the maximum number of
transmission attempts of the stop-accounting requests buffered due to no
response.
Use the undo retry stop-accounting command to restore the default
maximum number of transmission attempts of the buffered stop-accounting
requests.
Stop-accounting requests are critical to billing and will eventually affect the
charges of the users; they are important for both the users and the ISP. Therefore,
the NAS should do its best to transmit them to the RADIUS accounting server. If
the RADIUS server does not respond to such a request, the switch should first
buffer the request on itself, and then retransmit the request to the RADIUS
accounting server until it gets a response, or the maximum number of
transmission attempts is reached (in this case, it discards the request).
Related command: reset stop-accounting-buffer, radius scheme and display
stop-accounting-buffer.
Example # In RADIUS scheme radius1, specify that the switch can transmit a buffered
stop-accounting request at most 1,000 times
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] retry stop-accounting 1000
secondary accounting
Syntax secondary accounting ip-address [ port-number ]
undo secondary accounting
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter ip-address: IP address, in dotted decimal notation. By default, the IP address of the
secondary accounting server is 0.0.0.0.
636 CHAPTER 46: RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
port-number: UDP port number, ranging from 1 to 65535. By default, the UDP
port number of the secondary accounting service is 1813.
Description Use the secondary accounting command to set the IP address and port number
of the secondary RADIUS accounting server.
Use the undo secondary accounting command to restore the default IP
address and port number of the secondary RADIUS accounting server.
See the description of primary accounting on page 628 for details.
Related command: key, radius scheme and state.
Example # Set the IP address and UDP port number of the secondary accounting server of
the RADIUS scheme radius1 to 10.110.1.1 and 1813.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] secondary accounting 10.110.1.1 1813
secondary authentication
Syntax secondary authentication ip-address [ port-number ]
undo secondary authentication
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter ip-address: IP address, in dotted decimal notation. By default, the IP address of the
secondary authentication/authorization server is 0.0.0.0.
port-number: UDP port number, ranging from 1 to 65535. By default, the UDP
port number of the secondary authentication/authorization service is 1812.
Description Use the secondary authentication command to set the IP address and port
number of the secondary RADIUS authentication/authorization server.
Use the undo secondary authentication command to restore the default IP
address and port number of the secondary RADIUS authentication/authorization
server.
See the description of primary authentication on page 629 for details.
Related command: key, radius scheme and state.
Example # Set the IP address and UDP port number of the secondary
authentication/authorization server used by the RADIUS scheme radius1 to
10.110.1.2 and 1812.
server-type 637
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] secondary authentication 10.110.1.2 1812
server-type
Syntax server-type { extended | standard }
undo server-type
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter extended: Specifies that the switch supports 3Com’s RADIUS server. That is, it is
required that the RADIUS client (on the switch) and the RADIUS server (generally
the CAMS) interact with each other. by using 3Com’s proprietary RADIUS protocol
(such as the procedure and packet format)
standard: Specifies to use the standard RADIUS protocol. That is, it is required
that the RADIUS client (on the switch) and the RADIUS server interact with each
other following the procedure and packet format of the standard RADIUS protocol
(RFC2865/2866 or above).
Description Use the server-type command to specify the RADIUS server type supported by
the switch.
Use the undo server-type command to restore the default RADIUS server type
supported by the switch.
By default, the RADIUS server type of a new RADIUS scheme is standard. The type
of RADIUS server in the default RADIUS scheme "system" is extended.
Related command: radius scheme.
Example # Set the RADIUS server type in RADIUS scheme radius1 to extended.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] server-type extended
state
Syntax state { primary | secondary } { accounting | authentication } { block | active }
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter primary: Specifies the server to be set is a primary RADIUS server.
secondary: Specifies the server to be set is a secondary RADIUS server.
638 CHAPTER 46: RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
accounting: Specifies the server to be set is a RADIUS accounting server.
authentication: Specifies the server to be set is a RADIUS
authentication/authorization server.
block: Sets the status of the specified RADIUS server to block (that is, the down
state).
active: Sets the status of the specified RADIUS server to active (that is, the normal
working state).
Description Use the state command to set the status of a RADIUS server.
By default, all the RADIUS servers in a user-defined RADIUS scheme are in the
block state.
For the primary and secondary servers (authentication/authorization servers, or
accounting servers) in a RADIUS scheme, note that:
■ When the NAS fails to communicate with the primary server due to some
server trouble, the NAS will actively exchange packets with the secondary
server.
■ After the primary server recovers, the NAS does not immediately restore the
communication with the primary server, but keeps communicating with the
secondary server unit the secondary server also fails. In order for the NAS to
quickly restore the communication with the recovered primary server, you need
to manually set the state of the primary server to active by using the state
command.
■ When both the primary and secondary servers are in the active state, the NAS
sends packets to the primary server only.
Related command: radius scheme, primary authentication, secondary authentication, primary
accounting, and secondary accounting.
Example # Set the status of the secondary authentication server in RADIUS scheme radius1
to active.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] state secondary authentication active
stop-accounting-buffer enable
Syntax stop-accounting-buffer enable
undo stop-accounting-buffer enable
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter None
timer 639
Description Use the stop-accounting-buffer enable command to enable the switch to
buffer the stop-accounting requests that bring no response.
Use the undo stop-accounting-buffer enable command to disable the switch
from buffering the stop-accounting requests that bring no response.
By default, the switch is enabled to buffer the stop-accounting requests that bring
no response.
Stop-accounting requests are critical to billing and will eventually affect the
charges; they are important for both the users and the ISP. Therefore, the NAS
should do its best to transmit them to the RADIUS accounting server. If the
RADIUS accounting server does not respond to such a request, the switch should
first buffer the request on itself, and then retransmit the request to the RADIUS
accounting server until it gets a response, or the maximum number of
transmission attempts is reached (in this case, it discards the request).
Related command: reset stop-accounting-buffer, radius scheme and display
stop-accounting-buffer.
Example # Enable the switch to buffer the stop-accounting requests that bring no response
from the servers in RADIUS scheme radius1.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] stop-accounting-buffer enable
timer
Syntax timer seconds
undo timer
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter seconds: Response timeout time of RADIUS server, ranging from 1 second to 10
seconds. By default, the response timeout time of the RADIUS server is three
seconds.
Description Use the timer command to set the response timeout time of RADIUS server (that
is, the timeout time of the response timeout timer of RADIUS server).
Use the undo timer command to restore the default response timeout timer of
RADIUS server.
n Note that:
■ If the switch gets no response from the RADIUS server after sending out a
RADIUS request (authentication/authorization request or accounting request)
and waiting for a time, it should retransmit the packet to ensure that the user
can obtain the RADIUS service. This wait time is called response timeout time
640 CHAPTER 46: RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
of RADIUS server; and the timer in the switch system that is used to control this
time is called the response timeout timer of RADIUS server. You can use the
timer command to set the timeout time of this timer.
■ Appropriately setting the timeout time of this timer according to the network
situation can improve the performance of the system.
■ The timer command has the same effect with the timer response-timeout
command.
Related command: radius scheme and retry.
Example # Set the timeout time of the response timeout timer for the RADIUS scheme
radius1 to 5 seconds.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] timer 5
timer quiet
Syntax timer quiet minutes
undo timer quiet
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter minutes: Wait time, ranging from 1 minute to 255 minutes. By default, it is 5
minutes.
Description Use the timer quiet command to set the wait time for the primary server to
restore the active state.
Use the undo timer quiet command to restore the default wait time.
Wait time works as follows:
The switch sends a RADIUS packet to the primary RADIUS server.
After confirming that no response will be received from the primary server, the
switch starts to send RADIUS packets to the secondary RADIUS server.
At the interval of wait time, the switch sets the state of the primary server to
active and sends RADIUS packets to the primary server.
Example # Set the wait time for the RADIUS scheme "radius1" to three minutes.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] timer quiet 3
timer realtime-accounting 641
timer realtime-accounting
Syntax timer realtime-accounting minutes
undo timer realtime-accounting
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter minutes: Real-time accounting interval. It ranges from 3 minutes to 60 minutes
and must be a multiple of 3. By default, this interval is 12 minutes.
Description Use the timer realtime-accounting command to set the real-time accounting
interval.
Use the undo timer realtime-accounting command to restore the default
real-time accounting interval.
n Note that:
■ To charge the users in real time, you should set the interval of real-time
accounting. After the setting, the NAS sends the accounting information of
online users to the RADIUS server at regular intervals.
■ The setting of the real-time accounting interval depends to some degree on the
performance of the NAS and the RADIUS server. The higher the performance of
the NAS and the RADIUS server is, the shorter the interval can be. You are
recommended to set the interval as long as possible when the number of users
is relatively great (¦1000). Table 106 lists the numbers of users and the
corresponding recommended intervals.
Table 106 Numbers of users and corresponding recommended intervals
Number of users Real-time accounting interval
1 to 99 3
100 to 499 6
500 to 999 12
¦1000 ¦15
Related command: retry realtime-accounting and radius scheme.
Example # Set the real-time accounting interval of the RADIUS scheme radius1 to 51
minutes.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] timer realtime-accounting 51
timer response-timeout
Syntax timer response-timeout seconds
642 CHAPTER 46: RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
undo timer response-timeout
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter seconds: Response timeout time of RADIUS servers, ranging from 1 second to 10
seconds. By default, the response timeout time of the RADIUS server is three
seconds.
Description Use the timer response-timeout command to set the response timeout time of
RADIUS servers.
Use the undo timer response-timeout command to restore the default
response timeout timer of RADIUS servers.
n Note that:
■ If the switch gets no response from the RADIUS server after sending out a
RADIUS request (authentication/authorization request or accounting request)
and waiting for a time, it should retransmit the packet to ensure that the user
can obtain the RADIUS service. This wait time is called response timeout time
of RADIUS servers; and the timer in the switch system that is used to control
this time is called the response timeout timer of RADIUS servers. You can use
the timer response-timeout command to set the timeout time of this timer.
■ Appropriately setting the timeout time of this timer according to the network
situation can improve the performance of the system.
■ This command has the same effect with the timer command.
Related command: radius scheme and retry.
Example # Set the response timeout time in the RADIUS scheme radius1 to five seconds.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] timer response-timeout 5
user-name-format
Syntax user-name-format { with-domain | without-domain }
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter with-domain: Specifies to include ISP domain names in the user names to be sent
to RADIUS servers.
without-domain: Specifies to exclude ISP domain names from the user names to
be sent to RADIUS servers.
Description Use the user-name-format command to set the format of the user names to be
sent to RADIUS server
user-name-format 643
By default, except for the default RADIUS scheme "system", the user names sent
to RADIUS servers in any RADIUS scheme carry ISP domain names.
Generally, an access user is named in the userid@isp-name format. isp-name
behind the @ character represents the ISP domain name, by which the device
determines which ISP domain it should ascribe the user to. However, some old
RADIUS servers cannot accept the user names that carry ISP domain names. In this
case, it is necessary to remove the domain names carried in the user names before
sending the user names to the RADIUS server. For this reason, the
user-name-format command is available for you to specify whether or not ISP
domain names are carried in the user names sent to the RADIUS server.
n For a RADIUS scheme, if you have specified that no ISP domain names are carried
in the user names, you should not use this RADIUS scheme in more than one ISP
domain. Otherwise, such errors may occur: the RADIUS server regards two
different users having the same name but belonging to different ISP domains as
the same user (because the user names sent to it are the same).
Related command: radius scheme.
Example # Specify that the user names sent to a RADIUS server in RADIUS scheme radius1
does not carry ISP domain names.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme radius1
[SW7750-radius-radius1] user-name-format without-domain
644 CHAPTER 46: RADIUS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
HWTACACS CONFIGURATION
47 COMMANDS
data-flow-format
Syntax data-flow-format data { byte | giga-byte | kilo-byte | mega-byte }
data-flow-format packet { giga-packet | kilo-packet | mega-packet |
one-packet }
undo data-flow-format { data | packet }
View HWTACACS view
Parameter data: Sets data unit.
byte: Sets ’byte’ as the unit of data flow.
giga-byte: Sets ’giga-byte’ as the unit of data flow.
kilo-byte: Sets ’kilo-byte’ as the unit of data flow.
mega-byte: Sets ’mega-byte’ as the unit of data flow.
packet: Sets data packet unit.
giga-packet: Sets ’giga-packet’ as the unit of packet flow. This means each
giga-packet contains 1 G packets.
kilo-packet: Sets ’kilo-packet’ as the unit of packet flow. This means each
kilo-packet contains 1 K packets.
mega-packet: Sets ’mega-packet’ as the unit of packet flow. This means each
mega-packet contains 1 M packets.
one-packet: Sets ’one-packet’ as the unit of packet flow. This means each
one-packet contains one packet.
Description Use the data-flow-format command to configure the unit of data flows sent to
the TACACS server.
Use the undo data-flow-format command to restore the default.
By default, the data unit is byte and the data packet unit is one-packet.
Related command: display hwtacacs.
646 CHAPTER 47: HWTACACS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Set the unit of data flow destined for the HWTACACS server to kilo-byte and the
data packet unit to kilo-packet.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750- hwtacacs-test1] data-flow-format data kilo-byte
[SW7750- hwtacacs-test1] data-flow-format packet kilo-packet
display hwtacacs
Syntax display hwtacacs [ hwtacacs-scheme-name [ statistics ] ]
View Any view
Parameter hwtacacs-scheme-name: HWTACACS scheme name, a string of 1 to 32
case-insensitive characters. If no HWTACACS scheme is specified, the system
displays the configuration of all HWTACACS schemes.
statistics: Displays complete statistics about the HWTACACS scheme.
Description Use the display hwtacacs command to displays the configuration or statistics of
the specified or all HWTACACS schemes.
By default, this command displays the configuration of all HWTACACS schemes.
Related command: hwtacacs scheme.
Example # View configuration information of HWTACACS scheme gy.
<SW7750> display hwtacacs gy
--------------------------------------------------------------------
HWTACACS-server template name : gy
Primary-authentication-server : 172.31.1.11:49
Primary-authorization-server : 172.31.1.11:49
Primary-accounting-server : 172.31.1.11:49
Secondary-authentication-server : 0.0.0.0:0
Secondary-authorization-server : 0.0.0.0:0
Secondary-accounting-server : 0.0.0.0:0
Current-authentication-server : 172.31.1.11:49
Current-authorization-server : 172.31.1.11:49
Current-accounting-server : 172.31.1.11:49
Source-IP-address : 0.0.0.0
key authentication : 790131
key authorization : 790131
key accounting : 790131
Quiet-interval(min) : 5
Response-timeout-Interval(sec) : 5
Domain-included : No
Traffic-unit : B
Packet traffic-unit : one-packet
-------------------------------------------------------------
Total 1,1 printed
display stop-accounting-buffer 647
display stop-accounting-buffer
Syntax display stop-accounting-buffer { hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name |
session-id session-id | time-range start-time stop-time | user-name user-name }
View Any view
Parameter hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name: Displays information on buffered
stop-accounting requests according to the HWTACACS scheme specified by
hwtacacs-scheme-name, the name of HWTACACS scheme, a character string of
up to 32 characters.
session-id session-id: Displays information on buffered stop-accounting requests
according to the session ID specified by session-id, a character string of up to 50
characters.
time-range start-time stop-time: Displays information on buffered
stop-accounting requests according to the request time, where, start-time is the
start time of the stop-accounting request; stop-time is the end time of
stop-accounting request. This argument is in the format hh:mm:ss - mm/dd/yyyy
or hh:mm:ss-yyyy/mm/dd and is used to display the buffered stop-accounting
requests from the start time to the end time.
user-name user-name: Displays information on buffered stop-accounting requests
according to the user name specified by user-name, a character string of up to 32
characters.
Description Use the display stop-accounting-buffer command to view information on the
stop-accounting requests buffered in the switch.
Related command: reset stop-accounting-buffer, stop-accounting-buffer enable, and retry
stop-accounting.
Example # Display the stop-accounting requests buffered in the HWTACACS scheme "ht".
<SW7750> display stop-accounting-buffer hwtacacs-scheme ht
hwtacacs nas-ip
Syntax hwtacacs nas-ip ip-address
undo hwtacacs nas-ip
View System view
Parameter ip-address: Specifies a source IP address for the switch, which cannot be an
all-zero address, class D address, class A, B, and C broadcast address, or 127
network segment address.
648 CHAPTER 47: HWTACACS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the hwtacacs nas-ip command to specify the source address of the
hwtacacs packet sent from NAS.
Use the undo hwtacacs nas-ip command to restore the default setting.
n Note that:
■ By specifying the source address of the hwtacacs packet, you can avoid
destination unreachable packets as returned from the server upon interface
failure. The source address is normally recommended to be a loopback
interface address.
■ When you configure the source address for the NAS to send HWTACACS
packets, the priority of HWTACACS scheme view is higher than that of system
view.
■ By default, the source address is not specified, that is, the address of the
interface sending the packet serves as the source address.
■ This command specifies only one source address; therefore, the newly
configured source address may overwrite the original one.
Example # Configure the switch to send hwtacacs packets from 129.10.10.1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs nas-ip 129.10.10.1
hwtacacs scheme
Syntax hwtacacs scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name
undo hwtacacs scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name
undo hwtacacs scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name
View System view
Parameter hwtacacs-scheme-name: Specifies an HWTACACS server scheme, with a character
string of up to characters.
Description Use the hwtacacs scheme command to enter HWTACACS scheme view and
create the specified HWTACACS scheme if it does not exist.
Use the undo hwtacacs scheme command to delete an HWTACACS scheme.
Example # Create an HWTACACS scheme named "test1" and enter the relevant
HWTACACS view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
Create a new HWTACACS-server scheme
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1]
key 649
key
Syntax key { accounting | authentication | authorization } string
undo key { accounting | authentication | authorization } string
View HWTACACS scheme view
Parameter accounting: Specifies a shared key for the accounting server.
authentication: Specifies a shared key for the authentication server.
authorization: Specifies a shared key for the authorization server.
string: Shared key, a string of up to 16 characters.
Description Use the key command to configure a shared key for HWTACACS authentication,
authorization or accounting server.
Use the undo key command to delete the configuration.
By default, no shared key is set.
The TACACS client (on the switch) and the TACACS server use the MD5 algorithm
to encrypt the HWTACACS packets communicated between them. They
authenticate packets by using shared keys. Either of them receives and responds to
the packet sent from the other party only when their shared keys are the same.
Therefore, the shared key set on the switch and that on the TACACS server must
be the same.
If the authentication/authorization server and the accounting server are different
and the shared key for the two servers are different, a shared key must be set for
authentication/authorization packets and accounting packets.
Related command: display hwtacacs.
Example # Use hello as the shared key for TACACS accounting server.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1] key accounting hello
nas-ip
Syntax nas-ip ip-address
undo nas-ip
View HWTACACS scheme view
650 CHAPTER 47: HWTACACS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter ip-address: Specified source IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
Description Use the nas-ip command to specify the source address for sending HWTACACS
packets so that all packets sent to the TACACS server carry the same source IP
address.
Use the undo nas-ip command to remove the configuration.
By specifying the source address of the hwtacacs packet, you can avoid
destination unreachable packets as returned from the server upon interface
failure. The source address is normally recommended to be a loopback interface
address.
By default, the source IP address of the packets is the IP address of the sending
interface.
Related command: display hwtacacs and hwtacacs nas-ip.
Example # Set the source IP address of the HWTACACS packets sent by the NAS (switch) to
10.1.1.1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1] nas-ip 10.1.1.1
primary accounting
Syntax primary accounting ip-address [ port ]
undo primary accounting
View HWTACACS scheme view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the server, a valid unicast address in dotted decimal
format. port: Port number of the server, which is in the range 1 to 65535 and
defaults to 49.
Description Use the primary accounting command to configure a primary TACACS
accounting server.
Use the undo primary accounting command to delete the configured primary
TACACS accounting server.
By default, the IP address of TACACS accounting server is 0.0.0.0.
n Note that:
■ You are not allowed to assign the same IP address to both primary and
secondary accounting servers; otherwise, unsuccessful operation is prompted.
primary authentication 651
■ If you repeatedly use this command, the latest configuration overwrites the
previous one.
■ You can remove an accounting server only when it is not being used by any
active TCP connections, and the removal impacts only packets forwarded
afterwards.
Example # Configure a primary accounting server.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1] primary accounting 10.163.155.12 49
primary authentication
Syntax primary authentication ip-address [ port ]
undo primary authentication
View HWTACACS scheme view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the server, a valid unicast address in dotted decimal
format. port: Port number of the server, which is in the range 1 to 65535 and
defaults to 49.
Description Use the primary authentication command to configure a TACACS
authentication server.
Use the undo primary authentication command to delete the configured
authentication server.
By default, the IP address of TACACS authentication server is 0.0.0.0.
n Note that:
■ You are not allowed to assign the same IP address to both primary and
secondary authentication servers; otherwise, unsuccessful operation is
prompted.
■ If you repeatedly use this command, the latest configuration overwrites the
previous one.
■ You can remove an authentication server only when it is not being used by any
active TCP connections, and the removal impacts only packets forwarded
afterwards.
Related command: display hwtacacs.
Example # Configure a primary authentication server.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
652 CHAPTER 47: HWTACACS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1] primary authentication 10.163.155.13 49
primary authorization
Syntax primary authorization ip-address [ port ]
undo primary authorization
View HWTACACS scheme view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the server, a valid unicast address in dotted decimal
format. port: Port number of the server, which is in the range 1 to 65535 and
defaults to 49.
Description Use the primary authorization command to configure a primary TACACS
authorization server.
Use the undo primary authorization command to delete the configured
primary authorization server.
By default, the IP address of TACACS authorization server is 0.0.0.0.
n Note that:
■ You are not allowed to assign the same IP address to both primary and
secondary authorization servers; otherwise, unsuccessful operation is
prompted.
■ If you repeatedly use this command, the latest configuration overwrites the
previous one.
■ You can remove an authorization server only when it is not being used by any
active TCP connections, and the removal impacts only packets forwarded
afterwards.
Related command: display hwtacacs.
Example # Configure a primary authorization server.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1] primary authorization 10.163.155.13 49
reset hwtacacs statistics
Syntax reset hwtacacs statistics { accounting | authentication | authorization | all }
View User view
reset stop-accounting-buffer 653
Parameter accounting: Clears all the HWTACACS accounting statistics.
authentication: Clears all the HWTACACS authentication statistics.
authorization: Clears all the HWTACACS authorization statistics.
all: Clears all statistics.
Description Use the reset hwtacacs statistics command to clear HWTACACS protocol
statistics.
Related command: display hwtacacs.
Example # Clear all HWTACACS protocol statistics.
<SW7750> reset hwtacacs statistics all
reset stop-accounting-buffer
Syntax reset stop-accounting-buffer { hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name |
session-id session-id | time-range start-time stop-time | user-name user-name }
View User view
Parameter hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name: Configures to delete the
stop-accounting requests from the buffer according to the specified HWTACACS
scheme name. The hwtacacs-scheme-name specifies the HWTACACS scheme
name with a character string of up to 32 characters, excluding question marks (?).
session-id session-id: Displays information on buffered stop-accounting requests
according to the session ID specified by session-id, a character string of up to 50
characters.
time-range start-time stop-time: Displays information on buffered
stop-accounting requests according to the request time, where, start-time is the
start time of the stop-accounting request; stop-time is the end time of
stop-accounting request. This argument is in the format hh:mm:ss - mm/dd/yyyy
or hh:mm:ss-yyyy/mm/dd and is used to display the buffered stop-accounting
requests from the start time to the end time. With this argument specified, this
command displays the buffered stop-accounting requests from the start time to
the end time.
user-name user-name: Displays information on buffered stop-accounting requests
according to the user name specified by user-name, a character string of up to 32
characters.
Description Use the reset stop-accounting-buffer command to clear the stop-accounting
requests that have no response and are buffered on the switch.
Related command: stop-accounting-buffer enable, retry stop-accounting, display
stop-accounting-buffer.
654 CHAPTER 47: HWTACACS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Delete the buffered stop-accounting requests that are according to the
HWTACACS scheme "ht".
<SW7750> reset stop-accounting-buffer hwtacacs-scheme ht
retry stop-accounting
Syntax retry stop-accounting retry-times
undo retry stop-accounting
View HWTACACS scheme view
Parameter retry-times: Maximum number of real-time stop-accounting request attempts. It is
in the range 1 to 300 and defaults to 100.
Description Use the retry stop-accounting command to enable stop-accounting packet
retransmission and configure the maximum number of stop-accounting request
attempts.
Use the undo retry stop-accounting command to restore the default setting.
By default, stop-accounting packet retransmission is enabled and has 100
attempts for each request.
Related command: reset stop-accounting-buffer, hwtacacs scheme, and display
stop-accounting-buffer.
Example # Enable stop-accounting packet transmission and allow up to 50 attempts for
each request.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1] retry stop-accounting 50
secondary accounting
Syntax secondary accounting ip-address [ port ]
undo secondary accounting
View HWTACACS scheme view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the server, a valid unicast address in dotted decimal
notation. port: Port number of the server, which is in the range of 1 to 65535 and
defaults to 49.
secondary authentication 655
Description Use the secondary accounting command to configure a secondary TACACS
accounting server.
Use the undo secondary accounting command to delete the configured
secondary TACACS accounting server.
By default, the IP address of TACACS accounting server is 0.0.0.0.
n Note that:
■ You are not allowed to assign the same IP address to both primary and
secondary accounting servers; otherwise, unsuccessful operation is prompted.
■ If you repeatedly use this command, the latest configuration overwrites the
previous one.
■ You can remove an accounting server only when it is not being used by any
active TCP connections.
Example # Configure a secondary accounting server.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1] secondary accounting 10.163.155.12 49
secondary authentication
Syntax secondary authentication ip-address [ port ]
undo secondary authentication
View HWTACACS scheme view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the server, a valid unicast address in dotted decimal
format. port: Port number of the server, which is in the range of 1 to 65535 and
defaults to 49.
Description Use the secondary authentication command to configure a secondary
TACACS authentication server.
Use the undo secondary authentication command to delete the configured
secondary server.
By default, the IP address of TACACS authentication server is 0.0.0.0.
n Note that:
■ You are not allowed to assign the same IP address to both primary and
secondary authentication servers; otherwise, unsuccessful operation is
prompted.
■ If you repeatedly use this command, the latest configuration overwrites the
previous one.
656 CHAPTER 47: HWTACACS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
■ You can remove an authentication server only when it is not being used by any
active TCP connections.
Related command: display hwtacacs.
Example # Configure a secondary server.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1] secondary authentication 10.163.155.13 49
secondary authorization
Syntax secondary authorization ip-address [ port ]
undo secondary authorization
View HWTACACS scheme view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the server, a valid unicast address in dotted decimal
format. port: Port number of the server, in the range of 1 to 65535. By default, it
is 49.
Description Use the secondary authorization command to configure a secondary TACACS
authorization server.
Use the .undo secondary authorization command to delete the configured
secondary authorization server.
By default, the IP address of TACACS authorization server is 0.0.0.0.
n Note that:
■ You are not allowed to assign the same IP address to both primary and
secondary authorization servers.
■ If you repeatedly use this command, the latest configuration overwrites the
previous one.
■ You can remove an authorization server only when it is not being used by any
active TCP connections.
Related command: display hwtacacs.
Example # Configure the secondary authorization server.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1] secondary authorization 10.163.155.13 49
stop-accounting-buffer enable 657
stop-accounting-buffer enable
Syntax stop-accounting-buffer enable
undo stop-accounting-buffer enable
View HWTACACS scheme view
Parameter None
Description Use the stop-accounting-buffer enable command to enable the switch to
buffer the stop-accounting requests that bring no response.
Use the undo stop-accounting-buffer enable command to disable the switch
from buffering the stop-accounting requests that bring no response.
By default, the switch is enabled to buffer the stop-accounting requests that bring
no response.
Stop-accounting requests are critical to billing and will eventually affect the
charges; they are important for both the users and the ISP. Therefore, the switch
should do its best to transmit them to the HWTACACS accounting server. If the
HWTACACS accounting server does not respond to such a request, the switch
should first buffer the request on itself, and then retransmit the request to the
HWTACACS accounting server until it gets a response, or the maximum number of
transmission attempts is reached (in this case, it discards the request).
Related command: reset stop-accounting-buffer, hwtacacs scheme, and display
stop-accounting-buffer.
Example # Enable the switch to buffer the stop-accounting requests that bring no response
from the servers in HWTACACS scheme test1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1] stop-accounting-buffer enable
timer quiet
Syntax timer quiet minutes
undo timer quiet
View HWTACACS scheme view
Parameter minutes: Length of the timer in minutes, in the range of 1 to 255. By default, the
primary server must wait five minutes before it resumes the active state.
658 CHAPTER 47: HWTACACS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the timer quiet command to set the duration that a primary server must
wait before it can resume the active state.
Use the undo timer quiet command to restore the default (five minutes).
With the timer quiet command configured, the switch stops processing the
request packets from users when the communication between the switch and the
server is interrupted. The switch does not send user request packets to the server
until the wait time of the switch is equal to or greater than the time configured
with the timer quiet command.
Related command: display hwtacacs.
Example # Set the quiet timer for the primary server to ten minutes.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1] timer quiet 10
timer realtime-accounting
Syntax timer realtime-accounting minutes
undo timer realtime-accounting
View HWTACACS scheme view
Parameter minutes: Real-time accounting interval, which is a multiple of 3 in the range 3 to
60 minutes. By default, the real-time accounting interval is 12 minutes.
Description Use the timer realtime-accounting command to configure a real-time
accounting interval.
Use the undo timer realtime-accounting command to restore the default
interval.
n Note that:
■ Real-time accounting interval is necessary for real-time accounting. After an
interval value is set, the switch transmits the accounting information of online
users to the TACACS accounting server at intervals of this value.
■ The setting of real-time accounting interval depends somewhat on the
performance of the switch and the TACACS server: A shorter interval requires
higher device performance. You are therefore recommended to adopt a longer
interval when there are a large number of users (more than 1000, inclusive).
Table 107 recommends the real-time accounting intervals for different
numbers of users.
timer response-timeout 659
Table 107 Recommended intervals for different numbers of users
Number of users Real-time accounting interval (minute)
1 to 99 3
100 to 499 6
500 to 999 12
¦1000 ¦15
Example # Set the real-time accounting interval in the HWTACACS scheme "test1" to 51
minutes.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test11] timer realtime-accounting 51
timer response-timeout
Syntax timer response-timeout seconds
undo timer response-timeout
View HWTACACS scheme view
Parameter seconds: Length of the response timer in seconds. It ranges from 1 to 300 and
defaults to 5.
Description Use the timer response-timeout command to set the response timeout timer
of the TACACS server.
Use the undo timer response-timeout command to restore the default (five
seconds).
n As the HWTACACS is based on TCP, either the server response timeout and/or the
TCP timeout may cause disconnection to the TACACS server.
Related command: display hwtacacs.
Example # Set the response timeout time of the TACACS server to 30 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1] timer response-timeout 30
user-name-format
Syntax user-name-format { with-domain | without-domain }
660 CHAPTER 47: HWTACACS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View HWTACACS scheme view
Parameter with-domain: Specifies to send the username with a domain name to the
TACACS server.
without-domain: Specifies to send the username without any domain name to
the TACACS server.
Description Use the user-name-format command to configure the username format sent to
the TACACS server.
By default, an HWTACACS scheme acknowledges that the username sent to it
includes an ISP domain name.
n Note that:
■ The supplicants are generally named in userid@isp-name format. The part
following the @ sign is the ISP domain name, according to which the switch
assigns a user to the corresponding ISP domain. However, some earlier TACACS
servers reject the user name including an ISP domain name. In this case, the
user name is sent to the TACACS server after its domain name is removed.
Accordingly, the switch provides this command to decide whether the
username sent to the TACACS server carries an ISP domain name or not.
■ If a HWTACACS scheme is configured to reject usernames including ISP domain
names, the TACACS scheme shall not be simultaneously used in more than one
ISP domains. Otherwise, the TACACS server will regard two users in different
ISP domains as the same user by mistake, if they have the same username.
(excluding their respective domain names.)
Related command: hwtacacs scheme.
Example # Specify to send the username without any domain name to the HWTACACS
scheme "test1".
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] hwtacacs scheme test1
[SW7750-hwtacacs-test1] user-name-format without-domain
EAD CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
48
security-policy-server
Syntax security-policy-server ip-address
undo security-policy-server { ip-address | all }
View RADIUS scheme view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the security policy server.
all: All IP addresses of security policy servers.
Description Use the security-policy-server command to specify an IP address for a security
policy server.
Use the undo security-policy-server command to delete the specified IP
address.
You may specify up to eight security policy servers in a RADIUS scheme.
Each RADIUS scheme supports at most eight IP addresses of security policy servers.
The switch only responds to the session control packets coming from the
authentication server and security policy server.
Example # Set the IP address of the security policy server to 192.168.0.1.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] radius scheme 3Com
[SW7750-radius-3Com] security-policy-server 192.168.0.1
[SW7750-radius-3Com] display current-configuration
...
radius scheme 3Com
primary authentication 1.1.11.29 1812
secondary authentication 127.0.0.1 1645
security-policy-server 192.168.0.1
user-name-format without-domain
...
662 CHAPTER 48: EAD CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
TRAFFIC ACCOUNTING
49 CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
accounting enable
Syntax accounting enable
undo accounting enable
View Traffic accounting view
Parameter None
Description Use the accounting enable command to enable the traffic accounting function
on the traffic accounting module.
Use the undo accounting enable command to disable the traffic accounting
function on the traffic accounting module.
The traffic accounting module starts traffic accounting immediately after the
traffic accounting function is enabled.
By default, the traffic accounting function is disabled on the traffic accounting
module.
Example # Enable the traffic accounting function.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] traffic-accounting accounting-slot 3
[SW7750-accounting-slot-3] accounting enable
# Disable the traffic accounting function.
[SW7750-accounting-slot-3] undo accounting enable
accounting-mode traffic
Syntax accounting-mode traffic
View ISP domain view
Parameter None
664 CHAPTER 49: TRAFFIC ACCOUNTING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the accounting-mode traffic command to set the accounting mode to
traffic accounting.
Use the undo accounting-mode traffic command to restore the default
accounting mode.
By default, the system adopts the time accounting mode.
Example # Set the accounting mode to traffic accounting.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain cams
[SW7750-isp-cams] accounting-mode traffic
# Restore the default accounting mode.
[SW7750-isp-cams] undo accounting-mode traffic
display traffic-accounting accounting-slot
Syntax display traffic-accounting accounting-slot [ slot-num ]
View Any view
Parameter slot-num: Traffic accounting slot.
Description Use the display traffic-accounting-slot command to display the configuration
information of the traffic accounting slots.
If you specify the slot-num argument, the command displays the configuration
information of the specified traffic accounting slot. Otherwise, the command
displays the configuration information of all traffic accounting slots.
n At present, the system supports only one traffic accounting slot. Therefore the
same configuration information is displayed regardless whether or not you specify
the traffic accounting slot.
Example # Display the configuration information of the traffic accounting slot 2.
<SW7750> display traffic-accounting accounting-slot 2
Accounting slot number : 2
traffic-slot 3
traffic accounting is enabled
display traffic-accounting statistics
Syntax display traffic-accounting statistics [ ip-address ]
View Any view
display traffic-accounting traffic-group 665
Parameter ip-address: IP address.
Description Use the display traffic-accounting statistics command to display the traffic
accounting statistics of one or all online users.
If you specify the ip-address argument, the command displays the traffic
accounting statistics of the specified online IP address. Otherwise, this command
displays the traffic accounting statistics of all the online IP addresses.
Example # Display the traffic accounting statistics of all online users.
<SW7750> display traffic-accounting statistics
User IP: 10.0.0.1
group name :somegroup
output octets low-32: 1920 output octets high-32: 0
input octets low-32 : 480 input octets high-32 : 0
display traffic-accounting traffic-group
Syntax display traffic-accounting traffic-group [ group-name ]
View Any view
Parameter group-name: Name of a traffic group.
Description Use the display traffic-accounting traffic-group command to display the
configuration information of one or all traffic groups.
If you specify the group-name argument, this command displays the configuration
information of the specified traffic group. Otherwise, it displays the configuration
information of all traffic groups.
Example # Display the configuration information of the traffic group named somegroup.
<SW7750> display traffic-accounting traffic-group somegroup
Traffic group : somegroup
1.1.1.0/255.255.255.0
not referenced
# Display the configuration information of all traffic groups.
<SW7750> display traffic-accounting traffic-group
Traffic group : default-group
0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0
not referenced
Traffic group : somegroup
1.1.1.0/255.255.255.0
referenced
666 CHAPTER 49: TRAFFIC ACCOUNTING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
network
Syntax network ip-address { mask | mask-len }
undo network ip-address { mask | mask-len }
View Traffic group view
Parameter ip-address: IP address.
mask: Subnet mask.
Mask-len: Mask length.
Description Use the network command to configure a network address for the traffic group,
so as to add a destination network segment to the traffic group.
Use the undo network command to remove a network address from the traffic
group, so as to remove a destination network segment from the traffic group.
n The address range of the network segment to be set for a traffic group can neither
overlaps the existing address range of this traffic group nor be identical with the
address range of any other traffic group.
Example # Add a network segment to the traffic group named somegroup.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] traffic-accounting traffic-group somegroup
[SW7750-traffic-group-somegroup] network 10.0.0.0 16
# Remove the network segment from the traffic group.
[SW7750-traffic-group-somegroup] undo network 10.0.0.0 16
traffic-accounting accounting-slot
Syntax traffic-accounting accounting-slot slot-num
undo traffic-accounting accounting-slot slot-num
View System view
Parameter slot-num: Slot number.
Description Use the traffic-accounting accounting-slot command to specify a traffic
accounting slot.
Use the undo traffic-accounting accounting-slot command to remove the
specified traffic accounting slot.
traffic-accounting traffic-group 667
By default, no slot is specified as traffic accounting slot.
Related command: display traffic-accounting accounting-slot.
Example # Specify slot 2 as the traffic accounting slot.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] traffic-accounting accounting-slot 2
# Remove the specified traffic accounting slot 2.
[SW7750] undo traffic-accounting accounting-slot 2
traffic-accounting traffic-group
Syntax traffic-accounting traffic-group group-name
undo traffic-accounting traffic-group group-name
View System view
Parameter group-name: Name of a traffic group, a string of up to 32 characters.
Description Use the traffic-accounting traffic-group command to create a traffic group or
enter the view of an existing traffic group.
Use the undo traffic-accounting traffic-group command to delete an existing
traffic group.
The system allows you to configure up to 15 traffic groups. In addition, there is a
default traffic group which you are not allowed to configure.
By default, there is a default traffic group.
Related command: display traffic-accounting traffic-group.
Example # Create a traffic group test-group.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] traffic-accounting traffic-group test-group
# Delete the created traffic group test-group.
[SW7750] undo traffic-accounting traffic-group test-group
traffic-group
Syntax traffic-group group-name rate id-num
668 CHAPTER 49: TRAFFIC ACCOUNTING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View Domain view
Parameter group-name: Name of a traffic group, up to 32 characters long.
id-num: Charging rate ID, in the range of 1 to 255, used to identify different
charging rates. This argument is not really implemented in the current command,
it is left for future use..
Description Use the traffic-group command to configure the domain to use a traffic group.
Use the undo traffic-group command to cancel the configuration.
If a domain is configured to use a traffic group, when a user who belongs to the
domain accesses an address in the traffic group, the generated traffic is accounted
for and the user is charged based on the traffic.
By default, no traffic group is used by a domain.
Related command: display traffic-accounting traffic-group.
Example # Configure the domain "CAMS" to use the traffic group "test-group", with the
rate of 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] domain cams
[SW7750-isp-cams] traffic-group test-group rate 1
traffic-slot
Syntax traffic-slot slot-num
undo traffic-slot slot-num
View Traffic accounting view
Parameter slot-num: Slot number.
Description Use the traffic-slot command to specify a traffic collection module.
Use the undo traffic-slot command to cancel the specified traffic collection
module.
By default, no traffic collection module is specified.
Related command: traffic-accounting accounting-slot.
Example # Specify the slot 2 as the traffic accounting slot and the slot 3 as the traffic
collection slot.
traffic-slot 669
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] traffic-accounting accounting-slot 2
[SW7750-accounting-slot-2] traffic-slot 3
670 CHAPTER 49: TRAFFIC ACCOUNTING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
VRRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
50
display vrrp
Syntax display vrrp [ interface interface-type interface-number [ vrid virtual-router-id ] ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Displays the VRRP status information of the
specified interface.
virtual-router-id: Displays the status information of the specified VRRP backup
group. The virtual router ID ranges from 1 to 255.
Description Use the display vrrp command to display the VRRP status information.
■ If the interface and backup group ID are not specified, the status information
about all the backup groups on the switch is displayed.
■ If only the interface is specified, the status information about all the backup
groups on the interface is displayed.
■ If both the interface and backup group ID are specified, the status information
about the specified backup group on the interface is displayed.
Example # Display the status information about all the backup groups on the switch.
<SW7750> display vrrp
Run Method : VIRTUAL-MAC
Virtual Ip Ping : Disable
The total number of the vitual routers: 1
Interface VRID State Run Adver. Auth Virtual
Pri Time Type IP
----------------------------------------------------------------
Vlan1 1 Master 100 1 NONE 192.168.0.133
# Display the status information of VLAN-interface 1. The VRRP backup group 1
has been created on the device.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1]display vrrp interface vlan-interface 1
Run Method : VIRTUAL-MAC
Virtual Ip Ping : Disable
Interface : Vlan-interface1
VRID : 1 Adver. Timer : 1
Admin Status : UP State : Master
672 CHAPTER 50: VRRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Config Pri : 100 Run Pri : 100
Preempt Mode : YES Delay Time : 0
Auth Type : NONE
Virtual IP : 192.168.0.133
Virtual MAC : 0000-5e00-0101
Master IP : 192.168.0.68
Table 108 Field descriptions of the display vrrp command
Field Description
Run Method Current VRRP running mode, which could be Real MAC or virtual MAC
Virtual Ip Ping Whether the ping operation is applicable to the virtual IP address
Interface Interface where the backup group resides
VRID Virtual backup group ID
Adver. Timer Interval at which the VRRP advertisement is sent
Admin Status Administrative status, which could be UP or DOWN.
State Status of the current router in the backup group, which could be Master,
Backup, or Initialize.
Config Pri Configuration priority
Run Pri Running priority
Preempt Mode Preemption mode
Delay Time Preemption delay
Auth Type Authentication type
Virtual IP Virtual IP address of the backup group
Virtual MAC Virtual MAC address corresponding to the virtual IP address of the backup
group. This item is displayed only when the router is in Master status.
Master IP Master IP address of the interface corresponding to the router in Master
status.
display vrrp statistics
Syntax display vrrp statistics [ interface interface-type interface-number [ vrid
virtual-router-id ] ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Displays the VRRP statistics information of the
specified interface.
virtual-router-id: Displays the statistics information of the specified VRRP backup
group. The virtual router ID ranges from 1 to 255.
Description Use the display vrrp statistics command to display the VRRP statistics
information.
■ If the interface and backup group ID are not specified, the statistics information
about all the backup groups on the switch is displayed.
■ If only the interface is specified, the statistics information about all the backup
groups on the interface is displayed.
display vrrp verbose 673
■ If both the interface and backup group ID are specified, the statistics
information about the specified backup group on the interface is displayed.
Example # Display the statistics information about all the backup groups on the switch.
<SW7750> display vrrp statistics
Interface : Vlan-interface1
VRID : 1
CheckSum Errors : 0 Version Errors : 0
VRID Errors : 0 Advertisement Interval Errors : 0
IP TTL Errors : 0 Auth Failures : 0
Invalid Auth Type : 0 Auth Type Mismatch : 0
Packet Length Errors : 0 Address List Errors : 0
Become Master : 1 Priority Zero Pkts Rcvd : 0
Advertise Rcvd : 0 Priority Zero Pkts Sent : 0
Invalid Type Pkts Rcvd : 0
Global statistics
CheckSum Errors : 0
Version Errors : 0
VRID Errors : 0
Table 109 Field descriptions of the display vrrp statistics command
Field Description
Interface Interface where the backup group resides
VRID Backup group ID
CheckSum Errors Number of checksum errors
Version Errors Number of version errors
VRID Errors Number of backup group ID errors
Advertisement Interval Errors Number of advertisement interval errors
IP TTL Errors Number of TTL errors
Auth Failures Number of authentication errors
Invalid Auth Type Number of invalid authentication types
Auth Type Mismatch Number of mismatched authentication types
Packet Length Errors Number of VRRP packet length errors
Address List Errors Number of the virtual IP address list errors
Become Master Number of the occasions that the switch operates as the
master router
Priority Zero Pkts Rcvd Number of the received advertisements with the priority of 0
Advertise Rcvd Number of the received advertisements
Priority Zero Pkts Sent Number of the sent advertisements with the priority of 0
Invalid Type Pkts Rcvd Number of packet type errors
Global statistics Global statistics
display vrrp verbose
Syntax display vrrp verbose [ interface interface-type interface-number [ vrid
virtual-router-id ] ]
View Any view
674 CHAPTER 50: VRRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter None
Description Use the display vrrp verbose command to display the detailed VRRP
information.
■ If the interface and backup group ID are not specified,detailed VRRP
information about all the backup groups on the switch is displayed.
■ If only the interface is specified, the detailed VRRP information about all the
backup groups on the interface is displayed.
■ If both the interface and backup group ID are specified, the detailed VRRP
information about the specified backup group on the interface is displayed.
Example # Display the detailed VRRP information.
<SW7750> display vrrp verbose
Run Method : VIRTUAL-MAC
Virtual Ip Ping : Disable
Interface : Vlan-interface1
VRID : 1 Adver. Timer : 1
Admin Status : UP State : Master
Config Pri : 100 Run Pri : 100
Preempt Mode : YES Delay Time : 0
Auth Type : NONE
Virtual IP : 192.168.0.133
Virtual MAC : 0000-5e00-0101
Master IP : 192.168.0.68
Table 110 Field descriptions of the display vrrp verbose command
Field Description
Run Method Current VRRP running mode, which could be Real MAC or virtual MAC
Virtual Ip Ping Whether the ping operation is applicable to the virtual IP address
Interface Interface where the backup group resides
VRID Virtual backup group ID
Adver. Timer Interval at which the VRRP advertisement is sent
Admin Status Administrative status, which could be UP or DOWN.
State Status of the current router in the backup group, which could be Master,
Backup, or Initialize.
Config Pri Configuration priority
Run Pri Running priority
Preempt Mode Preemption mode
Delay Time Preemption delay
Auth Type Authentication type
Virtual IP Virtual IP address of the backup group
Virtual MAC Virtual MAC address corresponding to the virtual IP address of the backup
group. This item is displayed only when the router is in Master status.
Master IP Master IP address of the interface corresponding to the router in Master
status.
reset vrrp statistics 675
reset vrrp statistics
Syntax reset vrrp statistics [ interface interface-type interface-number [ vrid
virtual-router-id ] ]
View User view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number
virtual-router-id: VRRP backup group ID, in the range of 1 to 255.
Description Use the reset vrrp command to clear the statistics information about VRRP.
When you execute this command,
■ If the interface and backup group ID are not specified, the statistics information
about all the backup groups on the switch is cleared.
■ If only the interface is specified, the statistics information about all the backup
groups on the interface is cleared.
■ If both the interface and backup group ID are specified, the statistics
information about the specified backup group on the interface is cleared.
Example # Clear the VRRP statistics information of all backup groups on all the interfaces.
<SW7750> reset vrrp statistics
undo vrrp vrid
Syntax undo vrrp vrid virtual-router-id
View VLAN interface view
Parameters virtual-router-id: VRRP backup group ID, ranging from 1 to 255.
Description Use the undo vrrp vrid command to remove all the configurations of the
specified backup group on the VLAN interface.
Examples # Remove the configurations of VRRP backup group 1 on VLAN-interface 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] undo vrrp vrid 1
vrrp method
Syntax vrrp method { real-mac | virtual-mac }
676 CHAPTER 50: VRRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
undo vrrp method
View System view
Parameter real-mac: Maps the real MAC address of a Layer 3 switch routing interface to
virtual router IP addresses.
virtual-mac: Maps the virtual MAC address to virtual router IP addresses of
backup groups.
Description Use the vrrp method command to map the MAC address of a backup group to
the virtual router IP addresses. You can map the actual or virtual MAC address of a
Layer 3 switch routing interface to virtual router IP addresses.
Use the undo vrrp method command to restore the default map settings.
By default, the virtual MAC address of a backup group is mapped to the IP address
of the virtual router.
Note that as the mapping relationship between the MAC addresses of a backup
group and a virtual router IP address cannot be configured after the backup group
is created, configure the mapping relationship before you create a backup group.
n Due to the chips installed, when you map the virtual IP addresses to the virtual
MAC addresses, the type of chips decides the number of backup groups that can
be configured on a VLAN interface. Refer to device specification for detail.
Example # Map the real MAC address of a routing interface to a virtual router IP address.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vrrp method real-mac
vrrp ping-enable
Syntax vrrp ping-enable
undo vrrp ping-enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the vrrp ping-enable command to enable a backup group to respond to
ping operations destined for its virtual router IP address.
Use the undo vrrp ping-enable command to revert to the default.
By default, a backup group does not respond to ping operations destined for its
virtual router IP address.
vrrp un-check ttl 677
Example # Enable a backup group to respond to ping operations destined for its virtual
router IP address.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vrrp ping-enable
vrrp un-check ttl
Syntax vrrp un-check ttl
undo vrrp un-check ttl
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the vrrp un-check ttl command to disable the TTL check of VRRP packet.
Use the undo vrrp un-check ttl command to enable the TTL check of VRRP
packet.
By default, the TTL field in the VRRP packet is checked.
Example # Disable the TTL check of VRRP packet on VLAN-interface 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] vrrp un-check ttl
vrrp vrid authentication-mode
Syntax vrrp vrid virtual-router-id authentication-mode authentication-type
authentication-key
undo vrrp vrid virtual-router-id authentication-mode
View VLAN interface view
Parameter virtual-router-id: VRRP backup group ID, in the range of 1 to 255.
authentication-type: Authentication type, which can be:
■ simple: Indicates to perform simple character authentication.
■ md5: Indicates to perform the authentication with MD5 algorithm.
authentication-key: Authentication key. When you specify authentication-type to
be simple, the authentication key can contain up to eight characters. When you
678 CHAPTER 50: VRRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
specify authentication-type to be md5, the authentication key can be a string
comprising up to eight characters in plain text or a 24-character encrypted string.
Description Use the vrrp vrid authentication-mode command to specify the
authentication type and the authentication key for a VRRP backup group.
Use the undo vrid vrrp authentication-mode command to clear the
configured authentication type and authentication key.
By default, authentication is disabled for the VRRP backup group.
If the simple or md5 authentication is configured, the authentication key is
required.
This command sets the authentication type and authentication key for all the VRRP
backup groups on one or multi interface. As defined in the protocol, all the
backup groups on an interface share the same authentication type and
authentication key. And all the members joining the same backup group share the
same authentication type and authentication key too.
Note that the authentication key is case-sensitive.
Example # Specify the authentication type as simple, and authentication key as aabbcc for
the VRRP backup group 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] vrrp vrid 1 authentication-mode simple aabb
cc
vrrp vrid preempt-mode
Syntax vrrp vrid virtual-router-id preempt-mode [ timer delay delay-value ]
undo vrrp vrid virtual-router-id preempt-mode
View VLAN interface view
Parameter virtual-router-id: VRRP backup group ID ranging from 1 to 255.
delay-value: Delay period (in seconds) ranging from 0 to 255.
Description Use the vrrp vrid preempt-mode command to configure a switch to operate in
the preemptive mode and set the delay period.
Use the undo vrrp vrid preempt-mode command to cancel the configuration.
By default, switches in a backup group operate in the preemptive mode, with the
delay period set to 0 seconds.
vrrp vrid priority 679
If you want backup switches to preempt the master switch, configure them to
operate in the preemptive mode. You can also set the delay period for preemption
as needed.
As long as a switch in the backup group becomes the master switch, other
switches, even if they are configured with a higher priority later, do not preempt
the master switch unless they operate in preemptive mode. The switch operating
in preemptive mode will become the master switch when it finds its priority is
higher than that of the current master switch, and the former master switch
becomes a backup switch accordingly.
You can configure a Switch 7750 to operate in preemptive mode. You can also set
the delay period. A backup switch waits for a period of time (the delay period)
before becoming a master switch. Setting a delay period aims at:
In an unstable network, backup switches in a backup group possibly cannot
receive packets from the master in time due to network congestions even if the
master operates properly. This causes the master of the backup group being
determined frequently. With the configuration of delay period, the backup switch
will wait for a while if it does not receive packets from the master switch in time. A
new master is determined only after the backup switches do not receive packets
from the master switch after the specified delay time.
n You can use the undo vrrp vrid preempt-mode command to set switches in a
backup group to operate in non-preemptive mode.
Example # Configure the switches to operate in the preemptive mode.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] vrrp vrid 1 preempt-mode
# Set the delay period.
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] vrrp vrid 1 preempt-mode timer delay 5
# Configure the switches to operate in non-preemptive mode.
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] undo vrrp vrid 1 preempt-mode
vrrp vrid priority
Syntax vrrp vrid virtual-router-id priority priority
undo vrrp vrid virtual-router-id priority
View VLAN interface view
Parameter virtual-router-id: VRRP backup group ID ranging from 1 to 255.
priority: Switch priority to be set. This argument ranges from 1 to 254.
680 CHAPTER 50: VRRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the vrrp vrid priority command to set the priority of a switch in a backup
group.
Use the undo vrrp vrid priority command to revert to the default priority.
By default, the priority of a switch in a backup group is 100.
Switch priority determines the possibility for the switch to become a master
switch. A switch with larger priority is more likely to become a master switch. Note
that the priority of 0 is reserved for special use, and the priority of 255 is for IP
address owners. That is, the priority of a switch that owns a virtual router IP
address is fixed to 255 and cannot be modified.
Example # Set the priority to 120 for a switch in the backup group.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] vrrp vrid 1 priority 120
vrrp vrid timer advertise
Syntax vrrp vrid virtual-router-id timer advertise adver-interval
undo vrrp vrid virtual-router-id timer advertise
View VLAN interface view
Parameter virtual-router-id: VRRP backup group ID ranging from 1 to 255.
adver-interval: Interval (in seconds) for the master switch of a backup group to
send VRRP packets. This argument ranges from 1 to 255.
Description Use the vrrp vrid timer advertise command to set the interval for the master
switch of a backup group to send VRRP packets.
Use the undo vrrp vrid timer advertise command to revert to the default
interval.
Note that configuration error occurs if switches of the same backup group are
configured with different adver-interval values.
By default, the interval for the master switch in a backup group to send VRRP
packets is 1 second.
Example # Set the interval for the master switch to send VRRP packets to 15 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] vrrp vrid 1 timer advertise 15
vrrp vrid track 681
vrrp vrid track
Syntax vrrp vrid virtual-router-id track interface-type interface-number [ reduced
value-reduced ]
undo vrrp vrid virtual-router-id track [ interface-type interface-number ]
View VLAN interface view
Parameter virtual-router-id: VRRP backup group ID ranging form 1 to 255.
Interface-type interface-number: VLAN interface or port to be tracked.
value-reduced: Value by which the priority is to decrease. This argument ranges
from 1 to 255.
Description Use the vrrp vrid track command to set a VLAN interface/Ethernet port to be
tracked.
Use the undo vrrp vrid track command to disable a VLAN interface/Ethernet
port from being tracked.
By default, the value by which the priority of the VLAN interface decreases is 10.
The VLAN interface/Ethernet port tracking function extends the use of the backup
function. With this function enabled, the backup function is provided not only
when the interface where the backup group resides fails, but also when other
interfaces/Ethernet ports are unavailable. By executing the related command you
can track an interface/Ethernet port.
When a tracked VLAN interface/Ethernet port goes down, the priority of the
switch owning the interface/port will reduce automatically by a specified value
(the value-reduced argument). If the switches with their priorities higher than that
of the current master switch exist in the backup group, a new master switch will
be then determined.
n ■ The Ethernet port tracked can be in or out of the VLAN in whose interface the
backup group resides.
■ If a switch is the IP address owner, the VLAN interface/Ethernet port tracking
function can not be enabled for the switch.
■ If a tracked VLAN interface/Ethernet port goes down, when it is up again, the
priority of the corresponding switch is automatically restored.
■ Each backup group can track up to eight VLAN interfaces/Ethernet ports.
Example # Configure VLAN 2 interface to track VLAN 1 interface and specify the priority of
the master switch of backup group 1 (on VLAN 2 interface) decreases by 50 when
VLAN 1 interface goes down.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
682 CHAPTER 50: VRRP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] vrrp vrid 1 track vlan-interface 1 reduced
50
vrrp vrid virtual-ip
Syntax vrrp vrid virtual-router-id virtual-ip virtual-address
undo vrrp vrid virtual-router-id [ virtual-ip virtual-address ]
View VLAN interface view
Parameter virtual-router-id: VRRP backup group ID ranging from 1 to 255.
virtual-address: Virtual router IP address to be configured.
Description Use the vrrp vrid virtual-ip command to add a virtual router IP address to an
existing backup group.
Use the undo vrrp vrid virtual-ip command to remove a virtual router IP
address from an existing backup group.
The vrrp vrid virtual-ip command can also be used to create a backup group.
You can add up to 16 virtual router IP addresses to a backup group. The undo
vrrp vrid virtual-ip command can also be used to remove an existing backup
group. A backup group is removed if all the virtual router IP addresses configured
for it are removed.
Note that the virtual router IP address and the IP addresses used by the member
switches in a backup group must belong to the same network segment. If not, the
backup group will be in the initial state (the state before you configure the VRRP
for the switches). In this case, VRRP does not take effect.
Example # Create a backup group.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] vrrp vrid 1 virtual-ip 10.10.10.10
# Add a virtual router IP address to an existing backup group.
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] vrrp vrid 1 virtual-ip 10.10.10.11
# Remove a virtual router IP address from a backup group.
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] undo vrrp vrid 1 virtual-ip 10.10.10.10
# Remove a backup group.
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] undo vrrp vrid 1
HA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
51
display switchover state
Syntax display switchover state [ slot-id ]
View Any view
Parameter slot-id: Slot number of master/slave module.
Description Use the display switchover state command to display the backup status of
master/slave module.
This command displays the backup state of master/slave module according to the
specified slot number. If the slot-id is not specified, the status of master module
will be displayed.
Example # Display the status of master module.
<SW7750> display switchover state
HA FSM State(master): Slave is absent.
slave auto-update config
Syntax slave auto-update config
undo slave auto-update config
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use slave auto-update config command to enable the automatic
synchronization of configuration files between the master/slave systems.
Use the undo slave auto-update config command to disable the automatic
synchronization.
By default, the automatic synchronization of configuration files between the
master and slave system is enabled.
Related command: slave update configuration.
684 CHAPTER 51: HA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Enable automatic synchronization between master/slave systems.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] slave auto-update config
slave restart
Syntax slave restart
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the slave restart command to restart the slave module.
When the application of the backup system operates unmorally and requires for
reloading the applications, you can use this command to restart the slave module.
Example # Restart the slave module.
<SW7750> slave restart
The slave will reset! Continue?[Y/N]:y
slave switchover
Syntax slave switchover
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the slave switchover command to perform master/slave switchover
manually.
When the slave module operates normally and the master module is in the
real-time backup state, if you want the slave module to operate in place of the
master module, you can use this command to implement master/slave switchover.
After that, the slave module becomes the new master module and controls the
system, and the original master module restarts automatically.
Example # Perform master/slave switchover manually.
<SW7750> slave switchover
Caution!!! Confirm switch slave to master[Y/N]?y
Starting.....
RAM Line....OK
slave update configuration 685
slave update configuration
Syntax slave update configuration
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the slave update configuration command to synchronise the
configurations files on master/slave module.
You can use this command to manually synchronize the configuration files on the
master module to the slave module.
Example # Synchronize the configuration files on the master module to the slave module.
<SW7750> slave update configuration
Now saving the current configuration to the slave board.
Please wait...
The configuration has been saved to the slave board successfully.
686 CHAPTER 51: HA CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
ARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
52
arp check enable
Syntax arp check enable
undo arp check enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the arp check enable command to enable the ARP entry checking function.
Use the undo arp check enable command to disable the ARP entry checking
function.
With the ARP entry checking function enabled, the switch cannot learn any ARP
entry with a multicast MAC address. Configuring such a static ARP entry is not
allowed either; otherwise, the system prompts error information.
After the ARP entry checking function is disabled, the switch can learn the ARP
entry with a multicast MAC address, and you can also configure such a static ARP
entry on the switch.
By default, the ARP entry checking function is enabled.
Example # Disable the ARP entry checking function.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] undo arp check enable
arp gratuitous-updating enable
Syntax arp gratuitous-updating enable
undo arp gratuitous-updating enable
View System view
Parameter None
688 CHAPTER 52: ARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the arp gratuitous-updating enable command to enable gratuitous ARP
packets to be sent periodically.
Use the undo arp gratuitous-updating enable command to disable
gratuitous ARP packets from being sent periodically. With this function enabled,
the switch periodically broadcasts gratuitous ARP packets from the current
interface IP address within the VLAN whose interfaces are configured with an IP
address.
By default, the switch is disabled from sending gratuitous ARP packets periodically.
With VRRP enabled on a VLAN interface of a switch:
■ If the switch is the master switch, it sends gratuitous ARP messages with the IP
address of the VRRP virtual router.
■ If it is not the master switch, it sends gratuitous ARP messages with the primary
and all the secondary IP addresses of the VLAN interface.
Example # Enable the switch to send gratuitous ARP packets periodically.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] arp gratuitous-updating enable
arp mac-arp-map limit
Syntax arp mac-arp-map limit number
undo arp mac-arp-map limit
View System view
Parameter number: Maximum number of IP addresses to be bound to a MAC address of a
VLAN, in the range 1 to 8192.
Description Use the arp mac-arp-map limit command to set the maximum number of IP
addresses to be bound to a MAC address of a VLAN.
Use the undo arp mac-arp-map limit command to restore the default value.
By default, a maximum of 8192 IP addresses can be bound to a MAC address of a
VLAN.
n Note that:
If secondary IP addresses are configured for a VLAN interface, the specified
maximum number of IP addresses to be bound to a MAC address should be bigger
than the total number of the primary and secondary IP addresses of the VLAN
interface.
arp max-entry 689
Example # Set the maximum number of IP addresses to be bound to a MAC address of a
VLAN to 5.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] arp mac-arp-map limit 5
arp max-entry
Syntax arp max-entry number
undo arp max-entry
View System view
Parameter number: Total maximum number of ARP entries, in the range of 4,096 to 8,192.
Description Use the arp max-entry command to set the total maximum number of ARP
entries.
Use the undo arp max-entry command to restore the default setting.
By default, the total maximum number of ARP entries is 8,192.
Example # Set the total maximum number of ARP entries to 4,096.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] arp max-entry 4096
arp max-dynamic-entry
Syntax arp max-dynamic-entry number
undo arp max-dynamic-entry
View Port view
Parameter number: Maximum number of dynamic ARP entries that can be learnt by the port,
ranging from 0 to 8,192.
Description Use the arp max-dynamic-entry command to set the maximum number of
dynamic ARP entries that can be learnt by a port.
Use the undo arp max-dynamic-entry command to restore the default setting.
By default, the maximum number of dynamic ARP entries that can be learnt by a
port is 2,048.
690 CHAPTER 52: ARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Set maximum number of dynamic ARP entries that can be learnt by
Ethernet3/0/1 to 6,000.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 3/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet3/0/1] arp max-dynamic-entry 6000
arp protective-down recover interval
Syntax arp protective-down recover interval time
undo protective-down recover interval
View System view
Parameter time: Recovery time (in the range 1 to 3600 seconds) of a port that has been
disabled from receiving any packet temporarily because its ARP packet receive rate
exceeded the upper limit.
Description Use the arp protective-down recover interval command to specify a recovery
interval. A port is brought up after the interval (since it was disabled).
Use the undo arp protective-down recover interval command to restore the
default.
By default, the recovery interval is 300 seconds.
Example # Set the auto-recovery interval to 500 seconds.
<SW7750> system
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] arp protective-down recover interval 500
arp rate-limit enable
Syntax arp rate-limit enable
undo arp rate-limit enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the arp rate-limit enable command to enable the ARP packet rate limit
function.
Use the undo arp rate-limit enable command to disable the ARP packet rate
limit function.
arp rate-limit 691
With the ARP packet rate limit function enabled, the maximum ARP packet receive
rate on each port is 15 pps by default.
By default, the ARP packet rate limit function is disabled.
Example # Enable the ARP packet rate limit function.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] arp rate-limit enable
arp rate-limit
Syntax arp rate-limit rate
undo arp rate-limit
View System view
Parameter rate: Maximum ARP packet receive rate, in the range of 1 to 1,024 pps.
Description Use the arp rate-limit command to specify the maximum ARP packet receive
rate on ports.
Use the undo arp rate-limit command to restore the default.
By default, the maximum ARP packet receive rate on a port (except the trusted
port) is 15 pps.
Example # Set the maximum ARP packet receive rate to 20 pps.
<SW7750> system
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] arp rate-limit 20
arp rate-limit trust
Syntax arp rate-limit trust
undo arp rate-limit trust
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the arp rate-limit trust command to configure the port as a trusted port for
ARP packet rate limit.
692 CHAPTER 52: ARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo arp rate-limit trust command to configure the port as an
untrusted port for ARP packet rate limit.
By default, the port is an untrusted port for ARP packet rate limit.
Example # Configure Ethernet 2/0/1 as a trusted port for ARP packet rate limit.
<SW7750> system
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] int Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] arp rate-limit trust
arp relay enable
Syntax arp relay enable
undo arp relay
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the arp relay enable command to enable ARP forwarding in the
protocol-based VLAN(s).
Use the undo arp relay command to disable ARP forwarding in the
protocol-based VLAN(s).
This feature is enabled by default.
Example # Disable ARP forwarding in the protocol-based VLAN(s).
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] undo arp relay
arp source-suppression limit
Syntax arp source-suppression limit { total | local | through } limit-value
undo arp source-suppression limit { total | local | through }
View System view
Parameter total: Sets the maximum number of total arbitrary ARP packets that can be sent to
the CPU in a unit of time. (There is no limit on source and destination IP addresses
in ARP packets.)
arp static 693
local: Sets the maximum number of locally-terminated ARP packets (packets
having the same source IP address and using the IP address of the current switch
as their destination IP address) that can be sent to the CPU in a unit of time.
through: Sets the maximum number of pass-through ARP packets (packets
having the same source IP address and not using the IP address of the current
switch as their destination IP addresses) that can be sent to the CPU in a unit of
time.
limit-value: Maximum number of a type of ARP packets that can be sent to the
CPU in a unit of time. When local or total is adopted, this argument ranges from
1 to 4294967295; when through is adopted, the value ranges from 0 to
4294967295.
Description Use the arp source-suppression limit command to set the maximum number
of a type of ARP packets that can be sent to the CPU in a unit of time.
Use the undo arp source-suppression limit command to restore the default
setting.
The default setting varies with the type of ARP packets.
■ When total is adopted in the command, the default setting is 100.
■ When local is adopted in the command, the default setting is 3.
■ When through is adopted in the command, the default setting is 3.
Make sure your setting for total is greater than the settings for local and
through.
Related commands: display arp source-suppression.
Example # Configure to allow a maximum of 200 ARP packets to be sent to the CPU totally.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] arp source-suppression limit total 200
arp static
Syntax arp static ip-address mac-address [ vlan-id interface-type interface-number ]
undo arp ip-address
View System view
Parameter ip-address: IP address for the ARP entry to be created/removed.
mac-address: MAC address for the ARP entry to be created, in the format of
H-H-H.
694 CHAPTER 52: ARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
vlan-id: ID of the VLAN to which the static ARP entry belongs, in the range of 1 to
4094.
interface-type: Type of the port to which the static ARP entry belongs.
interface-number: Number of the port to which the static ARP entry belongs.
Description Use the arp static command to create a static ARP entry in the ARP table.
Use the undo arp command to remove an ARP entry.
By default, there is no static ARP entry in the ARP table, and ARP entries are
dynamically created by ARP.
n Note that:
■ A static ARP entry keeps valid as long as the Ethernet switch operates normally,
but removing the VLAN of the entry removes the ARP entry.
■ The VLAN specified by the vlan-id argument in the arp static command must
be an existing VLAN configured with the corresponding VLAN interface and its
IP address, and the port specified by the interface-type and interface-number
arguments must belong to the VLAN.
Related commands: reset arp, display arp.
Example # Create a static ARP entry belonging to Ethernet 2/0/1 in VLAN 1, with IP address
202.38.10.2 and MAC address 000f-e201-0000.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] arp static 202.38.10.2 000f-e201-0000 1 Ethernet 2/0/1
arp timer aging
Syntax arp timer aging aging-time
undo arp timer aging
View System view
Parameter aging-time: Aging time for dynamic ARP entries. This argument ranges from 1 to
1,440 in minutes.
Description Use the arp timer aging command to configure the aging time for dynamic ARP
entries.
Use the undo arp timer aging command to restore the default aging time.
By default, the aging time for dynamic ARP entries is 20 minutes.
Related commands: display arp timer aging.
arp timer gratuitous-updating 695
Example # Set the aging time for dynamic ARP entries to 10 minutes.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] arp timer aging 10
arp timer gratuitous-updating
Syntax arp timer gratuitous-updating updating-interval
undo arp timer gratuitous-updating
View System view
Parameter updating-interval: Interval, in minutes, at which gratuitous ARP packets are sent.
The value range is 1 to 10.
Description Use the arp timer gratuitous-updating command to set a gratuitous ARP
update interval.
Use the undo arp timer gratuitous-updating command to restore the default
gratuitous ARP update interval.
The gratuitous ARP update interval defaults to five minutes after this function is
enabled on the switch.
Related commands: arp gratuitous-updating enable.
Example # Set the gratuitous ARP update interval to 10 minutes on the switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] arp timer gratuitous-updating 10
display arp
Syntax display arp [ dynamic | static | ip-address ]
View Any view
Parameter dynamic: Displays dynamic ARP entries.
static: Displays static ARP entries.
ip-address: IP address. The ARP entry containing this IP address will be displayed.
Description Use the display arp command to display ARP entries.
Executing this command without any parameter will display all ARP entries.
696 CHAPTER 52: ARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Related commands: arp static, reset arp.
Example # Display all ARP entries.
<SW7750> display arp
Type: S-Static D-Dynamic
IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Name Aging Type
10.2.72.162 000a-000a-0aaa N/A N/A N/A S
192.168.0.77 0000-e8f5-6a4a 1 Ethernet2/0/2 13 D
192.168.0.2 000d-88f8-4e88 1 Ethernet2/0/2 14 D
192.168.0.200 0014-222c-9d6a 1 Ethernet2/0/2 14 D
192.168.0.45 000d-88f6-44c1 1 Ethernet2/0/2 15 D
192.168.0.110 0011-4301-991e 1 Ethernet2/0/2 15 D
192.168.0.32 0000-e8f5-73ee 1 Ethernet2/0/2 16 D
192.168.0.3 0014-222c-aa69 1 Ethernet2/0/2 16 D
192.168.0.17 000d-88f6-379c 1 Ethernet2/0/2 17 D
192.168.0.115 000d-88f7-9f7d 1 Ethernet2/0/2 18 D
192.168.0.43 000c-760a-172d 1 Ethernet2/0/2 18 D
192.168.0.33 000d-88f6-44ba 1 Ethernet2/0/2 20 D
192.168.0.35 000f-e202-2181 1 Ethernet2/0/2 20 D
192.168.0.5 000f-3d80-2b38 1 Ethernet2/0/2 20 D
--- 14 entries found ---
Table 111 Field descriptions of the display arp command
Field Description
IP Address IP address contained in an ARP entry
MAC Address MAC address contained in the ARP entry
VLAN ID ID of the VLAN to which the ARP entry belongs
Port Name Index of the port to which the ARP entry belongs
Aging Aging time of the dynamic ARP entry, in minutes
Type Type of the ARP entry
display arp |
Syntax display arp | { begin | exclude | include } text
View Any view
Parameter begin: Displays the ARP entries from the first ARP entry that contains the string
specified by the text argument.
exclude: Displays the ARP entries that do not contain the string specified by the
text argument.
include: Displays the ARP entries that contain the string specified by the text
argument.
text: String used to filter ARP entries.
Description Use the display arp | command to display the ARP entries matching a specified
rule.
display arp attack-list 697
Related commands: arp static, reset arp.
Example # Display the ARP entries that contain the string "77".
<SW7750> display arp | include 77
Type: S-Static D-Dynamic
IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Name Aging Type
192.168.0.77 0000-e8f5-6a4a 1 Ethernet2/0/2 12 D
--- 1 entry found ---
# Display the ARP entries that do not contain the string "68".
<SW7750> display arp | exclude 68
Type: S-Static D-Dynamic
IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Name Aging Type
10.2.72.162 000a-000a-0aaa N/A N/A N/A S
--- 1 entry found ---
See Table 111 for the description of the output fields.
display arp attack-list
Syntax display arp attack-list
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display arp attack-list command to display the ARP attack information,
including the attacking MAC address, IP address and the attack time.
Example # Display the ARP attack information.
<SW7750> display arp attack-list
MAC ADDR VLAN IP ADDR PORT NAME LAST-ATTACK COUNT
000d-88f7-b090 1 192.168.0.2 GigabitEthernet2/0/11 11:19:58 08/08 9
Table 112 Field descriptions of the display arp attack-list command
Field Description
MAC ADDR MAC address of the ARP attack packet
VLAN VLAN of the ARP attack packet
IP ADDR IP address of the ARP attack packet
PORT NAME Port that received the ARP attack packet
LAST-ATTACK Time of the last ARP attack
COUNT Number of the ARP attack packets
display arp entry-limit
Syntax display arp entry-limit [ interface-type interface-number ]
698 CHAPTER 52: ARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View Any view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.
Description Use the display arp entry-limit command to display the number limits of ARP
entries.
If you specify a port, the command will display the total maximum number of ARP
entries and the maximum number of dynamic ARP entries on the port.
If you do not specify a port, the command will display the total maximum number
of ARP entries and the maximum number of dynamic ARP entries on each port.
Example # Display the current number limits of ARP entries.
<SW7750> display arp entry-limit
The maximum ARP entry number is 8192
The maximum dynamic ARP entry number of the port GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is 2048
The maximum dynamic ARP entry number of the port GigabitEthernet0/0/2 is 2048
The maximum dynamic ARP entry number of the port GigabitEthernet0/0/3 is 2048
The maximum dynamic ARP entry number of the port GigabitEthernet0/0/4 is 2048
The maximum dynamic ARP entry number of the port GigabitEthernet3/0/1 is 6000
......
display arp interface
Syntax display arp interface interface-type interface-number
View Any view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
Interface-number: Port number.
Description Use the display arp interface command to display the ARP entries of a
specified port.
Example # Display the ARP entries of Ethernet 3/0/1.
<SW7750> display arp interface ethernet 3/0/1
Type: S-Static D-Dynamic
IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Name Aging Type
10.1.1.2 000f-e201-0102 1 Ethernet3/0/1 N/A S
display arp rate-limit
Syntax display arp rate-limit
View System view
display arp slot 699
Parameter None
Description Use the display arp rate-limit command to display ARP packet rate limit
configuration information.
Example # Display ARP packet rate limit configuration information.
<SW7750> display arp rate-limit
ARP rate limit is on!
Arp rate limit is 15 packets persecond.
Blocked ports will be recovered in 300 seconds.
Blocked Ports:
----------------------------------
GigabitEthernet2/0/11 is blocked and will be recovered in 200 seconds
display arp slot
Syntax display arp slot slot-id
View Any view
Parameter slot-id: ID of a slot.
Description Use the display arp slot command to display the ARP entries of all ports on the
specified slot.
Example # Display the ARP entries on the third slot.
<SW7750> display arp slot 3
Type: S-Static D-Dynamic
IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Name Aging Type
10.1.1.2 000f-e201-0102 1 Ethernet3/0/1 N/A S
display arp source-suppression
Syntax display arp source-suppression
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display arp source-suppression command to display the ARP source
suppression configuration on the current switch.
Example # Display the ARP source suppression configuration on the current switch.
700 CHAPTER 52: ARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> display arp source-suppression
ARP suppression limit total: 100
ARP suppression limit local: 3
ARP suppression limit through: 3
display arp timer aging
Syntax display arp timer aging
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display arp timer aging command to display the setting for ARP aging
timer.
Related commands: arp timer aging.
Example # Display the setting for ARP aging timer.
<SW7750> display arp timer aging
Current ARP aging time is 20 minute(s)(default)
The above information shows that the time for ARP aging timer is 20 minutes.
display arp vlan
Syntax display arp vlan vlan-id
View Any view
Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID.
Description Use the display arp vlan command to display the ARP entries of all ports in a
specified VLAN.
Example # Display the ARP entries of VLAN 1.
<SW7750> display arp vlan 1
Type: S-Static D-Dynamic
IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Name Aging Type
10.1.1.2 000f-e201-0102 1 Ethernet3/0/1 N/A S
gratuitous-arp-learning enable
Syntax gratuitous-arp-learning enable
undo gratuitous-arp-learning enable
reset arp 701
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the gratuitous-arp-learning enable command to enable gratuitous ARP
learning.
Use the undo gratuitous-arp-learning enable command to disable gratuitous
ARP learning.
By default, gratuitous ARP learning is disabled.
With gratuitous ARP learning enabled, a switch operates as follows when
receiving a gratuitous ARP packet:
If an ARP entry in the cache matches the packet, the switch updates the ARP entry
using the sender hardware address carried in the gratuitous ARP packet.
If no ARP entry in the cache matches the packet, an ARP entry corresponding to
the packet is added to the cache.
Example # Enable gratuitous ARP learning on the switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] gratuitous-arp-learning enable
reset arp
Syntax reset arp [ dynamic | static | interface interface-type interface-number ]
View User view
Parameter dynamic: Clears dynamic ARP entries.
static: Clears static ARP entries.
interface: Clears ARP entries of a specified port. interface-type identifies the port
type, and interface-number identifies the port number.
Description Use the reset arp command to clear ARP entries.
Related commands: arp static, display arp.
Example # Clear static ARP entries.
<SW7750> reset arp static
702 CHAPTER 52: ARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
reset arp attack-list
Syntax reset arp attack-list
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset arp attack-list command to clear the ARP attack information.
Related commands: arp mac-arp-map limit, display arp attack-list.
Example # Clear the ARP attack information.
<SW7750> reset arp attack-list
PROXY ARP CONFIGURATION
53 COMMANDS
arp proxy enable
Syntax arp proxy enable
undo arp proxy enable
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the arp proxy enable command to enable proxy ARP.
Use the undo arp proxy enable command to disable proxy ARP.
By default, proxy ARP is disabled.
Related commands: display arp proxy.
Example # Enable proxy ARP on VLAN-interface 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] arp proxy enable
arp proxy source-vlan enable
Syntax arp proxy source-vlan enable
undo arp proxy source-vlan enable
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the arp proxy source-vlan enable command to enable intra-VLAN proxy
ARP, so that proxy ARP is able to process intra-VLAN ARP requests to provide Layer
3 connectivity between Layer 2 isolated ports in the same VLAN.
704 CHAPTER 53: PROXY ARP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo arp proxy source-vlan enable command to disable intra-VLAN
proxy ARP, so that proxy ARP only processes inter-VLAN ARP requests instead of
intra-VLAN ARP request.
By default, intra-VLAN proxy ARP is disabled, and proxy ARP only processes
inter-VLAN ARP requests after it is enabled.
Note that intra-VLAN proxy ARP can be enabled only after proxy ARP is enabled.
Related commands: arp proxy enable, display arp proxy.
Example # With proxy ARP enabled, enable intra-VLAN proxy ARP for VLAN 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 2
[SW7750-Vlan-interface2] arp proxy source-vlan enable
display arp proxy
Syntax display arp proxy [ interface interface-type interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameter interface interface-type interface-number: Specifies an interface by its type and
number.
Description Use the display arp proxy command to display the status of proxy ARP
(enabled/disabled).
Related commands: arp proxy enable.
Example # Display the status of proxy ARP on VLAN-interface 2.
<SW7750> display arp proxy interface Vlan-interface 2
Interface Vlan-interface2
Proxy ARP status: disabled
DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION
54 COMMANDS
dhcp enable
Syntax dhcp enable
undo dhcp enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the dhcp enable command to enable DHCP.
Use the undo dhcp enable command to disable DHCP.
By default, DHCP is enabled.
You must first enable DHCP before performing other DHCP-related configurations.
This configuration is necessary for both DHCP servers and DHCP relay agents.
Example # Enable DHCP.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp enable
dhcp select global
Syntax VLAN interface view:
dhcp select global
undo dhcp select
System view:
dhcp select global { interface interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] | all }
undo dhcp select { interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ] | all }
706 CHAPTER 54: DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View System view, VLAN interface view
Parameter interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]:
Specifies the interface(s) to operate in global address pool mode. The
interface-type and interface-number arguments are the type and number of an
interface. The to keyword separates the start and the end of an interface range.
all: Specifies all ports to operate in global address pool mode.
Description Use the dhcp select global command to configure the specified interface(s) or
all interfaces to operate in global DHCP address pool mode. Upon receiving a
DHCP packet from a DHCP client through an interface operating in global DHCP
address pool mode, the DHCP server chooses an IP address from a global DHCP
address pool of the local DHCP server and assigns the address to the DHCP client.
Use the undo dhcp select command to restore the default DHCP packet
processing mode.
By default, an interface operates in local DHCP server global address pool mode.
Example # Configure all interfaces to operate in global DHCP address pool mode, so that
when a DHCP packet is received from a DHCP client through any interface, the
DHCP server assigns an IP address in local global DHCP address pools to the DHCP
client.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp select global all
dhcp select interface
Syntax VLAN interface view:
dhcp select interface
undo dhcp select
System view:
dhcp select interface { interface interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] | all }
undo dhcp select { interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ] | all }
View System view, VLAN interface view
Parameter interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]:
Specifies the interface(s) to operate in interface address pool mode.
all: Specifies all interfaces to operate in interface address pool mode.
dhcp server detect 707
Description Use the dhcp select interface command to configure the specified interface(s)
to operate in DHCP interface address pool mode. Upon receiving a DHCP packet
from a DHCP client through an interface operating in interface address pool mode,
the DHCP server chooses an IP address from the interface address pool of the local
DHCP server and assigns the address to the DHCP client.
Use the undo dhcp select command to restore the default DHCP packet
processing mode.
By default, an interface operates in local DHCP server global address pool mode.
Example # Configure all interfaces to operate in interface address pool mode, so that when
a DHCP packet is received from a DHCP client through any interface, the DHCP
server assigns an IP address in the local interface address pool to the DHCP client.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp select interface all
dhcp server detect
Syntax dhcp server detect
undo dhcp server detect
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the dhcp server detect command to enable the unauthorized DHCP server
detecting function.
Use the undo dhcp server detect command to disable the unauthorized DHCP
server detecting function.
By default, the unauthorized DHCP server detecting function is disabled.
With the unauthorized DHCP server detecting function enabled, a DHCP server
tracks the information (such as the IP addresses and interfaces) of DHCP servers to
enable the administrator to detect unauthorized DHCP servers in time and take
proper measures.
Example # Enable the unauthorized DHCP server detecting function.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server detect
dhcp server dns-list
Syntax VLAN interface view:
708 CHAPTER 54: DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
dhcp server dns-list ip-address&<1-8>
undo dhcp server dns-list { ip-address | all }
System view:
dhcp server dns-list ip-address&<1-8> { interface interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] | all }
undo dhcp server dns-list { ip-address | all } { interface interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] | all }
View System view, VLAN interface view
Parameter ip-address&<1-8>: IP address of a DNS server. &<1-8> means you can provide up
to eight DNS server IP addresses. When inputting more than one DNS server IP
address, separate two neighboring IP addresses with a space.
interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]:
Specifies the interface(s), through which you can specify the corresponding
interface address pools.
all: (In comparison with the ip-address argument) Specifies all DNS server IP
addresses.
all: (In comparison with the interface keyword) Specifies all interface address
pools.
Description Use the dhcp server dns-list command to configure DNS server IP address(es)
for the DHCP address pool(s) of specified interface(s).
Use the undo dhcp server dns-list command to remove the DNS server IP
address(es) configured for the DHCP address pool(s) of the specified interface(s).
By default, no DNS server IP address is configured for a DHCP interface address
pool.
If you execute the dhcp server dns-list command repeatedly, the new
configuration overwrites the previous one.
Related commands: dns-list.
Example # Configure the DNS server IP address 1.1.1.254 for the DHCP address pool of the
VLAN-interface 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] dhcp server dns-list 1.1.1.254
dhcp server domain-name 709
dhcp server domain-name
Syntax VLAN interface view:
dhcp server domain-name domain-name
undo dhcp server domain-name
System view:
dhcp server domain-name domain-name { interface interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] | all }
undo dhcp server domain-name { interface interface-type interface-number [
to interface-type interface-number ] | all }
View System view, VLAN interface view
Parameter domain-name: Domain name of the DHCP clients whose IP addresses are from the
specified interface address pool(s). This argument is a string of 3 to 50 characters.
interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]:
Specifies the interface(s), through which you can specify the corresponding
interface address pool(s).
all: Specifies all interface address pools.
Description Use the dhcp server domain-name command to configure a domain name for
the DHCP clients whose IP addresses are from the specified interface address
pool(s).
Use the undo dhcp server domain-name command to remove the configured
domain name.
By default, no domain name is configured for the DHCP clients.
Related commands: domain-name.
Example # Set aabbcc.com as the domain name of the DHCP client whose IP address is
obtained from the DHCP address pool of the current VLAN-interface 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] dhcp server domain-name aabbcc.com
dhcp server expired
Syntax VLAN interface view:
dhcp server expired { day day [ hour hour [ minute minute ] ] | unlimited }
710 CHAPTER 54: DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
undo dhcp server expired
System view:
dhcp server expired { day day [ hour hour [ minute minute ] ] | unlimited } {
interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] |
all }
undo dhcp server expired { interface interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] | all }
View System view, VLAN interface view
Parameter day day: Specifies the number of days. The day argument ranges from 0 to 365.
hour hour: Specifies the number of hours. The hour argument ranges from 0 to
23.
minute minute: Specifies the number of minutes. The minute argument ranges
from 0 to 59.
unlimited: Specifies that the lease time is unlimited. (But actually, the system
limits the maximum lease time to about 25 years.)
interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]:
Specifies the interface(s), through which you can specify the corresponding
interface address pool(s).
all: Specifies all interface address pools.
Description Use the dhcp server expired command to configure the lease time of the IP
addresses in the specified interface address pool(s).
Use the undo dhcp server expired command to restore the default lease time.
The default lease time is one day.
Related commands: expired.
Example # Set the lease time of the IP addresses in all interface address pools to be 1 day, 2
hours and 3 minutes.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server expired day 1 hour 2 minute 3 all
dhcp server forbidden-ip
Syntax dhcp server forbidden-ip low-ip-address [ high-ip-address ]
undo dhcp server forbidden-ip low-ip-address [ high-ip-address ]
dhcp server ip-pool 711
View System view
Parameter low-ip-address: IP address that is not available for being assigned to DHCP clients
automatically (An IP address of this kind is known as a forbidden IP address). This
argument also marks the lower end of the range of the forbidden IP addresses.
high-ip-address: IP address that is not available for being assigned to DHCP clients.
This argument also marks the higher end of the range of the forbidden IP
addresses. Note that this argument cannot be less than the low-ip-address
argument. If you do not provide this argument, only the IP address specified by the
low-ip-address argument is forbidden.
Description Use the dhcp server forbidden-ip command to forbid the specified IP
addresses in a DHCP address pool to be automatically assigned.
Use the undo dhcp server forbidden-ip command to cancel this
configuration.
By default, all IP addresses in an address pool are allowed to be automatically
assigned.
Note that the specified address range cannot contain statically-bound addresses
when you use the undo dhcp server forbidden-ip command.
Related commands: dhcp server ip-pool, network, static-bind ip-address, dhcp server
static-bind.
Example # Forbid the IP addresses in the range 10.110.1.1 to 10.110.1.63 to be
automatically assigned.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server forbidden-ip 10.110.1.1 10.110.1.63
dhcp server ip-pool
Syntax dhcp server ip-pool pool-name
undo dhcp server ip-pool pool-name
View System view
Parameter pool-name: Name of a DHCP address pool, which uniquely identifies the address
pool. This argument is a string of 1 to 35 characters.
Description Use the dhcp server ip-pool command to create a global DHCP address pool
and enter DHCP address pool view. If the address pool identified by the pool-name
argument already exists, this command leads you to DHCP address pool view.
Use the undo dhcp server ip-pool command to remove a specified DHCP
address pool.
712 CHAPTER 54: DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
By default, no global DHCP address pool is created.
Related commands: dhcp enable.
Example # Create DHCP address pool 0.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server ip-pool 0
[SW7750-dhcp-pool-0]
dhcp server nbns-list
Syntax VLAN interface view:
dhcp server nbns-list ip-address&<1-8>
undo dhcp server nbns-list { ip-address | all }
System view:
dhcp server nbns-list ip-address&<1-8> { interface interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] | all }
undo dhcp server nbns-list { ip-address | all } { interface interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] | all }
View System view, VLAN interface view
Parameter ip-address&<1-8>: IP address of a WINS server. &<1-8> means you can provide up
to eight WINS server IP addresses. When inputting more than one WINS server IP
address, separate two neighboring IP addresses with a space.
interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]:
Specifies the interface(s), through which you can specify the corresponding
interface address pool(s).
all: (In comparison with the ip-address argument) Specifies all WINS server IP
addresses.
all: (In comparison with the interface keyword) Specifies all interface address
pools.
Description Use the dhcp server nbns-list command to configure WINS server IP address(es)
for the specified DHCP interface address pool(s).
Use the undo dhcp server nbns-list command to remove the WINS server IP
address(es) configured for the specified DHCP interface address pool(s).
By default, no WINS server IP address is configured for a DHCP interface address
pool.
dhcp server netbios-type 713
If you execute the dhcp server nbns-list command repeatedly, the new
configuration overwrites the previous one.
Related commands: nbns-list, dhcp server netbios-type.
Example # Configure the WINS server IP address 10.12.1.99 for all the DHCP interface
address pools.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server nbns-list 10.12.1.99 all
dhcp server netbios-type
Syntax VLAN interface view:
dhcp server netbios-type { b-node | h-node | m-node | p-node }
undo dhcp server netbios-type
System view:
dhcp server netbios-type { b-node | h-node | m-node | p-node } { interface
interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] | all }
undo dhcp server netbios-type { interface interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] | all }
View System view, VLAN interface view
Parameter b-node: Specifies the broadcast type. Nodes of this type acquire host name-to-IP
address mapping by broadcasting.
p-node: Specifies the peer-to-peer type. Nodes of this type acquire host
name-to-IP address mapping by communicating with the WINS server.
m-node: Specifies the m-typed mixed type. Nodes of this type are p-nodes with
some broadcasting features. (The character m here stands for mixed.)
h-node: Specifies the hybrid type. Nodes of this type are b-nodes with
peer-to-peer communicating features.
interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]:
Specifies the interface(s), through which you can specify the corresponding
interface address pools.
all: Specifies all interface address pools.
Description Use the dhcp server netbios-type command to configure the NetBIOS node
type of the DHCP clients whose IP addresses are from the specified interface
address pool(s).
714 CHAPTER 54: DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo dhcp server netbios-type command to restore the default
NetBIOS node type.
By default, no NetBIOS node type is specified and the default NetBIOS node type is
h-node.
Related commands: netbios-type, dhcp server nbns-list.
Example # Specify p-node as the NetBIOS node type of the DHCP clients whose IP addresses
are from the DHCP address pool of VLAN-interface 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] dhcp server netbios-type p-node
dhcp server option
Syntax VLAN interface view:
dhcp server option code { ascii ascii-string | hex hex-string&<1-10> | ip-address
ip-address&<1-8> }
undo dhcp server option code
System view:
dhcp server option code { ascii ascii-string | hex hex-string&<1-10> | ip-address
ip-address&<1-8> } { interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ] | all }
undo dhcp server option code { interface interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] | all }
View System view, VLAN interface view
Parameter code: Customized option number, ranging from 2 to 254. Note that this argument
cannot be 3, 6, 15, 44, 46, 50 through 55, 57 through 59.
ascii ascii-string: Specifies a string that is of 1 to 63 characters. Note that each
character of the string must be an ASCII character.
hex hex-string&<1-10>: Specifies strings, a hexadecimal number of 1 to 8 digits.
&<1-10> means you can provide up to 10 such strings. When inputting more than
one string, separate two neighboring strings with a space.
ip-address ip-address&<1-8>: Specifies IP addresses. &<1-8> means you can
provide up to eight IP addresses. When inputting more than one IP address,
separate two neighboring IP addresses with a space.
dhcp server ping 715
interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]:
Specifies the interface(s), through which you can specify the corresponding
interface address pools.
all: Specifies all interface address pools.
Description Use the dhcp server option command to customize DHCP options for the
specified DHCP interface address pool(s).
Use the undo dhcp server option command to remove the customized DHCP
options.
If you execute the dhcp server option command repeatedly, the new
configuration overwrites the previous one.
Related commands: option.
Example # Configure option 100 to be 0x11 and 0x22 for all DHCP interface address pools.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server option 100 hex 11 22 all
dhcp server ping
Syntax dhcp server ping { packets number | timeout milliseconds }
undo dhcp server ping { packets | timeout }
View System view
Parameter packets number: Specifies the number of the packets to be sent in a ping test.
The number argument ranges from 0 to 10 and defaults to 2. Value 0 means no
packet will be sent.
timeout milliseconds: Specifies the timeout time (in milliseconds) of each packet.
The milliseconds argument ranges from 0 to 10,000 and defaults to 500.
Description Use the dhcp server ping command to set the maximum number of the ICMP
packets a DHCP server sends in a ping test and the maximum response timeout
time of each ICMP packet.
Use the undo dhcp server ping command to restore the default settings.
Example # Set the maximum number of the packets the DHCP server sends in a ping test to
10, and the timeout time of each packet to 300 milliseconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server ping packets 10
[SW7750] dhcp server ping timeout 300
716 CHAPTER 54: DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
dhcp server static-bind
Syntax dhcp server static-bind ip-address ip-address mac-address mac-address
undo dhcp server static-bind { ip-address ip-address | mac-address
mac-address }
View VLAN interface view
Parameter ip-address: IP address to be statically bound. Note that the specified IP address
must belong to the same network segment as that of the VLAN interface.
mac-address: MAC address to which the IP address is statically bound.
Description Use the dhcp server static-bind command to statically bind an IP address of the
current address pool to a MAC address.
Use the undo dhcp server static-bind command to cancel an IP-MAC address
binding.
By default, no IP address in an address pool is statically bound.
It should be noted that:
■ An IP address can be statically bound to only one MAC address. A MAC
address can be bound with only one IP address statically.
■ The IP address to be statically bound cannot be an interface IP address of the
device; otherwise the static binding does not take effect. The device of the
bound MAC address can also obtain another IP address.
Example # Statically bind the IP address 10.1.1.1 to the MAC address 0000-e03f-0305.
(Assume that the interface address pool of VLAN-interface 1 already exists and the
IP address belongs to the address pool.)
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] dhcp server static-bind ip-address 10.1.1.1
mac-address 0000-e03f-0305
display dhcp server conflict
Syntax display dhcp server conflict { all | ip ip-address }
View Any view
Parameter all: Specifies all IP addresses.
ip-address: Specifies an IP address.
display dhcp server expired 717
Description Use the display dhcp server conflict command to display the statistics of IP
address conflicts on the DHCP server.
Related commands: reset dhcp server conflict.
Example # Display the statistics of IP address conflicts.
<SW7750> display dhcp server conflict all
Address Discover Time
10.110.1.2 Jan 11 2003 11:57:07 PM
Table 113 Field descriptions of the display dhcp server conflict command
Field Description
Address Conflicting IP address
Discover Time Time when the conflict is detected
display dhcp server expired
Syntax display dhcp server expired { ip ip-address | pool [ pool-name ] | interface [
interface-type interface-number ] | all }
View Any view
Parameter ip ip-address: Specifies an IP address.
pool [ pool-name ]: Specifies a global address pool. The pool-name argument, a
string of 1 to 35 characters, is the name of an address pool. If you do not provide
this argument, this command applies to all global address pools.
interface [ interface-type interface-number ]: Specifies a VLAN interface. If you do
not specify a VLAN interface, this command applies to all VLAN interfaces.
all: Specifies all DHCP address pools.
Description Use the display dhcp server expired command to display the lease expiration
information about an IP address, or the lease expiration information about all IP
addresses in one or all DHCP address pools. When all the IP addresses in an
address pool are assigned, the DHCP server assigns the IP addresses that are
expired to DHCP clients.
Example # Display the lease expiration information about the IP addresses in all DHCP
address pools.
<SW7750> display dhcp server expired all
Global pool:
IP address Hardware address Lease expiration Type
Interface pool:
IP address Hardware address Lease expiration Type
--- total 0 entry ---
718 CHAPTER 54: DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 114 Field descriptions of the display dhcp server expired command
Field Description
Global pool The information about the expired IP addresses of global address pools
Interface pool The information about the expired IP addresses of interface address pools
IP address Bound IP addresses
Hardware address MAC addresses to which IP addresses are bound
Lease expiration The time when a lease time expires
Type Address binding type
display dhcp server free-ip
Syntax display dhcp server free-ip
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display dhcp server free-ip command to display the free (that is,
unassigned) IP addresses.
Example # Display the free IP addresses.
<SW7750> display dhcp server free-ip
IP Range from 1.0.0.0 to 2.2.2.1
IP Range from 2.2.2.3 to 2.255.255.255
IP Range from 4.0.0.0 to 4.255.255.255
IP Range from 5.5.5.0 to 5.5.5.0
IP Range from 5.5.5.2 to 5.5.5.255
display dhcp server ip-in-use
Syntax display dhcp server ip-in-use { ip ip-address | pool [ pool-name ] | interface [
interface-type interface-number ] | all }
View Any view
Parameter ip ip-address: Specifies an IP address.
pool [ pool-name ]: Specifies a global address pool. The pool-name argument, a
string of 1 to 35 characters, is the name of an address pool. If you do not provide
this argument, this command applies to all global address pools.
interface [ interface-type interface-number ]: Specifies a VLAN interface. If you do
not specify a VLAN interface, this command applies to all VLAN interfaces.
all: Specifies all address pools.
display dhcp server statistics 719
Description Use the display dhcp server ip-in-use command to display the address binding
information of an IP address, the specified DHCP address pool(s) or all DHCP
address pools.
Related commands: reset dhcp server ip-in-use.
Example # Display the address binding information of all DHCP address pools.
<SW7750> display dhcp server ip-in-use all
Global pool:
IP address Hardware address Lease expiration Type
2.2.2.2 4444-4444-4444 NOT Used Manual
Interface pool:
IP address Hardware address Lease expiration Type
5.5.5.1 0050-ba28-930a NOT Used Manual
--- total 2 entry ---
Table 115 Field descriptions of the display dhcp server ip-in-use command
Field Description
Global pool Address binding information of global DHCP address pools
Interface pool Address binding information of interface DHCP address pools
IP address Bound IP address
Hardware address MAC address to which the IP address is bound
Lease expiration Time when the lease expires
Type Address binding type
display dhcp server statistics
Syntax display dhcp server statistics
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display dhcp server statistics command to display the statistics on a
DHCP server.
Related commands: reset dhcp server statistics.
Example # Display the statistics on a DHCP server.
<SW7750> display dhcp server statistics
Global Pool:
Pool Number: 5
Binding
Auto: 0
Manual: 1
Expire: 0
Interface Pool:
720 CHAPTER 54: DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Pool Number: 1
Binding
Auto: 1
Manual: 0
Expire: 0
Boot Request: 6
Dhcp Discover: 1
Dhcp Request: 4
Dhcp Decline: 0
Dhcp Release: 1
Dhcp Inform: 0
Boot Reply: 4
Dhcp Offer: 1
Dhcp Ack: 3
Dhcp Nak: 0
Bad Messages: 0
Table 116 Field descriptions of the display dhcp server statistics command
Field Description
Global Pool Statistics about global address pools
Interface Pool Statistics about interface address pools
Pool Number Number of address pools
Auto Number of the automatically bound IP addresses
Manual Number of the manually bound IP addresses
Expire Number of the expired IP addresses
Boot Request: 6 Statistics about the DHCP packets received from DHCP clients
Dhcp Discover: 1
Dhcp Request: 4
Dhcp Decline: 0
Dhcp Release: 1
Dhcp Inform: 0
Boot Reply: 4 Statistics about the DHCP packets sent to DHCP clients
Dhcp Offer: 1
Dhcp Ack: 3
Dhcp Nak: 0
Bad Messages Number of the error DHCP packets
display dhcp server tree
Syntax display dhcp server tree { pool [ pool-name ] | interface [ interface-type
interface-number ] | all }
View Any view
Parameter pool [ pool-name ]: Specifies a global address pool. The pool-name argument, a
string of 1 to 35 characters, is the name of an address pool. If you do not provide
this argument, this command applies to all global address pools.
display dhcp server tree 721
interface [ interface-type interface-number ]: Specifies a VLAN interface. If you do
not specify a VLAN interface, this command applies to all VLAN interfaces.
all: Specifies all address pools.
Description Use the display dhcp server tree command to display information about
address pool tree.
Example # Display the information about address pool tree.
<SW7750> display dhcp server tree all
Global pool:
Pool name: 5
network 10.10.1.0 mask 255.255.255.0
Child node:6
Sibling node:7
option 10 ip-address 255.0.0.0
expired 1 0 0
Pool name: 6
static-bind ip-address 10.10.1.2 mask 255.0.0.0
static-bind mac-address 000f-e2fc-0001
Parent node:5
option 10 ip-address 255.255.0.0
expired 1 0 0
Pool name: 7
network 10.10.1.64 mask 255.255.255.192
PrevSibling node:5
option 10 ip-address 255.0.0.0
gateway-list 2.2.2.2
dns-list 1.1.1.1
domain-name 444444
nbns-list 3.3.3.3
expired 1 0 0
Table 117 Field descriptions of the display dhcp server tree command
Field Description
Global pool Information about global address pools
Interface pool Information about interface address pools
Pool name Address pool name
network Assignable IP address range
static-bind ip-address 10.10.1.2 mask Statically bound IP and MAC addresses
255.0.0.0
static-bind mac-address 000f-e2fc-0001
722 CHAPTER 54: DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 117 Field descriptions of the display dhcp server tree command
Field Description
Child node:6 The address pool 6 is the child node of this
node.
This field can display the information about
the following types of node:
Child node: Displays the information about an
address pool that is a child of the current
address pool.
Parent node: Displays the information about
the address pool that is the parent of the
current address pool.
Sibling node: Displays the information about
the next sibling address pool of the current
address pool. (The order of sibling address
pools are determined by the time when they
are configured.)
PrevSibling node: Displays the information
about the previous sibling address pool of the
current address pool.
option Customized DHCP options
expired The address lease time (in terms of number of
days, hours, and minutes)
gateway-list List of the gateways configured for the DHCP
clients
dns-list List of the DNS servers configured for the
DHCP clients
domain-name The domain name configured for the DHCP
clients
nbns-list List of the WINS servers configured for the
DHCP clients
dns-list
Syntax dns-list ip-address&<1-8>
undo dns-list { ip-address | all }
View DHCP address pool view
Parameter ip-address&<1-8>: IP address of a DNS server. &<1-8> string means you can
provide up to eight DNS server IP addresses. When inputting more than one IP
address, separate two neighboring IP addresses with a space.
all: Specifies all configured DNS server IP addresses.
Description Use the dns-list command to configure one or multiple DNS server IP addresses
for a global DHCP address pool.
Use the undo dns-list command to remove one or all DNS server IP addresses
configured for the DHCP address pool.
domain-name 723
By default, no DNS server IP address is configured.
If you execute the dns-list command repeatedly, the new configuration overwrites
the previous one.
Related commands: dhcp server dns-list, dhcp server ip-pool.
Example # Configure the DNS server IP address 1.1.1.254 for global DHCP address pool 0.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server ip-pool 0
[SW7750-dhcp-pool-0] dns-list 1.1.1.254
domain-name
Syntax domain-name domain-name
undo domain-name
View DHCP address pool view
Parameter domain-name: Domain name for the DHCP clients of a global DHCP address pool,
a string of 3 to 50 characters.
Description Use the domain-name command to configure a domain name for the DHCP
clients of a global DHCP address pool.
Use the undo domain-name command to remove the domain name.
By default, no domain name is configured for the DHCP clients of a global DHCP
address pool.
Related commands: dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server domain-name.
Example # Configure the domain name "mydomain.com" for the DHCP clients of the
global DHCP address pool 0.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server ip-pool 0
[SW7750-dhcp-pool-0] domain-name mydomain.com
expired
Syntax expired { day day [ hour hour [ minute minute ] ] | unlimited }
undo expired
View DHCP address pool view
724 CHAPTER 54: DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter day day: Specifies the number of days. The day argument ranges from 0 to 365.
hour hour: Specifies the number of hours. The hour argument ranges from 0 to
23.
minute minute: Specifies the number of minutes. The minute argument ranges
from 0 to 59.
unlimited: Specifies that the lease time is unlimited. (But actually, the system
limits the maximum lease time to about 25 years.)
Description Use the expired command to configure the lease time of the IP addresses in a
global DHCP address pool.
Use the undo expired command to restore the default lease time.
The default lease time is one day.
Related commands: dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server expired.
Example # Set the lease time of the IP addresses in the global DHCP address pool 0 to 1 day,
2 hours and 3 minutes.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server ip-pool 0
[SW7750-dhcp-pool-0] expired day 1 hour 2 minute 3
gateway-list
Syntax gateway-list ip-address&<1-8>
undo gateway-list { ip-address | all }
View DHCP address pool view
Parameter ip-address&<1-8>: IP address of a gateway. &<1-8> means you can provide up to
eight gateway IP addresses. When inputting more than one IP address, separate
two neighboring IP addresses with a space.
all: Specifies all configured gateway IP addresses.
Description Use the gateway-list command to configure one or multiple gateway IP
addresses for the DHCP clients of a DHCP address pool.
Use the undo gateway-list command to remove one or all the configured
gateway IP addresses configured for the DHCP address pool.
By default, no gateway IP address is configured.
If you execute the gateway-list command repeatedly, the new configuration
overwrites the previous one.
nbns-list 725
Example # Configure the gateway IP address 10.110.1.99 for the global DHCP address pool
0.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server ip-pool 0
[SW7750-dhcp-pool-0] gateway-list 10.110.1.99
nbns-list
Syntax nbns-list ip-address&<1-8>
undo nbns-list { ip-address | all }
View DHCP address pool view
Parameter ip-address&<1-8>: IP address of a WINS server. &<1-8> means you can provide up
to eight WINS server IP addresses. When inputting more than one IP address,
separate two neighboring IP addresses with a space.
all: Specifies all configured WINS server IP addresses.
Description Use the nbns-list command to configure one or multiple WINS server IP
addresses for the DHCP clients of a global DHCP address pool.
Use the undo nbns-list command to remove one or all WINS server IP addresses
configured for the DHCP clients.
By default, no WINS server IP address is configured.
If you execute the nbns-list command repeatedly, the new configuration
overwrites the previous one.
Related commands: dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server nbns-list, netbios-type.
Example # Configure the WINS server IP address 10.12.1.99 for the global DHCP address
pool 0.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server ip-pool 0
[SW7750-dhcp-pool-0] nbns-list 10.12.1.99
netbios-type
Syntax netbios-type { b-node | h-node | m-node | p-node }
undo netbios-type
View DHCP address pool view
726 CHAPTER 54: DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter b-node: Specifies the broadcast type. Nodes of this type acquire host name-to-IP
address mapping by broadcasting.
p-node: Specifies the peer-to-peer type. Nodes of this type acquire host
name-to-IP address mapping by communicating with the WINS server.
m-node: Specifies the mixed type. Nodes of this type are p-nodes with some
broadcasting features.
h-node: Specifies the hybrid type. Nodes of this type are b-nodes with
peer-to-peer communicating features.
Description Use the netbios-type command to configure the DHCP clients of a global
address pool to be of specified NetBIOS node type.
Use the undo netbios-type command to restore the default NetBIOS node type.
By default, no NetBIOS node type is specified. In this case, the client uses h-node.
Related commands: dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server netbios-type, nbns-list.
Example # Configure the DHCP clients of the global DHCP address pool 0 to be of b-node
type.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server ip-pool 0
[SW7750-dhcp-pool-0] netbios-type b-node
network
Syntax network ip-address [ mask mask ]
undo network
View DHCP address pool view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of a network segment, used to specify an IP address range.
mask mask: Specifies a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation. If you do not
specify the mask argument, the default subnet mask is used.
Description Use the network command to configure a dynamically assigned IP address range
(where IP addresses will be dynamically assigned to DHCP clients).
Use the undo network command to remove a dynamically assigned IP address
range.
By default, no such IP address range is configured for a DHCP address pool.
option 727
Note that you can configure only one such IP address range for a DHCP address
pool. If you execute the network command repeatedly, the new configuration
overwrites the previous one.
Related commands: dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server forbidden-ip.
Example # Configure the dynamically assigned IP address range 192.168.8.0/24 for the
global DHCP address pool 0.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server ip-pool 0
[SW7750-dhcp-pool-0] network 192.168.8.0 mask 255.255.255.0
option
Syntax option code { ascii ascii-string | hex hex-string&<1-10> | ip-address
ip-address&<1-8> }
undo option code
View DHCP address pool view
Parameter code: Customized option number ranging from 2 to 254. Note that this argument
cannot be 3, 6, 15, 44, 46, 50 through 55, 57 through 59.
ascii ascii-string: Specifies a string that is of 1 to 63 ASCII characters.
hex hex-string&<1-10>: Specifies strings, a hexadecimal number of 1 to 8 digits.
&<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 such strings. When entering more
than one strings, separate two neighboring strings with a space.
ip-address ip-address&<1-8>: Specifies IP addresses. &<1-8> means that you can
provide up to eight IP addresses. When entering more than one IP address,
separate two neighboring IP addresses with a space.
Description Use the option command to customize DHCP options for a global DHCP address
pool.
Use the undo option command to remove the customized DHCP options.
If you execute the option command repeatedly, the new configuration overwrites
the previous one.
Related commands: dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server option.
Example # Configure option 100 to be 0x11 and 0x22 for the global DHCP address pools.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server ip-pool 0
[SW7750-dhcp-pool-0] option 100 hex 11 22
728 CHAPTER 54: DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
reset dhcp server conflict
Syntax reset dhcp server conflict { all | ip ip-address }
View User view
Parameter ip ip-address: Specifies an IP address, whose conflict statistics will be cleared.
all: Clears all address conflict statistics.
Description Use the reset dhcp server conflict command to clear address conflict statistics.
Related commands: display dhcp server conflict.
Example # Clear all address conflict statistics.
<SW7750> reset dhcp server conflict all
reset dhcp server ip-in-use
Syntax reset dhcp server ip-in-use { all | interface [ interface-type interface-number ] |
ip ip-address | pool [ pool-name ] }
View User view
Parameter all: Clears the dynamic address binding information about all IP addresses.
interface [ interface-type interface-number ]: Clears the dynamic address binding
information about a specified interface address pool. If you do not specify the
interface-number argument, this command clears the dynamic address binding
information about all interface address pools.
ip ip-address: Clears the dynamic address binding information about a specified IP
address.
pool [ pool-name ]: Clears the dynamic address binding information about a
specified address pool. The pool-name argument, a string of 1 to 35 characters, is
the name of an address pool. If you do not provide this argument, this command
clears the dynamic address binding information about all global address pools.
Description Use the reset dhcp server ip-in-use command to clear the specified or all
dynamic address binding information.
Related commands: display dhcp server ip-in-use.
Example # Clear the dynamic address binding information about the IP address 10.110.1.1.
<SW7750> reset dhcp server ip-in-use ip 10.110.1.1
reset dhcp server statistics 729
reset dhcp server statistics
Syntax reset dhcp server statistics
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset dhcp server statistics command to clear the statistics on a DHCP
server, such as the number of DHCP unrecognized packets/request
packets/response packets.
Related commands: display dhcp server statistics.
Example # Clear the statistics on a DHCP server.
<SW7750> reset dhcp server statistics
static-bind ip-address
Syntax static-bind ip-address ip-address [ mask mask ]
undo static-bind ip-address
View DHCP address pool view
Parameter ip-address: IP address to be bound.
mask mask: Subnet mask of the specified IP address. If you do not specify the
mask argument, the default subnet mask is used.
Description Use the static-bind ip-address command to specify an IP address to be statically
bound to a MAC address.
Use the undo static-bind ip-address command to remove a statically bound IP
address.
By default, no IP address is statically bound.
n Note that:
■ The static-bind ip-address command must be used together with the
static-bind mac-address command, to specify a statically bound IP address or
MAC address.
■ If you execute the static-bind ip-address command repeatedly, the new
configuration overwrites the previous one.
Related commands: dhcp server ip-pool, static-bind mac-address.
730 CHAPTER 54: DHCP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Bind the IP address 10.1.1.1 (with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0) to the MAC
address 0000-e03f-0305.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server ip-pool 0
[SW7750-dhcp-pool-0] static-bind ip-address 10.1.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0
[SW7750-dhcp-pool-0] static-bind mac-address 0000-e03f-0305
static-bind mac-address
Syntax static-bind mac-address mac-address
undo static-bind mac-address
View DHCP address pool view
Parameter mac-address: MAC address of the host to which the IP address is to be bound. You
need to provide this argument in the form of H-H-H.
Description Use the static-bind mac-address command to specify a MAC address to which
an IP address will be bound statically.
Use the undo static-bind mac-address command to remove such a MAC
address.
By default, no such MAC address is specified.
n Note that:
■ The static-bind ip-address command must be used together with the
static-bind mac-address command, to respectively specify a statically bound
IP address and MAC address.
■ If you execute the static-bind mac-address command repeatedly, the new
configuration overwrites the previous one.
Related commands: dhcp server ip-pool, static-bind ip-address.
Example # Bind the IP address 10.1.1.1 (with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0) to the MAC
address 0000-e03f-0305.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp server ip-pool 0
[SW7750-dhcp-pool-0] static-bind ip-address 10.1.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0
[SW7750-dhcp-pool-0] static-bind mac-address 0000-e03f-0305
DHCP RELAY AGENT CONFIGURATION
55 COMMANDS
address-check
Syntax address-check enable
address-check disable
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the address-check enable command to enable the address checking
function of the DHCP relay agent.
Use the address-check disable command to disable the address checking
function of the DHCP relay agent.
By default, the address checking function of the DHCP relay agent is disabled on a
VLAN interface.
Example # Enable the address checking function of the DHCP relay agent on
VLAN-interface 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] address-check enable
Address check turns on!
address-check dhcp-relay
Syntax address-check dhcp-relay enable
address-check dhcp-relay disable
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the address-check dhcp-relay enable command to validate the dynamic
entries generated by the DHCP relay agent.
732 CHAPTER 55: DHCP RELAY AGENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the address-check dhcp-relay disable command to invalidate the
dynamic entries generated by the DHCP relay agent.
By default, the dynamic entries generated by the DHCP relay agent are valid.
This configuration will take effect only after the address checking function of the
DHCP relay agent on the VLAN interface is enabled.
Example # Invalidate the dynamic entries generated by the DHCP relay agent.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] address-check enable
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] address-check dhcp-relay disable
address-check field enable
Syntax address-check field { mac | vlan | port } enable
address-check field { mac | vlan | port } disable
View VLAN interface view
Parameter mac: Enables or disables checking the MAC address.
vlan: Enables or disables checking the VLAN ID.
port: Enables or disables checking the port number.
Description Use the address-check field enable command to enable checking of the
specified field.
Use the address-check field disable command to disable checking of the
specified field.
By default, after enabled with the address checking function, the DHCP relay
agent checks the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID, and port number of a DHCP
client respectively.
Example # Disable the checking of the VLAN ID and port number on VLAN-interface 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] address-check field vlan disable
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] address-check field port disable
address-check no-matched
Syntax address-check no-matched enable
dhcp-relay gateway interface 733
address-check no-matched disable
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the address-check no-matched enable command to forbid
freely-connected clients to pass DHCP security check.
Use the address-check no-matched disable command to allow
freely-connected clients to pass DHCP security check.
By default, freely-connected clients are not allowed to pass DHCP security check.
Freely-connected clients refer to the clients whose IP addresses and MAC
addresses are not in the DHCP security table.
This configuration will take effect only after the address checking function of the
DHCP relay agent on the VLAN interface is enabled.
Example # Configure to not allow freely-connected clients to pass DHCP security check on
VLAN-interface 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] address-check enable
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] address-check no-matched enable
dhcp-relay gateway interface
Syntax dhcp-relay gateway ip-address interface interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ]
undo dhcp-relay gateway [ ip-address | interface interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] ]
View VLAN interface view
Parameter ip-address: IP address (primary or secondary) of the VLAN interface.
interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]:
Specifies a port or multiple ports in the VLAN.
Description Use the dhcp-relay gateway interface command to specify a gateway address
by binding one or multiple ports in the VLAN to one of the VLAN interface’s IP
addresses.
Use the undo dhcp-relay gateway interface command to remove the
specified binding entry.
734 CHAPTER 55: DHCP RELAY AGENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
By default, no such a binding is created.
Example # Specify a gateway address by binding Ethernet 2/0/3 in VLAN 10 to IP address
10.1.1.1 of VLAN-interface 10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 10
[SW7750-Vlan-interface10] dhcp-relay gateway 10.1.1.1 interface ethe
rnet2/0/3
dhcp-relay gateway vlan
Syntax dhcp-relay gateway ip-address vlan vlan-id
undo dhcp-relay gateway [ vlan vlan-id ]
View Ethernet port view
Parameter ip-address: IP address (primary or secondary) of the VLAN interface.
vlan vlan-id: ID of the VLAN to which the port belongs.
Description Use the dhcp-relay gateway vlan command to specify a gateway address by
binding the Ethernet port in a VLAN to one of the VLAN interface’s IP addresses.
Use the undo dhcp-relay gateway command to remove the specified binding
entry.
n Note that:
If the Ethernet port belongs to a sub-VLAN, you need to specify the ip address
argument as the primary or secondary IP address of the corresponding super VLAN
interface, and specify the vlan-id argument as the VLAN ID of the super VLAN;
otherwise, the system prompts error information due to VLAN mismatch.
Example # Specify a gateway address by binding Ethernet 2/0/4 in VLAN 2 to the secondary
IP address 10.1.1.2 of VLAN-interface 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/4
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/4] dhcp-relay gateway 10.1.1.2 vlan 2
dhcp relay information enable
Syntax dhcp relay information enable
undo dhcp relay information enable
View System view
dhcp relay information strategy 735
Parameter None
Description Use the dhcp relay information enable command to enable option 82
supporting on a DHCP relay agent, through which you can enable the DHCP relay
agent to insert option 82 into DHCP request packets sent to a DHCP server.
Use the undo dhcp relay information enable command to disable option 82
supporting on a DHCP relay agent, through which you can disable the DHCP relay
agent from inserting option 82 into DHCP request packets sent to a DHCP server.
By default, this function is disabled.
Related commands: dhcp relay information strategy.
Example # Enable option 82 supporting on a DHCP relay agent.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp relay information enable
dhcp relay information strategy
Syntax dhcp relay information strategy { drop | keep | replace }
undo dhcp relay information strategy
View System view
Parameter drop: Specifies to discard the DHCP request packets that carry option 82.
keep: Specifies to remain the DHCP request packets that carry option 82
unchanged.
replace: Specifies to replace option 82 carried by a DHCP request packet with that
of the DHCP relay agent.
Description Use the dhcp relay information strategy command to instruct a DHCP relay
agent to perform specified operations to DHCP request packets that carry option
82.
Use the undo dhcp relay information strategy command to instruct a DHCP
relay agent to perform the default operations to DHCP request packets that carry
option 82.
By default, the DHCP relay agent replaces the option 82 carried by a DHCP request
packet with its own option 82.
Related commands: dhcp relay information enable
736 CHAPTER 55: DHCP RELAY AGENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Instruct the DHCP relay agent to drop the DHCP request packets that carry
option 82.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp relay information strategy drop
dhcp relay reply broadcast
Syntax dhcp relay reply broadcast
undo dhcp relay reply broadcast
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the dhcp relay reply broadcast command to force the DHCP relay agent
to broadcast the responses (including DHCP-OFFER, DHCP-ACK, or DHCP-ACK) to
the clients.
Use the undo dhcp relay reply broadcast command to restore the default
settings.
Generally, the DHCP relay agent determines to broadcast or unicast responses to
the clients according to the flag field in the DHCP-DISCOVER packet sent by the
client.
Example # Force the DHCP relay agent to broadcast responses to clients.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp relay reply broadcast
dhcp relay source-ip source-interface
Syntax dhcp relay source-ip source-interface
undo dhcp relay source-ip source-interface
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the dhcp relay source-ip source-interface command to specify the
source IP address of uplink packets to the DHCP server as the IP address of the
relay agent’s interface that connects to the clients.
Use the undo dhcp relay source-ip source-interface command to disable this
function.
dhcp-security static 737
By default, this function is disabled. That is, the source IP address of packets
forwarded to the DHCP server is the IP address of the relay agent’s interface that
connects to the DHCP server.
Example # Specify the source IP address of uplink packets as that of the receiving interface.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp relay source-ip source-interface
dhcp-security static
Syntax dhcp-security static ip-address mac mac-address [ vlan vlan-id | port
interface-type interface-number ]*
undo dhcp-security { ip-address | all | dynamic | static }
View System view
Parameter ip-address: User IP address.
mac-address: User MAC address.
vlan vlan-id: Specifies a VLAN ID.
port interface-type interface-number: Specifies a port by its type and number.
all: Removes all user address entries.
dynamic: Removes dynamic user address entries.
static: Removes static user address entries.
Description Use the dhcp-security static command to configure a static client address entry
on the DHCP relay agent, in which an IP address can be bound to one or more
objects among MAC address, VLAN, and port.
Use the undo dhcp-security command to remove one or all client address
entries from the DHCP relay agent.
Related commands: display dhcp-security.
Example # Configure a static client address entry on the DHCP relay agent.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[SW7750] dhcp-security static 1.1.1.1 mac 0005-5D02-F2B3 vlan 1 port
Ethernet2/0/2
738 CHAPTER 55: DHCP RELAY AGENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
dhcp-server
Syntax dhcp-server groupNo
undo dhcp-server
View VLAN interface view
Parameter groupNo: DHCP server group number. This argument ranges from 0 to 19.
Description Use the dhcp-server command to map the current VLAN interface to a DHCP
server group.
Use the undo dhcp-server command to cancel the mapping.
Related commands: dhcp-server ip, display dhcp-server, display dhcp-server interface.
Example # Specify that VLAN-interface 1 corresponds to DHCP server group 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] dhcp-server 1
dhcp-server ip
Syntax dhcp-server groupNo ip ip-address&<1-8>
undo dhcp-server groupNo
View System view
Parameter groupNo: DHCP server group number, ranging from 0 to 19.
ip-address&<1-8>: IP address of the DNS server. &<1-8> indicates that up to eight
IP addresses can be input, with any two IP addresses separated by a space.
Description Use the dhcp-server ip command to configure the DHCP server IP address(es) in
a specified DHCP server group.
Use the undo dhcp-server command to remove all DHCP server IP addresses in a
DHCP server group.
Related commands: dhcp-server, display dhcp-server.
Example # Configure three DHCP server IP addresses 1.1.1.1, 2.2.2.2, and 3.3.3.3 for DHCP
server group 1, so that this group contains three DHCP servers (server 1, server 2
and server 3).
display dhcp-security 739
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp-server 1 ip 1.1.1.1 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.3
display dhcp-security
Syntax display dhcp-security [ ip-address | dynamic | static ]
View Any view
Parameter ip-address: IP address. This argument is used to display the user address entry with
the specified IP address.
dynamic: Displays the dynamic user address entries.
static: Displays the static user address entries.
Description Use the display dhcp-security command to display one or all user address
entries, or a specified type of user address entries in the valid user address table of
a DHCP server group.
Example # Display all user address entries contained in the valid user address table of the
DHCP server group.
<SW7750> display dhcp-security
IP Address MAC Address Vlan ID Port Type
192.168.4.1 00e0-fc00-000b 100 GigabitEthernet2/0/13 Dynamic
192.168.0.3 000d-88f8-4e71 --- --- Static
192.168.0.45 00d0-eee3-ff11 --- --- Static
--- 3 dhcp-security item(s) found ---
Table 118 Field descriptions of the display dhcp-security command
Field Description
IP Address IP address of the DHCP client
MAC Address MAC address of the DHCP client
VLAN ID ID of the VLAN to which the DHCP client belongs
Port Type and number of the relay agent’s port connecting to the DHCP client
Type Type of the user address entry (static or dynamic)
display dhcp-server
Syntax display dhcp-server groupNo
View Any view
Parameter groupNo: DHCP server group number, ranging from 0 to 19.
Description Use the display dhcp-server command to display information about a specified
DHCP server group.
740 CHAPTER 55: DHCP RELAY AGENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Related commands: dhcp-server ip, dhcp-server, display dhcp-server interface.
Example # Display information about DHCP server group 0.
<SW7750> display dhcp-server 0
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 1.1.1.1
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 2.2.2.2
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 3.3.3.3
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 4.4.4.4
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 5.5.5.5
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 6.6.6.6
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 7.7.7.7
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 8.8.8.8
Messages from this server group: 0
Messages to this server group: 0
Messages from clients to this server group: 0
Messages from this server group to clients: 0
DHCP_OFFER messages: 0
DHCP_ACK messages: 0
DHCP_NAK messages: 0
DHCP_DECLINE messages: 0
DHCP_DISCOVER messages: 0
DHCP_REQUEST messages: 0
DHCP_INFORM messages: 0
DHCP_RELEASE messages: 0
BOOTP_REQUEST messages: 0
BOOTP_REPLY messages: 0
Table 119 Field descriptions of the display dhcp-server command
Field Description
IP address of DHCP server group 0: DHCP server IP addresses of DHCP server group 0
Messages from this server group Number of packets received from the DHCP server
group
Messages to this server group Number of packets sent to the DHCP server group
Messages from clients to this server group Number of packets received from the DHCP
clients
Messages from this server group to clients Number of packets sent to the DHCP clients
DHCP_OFFER messages Number of received DHCP-OFFER packets
DHCP_ACK messages Number of received DHCP-ACK packets
DHCP_NAK messages Number of received DHCP-NAK packets
DHCP_DECLINE messages Number of received DHCP-DECLINE packets
DHCP_DISCOVER messages Number of received DHCP-DISCOVER packets
DHCP_REQUEST messages Number of received DHCP-REQUEST packets
DHCP_INFORM messages Number of received DHCP-INFORM packets
DHCP_RELEASE messages Number of received DHCP-RELEASE packets
BOOTP_REQUEST messages Number of BOOTP request packets
BOOTP_REPLY messages Number of BOOTP response packets
display dhcp-server interface
Syntax display dhcp-server interface Vlan-interface vlan-id
reset dhcp-server 741
View Any view
Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID.
Description Use the display dhcp-server interface command to display information about
the DHCP server group to which a VLAN interface is mapped.
Related commands: dhcp-server, display dhcp-server.
Example # Display information about the DHCP server group to which VLAN 2 interface is
mapped.
<SW7750> display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface 2
The DHCP server group of this interface is 0
The above display information indicates the VLAN 2 interface is mapped to DHCP
server group 0.
reset dhcp-server
Syntax reset dhcp-server groupNo
View User view
Parameter groupNo: DHCP server group number, ranging from 0 to 19.
Description Use the reset dhcp-server command to clear the statistics information of the
specified DHCP server group.
Related commands: dhcp-server, display dhcp-server.
Example # Clear the statistics information of DHCP server group 2.
<SW7750> reset dhcp-server 2
undo dhcp-relay gateway all
Syntax undo dhcp-relay gateway all
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the undo dhcp-relay gateway all command to delete all the gateways
configured on the DHCP relay agent, that is, to remove the bindings between the
VLAN interfaces’ IP addresses (primary or secondary) and the ports in the VLANs.
742 CHAPTER 55: DHCP RELAY AGENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Delete all the gateways configured on the DHCP relay agent.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] undo dhcp-relay gateway all
DHCP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION
56 COMMANDS
dhcp-snooping
Syntax dhcp-snooping
undo dhcp-snooping
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the dhcp-snooping command to enable the DHCP snooping function, so as
to allow the switch to listen to the DHCP broadcast packets.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping command to disable the DHCP snooping
function.
By default, the DHCP snooping function is disabled.
Related commands: display dhcp-snooping.
Example # Enable the DHCP snooping function.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp-snooping
dhcp-snooping information enable
Syntax dhcp-snooping information enable
undo dhcp-snooping information enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the dhcp-snooping information enable command to enable DHCP
snooping Option 82.
744 CHAPTER 56: DHCP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information enable command to disable
DHCP snooping Option 82.
DHCP snooping Option 82 is disabled by default.
Example # Enable DHCP snooping Option 82.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp-snooping information enable
DHCP snooping option 82 is enabled globally.
dhcp-snooping information format
Syntax dhcp-snooping information format { hex | ascii }
View System view
Parameter hex: Specifies the storage format of Option 82 as HEX (namely, hexadecimal
string).
ascii: Specifies the storage format of Option 82 as ASCII.
Description Use the dhcp-snooping information format command to configure the
storage format of Option 82 as HEX or ASCII.
By default, the Option 82 is in HEX format.
n The dhcp-snooping information format command applies only to the default
content of the Option 82 field. If you have configured the circuit ID or remote ID
sub-option, the storage format of the sub-option is ASCII, instead of the one
specified with the dhcp-snooping information format command.
Example # Configure the storage format of Option 82 as ASCII.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp-snooping information format ascii
dhcp-snooping information packet-format
Syntax dhcp-snooping information packet-format { extended | standard }
View System view
Parameter extended: Specifies the padding format for Option 82 as the extended format.
standard: Specifies the padding format for Option 82 as the standard format.
dhcp-snooping information remote-id 745
Description Use the dhcp-snooping information packet-format command to configure
the padding format for Option 82 as the extended or standard one.
By default, the padding format for Option 82 is the extended one.
Example # Configure the padding format for Option 82 as the standard one.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp-snooping information packet-format standard
dhcp-snooping information remote-id
Syntax dhcp-snooping information remote-id { sysname | string string }
undo dhcp-snooping information remote-id
View System view
Parameter sysname: Uses the system name of the DHCP snooping device to pad the remote
ID sub-option in Option 82.
string: Customized content of the remote ID sub-option, a string of 1 to 63 ASCII
characters.
Description Use the dhcp-snooping information circuit-id command to configure the
remote ID sub-option in Option 82.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information circuit-id command to restore the
default value of the remote ID sub-option in Option 82.
By default, the remote ID sub-option in Option 82 is the MAC address of the
DHCP Snooping device that received the DHCP client’s request.
Example # Configure the remote ID sub-option of Option 82 as the system name of the
DHCP snooping device.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp-snooping information remote-id sysname
dhcp-snooping information strategy
Syntax dhcp-snooping information strategy { drop | keep | replace }
undo dhcp-snooping information strategy
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter drop: If a packet contains Option 82, DHCP snooping drops this packet.
746 CHAPTER 56: DHCP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
keep: If a packet contains Option 82, DHCP snooping keeps and forwards this
packet.
replace: If a packet contains Option 82, DHCP snooping replaces the original
Option 82 field with the Option 82 field having the specified padding content and
forwards the packet.
Description Use the dhcp-snooping information strategy command in system view to
configure a handling policy for DHCP requests that contain Option 82 sent by the
DHCP client.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information strategy command to restore the
default handling policy.
Use the dhcp-snooping information strategy command in Ethernet port
view to configure a handling policy for requests that contain Option 82 received
on the current port.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information strategy command to restore the
default handling policy.
By default, DHCP snooping replaces the Option 82 field in the requests sent by the
DHCP clients.
c CAUTION:
■ Enable DHCP-snooping and DHCP-snooping Option 82 before performing this
configuration.
■ If a handling policy is configured on a port, this configuration overrides the
globally configured handling policy for requests received on this port, while the
globally configured handling policy applies on those ports where a handling
policy is not natively configured.
Example # Configure the keep handling policy for DHCP requests that contain Option 82
on the DHCP snooping device.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dhcp-snooping information strategy keep
dhcp-snooping information vlan circuit-id
Syntax dhcp-snooping information [ vlan vlan-id ] circuit-id string string
undo dhcp-snooping information { [ vlan vlan-id ] circuit-id | circuit-id all }
View Ethernet port view
Parameter vlan vlan-id: Specifies a VLAN. DHCP packets from the VLAN are padded with the
circuit ID sub-option.
string: Content of the circuit ID sub-option, a string of 1 to 63 ASCII characters.
dhcp-snooping information vlan remote-id 747
Description Use the dhcp-snooping information vlan circuit-id command to configure
the content of the circuit ID field in Option 82.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information circuit-id command to restore the
default.
With vlan vlan-id specified, the customized circuit ID sub-option applies only to
the DHCP packets from the specified VLAN. With no vlan vlan-id specified, the
customized circuit ID sub-option applies to all DHCP packets that pass through the
current port.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information vlan vlan-id circuit-id command
to restore the default circuit ID in DHCP packets from the specified VLAN.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information circuit-id command to restore the
default circuit ID for all DHCP packets except those from the specified VLAN.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information circuit-id all command to restore
the default circuit ID for all DHCP packets.
By default, the circuit ID field in Option 82 contains the VLAN ID and index of the
port that received the client’s request.
If you have configured a circuit ID with the vlan vlan-id argument specified, and
the other one without the argument in Ethernet port view, the former circuit ID
applies to the DHCP messages from the specified VLAN, while the latter one
applies to DHCP messages from other VLANs.
Example # Set the circuit ID field in Option 82 to abc
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] dhcp-snooping information circuit-id string abc
dhcp-snooping information vlan remote-id
Syntax dhcp-snooping information [ vlan vlan-id ] remote-id string string
undo dhcp-snooping information { [ vlan vlan-id ] remote-id | remote-id all }
View Ethernet port view
Parameter vlan vlan-id: Specifies the VLAN ID of the remote ID to be customized.
string: Customized content of the remote ID sub-option, a string of 1 to 63 ASCII
characters.
Description Use the dhcp-snooping information vlan remote-id command to configure
the content of the remote ID in Option 82
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information remote-id command to restore
the default remote ID in Option 82.
748 CHAPTER 56: DHCP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
With vlan vlan-id specified, the customized remote ID sub-option applies only to
the DHCP packets from the specified VLAN. Without vlan vlan-id specified, the
customized remote ID sub-option applies to all DHCP packets that pass through
the current port.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information vlan vlan-id remote-id command
to restore the default remote ID in DHCP packets from the specified VLAN.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information remote-id command to restore
the default remote ID in all DHCP packets except those from the specified VLAN.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information remote-id all command to
restore the default remote ID in all DHCP packets.
By default, the remote ID sub-option in Option 82 is the MAC address of the
DHCP Snooping device that received the DHCP client’s request.
If you have configured a remote ID with the vlan vlan-id argument specified, and
the other one without the argument in Ethernet port view, the former remote ID
applies to the DHCP messages from the specified VLAN, while the latter one
applies to DHCP messages from other VLANs.
Example # Configure the remote ID of Option 82 in DHCP packets to abc on the port
Ethernet 2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] dhcp-snooping information remote-id string abc
dhcp-snooping trust
Syntax dhcp-snooping trust
undo dhcp-snooping trust
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the dhcp-snooping trust command to specify an Ethernet port as a trusted
port.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping trust command to restore an Ethernet port to an
untrusted port.
DHCP snooping security allow you to specify a port as a trusted port or an
untrusted port, so that DHCP clients can obtain IP addresses from valid DHCP
servers.
■ Trusted ports can be used to connect DHCP servers or ports of other switches.
Untrusted ports can be used to connect DHCP clients or networks.
display dhcp-snooping 749
■ Trusted ports forward any received DHCP packets to ensure that DHCP clients
can obtain IP addresses from valid DHCP servers. Untrusted ports discard the
DHCP-ACK and DHCP-OFFER responses received from DHCP servers.
By default, all the ports of a switch are untrusted ports.
Related commands: display dhcp-snooping trust.
Example # Specify the Ethernet 2/0/1 port as a trusted port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] dhcp-snooping trust
display dhcp-snooping
Syntax display dhcp-snooping
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display dhcp-snooping command to display the IP-MAC mapping
relations recorded by the DHCP snooping-enabled switch.
Related commands: dhcp-snooping.
Example # Display the IP-MAC mapping relations recorded by the DHCP snooping-enabled
switch.
<SW7750> display dhcp-snooping
DHCP snooping is enabled globally.
Type : D--Dynamic , S--Static
Type IP Address MAC Address Lease VLAN Interface
==== =============== =============== ========= ==== =================
--- 0 DHCP snooping item(s) found ---
display dhcp-snooping count
Syntax display dhcp-snooping count
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display dhcp-snooping count command to display the total number
of DHCP-Snooping entries.
750 CHAPTER 56: DHCP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Display the total number of DHCP-Snooping entries.
<SW7750> display dhcp-snooping count
1 dhcp-snooping item(s) found
display dhcp-snooping trust
Syntax display dhcp-snooping trust
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display dhcp-snooping trust command to display the
(enabled/disabled) state of the DHCP snooping function and the trusted ports.
Related commands: dhcp-snooping trust.
Example # Display the state of the DHCP snooping function and the trusted ports.
<SW7750> display dhcp-snooping trust
Interface Trusted
=================================
Ethernet3/0/3 Trusted
The above information indicates that the Ethernet 3/0/3 port is a trusted port.
display dhcp-snooping vlan
Syntax display dhcp-snooping vlan { vlan-list | all }
View Any view
Parameter vlan-list: Displays the VLAN lists in the specified VLAN range, in the format of
vlan-list = { vlan-id [ to vlan-id ] }&<1-10>. where, vlan-id is in the range of 1 to
4094, and &<1-10> means that you can specify up to 10 VLANs or VLAN ranges
for this argument.
all: Displays all the IP-MAC mapping relations recorded by the
DHCP-Snooping-enabled switch.
Description Use the display dhcp-snooping vlan command to display the IP-MAC mapping
relations recorded by the DHCP-Snooping-enabled switch in the specified VLAN.
Example # Display the IP-MAC mapping relations recorded by the DHCP-Snooping-enabled
switch in VLAN 2.
<SW7750> display dhcp-snooping vlan 2
DHCP snooping is enabled globally.
The client binding table for untrusted ports on the VLANs assigned.
display ip source static binding 751
Type : D--Dynamic , S--Static
Type IP Address MAC Address Lease VLAN Interface
==== =============== =============== ========= ==== =================
D 3.3.3.2 0012-3f83-6eef 20 2 Ethernet3/0/1
--- 1 dhcp snooping item(s) found ---
display ip source static binding
Syntax display ip source static binding [ vlan vlan-id | interface interface-type
interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameter vlan-id: ID of the VLAN whose IP static binding entries are to be displayed.
interface-type interface-number: Type and number of the port whose IP static
binding entries are to be displayed.
Description Use the display ip source static binding command to display the IP static
binding entries configured. If you specify a VLAN, all the IP static binding entries
for the specified VLAN will be displayed. If you specify a port, all the IP static
binding entries for the specified port will be displayed.
Example # Display all IP static binding entries configured.
<SW7750> display ip source static binding
Type IP Address MAC Address Lease VLAN Interface
==== =============== =============== ========= ==== =================
S 192.168.0.25 0015-e20f-0101 infinit 1 Ethernet2/0/2
S 192.168.0.58 0001-e201-4f01 infinit 1 Ethernet2/0/3
S 192.168.0.101 000f-0101-0204 infinit 1 Ethernet2/0/2
S 192.168.0.122 000f-e20f-21a3 infinit 1 Ethernet2/0/3
S 192.168.0.144 0015-e943-712f infinit 1 Ethernet2/0/2
--- 5 static binding item(s) found ---
ip check source ip-address
Syntax ip check source ip-address [ mac-address ]
undo ip check source ip-address [ mac-address ]
View Ethernet port view
Parameter mac-address: Enables IP filtering based on the source MAC address of the
packets.
Description Use the ip check source ip-address command to enable the filtering of the IP
packets received through the current port based on the source IP address of the
packets.
752 CHAPTER 56: DHCP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo ip check source ip-address command to disable the filtering of
the IP packets received through the current port based on the source IP address of
the packets.
Use the ip check source ip-address mac-address command to enable the
filtering of the IP packets received through the current port based on the source IP
address and source MAC address of the packets.
Use the undo ip check source ip-address mac-address command to disable
the filtering of the IP packets received through the current port based on the
source IP address and source MAC address of the packets.
By default, the filtering of the IP packets received on a port based on the source IP
address and/or source MAC address of the packets is disabled.
Example # Enable the filtering of the IP packets received through port Ethernet 2/0/11
based on the source IP address of the packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/11
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/11] ip check source ip-address
ip source static binding
Syntax ip source static binding ip-address ip-address [ mac-address mac-address ]
undo ip source static binding ip-address ip-address
View Ethernet port view
Parameter ip-address ip-address: Specifies the IP address to be statically bound.
mac-address mac-address: Specifies the MAC address to be statically bound.
Description Use the ip source static binding ip-address command to configure the static
binding among source IP address, source MAC address, and the port number so as
to generate static binding entries.
Use the undo ip source static binding ip-address command to remove the
static binding among source IP address, source MAC address, and the port.
By default, no binding among source IP address, source MAC address, and the
port number is configured.
Example # Configure static binding among source IP address, source MAC address, and
Ethernet 2/0/3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/3
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/3] ip source static binding ip-address 1.1.1.1 mac-address 0015-e20f-0101
reset dhcp-snooping 753
reset dhcp-snooping
Syntax reset dhcp-snooping [ ip-address ]
View User view
Parameter ip-address: Clears the IP-MAC mapping relations recorded by the
DHCP-Snooping-enabled switch.
Description Use the reset dhcp-snooping command to clear the specified IP-MAC mapping
relation or all the IP-MAC mapping relations recorded by the
DHCP-Snooping-enabled switch.
Related commands: dhcp-server, display dhcp-server.
Example # Clear the 10.1.1.1-MAC mapping relation recorded by the
DHCP-Snooping-enabled switch.
<SW7750> reset dhcp-snooping 10.1.1.1
754 CHAPTER 56: DHCP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
ACL COMMANDS
57
n Type A I/O Modules include 3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A, 3C16858, 3C16859,
3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24, 3C16858, and 3C16859.
acl
Syntax acl { number acl-number | name acl-name [ advanced | basic | link | user ] } [
match-order { config | auto } ]
undo acl { number acl-number | name acl-name | all }
View System view
Parameter number acl-number: Specifies the number of an access control list (ACL) in the
range of:
■ 2,000 to 2,999: identifies basic ACLs.
■ 3,000 to 3,999: identifies advanced ACLs (ACL 3998 and ACL 3999 are
reserved for cluster management, and you cannot configure them.).
■ 4,000 to 4,999: identifies layer 2 ACLs.
■ 5,000 to 5,999: identifies user-defined ACLs.
acl-name: ACL name, a string of 1 to 32 characters, which must be started with an
English letter (i.e., a-z or A-Z), and there should not be a space or quotation mark
in it; case insensitive, and you cannot use the word all as the ACL name in case of
confusion.
advanced: Advanced ACL.
basic: Basic ACL.
link: Layer 2 ACL.
user: User-defined ACL..
config: When matching ACL rules, the user’s configuration order is employed.
auto: When matching ACL rules, depth first order is employed.
all: Cancels all ACLs (including those identified by a number or a name).
Description Use the acl command to define an ACL and enter the corresponding ACL view.
756 CHAPTER 57: ACL COMMANDS
Use the undo acl command to delete all entries of an ACL identified by a number
or a name, or the entire ACL.
By default, ACL rules are matched according to the configured order (config).
After entering the corresponding ACL view, you can use the rule command to add
entries to the ACL (use the quit command to quit ACL view).
n User-defined ACL can only be activated on the I/O Modules other than Type A.
You can use the match-order keyword to specify whether to use the configured
order or "depth-first" order (rules with smaller ranges are matched first) to match
rules. If neither match orders are specified, the configured match order will be
adopted.
You cannot modify the match order for an ACL once you have specified it, unless
you delete all the entries of the ACL, and specify the match order over again.
The ACL match order feature is effective only when the ACL is referenced by
software for data filtering and traffic classification.
Related command: rule (Basic ACL), rule (Advanced ACL), rule (Layer 2 ACL), rule (user-defined
ACL), and acl mode.
Example # Define rules for ACL 2000, and specify "depth-first" order as the rule match
order.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl number 2000 match-order auto
acl mode
Syntax acl mode { ip-based | link-based }
View System view
Parameter ip-based: Performs traffic classification based on Layer 3 information.
link-based: Performs traffic classification based on Layer 2 information.
Description Use the acl mode command to set the traffic classification mode for the device.
By default, traffic classification is performed based on Layer 3 information.
Related command: acl.
n This configuration is only effective on Type A I/O Modules.
Example # Specify to perform traffic classification based on Layer 3 information.
acl order 757
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl mode ip-based
acl order
Syntax acl order { auto | first-config-first-match | last-config-first-match }
View System view
Parameter auto: Specifies the ACL rules sent to hardware are match according to the
depth-first order.
first-config-first-match: Specifies the ACL rules sent to hardware are matched
according to the sending order: first sent, first matched.
last-config-first-match: Specifies the ACL rules sent to hardware are matched
according to the sending order: last sent, first matched.
Description Use the acl order command to set the match order for the ACL rules sent to
hardware.
By default, the configured ACL rules sent to hardware take effect in the depth-first
order.
Use the acl match-order { config | auto } command to set the match order of
ACL rules when they are configured (before they are sent to hardware). While use
the acl order command is to set the match order of ACL rules after they are
configured (after they are sent to hardware).
Example # Configure the match order of ACL rules sent to hardware as
first-config-first-match order.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl order first-config-first-match
display acl config
Syntax display acl config { all | acl-number | acl-name }
View Any view
Parameter all: Displays all ACLs (including those identified by a number or a name).
acl-number: Sequence number of the ACL to be displayed. It can be a number
chosen from 2000~5999.
acl-name: Name of the ACL to be displayed. It is a case insensitive character string
started with an English letter (a-z or A-Z), and there should not be a space or
758 CHAPTER 57: ACL COMMANDS
quotation mark in it; and the word all is not allowed to use in the ACL name to
avoid confusion.
Description Using the display acl config command, you can view the detailed configuration
information of an ACL, including every subrule, sequence number and the times
matched with this rule.
The matched times displayed by this command is software matched times, namely,
the matched times of ACL to be processed by switch CPU. You can use the
traffic-statistic command to calculate the matched times of hardware during
packet-forwarding. You can use the display qos-interface traffic-statistic
command to view the calculation result. See traffic-statistic on page 803 and
display qos-interface traffic-statistic on page 783 for more information.
Example # Display all content of ACL.
<SW7750> display acl config all
Basic ACL 2000, 1 rule,
rule 0 permit source 1.1.1.1 0 (0 times matched)
display acl config statistics
Syntax display acl config statistics
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the command display acl config statistics to display the statistics of the
current configured ACL rules, including the basic, advanced, Layer 2 and
user-defined ACL rules number, and the total number of ACL rules configured by
the system.
Example # Display statistics information about the current configured ACL rules.
<SW7750> display acl config statistics
The configured rule statistics:
Basic rule(s): 5
Advanced rule(s): 132
Link rule(s): 4
User rule(s): 2
Total 143 rule(s) configured
display acl mode
Syntax display acl mode
View Any view
display acl order 759
Parameter None
Description Use the display acl mode command to view the ACL running mode chosen by
the switch for filtering the traffic.
Related command: acl mode.
Example # Display the ACL running mode chosen by the switch.
<SW7750> display acl mode
The current acl mode: ip-based.
display acl order
Syntax display acl order
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display acl order command to display the match order of the ACL rules
sent to a port.
Related command: acl order.
Example # Display the match order of ACL rules sent to a port
<SW7750> display acl order
the current order is auto
display acl remaining entry
Syntax display acl remaining entry slot slot-number
View Any view
Parameter slot-number: Number of a slot. The number 0 indicates the Fabric.
Description Use the display acl remaining entry slot command to display the remaining
ACL entries on a specified slot. The displayed content includes the entry resource
type, total entries resource number, reserved entries number for system ACL,
number of configured ACL entries, number of remaining ACL entries, and the
corresponding start port number and end port number of each type of entry.
Example # Display the remaining ACL resource on the module in slot 3.
<SW7750> display acl remaining entry slot 3
Slot: 3
Resource Total Reserved Configured Remaining Start End
760 CHAPTER 57: ACL COMMANDS
Type Number Number Number Number Port Name Port Name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
MASK 16 6 1 9 GE3/0/1 GE3/0/1
RULE 128 17 1 110 GE3/0/1 GE3/0/1
METER 128 11 1 116 GE3/0/1 GE3/0/1
COUNTER 128 14 1 113 GE3/0/1 GE3/0/1
MASK 16 6 1 9 GE3/0/2 GE3/0/2
RULE 128 17 1 110 GE3/0/2 GE3/0/2
METER 128 11 1 116 GE3/0/2 GE3/0/2
COUNTER 128 14 1 113 GE3/0/2 GE3/0/2
Table 120 Field descriptions of the display acl remaining entry slot command
Field Description
Resource Type Entry resource type
Total Number Total entries resource number
Reserved Number Number of entries reserved for system ACL during initiation
Configured Number Number of entries used by the ACL configured by users
Remaining Number Number of remaining entries
Start Port Name The corresponding start port number of each type of entry
End Port Name The corresponding end port number of each type of entry
display acl running-packet-filter
Syntax display acl running-packet-filter { all | interface interface-type
interface-number }
View Any view
Parameter all: Represents all the ACLs to be displayed (including those identified by a
number or a name).
interface interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.
Description Use the display acl running -packet-filter command to view the information
of the activated ACL. The displayed content includes the interface on which ACL is
activated, the activation direction, ACL name, ACL rule number and activation
status.
Example # Display the information of the activated ACL of all interfaces.
<SW7750> display acl running-packet-filter all
Ethernet3/0/1
Inbound:
Acl 2000 rule 0 running
display time-range
Syntax display time-range { all | time-name }
View Any view
display time-range 761
Parameter all: Specifies to display all time ranges.
time-name: Name of a time range, a case insensitive string that starts with an
English letter a-z or A-Z and contains up to 32 characters. To avoid confusion, you
are not allowed to use the word all in the time range name.
Description Use the display time-range command to view the configuration and status of
the current time range. For an active time range, this command displays "Active";
for an inactive time range, this command displays "Inactive".
Note that there is a delay (about 1 minute) when the system updates the ACL
status. And the display time-range command will judge according to the current
time. Therefore, sometimes you may find that a time range is active while the ACL
referencing the time range is not activated by using the display time-range
command. This is natural.
Related command: time-range.
Example # Display all time ranges.
<SW7750> display time-range all
Current time is 14:36:36 4-3-2003 Thursday
Time-range : hhy ( Inactive )
from 08:30 2-5-2005 to 18:00 2-19-2005
Time-range : hhy1 ( Inactive )
from 08:30 2-5-2003 to 18:00 2-19-2003
Total Time-range : 2
Table 121 Field descriptions of the display time-range command
Field Description
Current time is 14:36:36 4-3-2003 Thursday System time
Time-range : hhy ( Inactive ) Time range hhy. "Inactive" indicates that this
time range is currently in the inactive state
from 08:30 2-5-2005 to 18:00 2-19-2005
(while "Active" indicates that the time range
is in the active state), and the time range is
from 8:30 February 5, 2005 to 18:00 February
19 2005.
Total Time-range Number of time ranges defined in the system.
# Display the time range named "tm1".
<SW7750> display time-range tm1
Current time is 14:37:31 4-3-2003 Thursday
Time-range : tm1 ( Inactive )
from 08:30 2-5-2005 to 18:00 2-19-2005
Table 122 Description of the fields of the display time-range command
Field Description
Current time is 14:36:36 4-3-2003 Thursday The current time of the system.
762 CHAPTER 57: ACL COMMANDS
Table 122 Description of the fields of the display time-range command
Field Description
Time-range : tm1 ( Inactive ) Time range tm1. "Inactive" indicates that this
time range is currently in the inactive state
from 08:30 2-5-2005 to 18:00 2/19/2005
(while "Active" indicates that the time range
is in the active state), and the time range is
from 8:30 February 5, 2005 to 18:00 February
19 2005.
packet-filter
Syntax The command line format for Type A I/O Modules:
packet-filter { inbound | outbound } acl-rule [ system-index system-index ] [
not-care-for-interface ]
undo packet-filter { inbound | outbound } acl-rule [ not-care-for-interface ]
The command line format for the I/O Modules other than Type A:
packet-filter inbound acl-rule [ system-index system-index ]
undo packet-filter inbound acl-rule
n Combined activating of IP ACL and Link ACL is supported by the I/O Modules other
than Type A. But the total character number of the fields defined by IP ACL and
Link ACL can not exceed 32 characters; otherwise the ACL can not be activated.
View QoS view
Parameter inbound: Specifies to filter packets received on the port.
outbound: Specifies to filter packets sent through the port.
acl-rule: Applied ACL rules, which can be the combination of different types of
ACL rules. Table 123and Table 125 describe the ACL combinations on Type A I/O
Modules and the corresponding parameter description. Table 124 and Table 125
describe the ACL combinations on I/O Modules other than Type A and the
corresponding parameter description.
Table 123 Combined application of ACLs on Type A I/O Modules
Combination mode Form of acl-rule
Apply all rules in an IP type ACL separately ip-group { acl-number | acl-name }
Apply one rule in an IP type ACL separately ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
rule-id
Apply all rules in a link type ACL separately link-group { acl-number | acl-name }
Apply one rule in a link type separately link-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
rule-id
packet-filter 763
Table 124 Combined application of ACLs on I/O Modules other than Type A.
Combination mode Form of acl-rule
Apply all rules in an IP type ACL separately ip-group { acl-number | acl-name }
Apply one rule in an IP type ACL separately ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
rule-id
Apply all rules in a link type ACL separately link-group { acl-number | acl-name }
Apply one rule in a link type separately link-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
rule-id
Apply all rules in a user-defined ACL user-group { acl-number | acl-name }
separately
Apply one rule in a user-defined ACL user-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
separately rule-id
Apply one rule in an IP type ACL and one rule ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
in a Link type ACL simultaneously rule-id link-group { acl-number | acl-name }
rule rule-id
Table 125 Parameters description of ACL combinations
Parameter Description
ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } Basic and advanced ACL.
acl-number: ACL number, ranging from 2,000
to 3,999.
acl-name: ACL name, case insensitive string,
up to 32 characters long, beginning with an
English letter (a to z or A to Z), without space
or quotation mark.
link-group { acl-number | acl-name } Layer 2 ACL
acl-number: ACL number, ranging from 4,000
to 4,999.
acl-name: ACL name, case insensitive string,
up to 32 characters long, beginning with an
English letter (a to z or A to Z), without space
or quotation mark.
user-group { acl-number | acl-name } User-defined ACL
acl-number: ACL number, ranging from 5,000
to 5,999.
acl-name: ACL name, case insensitive string,
up to 32 characters long, beginning with an
English letter (a to z or A to Z), without space
or quotation mark.
rule-id Number of the ACL rule, ranging from 0 to
127.
If this argument is not specified, all rules in the
specified ACL will be applied.
system-index: Specifies an interior index value which is used when an ACL rule is
applied to the port. The index value ranges from 0 to 4294,967,295. This keyword
is only available when the ACL rule number is specified in the command. After the
specified ACL takes effect, there are three scenarios when you input the index
value:
■ If you do not input an index value or the index value you input is 0, the system
will automatically assign an index whose value is greater than 0;
764 CHAPTER 57: ACL COMMANDS
■ If the input index value is not 0 and does not conflict with the interior index
used by the system, the system will adopt the index value input by you;
■ If the input index value is not 0 but conflicts with the interior index used by the
system, the system will reassign an index value.
When the specified ACL rule is not effective, the system will adopt the index value
input by you.
not-care-for-interface: As for non-48-port interface module, the packet-filtering
function will take place on the interface module where the current port resides
after the parameter is chosen. As for the 48-port interface, if the number of the
current port belong to the range of 1 to 24, the packet filtering will take effect on
port 1 to port 24 after the parameter is chosen; if the number of the current port
belong to the range of 25 to 48, the packet filtering will take effect on port 25 to
port 48 after the parameter is chosen.
Description Use the packet-filter command to activate ACL on a port to filter packets.
Use the undo packet-filter command to cancel it.
Example # Apply ACL 2000 on Ethernet 2/0/1 to filter packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qosb-Ethernet2/0/1] packet-filter inbound ip-group 2000
reset acl counter
Syntax reset acl counter { all | acl-number | acl-name }
View User view
Parameter all: All ACLs (including those identified by a number or a name).
acl-number: The sequence number of an ACL, ranging from 2000~3999.
acl-name: ACL name, a case insensitive string, 1 to 32 characters, which must start
with an English letter (a-z or A-Z), and there should not be a space or quotation
mark in it; key word all is not allowed to use in the ACL name to avoid confusion.
Description Use the reset acl counter command to clear ACL statistics.
Table 126 The comparison between reset commands of statistics information
Command Function
reset acl counter Reset the statistics information of the ACL which is used to filter or
classify the data treated by the software of a switch. The case
includes: ACL cited by route policy function, ACL used for controlling
logon user, etc.
rule (Basic ACL) 765
Table 126 The comparison between reset commands of statistics information
Command Function
reset traffic-statistic Reset statistic information of traffic. This command is applicable to the
ACL which is used to filter or classify the data transmitted by the
hardware of a switch. Commonly, this command is used to reset the
statistics information recorded by the traffic-statistic command.
Example # Clear the statistic information of ACL 2000.
<SW7750> reset acl counter 2000
rule (Basic ACL)
Syntax rule [ rule-id ] { permit | deny } [ source { source-addr wildcard | any } | fragment
| time-range time-name ]*
undo rule rule-id [ source | fragment | time-range ]*
View Basic ACL view
Parameter rule-id: ACL rule ID, in the range of 0 to 127.
deny: Drops packets that satisfy the condition.
permit: Permits packets that satisfy the condition to pass.
fragment: Specifies that the rule takes effect on non-initial fragment packets.
source { sour-addr sour-wildcard | any }: Specifies the source address information
in the rule. sour-addr is used to specify the source IP address of the packet,
expressed in dotted decimal notation. sour-wildcard is the wildcard mask for the
source subnet mask of the packet, expressed in dotted decimal notation. For
example, you need to input 0.0.255.255 for the subnet mask 255.255.0.0. You
can set sour-wildcard to 0 to represent the host IP address. any is used to
represent any arbitrary IP address.
time-range time-name: Specifies a time range within which the rule is valid.
time-name is the time range name, a case insensitive string of 1 to 32 characters,
must start with an English letter a to A or A to Z. To avoid confusion, you are not
allowed to use the word all in the time range name.
Description Use the rule command to define an ACL rule.
Use the undo rule command to delete an ACL rule or the attribute information
of an ACL rule.
Before you can delete a rule, you need to specify the rule ID. If you do not know
the rule ID, you can view it by the display acl command.
In the case that you specify the rule ID when defining a rule:
766 CHAPTER 57: ACL COMMANDS
■ If the rule corresponding to the specified rule ID already exists, you will edit the
rule, and the modified part in the rule will replace the original content, while
other parts remain unchanged.
■ If the rule corresponding to the specified rule ID does not exists, you will create
and define a new rule.
■ The content of a newly created rule must not be identical with the content of
any existing rule; otherwise the rule creation will fail, and the system will
prompt that the rule already exists.
If you do not specify a rule ID, you will create and define a new rule, and the
system will assign an ID for the rule automatically.
n Type A I/O Modules do not support to apply ACL rules configured with fragment
to hardware..
Example # Define a rule to deny the packets whose source IP addresses are 1.1.1.1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl number 2000
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule deny source 1.1.1.1 0
rule (Advanced ACL)
Syntax rule [ rule-id ] { permit | deny } rule-string
undo rule rule-id [ source | destination | source-port | destination-port |
icmp-type | precedence | tos | dscp | fragment | time-range ]*
View Advanced ACL view
Parameter rule-id: ACL rule ID, in the range of 0 to 127.
deny: Drops packets that satisfy the condition.
permit: Permits packets that satisfy the condition to pass.
rule-string: Rule information, which can be combination of the parameters
described in Table 127. You need to configure the protocol argument in the rule
information before you can configure other arguments.
Table 127 Rule information
Parameter Type Function Description
protocol Protocol type Type of the protocols When expressed in
carried by IP numerals, the value
range is 1 to 255.
When expressed with
a name, the value can
be GRE, ICMP, IGMP,
IP, IPinIP, OSPF, TCP,
and UDP.
rule (Advanced ACL) 767
Table 127 Rule information
Parameter Type Function Description
source { sour-addr Source address Specifies the source sour-addr
sour-wildcard | any } information address information in sour-wildcard is used
the rule to specify the source
address of the packet,
expressed in dotted
decimal notation.
any represents any
source address.
destination { Destination address Specifies the dest-addr
dest-addr information destination address dest-wildcard is used
dest-wildcard | any } information in the to specify the
rule destination address of
the packet, expressed
in dotted decimal
notation.
any represents any
destination address.
precedence Packet precedence IP priority Value range: 0 to 7
precedence
tos tos Packet precedence ToS priority Value range: 0 to 15
dscp dscp Packet precedence DSCP priority Value range: 0 to 63
fragment Fragment information Specifies that the rule -
is effective for
non-initial fragment
packets
time-range Time range Specifies the time time-name is the time
time-name information range in which the range name, a case
rule is active insensitive string of 1
to 32 characters, must
start with an English
letter a to A or A to Z.
To avoid confusion,
you are not allowed
to use the word all in
the time range name.
n sour-wildcard/dest-wildcard is the wildcard mask of the source/destination subnet
mask. For example, you need to input 0.0.255.255 to specify the subnet mask
255.255.0.0. The arguments can be set as 0 to represent the host IP address.
To define DSCP priority, you can directly input a value ranging from 0 to 63, or
input a keyword listed in Table 128.
Table 128 Description of DSCP values
Keyword DSCP value in decimal DSCP value in binary
ef 46 101110
af11 10 001010
af12 12 001100
af13 14 001110
af21 18 010010
af22 20 010100
768 CHAPTER 57: ACL COMMANDS
Table 128 Description of DSCP values
Keyword DSCP value in decimal DSCP value in binary
af23 22 010110
af31 26 011010
af32 28 011100
af33 30 011110
af41 34 100010
af42 36 100100
af43 38 100110
cs1 8 001000
cs2 16 010000
cs3 24 011000
cs4 32 100000
cs5 40 101000
cs6 48 110000
cs7 56 111000
be (default) 0 000000
To define the IP precedence, you can directly input a value ranging from 0 to 7, or
input a keyword listed in the following table.
Table 129 Description of IP precedence value
IP Precedence value in IP Precedence value in
Keyword decimal binary
routine 0 000
priority 1 001
immediate 2 010
flash 3 011
flash-override 4 100
critical 5 101
internet 6 110
network 7 111
To define the ToS value, you can directly input a value ranging from 0 to 15, or
input a keyword listed in the following table.
Table 130 Description of ToS value
Keyword ToS value in decimal ToS value in binary
normal 0 0000
min-monetary-cost 1 0001
max-reliability 2 0010
max-throughput 4 0100
min-delay 8 1000
If the protocol type is TCP or UDP, you can also define the following information:
rule (Advanced ACL) 769
Table 131 TCP/UDP-specific rule information
Parameter Type Function Description
source-port operator Source port(s) Defines the source The value of operator
port1 [ port2 ] port information of can be lt (less than),
UDP/TCP packets gt (greater than), eq
(equal to), neq (not
destination-port Destination port(s) Defines the
equal to) or range
operator port1 [ port2 destination port
(within the range of)
] information of
Only the range
UDP/TCP packets
requires two port
numbers as the
operands, and other
operators require only
one port number as
the operand.
port1 and port2:
TCP/UDP port
number(s), expressed
with name(s) or
numerals; when
expressed with
numerals, the value
range is 0 to 65,535.
established TCP connection Indicates the rule is TCP-specific
established" flag only valid to the first argument
SYN packet (when
TCP connection
began)
n Only Type A I/O Modules support the "range" operation on the TCP/UDP port.
If the protocol type is ICMP, you can also define the following information:
Table 132 ICMP-specific rule information
Parameter Type Function Description
icmp-type icmp-type Type and message Specifies the type and icmp-type: ICMP
icmp-code code information of message code message type,
ICMP packets information of ICMP ranging 0 to 255
packets in the rule
icmp-code: ICMP
message code,
ranging 0 to 255
If the protocol type is ICMP, you can also directly input the ICMP message name
after the icmp-type argument. Table 133 describes some common ICMP
messages.
Table 133 ICMP messages
Name ICMP TYPE ICMP CODE
echo Type=8 Code=0
echo-reply Type=0 Code=0
fragmentneed-DFset Type=3 Code=4
host-redirect Type=5 Code=1
host-tos-redirect Type=5 Code=3
host-unreachable Type=3 Code=1
770 CHAPTER 57: ACL COMMANDS
Table 133 ICMP messages
Name ICMP TYPE ICMP CODE
information-reply Type=16 Code=0
information-request Type=15 Code=0
net-redirect Type=5 Code=0
net-tos-redirect Type=5 Code=2
net-unreachable Type=3 Code=0
parameter-problem Type=12 Code=0
port-unreachable Type=3 Code=3
protocol-unreachable Type=3 Code=2
reassembly-timeout Type=11 Code=1
source-quench Type=4 Code=0
source-route-failed Type=3 Code=5
timestamp-reply Type=14 Code=0
timestamp-request Type=13 Code=0
ttl-exceeded Type=11 Code=0
Description Use the rule command to define an ACL rule.
Use the undo rule command to delete an ACL rule or the attribute information
of an ACL rule.
Before you can delete a rule, you need to specify the rule ID. If you do not know
the rule ID, you can view it by the display acl command.
In the case that you specify the rule ID when defining a rule:
■ If the rule corresponding to the specified rule ID already exists, you will edit the
rule, and the modified part in the rule will replace the original content, while
other parts remain unchanged.
■ If the rule corresponding to the specified rule ID does not exists, you will create
and define a new rule.
■ The content of a newly created rule must not be identical with the content of
any existing rule; otherwise the rule creation will fail, and the system will
prompt that the rule already exists.
If you do not specify a rule ID, you will create and define a new rule, and the
system will assign an ID for the rule automatically.
n Type A I/O Modules do not support to apply ACL rules configured with tos tos, or
fragment to hardware.
Example # Define a rule to permit TCP packets from hosts in the network segment of
129.9.0.0 to hosts in the network of 202.38.160.0 and with the port number of
80 to pass.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl number 3101
rule (Layer 2 ACL) 771
[SW7750-acl-adv-3101] rule permit tcp source 129.9.0.0 0.0.255.255 d
estination 202.38.160.0 0.0.0.255 destination-port eq 80
rule (Layer 2 ACL)
Syntax rule [ rule-id ] { permit | deny } [ rule-string ]
undo rule rule-id
View Layer 2 ACL view
Parameter rule-id: ACL rule ID, in the range of 0 to 127.
deny: Drops packets that satisfy the condition.
permit: Permits packets that satisfy the condition to pass.
rule-string: ACL rule information, which can be combination of the parameters
described in Table 134.
Table 134 Rule information
Parameter Type Function Description
protocol-type Protocol type Type of the protocols protocol-type: the
carried by IP value can be arp, rarp,
ipx, nbx,
pppoe-control, and
pppoe-data.
format-type Link layer Defines the link layer format-type: the value
encapsulation type encapsulation type in can be 802.3/802.2,
the rule 802.3, ether_ii, or
snap.
ingress { { Source MAC address Specifies the source source-mac-addr:
source-vlan-id | information MAC address range in source MAC address,
source-mac-addr [ the rule in the format of
source-mac-mask ] }* H-H-H
| any }
source-mac-mask:
source MAC address
mask, in the format of
H-H-H, defaults to
ffff-ffff-ffff
source-vlan-id: source
VLAN ID, in the range
of 1 to 4,094
any indicates all
packets received from
all ports.
772 CHAPTER 57: ACL COMMANDS
Table 134 Rule information
Parameter Type Function Description
egress { Destination MAC Specifies the dest-mac-addr:
dest-mac-addr [ address information destination MAC destination MAC
dest-mac-mask ] | any address range in the address, in the format
} rule of H-H-H
dest-mac-mask:
destination MAC
address mask, in the
format of H-H-H,
defaults to ffff-ffff-ffff
any indicates all
packets forwarded by
all ports.
cos cos Priority Defines the 802.1p cos: ranges from 0 to
priority of the rule 7
time-range Time range Specifies the time time-name: name of
time-name information range in which the the time range; a case
rule is active insensitive string of 1
to 32 characters, must
start with an English
letter a to z or A to Z.
To avoid confusion,
you are not allowed
to use the word all in
the time range name.
To define the CoS value, you can directly input a value ranging from 0 to 7, or
input a keyword listed in the following table.
Table 135 Description of CoS value
Keyword CoS value in decimal CoS value in binary
best-effort 0 000
background 1 001
spare 2 010
excellent-effort 3 011
controlled-load 4 100
video 5 101
voice 6 110
network-management 7 111
Description Use the rule command to define an ACL rule.
Use the undo rule command to delete an ACL rule.
Before you can delete a rule, you must specify the rule ID. If you do not know the
rule ID, you can view it by using the display acl command.
In the case that you specify the rule ID when defining a rule:
■ If the rule corresponding to the specified rule ID already exists, you will edit the
rule, and the modified part in the rule will replace the original content, while
other parts remain unchanged.
rule (user-defined ACL) 773
■ If the rule corresponding to the specified rule ID does not exists, you will create
and define a new rule.
■ The content of a newly created rule must not be identical with the content of
any existing rule; otherwise the rule creation will fail, and the system will
prompt that the rule already exists.
If you do not specify a rule ID, you will create and define a new rule, and the
system will assign an ID for the rule automatically.
Example # Define an ACL to deny the packets with the source MAC address being
000d-88f5-97ed, the destination MAC address being 0011-4301-991e, and the
802.1p priority being 3, to pass.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] acl number 4000
[SW7750-acl-link-4000] rule deny cos 3 ingress 000d-88f5-97ed ffff-f
fff-ffff egress 0011-4301-991e ffff-ffff-ffff
rule (user-defined ACL)
Syntax rule [ rule-id ] { permit | deny } { rule-string rule-mask offset } &<1-8> [
time-range time-name ]
undo rule rule-id
View User-defined ACL view
Parameter rule-id: ACL rule ID, in the range of 0 to 127.
deny: Drops packets that satisfy the condition.
permit: Permits packets that satisfy the condition to pass.
rule-string: User-defined string of the rule. It must be an even number containing
2 to 160 hexadecimal characters.
rule-mask: User-defined mask of the rule. It is used to perform the logical AND
operations with packets and must be an even number containing 2 to 160
hexadecimal characters. Note that its length must be the same with that of
rule-string.
offset: Mask offset of the rule. It specifies a byte, through its offset from the
packet header, in the packet as the starting point to perform logical AND
operations. It ranges from 0 to 79 bytes, and the maximum value becomes one
byte less when the value of rule-string (and rule-mask) has two more characters.
For example, when rule-string and rule-mask contains two characters respectively,
the maximum value of offset is 79 bytes; when the former contains four
characters respectively, the maximum value of offset is 78 bytes, and so on.
&<1-8>: At most eight rule-string rule-mask offsets can be defined at one time.
774 CHAPTER 57: ACL COMMANDS
time-name: Specifies a time range within which the rule is valid. time-name: Name
of a time range, a case insensitive string that starts with an English letter (a-z or
A-Z) and contains up to 32 characters. To avoid confusion, you are not allowed to
use the word all in the time range name.
Description Use the rule command to define an ACL rule.
Use the undo rule command to delete an ACL rule or the attribute information
of an ACL rule.
Before you can delete a rule, you need to specify the rule ID. If you do not know
the rule ID, you can view it by the display acl command.
In the case that you specify the rule ID when defining a rule:
■ If the rule corresponding to the specified rule ID already exists, you will edit the
rule, and the modified part in the rule will replace the original content, while
other parts remain unchanged.
■ If the rule corresponding to the specified rule ID does not exists, you will create
and define a new rule.
■ The content of a newly created rule must not be identical with the content of
any existing rule; otherwise the rule modification or creation will fail, and the
system will prompt that the rule already exists.
If you do not specify a rule ID, you will create and define a new rule, and the
system will assign an ID for the rule automatically.
n Only I/O Modules other than Type A support the user-defined ACL.
Example # Define a rule to forbid all TCP packets to pass through.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] time-range t1 18:00 to 23:00 sat
[SW7750] acl number 5001
[SW7750-acl-user-5001] rule 25 deny 06 ff 27 time-range t1
time-range
Syntax time-range time-name { start-time to end-time days-of-the-week [ from
start-time start-date ] [ to end-time end-date ] | from start-time start-date [ to
end-time end-date ] | to end-time end-date }
undo time-range { time-name [ start-time to end-time days-of-the-week [ from
start-time start-date ] [ to end-time end-date ] | from start-time start-date [ to
end-time end-date ] | to end-time end-date ] | all }
View System view
time-range 775
Parameter time-name: Name of a time range, a case insensitive string that starts with an
English letter a-z or A-Z and contains up to 32 characters. To avoid confusion, you
are not allowed to use the word all in the time range name.
start-time: Start time of a special time range, in the form of hh:mm. Optional
argument.
end-time: End time of a special time range, in the form of hh:mm. Optional
argument.
days-of-the-week: Day of the week when the special time range is effective.
Optional argument. Available arguments and argument combinations are as
follows:
■ Numerals (0 to 6)
■ Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, and Sunday
■ Working days (Monday through Friday)
■ Off days (Saturday and Sunday)
■ Daily, namely everyday of the week
from start-time start-date: Specifies the start date of a special time range,
optional. In the form of hh:mm MM/DD/ YYYY, start-time start-date and end-time
end-date jointly define a date in which the special time range takes effect.
to end-time end-date: Specifies the end date of a special time range, optional. In
the form of hh:mm MM/DD/ YYYY, start-time start-date and end-time end-date
jointly define a date on which the special time range takes effect.
all: Deletes all time ranges.
Description Use the time-range command to define a time range.
Use the undo time-range command to delete a time range.
Use the undo time-range all command to delete all time ranges.
The time range defined by means of the time-range command can include
absolute time sections and periodic time sections. start-time and end-time
days-of-the-week jointly define a periodic time section, while start-time start-date
and end-time end-date jointly define an absolute time section.
If only a periodic time section is defined in a time range, the time range is active
only within the defined periodic time section.
If only an absolute time section is defined in a time, the time range is active only
within the defined absolute time section.
If both a periodic time section and an absolute time section are defined in a time
range, the time range is active only when the periodic time range and the absolute
time range are both matched. Assume that a time range defines an absolute time
section from 00:00 January 1, 2004 to 23:59 December 31, 2004, and a periodic
time section from 12:00 to 14:00 every Wednesday. This time range is active only
from 12:00 to 14:00 every Wednesday in 2004.
776 CHAPTER 57: ACL COMMANDS
The time ranges supported by the switch are within 1970/1/1 to 2100/12/31
(January 1, 1970 to December 31, 2100).
Example # Defines an absolute time section "test" that is effective from 00:00 January 1,
2000.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] time-range test from 00:00 2000/1/1
QOS COMMANDS
58
n ■ Type-A I/O Modules include 3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A, 3C16858,
3C16859, 3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24, 3C16858, and 3C16859.
■ On type-A I/O Modules, the prompt for QoS view is qoss; on non-type-A I/O
Modules, the prompt for QoS view is qosb.
display priority-trust
Syntax display priority-trust
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display priority-trust command to display the priority type according
to which the switch puts a packet into an output queue on a port.
Related command: priority-trust.
Example # Display the queue scheduling mode and the related parameters.
<SW7750> display priority-trust
Priority trust mode: local-precedence
The information above shows that the switch put a packet into an output queue
on a port according to the local precedence of the packet.
display qos cos-local-precedence-map
Syntax display qos cos-local-precedence-map
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display qos cos-local-precedence-map command to view the
"COS-to-local-precedence" mapping table.
778 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
Example # Display the "COS-to-local-precedence" mapping table.
<SW7750> display qos cos-local-precedence-map
cos-local-precedence-map:
cos : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
--------------------------------------------------------------------
local-precedence : 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7
display qos-interface all
Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] all
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port type and number.
Description Use the display qos-interface all command to view all the QoS configuration
of the ports. If you do not provide the interface-type interface-number argument,
this command will display the QoS parameter configuration of all the ports of the
switch; if you provide the interface-type interface-number argument, this
command will display QoS parameter configuration of the specified port.
Example # Display the QoS parameter configuration of all ports.
<SW7750> display qos-interface all
GigabitEthernet0/0/1:
Queue scheduling mode: strict-priority
COS configuration:
Config (max queues): 8
Schedule mode: strict
Egress port queue statistics(in bytes):
Priority CosQ Threshold Count Used(%):
0 2 18432 0 0
1 3 2560 0 0
2 4 2560 0 0
3 1 2560 0 0
4 7 2560 0 0
5 0 2560 0 0
6 5 2560 0 0
7 6 2560 0 0
common queue statistics(in bytes):
49152 0 0
GigabitEthernet0/0/2:
Queue scheduling mode: strict-priority
COS configuration:
---- More ----
display qos-interface line-rate
Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] line-rate
display qos-interface queue-scheduler 779
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port type and number.
Description Use the display qos-interface line-rate command to view the rate limit
configuration (including the outbound port and the limit rate) for the outbound
direction of a port or all the ports of a switch. If you do not specify the
interface-type interface-number argument, you will view the rate limit
configuration for the outbound direction of all the ports of a switch; if you specify
that argument, you will view the rate limit configuration for the outbound
direction of the specified port.
Example # Display the rate limit configuration of all ports.
<SW7750> display qos-interface line-rate
GigabitEthernet2/0/2: line-rate
Line rate: 3072 kbps
GigabitEthernet2/0/4: line-rate
Line rate: 5120 kbps
Table 136 Field descriptions of the display qos-interface line-rate command
Field Description
GigabitEthernet2/0/2: line-rate Rate limit configuration on GigabitEthernet
2/0/2:
Line rate: 3072 kbps
The maximum sum of all the packet rates on
GigabitEthernet 2/0/2 is 3,072 kbps.
display qos-interface queue-scheduler
Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] queue-scheduler
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port type and number.
Description Use the display qos-interface queue-scheduler command to display the
queue scheduling mode configuration of the specified port or all ports. If the
interface-type interface-number argument is not specified, you will view the
queue scheduling mode parameters of all the ports. If you specify the
interface-type interface-number argument, you will view the queue scheduling
mode parameter of the specified port.
Example # Display the queue scheduling mode parameter of GigabitEthernet 2/0/1.
<SW7750> display qos-interface gigabitethernet 2/0/1 queue-scheduler
GigabitEthernet2/0/1:
Queue scheduling mode: weighted round robin
weight of queue 1: 10
weight of queue 2: 5
weight of queue 3: 10
780 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
weight of queue 4: 10
weight of queue 5: 5
weight of queue 6: 10
weight of queue 7: 5
weight of queue 8: 10
COS configuration:
Config (max queues): 8
Schedule mode: weighted round-robin
Weighting (in packets):
COSQ 0 = 10 packets
COSQ 1 = 5 packets
COSQ 2 = 10 packets
COSQ 3 = 10 packets
COSQ 4 = 5 packets
COSQ 5 = 10 packets
COSQ 6 = 5 packets
COSQ 7 = 10 packets
Egress port queue statistics(in bytes):
Priority CosQ Threshold Count Used(%):
0 2 18432 0 0
1 0 2560 0 0
2 1 2560 0 0
3 3 2560 0 0
4 4 2560 0 0
5 5 2560 0 0
6 6 2560 0 0
7 7 2560 0 0
common queue statistics(in bytes):
49152 0 0
display qos-interface traffic-bandwidth
Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] traffic-bandwidth
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port type and number.
Description Use the display qos-interface traffic-bandwidth command to view the
configuration information about bandwidth guarantee.
Related command: traffic-bandwidth.
Example # Display the bandwidth guarantee parameters.
<SW7750> display qos-interface traffic-bandwidth
Ethernet2/0/1: traffic-bandwidth
Outbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running
Minimum guaranteed bandwidth: 64 Kbps
Maximum available bandwidth: 128 Kbps
Bandwidth weight: 20
display qos-interface traffic-limit 781
display qos-interface traffic-limit
Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] traffic-limit
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port type and number.
Description Use the display qos-interface traffic-limit command to view the traffic limit
configuration of a port or all the ports of a switch, including the applied ACLs for
traffic limit, committed average rate (CAR), and the corresponding actions.
Related command: traffic-limit.
Example # Display the traffic limit configuration.
<SW7750> display qos-interface traffic-limit
GigabitEthernet2/0/1: traffic-limit
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 3000 rule 1 running
Target rate: 20480 Kbps
Exceed action: remark-dscp 4
display qos-interface traffic-priority
Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] traffic-priority
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port type and number.
Description Use the display qos-interface traffic-priority command to view the traffic
priority configuration. The information displayed includes the ACL corresponding
to the traffic tagged with priority, priority type and value.
Related command: traffic-priority.
Example # Display the traffic priority configuration.
<SW7750> display qos-interface traffic-priority
Ethernet2/0/1: traffic-priority
Outbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running
Priority action: dscp be
display qos-interface traffic-red
Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] traffic-red
782 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port type and number.
Description Use the display qos-interface traffic-red command to view the RED
configuration.
Related command: traffic-red.
Example # Display the RED configuration.
<SW7750> display qos-interface traffic-red
Ethernet2/0/1: traffic-red
Outbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running
Queue length of start random discarding: 16 Kbyte
Queue length of stop random discarding: 32 Kbyte
Max probability of discarding: 20
display qos-interface traffic-redirect
Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] traffic-redirect
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port type and number.
Description Use the display qos-interface traffic-redirect command to view the
configuration of traffic redirect. The displayed content includes the corresponding
ACLs of the traffics to be redirected, and the port to which the traffic is redirected.
Related command: traffic-redirect.
Example # Display the configuration of traffic redirect.
<SW7750> display qos-interface traffic-redirect
GigabitEthernet2/0/1: traffic-redirect
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2002 rule 0 running
Redirected to: interface GigabitEthernet2/0/8
display qos-interface traffic-remark
Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] traffic-remark
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number:: Port type and number.
display qos-interface traffic-statistic 783
Description Use the display qos-interface traffic-remark command to display the
configuration of the traffic-based flexible QinQ function. The displayed
information includes the ACL rules used for traffic identifying and the ID of the
external VLAN tag.
Related command: traffic-remark.
Example # Display the configuration of traffic-based flexible QinQ.
<SW7750> display qos-interface traffic-remark
Ethernet2/0/1: traffic-remark
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 3000 rule 3 running
RemarkVlanId action: remark-vlan 25 uplink Ethernet 2/0/2 untag
ged
display qos-interface traffic-statistic
Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] traffic-statistic
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port type and number.
Description Use the display qos-interface traffic-statistic command to view the traffic
statistics information. The information displayed includes the ACL corresponding
to the traffic to be counted and the number of packets counted.
Related command: traffic-statistic.
Example # Display the traffic statistics information.
<SW7750> display qos-interface traffic-statistic
Ethernet2/0/1: traffic-statistic
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running
105 packets
inboundcar
Syntax inboundcar { enable | disable }
View System view
Parameters enable: Enables bidirectional CAR.
disable: Disables bidirectional CAR.
784 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
Description Use the inboundcar enable command to enable bidirectional CAR.
Use the inboundcar disable command to disable bidirectional CAR.
By default, bidirectional CAR is disabled.
n This command applies to only type-A I/O Modules. To make the configuration take
effect, reboot the switch.
With bidirectional CAR enabled, the switch considers an ACL rule applied to
different ports as different rules. As a result, an applied rule can occupy multiple
entries. If you enable CAR for traffic matching a certain rule on multiple ports, the
switch provides the specified bandwidth for the traffic matching the CAR rule on a
per-port basis.
With bidirectional CAR disabled, the switch considers an ACL rule applied to
different ports as the same rule. As a result, an applied rule occupies only one
entry. If you enable CAR for traffic matching a certain rule on multiple ports, the
switch provides the specified bandwidth for all the traffic matching the CAR rule
on these ports to share.
Suppose you want to allocate 2 Mbps of CAR bandwidth for the incoming traffic
matching ACL rule 0 and enable CAR on two ports with the traffic-limit
command.
■ If bidirectional CAR is enabled, each port guarantees 2 Mbps of bandwidth for
its incoming traffic matching ACL rule 0.
■ If bidirectional CAR is disabled, the switch guarantees 2 Mbps of bandwidth for
the traffic matching ACL rule 0 received on the two ports.
Examples # Enable bidirectional CAR.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] inboundcar enable
line-rate
Syntax line-rate [ kbps ] target-rate
undo line-rate
View QoS view
Parameter kbps: Specifies the rate unit as kbps when the rate limit function is configured.
target-rate: Total limit rate of all the packets sent by the port. If the kbps keyword
is specified, the rate is measured in kbps, in the range of 64 to 1,024,000 with the
granularity being 64. If the number you input is in the range of N*64 to (N+1)*64
(N is a natural number), the switch will set the value to (N+1)*64 kbps
automatically. If the kbps keyword is not specified, the rate is in the range of 1 to
1,000 in mbps.
priority 785
Description Use the line-rate command to limit the rate of the packets on the port.
Use the undo line-rate command to cancel the rate limit configuration on the
port.
n Only type-A I/O Modules support the rate limit configuration.
Example # Limit the rate of packets on GigabitEthernet 2/0/1 to 10 Mbps.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet2/0/1
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qosb-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] line-rate 10
priority
Syntax priority priority-level
undo priority
View Ethernet port view
Parameter priority-level: Priority value of the port, ranging from 0 to 7.
Description Use the priority command to configure the priority of the Ethernet port.
Use the undo priority command to restore the default priority of the Ethernet
port.
By default, the priority of a port is 0.
If the switch receives a packet without VLAN tags, the switch will tag the packet
with the default VLAN of the port receiving the packet. In this case the switch
assigns the port priority of the port receiving the packet to the 802.1p priority of
the VLAN tag in the packet.
The switch does not perform the operation above if it receives a packet with VLAN
tags.
Example # Set the local precedence of Ethernet 2/0/1 to 6.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] priority 6
priority-trust
Syntax priority-trust { dscp | ip-precedence | cos | local-precedence }
786 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
View System view
Parameter dscp: Puts a packet into the corresponding output queue on a port according to
the DSCP precedence.
ip-precedence: Puts a packet into the corresponding output queue on a port
according to the IP precedence.
cos: Puts a packet into the corresponding output queue on a port according to the
COS precedence.
local-precedence: Puts a packet into the corresponding output queue on a port
according to the local precedence.
Description Use the priority-trust command to specify the priority according to which the
switch puts a packet into the output queue on a port.
By default, the switch puts a packet into the output queue on a port according to
the local precedence of the packet.
You can use the priority-trust command to choose a packet precedence,
according to which the switch puts packets with different priorities into the
corresponding output queues during queue scheduling.
The switch ports support eight output queues with different levels of precedence.
The higher the precedence is, the earlier it will be delivered. The switch puts a
packet into an output queue on a port according to the precedence of the packet.
1 dscp precedence: dscp precedence value ranges from 0 to 63 inclusive, the
packets with precedence value from 0 to 7 are put into queue 0, and those with
precedence value from 8 to 15 are put into queue 1, and so on.
2 ip-precedence: ip-precedence value ranges from 0 to 7, the packets with
precedence value 0 are put into queue 0, and those with precedence value 1 are
put into queue 1, and so on.
3 cos precedence: cos precedence value ranges from 0 to 7, the packet whose
precedence value is 0 is put into queue 2, the packet whose precedence value is 1
is put into queue 0, the packet whose precedence value is 2 is put into queue 1.
As for the left precedence values, the queue number is equal to the precedence
value. For example, the packet whose precedence value is 3 is put into queue 3.
4 local-precedence: local-precedence value ranges from 0 to 7. The packet whose
precedence value is 0 is put into queue 0, and so on.
You can choose the corresponding packet precedence as the basis for putting a
packet into an output queue on a port as required.
Example # Specify the switch to put a packet into an output queue according to the DSCP
precedence of the packet.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] priority-trust dscp
qos 787
qos
Syntax qos
View Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description Use the qos command to enter QoS view and perform the corresponding QoS
configuration.
n Different I/O Modules of Switch 7750s support different QoS functions. You can
use "?" to query the supported QoS configurations after entering different QoS
views.
Example # Enter QoS view of a non-type-A I/O Module and query the QoS configuration
supported by the I/O Module.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qosb-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] ?
Qosb view commands:
display Display current system information
line-rate Limit the rate of the outbound packets of t
he
interface
mirrored-to Mirror the packets
msdp-tracert MSDP traceroute to source RP
packet-filter Filter packets based on acl
ping Send echo messages
queue-scheduler Specify queue scheduling mode and parameter
s
quit Exit from current command view
reset Reset operation
return Exit to User View
tracert Trace route function
traffic-limit Limit the rate of the packets
traffic-priority Specify new priority of the packets
traffic-redirect Redirect the packets
traffic-remark Remark vlan ID of the packets
traffic-statistic Count the packets
undo Cancel current setting
# Enter QoS view of a type-A I/O Module and query the QoS configuration
supported by the I/O Module.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 3/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet3/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qoss-Ethernet3/0/1]?
Qoss view commands:
788 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
display Display current system information
msdp-tracert MSDP traceroute to source RP
packet-filter Filter packets based on acl
ping Send echo messages
quit Exit from current command view
reset Reset operation
return Exit to User View
tracert Trace route function
traffic-bandwidth Guarantee the bandwidth of the packets
traffic-limit Limit the rate of the packets
traffic-priority Specify new priority of the packets
traffic-red Random early detect the packets
traffic-remark Remark vlan ID of the packets
traffic-statistic Count the packets
undo Cancel current setting
qos cos-local-precedence-map
Syntax qos cos-local-precedence-map cos0-map-local-prec cos1-map-local-prec
cos2-map-local-prec cos3-map-local-prec cos4-map-local-prec
cos5-map-local-prec cos6-map-local-prec cos7-map-local-prec
undo qos cos-local-precedence-map
View System view
Parameter cos0-map-local-prec: Local precedence to which the CoS 0 is to be mapped, in the
range of 0 to 7.
cos1-map-local-prec: Local precedence to which the CoS 1 is to be mapped, in the
range of 0 to 7.
cos2-map-local-prec: Local precedence to which the CoS 2 is to be mapped, in the
range of 0 to 7.
cos3-map-local-prec: Local precedence to which the CoS 3 is to be mapped, in the
range of 0 to 7.
cos4-map-local-prec: Local precedence to which the CoS 4 is to be mapped, in the
range of 0 to 7.
cos5-map-local-prec: Local precedence to which the CoS 5 is to be mapped, in the
range of 0 to 7.
cos6-map-local-prec: Local precedence to which the CoS 6 is to be mapped, in the
range of 0 to 7.
cos7-map-local-prec: Local precedence to which the CoS 7 is to be mapped, in the
range of 0 to 7.
Description Use the qos cos-local-precedence-map command to configure the
"CoS-to-local-precedence" mapping table.
queue-scheduler 789
Use the undo qos cos-local-precedence-map command to restore the default
values.
The following is the default "CoS-to-local-precedence" mapping table.
Table 137 Default "CoS-to-local-precedence" mapping table
CoS value Local precedence
0 2
1 0
2 1
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
Example # Configure the "CoS-to-local-precedence" mapping table.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] qos cos-local-precedence-map 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
The following is the configured "CoS-to-local-precedence" mapping table.
Table 138 "CoS-to-local-precedence" mapping table
CoS value Local precedence
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
queue-scheduler
Syntax queue-scheduler { rr | strict-priority | wrr queue1-weight queue2-weight
queue3-weight queue4-weight queue5-weight queue6-weight queue7-weight
queue8-weight }
undo queue-scheduler
View QoS view
Parameter rr: Adopts round robin (RR) algorithm.
790 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
strict-priority: Adopts strict priority (SP) scheduling.
wrr queue1-weight queue2-weight queue3-weight queue4-weight
queue5-weight queue6-weight queue7-weight queue8-weight: Adopts the
weighted round robin (WRR) algorithm, with the weight in the range of 0 to 15.
Description Use the queue-scheduler command to configure the queue scheduling mode
and related parameters.
Use the undo queue-scheduler command to restore the default queue
scheduling mode.
By default, the SP algorithm is adopted.
Related command: display qos-interface queue-scheduler.
n Only non-type-A I/O Modules support the configuration of queue scheduling
mode.
Example # Adopt the WRR queue scheduling mode, and the weight value of each queue is
10, 5, 10, 10, 5, 10, 5, and 10.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qosb-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] queue-scheduler wrr 10 5 10 10 5
10 5 10
reset traffic-statistic
Syntax For type-A I/O Modules:
reset traffic-statistic { inbound | outbound } acl-rule
For non-type-A I/O Modules:
reset traffic-statistic inbound acl-rule
n I/O Modules, except type-A I/O Modules, support applying the combination of IP
ACL rules and link ACL rules. However, the field defined by the IP ACL rules and
link ACL rules cannot be of more than 32 characters. Otherwise, the combination
cannot be applied successfully.
View QoS view
Parameter acl-rule: Applied ACL which can be the combination of various ACL rules. For the
ways of type-A I/O Modules to combine ACLs and the description on related
parameters, refer to Table 139 and Table 141. For the ways of non-type-A I/O
Modules to combine ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to
Table 140 and Table 141.
reset traffic-statistic 791
Table 139 Type-A I/O Modules’ ways of applying combined ACLs
ACL combination Form of the acl-rule argument
Apply all the rules in an IP ACL separately ip-group { acl-number | acl-name }
Apply a rule in an IP ACL separately ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
rule-id
Apply all the rules in a Link ACL separately link-group { acl-number | acl-name }
Apply a rule in a Link ACL separately link-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
rule-id
Table 140 Non-type-A I/O Modules’ ways of applying combined ACLs
ACL combination Form of the acl-rule argument
Apply all the rules in an IP ACL separately ip-group { acl-number | acl-name }
Apply a rule in an IP ACL separately ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
rule-id
Apply all the rules in a Link ACL separately link-group { acl-number | acl-name }
Apply a rule in a Link ACL separately link-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
rule-id
Apply all the rules in an user-defined ACL user-group { acl-number | acl-name }
separately
Apply a rule in an user-defined ACL separately user-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
rule-id
Apply a rule in an IP ACL and a rule in a Link ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
ACL at the same time rule-id link-group { acl-number | acl-name }
rule rule-id
Table 141 Description on the parameters in the ACL combination
Parameter Description
ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } Basic and advanced ACL
acl-number: ACL number in the range of 2,000 to
3,999.
acl-name: ACL name which contains up to 32
characters. It must start with English letters (a to z or A
to Z) and cannot contain spaces or quotation marks. It
is not sensitive to capitals.
link-group { acl-number | acl-name } Layer 2 ACL
acl-number: ACL number in the range of 4,000 to
4,999.
acl-name: ACL name which contains up to 32
characters. It must start with English letters (a to z or A
to Z) and cannot contain spaces or quotation marks. It
is not sensitive to capitals.
user-group { acl-number | acl-name } User-defined ACL
acl-number: ACL number in the range of 5,000 to
5,999.
acl-name: ACL name which contains up to 32
characters. It must start with English letters (a to z or A
to Z) and cannot contain spaces or quotation marks. It
is not sensitive to capitals.
792 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
Table 141 Description on the parameters in the ACL combination
Parameter Description
rule-id ID of an ACL rule, in the range of 0 to 127.
If the rule-id argument is not specified, the rule
keyword refers to all the rules in the ACL.
Description Use the reset traffic-statistic command to clear the statistics of all or specified
traffic.
Table 142 The reset acl counter command vs. the reset traffic-statistic command
Command Function
reset acl counter Clear the ACL statistics.
This command is applicable to ACLs used for
filtering and classifying the traffic processed
by software.
ACLs are referenced by software in the
following cases:
■ Referenced by routing policies
■ Referenced when login users are
controlled
In these cases, the ACL number is in the range
of 2,000 to 3,999.
Refer to reset acl counter on page 764 for
the introduction to this command.
reset traffic-statistic Clear the traffic statistics.
This command is applicable to ACLs applied to
the hardware of the switch for filtering and
classifying traffic during data forwarding.
Generally, this command is used to clear the
statistics information obtained through the
traffic-statistic command.
Example # Clear the statistics about traffic matching ACL 2000.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qoss-Ethernet2/0/1] reset traffic-statistic inbound ip-group
2000
traffic-bandwidth
Syntax traffic-bandwidth outbound acl-rule [ system-index system-index ]
min-guaranteed-bandwidth max-guaranteed-bandwidth weight
undo traffic-bandwidth outbound acl-rule
View QoS view
traffic-bandwidth 793
Parameter outbound: Guarantees the bandwidth for the outbound packets sent by the port.
acl-rule: Applied ACL rules which can be the combination of various ACL rules. For
the ways of combining ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to
Table 139 and Table 141.
system-index: Specifies an interior index value which is used when an ACL rule is
applied to the port. The index value ranges from 0 to 4294,967,295. This keyword
is only available when the ACL rule number is specified in the command. After the
specified ACL takes effect, there are three scenarios when you input the index
value:
■ If you do not input an index value or the index value you input is 0, the system
will automatically assign an index whose value is greater than 0;
■ If the input index value is not 0 and does not conflict with the interior index
used by the system, the system will adopt the index value input by you;
■ If the input index value is not 0 but conflicts with the interior index used by the
system, the system will reassign an index value.
When the specified ACL rule is not effective, the system will adopt the index value
input by you.
min-guaranteed-bandwidth: Minimum guaranteed bandwidth in kbps, in the
range of 0 to 8,388,608. It must be the multiple(s) of 64.
max-guaranteed-bandwidth: Maximum guaranteed bandwidth in kbps, in the
range of 0 to 8,388,608. It must be the multiple(s) of 64.
weight: Bandwidth weight in the range of 1 to 100, in percentage. It is used in the
situations when there is several traffic bandwidth guarantees at the current port.
For instance, there is 10 M of bandwidth supporting two flows on a port. The
minimum guaranteed bandwidth for each flow is 2 M, the maximum guaranteed
bandwidth is 8 M, and the bandwidth weights are 40% and 80% respectively.
After the port guarantees the minimum bandwidth for both flows (that is, 4 M),
the remaining bandwidth (6M) cannot support the maximum bandwidth of both
flows (16M). If the bandwidth occupied by the two flows exceeds the minimum
guaranteed bandwidth, then the remaining bandwidth (6 M) will be allocated to
each flow according to the bandwidth weights (40% : 80%).
n Assume there are N flows on a port, the bandwidth of the port is Bp, the
minimum guaranteed bandwidth of the ith flow is Bimin, and the maximum
guaranteed bandwidth of the ith flow is Bimax, and the weight is Wi. If the
bandwidth occupied by all the flows is greater than their minimum guaranteed
bandwidth, and the sum of maximum guaranteed bandwidth is greater than port
bandwidth Bp, the bandwidth allocated to the ith flow is
⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞
Bi = Bimin + ⎜ Bp – ∑ B imin⎟ × Wi ⁄ ⎜ ∑ Wi⎟ .
⎝ N
⎠ ⎝N ⎠
Description Use the traffic-bandwidth command to activate the ACL for traffic identifying
and provide bandwidth guarantee for the corresponding traffic. This command is
applicable to only the permit rule).
794 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
Use the undo traffic-bandwidth command to remove this function.
This configuration provides the minimum guaranteed bandwidth and maximum
available bandwidth for the specific traffic. Note that the maximum available
bandwidth must be no smaller than the minimum guaranteed bandwidth.
Related command: display qos-interface traffic-bandwidth.
n ■
■
Only type-A I/O Modules support this command.
Only the permit rule can be referenced in this command and applied to
hardware.
Example # Guarantee the bandwidth of the packets that match the permit rule in ACL
2000: The minimum guaranteed bandwidth is 64 k, the maximum available
bandwidth is 128 k, and bandwidth weight is 50.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qoss-Ethernet2/0/1] traffic-bandwidth outbound ip-group 2000
64 128 50
traffic-limit
Syntax For type-A I/O Modules:
traffic-limit { inbound | outbound } acl-rule [ system-index system-index ]
target-rate
undo traffic-limit { inbound | outbound } acl-rule
For non-type-A I/O Modules:
traffic-limit inbound acl-rule [ system-index system-index ] [ kbps ] target-rate
[ exceed action ]
undo traffic-limit inbound acl-rule
n I/O Modules, except type-A I/O Modules, support applying the combination of IP
ACL rules and link ACL rules. However, the field defined by the IP ACL rules and
link ACL rules cannot be of more than 32 characters. Otherwise, the combination
cannot be applied successfully.
View QoS view
Parameter inbound: Performs traffic policing on the packets received by the port.
outbound: Performs traffic policing on the packets sent by the port.
acl-rule: Applied ACL which can be the combination of various ACL rules. For the
ways of type-A I/O Modules to combine ACLs and the description on related
parameters, refer to Table 139 and Table 141. For the ways of non-type-A I/O
traffic-limit 795
Modules to combine ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to
Table 140 and Table 141.
system-index: Specifies an interior index value which is used when an ACL rule is
applied to the port. The index value ranges from 0 to 4294,967,295. This keyword
is only available when the ACL rule number is specified in the command. After the
specified ACL takes effect, there are three scenarios when you input the index
value:
■ If you do not input an index value or the index value you input is 0, the system
will automatically assign an index whose value is greater than 0;
■ If the input index value is not 0 and does not conflict with the interior index
used by the system, the system will adopt the index value input by you;
■ If the input index value is not 0 but conflicts with the interior index used by the
system, the system will reassign an index value.
When the specified ACL rule is not effective, the system will adopt the index value
input by you.
kbps: Specifies the limit rate to be measured in kbps. If the kbps keyword is
specified, the rate is measured in kbps, in the range of 64 to 1,024,000 with the
granularity being 64. If the number you input is in the range of N*64 to (N+1)*64
(N is a natural number), the switch will set the value to (N+1)*64 kbps
automatically.
target-rate: Total rate to limit all the packets sent on a port. For type-A I/O
Modules, the target-rate argument is in the range of 64 to 8,388,608 in kbps with
the granularity being 64. If the kbps keyword is not provided, the target-rate
argument is in mbps in the range of 1 to 1,000.
exceed action: Optional. The action is taken when the traffic exceeds the
threshold. Only type-A I/O Modules support this keyword. The action argument
can be:
■ drop: Drops the packets.
■ remark-dscp value: Sets new DSCP value.
Description Use the traffic-limit command to activate ACL for traffic identifying and perform
traffic policing.
Use the undo traffic-limit command to remove traffic policing.
The granularity of traffic limit is 64 kbps.
This command performs traffic limit on the packets matching the permit rule only.
n Only the permit rule can be referenced in this command and applied to hardware.
Example # Perform traffic limit on the packets matching the permit rule in ACL 2000 on
Ethernet 2/0/1 of a type-A I/O Module. The maximum rate is 128 kbps.
796 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qoss-Ethernet2/0/1] traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000 128
# Perform traffic limit on the packets matching the permit rule in ACL 2000 on
GigabitEthernet 3/0/1 of a non-type-A I/O Module. The maximum rate is 128
kbps.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet 3/0/1
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet3/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qosb-GigabitEthernet3/0/1] traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000 kbps 128
traffic-priority
Syntax For type-A I/O Modules:
traffic-priority { inbound | outbound } acl-rule [ system-index system-index ] {
{ dscp dscp-value | ip-precedence pre-value } | local-precedence pre-value }*
undo traffic-priority { inbound | outbound } acl-rule
For non-type-A I/O Modules:
traffic-priority inbound acl-rule [ system-index system-index ] { { dscp
dscp-value | ip-precedence pre-value } | { cos cos | local-precedence pre-value }
}*
undo traffic-priority inbound acl-rule
n I/O Modules, except type-A I/O Modules, support applying the combination of IP
ACL rules and link ACL rules. However, the field defined by the IP ACL rules and
link ACL rules cannot be of more than 32 characters. Otherwise, the combination
cannot be applied successfully.
View QoS view
Parameter inbound: Performs priority marking to the packets received by the port.
outbound: Performs priority marking to the packets sent by the port.
acl-rule: Applied ACL which can be the combination of various ACL rules. For the
ways of type-A I/O Modules to combine ACLs and the description on related
parameters, refer to Table 139 and Table 141. For the ways of non-type-A I/O
Modules to combine ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to
Table 140 and Table 141.
system-index: Specifies an interior index value which is used when an ACL rule is
applied to the port. The index value ranges from 0 to 4294,967,295. This keyword
is only available when the ACL rule number is specified in the command. After the
specified ACL takes effect, there are three scenarios when you input the index
value:
traffic-priority 797
■ If you do not input an index value or the index value you input is 0, the system
will automatically assign an index whose value is greater than 0;
■ If the input index value is not 0 and does not conflict with the interior index
used by the system, the system will adopt the index value input by you;
■ If the input index value is not 0 but conflicts with the interior index used by the
system, the system will reassign an index value.
When the specified ACL rule is not effective, the system will adopt the index value
input by you.
dscp dscp-value: Sets DSCP precedence, ranging from 0 to 63. You can also enter
the keywords in Table 143.
Table 143 Description on DSCP precedence values
Keyword DSCP value (decimal) DSCP value (binary)
ef 46 101110
af11 10 001010
af12 12 001100
af13 14 001110
af21 18 010010
af22 20 010100
af23 22 010110
af31 26 011010
af32 28 011100
af33 30 011110
af41 34 100010
af42 36 100100
af43 38 100110
cs1 8 001000
cs2 16 010000
cs3 24 011000
cs4 32 100000
cs5 40 101000
cs6 48 110000
cs7 56 111000
be (default) 0 000000
ip-precedence pre-value: Sets IP precedence. The pre-value argument ranges
from 0 to 7. You can also enter the keywords in Table 144.
Table 144 Description on IP precedence values
Keyword IP Precedence (decimal) IP Precedence (binary)
routine 0 000
priority 1 001
immediate 2 010
flash 3 011
798 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
Table 144 Description on IP precedence values
Keyword IP Precedence (decimal) IP Precedence (binary)
flash-override 4 100
critical 5 101
internet 6 110
network 7 111
cos cos: Sets 802.1p priority. The pre-value argument ranges from 0 to 7. You can
also enter the keywords in Table 145.
Table 145 Description on 802.1p priority values
802.1p priority value
Keyword 802.1p priority (decimal) (binary)
best-effort 0 000
background 1 001
spare 2 010
excellent-effort 3 011
controlled-load 4 100
video 5 101
voice 6 110
network-management 7 111
n If you have redirected the packets to CPU, it is not recommended to set the
802.1p priority to 7, and vice versa.
local-precedence pre-value: Sets local precedence. The pre-value argument
ranges from 0 to 7.
Description Use the traffic-priority command to enable ACLs for remarking priority.
Use the undo traffic-priority command to remove the function of remarking
priority .
Related command: display qos-interface traffic-priority.
n Only the permit rule can be referenced in this command and applied to hardware.
Example # Remark the local precedence of the packets matching the permit rule in ACL
2000 as 0.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qosb-Ethernet2/0/1] traffic-priority inbound ip-group 2000 l
ocal-precedence 0
traffic-red 799
traffic-red
Syntax traffic-red outbound acl-rule [ system-index system-index ] qstart qstop
probability
undo traffic-red outbound acl-rule
View QoS view
Parameter outbound: Performs RED operation on the sent packets.
acl-rule: Applied ACL rules which can be the combination of various ACL rules. For
the ways of combining ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to
Table 139 and Table 141.
system-index: Specifies an interior index value which is used when an ACL rule is
applied to the port. The index value ranges from 0 to 4294,967,295. This keyword
is only available when the ACL rule number is specified in the command. After the
specified ACL takes effect, there are three scenarios when you input the index
value:
■ If you do not input an index value or the index value you input is 0, the system
will automatically assign an index whose value is greater than 0;
■ If the input index value is not 0 and does not conflict with the interior index
used by the system, the system will adopt the index value input by you;
■ If the input index value is not 0 but conflicts with the interior index used by the
system, the system will reassign an index value.
When the specified ACL rule is not effective, the system will adopt the index value
input by you.
qstart: Queue length where the system starts to drop packets at random, in the
range of 0 to 262,128 in KB. The packets in the queue whose length is less than
the qstart argument will not be dropped. The value must be the multiples of 16
KB.
qstop: Queue length where the system stops dropping of packets at random, in
the range of 0 to 262,128 in KB. All the packets in the queue whose length is
greater than the qstop argument will be dropped. The value must be the multiples
of 16 KB.
probability: Drop probability when the qstop argument is reached, in the range of
0% to 100%.
Description Use the traffic-red command to enable the RED operation and set RED
parameters.
Use the undo traffic-red command to remove the RED configuration.
Note that the qstop argument in this command must be no smaller than the qstart
argument.
800 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
Related command: display qos-interface traffic-red.
n ■
■
Only type-A I/O Modules support this command.
Only the permit rule can be referenced in this command and applied to
hardware.
Example # Perform the RED operation on the packets matching the permit rule in ACL
2000. RED parameters can be set as follows: the qstart argument is 64 KB, the
qstop argument is 128 KB, and the probability argument is 20%.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qoss-Ethernet2/0/1] traffic-red outbound ip-group 2000 64 12
8 20
traffic-redirect
Syntax traffic-redirect inbound acl-rule [ system-index system-index ] { cpu | interface
interface-type interface-number }
undo traffic-redirect inbound acl-rule
View QoS view
Parameter inbound: Performs traffic redirect on the packets received by the port.
outbound: Performs traffic redirect on the packets sent by the port.
acl-rule: Applied ACL rules which can be the combination of various ACL rules. For
the ways of combining ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to
Table 139 and Table 141.
system-index: Specifies an interior index value which is used when an ACL rule is
applied to the port. The index value ranges from 0 to 4294,967,295. This keyword
is only available when the ACL rule number is specified in the command. After the
specified ACL takes effect, there are three scenarios when you input the index
value:
■ If you do not input an index value or the index value you input is 0, the system
will automatically assign an index whose value is greater than 0;
■ If the input index value is not 0 and does not conflict with the interior index
used by the system, the system will adopt the index value input by you;
■ If the input index value is not 0 but conflicts with the interior index used by the
system, the system will reassign an index value.
When the specified ACL rule is not effective, the system will adopt the index value
input by you.
cpu: Redirects the traffic to the CPU.
traffic-remark 801
interface-type interface-number: Redirects the packets to the specified Ethernet
port. The interface-type argument refers to the port type, and the
interface-number argument refers to the port number.
Description Use the traffic-redirect command to enable the ACL to identify and redirect the
traffic. This command is applicable to the permit rules in an ACL only.
Use the undo traffic-redirect command to disable the traffic redirect function. .
Related command: display qos-interface traffic-redirect.
n ■
■
Only type-A I/O Modules support this command.
Only the permit rule can be referenced in this command and applied to
hardware.
Example # Redirect the packets matching the permit rule in ACL 2000 to GigabitEthernet
2/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qosb-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] traffic-redirect inbound ip-group
2000 interface gigabitethernet2/0/1
traffic-remark
Syntax traffic-remark inbound acl-rule [ system-index system-index ] remark-vlan
vlan-id uplink interface-type interface-number [ untagged ]
undo traffic-remark inbound acl-rule
n I/O Modules support applying the combination of IP ACL rules and link ACL rules.
However, the field defined by the IP ACL rules and link ACL rules cannot be of
more than 32 characters. Otherwise, the combination cannot be applied
successfully.
View QoS view
Parameter inbound: Tags the packets received by the port with external VLAN tags.
acl-rule: Applied ACL rules which can be the combination of various ACL rules. For
the ways of combining ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to
Table 140 and Table 141.
vlan-id: ID of the external VLAN tag which is tagged to the packet, in the range of
1 to 4,094.
system-index: Specifies an interior index which is used when an ACL rule is
applied to the port. The index value ranges from 0 to 4294,967,295. This keyword
802 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
is only available when the ACL rule number is specified in the command. After the
specified ACL takes effect,
■ If you do not enter an index value or the index value is 0, the system will
automatically assign an index value greater than 0.
■ If you enter a non-zero index and this index does not conflict with the interior
index used by the system, the system will adopt this index value.
■ If you enter a non-zero index but this index conflicts with the interior index
used by the system, the system will reassign an index value.
When the specified ACL rule is not effective, the system will adopt the index value
entered by you.
interface-type interface-number: Specifies the uplink port of the packet, whose
outer-layer VLAN Tag must be encapsulated.
untagged: Specifies whether it is required to reserve the VLAN Tag when the
VLAN encapsulated with the VLAN ID is sent through the uplink port.
Description Use the traffic-remark command to enable the ACL for traffic identifying and
tag the packet matching the ACL with the external VLAN tag to implement the
traffic-based flexible QinQ function.
Use the undo traffic-remark-vlanid command to disable the configuration.
This command is applicable to only the permit rules in the ACL.
Refer to “QinQ Configuration Commands” on page 187 for the detailed
information about flexible QinQ.
c CAUTION:
■ Execute the vlan-vpn enable command in the corresponding port view before
executing the traffic-remark command.
■ The traffic-based flexible QinQ function is generally configured on the hybrid
port of the edge device connecting the user device to the carrier’s network.
■ QinQ is mutually exclusive with Voice VLAN. That is, you cannot configure both
features on the same port.
■ Type-A, 3C16863, and 3C16862 I/O Modules do not support the traffic-based
flexible QinQ function.
■ The port on which the traffic-based flexible QinQ function is configured and
the specified uplink port cannot be in the same aggregation group.
Example # Tag the packets matching the permit rule in ACL 2000 with the external VLAN
tag on GigabitEthernet 2/0/1, thus implementing the traffic-based flexible QinQ
function.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 25
[SW7750-vlan25] quit
[SW7750] acl number 2000
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 10.1.1.1 0.0.0.255
[SW7750-acl-basic-2000] quit
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] port link-type hybrid
traffic-statistic 803
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] port hybrid vlan 25 untagged
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] vlan-vpn enable
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qosb-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] traffic-remark inbound ip-group 2000 remark-vlan 25 uplink Gigabit
Ethernet 2/0/2
traffic-statistic
Syntax For type-A I/O Modules:
traffic-statistic { inbound | outbound } acl-rule [ system-index system-index ]
undo traffic-statistic { inbound | outbound } acl-rule
For non-type-A I/O Modules:
traffic-statistic inbound acl-rule [ system-index system-index ]
undo traffic-statistic inbound acl-rule
n I/O Modules, except type-A I/O Modules, support applying the combination of IP
ACL rules and link ACL rules. However, the field defined by the IP ACL rules and
link ACL rules cannot be of more than 32 characters. Otherwise, the combination
cannot be applied successfully.
View QoS view
Parameter inbound: Performs traffic statistic on the packets received by the port.
outbound: Performs traffic statistic on the packets sent by the port.
acl-rule: Applied ACL rules which can be the combination of various ACL rules. For
the ways of combining ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to
Table 139 and Table 141.
system-index: Specifies an interior index value which is used when an ACL rule is
applied to the port. The index value ranges from 0 to 4294,967,295. This keyword
is only available when the ACL rule number is specified in the command. After the
specified ACL takes effect, there are three scenarios when you input the index
value:
■ If you do not input an index value or the index value you input is 0, the system
will automatically assign an index whose value is greater than 0;
■ If the input index value is not 0 and does not conflict with the interior index
used by the system, the system will adopt the index value input by you;
■ If the input index value is not 0 but conflicts with the interior index used by the
system, the system will reassign an index value.
When the specified ACL rule is not effective, the system will adopt the index value
input by you.
Description Use the traffic-statistic command to activate the ACL for traffic identifying and
count the traffic. This command is applicable to only the permit rules in the ACL.
Use the undo traffic-statistic command to cancel the traffic statistics.
804 CHAPTER 58: QOS COMMANDS
The statistics information of traffic-statistic command includes the times of ACL
matches on the hardware. You can use display qos-interface traffic-statistic
command to display the statistics information.
Related command: display qos-interface traffic-statistic.
Example # Perform traffic statistics on the packets matching the permit rule in ACL 2000.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qosb-Ethernet2/0/1] traffic-statistic inbound ip-group 2000
MIRRORING COMMANDS
59
display mirroring-group
Syntax display mirroring-group { group-id | all | local | remote-destination |
remote-source }
View Any view
Parameter group-id: Group number of a mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20.
local: Specifies the mirroring group to be a local mirroring group.
remote-destination: The specified mirroring group is the destination group for
remote mirroring.
remote-source: The specified mirroring group is the source group for remote
mirroring.
all: All mirroring groups
Description Use the display mirroring-group command to display the parameter settings
of a mirroring group.
Local mirroring group information includes:
■ Group number
■ Group type: local
■ Group status
■ Information about the source port of mirroring
■ Information about the destination port of mirroring
Information displayed on the destination mirroring group for remote mirroring
includes:
■ Group number
■ Group type: remote-destination
■ Group status
■ Information of the destination port
■ Remote-probe VLAN information
806 CHAPTER 59: MIRRORING COMMANDS
Information displayed on the source mirroring group for remote mirroring
includes:
■ Group number
■ Group type: remote-source
■ Group status
■ Information of the source port
■ Information of the reflector port
■ Remote-probe VLAN information
Example # Display the parameter settings of the mirroring group.
<SW7750> display mirroring-group all
mirroring-group 2: type: local status: active
mirroring port: GigabitEthernet2/0/1 both
monitor port: GigabitEthernet2/0/4
display qos-interface mirrored-to
Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] mirrored-to
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port type and port number. If you enter this
argument, the switch will display the parameter settings of the specified port. If
not, the switch will display the parameters settings of all ports.
Description Use the display qos-interface mirrored-to command to display the parameter
settings of traffic mirroring.
Information displayed includes:
■ Port name and action name of traffic mirroring
■ Direction of traffic mirroring
■ ACL for identifying traffics
■ Mirroring group
Related command: mirrored-to
Example # Display the parameter settings of traffic mirroring on GigabitEthernet 2/0/1.
<SW7750> display qos-interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/1 mirrored-to
GigabitEthernet2/0/1: mirrored-to
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running
Mirrored to: mirroring-group 3
mirrored-to 807
mirrored-to
Syntax mirrored-to inbound acl-rule [ system-index system-index ] { interface
interface-type interface-number [ reflector ] | mirroring-group group-id }
undo mirrored-to inbound acl-rule
View QoS view
Parameter inbound: Mirrors packets received on the port.
acl-rule: Applied ACL rules. Table 146 and Table 147 describe the ACL
combinations on I/O Modules other than Type A and the corresponding parameter
description.
Table 146 Combined application of ACLs on I/O Modules other than Type A.
Combination mode Form of acl-rule
Apply all rules in an IP type ACL separately ip-group { acl-number | acl-name }
Apply one rule in an IP type ACL separately ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
rule-id
Apply all rules in a link type ACL separately link-group { acl-number | acl-name }
Apply one rule in a link type separately link-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
rule-id
Apply all rules in a user-defined ACL user-group { acl-number | acl-name }
separately
Apply one rule in a user-defined ACL user-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
separately rule-id
Apply one rule in an IP type ACL and one rule ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } rule
in a link type ACL simultaneously rule-id link-group { acl-number | acl-name }
rule rule-id
Table 147 Parameters description of ACL combinations
Parameter Description
ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } Basic and advanced ACL.
acl-number: ACL number, ranging from 2,000 to
3,999.
acl-name: ACL name, up to 32 characters long,
beginning with an English letter (a to z or A to Z)
without space and quotation mark, case insensitive.
link-group { acl-number | acl-name } Layer 2 ACL
acl-number: ACL number, ranging from 4,000 to
4,999.
acl-name: ACL name, up to 32 characters long,
beginning with an English letter (a to z or A to Z)
without space and quotation mark, case insensitive.
808 CHAPTER 59: MIRRORING COMMANDS
Table 147 Parameters description of ACL combinations
Parameter Description
user-group { acl-number | acl-name } User-defined ACL
acl-number: ACL number, ranging from 5,000 to
5,999.
acl-name: ACL name, up to 32 characters long,
beginning with an English letter (a to z or A to Z)
without space and quotation mark, case insensitive.
rule-id Number of the ACL rule, ranging from 0 to 127.
If this argument is not specified, all rules in the
specified ACL will be applied.
system-index: Specifies an interior index value which is used when an ACL rule is
applied to the port. The index value ranges from 0 to 4294,967,295. This keyword
is only available when the ACL rule number is specified in the command. After the
specified ACL takes effect, there are three scenarios when you input the index
value:
■ If you do not input an index value or the index value you input is 0, the system
will automatically assign an index whose value is greater than 0;
■ If the input index value is not 0 and does not conflict with the interior index
used by the system, the system will adopt the index value input by you;
■ If the input index value is not 0 but conflicts with the interior index used by the
system, the system will reassign an index value.
When the specified ACL rule is not effective, the system will adopt the index value
input by you.
Interface interface-type interface-number [ reflector ]: Mirrors traffic flows to
specific port. interface-type interface-number indicates an Ethernet port. With the
reflector keyword specified, the parameters represent a reflector port, together
with corresponding configuration to realize remote traffic mirroring; without the
reflector keyword, the parameters represent a destination port, used to realize
the local traffic mirroring.
mirroring-group group-id: Mirrors traffic flows to specific mirroring group.
Description Use the mirrored-to command to start ACLs to identify traffics and perform
traffic mirroring for packets that match.
Use the undo mirrored-to command to remove traffic mirroring configuration.
This command only applies to the rules whose actions are permit in matching the
specified ACL, and only mirrors the received traffic flows. If you want to mirror
traffic flows to a specified port, the port must be a destination port or reflector
port of a mirroring group.
Related command: display qos-interface mirrored-to, monitor-port.
n Only non-type-A I/O Modules support the traffic mirroring configuration.
mirroring-group 809
Example # Mirror packets that match ACL 2000 on port GigabitEthernet 2/0/1 to
GigabitEthernet 2/0/4 through traffic mirroring.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mirroring-group 3 local
[SW7750] mirroring-group 3 monitor-port GigabitEthernet 2/0/4
[SW7750] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] qos
[SW7750-qosb-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] mirrored-to inbound ip-group 3000
interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/4
mirroring-group
Syntax mirroring-group group-id { local | remote-destination | remote-source }
undo mirroring-group { group-id | all | local | remote-destination |
remote-source }
View System view
Parameter group-id: Group number of a mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20.
local: Specifies the mirroring group as a local mirroring group.
remote-destination: Specifies the mirroring group as the destination mirroring
group for remote port mirroring.
remote-source: Specifies the mirroring group as the source mirroring group for
remote mirroring.
all: Deletes all mirroring groups
Description Use the mirroring-group command to configure a mirroring group.
Use the undo mirroring-group command to delete a mirroring group.
Example # Configure a mirroring group on the local switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mirroring-group 3 local
mirroring-group (only for configuration recovery)
Syntax mirroring-group group-id { inbound | outbound } mirroring-port-list
mirrored-to monitor-port
View System view
Parameter group-id: Group ID of the mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20.
810 CHAPTER 59: MIRRORING COMMANDS
inbound: Monitors the received packets only.
outbound: Monitors the sending packets only.
mirroring-port-list: Ethernet port list. It means there can be multiple ports. This
argument is provide in the form of port-list={ interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] }&<1-8>, where Interface-type interface-number
means an Ethernet port, and &<1-8> means you can specify eight Ethernet ports
or Ethernet port lists.
mirrored-to monitor-port: Specifies the destination port.
Description Use the mirroring-group command to recover the port mirroring configuration.
After software update, you can use this command to convert the port mirroring
configuration configured with the old software version in the configuration file to
the command syntax supported by the new software version.
Example # Recover the configuration of mirroring group 2, where Ethernet 2/0/1 through
Ethernet 2/0/3 are source ports and Ethernet 2/0/4 is the destination port
monitoring only the incoming packets.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mirroring-group 2 inbound Ethernet 2/0/1 to Ethernet 2/0/3
mirrored-to Ethernet 2/0/4
mirroring-group mirroring-port
Syntax mirroring-group group-id mirroring-port mirroring-port-list { both | inbound |
outbound }
undo mirroring-group group-id mirroring-port mirroring-port-list
View System view/Ethernet port view
Parameter group-id: Group number of a mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20.
mirroring-port mirroring-port-list: Specifies a list of source ports, provided in the
form of mirroring-port-list={ interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ] }&<1-8>, where Interface-type interface-number means an
Ethernet port, and &<1-8> means you can specify eight source ports or source
port lists.
n For a centralized I/O Module, if multiple source ports are specified in remote port
mirroring configuration, all the source ports must be on the same I/O Module.
both: Mirrors packets both received and sent via the port.
inbound: Mirrors only packets received via the port.
outbound: Mirrors only packets sent via the port.
mirroring-group mirroring-slot 811
Description Use the mirroring-group mirroring-port command to configure the source
port.
Use the undo mirroring-group mirroring-port command to remove the
configuration of the source port.
Example # Configure GigabitEthernet 2/0/1 as the source port and mirror all packets
received via this port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mirroring-group 1 mirroring-port GigabitEthernet2/0/1 inbou
nd
mirroring-group mirroring-slot
Syntax mirroring-group group-id mirroring-slot slot-number { inbound | outbound |
both }
undo mirroring-group group-id mirroring-slot slot-number { inbound |
outbound | both }
View System view
Parameter group-id: Group number of a mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20.
slot-number: Number of the slot where the mirroring source I/O Module resides.
Description Use the mirroring-group mirroring-slot command to configure the mirroring
source I/O Module.
Use the undo mirroring-group mirroring-slot command to remove the
mirroring source I/O Module.
Example # Specify the I/O Module residing in slot 3 as the mirroring source I/O Module and
mirror all the packets received on the I/O Module.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mirroring-group 1 mirroring-slot 3 inbound
mirroring-group monitor-port
Syntax mirroring-group group-id monitor-port monitor-port
undo mirroring-group group-id monitor-port monitor-port
View System view/Ethernet port view
Parameter group-id: Group number of a mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20.
812 CHAPTER 59: MIRRORING COMMANDS
monitor-port monitor-port: Specifies the destination port for port mirroring.
monitor-port is available in system view only.
Description Use the mirroring-group monitor-port command to configure the destination
port.
Use the undo mirroring-group monitor-port to remove the configuration of
the destination port.
Note the following when you configure the destination port:
■ LACP must be disabled on the mirroring destination port and STP is
recommended to be disabled on the port.
■ The destination port for remote mirroring must be an Access port.
■ After a port is configured as a reflector port, the switch does not allow you to
change the port type and its default VLAN ID.
Example # Configure GigabitEthernet 2/0/4 as the source port and monitor all packets
received via this port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mirroring-group 1 monitor-port GigabitEthernet2/0/4
mirroring-group monitor-slot
Syntax mirroring-group group-id monitor-slot slot-number
undo mirroring-group group-id monitor-slot slot-number
View System view
Parameter group-id: Group number of a mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20.
slot-number: Number of the slot where the mirroring destination I/O Module
resides.
Description Use the mirroring-group monitor-slot command to configure the destination
mirroring I/O Module, which must be LS81VSNP or LS82VSNP. In order to mirror a
port to a I/O Module, the mirroring group must be active.
Use the undo mirroring-group monitor-slot command to remove the
configured mirroring destination I/O Module.
Example # Specify the LS81VSNP in slot 4 as the mirroring destination I/O Module.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mirroring-group 1 monitor-slot 4
mirroring-group reflector-port 813
mirroring-group reflector-port
Syntax mirroring-group group-id reflector-port reflector-port
undo mirroring-group group-id reflector-port reflector-port
View System view/Ethernet port view
Parameter group-id: Group number of a mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20.
reflector-port reflector-port: Specifies the reflector port. reflector-port is available
in system view only.
Description Use the mirroring-group reflector-port command to specify the reflector port.
Use the undo mirroring-group reflector-port command to remove the
configuration of the reflector port..
Note the following when you configure the reflector port:
■ The reflector port must be an Access port.
■ LACP must be disabled on the reflector port.
■ The reflector ports are mutually exclusive with STP or DLDP. That is, if STP or
DLDP is enabled on a port, you are not recommended to configure it as a
reflector port; you are not recommended to enable STP or DLDP on a reflector
port.
■ After a port is configured as a reflector port, the switch does not allow you to
change the port type and its default VLAN ID, or to add it to another VLAN.
■ To mirror tagged packets, you need to configure VLAN VPN on the reflector
port.
Example # Configure GigabitEthernet 2/0/2 as the reflector port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mirroring-group 1 reflector-port GigabitEthernet2/0/2
mirroring-group remote-probe vlan
Syntax mirroring-group group-id remote-probe vlan remote-probe-vlan-id
undo mirroring-group group-id remote-probe vlan remote-probe-vlan-id
View System view
Parameter group-id: Group number of a mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20.
remote-probe vlan remote-probe-vlan-id: Specifies the remote-probe VLAN for
the mirroring group.
814 CHAPTER 59: MIRRORING COMMANDS
Description Use the mirroring-group remote-probe vlan command to specify the
remote-probe VLAN for a mirroring group.
Use the undo mirroring-group remote-probe vlan command to remove the
configuration of remote-probe VLAN for a mirroring group.
Example # Configure VLAN 100 as the remote-probe VLAN.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] mirroring-group 1 remote-probe vlan 100
remote-probe vlan
Syntax remote-probe vlan enable
undo remote-probe vlan enable
View VLAN view
Parameter None
Description Use the remote-probe vlan enable command to configure the current VLAN as
the remote-probe VLAN.
Use the undo remote-probe vlan enable command to configure the
remote-probe VLAN as a normal VLAN.
Before configuring the remote-probe VLAN, make sure that no Access or Hybrid
port belongs to this VLAN. If any Trunk port exists in this VLAN, the port PVID
cannot be the ID of remote-probe VLAN. After setting a VLAN as remote-probe
VLAN, it is recommended that you do not add Access or Hybrid port to the VLAN.
n ■ The undo vlan all command cannot be used to remove the specified
remote-probe VLAN.
■ After you input the remote-probe vlan enable the command, the system will
check whether the current VLAN is a dynamic VLAN or not. If it is a dynamic
VLAN, the command will fail to be executed, and the system prompts that
"Can not set dynamic VLAN as remote-probe VLAN!".
Example # Configure VLAN 5 as remote-probe vlan.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 5
[SW7750-vlan5] remote-probe vlan enable
NDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
60
display ndp
Syntax display ndp [ interface port-list ]
View Any view
Parameter interface port-list: Specifies a list of ports. The list can contain consecutive or
separated ports, or the combination of the both. You need to provide the port-list
argument in the form of interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ] &<1-10>, where interface-type specifies the port type, and
interface-number specifies the port number (in the form of slot number/device
number/port number).to: Specifies a port range. &<1-10> means that you can
provide up to ten port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.
Description Use the display ndp command to display the global NDP configuration
information, including the interval to send NDP packets, the holdtime of NDP
information, and the information about the neighbors of all the ports.
Example # Display NDP configuration information.
<aaa_0.3Com> display ndp
Neighbor Discovery Protocol is enabled.
Neighbor Discovery Protocol Ver: 1, Hello Timer: 10(s), Aging Timer:
10(s)
Interface: GigabitEthernet0/0/1
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 179, Pkts Rvd: 6723, Pkts Err: 0
Neighbor 1: Aging Time: 8(s)
MAC Address : 000f-e200-7502
Host Name : 3Com Switch 7757
Port Name : GigabitEthernet0/0/1
Software Ver: 3.10
Device Name : 3Com Switch 7757
Port Duplex : AUTO
Product Ver : S7757-3152
BootROM Ver : 525
Interface: GigabitEthernet0/0/2
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 0, Pkts Rvd: 0, Pkts Err: 0
Interface: GigabitEthernet0/0/3
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 0, Pkts Rvd: 0, Pkts Err: 0
Interface: GigabitEthernet0/0/4
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 0, Pkts Rvd: 0, Pkts Err: 0
816 CHAPTER 60: NDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Interface: GigabitEthernet2/0/1
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 0, Pkts Rvd: 0, Pkts Err: 0
Interface: GigabitEthernet2/0/2
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 0, Pkts Rvd: 0, Pkts Err: 0
Interface: GigabitEthernet2/0/3
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 0, Pkts Rvd: 0, Pkts Err: 0
# Display the information about Ethernet0/0/1.
<aaa_0.3Com> display ndp interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
Interface: GigabitEthernet0/0/1
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 179, Pkts Rvd: 6723, Pkts Err: 0
Neighbor 1: Aging Time: 8(s)
MAC Address : 000f-e200-7502
Host Name : 3Com Switch 7757
Port Name : GigabitEthernet0/0/1
Software Ver: 3.10
Device Name : 3Com Switch 7757
Port Duplex : AUTO
Product Ver : S7757-3152
BootROM Ver : 525
Table 148 Field descriptions of the display ndp interface command
Field Description
Neighbor Discovery Protocol is enabled NDP is enabled globally on the switch
Neighbor Discovery Protocol Ver: 1 NDP version 1 is running
Hello Timer The interval to send NDP packets
Aging Timer The holdtime of the NDP information sent by the
local switch
Interface Port index to specify a specific port
Status NDP is enabled on the port
Pkts Snd Number of the NDP packets transmitted through the
port
Pkts Rvd Number of the NDP packets received through the
port
Pkts Err Number of the error NDP packets received through
the port
Neighbor 1: Aging Time The holdtime of the NDP information received from
the neighbors connected to the port
MAC Address MAC address of a neighbor device
Host Name System name of a neighbor device
Port name Name of the port connected to the neighbor device
Software Ver Neighbor device software version
Device Name Device name of a neighbor device
Port Duplex Port duplex mode of a neighbor device
Product Ver Product version of a neighbor device
BootROM Ver BootROM version of the neighbor device
ndp enable 817
ndp enable
Syntax ndp enable [ interface port-list ]
undo ndp enable [ interface port-list ]
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter interface port-list: Specifies a list of ports. The list can contain consecutive or
separated ports, or the combination of the both. You need to provide the port-list
argument in the form of interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ] &<1-10>, where interface-type specifies the port type, and
interface-number specifies the port number (in the form of slot number/device
number/port number).to: Specifies a port range. &<1-10> means that you can
provide up to ten port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.
Description In system view:
■ Use the ndp enable command to enable NDP globally.
■ Use the undo ndp enable command to disable NDP globally.
When the ndp enable command is executed in system view, the NDP feature is
enabled globally if the port-list argument is not specified, while the NDP feature is
enabled on the specified port if the port-list argument is specified.
In Ethernet port view:
■ Use the ndp enable command to enable NDP on a port.
■ Use the undo ndp enable command to disable NDP on a port.
When this command is used in Ethernet port view, the interface keyword cannot
be provided and the NDP feature is enabled on the current port only.
By default, NDP is enabled both globally and on a port.
Note that the NDP feature on a port does not take effect until the NDP feature is
enabled globally.
Example # Enable NDP globally.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.3Com] ndp enable
ndp timer aging
Syntax ndp timer aging aging-in-secs
undo ndp timer aging
818 CHAPTER 60: NDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View System view
Parameter aging-in-secs: Holdtime (in seconds) to be set of the NDP information sent by the
local switch. This argument ranges from 5 to 255.
Description Use the ndp timer aging command to set the holdtime of the information in the
NDP packets sent by the local switch, that is, to specify how long a device will hold
the NDP packets received from the local device. After the aging timer expires, the
device removes the received NDP neighbor node information.
Use the undo timer aging command to restore the default NDP information
holdtime.
You can specify how long an adjacent device will hold the NDP information sent
by the local device. An adjacent device holds the NDP information of the local
switch according to the holdtime carried in the NDP packets received from the
local switch and removes the NDP information when the aging timer expires.
The default holdtime is 180 seconds.
Note that NDP information holdtime is longer than the interval to send NDP
packets normally. Otherwise, the neighbor information table of an NDP port will
become unstable.
Example # Configure the holdtime of the information in NDP packets sent by the local
switch to be 60 seconds.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.3Com] ndp timer aging 60
ndp timer hello
Syntax ndp timer hello timer-in-seconds
undo ndp timer hello
View System view
Parameter timer-in-seconds: Interval (in seconds) to send NDP packets ranging from 5 to 254.
By default, the interval to send NDP packets is 60 seconds.
Description Use the ndp timer hello command to set the interval to send NDP packets.
Use the undo ndp timer hello command to restore the default interval to send
NDP packets.
NDP information in a neighbor information table is updated regularly. This enables
neighbor information table to contain the actual network topology information.
You can use these two commands to adjust the updating frequency of NDP
information.
reset ndp statistics 819
Example # Configure the interval to send NDP packets to be 80 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ndp timer hello 80
reset ndp statistics
Syntax reset ndp statistics [ interface port-list ]
View User view
Parameter interface port-list: Specifies a list of ports. The list can contain consecutive or
separated ports, or the combination of the both. You need to provide the port-list
argument in the form of interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ] &<1-10>, where interface-type specifies the port type, and
interface-number specifies the port number (in the form of slot number/device
number/port number).to: Specifies a port range. &<1-10> means that you can
provide up to ten port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.
Description Use the reset ndp statistics command to clear NDP statistics.
Example # Clear NDP statistics.
<SW7750> reset ndp statistics
820 CHAPTER 60: NDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
NTDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
61
display ntdp
Syntax display ntdp
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display ntdp command to display the global NTDP information. The
information includes the range (in hop count) within which topology information
is collected, the interval to collect topology information (the NTDP timer), the delay
time for a device to forward topology-collection requests, the delay time for a
topology-collection request to be forwarded through a port, and the time cost
during the last topology collection.
Example # Display the global NTDP information.
<aaa_0.3Com> display ntdp
NTDP is running.
Hops : 3
Timer : 0 min
Hop Delay : 200 ms
Port Delay: 20 ms
Last collection total time: 0ms
Table 149 Field descriptions of the display ntdp command
Field Description
NTDP is running. NTDP is enabled globally on the local device.
Hops Hop count for topology collection
Timer Interval to collect topology information
Hop Delay Delay time for the device to forward topology collection
requests
Port Delay Delay time for a topology-collection request to be forwarded
through a port
Last collection total time Time cost during the last collection
display ntdp device-list
Syntax display ntdp device-list [ verbose ]
822 CHAPTER 61: NTDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View Any view
Parameter verbose: Displays the detailed device information.
Description Use the display ntdp device-list command to display the device information
collected through NTDP.
Example # Display the device list collected through NTDP.
<aaa_0.3Com> display ntdp device-list
MAC HOP IP PLATFORM
00e0-fc00-7506 0 100.100.1.1/24 S7757
00e0-fc01-7506 1 16.1.1.1/24 S7757
Table 150 Field descriptions of the display ntdp device-list command
Field Description
MAC MAC address of a device
HOP Hops to the collecting device
IP IP address and mask length of the management VLAN interface
on the device
PLATFORM Platform information about a device
# Display the detailed device information collected through NTDP.
<aaa_0.3Com> display ntdp device-list verbose
Hostname : aaa_0.3Com
MAC : 00e0-fc00-7506
Hop : 0
Platform : S7757
IP : 100.100.1.1/24
Version :
3Com Comware Platform Software.
Comware Software, Version 3.10
Copyright(c) 2004-2007 3Com Corporation All rights reserved. reserved.
S7757-5308
Cluster : Administrator switch of cluster aaa
Peer MAC Peer Port ID Native Port ID Speed Duplex
00e0-fc00-3190 Ethernet1/0/22 Ethernet3/0/21 100 FULL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hostname : aaa_1.3Com
MAC : 00e0-fc01-7506
Hop : 1
Platform : S7757
IP : 16.1.1.1/24
Version :
3Com Comware Platform Software.
Comware Software, Version 3.10
Copyright(c) 2004-2007 3Com Corporation All rights reserved.
S7757-5308
Cluster : Candidate switch
Peer MAC Peer Port ID Native Port ID Speed Duplex
00e0-fc00-3900 Ethernet3/0/21 Ethernet1/0/22 100 FULL
5600-0000-3334 GigabitEthernet7/0/32 Ethernet1/0/4 100 FULL
ntdp enable 823
Table 151 Field descriptions of the display ntdp device-list verbose command
Field Description
Hostname System name of the device collected through NTDP
MAC Mac address of the device
Hop Number of hops from the device to the device which launches the topology
collection
Platform Software platform of the device
IP IP address of the cluster management VLAN interface on the device (VLAN 1
is the cluster management VLAN of the Switch 7750 )
Version Version of the device
Cluster The role of the device in the cluster
Peer MAC MAC address of a neighbor device
Peer Port ID Name of the peer port connected to the neighbor device
Native Port ID Name of the local port which a neighbor device is connected to
Speed Speed of the neighbor device port
Duplex Duplex mode of the neighbor device port
ntdp enable
Syntax ntdp enable
undo ntdp enable
View System view, Ethernet port view
Parameter None
Description In system view:
Use the ntdp enable command to enable NTDP globally.
Use the undo ntdp enable command to disable NTDP globally.
In Ethernet port view:
Use the ntdp enable command to enable NTDP on a port.
Use the undo ntdp enable command to disable NTDP on a port.
By default, NTDP is enabled globally and on ports.
Note that the NDTP cannot operate if it is enabled on a port where NDP is
disabled.
n ■ On a management device, NTDP must be enabled globally and on all the ports,
and the NTDP parameters must be configured. On a member device, NTDP
must be enabled globally and on the corresponding port. When NTDP is
running on member devices, it adopts the NTDP parameters from the
management device.
824 CHAPTER 61: NTDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
■ NTDP takes effect in the management VLAN only. The Switch 7750 take VLAN
1 as the default VLAN, that is, the NTDP feature of the Switch 7750 takes
effect in VLAN 1 only.
Example # Enable NTDP globally.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ntdp enable
ntdp explore
Syntax ntdp explore
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the ntdp explore command to start topology information collection
manually.
You can use this command to enable the topology information collection
manually. NTDP will collect the NDP information of every device and the
information about the connections between the local switch and all of its
neighbor devices in the specified network scope. The management device or the
network administrator uses this information to acquire the network topology,
manage and monitor the devices.
Example # Start the topology collection.
<aaa_0.3Com> ntdp explore
ntdp hop
Syntax ntdp hop hop-value
undo ntdp hop
View System view
Parameter hop-value: Maximum hops for collecting topology information, ranging from 1 to
16. By default, the value is 3.
Description Use the ntdp hop command to set a range (in terms of hop count) for topology
information collection.
Use the undo ntdp hop command to restore the default range for topology
information collection.
ntdp timer 825
With the ntdp hop command, you can specify to collect the topology information
of the devices within a specified range to avoid infinitive collection. The limit is
performed by controlling the permitted hops from collection origination. For
example, if you set the hop number limit to 2, only the switches less than 2 hops
away from the switch starting the topology collection are collected.
Note that this command is only applicable to the topology-collecting device. A
broader collection scope requires more memory of the topology-collecting device.
Example # Set the hop count for topology information collection to 5.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.3Com] ntdp hop 5
ntdp timer
Syntax ntdp timer interval-in- minutes
undo ntdp timer
View System view
Parameter interval-in- minutes: Interval (in minutes) to collect topology information, ranging
from 0 to 65,535. This argument defaults to 0, which specifies not to collect
topology information.
Description Use the ntdp timer command to configure the interval to collect topology
information.
Use the undo ntdp timer command to restore the default interval.
B y default, the interval to collect topology information is 0 minute, that is,
topology information is not collected periodically.
A switch collects topology information once in each period set by the ntdp timer
command.
Example # Set the interval to collect topology information to 30 minutes.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.3Com] ntdp timer 30
ntdp timer hop-delay
Syntax ntdp timer hop-delay time
undo ntdp timer hop-delay
View System view
826 CHAPTER 61: NTDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter time: Delay time (in milliseconds) for a switch to forward topology-collection
request packets. This argument ranges from 1 to 1,000 and defaults to 200.
Description Use the ntdp timer hop-delay command to set the delay time for a switch to
forward topology-collection request packets.
Use the undo ntdp timer hop-delay command to restore the default delay
time.
To avoid network congestion caused by a large amount of topology response
packets received by the topology collection device in a short period, a switch
delays for specific period before it forwards a received topology-collection request
packet through its first ports. You can use the ntdp timer hop-delay command
to set the delay time.
These two commands are intended for switches that collect topology information.
They actually set the hop-delay value for topology-collection request packets sent
by these switches. The hop-delay value determines the delay time for a switch
receiving topology-collection request packets to forward them through its first
port.
Example # Set the delay time for the switch to forward topology-collection request packets
through the first port to 300 ms.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.3Com] ntdp timer hop-delay 300
ntdp timer port-delay
Syntax ntdp timer port-delay time
undo ntdp timer port-delay
View System view
Parameter time: Delay time (in milliseconds) for a switch to forward a topology-collection
request packet through its successive ports. This argument ranges from 1 to 100
and defaults to 20.
Description Use the ntdp timer port-delay command to set the delay time for a port (on
the device whose topology information is collected) to wait to forward
topology-collection request packets after the last port (on the device whose
topology information is collected) forwards topology-collection request packets.
Use the undo ntdp timer port-delay command to restore the default delay
time.
By default, the delay time of a port is 20 ms.
ntdp timer port-delay 827
To avoid network congestion caused by a large amount of topology response
packets received by the topology collection device in short periods, a switch delays
for a specific period before it forwards a received topology-collection request
packet through the next port. You can use the ntdp timer port-delay command
to set the delay time.
These two commands are intended for switches that collect topology information.
They actually set the port-delay value for topology-collection request packets sent
by these switches. The port-delay value determines the delay time for a switch
receiving topology-collection request packets to forward them through the next
port.
Example # Set the delay time for the switch to forward topology-collection request packets
through the successive ports to 40 ms.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.3Com] ntdp timer port-delay 40
828 CHAPTER 61: NTDP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
CLUSTER CONFIGURATION
62 COMMANDS
add-member
Syntax add-member [ member- number] mac-address H-H-H [ password password ]
View Cluster view
Parameter member-number: Member number assigned to the candidate device to be added
to a cluster. This argument ranges from 1 to 255.
H-H-H: MAC address of the candidate device (in hexadecimal).
password: Password of the candidate device, a string comprising 1 to 256
characters. The password is required when you add a candidate device to a cluster.
However, this argument is not needed if the candidate device is not configured
with a password.
Description Use the add-member command to add a candidate device to a cluster.
You can add a candidate device to a cluster on the management device only.
If you do not specify the member number when adding a cluster member, the
management device assigns the next available member number to it.
After a candidate device is added to a cluster, the level-3 password of the device is
replaced by the password of the management device automatically.
Example # Add a candidate device to the cluster, setting the member number to 6. (Assume
that the MAC address and level-3 user password of the candidate device are
00E0-fc00-35e7 and 123456.)
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.3Com] cluster
[aaa_0.3Com-cluster] add-member 6 mac-address 00E0-fc00-35e7 password 123456
administrator-address
Syntax administrator-address mac-address name name
undo administrator-address
View Cluster view
830 CHAPTER 62: CLUSTER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter mac-address: MAC address of the management device.
name name: Name of an existing cluster, a string comprising up to 8 characters,
which can only be alphanumeric characters, subtraction sign (-), and underline (_).
Description Use the administrator-address command to set the MAC address of the
management device on a member device.
Use the undo administrator-address command to remove a member device
from the cluster.
By default, a switch belongs to no cluster.
In order that the member devices identify the management device correctly after
the system is restarted, the administrator-address command is enabled
automatically on the switch to specify the MAC address of the management
device in the cluster when the switch is added to the cluster as a member device.
Note that the undo administrator-address command is generally used in
debugging or restoration. You are recommended to use the delete-member
command to remove a cluster member from a cluster on the management device.
Example # Remove a member device from the cluster.
<aaa_1.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[aaa_1.3Com] cluster
[aaa_1.3Com-cluster] undo administrator-address
auto-build
Syntax auto-build [ recover ]
View Cluster view
Parameter recover: Establishes communication with all the member devices again.
Description Use the auto-build command to add the candidate device to the cluster
automatically to be a member device.
This command can be executed on a candidate device or a management device.
When you use this command on a candidate device, you will be required to enter
the cluster name and build a cluster. The system will collect candidate devices
automatically and then it is for the user to decide whether to add the collected
candidate devices into the cluster.
When you use this command on a management device, the system will collect
candidate devices automatically.
build 831
The recover keyword is used to recover a cluster. Execute the auto-build recover
command to look for the down members in the member list and add them to the
cluster again.
Note: Ensure that NTDP is enabled, because it is the basis of candidate and
member collection. The collection range is also decided through NTDP. You can
use the hop command in system view to modify the collection range.
If a member device is configured with a level-3 user password different from that
of the management device, it cannot be added to the cluster automatically.
c CAUTION: When configuring a cluster, you must ensure that the routing table is
not full. Otherwise, the private IP routes of the cluster cannot be advertised, and
as a result cluster handshake messages cannot be properly sent or received and
devices will repeatedly join or leave the cluster.
■ If the routing table of the administrative device is full upon establishment of a
cluster, all candidate devices will repeatedly join or leave the cluster.
■ If the routing table of the administrative device is full when a candidate device
of a cluster joins the cluster, this device will repeatedly join or leave the cluster.
Example # Set up a cluster automatically.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] cluster
[SW7750-cluster] auto-build
Please input cluster name:aaa
Collecting candidate list, please wait...
Candidate list:
Name Hops MAC Address Device
3Com 1 000f-e200-016a 3Com 2016-EI
Add all to cluster?(Y/N)y
%May 30 09:07:30 2006 aaa_0.3Com Switch 7758 CLST/5/LOG:
Member 000f-e200-016a is joined in cluster aaa.
Cluster auto-build Finish!
1 member(s) added successfully.
[aaa_0.3Com-cluster]
build
Syntax build name
undo build
View Cluster view
832 CHAPTER 62: CLUSTER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter name: Cluster name, a string comprising up to 8 characters, which can only be
alphanumeric characters, subtraction sign (-), and underline (_).
Description Use the build command to configure or modify the cluster name.
Use the undo build command to remove a cluster.
If the build command is executed on the candidate device, the current switch will
be configured as the management device and assigned with a cluster name.
If the build command is executed on the management device, the cluster name
will be modified.
The member number of a management device is 0.
Example # Configure the current switch to be a management device and specify the cluster
name to be aaa.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[SW7750] cluster
[SW7750-cluster] build aaa
[aaa_0.3Com-cluster]
cluster
Syntax cluster
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the cluster command to enter cluster view.
Example # Enter cluster view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[SW7750] cluster
[SW7750-cluster]
cluster enable
Syntax cluster enable
undo cluster enable
View System view
Parameter None
cluster switch-to 833
Description Use the cluster enable command to enable the cluster function on a switch.
Use the undo cluster enable command to disable the cluster function on a
switch.
By default, the cluster function is enabled on all the devices supporting cluster.
You need to create a cluster with the build command before using the cluster
enable command on the management device.
These two commands can be used on any device supporting the cluster function.
When you execute the undo cluster enable command on a management device,
the cluster is removed, and the switch stop operating as a management device.
When you execute this command on a member device, the cluster function is
disabled on the switch, and the switch quit the cluster. When you execute this
command on a switch that belongs to no cluster, the cluster function is disabled
on the switch.
Example # Enable the cluster function on a switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[SW7750] cluster enable
cluster switch-to
Syntax cluster switch-to { member-number | mac-address H-H-H | administrator }
View User view
Parameter member-number: Member number of a switch in a cluster, ranging from 0 to 255.
H-H-H: Specifies the MAC address of a member device.
administrator: Redirects from a member device to the management device.
Description Use the cluster switch-to command to switch between the management device
and member devices for configuration and management.
You can manage member devices in a cluster through the management device, on
which you can switch to member view to configure or manage specified member
devices, and then use the quit command to return to the management device.
Telnet connection is used for switching between the cluster administrative device
and member device. When switching between the two views, observe the
following rules:
■ Authentication is required when you switch between the cluster administrative
device view and member device view. The system will authenticate the super
password of the level-3 user. If the super password of the device requesting the
switchover is inconsistent with that of the device to be logged in, switchover
fails. When a candidate device is added to the cluster, its super password is
834 CHAPTER 62: CLUSTER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
automatically set to the super password of the administrative device. After the
cluster is set up, you are recommended not to change the super password of
the cluster member (including the administrative device and member device).
Otherwise, view switchover may fail because authentication is not passed.
■ When you switch from the administrative device view to the member device
view, the current user level in member device view is consistent with that in the
administrative device view.
■ When you switch from the member device view to the administrative device
view, the user level is assigned according to the preset level of the
administrative device.
■ If the number of Telnet users on the device to be logged in reaches the
threshold, view switchover fails.
When you use this command on the administrative device, if the member number
n does not exist or the specified mac-address is not in the member list, the system
will display an error message. To end the switchover, enter the quit command.
Example # Switch from the management device to the member device numbered 6 and
then switch back to the management device.
<aaa_0.3Com> cluster switch-to 6
<aaa_0.3Com> quit
<aaa_0.3Com>
cluster-mac
Syntax cluster-mac H-H-H
undo cluster-mac
View Cluster view
Parameters H-H-H: Multicast MAC address to be set for the cluster, in hexadecimal format.
This argument can be one of the following addresses: 0180-C200-0000,
0180-C200-000A, 0180-C200-0020 to 0180-C200-002F.
Description Use the cluster-mac command to configure a multicast MAC address for the
cluster.
Use the undo cluster-mac command to restore the default multicast MAC
address.
The default multicast MAC address is 0180-C200-000A.
Note that, you can only use this command on a management device.
The management device in a cluster is able to periodically send Switch Clustering
V2 multicast MAC synchronization packets. After you configure a multicast MAC
address on the management device, all the member/candidate devices of the
cluster will synchronize to the same multicast MAC address by receiving multicast
cluster-mac syn-interval 835
MAC synchronization packets. This guarantees that the member/candidate devices
of the cluster can receive the multicast packets from the management device.
Examples # Configure multicast MAC address 0180-C200-0028 for the cluster.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.3Com] cluster
[aaa_0.3Com-cluster] cluster-mac 0180-C200-0028
cluster-mac syn-interval
Syntax cluster-mac syn-interval time-interval
View Cluster view
Parameters time-interval: Interval to send Switch Clustering V2 multicast MAC synchronization
packets, ranging from 0 to 30 minutes.
Description Use the cluster-mac syn-interval command to set the interval for the
management device to send Switch Clustering V2 multicast MAC synchronization
packets periodically. You can only use this command on a management device.
By default, this interval is one minute.
If you set this interval to zero on a management device, the management device
will not send Switch Clustering V2 multicast MAC synchronization packets to
other devices.
Examples # Set the interval for the management device to send Switch Clustering V2
multicast MAC synchronization packets to one minute.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.3Com] cluster
[aaa_0.3Com-cluster] cluster-mac syn-interval 1
delete-member
Syntax delete-member member-number
View Cluster view
Parameter member-number: Member number of a switch in a cluster, ranging from 0 to 255.
Description Use the delete-member command to remove a member device from the cluster.
Perform the operation to remove a member device from a cluster on the
management device only. Otherwise, errors occur.
836 CHAPTER 62: CLUSTER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Remove the member device numbered 2 from the cluster.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.3Com] cluster
[aaa_0.3Com-cluster] delete-member 2
display cluster
Syntax display cluster
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display cluster command to display the state and statistics of the cluster
to which the current switch belongs.
When being executed on a member device, this command displays the
information such as cluster name, member number of the current switch, the
MAC address and state of the management device, holdtime, and the interval to
send packets.
When being executed on a management device, this command displays the
information such as cluster name, the number of the member devices in the
cluster, cluster state, holdtime and the interval to send packets.
The system will prompt that the device does not belong to any cluster if you
execute this command on a switch that does not belong to any cluster.
Example # Display cluster information (assuming that the current switch is a management
device).
<aaa_0.3Com> display cluster
Cluster name:"aaa"
Role:Administrator
Handshake timer:10 sec
Handshake hold-time:60 sec
IP-Pool:2.2.2.2/24
No logging host configured
No SNMP host configured
FTP server:8.8.8.8
No TFTP server configured
21 member(s) in the cluster, and 1 of them down.
# Display cluster information on the member device.
<aaa_2.3Com> display cluster
Cluster name:"aaa"
Role:Member
Member number:2
display cluster candidates 837
Handshake timer:10 sec
Handshake hold-time:60 sec
Administrator device mac address:00e0-fc00-7506
Administrator status:Up
Table 152 Field descriptions of the display cluster command
Field Description
Cluster name Name of the cluster
Role Cluster role of the switch
Member number Member number of the switch
Handshake timer Value of handshake timer
Handshake hold-time Handshake holdtime
Administrator device mac address MAC address of the management device
Administrator status State of the management device
display cluster candidates
Syntax display cluster candidates [ mac-address H-H-H | verbose ]
View Any view
Parameter mac-address H-H-H: Specifies the MAC address of a candidate device.
verbose: Displays the detailed information about all the candidate devices.
Description Use the display cluster candidates command to display the information about
the candidate devices of a cluster.
Execute this command on management devices only.
Example # Display the information about all the candidate devices.
<aaa_0.3Com> display cluster candidates
MAC HOP IP PLATFORM
0000-0000-004d 3 192.169.121.258/24 3Com 7506R
000f-e200-7502 2 8.8.8.3/24 3Com Switch 7757
000f-e200-1234 1 8.8.8.2/24 3Com S7502
Table 153 Field descriptions of the display cluster candidates command
Field Description
MAC MAC address of a candidate device
Hop Hops from a candidate device to the management device
IP IP address of a candidate device
Platform Platform of a candidate device
# Display the information about a specified candidate device.
<aaa_0.3Com-cluster> display cluster candidates mac-address 000f-e200-7502
Hostname : S7757
838 CHAPTER 62: CLUSTER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
MAC : 000f-e200-7502
Hop : 1
Platform : 3Com Switch 7757
IP : 8.8.8.3
# Display the detailed information about all the candidate devices.
<aaa_0.3Com Switch 7758>display cluster candidates verbose
Hostname : 3Com S7502
MAC : 000f-e201-0110
Hop : 1
Platform : 3Com S7502
IP :
Table 154 Field descriptions of the display cluster candidates verbose command
Field Description
Hostname Name of a candidate device
MAC MAC address of a candidate device
Hop Hops from a candidate device to the management device
IP IP address of a candidate device
Platform Platform of a candidate device
display cluster members
Syntax display cluster members [ member-number | verbose ]
View Any view
Parameter member-number: Member number of a switch in a cluster, ranging from 0 to 255.
verbose: Displays the detailed information about all the devices in a cluster.
Description Use the display cluster members command to display the information about
cluster members.
Execute this command on management devices only.
Example # Display the information about all the devices in the cluster.
<aaa_0.3Com> display cluster members
SN Device MAC Address Status Name
0 3Com Switch 7758 00e0-fc00-7506 Admin aaa_0.3Com
1 3Com S7502 000f-e200-1234 Up aaa_1.3Com-1
2 3Com Switch 7757 000f-e200-7502 Up aaa_2.3Com-2
3 3Com Switch 7758 0000-0000-004d Up aaa_3.3Com-3
Table 155 Field descriptions of the display cluster members command
Field Description
SN Member number
Device Device type
MAC Address MAC address of a device
display cluster members 839
Table 155 Field descriptions of the display cluster members command
Field Description
Status State of a device
Name Name of a device
# Display the detailed information about the management device and all member
devices.
<aaa_0.3Com> display cluster members verbose
Member number:0
Name: aaa_0.3Com
Device:3Com Switch 7758
MAC Address:00e0-fc00-7506
Member status:Admin
Hops to administrator device:0
IP: 8.8.8.1/24
Version:
3Com Comware Platform Software.
Comware Software, Version 3.10
Copyright(c) 2004-2006 3Com Corporation All rights reserved.
S7757-5308
Member number:1
Name:aaa_1.3Com-1
Device:3Com S7502
MAC Address:000f-e200-1234
Member status:Up
Hops to administrator device:
IP: 8.8.8.2/24
Version:
3Com Comware Platform Software.
Comware Software, Version 3.10
Copyright(c) 2004-2006 3Com Corporation All rights reserved.
S7757-5308
Member number:2
Name:aaa_2. 3Com-2
Device:3Com Switch 7757
MAC Address:000f-e200-7502
Member status:Up
Hops to administrator device:
IP:8.8.8.3/24
Version:
3Com Comware Platform Software.
Comware Software, Version 3.10
Copyright(c) 2004-2006 3Com Corporation All rights reserved.
S7757-5308
Member number:3
Name: aaa_3.3Com-3
Device:3Com Switch 7758
MAC Address:0000-0000-004d
Member status:Up
Hops to administrator device:2
IP: 192.168.1.26/24
Version:
3Com Comware Platform Software.
Comware Software, Version 3.10
Copyright(c) 2004-2006 3Com Corporation All rights reserved.
S7757-5308
840 CHAPTER 62: CLUSTER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 156 Field descriptions of the display cluster members verbose command
Field Description
Member number Device member number
Name Name of a device
Device Device type
MAC Address MAC address of a device
Member status State of a device
Hops to administrator device Hops from the current device to the management device
IP IP address of a device
Version Software version of the current device
ftp cluster
Syntax ftp cluster
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the ftp cluster command to establish control connection with the public FTP
server of the cluster and enter FTP client view.
Example # Connect the FTP clients to the remote FTP server of the cluster.
<123_1.3Com> ftp cluster
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in.
ftp-server
Syntax ftp-server ip-address
undo ftp-server
View Cluster view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the FTP server to be configured for the cluster.
Description Use the ftp-server command to configure an FTP server on the management
device for the member devices in the cluster.
holdtime 841
Use the undo ftp-server command to remove the FTP server configured for the
member devices in the cluster.
By default, the management device acts as the FTP Server.
You need to configure the IP address of an FTP server first for the member devices
in a cluster to access the FTP server through the management device.
Example # Configure the IP address of an FTP server on the management device.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.3Com] cluster
[aaa_0.3Com-cluster] ftp-server 1.0.0.9
holdtime
Syntax holdtime seconds
undo holdtime
View Cluster view
Parameter seconds: Holdtime (in seconds) ranging from 1 to 255.
Description Use the holdtime command to configure the holdtime of a switch.
Use the undo holdtime command to restore the default holdtime value.
■ If a switch does not receive any information of a peer device during the
holdtime, it sets the state of the peer device to "down". When the
communication between the two resumes, the corresponding member device
is re-added to the cluster (automatically).
■ If the downtime does not exceed the holdtime, the member device stays in the
normal state and needs not to be added again.
Execute these two commands on management devices only. The member devices
in a cluster acquire the holdtime setting from the management device.
Example # Set the holdtime to 30 seconds.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.3Com] cluster
[aaa_0.3Com-cluster] holdtime 30
ip address
Syntax ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length }
undo ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length }
842 CHAPTER 62: CLUSTER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View VLAN interface view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the VLAN interface, expressed in dotted decimal.
mask: Subnet mask of the VLAN interface IP address, expressed in dotted decimal.
mask-length: Length of the subnet mask , namely, the number of "1"s in the
subnet mask.
Description Use the ip address command to specify an IP address and subnet mask for the
VLAN interface.
Use the undo ip address command to remove the IP address and subnet mask
of the VLAN interface.
By default, the IP address of a VLAN interface is null.
n Note that:
■ The Switch 7750 use VLAN 1 as the cluster management VLAN to manage the
cluster.
■ The IP address of the Layer 3 virtual interface of the management VLAN must
be configured before a cluster is set up; otherwise, the cluster cannot be set up
successfully.
■ When a cluster is set up, the IP address of the management VLAN interface
cannot be modified any more.
Example # Set the IP address of VLAN interface 1 to 129.12.0.1 and the subnet mask to
255.255.255.0.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] ip address 129.12.0.1 255.255.255.0
ip-pool
Syntax ip-pool administrator-ip-address { ip-mask | ip-mask-length }
undo ip-pool
View Cluster view
Parameter administrator-ip-address: IP address of the management device of a cluster.
ip-mask: Mask of the cluster IP address pool.
ip-mask-length: Mask length of the cluster IP address pool.
Description Use the ip-pool command to configure a private IP address range for cluster
members on the switch to be configured as the management device.
logging-host 843
Use the undo ip-pool command to cancel the IP address range configuration.
Before establishing a cluster, you need to configure a private IP address pool for
the switches to be added to the cluster. When a candidate device is added to a
cluster, the management device assigns a private IP address to it for the candidate
device to communicate with other devices in the cluster. This enables you to
manage and maintain member devices in a cluster through the management
device.
Execute these two commands on switches that belong to no cluster only. The IP
address range of an existing cluster cannot be modified.
Example # Configure the IP address range of a cluster.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[SW7750] cluster
[SW7750-cluster] ip-pool 10.200.0.1 20
logging-host
Syntax logging-host ip-address
undo logging-host
View Cluster view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the logging host configured for the cluster.
Description Use the logging-host command to configure a logging host on the management
device for the member devices in the cluster.
Use the undo logging-host command to remove the public logging host for the
member devices in the cluster.
By default, no logging host is configured.
You need to configure the IP address of a logging host first for the member
devices in a cluster to send log information to the logging host through the
management device.
Example # Configure the IP address of the logging host on the management device.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[aaa_0.3Com] cluster
[aaa_0.3Com-cluster] logging-host 10.10.10.9
reboot member
Syntax reboot member { member-number | mac-address H-H-H } [ eraseflash ]
844 CHAPTER 62: CLUSTER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View Cluster view
Parameter member-number: Member number of a switch in a cluster, ranging from 0 to 255.
mac-address H-H-H: MAC address of the member device to be rebooted.
eraseflash: Deletes the configuration file when the member device reboots.
Description Use the reboot member command to reboot a specified member device on the
management device.
Communication between the management and member devices may be
interrupted due to some configuration errors. Through the remote control
function of member devices, you can control them remotely on the management
device. For example, you can reboot a member device that operates improperly
and specify to delete the booting configuration file when the member device
reboots, and thus restore normal communication between the management and
member devices.
The eraseflash keyword specifies to delete the booting configuration file when
the member device reboots.
Example # Reboot the member device numbered 2.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[aaa_0.3Com] cluster
[aaa_0.3Com-cluster] reboot member 2
snmp-host
Syntax snmp-host ip-address
undo snmp-host
View Cluster view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of a SNMP host to be configured for a cluster.
Description Use the snmp-host command to configure an SNMP host for the member
devices inside a cluster on the management device.
Use the undo snmp-host command to cancel the SNMP host configuration.
By default, no SNMP host is configured.
You need to configure the IP address of an SNMP host first for the cluster, in order
that the member devices in a cluster can send trap messages to the SNMP host
through the management device.
Example # Configure an SNMP host for the cluster on the management device.
tftp cluster get 845
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[aaa_0.3Com] cluster
[aaa_0.3Com-cluster] snmp-host 1.0.0.9
tftp cluster get
Syntax tftp cluster get source-file [ destination-file ]
View User view
Parameter source-file: Name of the file to be downloaded from the public TFTP server of the
cluster.
destination-file: Name of the downloaded file, which is saved in the switch.
Description Use the tftp cluster get command to download files from the specified directory
on the public TFTP server to the switch.
Related command: tftp cluster put.
Example # Download the file name LANSwitch.app from the public TFTP server of the
cluster to the switch and save it as vs.app.
<123_1.3Com> tftp cluster get LANSwitch.app vs.app
tftp cluster put
Syntax tftp cluster put source-file [ destination-file ]
View User view
Parameter source-file: File to be uploaded to the server.
destination-file: Name of the uploaded file saved in the storage directory of the
TFTP server.
Description Use the tftp put command to upload the file in the switch to the specified
directory in the TFTP server.
Related command: tftp cluster get.
Example # Upload the file named vrpcfg.txt in the switch to the public TFTP server of the
cluster and save it as temp.txt.
<123_1.3Com> tftp cluster put vrpcfg.txt temp.txt
846 CHAPTER 62: CLUSTER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
tftp-server
Syntax tftp-server ip-address
undo tftp-server
View Cluster view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of a TFTP server to be configured for a cluster.
Description Use the tftp-server command to configure a TFTP server for cluster members on
the management device.
Use the undo tftp-server command to cancel the TFTP server of the cluster
members.
By default, no TFTP server is configured.
You need to configure the IP address of the TFTP server for the cluster, in order that
the member devices in the cluster can access the TFTP server through the
management device.
Execute these two commands on management devices only.
Example # Configure a TFTP server on the management device.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[aaa_0.3Com] cluster
[aaa_0.3Com-cluster] tftp-server 1.0.0.9
timer
Syntax timer interval
undo timer
View Cluster view
Parameter interval: Interval (in seconds) to send handshake packets. This argument ranges
from 1 to 255.
Description Use the timer command to set the interval to send handshake packets.
Use the undo timer command to restore the default value of the interval.
By default, the interval to send handshake packets is 10 seconds.
Inside a cluster, the connections between member devices and the management
device are kept through transmitting handshake packets. Handshake packets in a
timer 847
cluster enable the management device to acquire the information about member
states link states.
Execute these two commands on management devices only. All the member
devices in a cluster acquire the handshake interval setting from the management
device.
Example # Configure the interval to send handshake packets to be 3 seconds.
<aaa_0.3Com> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[aaa_0.3Com] cluster
[aaa_0.3Com-cluster] timer 3
848 CHAPTER 62: CLUSTER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
POE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
63
display poe interface
Syntax display poe interface { interface-type interface-number | all }
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port on the switch. Refer to “Port Basic
Configuration Commands” on page 195 for details.
all: Displays the PoE information of all the PoE ports on the switch.
Description Use the display poe interface command to view the PoE status of a specific
port. If the all keyword is specified, the command displays the PoE status of all the
PoE ports.
Example # Display the PoE status of Ethernet3/0/1.
<SW7750> display poe interface Ethernet 3/0/1
Port power status :PD searching
Port power mode :signal
Port PD class :0
port power priority :low
Port max power :15400 mW
Port current power :0 mW
Port average power :0 mW
Port peak power :0 mW
Port current :0 mA
Port voltage :0.0 V
Table 157 Field descriptions of the display poe interface command
Field Description
Port power status PoE status of the port:
Disabled: Power is disabled on the port.
PD searching: The port is searching PD.
delivering: The port is delivering power to PD.
PD disconnected: PD is disconnected.
testing: The port is testing the PD.
fault: Nonstandard PD is detected or failure occurs.
Port power mode PoE mode of the port:
signal: The port supplies port in the signal mode.
spare: The port supplies power in the spare mode.
850 CHAPTER 63: POE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 157 Field descriptions of the display poe interface command
Field Description
Port PD class Class of power to the PD
Port power priority PoE priority of the port:
■ critical: The highest
■ high: High
■ low: Low
Port max power The maximum available power on the port
Port current power The current power on the port
Port average power The average power on the port
Port peak power The peak power on the port
Port current The current on the port
Port voltage The voltage on the port
# Display the PoE status of all ports.
<SW7750> display poe interface all
Interface Ethernet3/0/1 power status: delivering
Interface Ethernet3/0/2 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/3 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/4 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/5 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/6 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/7 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/8 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/9 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/10 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/11 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/12 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/13 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/14 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/15 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/16 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/17 power status: delivering
Interface Ethernet3/0/18 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/19 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/20 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/21 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/22 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/23 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/24 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/25 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/26 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/27 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/28 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/29 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/30 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/31 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/32 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/33 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/34 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/35 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/36 power status: PD searching
display poe interface power 851
Interface Ethernet3/0/37 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/38 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/39 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/40 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/41 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/42 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/43 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/44 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/45 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/46 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/47 power status: PD searching
Interface Ethernet3/0/48 power status: PD searching
display poe interface power
Syntax display poe interface power { interface-type interface-number | all }
View Any view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port on the switch. Refer to interface on page
205.
all: Displays the power of all PoE ports on the switch.
Description Use the display poe interface power command to view the power
information of a specific port of the switch. If the all keyword is specified, the
command displays the power information of all PoE ports on the switch.
Example # Display the power information of the PoE port Ethernet3/0/1.
<SW7750> display poe interface power Ethernet 3/0/1
Port power :700 mW
# Display the power information of all PoE ports.
<SW7750> display poe interface power all
Interface Ethernet3/0/1 current power : 700 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/2 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/3 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/4 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/5 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/6 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/7 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/8 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/9 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/10 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/11 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/12 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/13 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/14 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/15 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/16 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/17 current power : 13900 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/18 current power : 0 mw
852 CHAPTER 63: POE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Interface Ethernet3/0/19 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/20 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/21 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/22 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/23 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/24 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/25 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/26 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/27 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/28 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/29 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/30 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/31 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/32 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/33 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/34 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/35 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/36 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/37 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/38 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/39 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/40 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/41 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/42 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/43 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/44 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/45 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/46 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/47 current power : 0 mw
Interface Ethernet3/0/48 current power : 0 mw
display poe powersupply
Syntax display poe powersupply
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display poe powersupply command to view the parameters of the
external PoE power supply units (PSU).
Example # Display the parameters of external PoE PSUs.
<SW7750> display poe powersupply
Power Model :Spring Pms
Power Manufacturer :Tyco Electronics Com
Power Nominal Value :2400 W
Power Peak Value :0 W
Power Average Value :0 W
Power Current Current :0 mA
Power Current Voltage :54.0 V
Power Current Value :18 W
display poe pse 853
Power Software Version :512
Power Hardware Version :000
Table 158 Field descriptions of the display poe powersupply command
Field Description
Power Model Identification of the PSU manufacturer
Power manufacturer Name of the power manufacturer
Power Nominal Value Nominal power of the PSU
Power Peak Value Peak power of the PSU
Power Average Value Average power of the PSU
Power Current Current Current current of the PSU
Power Current Voltage Current voltage of the PSU
Power Current Value Current power of the PSU
Power Software Version Version of the PSU software
Power Hardware Version Version of the PSU hardware
display poe pse
Syntax display poe pse
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display poe pse command to display the parameters of all modules that
serve as power sourcing equipment (PSE).
Example # Display the parameters of all modules that serve as PSE on the switch.
<SW7750> display poe pse
PSE Information of board 4:
Power Current Value :450 W
Power Max Value :806 W
Power Peak Value :700 W
Power Average Value :475 W
Software Version :290
Hardware Version :000
CPLD Version :000
Table 159 Field descriptions of the display poe pse command
Field Description
Power Current Value Current power of the board
Power Max Value Maximum power of the board
Power Peak Value Peak power of the board
Power Average Value Average power of the board
Software Version Version of the PSE software
Hardware Version Version of the PSE hardware
CPLD Version Version of the PSE complex programmable logic device (CPLD)
854 CHAPTER 63: POE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
poe enable
Syntax poe enable
undo poe enable
View Ethernet port view and PoE profile view
Parameter None
Description Use the poe enable command to enable the PoE feature on a port.
Use the undo poe enable command to disable the PoE feature on a port.
By default, the PoE feature on a port is enabled if the PoE feature is enabled on a
module.
Example # Enable the PoE feature on Ethernet3/0/1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet3/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet3/0/1] poe enable
poe enable slot
Syntax poe enable slot slot-number
undo poe enable slot slot-number
View System view
Parameter slot-number: Number of the slot where the module resides.
Description Use the poe enable slot command to enable the PoE feature on a module.
Use the undo poe enable slot command to disable the PoE feature on a
module.
By default, the PoE feature is disabled on a module.
Note:
■ Before enabling the PoE feature on a module, you must ensure that the
remaining power output is not less than the maximum power required for the
module. Otherwise, PoE cannot be enabled on the module correctly.
■ After PoE is enabled on a PoE module, the rated power output shall be
reserved for the slot even when the module is removed from the slot. You need
to release this power output using the undo poe enable slot command.
poe legacy enable slot 855
■ If you insert a module which does not support PoE into the slot for which a
rated power output is reserved, the reserved power output shall be released.
■ If you insert a PoE module of another type into the slot for which a rated power
output is reserved, the switch still applies the former PoE configuration to the
port.
Example # Enable the PoE feature on the PoE module in slot 3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] poe enable slot 3
poe legacy enable slot
Syntax poe legacy enable slot slot-number
undo poe legacy enable slot slot-number
View System view
Parameter slot-number: Number of the slot where the module resides.
Description Use the poe legacy enable slot command to enable the module to perform
PoE-compatibility detection for the remote PDs.
Use the undo poe legacy slot command to disable PoE-compatibility detection
for the remote PDs.
By default, PoE-compatibility detection for PDs is disabled on the module.
Through the PoE-compatibility detection, the switch can detect the PDs
incompatible with IEEE802.3af and supply power to them.
c CAUTION: PoE-compatibility detection process is very slow and has impact on the
system performance, so you are recommended not to enable the
PoE-compatibility detection on a module if all PDs connected are
IEEE802.3af-compatible.
Example # Enable PoE-compatibility detection on the PoE module in slot 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] poe enable slot 2
[SW7750] poe legacy enable slot 2
poe max-power
Syntax poe max-power max-power
undo poe max-power
856 CHAPTER 63: POE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View Ethernet port view and PoE profile view
Parameter max-power: Maximum power distributed to the port, ranging from 1,000 to
15,400 in mW.
Description Use the poe max-power command to configure the maximum power supplied
by the current port.
Use the undo poe max-power command to restore the maximum power
supplied by the current port to the default value.
By default, the maximum power that a port can supply is 15,400 mW.
Example # Set the maximum power supplied by Ethernet3/0/1 to 12,000 mW.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 3/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet3/0/1] poe max-power 12000
poe max-power slot
Syntax poe max-power max-power slot slot-number
undo poe max-power slot slot-number
View System view
Parameter max-power: Maximum power distributed to the module, ranging from 37 to 806
in W.
slot-num: Number of the slot where the module resides.
Description Use the poe max-power command to set the maximum power of a module.
Use the undo poe max-power command to restore the default maximum
power of a module.
By default, the maximum power of a module is 37 W.
Example # Set the maximum power of the module in slot 3 to 400 W.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] poe max-power 400 slot 3
poe mode
Syntax poe mode { signal | spare }
poe power max-value 857
undo poe mode
View Ethernet port view and PoE profile view
Parameter signal: Supplies power through a signal cable.
spare: Supplies power through a spare cable.
Description Use the poe mode command to configure the PoE mode on the current port.
Use the undo poe mode command to restore the PoE mode on the current port
to the default mode.
By default, the port supplies power through a signal cable.
Note that the Switch 7750s do not support the spare mode currently.
Example # Set the PoE mode on Ethernet3/0/1 to signal.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 3/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet3/0/1] poe mode signal
poe power max-value
Syntax poe power max-value max-value
View System view
Parameter max-value: Maximum PoE power output on the switch, ranging from 37 to 2,400
in W.
Description Use the poe power max-value command to set the maximum power output on
the switch.
By default, the maximum PoE power output on the switch is 2,400 W.
Note that this command works only when the power you specify is greater than
the power that has been distributed to the modules.
Example # Set the maximum power output of the switch to 2,000 W.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] poe power max-value 2000
poe power-management
Syntax poe power-management { auto | manual } slot slot-number
858 CHAPTER 63: POE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View System view
Parameter auto: Manages PoE of the switch automatically.
manual: Manages PoE of the switch manually.
slot-number: Number of the slot where the module resides.
Description Use the poe power-management command to configure the PoE management
mode of the switch.
By default, the PoE management mode of the switch is auto.
This command and the PoE priority settings of PoE ports will work together to
control the power feeding of the switch when the switch is reaching its full power
load in power supply.
■ auto mode: When the switch is reaching its full load in supplying power, it will
first supply power to the PDs that are connected to the ports with critical
priority, and secondly supply power to the PDs that are connected to the ports
with high priority. For example: Port A has the power priority of critical. When
the switch is reaching full load and a new PD is now added to the port A, the
switch will power down a PD that is connected to a port with the lowest
priority and turn to feed this new PD.
■ manual mode: When the switch is reaching its full load in supplying power
externally and a new PD is added, it will neither take the priority into account
nor make change to its original power supply status; only the information
about the newly added device is provided. For example: Port A has the priority
of critical. When the switch is reaching full load and a new PD is now
connected to port A, the switch does not supply power to this new device.
Example # Configure the PoE management mode of the module in slot 3 of the switch to
auto.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] poe power-management auto slot 3
poe priority
Syntax poe priority { critical | high | low }
undo poe priority
View Ethernet port view and PoE profile view
Parameter critical: Sets the PoE priority of the port to critical.
high: Sets the PoE priority of the port to high.
low: Sets the PoE priority of the port to low.
poe upgrade 859
Description Use the poe priority command to configure the PoE priority of a port.
Use the undo poe priority command to restore the default PoE priority.
By default, the PoE priority of a port is low.
Note:
This command is used together with the poe power-management command,
and takes effect when the PoE power output of the switch reaches nearly to its
maximum value.
Example # Set the PoE priority of Ethernet3/0/1 to critical.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 3/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet3/0/1] poe priority critical
poe upgrade
Syntax poe upgrade { refresh | full } filename slot slot-number
View System view
Parameter refresh: Upgrades the existing valid software in the PSE in the refresh mode.
full: Reloads the software to the PSE when there is no valid software in the PSE.
filename: Upgrade file name, with a length of 1 character to 63 characters.
slot-number: Slot number of a module.
Description Use the poe upgrade command to update the processing software in the PSE
online.
n ■
■
The full mode is used only when you cannot use the refresh mode.
When the PSE processing software is damaged (that is, all the PoE commands
cannot be successfully executed), you can use the full mode to update and
restore the software.
■ When the upgrade procedure is interrupted for some unexpected reasons
(such as failure which cause restart), if the update in the full mode fails after
restart, you must update the software in the full mode after power-off and
restart of the device, and then restart the device manually. In this way, the
former PoE configuration is restored.
Example # Update the processing software in the PSE online.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] poe upgrade refresh 0400_001.S19 slot 2
This will update poe file on board 2. Continue? [Y/N] y
860 CHAPTER 63: POE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Board 2 upgrading poe, please wait...
Load finished!
Start Upgrading...
Frame 0 IO Board 2 upgrade POE Pse succeeded
POE PSU SUPERVISION DISPLAY
64 COMMANDS
display poe-power ac-input state
Syntax display poe-power ac-input state
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display poe-power ac-input state command to display the AC input
state of the PoE power supply units (PSUs) contained in the external PoE power
supply system.
Example # Display the AC input state of the PoE PSUs.
<SW7750> display poe-power ac-input state
PSU 1 AC Input State : Lack Phrase
PSU 2 AC Input State : Normal
PSU 3 AC Input State : Lack Phrase
Table 160 Field descriptions of the display poe-power ac-input state command
Field Description
AC input state Normal: The AC input is normal.
of PoE PSU 1
Lack Phrase: The PSU is idle.
Under Limit: The AC input voltage is lower than the lower threshold.
Upper Limit: The AC input voltage is higher than the upper threshold.
Fuse Broken: The fuse is broken.
Switch Off: The switch is off.
display poe-power alarm
Syntax display poe-power alarm
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display poe-power alarm command to display the detailed alarm
information about the external PoE PSUs.
862 CHAPTER 64: POE PSU SUPERVISION DISPLAY COMMANDS
Example # Display the detailed alarm information about the external PoE PSUs.
<SW7750> display poe-power alarm
PSU alarm detail:
Number of PSUs : 1
PSU 1 : Absent PSU is absent.
PSU 2 : Normal PSU is in normal state.
PSU 3 : Absent PSU is absent.
Table 161 Field descriptions of the display poe-power alarm command
Field Description
The alarm information PSU is in normal state: The PSU operates normally.
about PoE PSU1
NOTLINK: The PSU is not linked (the controller fails to
communicate with this PSU or the PSU is not inserted). You can
clear the failure by powering off the PSU or inserting a PSU.
INERROR: PSU input error. Restoring the normal AC input can
clear the error.
OUTERROR: PSU output error (No normal DC output from the
PSU).
HIGHVOL: Overvoltage on the PSU (the PSU is shut down because
its outputs overvoltage).
HIGHTEP: It is overheated in the PSU.
FANERROR: The fan fails.
CLOSE: The PSU is shut down.
CURLIMIT: The current of the PSU is limited.
Absent: The PSU is absent.
display poe-power dc-output state
Syntax display poe-power dc-output state
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display poe-power dc-output state command to display the DC
output state of the PoE PSUs in-use.
Example # Display the DC output states of the in-use PoE PSUs.
<SW7750> display poe-power dc-output state
DC Output State : Normal
display poe-power dc-output value 863
Table 162 Field descriptions of the display poe-power dc-output state command
Field Description
DC output state of the Normal: The DC output is normal.
external PoE PSU
Under Limit: The DC output voltage is lower than the lower
threshold.
Upper Limit: The DC output voltage is higher than the upper
threshold.
Fuse Broken: The fuse is broken.
Switch Off: The switch is off.
Hardware Fault: Hardware fails.
display poe-power dc-output value
Syntax display poe-power dc-output value
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display poe-power dc-output value command to display the DC
output voltage/current values of the external PoE PSUs.
Example # Display the DC output voltage/current values of the external PoE PSUs.
<SW7750> display poe-power dc-output value
DC Output Voltage : 53.997
DC Output Current : 0.350 A
Table 163 Field descriptions of the display poe-power dc-output value command
Field Description
DC Out Voltage DC output voltage
DC Output Current DC output current
display poe-power switch state
Syntax display poe-power switch state
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display poe-power switch state command to display the number and
current state of the AC power distribution switches in the external PoE PSU.
Example # Display the number and current state of the AC power distribution switches.
864 CHAPTER 64: POE PSU SUPERVISION DISPLAY COMMANDS
<SW7750> display poe-power switch state
Switch Number : 0
n Currently, the Switch 7750 do not use any AC power distribution switch, so the
returned value is always 0.
display supervision-module information
Syntax display supervision-module information
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display supervision-module information command to display the
basic information about the external PoE PSUs, including the name, the model,
the specifications and output power.
Example # Display the information about the PoE PSUs.
<SW7750> display supervision-module information
Supervision Module Version : 2.6
Supervision Module Name : Spring Pms
Power Type : PSE2500-A
Power Rating Value : 2400 W
Power Peak Value : 1506 W
Power Average Value : 1482 W
Power Current Value : 1502 W
PSU Number : 1
PSU 2
Rating Output Power : 2500 W (220V)/1250 W(110V)
Hard Version Info : NP Series
Table 164 Field descriptions of the display supervision-module information
command
Field Description
Supervision Module Version Software version of the supervision module
Supervision Module Name Name of the supervision module
Power Type Model of the external PoE PSU
Power Rating Value Rated power of the external PoE PSU
Power Peak Value Peak power of the external PoE PSU
Power Average Value Average Power of the external PoE PSU
Power Current Value Current power of the external PoE PSU
PSU number Number of PoE PSUs
Rating Output Power Rated output power of the PoE PSU: 2,500 W for 220 VAC
input, 1,250 W for 110 VAC input
Hard Version Info Hardware version information of the external PoE PSUs
POE PSU SUPERVISION
65 CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
poe-power input-thresh lower
Syntax poe-power input-thresh lower string
View System view
Parameter string: Undervoltage alarm threshold (in V) in the format of X.X.
■ For 220 VAC input, it ranges from 176.0V to 264.0V
■ For 110 VAC input, it ranges from 90.0V to 132.0V
Description Use the poe-power input-thresh lower command to set the undervoltage
alarm threshold of AC input for the external PoE PSUs.
For 220 VAC input, the recommended value is 181.0 V; for 110VAC input, the
recommended value is 90.0 V.
Example # Set the undervoltage alarm threshold of AC input for the external PoE PSUs to
181.0 V.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] poe-power input-thresh lower 181.0
Set lower input-threshold power successfully!
poe-power input-thresh upper
Syntax poe-power input-thresh upper string
View System view
Parameter string: Overvoltage alarm threshold (in V) in the format of X.X.
■ For 220 VAC input, it ranges from 176.0V to 264.0V.
■ For 110 VAC input, it ranges from 90.0V to 132.0V.
Description Use the poe-power input-thresh upper command to set the overvoltage
alarm threshold of AC input for the external PoE PSUs.
866 CHAPTER 65: POE PSU SUPERVISION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
For 220 VAC input, the recommended value is 264.0 V; For 110VAC input, the
recommended value is 132.0 V.
Example # Set the overvoltage alarm threshold of AC input for the external PoE PSUs to
264.0 V.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] poe-power input-thresh upper 264.0
Set upper input-threshold power successfully!
poe-power output-thresh lower
Syntax poe-power output-thresh lower string
View System view
Parameter string: Undervoltage alarm threshold (in volts V) in the format of X.X, in the range
of 45.0 to 47.0.
Description Use the poe-power output-thresh lower command to set the undervoltage
alarm threshold of DC output for the external PoE PSUs.
For either 220 VAC or 110 VAC input, the recommended threshold is 47.0 V.
Example # Set the undervoltage alarm threshold of DC output for the external PoE PSUs to
47.0 V.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] poe-power output-thresh lower 47.0
Set lower output-threshold power successfully!
poe-power output-thresh upper
Syntax poe-power output-thresh upper string
View System view
Parameter string: Overvoltage alarm threshold (in volts V) in the format of X.X, in the range
of 55.0 to 57.0.
Description Use the poe-power output-thresh upper command to set the overvoltage
alarm threshold of DC output for the external PoE PSUs.
For either 220 VAC or 110 VAC input, the recommended threshold is 55.0 V.
Example # Set the overvoltage alarm threshold of DC output for the external PoE PSUs to
55.0 V.
poe-power output-thresh upper 867
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] poe-power output-thresh upper 55.0
Set upper output-threshold power successfully!
868 CHAPTER 65: POE PSU SUPERVISION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
POE PROFILE CONFIGURATION
66 COMMANDS
n PoE profile is a set of PoE configurations in Ethernet port view. You can specify PoE
configurations to be applied in Ethernet port view in PoE profiles.
apply poe-profile
Syntax In system view, use the following commands:
apply poe-profile profilename interface interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ]
undo apply poe-profile profilename interface interface-type interface-number [
to interface-type interface-number ]
In Ethernet port view, use the following commands:
apply poe-profile profilename
undo apply poe-profile profilename
View System view and Ethernet port view
Parameter profilename: Name of a PoE profile, a string of 1 to 15 characters. It starts with a
letter from a to z or from A to Z, and it cannot be any of reserved keywords like
all, interface, user, undo, and mode.
interface-type interface-number: interface-type indicates a port type and
interface-number indicates a port number.
Description Use the apply poe-profile command to apply the existing PoE profile
configuration to the specified Ethernet port.
Use the undo apply poe-profile command to cancel the PoE profile
configuration for the specified Ethernet port.
Only one PoE profile can be in use at any time for each Ethernet port.
n The following rules should be obeyed
■ A PoE profile is a group of PoE configurations. Multiple PoE features can be set
in a PoE profile. When the apply poe-profile command applies a PoE profile
to a port, some PoE features can be applied successfully while some PoE
configurations in it cannot.
870 CHAPTER 66: POE PROFILE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
■ When the apply poe-profile command is used to apply a PoE profile to a
port, the PoE profile is applied successfully if one PoE feature in the PoE profile
is applied properly.
■ If one or more features in the PoE profile are not applied properly on a port,
the switch prompts explicitly which PoE features in the PoE profile are not
applied properly on which ports.
■ The display current-configuration command can be used to query which
PoE profiles are applied to a port. However, the command cannot be used to
query which PoE features in a PoE profiles are applied successfully.
Example # Apply the existing PoE profile (profile-test) configuration to Ethernet2/0/1
through Ethernet2/0/9 ports of the switch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] apply poe-profile profile-test interface Ethernet 2/0/1 to
Ethernet 2/0/9
display poe-profile
Syntax display poe-profile { all-profile | interface interface-type interface-number |
name profilename }
View Any view
Parameter all-profile: Displays all PoE profiles.
interface-type interface-number: interface-type indicates a port type and
interface-number indicates a port number.
profilename: Name of a specified PoE profile.
Description Use the display poe-profile command to display detailed configuration
information of the created PoE profile for a switch.
Example # Display detailed configuration information for the PoE profile by the name of
profile-test.
<SW7750> display poe-profile name profile-test
poe-profile
Syntax poe-profile profilename
undo poe-profile profilename
View System view
poe-profile 871
Parameter profilename: Name of PoE profile, a string with 1 to 15 characters. It starts with a
letter from a to z or from A to Z, and it cannot be any of reserved keywords like
all, interface, user, undo, and mode.
Description Use the poe-profile command to create a PoE profile.
Use the undo poe-profile command to delete an existing PoE profile.
The following PoE features can be configured in the PoE profile mode:
poe enable
poe mode { signal | spare }
poe priority { critical | high | low }
poe max-power max-power
The maximum number of PoE profiles that can be configured for an S3900 switch
is 100.
Example # Create a PoE profile by the name of profile-test.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] poe-profile profile-test
872 CHAPTER 66: POE PROFILE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
UDP-HELPER CONFIGURATION
67 COMMANDS
display udp-helper server
Syntax display udp-helper server [ interface vlan-interface vlan-id ]
View Any view
Parameter vlan-id: ID of a VLAN.
Description Use the display udp-helper server command to display the information about
the configured destination servers connected to a specified VLAN interface and
the number of the packets forwarded to each destination server. If you do not
specified the vlan-id argument, the corresponding information about all the VLAN
interfaces is displayed.
Example # Display the information about the configured destination servers connected to
VLAN 1 interface and the number of the packets forwarded to the destination
servers.
<SW7750> display udp-helper server interface Vlan-interface 1
Interface name Server address Packets sent
Vlan-interface1 192.1.1.2 0
The information above shows that the server with its IP address being 192.1.1.2 is
configured as a destination server and is connected to VLAN 1 interface, and no
packets are forwarded to it so far.
reset udp-helper packet
Syntax reset udp-helper packet
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset udp-helper packet command to clear the statistics about the
packets forwarded by UDP-Helper.
Example # Clear the statistics about the packets forwarded by UDP-Helper.
<SW7750> reset udp-helper packet
874 CHAPTER 67: UDP-HELPER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
udp-helper enable
Syntax udp-helper enable
undo udp-helper enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the udp-helper enable command to enable the UDP-Helper function.
Use the undo udp-helper enable command to disable the UDP-Helper
function.
By default, UDP-Helper is disabled.
Example # Enable UDP-Helper.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] udp-helper enable
udp-helper port
Syntax udp-helper port { port | dns | netbios-ds | netbios-ns | tacacs | tftp | time }
undo udp-helper port { port | dns | netbios-ds | netbios-ns | tacacs | tftp |
time }
View System view
Parameter port: number of a UDP port to be configured as a UDP-Helper destination port, in
the range 1 to 65535 (except for 67 and 68).
dns: Specifies the DNS UDP port (port 53) as a UDP-Helper destination port.
netbios-ds: Specifies the NetBIOS-DS UDP port (port 138) as a UDP-Helper
destination port.
netbios-ns: Specifies the NetBIOS-NS UDP port (port 137) as a UDP-Helper
destination port.
tacacs: Specifies the TACACS UDP port (port 49) as a UDP-Helper destination port.
tftp: Specifies the TFTP UDP port (port 69) as a UDP-Helper destination port.
time: Specifies the time service UDP port (port 37) as a UDP-Helper destination
port.
udp-helper server 875
Description Use the udp-helper port command to specify a UDP-Helper destination port.
Use the undo udp-helper port command to disable a port from being a
UDP-Helper destination port.
With UDP-Helper enabled, UDP broadcast packets with their destination port
being the six default UDP ports (that is, port 69, 53, 37, 137, 138, and 49) are
forwarded to the configured destination servers by default. After the UDP-Helper
function is disabled, all the configured UDP-Helper destination ports are cancelled,
including the default UDP ports.
n Note that:
■ Before configuring udp-helper port, you must enable UDP-Helper.
■ When you view the configuration information by using the display
current-configuration command, information about default UDP ports is not
displayed. Such information is displayed only when a default port is disabled.
Example # Configure the DNS UDP port as a UDP-Helper destination port.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] udp-helper port dns
udp-helper server
Syntax udp-helper server ip-address
undo udp-helper server [ ip-address ]
View VLAN interface view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the device to be configured as a destination server, in
dotted decimal notation.
Description Use the udp-helper server command to specify a destination server for the UDP
broadcast packets to be forwarded.
Use the undo udp-helper server command to remove a configured destination
server.
No destination server is configured by default.
Currently, you can configure up to 20 destination servers on a VLAN interface.
Note that if you do not provide the ip-address argument when executing the
undo udp-helper server command, all the destination servers configured on the
VLAN interface are removed.
Related command: display udp-helper server.
876 CHAPTER 67: UDP-HELPER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Configure the device with its IP address being 192.1.1.2 as a destination server
for the UDP broadcast packets to be forwarded on VLAN 1 interface.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-interface1] udp-helper server 192.1.1.2
SNMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
68
display snmp-agent
Syntax display snmp-agent { local-switch fabricid | remote-switch fabricid }
View Any view
Parameter local-switch fabricid: Displays a local switch fabric ID.
remote-switch fabricid: Displays a remote switch fabric ID.
Description Use the display snmp-agent command to view the switch fabric ID of the
current device.
An SNMP switch fabric ID identifies an SNMP entity uniquely within an SNMP
domain. As an indispensable part of an SNMP entity, an SNMP switch fabric
performs the function of sending, receiving and authenticating SNMP message,
extracting PDU, packet encapsulation and the communication with SNMP
application.
Example # Display the local switch fabric ID of the current device.
<SW7750> display snmp-agent local-switch fabricid
SNMP local EngineID: 00000009020000000C025808
SNMP local EngineID in the above information represents the ID of the local SNMP
switch fabric.
display snmp-agent community
Syntax display snmp-agent community [ read | write ]
View Any view
Parameter read: Displays read-only community information.
write: Displays read-write community information.
Description Use the display snmp-agent community command to view the information
about the currently configured community names for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c.
878 CHAPTER 68: SNMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Display the currently configured community names.
<SW7750> display snmp-agent community
Community name:public
Group name:public
Storage-type: nonVolatile
Community name:private
Group name:private
Storage-type: nonVolatile
Table 165 Field descriptions of the display snmp-agent community command
Field Description
Community name Community name
Group name Group name
Storage-type Storage type, including volatile, nonVolatile, permanent, readOnly, and
other.
display snmp-agent group
Syntax display snmp-agent group [ group-name ]
View Any view
Parameter groupname: The group name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
Description Use the display snmp-agent group command to view group name, security
model, state of various views and storage models.
Example # Display SNMP group name and security model.
<SW7750> display snmp-agent group
Group name: hello
Security model: v2c noAuthnoPriv
Readview: ViewDefault
Writeview: <no specified>
Notifyview :<no specified>
Storage-type: nonvolatile
The following table describes the output fields.
Table 166 Field descriptions of the display snmp-agent group command
Field Description
Group name SNMP group name
Security model Security model of that group, including authorization and encryption
(AuthPriv), authorization and no encryption (AuthnoPriv), no authorization
and no encryption (noAuthnoPriv).
Readview Read-only MIB view name corresponding to that group
Writeview Writable MIB view corresponding to that group
Notifyview The name of the notify MIB view corresponding to that group
display snmp-agent mib-view 879
Table 166 Field descriptions of the display snmp-agent group command
Field Description
Storage-type Storage type, including volatile, nonVolatile, permanent, readOnly and
other.
display snmp-agent mib-view
Syntax display snmp-agent mib-view [ exclude | include | viewname view-name ]
View Any view
Parameter exclude: Displays the SNMP MIB view (excluded).
Include: Displays the SNMP MIB view (included).
Viewname: Displays the SNMP MIB according to the view name.
view-name: SNMP MIB view to be displayed. It is a character string, ranging from 1
to 32 characters.
Description Use the display snmp-agent mib-view command to view the MIB view
configuration information of the current Ethernet switch.
Example # Display the information about the currently configured MIB view.
<SW7750> display snmp-agent mib-view
View name:system
MIB Subtree:system
Subtree mask:
Storage-type: nonVolatile
View Type:included
View status:active
View name:ViewDefault
MIB Subtree:iso
Subtree mask:
Storage-type: nonVolatile
View Type:included
View status:active
View name:ViewDefault
MIB Subtree:snmpUsmMIB
Subtree mask:
Storage-type: nonVolatile
View Type:excluded
View status:active
View name:ViewDefault
MIB Subtree:snmpVacmMIB
Subtree mask:
Storage-type: nonVolatile
View Type:excluded
View status:active
View name:ViewDefault
MIB Subtree:snmpModules.18
Subtree mask:
880 CHAPTER 68: SNMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Storage-type: nonVolatile
View Type:excluded
View status:active
Table 167 Field descriptions of the display snmp-agent mib-view command
Field Description
View name View name
MIB Subtree MIB subtree
Subtree mask Subtree mask
Storage-type Storage type
View Type Includes or excludes access to an MIB object
View status: active/inactive Indicates the MIB view status: active or inactive
c CAUTION: For the above commands, when the SNMP agent is disabled, the
system gives the prompt "SNMP agent disabled".
display snmp-agent statistics
Syntax display snmp-agent statistics
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display snmp-agent statistics command to view the statistics
information about SNMP packets.
This command provides statistics for SNMP operations.
Example # Display the statistics information about SNMP packets.
<SW7750> display snmp-agent statistics
9232 Messages delivered to the SNMP entity
0 Messages which were for an unsupported version
0 Messages which used a SNMP community name not known
0 Messages which represented an illegal operation for the community supplied
0 ASN.1 or BER errors in the process of decoding
9266 Messages passed from the SNMP entity
0 SNMP PDUs which had badValue error-status
0 SNMP PDUs which had genErr error-status
11 SNMP PDUs which had noSuchName error-status
0 SNMP PDUs which had tooBig error-status (Maximum packet size 2000)
33029 MIB objects retrieved successfully
26 MIB objects altered successfully
714 GetRequest-PDU accepted and processed
8514 GetNextRequest-PDU accepted and processed
10 GetBulkRequest-PDU accepted and processed
9230 GetResponse-PDU accepted and processed
1 SetRequest-PDU accepted and processed
34 Trap PDUs accepted and processed
display snmp-agent sys-info 881
display snmp-agent sys-info
Syntax display snmp-agent sys-info [ contact | location | version ]*
View Any view
Parameter contact: Displays the contact information of the current device.
location: Displays the physical location of the current device.
version: Displays the version information about the SNMP running in the system.
Description Use the display snmp-agent sys-info command to view the system contact
(sysContact) string, system location string, and the current SNMP version.
This command displays all information if you choose no parameter.
Example # Display the sysContact string.
<SW7750> display snmp-agent sys-info contact
The contact person for this managed node:
3Com Corporation
The above information indicates that the contact of this device is 3Com
Corporation.
# Display the system location string.
<SW7750> display snmp-agent sys-info location
The physical location of this node:
Marlborough, MA
The above information indicates that the device location is Marlborough, MA.
# Display the current SNMP version.
<SW7750> display snmp-agent sys-info version
SNMP version running in the system:
SNMPv3
The above information indicates that the current SNMP version is SNMPv3.
display snmp-agent usm-user
Syntax display snmp-agent usm-user [ switch fabricid switch fabricid | username
user-name | group group-name ]*
View Any view
Parameter switch fabricid: Displays the SNMPv3 user information of the specified switch
fabric ID, which ranges from 10 to 64 hexadecimal numerals.
882 CHAPTER 68: SNMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
username: Displays information about the specified SNMPv3 user, which ranges
from 1 to 32 bytes.
groupname: Displays information about users in the specified group name, which
ranges from 1 to 32 bytes.
Description Use the display snmp-agent usm-user command to view SNMP user
information.
If you do not specify a parameter, all the information will be displayed.
Example # Display all user information.
<SW7750> display snmp-agent usm-user switch fabricid 1234567890
User name: userv3aaaa
Group name: managev3group
Engine ID: 1234567890
Storage-type: nonVolatile
UserStatus: active
Table 168 describes the output fields.
Table 168 Field descriptions of the display snmp-agent usm-user command
Field Description
User name SNMP user name
Group name The group name which the SNMP user name belongs to
Engine ID The character string identifying the SNMP device
Storage-type Storage type of SNMP information, including volatile, nonVolatile,
permanent, readOnly and other.
UserStatus SNMP user status
enable snmp trap updown
Syntax enable snmp trap updown
undo enable snmp trap updown
View Ethernet port view/interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the enable snmp trap updown command to enable the sending of
port/interface linkUp and linkDown traps.
Use the undo enable snmp trap updown command to disable the sending of
linkUp and linkDown traps.
By default, the sending of port/interface linkUp and linkDown traps is enabled.
snmp-agent 883
The enable snmp trap updown and snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent
target-host commands are used at the same time. You can use the snmp-agent
target-host command to specify the hosts that can receive Trap information. To
send Trap information, you must configure at least one snmp-agent target-host
command.
Example # Enable the port Ethernet 2/0/1 to send linkUp and linkDown SNMP traps, using
the community name "public" to the NMS whose IP address is 10.1.1.1.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent trap enable
[SW7750] snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1 par
ams securityname public
[SW7750] interface ethernet2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] enable snmp trap updown
snmp-agent
Syntax snmp-agent
undo snmp-agent
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the snmp-agent command to enable SNMP Agent.
Use the undo snmp-agent command to disable SNMP Agent.
By default, SNMP Agent is disabled.
Example # Disable running SNMP Agent.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] undo snmp-agent
snmp-agent community
Syntax snmp-agent community { read | write } community-name [ [ acl acl-number |
mib-view view-name ]*
undo snmp-agent community community-name
View System view
Parameter read: Indicates that MIB object can only be read. Only the read-only community
can query device information.
884 CHAPTER 68: SNMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
write: Indicates that MIB object can be read and written. The read-write
community can configure the device.
community-name: The community name, a character string of 1 to 32 characters.
view-name: The MIB view name, a character string of 1 to 32 characters.
acl-number: The basic access control list (ACL) number specified by the
community, ranging from 2,000 to 2,999.
Description Use the snmp-agent community command to configure community access
name and enable the access to SNMP.
Use the undo snmp-agent community command to cancel the settings of
community access name.
Example # Configure community name as comaccess and permit read-only access by this
community name.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent community read comaccess
# Configure community name as mgr and permit read-write access.
[SW7750] snmp-agent community write mgr
# Remove community name comaccess.
[SW7750] undo snmp-agent community comaccess
snmp-agent group
Syntax Versions V1 and V2C:
snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name [ read-view read-view ] [
write-view write-view ] [ notify-view notify-view ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name
Version V3:
snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ] [ read-view
read-view ] [ write-view write-view ] [notify-view notify-view ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ]
View System view
Parameter v1: Specifies SNMPv1.
v2c: Specifies SNMPv2c.
snmp-agent local-switch fabricid 885
v3: Specifies SNMPv3.
groupname: Group name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
authentication: Configures to authenticate the packet without encryption.
privacy: Configures to authenticate and encrypt the packet.
read-view: Sets read-only view.
read-view: Read-only view name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes
write-view: Sets read-write view
write-view: Name of read-write view, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
notify-view: Sets notify view.
notify-view: Notification view name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
acl: Sets an ACL.
acl-number: Indicates an ACL, ranging from 2,000 to 2,099.
Description Use the snmp-agent group command to configure a new SNMP group, that is,
to map SNMP user to SNMP view.
Use the undo snmp-agent group command to cancel a specified SNMP group.
By default, the SNMP group configured with the snmp-agent group v3
command is not authenticated and encrypted.
Related command: snmp-agent mib-view, snmp-agent usm-user.
Example # Create SNMPv3 group hello.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent group v3 hello
snmp-agent local-switch fabricid
Syntax snmp-agent local-switch fabricid switch fabricid
undo snmp-agent local-switch fabricid
View System view
Parameter switch fabricid: Specifies the switch fabric ID with a character string, only
composed of 10 to 64 hexadecimal numbers. Two hexadecimal characters form an
octet.
886 CHAPTER 68: SNMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the snmp-agent local-switch fabricid command to set the switch fabric
ID of the local SNMP entity.
Use the undo snmp-agent local-switch fabricid command to restore the
default setting.
By default, the device switch fabric ID is "Enterprise number + device
information". Device information is determined according to different products. It
can be an IP address, MAC address or user-defined hexadecimal numeral string.
Related command: snmp-agent usm-user.
Example # Configure the local device name as 1234512345.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent local-switch fabricid 1234512345
snmp-agent mib-view
Syntax snmp-agent mib-view { included | excluded } view-name oid-tree
undo snmp-agent mib-view view-name
View System view
Parameter included: Includes the MIB subtree.
Excluded: Excludes the MIB subtree.
view-name: View name. It is a character string, ranging from 1 to 32 characters.
oid-tree: The OID MIB subtree of the MIB object subtree. It is a character string,
ranging from 1 to 255 characters. It can be a character string of the variable OID
(such as 1.4.5.3.1), or a variable name (such as system). The character string can
include wildcards (such as 1.4.5.*.*.1).
Description Use snmp-agent mib-view command to create or update the view information,
limiting the MIB objects to be accessed by the NMS.
Use the undo snmp-agent mib-view command to cancel the current setting.
By default, the view name is ViewDefault and OID is 1.
Related command: snmp-agent group.
Example # Create an SNMP MIB view that consists of all the objects of MIB-II.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent mib-view included mib2 1.3.6.1.2.1
snmp-agent packet max-size 887
snmp-agent packet max-size
Syntax snmp-agent packet max-size byte-count
undo snmp-agent packet max-size
View System view
Parameter byte-count: Maximum size of the SNMP packet (in bytes) that the Agent can
send/receive, ranging from 484 to 17,940.
Description Use the snmp-agent packet max-size command to set the maximum size of
SNMP packet that the Agent can send/receive.
Use undo snmp-agent packet max-size command to restore the default size of
SNMP packet.
The sizes of the SNMP packets that the Agent can send/receive are different
because network environments are different.
Example # Set the maximum size of the SNMP packet that the Agent can send/receive to
1,042 bytes.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent packet max-size 1042
snmp-agent sys-info
Syntax snmp-agent sys-info { contact sys-contact | location sys-location | version { {
v1 | v2c | v3 }* | all } }
undo snmp-agent sys-info { { contact | location }* | version { { v1 | v2c | v3 }*
| all } }
View System view
Parameter contact: Sets the contact for system maintenance.
sysContact: The character string describing contact information for system
maintenance.
location: Sets the geographical location of the device.
sys-location: The geographical location of the device.
version: Specifies version of running SNMP.
v1: SNMP V1.
888 CHAPTER 68: SNMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
v2c: SNMP V2C.
v3: SNMP V3.
all: All SNMP versions, including SNMP V1, SNMP V2C, SNMP V3.
Description Use the snmp-agent sys-info command to configure system information such
as geographical location of the device, information for system maintenance and
version information of running SNMP.
Use the undo snmp-agent sys-info location command to remove the current
configuration.
If the device fails, the device maintenance person can use contact information to
contact the manufacturer.
By default, the contact information is " 3Com Corporation", the system location is
" Marlborough, MA", the SNMP version is SNMP V3.
Related command: display snmp-agent sys-info.
Example # Set contact information for system maintenance as Dial System Operator #
1234.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent sys-info contact Dial System Operator # 1234
snmp-agent target-host
Syntax snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain { ip-address } [ udp-port
port-number ] params securityname security-string [ v1 | v2c | v3
[authentication | privacy ] ]
undo snmp-agent target-host ip-address securityname security-string
View System view
Parameter trap: Specifies the host to be a Trap host.
address: Specifies the address of the destination host for transmitting SNMP
messages.
udp-domain: Specifies transport domain over UDP for the target host.
ip-address: The IPv4 address of the host receiving Trap packets.
port-number: Number of the port receiving Trap packets, ranging from 0 to
65,535 characters.
params: Specifies SNMP target host information to be used in the generation of
SNMP messages.
snmp-agent trap enable 889
security-string: The community name of SNMP V1 and SNMP V2C, or SNMP V3
user name, ranging from 1 to 32 characters.
v1: Represents SNMPv1.
v2c: Represents SNMPv2C.
v3: RepresentsSNMPv3.
authentication: Configures to authenticate the packet without encryption.
privacy: Configures to authenticate and encrypt the packet.
Description Use snmp-agent target-host command to configure destination of SNMP Trap
packets.
Use undo snmp-agent target-host command to cancel the current setting.
The snmp-agent target-host command and the snmp-agent trap enable or
enable snmp trap updown command must be used at the same time on the
device to send Trap packets.
1 Use the snmp-agent trap enable or enable snmp trap updown command to
set Trap packets allowed to send (all Trap packets can be sent by default).
2 Use the snmp-agent target-host command to set the address of the
destination host receiving SNMP Trap packets.
Related command: snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent trap source and snmp-agent trap life.
Example # Enable sending SNMP Trap packets to 10.1.1.1 with community name public.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent trap enable standard
[SW7750] snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1 par
ams securityname public
snmp-agent trap enable
Syntax snmp-agent trap enable [ bgp [ backwardtransition | established ]* |
configuration | flash | ospf [ process-id ] [ ospf-trap-list ] | standard [
authentication | coldstart | linkdown | linkup | warmstart ]* | system | vrrp [
authfailure | newmaster ] ]
undo snmp-agent trap enable [ bgp [ backwardtransition | established ]* |
configuration | flash | ospf [ process-id ] [ ospf-trap-list ] | standard [
authentication | coldstart | linkdown | linkup | warmstart ]* | system | vrrp [
authfailure | newmaster ] ]
View System view
Parameter bgp [ backwardtransition | established ]*: Configures to send BGP traps.
890 CHAPTER 68: SNMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
configuration: Configures to send traps for configuration.
flash: Configures to send traps of Flash.
ospf [ process-id ] [ ospf-trap-list ]: Configures to send traps of the OSPF protocol.
process-id indicates a process ID. ospf-trap-list indicates a list of trap messages
allowed to be sent.
standard [ authentication ] [ coldstart ] [ linkdown ] [ linkup ] [ warmstart ]:
Configures to send SNMP standard notification or traps.
authentication: Configures to send the authentication trap information of the
SNMP protocol when authentication fails.
coldstart: Configures to send the coldstart trap information when the switch
restarts.
linkdown: Configures to send SNMP linkDown Trap information when the port is
down.
linkup: Configures to send SNMP linkUp Trap information when the port is up.
warmstart: Configures to send SNMP warm start Trap information when SNMP is
rebooted.
System: Configures to send the trap information of 3Com-SYS-MAN-MIB (a
private MIB).
vrrp [ authfailure | newmaster ]: Configures to send VRRP trap information.
Description Use the snmp-agent trap enable command to enable the device to send Trap
packets.
Use the undo snmp-agent trap enable command to disable the device to send
Trap packets.
By default, the device does not send Trap packets.
The snmp-agent trap enable and snmp-agent target-host commands must be
used at the same time. The snmp-agent target-host command specifies which
hosts can receive Trap message. However, to send Trap message, you must
configure snmp-agent target-host command.
Example # Enable to send the Trap packet of SNMP authentication failure to 10.1.1.1. The
community name is public.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent trap enable standard authentication
[SW7750] snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1 par
ams securityname public
snmp-agent trap ifmib 891
snmp-agent trap ifmib
Syntax snmp-agent trap ifmib link extended
undo snmp-agent trap ifmib link extended
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the snmp-agent trap ifmib command to extend the bound variables in the
linkup/linkdown trap packet, that is, to add two objects "ifDescr" (interface
description) and "ifType" (interface type).
Use the undo snmp-agent trap ifmib command to restore the bound variables
in a linkup/linkdown trap packet to the standard format defined in IF-MIB.
By default, the bound variables in a linkup/linkdown message are as the standard
format defined in IF-MIB.
Example # Extend the format of linkup/linkdown trap packet, that is, add the "ifDescr"
(interface description) and "ifType" (interface type) fields to the trap packet.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]snmp-agent trap ifmib link extended
# Restore the linkup/linkdown trap packet format to the standard format defined
in IF-MIB.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]undo snmp-agent trap ifmib link extended
snmp-agent trap life
Syntax snmp-agent trap life seconds
undo snmp-agent trap life
View System view
Parameter seconds: Aging time, in seconds, ranging from 1 to 2,592,000.
Description Use the snmp-agent trap life command to set aging time for Trap packets. The
Trap packets exceeding the aging time are discarded.
Use the undo snmp-agent trap life command to restore the default aging time
for Trap packets.
892 CHAPTER 68: SNMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
By default, the aging time of SNMP Trap packets is 120 seconds.
After the specified aging time has elapsed, the system drops the trap packet.
Related command: snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent target-host.
Example # Set the aging time for Trap packets as 60 seconds.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent trap life 60
snmp-agent trap queue-size
Syntax snmp-agent trap queue-size size
undo snmp-agent trap queue-size
View System view
Parameter size: Length of a queue, ranging from 1 to 1,000.
Description Use the snmp-agent trap queue-size command to configure the information
queue length of Trap packet sent to destination host.
Use the undo snmp-agent trap queue-size command to restore the default
value.
Related command: snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent target-host and snmp-agent trap life.
By default, the length is 100.
Example # Configure the queue length to 200.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent trap queue-size 200
snmp-agent trap source
Syntax snmp-agent trap source { interface-type interface-number }
undo snmp-agent trap source
View System view
Parameter interface-type: Interface type.
interface-number: Interface number.
snmp-agent usm-user 893
Description Use the snmp-agent trap source command to configure the source address for
sending Trap message.
Use the undo snmp-agent trap source command to cancel the source address
for sending Trap message.
The SNMP Trap message sent from a server has a source IP address no matter
which interface the Trap message is sent from.
By default, SNMP chooses an outgoing interface.
You can configure this command to trace a specific event using the source address
of a Trap packet.
n Before setting the IP address of an interface address as the source address of the
sent Trap packet, you must configure an IP address for the interface.
Related command: snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent target-host.
Example # Configure the IP address of the VLAN interface 1 as the source address for
transmitting the Trap packets.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent trap source Vlan-interface 1
snmp-agent usm-user
Syntax
1 Versions V1 and V2C
snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name
1 Version V3
snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name [ authentication-mode {
md5 | sha } auth-password [ privacy-mode des56 priv-password ] ] [ acl
acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name { local | switch fabricid
switch fabricid-string }
View System view
Parameter v1: Configures to use V1 security model.
v2c: Configures to use V2c security model.
v3: Configures to use V3 security model.
894 CHAPTER 68: SNMP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
User-name: User name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
Group-name: Group name corresponding to that user, a character string of 1 to
32 characters.
authentication-mode: Specifies the safety level as authentication required.
Absence of this parameter indicates that neither authentication nor encryption is
required.
md5: Specifies the authentication protocol as HMAC MD5 algorithm.
sha: Specifies the authentication protocol as HMAC SHA algorithm.
auth-password: Authentication password, a character string of 1 to 64 characters.
privacy: Specifies the security level as encrypted.
des56: Specifies the authentication protocol as DES.
Priv-password: Encryption password, a character string of 1 to 64 characters.
acl-number: The basic ACL number, ranging from 2,000 to 2,999.
local: Represents a local entity user.
switch fabricid-string: Engine ID related to the user, ranging from 10 to 64
hexadecimal numerals.
Description Use the snmp-agent usm-user command to add a new user to an SNMP group.
Use the undo snmp-agent usm-user command to cancel a user from the
SNMP group.
While using SNMPv3, SNMP switch fabricID (for authentication) is required when
you configure a remote user for an agent. If you change switch fabricID after
configuring a user, the user corresponding to the original switch fabricID is not
effective.
For V1 and V2C, this command will add a new community name. For SNMPv3, it
will add a new user for an SNMP group.
Related command: snmp-agent group, snmp-agent community and snmp-agent local-switch
fabricid.
Example # Add a user John to SNMPv3 group Johngroup. Configure to authenticate using
HMAC-MD5 algorithm, require authentication and set authentication password as
hello.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] snmp-agent group v3 Johngroup
[SW7750] snmp-agent usm-user v3 John Johngroup authentication-mode m
d5 hello
RMON CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
69
display rmon alarm
Syntax display rmon alarm [entry-number ]
View Any view
Parameter entry-number: Alarm entry index, in the range of 1 to 65535. If you do not specify
this argument, the configuration of all alarm entries is displayed.
Description Use the display rmon alarm command to display the configuration of a
specified alarm entry or all the alarm entries.
Related command: rmon alarm.
Example # Display the configuration of all the alarm entries.
<SW7750> display rmon alarm
Alarm table 1 owned by abc is VALID.
Samples type : delta
Variable formula : 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11.67111554<ifInUcastPkts.
67111554>
Sampling interval : 10(sec)
Rising threshold : 100(linked with event 7)
Falling threshold : 10(linked with event 8)
When startup enables : risingOrFallingAlarm
Latest value : 0
Table 169 Field descriptions of the display rmon alarm command
Field Description
Alarm table Alarm entry
abc Entry creator
VALID Valid for alarm entries corresponding to the index
Samples type Sample type: change value or absolute value
Variable formula Variable formula of the sampled node
Sampling interval Sampling interval
Rising threshold is 100 Rising threshold is 100
Falling threshold is 10 Falling threshold is 10
896 CHAPTER 69: RMON CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 169 Field descriptions of the display rmon alarm command
Field Description
When startup enables Alarm startup type:
risingOrFallingAlarm (an alarm is triggered when the rising
or falling threshold is reached)
risingAlarm (an alarm is triggered when the rising threshold
is reached)
FallingAlarm (an alarm is triggered when the falling
threshold is reached)
Latest value Latest sampled value
display rmon event
Syntax display rmon event [event-entry ]
View Any view
Parameter event-entry: Event entry index, in the range of 1 to 65535. If you do not specify
this argument, the configuration of all the event entries is displayed.
Description Use the display rmon event command to display the configuration of a
specified event entry or all the event entries.
The displayed information includes: event entry index, event entry owner, event
description, the action triggered by the event (log or alarm messages), and the
time (in seconds) when the latest event is triggered (in terms of the time elapsed
since the system is started/initialized).
Related command: rmon event.
Example # Display the configuration of all the event entries.
<SW7750> display rmon event
Event table 1 owned by abc is VALID.
Description: null.
Will cause log-trap when triggered, last triggered at 0days 00h:02
m:27s.
Table 170 Field descriptions of the display rmon event command
Field Description
Event table Event entries
abc Entry creator
VALID The entry corresponding to the index is valid
Description Event description
Will cause log-trap when triggered The event triggers logs and an trap alarm
last triggered at 0days 00h:02m:27s Time the latest event is triggered
display rmon eventlog 897
display rmon eventlog
Syntax display rmon eventlog [event-entry ]
View Any view
Parameter event-entry: Event entry index, in the range of 1 to 65535. If you do not specify
this argument, the log of all the event entries is displayed.
Description Use the display rmon eventlog command to display the log of a specified
event entry or all the event entries.
The displayed information includes: the indexes and status of the event entries in
the event table, the time (in seconds) when an event log is generated (in terms of
the time elapsed since the system is started or initialized), and the event
description.
Example # Display the log generated by the event entry numbered 1.
<SW7750> display rmon eventlog 1
Event table 1 owned by abc is VALID.
Generates eventLog 1.1 at 0days 00h:01m:39s.
Description: The 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1 defined in alarm table 1,
less than(or =) 100 with alarm value 0. Alarm sample type is absolute.
Generates eventLog 1.2 at 0days 00h:02m:27s.
Description: The alarm formula defined in private alarm table 1,
less than(or =) 100 with alarm value 0. Alarm sample type is absolute.
Table 171 Field descriptions of the display rmon eventlog command
Field Description
Event table Event entries
abc Entry creator
VALID The status of the line corresponding to the line is valid
Generates eventLog 1.1 at Time when the event is triggered. The event may be triggered
0days 00h:01m:39s several times. 1.1 indicates the time event 1 is first triggered
Description Description of an event log
display rmon history
Syntax display rmon history [ interface-type interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type: Interface type.
interface-number: Interface number.
Description Use the display rmon history command to display the RMON history
information about a specified port. The information about the latest sample,
898 CHAPTER 69: RMON CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
including utilization, the number of errors, the total number of packets and so on,
is also displayed.
Related command: rmon history.
Example # Display the RMON history information about the RMON port Ethernet2/0/1.
<SW7750> display rmon history ethernet 2/0/1
History control entry 1 owned by abc is VALID
Samples interface : Ethernet2/0/1<ifEntry.642>
Sampling interval : 10(sec) with 10 buckets max
Latest sampled values :
Dropevents :0 , octets : 0
packets :0 , broadcast packets : 0
multicast packets :0 , CRC alignment errors : 0
undersize packets :0 , oversize packets : 0
fragments :0 , jabbers : 0
collisions :0 , utilization : 0
Table 172 Field descriptions of the display rmon eventlog command
Field Description
History control entry 1 Index number in the history control table
abc Entry creator
VALID The entry corresponding to the index is valid
Samples interface Sampled interface
Sampling interval Sampling interval
buckets Number of records in the history control table
Latest sampled values Latest sampled information
Dropevents Event about dropping packets
octets Number of received or transmitted bytes during sampling duration
packet Number of received or transmitted packets during sampling duration
broadcastpackets Number of broadcast packets
multicastpackets Number of multicast packets
CRC alignment errors Number of checkerror packets
undersize packets Number of undersize packets
oversize packets Number of oversize packets
fragments Number of undersize and checkerror packets
jabbers Number of oversize and checkerror packets
collisions Number of collision packets
utilization Utilization ratio
display rmon prialarm
Syntax display rmon prialarm [prialarm-entry-number ]
View Any view
display rmon prialarm 899
Parameter prialarm-entry-number: Extended alarm entry Index, in the range of 1 to 65535. If
you do not specify this argument, the configuration of all the extended alarm
entries is displayed.
Description Use the display rmon prialarm command to display the configuration of a
specified RMON extended alarm entry or all the RMON extended alarm entries.
Related command: rmon prialarm.
Example # Display the configuration of the extended RMON alarm entries.
<SW7750> display rmon prialarm
Prialarm table 1 owned by abc is VALID.
Samples type : delta
Variable formula : 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.641
Description : ifInOctets.Ethernet2/0/1
Sampling interval : 10(sec)
Rising threshold : 100(linked with event 2)
Falling threshold : 10(linked with event 2)
When startup enables : risingOrFallingAlarm
This entry will exist : forever.
Latest value : 0
Table 173 Field descriptions of the display rmon prialarm command
Field Description
Prialarm table 1 Index number of a line of the extended alarm table
abc Creator of this extended alarm entry
VALID The entry corresponding to the index is valid
Samples type Sample type: change value or absolute value
Variable formula Alarm variable of the sampled node
Description Description of the alarm variable
Sampling interval Sampling interval
Rising threshold Rising threshold. An alarm is triggered when the rising threshold
is reached
Falling threshold Falling threshold. An alarm is triggered when the falling
threshold is reached
linked with event Event index corresponding to an alarm
When startup enables Alarm startup type:
risingOrFallingAlarm (an alarm is triggered when the rising or
falling threshold is reached)
risingAlarm (an alarm is triggered when the rising threshold is
reached)
FallingAlarm (an alarm is triggered when the falling threshold is
reached)
This entry will exist: forever Existing period. This entry can exist forever or exist in the
specified cycle
Latest value Latest sampled value
900 CHAPTER 69: RMON CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display rmon statistics
Syntax display rmon statistics [ interface-type interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type: Interface type.
interface-number: Interface number.
Description Use the display rmon statistics command to display the RMON statistics of a
specified port.
The displayed information include the number of the following items: collisions,
packets with CRC errors, undersize or oversize packets, broadcast packets,
multicast packets, received bytes, and received packets.
Related command: rmon statistics.
Example # Display the RMON statistics information.
<SW7750> display rmon statistics ethernet 3/0/1
Statistics entry 1 owned by abc is VALID.
Interface : Ethernet3/0/1<ifIndex.201326722>
etherStatsOctets : 3776 , etherStatsPkts : 30
etherStatsBroadcastPkts : 0 , etherStatsMulticastPkts : 30
etherStatsUndersizePkts : 0 , etherStatsOversizePkts : 0
etherStatsFragments : 0 , etherStatsJabbers : 0
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors : 0 , etherStatsCollisions : 0
etherStatsDropEvents (insufficient resources): 0
Packets received according to length (etherStatsPktsXXXtoYYYOctets):
64 : 5 , 65-127 : 10 , 128-255 : 15
256-511: 0 , 512-1023: 0 , 1024-max: 0
Table 174 Field descriptions of the display rmon statistics command
Field Description
Statistics entry 3 Index number of the statistics information table
abc Entry creator
VALID The entry corresponding to this index is valid
Interface Interface
etherStatsOctets Number of received or transmitted bytes
etherStatsPkts Number of received or transmitted packets
etherStatsBroadcastPkts Number of broadcast packets
etherStatsMulticastPkts Number of multicast packets
etherStatsUndersizePkts Number of undersize packets
etherStatsOversizePkts Number of oversize packets
etherStatsFragments Number of undersize and checkerror packets
etherStatsJabbers Number of oversize and checkerror packets
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors Number of checkerror packets
etherStatsCollisions Number of collision packets
rmon alarm 901
Table 174 Field descriptions of the display rmon statistics command
Field Description
etherStatsDropEvents Event about dropping packets (network resources are
insufficient)
Packets received according to length Number of received packets, which are made statistics
by byte length
rmon alarm
Syntax rmon alarm entry-number alarm-variable sampling-time { delta | absolute }
rising threshold threshold-value1 event-entry1 falling threshold
threshold-value2 event-entry2 [ owner text ]
undo rmon alarm entry-number
View System view
Parameter entry-number: Alarm entry line number, in the range of 1 to 65535.
alarm-variable: Alarm variable, a string comprising 1 to 256 characters in dotted
node OID format (such as 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.10.1, or ifInOctets.1). Only the variables
that can be resolved to ASN.1 INTEGER data type (that is, INTEGER, Counter,
Gauge, or TimeTicks) can be used as alarm variables.
sampling-time: Sampling interval (in seconds), in the range of 5 to 65,535.
delta: Specifies to sample increments (that is, the current increment with regard
to the latest sample)
absolute: Specifies to sample absolute values.
rising_threshold threshold-value1: Specifies the upper threshold. The
threshold-value1 argument ranges from 0 to 2,147,483,647.
event-entry1: Index of the event entry corresponding to the upper threshold, in
the range of 1 to 65,535.
falling_threshold threshold-value2: Specifies the lower threshold. The
threshold-value2 argument ranges from 0 to 2,147,483,647.
event-entry2: Index of the event entry corresponding to the lower threshold, in the
range of 1 to 65,535.
owner text: Specifies the owner of the entry. The text argument is a string
comprising 1 to 127 characters.
Description Use the rmon alarm command to add an alarm entry to the alarm table.
Use the undo rmon alarm command to remove an alarm entry from the alarm
table.
902 CHAPTER 69: RMON CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
You can use the rmon alarm command to define an alarm entry so that a specific
alarm event can be triggered under specific circumstances. The act (such as
logging and sending trap messages to NMS) taken after an alarm event occurs is
determined by the corresponding alarm entry.
With an alarm entry defined in an alarm group, a network device performs the
following operations accordingly:
■ Sample the defined alarm variables (alarm-variable) once in each specified
period, which is specified by the sampling-time argument.
■ Comparing the sampled value with the set threshold and performing the
corresponding operations, as described in Table 175.
Table 175 Sample value and the corresponding operation
Comparison Operation
The sample value is larger than or equal to Triggering the event identified by the
the set upper threshold (threshold-value1) event-entry1 argument
The sample value is smaller than the set Triggering the event identified by the
lower threshold (threshold-value2) event-entry2 argument
n ■ Before adding an alarm entry, you need to use the rmon event command to
define the events to be referenced by the alarm entry.
■ Make sure the node to be monitored exists before executing the rmon alarm
command.
Example # Add the alarm entry numbered 1 as follows:
■ The node to be monitored: 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1
■ Sampling interval: 10 seconds
■ Upper threshold: 50
■ The event-entry1 argument identifies event 1.
■ Lower threshold: 5
■ The event-entry2 argument identifies event 2
■ Owner: user1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rmon event 1 log
[SW7750] rmon event 2 none
[SW7750]rmon alarm 1 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1 10 absolute rising_threshold 50 1 falling_threshold 5 2
owner user1
# Delete the alarm entry numbered 15 from the alarm table.
[SW7750] undo rmon alarm 15
rmon event
Syntax rmon event event-entry [ description string ] { log | trap trap-community |
log-trap log-trapcommunity | none } [ owner text ]
undo rmon event event-entry
rmon history 903
View System view
Parameter event-entry: Event entry line number, in the range of 1 to 65535.
description string: Specifies the event description, a string comprising 1 to 127
characters.
log: Logs events.
trap trap-community: Defines the event as a trap event and specifies the
community name of the NMS that receives the trap messages.
log-trap log-trapcommunity: Defines the event as a log and trap event and
specifies the community name of the NMS that receives the log messages.
none: Specifies that the event triggers no action.
owner text: Specifies the creator of the event entry. The text argument is a string
comprising 1 to 127 characters.
Description Use the rmon event command to add an entry to the event table.
Use the undo rmon event command to delete an entry from the event table.
When adding an event entry to an event table, you need to specify the event
index. You need also to specify the corresponding actions, including logging the
event, sending trap messages to the NMS, and the both, for the network device to
perform corresponding operation when an alarm referencing the event is
triggered.
Example # Add the event entry numbered 10 to the event table and configure it to be a log
event.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rmon event 10 log
rmon history
Syntax rmon history entry-number buckets number interval sampling-interval [ owner
text ]
undo rmon history entry-number
View Ethernet port view
Parameter entry-number: History entry index, in the range of 1 to 65535.
buckets number: Specifies the size of the history table that corresponds to the
entry, in the range of 1 to 65535. Currently the device only supports 1 to 10. If
you enter an argument greater than 10, the actual table size is still 10.
904 CHAPTER 69: RMON CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
interval sampling-interval: Specifies the sampling interval (in seconds). The
sampling-interval argument ranges from 5 to 3,600.
owner text: Specifies the owner of the entry, a string comprising 1 to 127
characters.
Description Use the rmon history command to add an entry to a history control table.
Use the undo rmon history command to delete an entry from a history control
table.
You can use the rmon history command to sample a specific port. You can also
set the sampling interval and the number of the samples that can be saved. After
you execute this command, the RMON system samples the port periodically and
stores the samples for later retrieval. The sampled information includes utilization,
the number of errors, and total number of packets.
You can use the display rmon history command to display the statistics of the
history control table.
Example # Create the history entry numbered 1 for Ethernet2/0/1 port, with the table size
being 10, the sampling interval being 5 seconds, and the owner being user1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1]rmon history 1 buckets 10 interval 5 owner user1
# Remove the history entry numbered 15.
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] undo rmon history 15
rmon prialarm
Syntax rmon prialarm entry-number prialarm-formula prialarm-des sampling-timer {
delta | absolute | changeratio } rising_threshold threshold-value1 event-entry1
falling_threshold threshold-value2 event-entry2 entrytype { forever | cycle
cycle-period } [ owner text ]
undo rmon prialarm entry-number
View System view
Parameter entry-number: Extended alarm entry index, in the range of 1 to 65535.
prialarm-formula: Expression used to perform operations on the alarm variables, a
string comprising 1 to 256 characters. The alarm variables in the expression must
be represented by OIDs, for example, (.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.10.1)*8. The operations
available are addition, subtraction, multiplication and division operations. The
operation results are rounded to values that are of long integer type. To prevent
invalid operation results, make sure the operation results of each step are valid
long integers.
rmon prialarm 905
prialarm-des: Alarm description, a string comprising 1 to 256 characters.
sampling-timer: Sampling interval (in seconds), in the range of 10 to 65,535.
delta | absolute | changeratio: Specifies sample type, which can be deltas,
absolute values or change ratios.
threshold-value1: Upper threshold, in the range of 0 to 4,294,967,295.
event-entry1: Index of the event entry that corresponds to the upper threshold, in
the range of 0 to 65535.
threshold-value2: Lower threshold, in the range of 0 to 4,294,967,295.
event-entry2: Index of the event entry that corresponds to the lower threshold, in
the range of 0 to 65535.
forever: Specifies the alarm entry is valid indefinitely.
cycle: Specifies the alarm entry is valid periodically.
cycle-period: Cycle period, in seconds, ranging from 0 to 4,294,967,295.
owner text: Specifies the owner of the alarm entry, a string comprising 1 to 127
characters.
Description Use the rmon prialarm command to create an extended entry in an extended
RMON alarm table.
Use the undo rmon prialarm command to remove a specified extended alarm
entry.
The maximum number of distances in the table depends on the hardware
resources.
n ■ Before adding an extended alarm entry, you need to use the rmon event
command to define the events to be referenced by the entry.
■ Make sure the node to be monitored exists before executing the rmon event
command.
■ You can define up to 50 extended alarm entries.
With an extended alarm entry defined in an extended alarm group, the network
devices perform the following operations accordingly:
■ Sampling the alarm variables referenced in the defined extended alarm
expressions (prialarm-formula) once in each period specified by the
sampling-timer argument.
■ Performing operations on sampled values according to the defined extended
alarm expressions (prialarm-formula)
■ Comparing the operation result with the set thresholds and perform
corresponding operations, as described in Table 176.
906 CHAPTER 69: RMON CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Table 176 Operation result and corresponding operation
Comparison Operation
The operation result is larger than or equal to Triggering the event identified by the
the set upper threshold (threshold-value1) event-entry1 argument
The operation result is smaller than or equal Triggering the event identified by the
to the set lower threshold (threshold-value2) event-entry2 argument
Example # Add the extended alarm entry numbered 2 as follows:
■ Perform operations on the corresponding alarm variables using the expression
((1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1)*100).
■ Sampling interval: 10 seconds
■ Upper threshold: 50
■ Lower threshold: 5
■ Event 1 is triggered when the change ratio is larger than the upper threshold.
■ Event 2 is triggered when the change ratio is less than the lower threshold.
■ The alarm entry is valid forever.
■ Entry owner: user1
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] rmon statistics 1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] quit
[SW7750] rmon prialarm 2 ((.1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1)*100) test 10 c
hangeratio rising_threshold 50 1 falling_threshold 5 2 entrytype for
ever owner user1
# Remove the extended alarm entry numbered 2 from the extended alarm table.
[SW7750] undo rmon prialarm 2
rmon statistics
Syntax rmon statistics entry-number [ owner text ]
undo rmon statistics entry-number
View Ethernet port view
Parameter entry-number: Statistics entry Index, in the range of 1 to 65535.
owner text: Specifies the owner of the entry, a string comprising 1 to 127
characters.
Description Use the rmon statistics command to add an entry to the statistics table.
Use the undo rmon statistics command to remove an entry from the statistics
table.
rmon statistics 907
The RMON statistics management function is used to take statistics of the usage
of the monitored ports and errors occurred to them. The statistics includes the
number of the following items: collisions, packet with CRC errors, undersize (or
oversize) packets, broadcast and multicast packets, received packets and bytes and
so on.
n For each port, only one RMON alarm table entry can be created, that is to say, if
one RMON alarm table entry was already created for a given port, creation of
another entry with a different index number for the same port will not succeed.
You can use the display rmon statistics command to display the statistics
entries.
Example # Add the statistics entry numbered 20 to take statistics of Ethernet2/0/1 port.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]interface Ethernet 2/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/1] rmon statistics 20
908 CHAPTER 69: RMON CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
NTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
70
display ntp-service sessions
Syntax display ntp-service sessions [ verbose ]
View Any view
Parameter verbose: Displays the detailed information about all the sessions maintained by
the NTP service. When you configure this command without the verbose
parameter, the Ethernet switch displays the brief information about all the
sessions.
Description Use the display ntp-service sessions command to display the status of all the
sessions maintained by NTP service provided by the local device.
c CAUTION: The sessions can be created in all NTP operating modes except the NTP
server mode.
Example # Display the status of all the sessions maintained by the NTP service.
<SW7750> display ntp-service sessions
source reference stra reach poll now offset delay disper
********************************************************************
[12345]1.0.1.11 LOCAL(0) 3 377 64 16 -0.4 0.0 0.9
note: 1 source(master),2 source(peer),3 selected,4 candidate,5 configured
display ntp-service status
Syntax display ntp-service status
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display ntp-service status command to display the NTP service status.
Example <SW7750> display ntp-service status
Service status:enabled
Clock status: unsynchronized
Clock stratum: 16
Reference clock ID: none
910 CHAPTER 70: NTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Nominal frequency: 100.0000 Hz
Actual frequency: 100.0000 Hz
Clock precision: 2^18
Clock offset: 0.0000 ms
Root delay: 0.00 ms
Root dispersion: 0.00 ms
Peer dispersion: 0.00 ms
Reference time: 00:00:00.000 UTC Jan 1 1900(00000000.00000000)
The following table describes the displayed fields:
NTP service status information
Field Meaning
Service status NTP service status: enabled or disabled
Clock status: Local clock status: is not synchronized to any remote NTP server
unsynchronized
Clock stratum Indicates the NTP stratum of the local clock
Reference clock ID Indicates the address of a remote server or the clock source ID when
the local system is synchronized with a remote NTP server or a clock
source
Nominal frequency Nominal frequency of the local system hardware clock
Actual frequency Actual frequency of the local system hardware clock
Clock precision Precision of the local clock
Clock offset Time difference between Offset of the local clock to the NTP server
clock
Root delay Total delay from local device to the master reference clock
Root dispersion Dispersion of the local clock relative to the NTP server clock
Peer dispersion Dispersion of the remote NTP server
Reference time Reference timestamp
display ntp-service trace
Syntax display ntp-service trace
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display ntp-service trace command to display the brief information
about every NTP server on the way from the local device to the reference clock
source.
Example <SW7750> display ntp-service trace
server 127.0.0.1,stratum 8, offset 0.000000, synch distance 0.00000
refid 127.127.1.0
ntp-service access 911
ntp-service access
Syntax ntp-service access { query | synchronization | server | peer } acl-number
undo ntp-service access { query | synchronization | server | peer }
View System view
Parameter query: Allows to query the local NTP service only.
synchronization: Only allows the peer device to synchronize its clock to the local
device.
server: Allows the peer device to perform synchronization and control query to
the local device but does not permit the local device to synchronize its clock to the
peer device.
peer: Full access. This level of right permits the peer device to perform
synchronization and control query to the local device and also permits the local
device to synchronize its clock to the peer device.
acl-number: The IP address access control list number, ranging from 2000 to 2999.
Description Use the ntp-service access command to set the right to access the local device
service.
Use the undo ntp-service access command to cancel the access authority
settings.
By default, no right limit is configured.
Compared with authentication, setting the right to access and control the NTP
services is a basic and brief security measure. From the highest NTP service
access-control right to the lowest one are peer, server, synchronization, and
query. When a device receives an NTP request, it will perform an access control
right match and will used first matched right..
Example # Configure to permit the remote switch defined in ACL 2000 to perform time
synchronization request, query and synchronization to the local device..
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ntp-service access peer 2000
# Configure to permit the remote switch defined in ACL 2000 to perform time
synchronization request and query to the local device.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ntp-service access synchronization 2000
912 CHAPTER 70: NTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
ntp-service authentication enable
Syntax ntp-service authentication enable
undo ntp-service authentication enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the ntp-service authentication enable command to enable the
NTP-service authentication function.
Use the undo ntp-service authentication enable command to disable this
function.
By default, the authentication is disabled.
Example # Enable NTP authentication function.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ntp-service authentication enable
ntp-service authentication-keyid
Syntax ntp-service authentication-keyid number authentication-mode md5 value
undo ntp-service authentication-keyid number
View System view
Parameter number: Specifies the key number from 1 to 4,294,967,295.
value: Specifies the value of the key with 1 to 32 ASCII characters.
Description Use the ntp-service authentication-keyid command to set an NTP
authentication key.
Use the undo ntp-service authentication-keyid command to cancel the NTP
authentication key.
By default, no authentication key is configured.
Currently the system supports MD5 authentication only.
Example # Set MD5 authentication key 10 as hello.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
ntp-service broadcast-client 913
[SW7750] ntp-service authentication-keyid 10 authentication-mode md5
hello
ntp-service broadcast-client
Syntax ntp-service broadcast-client
undo ntp-service broadcast-client
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the ntp-service broadcast-client command to configure NTP broadcast
client mode.
Use the undo ntp-service broadcast-client command to disable NTP
broadcast client mode.
By default, the NTP broadcast client mode is disabled.
Designate an interface on the local device to receive NTP broadcast packets. The
local device operates in broadcast client mode. The local device listens to the
broadcast packets from the server. When it receives the first broadcast packet, it
starts a brief client/server mode to exchange messages with a remote server for
estimating the network delay. Thereafter, the local device enters broadcast client
mode and continues listening to the broadcast packets and synchronizes the local
clock based on the arrived broadcast packets.
Example # Configure to receive NTP broadcast packets through Vlan-interface 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface vlan-interface1
[SW7750-Vlan-Interface1] ntp-service broadcast-client
ntp-service broadcast-server
Syntax ntp-service broadcast-server [ authentication-keyid keyid version number ]
undo ntp-service broadcast-server
View VLAN interface view
Parameter authentication-keyid: Specifies an authentication key.
keyid: Key ID used in broadcast, ranging from 1 to 4,294,967,295.
version: Defines an NTP version number.
914 CHAPTER 70: NTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
number: NTP version number, ranging from 1 to 3.
Description Use the ntp-service broadcast-server command to configure NTP broadcast
server mode.
Use the undo ntp-service broadcast-server command to disable the NTP
broadcast server mode.
By default, the broadcast service is disabled. When no NTP version number is
specified, the default version number is 3.
Designate an interface on the local device to broadcast NTP packets. The local
device runs in broadcast-server mode and regularly broadcasts packets to its
clients.
Example # Configure to broadcast NTP packets through Vlan-interface 1. Encrypt them
with Key 4 and set the NTP version number to 3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface vlan-interface1
[SW7750-Vlan-Interface1] ntp-service broadcast-server authentication-key 4 version 3
ntp-service disable
Syntax ntp-service disable
undo ntp-service disable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the ntp-service disable command to disable the NTP service function.
Use undo ntp-service disable command to enable this function.
By default, the NTP service is enabled.
Example # Disable NTP service on the device.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ntp-service disable
ntp-service in-interface disable
Syntax ntp-service in-interface disable
undo ntp-service in-interface disable
ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions 915
View VLAN interface view
Parameter None
Description Use the ntp-service in-interface disable command to disable an interface
from receiving NTP messages.
Use undo ntp-service in-interface disable command to enable an interface to
receive NTP messages.
By default, an interface is enabled to receive NTP messages.
Example # Disable Vlan-interface 1 from receiving NTP message.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface vlan-interface1
[SW7750-Vlan-Interface1] ntp-service in-interface disable
ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions
Syntax ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions number
undo ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions
View System view
Parameter number: The maximum number of sessions that can be created locally, ranging
from 0 to 100.
Description Use the ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions command to set the maximum
number of dynamic sessions that can be created locally.
Use the undo ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions command to restore the
default value.
By default, a local device allows up to 100 dynamic sessions.
n Only the sessions created in NTP peer mode, NTP broadcast client mode and NTP
multicast client mode are dynamic sessions. Other sessions are static sessions.
Example # Set the local device to allow up to 50 sessions.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions 50
ntp-service multicast-client
Syntax ntp-service multicast-client [ ip-address ]
916 CHAPTER 70: NTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
undo ntp-service multicast-client [ ip-address ]
View VLAN interface view
Parameter ip-address: Specifies a multicast IP address of Class D.
Description Use the ntp-service multicast-client command to configure the NTP multicast
client mode.
Use the undo ntp-service multicast-client command to disable the NTP
multicast client mode.
By default, the multicast client service is disabled. ip-address defaults to 224.0.1.1.
Designate an interface on the local device to receive NTP multicast packets. The
local device operates in the multicast client mode. The local device listens to the
multicast packets from the server. When it receives the first multicast packet, it
starts a brief client/server mode to exchange messages with a remote server for
estimating the network delay. Thereafter, the local device enters the multicast
client mode and continues listening to the multicast packets and synchronizes the
local clock based on the arrived multicast message.
Example # Configure to receive NTP multicast packets to the multicast group address of
224.0.1.1 through Vlan-interface1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-Interface1] ntp-service multicast-client 224.0.1.1
ntp-service multicast-server
Syntax ntp-service multicast-server [ ip-address ] [ authentication-keyid keyid ] [ ttl
ttl-number ] [ version number ]*
undo ntp-service multicast-server [ ip-address ]
View VLAN interface view
Parameter ip-address: Specifies a multicast IP address of Class D and default to 224.0.1.1.
authentication-keyid: Specifies an authentication key.
keyid: Key ID used in multicast, ranging from 0 to 4,294,967,295.
ttl: Defines the time to live (TTL) of a multicast packet.
ttl-number: Specify the TTL of a multicast packet, ranging from 1 to 255.
version: Defines an NTP version number.
number: Specifies an NTP version number, ranging from 1 to 3.
ntp-service refclock-master 917
Description Use the ntp-service multicast-server command to configure NTP multicast
server mode. If no IP address is specified, the switch automatically chooses
224.0.1.1 as the multicast IP address.
Use the undo ntp-service multicast-server command to disable NTP multicast
server mode, if no IP address is specified, the switch will disable the configuration
of the multicast IP address 224.0.1.1.
By default, the multicast service is disabled. IP address defaults to 224.0.1.1 and
the version number defaults to 3.
Designate an interface on the local device to transmit NTP multicast packets. The
local device operates in multicast-server mode and multicasts packets regularly to
its clients.
Example # Configure to transmit NTP multicast packets encrypted with Key 4 through
VLAN-interface 1 at 224.0.1.1 and use NTP version 3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface vlan-interface 1
[SW7750-Vlan-Interface1] ntp-service multicast-server 224.0.1.1 authentication-keyid 4 version 3
ntp-service refclock-master
Syntax ntp-service refclock-master [ ip-address ] [ stratum ]
undo ntp-service refclock-master [ ip-address ]
View System view
Parameter ip-address: Specifies the reference clock IP address as 127.127.1.u. Here, u ranges
from 0 to 3.
stratum: Specifies which stratum the local clock is located at. The value ranges
from 1 to 15.
Description Use the ntp-service refclock-master command to configure an external
reference clock or the local clock as an NTP master clock.
Use the undo ntp-service refclock-master command to cancel the NTP master
clock settings.
By default, no NTP master clock is configured. When ip-address is not specified,
the local clock is set to the NTP master clock by default. When stratum is not
specified, the local clock is located at stratum 8 by default.
You can use this command to designate an external reference clock or the local
clock as an NTP master clock to provide synchronized time to other devices.
ip-address specifies the IP address of an external clock as 127.127.1.u. If no IP
address is specified, the local clock is configured as the NTP master clock by
default. You can also specify the stratum at which the NTP master clock is located.
918 CHAPTER 70: NTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Specify the local clock as the NTP master clock to provide synchronized time for
its peers and locate the master clock at stratum 3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ntp-service refclock-master 3
ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid
Syntax ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid number
undo ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid number
View System view
Parameter number: Specifies the key number, ranging from 1 to 4,294,967,295.
Description Use the ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid command to configure
the key as a reliable key.
Use the undo ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid command to cancel
the current setting.
By default, no reliable key is configured.
When you enable the authentication, you can use this command to configure one
or more than one reliable keys. In this case, a client only synchronizes to the server
that provides reliable keys.
Example # Enable NTP authentication, adopt MD5 encryption, and designate Key 37
BetterKey and configure it as a reliable key.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ntp-service authentication enable
[SW7750] ntp-service authentication-keyid 37 authentication-mode md5 BetterKey
[SW7750] ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid 37
ntp-service source-interface
Syntax ntp-service source-interface interface-type interface-number
undo ntp-service source-interface
View System view
Parameter interface-type: Specifies an interface. This parameter is used to specify an interface
together with the interface-number parameter.
interface-number: Specifies an interface number. This parameter is used to specify
an interface with the interface-type parameter.
ntp-service unicast-peer 919
Description Use the ntp-service source-interface command to designate an interface to
transmit NTP messages.
Use the undo ntp-service source-interface command to cancel the current
setting.
By default, the source address depends on the output interface.
You can use this command to designate an interface of which the IP address will
be the source IP address in all the NTP packets sent by the local device so that the
remote device sends the response message to this interface only.
Example # Configure all the outgoing NTP packets to use the IP address of Vlan-Interface1
as their source IP address.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ntp-service source-interface Vlan-Interface 1
ntp-service unicast-peer
Syntax ntp-service unicast-peer { ip-address | server-name } [ version number |
authentication-key keyid | source-interface interface-type interface-number |
priority ]*
undo ntp-service unicast-peer { ip-address | server-name }
View System view
Parameter ip-address: Specifies the IP address of a remote server.
server-name: Specifies the host name of an NTP server, containing 1 to 20
characters.
version: Defines an NTP version number.
number: NTP version number, ranging from 1 to 3.
authentication-keyid: Defines an authentication key.
keyid: Key ID used for transmitting messages to a remote server, ranging from 1 to
4,294,967,295.
source-interface: Specifies an interface name.
interface-type: Specifies the interface type and determines an interface together
with the interface-number parameter.
interface-number: Specifies the interface number and determines an interface
together with the interface-type parameter.
priority: Designates a server as the first choice.
920 CHAPTER 70: NTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the ntp-service unicast-peer command to configure NTP peer mode.
Use the undo ntp-service unicast-peer command to cancel NTP peer mode.
By default, no NTP peer mode is configured. When you do not specify a version
number, the default version number is 3. When you do not specify
authentication-keyid, authentication is disabled and the local server is not the
first choice.
This command sets the remote server at ip-address as a peer of the local device,
which operates in symmetric active mode. ip-address specifies a host address
other than a broadcast address, multicast address, or the IP address of a reference
clock. Under this configuration, a local device can synchronize and be
synchronized by a remote server.
Example # Configure the local device to synchronize or to be synchronized by a peer at
128.108.22.44. Set the NTP version to 3. The IP address of the NTP packets is
taken from that of VLAN-interface 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ntp-service unicast-peer 131.108.22.33 version 3 source-int
erface Vlan-Interface 1
ntp-service unicast-server
Syntax ntp-service unicast-server { ip-address | server-name } [ version number |
authentication-keyid keyid | source-interface interface-type interface-number |
priority ]*
undo ntp-service unicast-server { ip-address | server-name }
View System view
Parameter ip-address: Specifies the IP address of a remote server.
server-name: Specifies the host name of an NTP server, containing 1 to 20
characters.
version: Defines an NTP version number.
number: NTP version number, ranging from 1 to 3.
authentication-keyid: Defines an authentication key.
keyid: Key ID used for transmitting messages to a remote server, ranging from 1 to
4,294,967,295.
source-interface: Specifies an interface name.
interface-type: Specifies an interface type and determines an interface together
with the interface-number parameter.
ntp-service unicast-server 921
interface-number: Specifies an interface number and determines an interface
together with the interface-type parameter.
priority: Designate a server as the first choice.
Description Use the ntp-service unicast-server command to configure NTP server mode.
Use the undo ntp-service unicast-server command to disable NTP server mode.
By default, no NTP server mode is configured. When you do not specify a version
number, the default version number is 3. When you do not specify
authentication-keyid, authentication is disabled.
The command announces to use the remote server at ip-address as the local time
server. ip-address specifies a host address other than a broadcast address,
multicast address, or the IP address of a reference clock. By operating in client
mode, a local device can be synchronized by a remote server, but not synchronize
any remote server.
Example # Designate the server at 128.108.22.44 to synchronize the local device and use
NTP version 3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ntp-service unicast-server 128.108.22.44 version 3
922 CHAPTER 70: NTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
SSH SERVER CONFIGURATION
71 COMMANDS
display rsa local-key-pair public
Syntax display rsa local-key-pair public
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display rsa local-key-pair public command to display the public key
of the host key pair (3Com_Host) and the public key of the server key pair
(3Com_Server).
Related command: rsa local-key-pair create.
Example # Display the public keys of the server key pair and host key pair.
<SW7750> display rsa local-key-pair public
=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 16:51:29 2006/04/27
Key name: 3Com_Host
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3047
0240
E4B60800 48C19975 3D912FCE 0BBEA711 3E4B94D0
E8E6A080 F4D5D2DA 4BCBAF07 B9F91198 FE9937C6
EE0C7AEE 1B8C06F0 8BF01F36 05CF26DB F789A2D8
23182ECB
0203
010001
Host public key for PEM format code:
---- BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ----
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAQQDktggASMGZdT2RL84LvqcRPkuU0OjmoID0
1dLaS8uvB7n5EZj+mTfG7gx67huMBvCL8B82Bc8m2/eJotgjGC7L
---- END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ----
Public key code for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys file :
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAQQDktggASMGZdT2RL84LvqcRPkuU0Ojm
oID01dLaS8uvB7n5EZj+mTfG7gx67huMBvCL8B82Bc8m2/eJotgjGC7L rsa-key
924 CHAPTER 71: SSH SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 16:51:55 2006/04/27
Key name: 3Com_Server
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3067
0260
E1D3BAFE 5E646CF2 241602A1 2FF9AF7F 4AE5A7DE
02894012 1A733A4B 3ABA2F65 DB8CE292 644BB45C
2613F773 BC67C912 DCDACBF6 11DF66CA B48A9F0F
97886142 DB845B18 9C956B16 76D7C8BC 7E355894
CC2854F0 0D29376C 5F30F7A5 98A64CAD
0203
010001
display rsa peer-public-key
Syntax display rsa peer-public-key [ brief | name keyname ]
View Any view
Parameter brief: Displays brief information about all peer public keys.
keyname: Name of the public key, a string of 1 to 64 characters.
Description Use the display rsa peer-public-key command to display information about
the peer public keys. If no key name is specified, the command displays detailed
information about all peer public keys.
Example # Display brief information about all peer public keys.
<SW7750> display rsa peer-public-key brief
Address Bits Name
---------------------------
1024 192.168.0.39
# Display the public key named abc.
<SW7750> display rsa peer-public-key name abc
=====================================
Key name: abc
Key address:
=====================================
Key Code:
308186
028180
739A291A BDA704F5 D93DC8FD F84C4274 631991C1 64B0DF17 8C55FA83 3591C7D4
7D5381D0 9CE82913 D7EDF9C0 8511D83C A4ED2B30 B809808E B0D1F52D 045DE408
61B74A0E 135523CC D74CAC61 F8E58C45 2B2F3F2D A0DCC48E 3306367F E187BDD9
44018B3B 69F3CBB0 A573202C 16BB2FC1 ACF3EC8F 828D55A3 6F1CDDC4 BB45504F
0201
25
display ssh server 925
display ssh server
Syntax display ssh server { status | session }
View Any view
Parameter status: Displays SSH status information.
session: Displays SSH session information.
Description Use the display ssh server command to display the status or session
information about the SSH server.
Related command: ssh server authentication-retries, ssh server timeout.
Example # Display the status information about the SSH server.
<SW7750> display ssh server status
SSH version : 1.99
SSH connection timeout : 60 seconds
SSH server key generating interval : 0 hours
SSH Authentication retries : 3 times
SFTP Server: Enable
n ■ If you use the ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable command to configure
the server to be compatible with the client of SSH1.x version, the SSH version
will be displayed as 1.99.
■ If you use the undo ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable command to
configure the server to be not compatible with the client of SSH1.x version, the
SSH version will be displayed as 2.0.
# Display the session information about the SSH server.
<SW7750> display ssh server session
Conn Ver Encry State Retry SerType Username
VTY 0 2.0 AES started 0 stelnet kk
VTY 1 2.0 AES started 0 sFTP abc
Table 177 Field descriptions of the display ssh server session command
Field Description
4) Conn 5) Number of VTY interface used for user login
6) Ver 7) SSH version
8) Encry 9) Encryption algorithm used by SSH. Encry is short for encryption. The
encryption algorithms in common use are advanced encryption standard
(AES), data encryption standard (DES), and triple DES (3DES).
10) State 11) Current state
12) Retry 13) Number of retries
14) SerType 15) Type of service
16) Username 17) User name
926 CHAPTER 71: SSH SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display ssh user-information
Syntax display ssh user-information [ username ]
View Any view
Parameter username: SSH user name, a string of 1 to 80 characters.
Description Use the display ssh user-information command to display information about
the current SSH users, including user name, authentication mode, corresponding
public key name and authorized service types. If the username is specified, the
command displays information about the specified user.
Example # Display information about the current user.
<SW7750> display ssh user-information
Username Authentication-type User-public-key-name Servi
ce-type
kk rsa test sftp
peer-public-key end
Syntax peer-public-key end
View Public key view
Parameter None
Description Use the peer-public-key end command to return to system view from public key
view.
Related command: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code begin.
Example # Exit from public key view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rsa peer-public-key 3Com003
[SW7750-rsa-public-key] peer-public-key end
protocol inbound
Syntax protocol inbound { all | ssh | telnet }
View VTY user interface view
Parameter all: Supports all protocols, including Telnet and SSH.
public-key-code begin 927
ssh: Supports only SSH.
telnet: Supports only Telnet.
Description Use the protocol inbound command to configure the protocols supported in
the current user interface.
By default, both SSH and Telnet are supported.
c CAUTION:
■ When SSH protocol is specified, to ensure a successful login, you must
configure the AAA authentication using the authentication-mode scheme
command.
■ The protocol inbound ssh configuration fails if you configured
authentication-mode password or authentication-mode none. When
you configured SSH protocol successfully for the user interface, then you
cannot configure authentication-mode password or
authentication-mode none any more.
Related command: user-interface.
Example # Configure vty0 through vty4 to support SSH only.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] user-interface vty 0 4
[SW7750-ui-vty0-4] authentication-mode scheme
[SW7750-ui-vty0-4] protocol inbound ssh
public-key-code begin
Syntax public-key-code begin
View Public key view
Parameter None
Description Use the public-key-code begin command to enter public key edit view and
input the client public key.
You can key in a blank space between characters (since the system can remove the
blank space automatically), or press <Enter> to continue your input at the next
line. But the public key, which is generated randomly by the SSH-supporting client
software, should be composed of hexadecimal characters.
Related command: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code end.
Example # Enter public key edit view and input client public keys.
928 CHAPTER 71: SSH SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rsa peer-public-key 3Com003
[SW7750-rsa-public-key] public-key-code begin
RSA key code view: return to last view with "public-key-code end".
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] 308186028180739A291ABDA704F5D93DC8FDF84C427463
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] 1991C164B0DF178C55FA833591C7D47D5381D09CE82913
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] D7EDF9C08511D83CA4ED2B30B809808EB0D1F52D045DE4
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] 0861B74A0E135523CCD74CAC61F8E58C452B2F3F2DA0DC
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] C48E3306367FE187BDD944018B3B69F3CBB0A573202C16
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] BB2FC1ACF3EC8F828D55A36F1CDDC4BB45504F020125
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end
[SW7750-rsa-public-key]
public-key-code end
Syntax public-key-code end
View Public key edit view
Parameter None
Description Use the public-key-code end command to return from public key edit view to
public key view and save the public keys you set.
After you use this command to terminate the public key editing, public key validity
will be checked before the keys are saved.
■ If there are illegal characters in the keys, the prompt will be given and the keys
will be discarded. Your configuration this time fails.
■ If the keys are valid, they will be saved in the local public key list.
Related command: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code begin.
Example # Exit from public key edit view and save the public keys.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]rsa peer-public-key kk
[SW7750-rsa-public-key]public-key-code begin
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end
[SW7750-rsa-public-key]
rsa local-key-pair create
Syntax rsa local-key-pair create
View System view
Parameter None
rsa local-key-pair destroy 929
Description Use the rsa local-key-pair create command to generate an RSA host key pair
and an RSA server key pair.
n Note that:
■ After entering this command, you will be prompted to provide the length of
the key pair. The length of a server/host key must be in the range 512 to 2048
bits and defaults to 1024. If the key pair already exists, the system will ask you
whether you want to overwrite it.
■ The configuration of this command can survive a reboot. You only need to
configure it once.
n Server key pair (3Com_Server) is not used in SSH2.0. Therefore, when the rsa
local-key-pair create command is executed, the system only informs you that
the RSA host key pair (3Com_Host) is generated, but does not inform you of the
information about the server key pair even if the server key pair is generated in the
background for the purpose of SSH1.x compatibility. You can use the display rsa
local-key-pair public command to display the generated key pairs.
Related command: rsa local-key-pair destroy, display rsa local-key-pair public, ssh server
compatible-ssh1x enable.
Example # Generate a local RSA key pair.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]rsa local-key-pair create
The key name will be: 3Com_Host
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 1024]:
Generating keys...
.......................................................++++++
........................++++++
.........................++++++++
.........++++++++
.......
rsa local-key-pair destroy
Syntax rsa local-key-pair destroy
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the rsa local-key-pair destroy command to destroy all existing RSA key
pairs generated locally.
Related command: rsa local-key-pair create.
930 CHAPTER 71: SSH SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Destroy all existing RSA key pairs generated locally.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rsa local-key-pair destroy
% The name for the keys which will be destroyed is 3Com_Host .
% Confirm to destroy these keys? [Y/N]:y
......................
rsa peer-public-key
Syntax rsa peer-public-key key-name
undo rsa peer-public-key key-name
View System view
Parameter key-name: Name of the peer public key , a string of 1 to 64 characters
Description Use the rsa peer-public-key command to enter public key view.
Use the undo rsa peer-public-key command to remove the configured peer
public key.
After you input the rsa peer-public-key command, you will enter public key view.
You can use the command along with the public-key-code begin command to
configure on the server client public keys, which are generated randomly by the
SSH-supporting client software.
Related command: public-key-code begin, public-key-code end.
Example # Enter 3Com002 public key view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rsa peer-public-key 3Com002
[SW7750-rsa-public-key]
# Delete the peer public key named 192.168.0.39.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] undo rsa peer-public-key 192.168.0.39
% Do you really want to remove the public key named 192.168.0.39 ? [Y/N]:y
[SW7750]
rsa peer-public-key import sshkey
Syntax rsa peer-public-key key-name import sshkey file-name
undo rsa peer-public-key key-name
ssh authentication-type default 931
View System view
Parameter key-name: Client public key name, a string of 1 to 64 characters.
file-name: Name of the public key file uploaded to the Flash in advance. This
argument is a string of 1 to 136 characters.
Description Use the rsa peer-public-key import sshkey command to import a peer public
key from the public key file.
Use the undo rsa peer-public-key command to remove the setting.
With this command, you need not configure the public key manually. You only
need to upload the public key file of the RSA key pair of the peer to the local end
by using FTP/TFTP, and then use this command on the local end. This command will
transform the format of the public key and configure the public key automatically.
Example # Import a peer public key named 123 from public key file abc.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rsa peer-public-key 123 import sshkey abc
ssh authentication-type default
Syntax ssh authentication-type default { password | rsa | password-publickey | all }
undo ssh authentication-type default
View System view
Parameter password: Specifies the authentication type as password.
rsa: Specifies the authentication type as RSA public key.
password-publickey: Specifies the authentication type as both password and
RSA public key, that is, the user can pass the authentication only if both the
password and RSA public key are correct.
all: Specifies the authentication type as password or RSA public key, that is, the
user can pass the authentication if either the password or RSA public key is
correct.
Description Use the ssh authentication-type default command to specify a default
authentication type for SSH users. After the command is configured, when a SSH
user is added, if you do not use the ssh user authentication-type command to
specify an authentication type for the user, the user needs to pass the default
authentication type.
Use the undo ssh authentication-type default command to restore the
default settings.
932 CHAPTER 71: SSH SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
By default, the password authentication type is specified.
Related command: ssh user authentication-type.
Example # Specifies the default authentication type as password.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ssh authentication-type default password
ssh server authentication-retries
Syntax ssh server authentication-retries times
undo ssh server authentication-retries
View System view
Parameter times: Authentication retry times. It is in the range of 1 to 5 and defaults to 3.
Description Use the ssh server authentication-retries command to set the authentication
retry times for SSH connections.
Use the undo ssh server authentication-retries command to restore the
default authentication retry times, which will take effect at next login.
Related command: display ssh server.
n If you have used the ssh user authentication-type command to configure the
authentication type to password-publickey, you must set the authentication retry
times to a number greater than or equal to 2, for one is counted when a client
sends a public key to the server.
Example # Set the authentication retry number to 4.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ssh server authentication-retries 4
ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable
Syntax ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable
undo ssh server compatible-ssh1x
View System view
Parameter None
ssh server rekey-interval 933
Description Use the ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable command to make the server
compatible with the SSH1.x version-supporting client.
Use the undo ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable command to make the
server not compatible with the SSH1.x version-supporting client.
By default, the server is compatible with the SSH1.x version-supporting client.
Example # Specify the server compatible with the SSH1.x version-supporting client.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable
ssh server rekey-interval
Syntax ssh server rekey-interval hours
undo ssh server rekey-interval
View System view
Parameter hours: Update period of the server key, in hours, ranging from 1 to 24.
Description Use the ssh server rekey-interval command to set the update interval for the
server key.
Use the undo ssh server rekey-interval command to cancel the current
configuration.
By default, the system does not update the server key.
c CAUTION: This command is only effective on users whose client version is SSH1.x.
Example # Set the update interval of the server key to 3 hours.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ssh server rekey-interval 3
ssh server timeout
Syntax ssh server timeout seconds
undo ssh server timeout
View System view
934 CHAPTER 71: SSH SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter seconds: Authentication timeout time. It is in the range of 1 to 120 (seconds) and
defaults to 60 seconds.
Description Use the ssh server timeout command to set authentication timeout time for
SSH connections.
Use the undo ssh server timeout command to restore the default timeout
time. The default value takes effect at next login.
Related command: display ssh server.
Example # Set the authentication timeout time to 80 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ssh server timeout 80
ssh user
Syntax ssh user username
undo ssh user username
View System view
Parameter username: Valid SSH user name. a string of 1 to 80 characters.
Description Use the ssh user command to create an SSH user.
Use the undo ssh user command to remove the specified SSH user.
Note that: an SSH user created in this way adopts the default authentication type
if you do not use the ssh user authentication-type command to specify an
authentication type for this user.
Example # Create an SSH user named zhangsan.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]ssh user zhangsan
ssh user assign rsa-key
Syntax ssh user username assign rsa-key keyname
undo ssh user username assign rsa-key
View System view
ssh user authentication-type 935
Parameter username: SSH user name, a string of 1 to 80 characters.
keyname: Client public key name, a string of 1 to 64 characters.
Description Use the ssh user assign rsa-key command to assign public keys to SSH users.
Use the undo ssh user assign rsa-key command to remove the association
between the public keys and SSH users. The configuration takes effect at the next
login.
If the user already has a public key, the new public key overrides the old one.
Related command: display ssh user-information.
Example # Set the client public key for the kk user to key1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ssh user kk assign rsa-key key1
ssh user authentication-type
Syntax ssh user username authentication-type { password | rsa |
password-publickey | all }
undo ssh user username authentication-type
View System view
Parameter username: Valid SSH user name, a string of 1 to 80 characters.
password: Specifies the authentication type as password.
rsa: Specifies the authentication type as RSA public key.
password-publickey: Specifies the authentication type as both password and
RSA public key. That is, the user can pass the authentication only if both the
password and RSA public key are correct.
n For the password-publickey authentication type
■ SSH1.x client users can access the switch as long as they pass one of the two
authentications.
■ SSH2.0 client users can access the switch only when they pass both the
authentications.
all: Specifies the authentication type as either password or RSA public key. That is,
the user can pass the authentication if either the password or RSA public key is
correct.
Description Use the ssh user authentication-type command to define on the server the
available authentication type for an SSH user.
936 CHAPTER 71: SSH SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo ssh user authentication-type command to restore the default
setting.
n This command defines available authentication type on the server. The actual
authentication type, however, is determined by the client.
By default, no authentication type is specified for new users, so they cannot access
the switch.
The new authentication type configuration takes effect at the next login.
Related command: display ssh user-information.
Example # Set the authentication type for the kk user as password.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ssh user kk authentication-type password
SSH CLIENT CONFIGURATION
72 COMMANDS
display ssh server-info
Syntax display ssh server-info
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display ssh server-info command to display the association between
the server public keys configured on the client and the servers.
Example # Display the association between the server public keys and the servers.
<SW7750> display ssh server-info
Server Name(IP) Server public key name
______________________________________________________
192.168.0.1 abc_key01
192.168.0.2 abc_key02
public-key-code begin
Syntax public-key-code begin
View Public key view
Parameter None
Description Use the public-key-code begin command to enter public key edit view and set
server public keys.
You can key in a blank space between characters (since the system can remove the
blank space automatically), or press <Enter> to continue your input at the next
line. But the public key, which are generated randomly after you use the rsa
local-key-pair create command on the server, should be composed of
hexadecimal characters.
Related command: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code end.
Example # Enter public key edit view and set server public keys.
938 CHAPTER 72: SSH CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rsa peer-public-key 3Com003
[SW7750-rsa-public-key] public-key-code begin
RSA key code view: return to last view with "public-key-code end".
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] 308186028180739A291ABDA704F5D93DC8FDF84C427463
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] 1991C164B0DF178C55FA833591C7D47D5381D09CE82913
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] D7EDF9C08511D83CA4ED2B30B809808EB0D1F52D045DE4
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] 0861B74A0E135523CCD74CAC61F8E58C452B2F3F2DA0DC
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] C48E3306367FE187BDD944018B3B69F3CBB0A573202C16
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] BB2FC1ACF3EC8F828D55A36F1CDDC4BB45504F020125
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end
[SW7750-rsa-public-key]
public-key-code end
Syntax public-key-code end
View Public key edit view
Parameter None
Description Use the public-key-code end command to return from public key edit view to
public key view and save the public keys you set.
After you use this command to terminate the public key editing, public key validity
will be checked before the keys are saved.
■ If there are illegal characters in the keys, the prompt will be given and the keys
will be discarded. Your configuration this time fails.
■ If the keys are valid, they will be saved in the client list.
Related command: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code begin.
Example # Exit from public key edit view and save the public keys.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rsa peer-public-key 3Com003
[SW7750-rsa-public-key] public-key-code begin
[SW7750-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end
[SW7750-rsa-public-key]
rsa peer-public-key
Syntax rsa peer-public-key key-name
undo rsa peer-public-key key-name
View System view
rsa peer-public-key import sshkey 939
Parameters Key-name: Name of the public key to be configured , a string of 1 to 64
characters.
Description Use the rsa peer-public-key command to enter public key view.
Use the undo rsa peer-public-key command to remove the setting.
After using this command, you will enter public key view. You can use the
command along with the public-key-code begin command to configure on the
client server public keys, which are generated randomly by using the rsa
local-key-pair create command.
Related commands: public-key-code begin, public-key-code end.
Examples # Enter Switch002 public key view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rsa peer-public-key Switch002
[SW7750-rsa-public-key]
rsa peer-public-key import sshkey
Syntax rsa peer-public-key key-name import sshkey file-name
undo rsa peer-public-key key-name
View System view
Parameter key-name: Name of the public key to be configured, a string of 1 to 64 characters.
file-name: Name of the public key file uploaded to the Flash in advance. This
argument is a string of 1 to 136 characters.
Description Use the rsa peer-public-key import sshkey command to import a peer public
key from the public key file.
Use the undo rsa peer-public-key command to remove the setting.
With this command, you need not configure the public key manually. You only
need to upload the public key file of the RSA key pair of the peer to the local end
by using FTP/TFTP, and then use this command on the local end. This command will
transform the format of the public key and configure the public key automatically.
Example # Import a peer public key named 123 from public key file abc.
940 CHAPTER 72: SSH CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rsa peer-public-key 123 import sshkey abc
ssh client assign rsa-key
Syntax ssh client { server-ip | server-name } assign rsa-key keyname
undo ssh client { server-ip | server-name } assign rsa-key
View System view
Parameter server-ip: Server IP address.
server-name: Server name, a string of 1 to 80 characters.
keyname: Server public key name, a string of 1 to 64 characters.
Description Use the ssh client assign rsa-key command to specify on the client the public
key for the server to be connected to guarantee the client can be connected to a
reliable server.
Use the undo ssh client assign rsa-key command to remove the association
between the public keys and servers.
Example # Specify on the client the public key of the server (with IP address 192.168.0.1) as
abc.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ssh client 192.168.0.1 assign rsa-key abc
ssh client first-time enable
Syntax ssh client first-time enable
undo ssh client first-time
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the ssh client first-time enable command to configure the client to run
the initial authentication.
Use the undo ssh client first-time command to remove the configuration.
n In the initial authentication, if the SSH client does not have the public key for the
server which it accesses for the first time, the client continues to access the server
ssh2 941
and save locally the public key of the server. Then at the next access, the client can
authenticate the server with the public key saved locally.
When the initial authentication function is not available, the client does not access
the server if it does not have the public key of the server locally. In this case, you
need first to save the public key of the target server to the client in other ways.
By default, the client runs the initial authentication.
Example # Configure the client to run the initial authentication.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ssh client first-time enable
ssh2
Syntax ssh2 { host-ip | host-name } [ port-num ] [ prefer_kex { dh_group1 |
dh_exchange_group } | prefer_ctos_cipher { des | aes128 } |
prefer_stoc_cipher { des | aes128 } | prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5
| md5_96 } | prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ]*
View System view
Parameter host-ip: Server IP address.
host-name: Server name, a string of 1 to 20 characters.
port-num: Server port number. It is in the range of 0 to 65,535 and defaults to 22.
prefer_kex: Key exchange algorithm preference. Choose one of the two
algorithms available.
dh_group1: Diffie-Hellman-group1-sha1 key exchange algorithm. It is the default
algorithm.
dh_exchange_group: Diffie-Hellman-group-exchange-sha1 key exchange
algorithm.
prefer_ctos_cipher: Encryption algorithm preference from the client to server. It
defaults to AES128.
prefer_stoc_cipher: Encryption algorithm preference from the server to client. It
defaults to AES128.
des: DES_cbc encryption algorithm.
aes128: AES_128 encryption algorithm.
prefer_ctos_hmac: HMAC algorithm preference from the client to server. It
defaults to SHA1_96.
942 CHAPTER 72: SSH CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
prefer_stoc_hmac: HMAC algorithm preference from the server to client. It
defaults to SHA1_96.
sha1: HMAC-SHA1 algorithm.
sha1_96: HMAC-SHA1_96 algorithm.
md5: HMAC-MD5 algorithm.
md5_96: HMAC-MD5-96 algorithm.
n ■
■
DES (Data Encryption Standard) is the standard algorithm for data encryption.
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is the advanced encryption standard
algorithm.
Description Use the ssh2 command to enable the connection between SSH client and server,
define key exchange algorithm preference, encryption algorithm preference and
HMAC algorithm preference on the server and client.
Example # Log in to the remote SSH2.0 server with IP address 10.1.1.2 and adopt the
default encryption algorithm.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ssh2 10.1.1.2
Username: 123
Trying 10.1.1.2 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 10.1.1.2 ...
The Server is not authenticated. Do you continue access it?(Y/N):y
Do you want to save the server’s public key?(Y/N):n
Enter password:
*******************************************************************
* Copyright (c) 2004-2007 3Com Corporation *
* Without the owner’s prior written consent, *
* no decompiling or reverse-switch fabricering shall be allowed. *
*******************************************************************
<SW7750>
SFTP SERVER CONFIGURATION
73 COMMANDS
sftp server enable
Syntax sftp server enable
undo sftp server
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the sftp server enable command to enable the secure FTP (SFTP) server.
Use the undo sftp server enable command to disable the SFTP server.
By default, the SFTP server is disabled.
Example # Enable the SFTP server.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] sftp server enable
ssh user service-type
Syntax ssh user username service-type { stelnet | sftp | all }
undo ssh user username service-type
View System view
Parameter username: Local user name or the user name defined on the remote RADIUS
server, a string of 1 to 80 characters.
stelnet: Sets the service type to Telnet.
sftp: Sets the service type to SFTP.
all: Includes Telnet and SFTP two services types.
Description Use the ssh user service-type command to specify service type for a user.
944 CHAPTER 73: SFTP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Use the undo ssh user service-type command to restore the default service
type for the SSH user in the system.
The default service type for the SSH user is stelnet.
Related command: display ssh user-information.
Example # Specify SFTP service for SSH user kk.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ssh user kk service-type sftp
SFTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION
74 COMMANDS
bye
Syntax bye
View SFTP Client view
Parameter None
Description Use the bye command to terminate the connection to the remote SFTP server and
return to system view.
This command has the same function as the exit and quit commands.
Example # Terminate the connection to the remote SFTP server.
sftp-client> bye
Bye
[SW7750]
cd
Syntax cd [ remote-path ]
View SFTP Client view
Parameter remote-path: Name of a path on the server.
Description Use the cd command to change the current path on the remote SFTP server. If you
did not specify the remote-path argument, the current path is displayed.
n You can use the cd.. command to return to the upper level directory.
You can use the cd / command to return to the root directory of the system.
Example # Change current path to new1.
sftp-client> cd new1
Received status:Success
Current Directory is:
/new1
946 CHAPTER 74: SFTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
cdup
Syntax cdup
View SFTP Client view
Parameter None
Description Use the cdup command to return the current path on the remote SFTP server to
the upper directory.
Example # Return to the upper directory.
sftp-client> cdup
Received status: Success
Current Directory is:
/
delete
Syntax delete remote-file&<1-10>
View SFTP Client view
Parameter remote-file&<1-10>: Name of a file on the server. &<1-10> means that you can
provide up to 10 filenames, which are separated by space.
Description Use the delete command to delete the specified file from the remote SFTP server.
This command has the same function as the remove command.
Example # Delete file test.txt from the server.
sftp-client> delete test.txt
The following files will be deleted:
/test.txt
Are you sure to delete it?(Y/N):y
This operation may take a long time.Please wait...
Received status: Success
File successfully Removed
dir
Syntax dir [ -a | -l ] [ remote-path ]
View SFTP Client view
Parameter -a: Displays the filenames or the folder names of the specified directory.
exit 947
-l: Displays in list form detailed information of the files and folder of the specified
directory.
remote-path: Name of the directory to be queried.
Description Use the dir command to display the specified directory on the remote SFTP server.
With the -a and -l keyword not specified, the command displays detailed
information of files and folder under the specified directory in a list form.
With the remote-path not specified, the command displays the file and folder
information of the current working directory.
This command has the same function as the ls command.
Example # Display in a list form detailed file and folder information under the current
working directory.
sftp-client> dir
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 1759 Aug 23 06: 52 config.cfg
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 225 Aug 24 08: 01 pubkey2
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 283 Aug 24 07: 39 pubkey1
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 225 Sep 28 08: 28 pub1
drwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 0 Sep 28 08: 24 new1
drwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 0 Sep 28 08: 18 new2
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 225 Sep 28 08: 30 pub2
Received status: End of file
Received status: Success
exit
Syntax exit
View SFTP Client view
Parameter None
Description Use the exit command to terminate the connection to the remote SFTP server and
return to system view.
This command has the same function as the bye and quit commands.
Example # Terminate the connection to the remote SFTP server.
sftp-client> exit
Bye
[SW7750]
get
Syntax get remote-file [ local-file ]
948 CHAPTER 74: SFTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View SFTP Client view
Parameter remote-file: Name of the source file on the remote SFTP server.
local-file: Name assigned to the file to be saved at the local end.
Description Use the get command to download and save a file from a remote server.
If no local file name is specified, the name of the source file is used by default.
Example # Download file tt.bak and save it with name tt.txt.
sftp-client>get tt.bak tt.txt....
This operation may take a long time, please wait...
Remote file:/tt.bak ---> Local file: tt.txt..
Received status: End of file
Received status: Success
Downloading file successfully ended
help
Syntax help [ all | command-name ]
View SFTP Client view
Parameter all: Displays a list of all commands.
command-name: Name of a command.
Description Use the help command to get the help information about the specified or all SFTP
client commands.
With neither the argument nor the keyword specified, the command displays a list
of all commands.
Example # Display the help information about the get command.
sftp-client> help get
get remote-path [local-path] Download file.Default local-path is th
e same
with remote-path
ls
Syntax ls [ -a | -l ] [ remote-path ]
View SFTP Client view
mkdir 949
Parameter -a: Displays the filenames or the folder names of the specified directory.
-l: Displays in list form detailed information of the files and folder of the specified
directory
remote-path: Name of the directory to be queried.
Description Use the ls command to display file and folder information under a specified
directory.
With the -a and -l keyword not specified, the command displays detailed
information of files and folder under the specified directory in a list form.
With the remote-path not specified, the command displays the file and folder
information of the current working directory.
This command functions as the dir command.
Example # Display in a list form detailed file and folder information under the current
working directory.
sftp-client> ls
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 1759 Aug 23 06:52 config.cfg
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 225 Aug 24 08:01 pubkey2
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 283 Aug 24 07:39 pubkey1
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 225 Sep 28 08:28 pub1
drwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 0 Sep 28 08:24 new1
drwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 0 Sep 28 08:18 new2
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 225 Sep 28 08:30 pub2
Received status: End of file
Received status: Success
mkdir
Syntax mkdir remote-path
View SFTP Client view
Parameter remote-path: Name of a directory on the remote SFTP server.
Description Use the mkdir command to create a directory on the remote SFTP server.
Example # Create directory hj on the remote SFTP server.
sftp-client>mkdir hj
Received status: Success
New directory created
put
Syntax put local-file [ remote-file ]
950 CHAPTER 74: SFTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View SFTP Client view
Parameter local-file: Name of the source file at the local end.
remote-file: Name assigned to the file to be saved on the remote SFTP server.
Description Use the put command to upload a local file to the remote SFTP server.
If no name is specified for the file to be saved on the remote SFTP server, the name
of the source file is used.
Example # Upload local file bb.txt to the remote SFTP server and save it with the name 1.txt.
sftp-client>put bb.txt 1.txt
This operation may take a long time, please wait...
Local file:bb.txt ---> Remote file: /1.txt
Received status: Success
Uploading file successfully ended
pwd
Syntax pwd
View SFTP Client view
Parameter None
Description Use the pwd command to display the current directory on the SFTP server.
Example # Display the current directory on the SFTP server.
sftp-client> pwd
/
quit
Syntax quit
View SFTP Client view
Parameter None
Description Use the quit command to terminate the connection to the remote SFTP server and
exit to system view.
This command has the same function as the bye and exit commands.
remove 951
Example # Terminate the connection to the remote SFTP server.
sftp-client> quit
Bye
[SW7750]
remove
Syntax remove remote-file&<1-10>
View SFTP Client view
Parameter remote-file&<1-10>: Name of a file on an SFTP server. &<1-10> means that you
can provide up to 10 filenames, which are separated by space.
Description Use the remove command to delete the specified file from the remote SFTP
server.
This command has the same function as the delete command.
Example # Delete file temp.c from the server.
sftp-client> remove temp.c
The following files will be deleted:
/test2.txt
Are you sure to delete it?(Y/N):y
This operation may take a long time.Please wait...
Received status: Success
File successfully Removed
rename
Syntax rename oldname newname
View SFTP Client view
Parameter oldname: Original file name or directory name.
newname: New file name or directory name.
Description Use the rename command to rename a specified file or directory on an SFTP
server.
Example # Rename file temp.bat on the SFTP server to temp.txt.
sftp-client> rename temp bat temp.txt
Received status: Success
File successfully renamed
952 CHAPTER 74: SFTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
rmdir
Syntax rmdir remote-path&<1-10>
View SFTP Client view
Parameter remote-path&<1-10>: Name of the directory on the remote SFTP server. &<1-10>
means that you can provide up to 10 filenames that are separated by space.
Description Use the rmdir command to delete the specified directory from the remote SFTP
server.
Example # Delete directory hello from the remote SFTP server.
sftp-client>rmdir hello
Received status: Success
Directory successfully removed
sftp
Syntax sftp { host-ip | host-name } [ port-num ] [ prefer_kex { dh_group1 |
dh_exchange_group } | prefer_ctos_cipher { des | aes128 } |
prefer_stoc_cipher { des | aes128 } | prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5
| md5_96 } | prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ]*
View System view
Parameter host-ip: IP address of the server.
host-name: Name of the server, a string of 1 to 20 characters.
port-num: Port number of the server, in the range 0 to 65,535. The default port
number is 22.
prefer_kex: Key exchange algorithm preference. Choose one of the two
algorithms available.
dh_group1: Diffie-Hellman-group1-sha1 key exchange algorithm. It is the default
key exchange algorithm.
dh_exchange_group: Diffie-Hellman-group-exchange-sha1 key exchange
algorithm.
prefer_ctos_cipher: Encryption algorithm preference from the client to server. It
defaults to AES128.
prefer_stoc_cipher: Encryption algorithm preference from the server to client. It
defaults to AES128.
des: DES_cbc encryption algorithm.
sftp 953
aes128: AES_128 encryption algorithm.
prefer_ctos_hmac: HMAC algorithm preference from the client to server. It
defaults to SHA1_96.
prefer_stoc_hmac: HMAC algorithm preference from the server to client. It
defaults to SHA1_96.
sha1: HMAC-SHA1 algorithm.
sha1_96: HMAC-SHA1_96 algorithm.
md5: HMAC-MD5 algorithm.
md5_96: HMAC-MD5-96 algorithm.
Description Use the sftp command to establish a connection to the SFTP server and enter SFTP
Client view.
Example # Establish a connection to the SFTP server with IP address 10.1.1.2 and use the
default encryption algorithms.
[SW7750]sftp 10.1.1.2
Input Username: kk
Trying 10.1.1.2 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 10.1.1.2 ...
The Server is not authenticated. Do you continue access it?(Y/N):y
Do you want to save the server’s public key?(Y/N):y
Enter password:
sftp-client>
954 CHAPTER 74: SFTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
FILE SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
75 COMMANDS
n You can provide the directory argument in the following two ways in this chapter:
■ In the form of [drive] [path]. In this case, the argument can be a string
containing 1 to 64 characters.
■ By specifying the name of a storage device, such as flash:/ and cf:/.
You can provide the file-url argument in the following two ways in this chapter:
■ In the form of [drive] [path] [file name]. In this case, the argument can be a
string containing 1 to 64 characters.
■ By specifying the name of a storage device, such as flash:/ and cf:/.
cd
Syntax cd directory
View User view
Parameter directory: Target directory.
Description Use the cd command to change the current directory or switch to the directory of
a specified storage device.
n Make sure the storage device is correctly installed if you want to switch to the
storage device by using this command.
Example # Change the current directory to the one named test in the flash.
<SW7750> pwd
flash:
<SW7750> cd test
<SW7750> pwd
flash:/test
# Enter the root directory of the CF module.
<SW7750> cd cf:
<SW7750> pwd
cf:
956 CHAPTER 75: FILE SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
copy
Syntax copy fileurl-source fileurl-dest
View User view
Parameter fileurl-source: Path name and file name of the source file in the Flash.
fileurl-dest: Path name and file name of the destination file in the Flash.
Description Use the copy command to copy a file to a specified path with specified name.
You can use this command to copy a file in the current directory to another
directory or copy a file in a directory to the current directory. Make sure the path
and the file identified by the fileurl-source argument exist when executing this
command.
If the fileurl-dest argument identifies an existing file, the system prompts you for
the confirmation to overwrite the existing file.
Example # Display the information about the files in the current directory.
<SW7750> dir
Directory of flash:/
0 -rw- 4 Mar 09 2006 13:59:19 snmpboots
1 -rw- 16215134 Apr 04 2006 16:36:20 S7750.app
2 -rw- 553 Jan 21 2006 17:05:55 diaginfo.txt
3 -rw- 3906 Apr 04 2006 17:23:54 config.cfg
4 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:19:48 test.txt
31877 KB total (15973 KB free)
# Copy the file named test.txt, with the destination file name being test2.bak.
<SW7750> copy test.txt test2.bak
Copy flash:/test.txt to flash:/test2.bak?[Y/N]:y
.....
%Copy file flash:/test.txt to flash:/test2.bak...Done.
# Display the information about the files in the current directory again.
<SW7750> dir
Directory of flash:/
0 -rw- 4 Mar 09 2006 13:59:19 snmpboots
1 -rw- 16215134 Apr 04 2006 16:36:20 S7750.app
2 -rw- 553 Jan 21 2006 17:05:55 diaginfo.txt
3 -rw- 3906 Apr 04 2006 17:23:54 config.cfg
4 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:19:48 test.txt
5 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:23:03 test2.bak
31877 KB total (15961 KB free)
delete 957
delete
Syntax delete [ /unreserved ] file-url
View User view
Parameter /unreserved: Deletes a file completely.
file-url: Path name and file name of a file to be deleted.
Description Use the delete command to delete a specified file on a switch.
You can use the * character in this argument as a wildcard.
If you execute the delete command with the /unreserved keyword specified, the
specified file is completely deleted. That is, the file cannot be restored. Otherwise,
the specified file is moved to the recycle bin and can be restored using the
undelete command.
To delete the files in the recycle bin, use the reset recycle-bin command.
c CAUTION:
■ The dir command does not display the information about the files in the
recycle bin.
■ To display the information about all the files, including those in the recycle bin,
use the dir /all command. Files in the recycle bin are marked by square
brackets "[ ]".
■ For files with the same name, the recycle bin can only hold the latest deleted
one.
Example # Delete the file named test.txt, assuming that it resides in the root directory of the
flash.
<SW7750> delete flash:/test.txt
Delete flash:/test.txt?[Y/N]:y
...
%Deleted file flash:/test.txt.
dir
Syntax dir [ /all ] [ file-url ]
View User view
Parameter /all: Displays the information about all the files, including those in the recycle bin.
file-ur: Path and the name of a file whose information is to be displayed. You can
use the * character as a wildcard in this argument. For example, the dir *.txt
958 CHAPTER 75: FILE SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
command displays the information about all the files with the extension of txt in
the current directory.
Description Use the dir command to display the information about the specified files or
directories in the storage devices on a switch.
You can use the * character as a wildcard.
Example # Display the information about the file named test2.bak.
<SW7750> dir test2.bak
Directory of flash:/
0 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:23:03 test2.bak
31877 KB total (15961 KB free)
# Display the information about all the files (including the files in the recycle bin) in
directory flash:/hello/.
<SW7750> dir /all flash:/hello/
Directory of flash:/hello/
0 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:54:16 tt.txt
1 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:55:10 [tt2.txt]
31877 KB total (15935 KB free)
n In the output information of the dir /all command, the names of the files in the
recycle bin are embraced in brackets.
execute
Syntax execute file-url [ echo on ]
View System view
Parameter File-url: Path and the name of the batch file to be executed. A batch file has an
extension of .bat.
echo on: Displays the command line prompt character and command lines in the
batch processing file when the batch processing file is executed.
Description Use the execute command to execute a specified batch file.
This command executes command lines in the batch file in sequence.
If you do not specify the echo on parameter, the device does not display the
prompt character and command lines by default.
Note that
execute 959
■ A batch file cannot contain any invisible character. Otherwise, the command
quits the execution and this process is irretrievable.
■ A syntax error in a batch file results in error messages.
■ This command cannot be executed recursively.
Example # Execute the batch file named test.bat under the directory flash:/.
<SW7750> more test.bat
quit
mkdir testdir
copy test.txt test1.txt
move flash:/test1.txt flash:/testdir
cd testdir
dir
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] execute test.bat
...
%Created dir flash:/testdir.
Copy flash:/test.txt to flash:/test1.txt?[Y/N]:y
....
%Copy file flash:/test.txt to flash:/test1.txt...Done.
Move flash:/test1.txt to flash:/testdir/test1.txt?[Y/N]:y
.
%Moved file flash:/test1.txt to flash:/testdir/test1.txt.
Directory of flash:/testdir/
0 -rw- 13 Apr 27 2000 17:13:00 test1.txt
14605 KB total (1228 KB free)
<SW7750>
# Execute the test.bat batch processing file under the directory flash:/ and display
the command line prompt character and command lines in the batch processing
file
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] execute test.bat echo on
[SW7750]quit
<SW7750>mkdir testdir
% Created dir testdir
<SW7750>copy test.txt test1.txt
Copy flash:/test.txt to flash:/test1.txt ?[Y/N]:y
% Copied file flash:/test.txt to flash:/test1.txt
<SW7750>move flash:/test1.txt flash:/testdir
Move flash:/test1.txt to flash:/testdir/test1.txt ?[Y/N]:y
% Moved file flash:/test1.txt to flash:/testdir/test1.txt
<SW7750>cd testdir
<SW7750>dir
Directory of flash:/testdir/
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 17 Jan 07 2001 04:45:42 test1.txt
16125952 bytes total (6568960 bytes free)
960 CHAPTER 75: FILE SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
<SW7750>
file prompt
Syntax file prompt { alert | quiet }
View System view
Parameter alert: Prompts for confirmation before performing file-related operations that
have potential risks.
quiet: Disables prompts for file-related operations.
Description Use the file prompt command to set the prompt mode for file-related
operations.
By default, a switch prompts for confirmation before performing file-related
operations that have potential risks.
If you set the prompt mode of the file-related operations to quiet, the switch does
not prompt for confirmation before performing file-related operations. In this
case, the system is more likely to operate improperly if irretrievable file-related
operations are performed.
Example # Set the prompt mode to quiet for file-related operations.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] file prompt quiet
fixdisk
Syntax fixdisk device
View User view
Parameter device: Device name.
Description Use the fixdisk command to restore space on a storage device.
For unavailable memory spaces, you can use this command to restore them.
Example # Restore the memory space on the flash.
<SW7750> fixdisk flash:
Fixdisk flash: may take some time to complete.
%Fixdisk unit1>flash: completed.
format 961
format
Syntax format device
View User view
Parameter device: Device name.
Description Use the format command to format a storage device.
Note that all the files on a storage device get lost after the storage device is
formatted. The operation is irretrievable. Moreover, the configuration files get lost
if you format the flash.
Example # Format the flash.
<SW7750> format flash:
All data on Flash will be lost , proceed with format ? [Y/N] y
% Now begin to format flash, please wait for a while...
Format winc: completed
mkdir
Syntax mkdir directory
View User view
Parameter directory: Name of the directory to be created.
Description Use the mkdir command to create a directory in the current directory.
Note that the names of all the directories and files in the same directory must be
unique.
Note that the specified directory must exist before you use the above command to
create a sub-directory. For example, to create the sub-directory flash:/test/mytest,
the test directory must exist.
Example # Create a directory in the current directory, with the name being dd.
<SW7750> mkdir dd
...
% Created dir flash:/dd
more
Syntax more file-url
962 CHAPTER 75: FILE SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
View User view
Parameter file-url: Path and file name.
Description Use the more command to display the content of a specified file.
Currently, the content of a file can only be displayed in text.
Example # Display the content of the file named test.txt.
<SW7750> more test.txt
The file is for test only.
move
Syntax move fileurl-source fileurl-dest
View User view
Parameter fileurl-source: Path and file name of the source file.
fileurl-dest: Path and file name of the target file.
Description Use the move command to move a file to a specified directory. You can also
assign a new name for the file.
If the target file name is the name of an existing file, the system prompts you for
the confirmation to overwrite the existing file.
Example # Display the information about the files in flash:/ and flash:/hello.
<SW7750> dir
Directory of flash:/
0 -rw- 4 Mar 09 2006 13:59:19 snmpboots
1 -rw- 16215134 Apr 04 2006 16:36:20 S7750.app
2 -rw- 553 Jan 21 2006 17:05:55 diaginfo.txt
3 -rw- 3906 Apr 04 2006 17:23:54 config.cfg
4 drw- - Apr 05 2006 10:53:23 hello
5 drw- - Apr 10 2005 19:07:59 dd
6 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:23:03 test2.bak
7 drw- - Jan 25 2005 11:08:59 backup
31877 KB total (15935 KB free)
<SW7750> dir flash:/hello/
Directory of flash:/hello/
0 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:54:16 tt.txt
1 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 11:12:52 tt2.txt
31877 KB total (15935 KB free)
pwd 963
# Move the file named tt.txt from flash:/ to flash:/.
<SW7750>move flash:/hello/tt.txt flash:/tt.txt
Move flash:/hello/tt.txt to flash:/tt.txt?[Y/N]:y
...
%Moved file flash:/hello/tt.txt to flash:/tt.txt.
# Display the information about the files in flash:/ and flash:/hello again.
<SW7750> dir
Directory of flash:/
0 -rw- 4 Mar 09 2006 13:59:19 snmpboots
1 -rw- 16215134 Apr 04 2006 16:36:20 S7750.app
2 -rw- 553 Jan 21 2006 17:05:55 diaginfo.txt
3 -rw- 3906 Apr 04 2006 17:23:54 config.cfg
4 drw- - Apr 05 2006 10:53:23 hello
5 drw- - Apr 10 2005 19:07:59 dd
6 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:23:03 test2.bak
7 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 11:30:13 tt.txt
8 drw- - Jan 25 2005 11:08:59 backup
31877 KB total (15935 KB free)
<SW7750> dir flash:/hello/
Directory of flash:/hello/
0 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 11:12:52 tt2.txt
31877 KB total (15934 KB free)
pwd
Syntax pwd
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the pwd command to display the current path.
Example # Display the current path.
<SW7750> pwd
flash:
rename
Syntax rename fileurl-source fileurl-dest
View User view
964 CHAPTER 75: FILE SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Parameter fileurl-source: File name of the file to be renamed.
fileurl-dest: Target file name.
Description Use the rename command to rename a file.
If the target file name or directory name is the same with any existing file name or
directory name, you will fail to rename the file.
Example # Display the information about the files in the current directory.
<SW7750> dir
Directory of flash:/
0 -rw- 4 Mar 09 2006 13:59:19 snmpboots
1 -rw- 16215134 Apr 04 2006 16:36:20 S7750.app
2 -rw- 553 Jan 21 2006 17:05:55 diaginfo.txt
3 -rw- 3906 Apr 04 2006 17:23:54 config.cfg
4 drw- - Apr 05 2006 10:53:23 hello
5 drw- - Apr 10 2005 19:07:59 dd
6 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:23:03 test2.bak
7 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 11:30:13 tt.txt
8 drw- - Jan 25 2005 11:08:59 backup
31877 KB total (15935 KB free)
# Rename the file named tt.txt as tt.bak.
<SW7750> rename tt.txt tt.bak
Rename flash:/tt.txt to flash:/tt.bak?[Y/N]:y
...
%Renamed file flash:/tt.txt to flash:/tt.bak.
# Display the information about the files in the current directory again.
<SW7750>dir
Directory of flash:/
0 -rw- 4 Mar 09 2006 13:59:19 snmpboots
1 -rw- 16215134 Apr 04 2006 16:36:20 S7750.app
2 -rw- 553 Jan 21 2006 17:05:55 diaginfo.txt
3 -rw- 3906 Apr 04 2006 17:23:54 config.cfg
4 drw- - Apr 05 2006 10:53:23 hello
5 drw- - Apr 10 2005 19:07:59 dd
6 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:23:03 test2.bak
7 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 11:36:06 tt.bak
8 drw- - Jan 25 2005 11:08:59 backup
31877 KB total (15934 KB free)
reset recycle-bin
Syntax reset recycle-bin [ file-url ] [ /force ]
rmdir 965
View User view
Parameter file-url: Path and the file name of the file to be deleted.
/force: Does not prompt for the confirmation before deleting all the files in the
recycle bin.
Description Use the reset recycle-bin command to clear a specified file or all the files in the
recycle bin.
You can use the * as a wild module in the file-url argument.
The files deleted using the delete command are actually moved to the recycle bin.
To delete them completely, you can use the reset recycle-bin command.
Example # Delete the file named test.txt in the recycle bin.
<SW7750> reset recycle-bin flash:/test.txt
Clear flash:/test.txt ?[Y/N]:y
Clear file from flash will take long time if needed...
...
%Cleared file flash:/test.txt.
rmdir
Syntax rmdir directory
View User view
Parameter directory: Name of a directory.
Description Use the rmdir command to delete a directory.
As only empty directories can be deleted, you need to clear a directory before
deleting it.
Example # Delete the directory named hello.
<SW7750> rmdir hello
The files in the recycle-bin under this directory will be deleted pe
rmanently, Remove flash:/hello?[Y/N]:y
...
%Removed directory flash:/hello.
umount
Syntax umount cf:
View User view
966 CHAPTER 75: FILE SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Parameter None
Description Use the umount cf: command to disable the CF module. After you execute this
command, you need to re-install the CF module to use it again.
n This command can be executed successfully only when the CF module is correctly
installed.
Example # Disable the CF module.
<SW7750>umount cf:
%Umount cf: succeed.Current directory is changed to flash:.
# Verify the above operation by displaying the information about the CF module.
<SW7750> dir cf:
% Wrong device "cf:"
undelete
Syntax undelete file-url
View User view
Parameter file-url: Path and the file name of a file in the recycle bin.
Description Use the undelete command to restore a deleted file in the recycle bin.
If the name of the file to be restored is the same as that of an existing file, the
system prompts you for the confirmation to overwrite the latter.
Example # Restore the deleted file with its path and file name being flash:/hello/tt2.txt.
<SW7750> undelete flash:/hello/tt2.txt
Undelete flash:/hello/tt2.txt?[Y/N]:y
...
%Undeleted file flash:/hello/tt2.txt.
BIMS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
76
bims boot request
Syntax bims boot request
undo bims boot request
View System view
Description Use the bims boot request command to enable the BIMS device to access the
branch intelligent management system (BIMS) center at startup.
Use the undo bims boot request command to disable the BIMS device to
access the BIMS center automatically at startup.
If a user forcibly disables the BIMS device to access the BIMS center at startup,
when the device is restarted, it will not send messages to BIMS server. Therefore
BIMS center cannot detect that the device is restarted and the waiting for restart
message will be displayed on the interface.
By default, the BIMS device accesses the BIMS center immediately at startup if the
BIMS is enabled on the device.
Related command: bims request.
Example # Configure the BIMS device to access the BIMS center at startup.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bims boot request
bims device-id
Syntax bims device-id string
undo bims device-id
View System view
Parameter string: Unique identifier of the BIMS device, up to 30 characters, among which the
characters "0 to 9", "a to z", "A to Z", "-", "_", "@", and "." can be configured.
968 CHAPTER 76: BIMS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the bims device-id command to configure the unique identifier of the BIMS
device at the BIMS center.
Use the undo bims device-id command to delete the identifier.
By default, no identifier is assigned to the BIMS device.
Related command: bims interval.
Example # Set the unique identifier of the BIMS device at the BIMS center to
R2102311042W033000076.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bims device-id R2102311042W033000076
bims enable
Syntax bims enable
undo bims enable
View System view
Description Use the bims enable command to enable BIMS.
Use the undo bims enable command to disable BIMS.
By default, BIMS is not enabled.
Example # Enable BIMS.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bims enable
bims is enable
bims interval
Syntax bims interval number
undo bims interval
View System view
Parameter number: Interval for accessing the BIMS center, in the range 10 to 10080 minutes.
Description Use the bims interval command to configure the interval for accessing the BIMS
center. When the interval is set to 0, the BIMS device does not access the BIMS
center regularly.
bims ip address 969
Use the undo bims interval command to delete the interval specified for
accessing the BIMS center.
By default, no BIMS center accessing interval is set.
Related command: bims specify-time.
Example # Set the interval for accessing the BIMS center to 120 minutes.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bims interval 120
bims ip address
Syntax bims ip address ip-address [ port portnumber ]
undo bims ip address
View System view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the BIMS center.
portnumber: Port number used by the BIMS center.
Description Use the bims ip address command to configure the IP address and port number
of the BIMS center.
Use the undo bims ip address command to delete the configuration.
By default, the IP address of the BIMS center is not configured. If you do not
specify a port number when configuring the IP address of the BIMS center, port 80
applies by default.
c CAUTION: The port number configured on the BIMS device must be consistent
with that configured on the BIMS center.
Related command: bims interval.
Example # Set the IP address and port number of the BIMS center to 129.33.72.66 and 81
respectively.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bims ip address 129.33.72.66 port 81
bims request
Syntax bims request
970 CHAPTER 76: BIMS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View System view
Description Use the bims request command to have the BIMS device access the BIMS center.
Related command: bims boot request.
Example # Access the BIMS center.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bims request
bims sharekey
Syntax bims sharekey { simple | cipher } sharekey
undo bims sharekey
View System view
Parameter sharekey: Shared Key between the BIMS device and the BIMS center. It is 16 bits
long.
simple: Displays the shared key in clear text.
cipher: Displays the shared key in ciphertext. Two key configuration modes are
available:
■ Clear text: A self-defined string of 1 to 16 characters. It is automatically
generated by the system. For example, if you enter "123", the system
automatically generate the key "7-CZB#/YX]KQ=^Q‘MAF4<1!!".
■ Cipher text: A string of 24 characters. It is directly entered by the user, for
example, "7-CZB#/YX]KQ=^Q‘MAF4<1!!".
The key in clear text is used regardless of the configuration mode selected. Thus,
you are recommended to use the clear text mode for configuration.
Description Use the bims sharekey command to configure the shared key between the BIMS
device and the BIMS center.
Use the undo bims sharekey command to delete the shared key.
By default, no shared key is configured between the BIMS device and the BIMS
center.
Related command: bims ip address.
Example # Set the shared key between the BIMS device and the BIMS center to
1234567812345678. It is to be displayed in clear text.
bims source ip-address 971
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bims sharekey simple 1234567812345678
bims source ip-address
Syntax bims source ip-address ip-address
undo bims source ip-address
View System view
Parameter ip-address: Source IP address in the packets sent by the BIMS device.
Description Use the bims source ip-address command to configure a source IP address for
the packets sent by the BIMS device. It can be the IP address of a port on the
device.
Use the undo bims source ip-address command to delete the source IP
address configured for the BIMS device.
By default, no source IP address is configured for the packets sent by the BIMS
device. The BIMS device and BIMS center use the source IP address configured for
communication.
Example # On the BIMS device set the source IP address to 10.153.72.66.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bims source ip-address 10.153.72.66
bims specify-time
Syntax bims specify-time start-time [ [ end-time ] period numberdays ]
undo bims specify-time
View System view
Parameter start-time: Start time of a period during which the device accesses the BIMS
center.
end-time: End time of a period during which the device accesses the BIMS center.
Both start-time and end-time are in the format of hh:mm yyyy/mm/dd.
hh:mm yyyy/mm/dd: The first and second hh:mm yyyy/mm/dd arguments
respectively specify the start time and end time for accessing the BIMS center. If
only the first argument is specified, the BIMS device accesses the BIMS center at
that time once.
972 CHAPTER 76: BIMS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
numberdays: Period in days for accessing the BIMS center.
Description Use the bims specify-time command to configure the BIMS device to access the
BIMS center at the specified time and if desired, configure the device to access the
BIMS center at regular intervals from then on during a specified period.
Use the undo bims specify-time command to delete the setting.
The precision of the timer is one minute. The device will access BIMS center in one
minute after the specified time comes.
By default, the access time is not specified.
Related command: bims interval.
Example # Configure the router to access the BIMS center at 01:01 on December 12, 2004,
and from then on, to access the BIMS center at seven-day intervals until December
12, 2005 01:01. If the current time hasn’t reached the specified start time, after
the above configuration, the router will access the BIMS center at 01:01 on
December 12, 2004 and next time at 01:01 on December 19, 2004 after a 7*24
hours interval.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bims specify-time 01:01 2004/12/12 01:01 2005/12/12 period 7
INFORMATION CENTER COMMANDS
77
display channel
Syntax display channel [ channel-number | channel-name ]
View Any view
Parameter channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, the system has ten
channels.
channel-name: Channel name. By default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is
(in turn) console, monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent,
channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.
Description Use the display channel command to display the settings of an information
channel.
If no argument is provided, the settings of all channels are displayed.
Example # Show details about the information channel 0.
<SW7750> display channel 0
channel number:0, channel name:console
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning Y debugging Y debugging
display info-center
Syntax display info-center
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display info-center command to display the operation status of
information center, the configuration of information channels, and the format of
time stamp.
If the information records in the current log/trap buffer are less than the buffer size
specified by a user, this command displays the actual log/trap information.
974 CHAPTER 77: INFORMATION CENTER COMMANDS
Related command: info-center enable, info-center loghost, info-center logbuffer, info-center
console channel, info-center monitor channel, info-center trapbuffer,
info-center snmp channel, and info-center timestamp.
Example # Display information about information center.
<SW7750> display info-center
Information Center:enabled
Log host:
Console:
channel number:0, channel name:console
Monitor:
channel number:1, channel name:monitor
SNMP Agent:
channel number:5, channel name:snmpagent
Log buffer:
enabled, max buffer size:1024, current buffer size:256
current messages:2, channel number:4, channel name:logbuffer
dropped messages:0, overwritten messages:0
Trap buffer:
enabled, max buffer size:1024, current buffer size:256
current messages:0, channel number:3, channel name:trapbuffer
dropped messages:0, overwritten messages:0
Information timestamp setting:
log - date, trap - date, debug - boot
Table 178 Field descriptions of the display info-center command
Field Description
Information Center: Information center is enabled.
Log host: Information about the log host, including its IP address, name
and number of information channel, language and level of the
log host
Console: Information about the console port, including name and
channel of its information channel
Monitor: Information about the monitor port, including name and
channel of its information channel
SNMP Agent: Information about SNMP Agent, including name and number
of its information channel
Log buffer: Information about the log buffer, including its state (enabled
or disabled), its maximum size, current size, current messages,
information channel name and number, dropped messages,
and overwritten messages
Trap buffer: Information about the trap buffer, including its state (enabled
or disabled), maximum size, current size, current messages,
channel number and name, dropped messages, and
overwritten messages
Information timestamp setting Information about time stamp setting, describing log
information, trap information, and the time stamp format of
the debugging information
display logbuffer
Syntax display logbuffer [ level severity | size buffersize ]* [ | { begin | exclude |
include } regular-expression ]
View Any view
display logbuffer 975
Parameter level severity: Specifies an information severity level. The severity argument ranges
from 1 to 8.
Table 179 Severity definitions made on the information center
Severity Value Description
emergencies 1 Emergent errors
alerts 2 Errors that need to be corrected immediately
critical 3 Critical errors
errors 4 Errors that need to be considered but are not critical
warnings 5 Warnings that prompt possible errors
notifications 6 Information that needs to be noticed
informational 7 Normal prompting information
debugging 8 Debugging information
size buffersize: Specifies the size of the log buffer (number of messages the log
buffer holds) you want to display. The buffersize argument ranges from 1 to 1024
and defaults to 256.
|: Filters output log information with a regular expression.
begin: Displays the log information beginning with the specified characters.
exclude: Displays the log information excluding the specified characters.
include: Displays the log information including the specified characters.
regular-expression: Regular expression.
Table 180 Special characters in regular expression.
Special characters Description Usage restrictions
_ The underscore, functions similar to If the first character of a regular
a wildcard, can represent the expression is not ‘_’, the number
following characters: of ‘_’ used in the expression is not
restricted, but is restricted by the
^ -- Caret
length of command line.
$ -- Dollar sign
If the first character is ‘_’, the
| -- Alternation sign number of consecutive "_" should
less than 5;
[ -- Left bracket
If the ‘_’ characters are not
, -- Comma
consecutive, the output
( ) -- Left/right parenthesis information will be filtered by the
first group of ‘_’, and the remain
{ } -- Left/right brace
‘_’ characters will not be
] -- Right bracket processed.
Space
Start/stop character
( The left parenthesis, the You are recommended not to use
push-onto-the-stack flag in this character to establish a regular
programming expression.
Description Use the display logbuffer command to display the state of logbuffer and the
information recorded in logbuffer.
976 CHAPTER 77: INFORMATION CENTER COMMANDS
Example # Display the state of logbuffer and the log information recorded in the logbuffer.
<SW7750> display logbuffer
Logging buffer configuration and contents:enabled
Allowed max buffer size : 1024
Actual buffer size : 512
Channel number : 4 , Channel name : logbuffer
Dropped messages : 0
Overwritten messages : 0
Current messages : 91
...... (Omitted)
display logbuffer summary
Syntax display logbuffer summary [ level severity ]
View Any view
Parameter Level severity: Specifies an information severity level. The severity argument
ranges from 1 to 8.
Description Use the display logbuffer summary command to display the statistics of the
log buffer.
Example # Display summary information recorded in logbuffer.
<SW7750> display logbuffer summary
SLOT EMERG ALERT CRIT ERROR WARN NOTIF INFO DEBUG
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
display trapbuffer
Syntax display trapbuffer [ size buffersize ]
View Any view
Parameter size buffersize: Specifies the size of the trap buffer (number of messages the
buffer holds) you want to display. The buffersize argument ranges from 1 to 1024
and defaults to 256.
Description Use the display trapbuffer command to display the status of the trap buffer
and the trap information recorded in the trap buffer.
Executing the command with the size buffersize parameters will display the latest
trap records.
Example # Display the trapbuffer status and the trap information in trapbuffer.
info-center channel 977
<SW7750> display trapbuffer
Trapping Buffer Configuration and contents:enabled
allowed max buffer size : 1024
actual buffer size : 256
channel number : 3 , channel name : trapbuffer
dropped messages : 0
overwritten messages : 0
current messages : 6
#Dec 31 14:01:25 2004 3Com DEV/2/LOAD FINISHED:
Trap 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.2.23.1.12.1.20: frameIndex is 0, slotIndex 0.4
#Dec 31 14:01:33 2004 3Com DEV/2/BOARD STATE CHANGE TO NORMAL:
Trap 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.2.23.1.12.1.11: frameIndex is 0, slotIndex 0.2
#Dec 31 14:01:40 2004 3Com DEV/2/BOARD STATE CHANGE TO NORMAL:
Trap 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.2.23.1.12.1.11: frameIndex is 0, slotIndex 0.
...(Omitted)
info-center channel
Syntax info-center channel channel-number name channel-name
undo info-center channel channel-number
View System view
Parameter channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, system has ten
channels.
channel-name: Channel name, a string up to 30 characters, excluding "-", "/" or
"". And the first character must not be a number.
Description Use info-center channel name command to name a channel specified by the
channel-number as channel-name.
Use undo info-center channel command to restore the default channel name.
By default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is (in turn) console, monitor,
loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent, channel6, channel7, channel8,
channel9.
Note that the channel names must not be the same with each other.
Example # Name the channel 0 as execconsole.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] info-center channel 0 name execconsole
978 CHAPTER 77: INFORMATION CENTER COMMANDS
info-center console channel
Syntax info-center console channel { channel-number | channel-name }
undo info-center console channel
View System view
Parameter channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, system has ten
channels.
channel-name: Channel name, by default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is
(in turn) console, monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent,
channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.
Description Use the info-center console channel command to configure the channel
through which the log information is output to the console.
Use the undo info-center console channel command to restore the default
channel through which the log information is output to the console.
By default, Ethernet switches output log information to the console.
This command takes effect only after the information center function is enabled.
Related command: info-center enable, display info-center.
Example # Configure to output log information to the console through channel 7.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] info-center console channel 7
info-center enable
Syntax info-center enable
undo info-center enable
View System view
Parameter none
Description Use the info-center enable command to enable the information center function.
Use the info-center enable command to disable the information center function.
The switch can output system information to the log host, the console, and other
destinations only when the information center function is enabled.
info-center logbuffer 979
By default, the information center function is enabled.
Related command: display info-center, info-center loghost, info-center logbuffer, info-center
console channel, info-center monitor channel, info-center trapbuffer,
info-center snmp channel.
Example # Enable the information center function.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] info-center enable
% information center is enabled
info-center logbuffer
Syntax info-center logbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | size
buffersize ]* [ | exclude regular-expression ]
undo info-center logbuffer [ channel | size | | exclude regular-expression ]
View System view
Parameter channel: Configure the channel to output information to buffer.
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, system has ten
channels.
channel-name: Channel name, by default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is
(in turn) console, monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent,
channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.
size buffersize: Specifies the size of the log buffer (number of messages the buffer
holds). The buffersize argument ranges from 0 to 1024 and defaults to 512.
|: Filters output log information with a regular expression.
exclude: Displays the log information excluding the specified characters.
regular-expression: Regular expression.
For special characters used in the regular expression, refer to Table 180.
Description Use the info-center logbuffer command to configure information output to the
log buffer.
Use the undo info-center logbuffer command to cancel the configuration.
By default, the system outputs information to the log buffer, which can hold 512
records.
This command takes effect only when the information center function is enabled
for the system.
980 CHAPTER 77: INFORMATION CENTER COMMANDS
Related command: info-center enable and display info-center.
Example # Send log information to log buffer and sets the size of log buffer to 50.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] info-center logbuffer size 50
info-center loghost
Syntax info-center loghost host-ip-addr [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } ]
[ facility local-number ] [ language { chinese | english } ] *
undo info-center loghost host-ip-addr
View System view
Parameter host-ip-addr: IP address of info-center loghost.
channel: Configures information channel of the info-center loghost.
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, system has ten
channels.
channel-name: Channel name, by default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is
(in turn) console, monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent,
channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.
facility local-number: Specifies the logging facility of the log host, which ranges
from local0 to local7, with the corresponding value ranging from 16 to 23; and
defaults to local7, with the corresponding value being 23.
language: Sets the logging language.
chinese,english: Switches language used in log file between Chinese and
English.
Description Use the info-center loghost command to enable information output to loghost
by setting the IP address of the loghost.
Use the undo info-center loghost command to cancel the configuration.
By default, the system does not output information to loghost.
This command works only when the information center function is enabled for the
system.
n Be sure to set the correct IP address in the info-center loghost command. A
loopback IP address will cause an error message prompting invalid address.
Related command: info-center enable and display info-center.
info-center loghost source 981
Example # Configure the Ethernet switch to send information to the workstation Unix
whose IP address is 202.38.160.1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] info-center loghost 202.38.160.1
info-center loghost source
Syntax info-center loghost source interface-type interface-number
undo info-center loghost source
View System view
Parameter interface-type: Interface type.
interface-number: Interface number.
Description Use the info-center loghost source command to configure the source interface
through which information is sent to the loghost.
Use the undo info-center loghost source command to cancel the source
interface configuration.
Related command: info-center enable and display info-center.
Example # Specify source address of the packets sent to loghost as the address of the VLAN
1 interface.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] info-center loghost source Vlan-interface 1
info-center monitor channel
Syntax info-center monitor channel { channel-number | channel-name }
undo info-center monitor channel
View System view
Parameter channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, the system has ten
channels.
channel-name: Channel name, by default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is
(in turn) console, monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent,
channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.
982 CHAPTER 77: INFORMATION CENTER COMMANDS
Description Use the info-center monitor channel command to set the channel through
which information is output to user terminals.
Use the undo info-center monitor channel command to restore the default
channel through which the information is output to user terminals.
By default, the system outputs information to user terminal.
This command takes effect only when the information center function is enabled.
Related command: info-center enable and display info-center.
Example # Configure channel 0 to output log information to user terminal.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] info-center monitor channel 0
info-center snmp channel
Syntax info-center snmp channel { channel-number | channel-name }
undo info-center snmp channel
View System view
Parameter channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, the system has ten
channels.
channel-name: Channel name, by default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is
(in turn) console, monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent,
channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.
Description Use the info-center snmp channel command to set the channel through which
information is output to the SNMP.
Use the undo info-center snmp channel command to restore the default
channel through which information is output to the SNMP.
By default, the system outputs information to SNMP Agent through channel 5.
Related command: snmp-agent and display info-center.
Example # Configure the system to output information to the SNMP agent through channel
6.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] info-center snmp channel 6
info-center source 983
info-center source
Syntax info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number |
channel-name } [ debug { level severity | state state }* | log { level severity | state
state }* | trap { level severity | state state }* ]*
undo info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number |
channel-name }
View System view
Parameter modu-name: Module name. Refer to Table 181 for the detail.
Table 181 Modules generating the information
Module name Description
8021X 802.1x module
ACCOUNT L3+ real time accounting module
ACL Access control list module
ADBM Address base module
AM_USERB Access management module
ARP Address resolution protocol module
BGP Border gateway protocol module
CFAX Configuration agent module
CFM Configuration file management module
CLNP Connectionless network protocol module
CLNSECHO Connectionless network protocol echo module
CLST Cluster management module
CMD Command line module
DEV Device management module
DHCP Dynamic host configuration protocol module
DHCPS DHCP server module
DHCPSNP DHCP snooping module
DIAG Diagnosis module
DLDP Device link detection protocol module
DNS Domain name system module
ENTEXMIB Entity extended MIB module
ENTITY ENTITY module
ESIS End system to intermediate system routing protocol module
ETH Ethernet module
FIB Forwarding information base module
FTPS FTP server module
HA High availability module
HABP 3Com authentication bypass protocol module
HTTPD HTTP server module
HWCM 3Com Configuration Management proprietary MIB module
984 CHAPTER 77: INFORMATION CENTER COMMANDS
Table 181 Modules generating the information
Module name Description
HWP NQA module
IFNET Interface management module
IGSP IGMP snooping module
IP Internet protocol module
IPX IPX protocol module
ISIS Intermediate system-to-intermediate system intra-domain routing
information exchange protocol module
L2INF Layer 2 interface management module
LACL Lanswitch access control list module
LARP Address resolution protocol module
LETH Ethernet debugging module
LQOS Lanswitch quality of service module
LS Local server module
MIX Dual main control network management module
MODEM MODEM module
MPM Multicast port management module
MSDP Multicast source discovery protocol module
MSTP Multiple spanning tree protocol module
NAT Network address translation module
NDP Neighbor discovery protocol module
NETSTREA Traffic statistic module
NTDP Network topology discovery protocol module
NTP Network time protocol module
OSPF Open shortest path first module
RDS Radius module
RM Routing management module
RMON Remote monitor module
RMX IPX routing module
RRPP Rapid ring protection protocol module
RSA Revest, Shamir and Adleman encryption module
RTA L3+ plug-in module traffic accounting module
RTPRO Routing protocol module
SC Server control module
SHELL User interface module
SNMP Simple network management protocol module
SOCKET Socket module
SSH Secure shell module
SYSM System management module
SYSMIB System MIB module
TAC Terminal access controller module
TELNET Telnet module
TFTPC TFTP client module
info-center source 985
Table 181 Modules generating the information
Module name Description
TUNNEL Packets transparent transmission module
UDPH UDP helper module
USERLOG User log module
VFS Virtual file system module
VLAN Virtual local area network module
VRRP VRRP (virtual router redundancy protocol) module
VTY VTY (virtual type terminal) module
default Default settings of all modules
default: Defaults the settings of all modules.
channel-number: Number of information channel to be used.
channel-name: Channel name, by default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is
(in turn) console, monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent,
channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.
log: Specifies to output log information.
trap: Specifies to output trap information.
debug: Specifies to output debugging information.
level: Specifies an information severity level.
severity: Information severity level. The information below this level will not be
output.
Information at different levels is as follows:
emergencies: Level 1 information, which cannot be used by the system.
alerts: Level 2 information, to be reacted immediately.
critical: Level 3 information, critical information.
errors: Level 4 information, error information.
warnings: level 5 information, warning information.
notifications: Level 6 information, showed normally and important.
informational: Level 7 information, notice to be recorded.
debugging: Level 8 information, generated during the debugging progress.
The default information level of each channel is shown in the following table.
986 CHAPTER 77: INFORMATION CENTER COMMANDS
Table 182 Default information level of each channel
Log Trap Debugging
channel information level information level information level
Console warning debugging debugging
Terminal warning debugging debugging
Log host informational debugging debugging
Trapbuffer informational warning debugging
Logbuffer warning debugging debugging
SNMPagent debugging warning debugging
Channel6 debugging debugging debugging
Channel7 debugging debugging debugging
Channel8 debugging debugging debugging
Channel9 debugging debugging debugging
The default information state of each channel is shown in the following table.
Table 183 Default information switch state of each channel
Log Trap Debug
Channel information switch information switch information switch
Console Enable Enable Enable
Terminal Enable Enable Enable
Log host Enable Enable Disable
Trapbuffer Disable Enable Disable
Logbuffer Enable Disable Disable
SNMPagent Disable Enable Disable
Channel6 Enable Enable Disable
Channel7 Enable Enable Disable
Channel8 Enable Enable Disable
Channel9 Enable Enable Disable
state: Sets the information state.
state: Can be on or off.
Description Use the info-center source command to specify the information source in the
information center and the output direction.
Use the undo info-center source command to cancel the configuration of
information source and output direction.
This command can be used for filtering of log, trap or debugging information. For
example, it can control information output from the IP module to any direction.
You can configure to output information with severity higher than "warning" to
the log host, and information with severity higher than "informational" to the log
buffer. You can also configure to output trap information to the log host at the
same time.
info-center timestamp 987
The info-center source command determines the output direction according to
channel name or channel number. Each output direction is assigned with a default
information channel at present, as shown in the following table.
Table 184 Information channel in each output direction by default
Output direction Information channel name
Console console
Monitor monitor
Info-center loghost loghost
Log buffer logbuffer
Trap buffer trapbuffer
Snmpagent snmpagent
In addition, each information channel has a default record with the module name
"default" and module number as 0xffff0000. However, for different information
channel, the default log, trap and debugging settings in the records may be
different with one another. Use default configuration record if a module does not
have any specific configuration record in the channel.
Example # Enable the log information of VLAN module in SNMP channel and allow the
output of the information with a level higher than emergencies.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] info-center source vlan channel snmp log level emergencies
info-center timestamp
Syntax info-center timestamp { log | trap | debugging } { boot | date | none }
undo info-center timestamp { log | trap | debugging }
View System view
Parameter log: Specifies log information.
trap: Specifies trap information.
debugging: Specifies debugging information.
boot: Specifies to adopt the time elapsed since system boot, which is in the
format of "xxxxxx.yyyyyy", where xxxxxx is the high 32 bits and yyyyyy the low 32
bits of the elapsed milliseconds.
date: Specifies to adopt the current system date and time, which is in format
"yyyy/mm/dd-hh:mm:ss:ms" for Chinese environment and "Mmm dd
hh:mm:ss:ms yyyy" for English environment.
none: Specifies not to include time stamp in specified output information.
988 CHAPTER 77: INFORMATION CENTER COMMANDS
Description Use the info-center timestamp command to configure the timestamp output
format in debugging/trap information.
Use the undo info-center timestamp command to restore the default settings.
By default, the date time stamp is adopted for all types of information.
Example # Configure the debugging information timestamp format as boot.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] info-center timestamp debugging boot
info-center trapbuffer
Syntax info-center trapbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | size
buffersize ]*
undo info-center trapbuffer [ channel | size ]
View System view
Parameter size: Configures the size of the trap buffer.
buffersize: Size of trap buffer (numbers of messages). This argument ranges from
0 to 1,024 and defaults to 256.
channel: Sets the channel through which information is sent to the trap buffer.
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, the system has ten
channels.
channel-name: Channel name. By default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is
(in turn) console, monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent,
channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.
Description Use the info-center trapbuffer command to enable information output to the
trap buffer.
Use the undo info-center trapbuffer command to disable information output
to the trap buffer.
This command takes effect only after the information center function is enabled.
Related command: info-center enable and display info-center.
Example # Send information to the trap buffer and sets the size of buffer to 30.
<SW7750>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] info-center trapbuffer size 30
reset logbuffer 989
reset logbuffer
Syntax reset logbuffer
View User view
Parameter none
Description Use the reset logbuffer command to reset information in log buffer.
Example # Clear information in log buffer.
<SW7750> reset logbuffer
reset trapbuffer
Syntax reset trapbuffer
View User view
Parameter none
Description Use the reset trapbuffer command to reset information in trap buffer.
Example # Clear information in trap buffer.
<SW7750> reset trapbuffer
terminal debugging
Syntax terminal debugging
undo terminal debugging
View User view
Parameter none
Description Use the terminal debugging command to configure to display the debugging
information on the terminal.
Use the undo terminal debugging command to configure not to display the
debugging information on the terminal.
By default, the displaying function is disabled.
Related commands: “System Debugging Commands” on page 1027.
990 CHAPTER 77: INFORMATION CENTER COMMANDS
Example # Enable the terminal display debugging.
<SW7750> terminal debugging
% Current terminal debugging is on
terminal logging
Syntax terminal logging
undo terminal logging
View User view
Parameter none
Description Use the terminal logging command to enable terminal log information display.
Use the undo terminal logging command to disable terminal log information
display.
By default, this function is enabled for console users and terminal users.
Example # Disable the terminal log display.
<SW7750> undo terminal logging
% Current terminal logging is off
terminal monitor
Syntax terminal monitor
undo terminal monitor
View User view
Parameter none
Description Use the terminal monitor command to enable the debugging/log/trap
information terminal display function.
Use the undo terminal monitor command to disable these functions.
By default, these functions are enabled for console users and terminal users.
This command only takes effect on the current terminal where the commands are
input. The debugging/log/trap information can be output to the current terminal,
beginning in user view. When the terminal monitor is shut down, no
debugging/log/trap information will be displayed in local terminal, which is equals
to having performed undo terminal debugging, undo terminal logging,
undo terminal trapping commands. When the terminal monitor is enabled, you
terminal trapping 991
can use terminal debugging / undo terminal debugging, terminal logging /
undo terminal logging and terminal trapping / undo terminal trapping
respectively to enable or disable the corresponding functions.
Example # Disable the terminal monitor.
<SW7750> undo terminal monitor
% Current terminal monitor is off
terminal trapping
Syntax terminal trapping
undo terminal trapping
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the terminal trapping command to enable terminal trap information
display.
Use the undo terminal trapping command to disable this function.
By default, this function is enabled.
Example # Enable trap information display.
<SW7750> terminal trapping
% Current terminal trapping is on
992 CHAPTER 77: INFORMATION CENTER COMMANDS
FTP SERVER CONFIGURATION
78 COMMANDS
display ftp-server
Syntax display ftp-server
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display ftp-server command to display the FTP server-related settings of
a switch when it operates as an FTP server.
You can use this command to verify FTP server-related configurations.
Example # Display the FTP server-related settings of the switch (assuming that the switch is
operating as an FTP server).
<SW7750> display ftp-server
FTP server is running
Max user number 1
User count 0
Timeout value(in minute) 30
Table 185 Field descriptions of the display ftp-server command
Field Description
FTP server is running The FTP server is started
Max user number 1 The FTP server can accommodate up to one user.
User count The current login user number
Timeout value (in minute) The connection idle time
display ftp-user
Syntax display ftp-user
View Any view
Parameter None
994 CHAPTER 78: FTP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the display ftp-user command to display the settings of the current FTP user,
including the user name, host IP address, port number, connection idle time, and
work directory.
Example # Display FTP user settings.
<SW7750> display ftp-user
Username Host IP Port Idle Homedir
3Com 10.110.3.5 1074 2 flash:/3Com
# If the user name exceeds ten characters, characters behind the tenth will be
displayed in a new line in the left-aligning mode. Take username username@test
for example, the result is:
<SW7750> display ftp-user
Username Host IP Port Idle Homedir
username@t 10.110.3.5 1074 2 flash:/3Com
est
ftp server enable
Syntax ftp sever enable
undo ftp sever
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the ftp server enable command to enable the FTP server for users to log in.
Use the undo ftp server command to disable the FTP server.
By default, the FTP server is disabled to avoid potential security risks.
Example # Enable the FTP server.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ftp server enable
% Start FTP server
ftp timeout
Syntax ftp timeout minutes
undo ftp timeout
View System view
Parameter minutes: Connection idle time (in minutes) ranging from 1 to 35,791.
ftp timeout 995
Description Use the ftp timeout command to set the connection idle time.
Use the undo ftp timeout command to restore the default connection idle time.
The default connection idle time is 30 minutes.
If a FTP connection between an FTP server and an FTP client breaks down
abnormally and the FTP server is not acknowledged with this, the FTP server keeps
the connection as usual.
You can set a connection idle time, so that the FTP server considers a FTP
connection to be invalid and terminate it if no data exchange occurs on it in a
specific period known as connection idle time.
Example # Set the connection idle time to 36 minutes.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ftp timeout 36
996 CHAPTER 78: FTP SERVER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
FTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION
79 COMMANDS
n ■ You need to use the ftp command to enter FTP client view for configurations
under this view. For details, refer to section “ftp” on page 1001 .
■ After you execute the commands in this section, the output information varies
with the FTP server software you use. Examples in this section are for your
reference only.
ascii
Syntax ascii
View FTP client view
Parameter None
Description Use the ascii command to specify that files be transferred in the ASCII mode.
By default, files are transferred in the ASCII mode.
Example # Specify to transfer files in the ASCII mode.
[ftp] ascii
200 Type set to A.
binary
Syntax binary
View FTP client view
Parameter None
Description Use the binary command to specify that files be transferred in the binary mode.
Example # Specify to transfer files in the binary mode.
[ftp] binary
200 Type set to I.
998 CHAPTER 79: FTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
bye
Syntax bye
View FTP client view
Parameter None
Description Use the bye command to terminate the control connection and data connection
with the remote FTP server and quit to user view.
This command has the same effect as that of the quit command.
Example # Terminate the connections with the remote FTP server and return to user view.
[ftp] bye
221 Server closing.
<SW7750>
cd
Syntax cd pathname
View FTP client view
Parameter pathname: Path name
Description Use the cd command to change the work directory on the remote FTP server.
Note that you can use this command to enter the authorized directories only.
Example # Change the work directory to flash:/temp.
[ftp] cd flash:/temp
250 CWD command successful.
# Display the current work directory.
[ftp] pwd
257 "flash:/temp" is current directory.
cdup
Syntax cdup
View FTP client view
Parameter None
close 999
Description Use the cdup command to go to the parent directory of the current directory.
Example # Change the work directory to flash:/temp.
[ftp] cd flash:/temp
250 CWD command successful.
# Change the work directory to the parent directory.
[ftp] cdup
200 CDUP command successful.
# Display the current directory.
[ftp] pwd
257 "flash:" is current directory.
close
Syntax close
View FTP client view
Parameter None
Description Use the close command to terminate an FTP connection without quitting FTP
client view.
This command has the same effect as that of the disconnect command.
Example # Terminate the FTP connection without quitting FTP client view.
[ftp] close
221 Server closing.
[ftp]
delete
Syntax delete remotefile
View FTP client view
Parameter remotefile: Name of the file to be deleted.
Description Use the delete command to delete a specified remote file.
Example # Delete file temp.c.
[ftp] delete temp.c
250 DELE command successful.
1000 CHAPTER 79: FTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
dir
Syntax dir [ filename [ localfile ] ]
View FTP client view
Parameter filename: Name of the file to be queried.
localfile: Name of the local file where the query result is to be saved.
Description Use the dir command to query specified files on a remote FTP server, or to display
file information in the current directory. The output information, which includes
the name, size and creation time of files, will be saved in a local file.
If you do not specify the filename argument, the information about all the files in
the current directory is displayed.
Example # Display the information about all the files in the current directory on the remote
FTP server.
[ftp] dir
200 PORT command okay
150 File Listing Follows in ASCII mode
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 430585 Dec 21 2005 4.app
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 430585 Dec 21 2005 5.app
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 430585 Dec 23 2005 6. app
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 430585 Dec 21 2005 6. app.bak
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 638912 Nov 15 2005 abc.BTM
drwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 0 Dec 15 2005 TEST
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 3212176 Jul 14 2005 21.bin
226 Transfer finished successfully.
FTP: 5346 byte(s) received in 6.782 second(s) 788.00 byte(s)/sec.
# Display the information about the file named 4.app and save the output
information in the file named temp1.
[ftp] dir 4.app temp1
200 PORT command okay
150 File Listing Follows in ASCII mode
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 430585 Dec 21 2004 4. app
226 Transfer finished successfully.
FTP: 70 byte(s) received in 0.122 second(s) 573.00 byte(s)/sec.
disconnect
Syntax disconnect
View FTP client view
Parameter None
ftp 1001
Description Use the disconnect command to terminate a FTP connection without quitting FTP
client view.
This command has the same effect as that of the close command.
Example # Terminate the FTP connection without quitting FTP client view.
[ftp] disconnect
221 Server closing.
[ftp]
ftp
Syntax ftp [ cluster | ftp-server [ port-number ] ]
View User view
Parameter cluster: Cluster FTP server.
ftp-server: Host name or the IP address of an FTP server. Note that the host name
can be a string comprising 1 to 20 characters.
port-number: Port number of the FTP server, ranging from 0 to 65535. The default
is 21.
Description Use the ftp command to establish a control connection with an FTP server and
enter FTP client view.
Example # Connect to the FTP server whose IP address is 2.2.2.2.
<SW7750> ftp 2.2.2.2
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 WFTPD 2.0 service (by Texas Imperial Software) ready for new user
User(none):switch
331 Give me your password, please
Password:
230 Logged in successfully
[ftp]
n The above information is output when you use the WFTPD software as the FTP
server software. The output information may be different if you use other FTP
server software.
get
Syntax get remotefile [ localfile ]
View FTP client view
1002 CHAPTER 79: FTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter remotefile: Name of a file on an FTP server.
localfile: Name of a local file.
Description Use the get command to download a remote file and save it as a local file.
If you do not specify the localfile argument, the downloaded file is saved using its
original name.
c CAUTION: When using the get command to download files from a remote FTP
server, make sure the number of the characters containing in the path and file
name is within the system-acceptable range
Example # Download file temp.c.
[ftp] get temp.c
200 Port command okay.
150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for temp.c.
...226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 2162 byte(s) received in 4.163 second(s) 519.33 byte(s)/sec.
lcd
Syntax lcd
View FTP client view
Parameter None
Description Use the lcd command to display the local work directory on the FTP client.
Example # Display the local work directory.
[ftp] lcd
% Local directory now flash:/temp
ls
Syntax ls [ remotefile [ localfile ] ]
View FTP client view
Parameter remotefile: Name of the remote file to be queried.
Localfile: Name of the local file where the querying result is to be saved.
Description Use the ls command to display the name of a specified file on a remote FTP server.
This command does not support extended parameters, such as -a.
mkdir 1003
If you do not specify the remotefile argument, the names of all the files in the
current remote directory are displayed.
c CAUTION: The ls command only displays file names, while the dir command
displays file information in more detail, including file size, creation date and so on.
Example # Display the names of all the files in the current directory on the remote FTP
server.
[ftp] ls
227 Entering Passive Mode (2,2,2,2,4,9).
125 ASCII mode data connection already open, transfer starting for *.
s7500.app
test.cfg
s7500-1.app
another.bat
test
default.diag
226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 189 byte(s) received in 0.011 second(s) 17.18Kbyte(s)/sec.
mkdir
Syntax mkdir pathname
View FTP client view
Parameter Pathname: Name of the directory to be created.
Description Use the mkdir command to create a directory on an FTP server.
This command is available only to the FTP clients that are assigned the permission
to create directories on FTP servers.
Example # Create the directory flash:/lanswitch on the FTP server.
[ftp] mkdir flash:/lanswitch
257 "flash:/ lanswitch" new directory created.
open
Syntax open { ip-address | server-name } [ port ]
View FTP client view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of an FTP server.
server-name: Host name of the FTP server, a string comprising 1 to 20 characters.
port: Port number on the remote FTP server, ranging from 0 to 65535. The default
value is 21.
1004 CHAPTER 79: FTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the open command to establish a control connection with an FTP server.
Related command: close.
Example # Establish a control connection with the FTP server whose IP address is 1.1.1.1.
[ftp]open 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220-
220 WFTPD 2.0 service (by Texas Imperial Software) ready for new user
User(none):abc
331 Give me your password, please
Password:
230 Logged in successfully
passive
Syntax passive
undo passive
View FTP client view
Parameter None
Description Use the passive command to set the data transfer mode to the passive mode.
Use the undo passive command to set the data transfer mode to the active
mode.
By default, the passive mode is adopted.
Example # Set the data transfer mode to the passive mode.
[ftp] passive
% Passive is on
put
Syntax put localfile [ remotefile ]
View FTP client view
Parameter localfile: Name of a local file to be uploaded.
remotefile: File name, which the local file is to be saved as.
Description Use the put command to upload a local file to an FTP server.
pwd 1005
If you do not specify the remotefile argument, the local file is saved on the FTP
server using the original name.
Example # Upload the local file named temp.c to the FTP server.
[ftp] put temp.c
200 Port command okay.
150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for config.cfg.
Operation may take a long time, please wait...
226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 2162 byte(s) sent in 12.115 second(s) 178.45byte(s)/sec.
pwd
Syntax pwd
View FTP client view
Parameter None
Description Use the pwd command to display the work directory on an FTP server.
Example # Display the work directory on the FTP server.
[ftp] pwd
257 "flash:/temp" is current directory.
quit
Syntax quit
View FTP client view
Parameter None
Description Use the quit command to terminate an FTP connection and quit to user view.
This command has the same effect as that of the bye command.
Example # Terminate the FTP connection and return to user view.
[ftp] quit
221 Windows FTP Server (WFTPD, by Texas Imperial Software) says goodbye
<SW7750>
remotehelp
Syntax remotehelp [ protocol-command ]
1006 CHAPTER 79: FTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
View FTP client view
Parameter protocol-command: FTP protocol command.
Description Use the remotehelp command to display the on-line help of an FTP protocol
command.
This command works only when the FTP server provides the on-line help
information about FTP protocol commands.
c CAUTION:
■ This command is always valid when a 3Com switch operates as an FTP server.
■ If you use other FTP server software, refer to related instructions to make sure
whether it provides on-line help information about FTP protocol commands.
Example # Display the syntax of the user command.
[ftp] remotehelp user
214 Syntax: USER <sp> <username>
rmdir
Syntax rmdir pathname
View FTP client view
Parameter pathname: Name of a directory on an FTP server.
Description Use the rmdir command to remove a directory on an FTP server.
Note that you can only use this command to remove directories that are empty.
Example # Remove directory flash:/temp1 on the FTP server. (Assume that the directory is
empty.)
[ftp] rmdir flash:/temp1
200 RMD command successful.
user
Syntax user username [ password ]
View FTP client view
Parameter username: Name of the user to switch to.
password: Password corresponding to the user.
verbose 1007
Description Use the user command to switch to a specified user.
Example # Switch to the user named tom, assuming that the corresponding password is
111.
[ftp] user tom 111
331 Give me your password, please
230 Logged in successfully
verbose
Syntax verbose
undo verbose
View FTP client view
Parameter None
Description Use the verbose command to enable the verbose function, which displays the
execution and response information of when a command is executed.
Use the undo verbose command to disable the verbose function.
The verbose function is enabled by default.
Example # Enable the verbose function.
[ftp] verbose
% Verbose is on
1008 CHAPTER 79: FTP CLIENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
TFTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
80
tftp get
Syntax tftp { cluster | tftp-server } get source-file [ dest-file ]
View User view
Parameter cluster: Cluster TFTP server.
tftp-server: IP address or the host name of a TFTP server.
source-file: Name of the file to be downloaded from the TFTP server.
dest-file: File name, which the downloaded file is to be saved as.
Description Use the tftp get command to download a file from a TFTP server to the local
switch.
Related command: tftp put.
Example # Download the file named abc.txt from the TFTP server whose IP address is
1.1.1.1 and save it as efg.txt.
<SW7750> tftp 1.1.1.1 get abc.txt efg.txt
File will be transferred in binary mode.
Downloading file from remote tftp server, please wait......
TFTP: 35 bytes received in 0 second(s).
File downloaded successfully.
tftp put
Syntax tftp { cluster | tftp-server } put source-file [ dest-file ]
View User view
Parameter cluster: Cluster TFTP server.
tftp-server: IP address or the host name of a TFTP server.
source-file: Name of the file to be uploaded to the TFTP server.
1010 CHAPTER 80: TFTP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
dest-file: File name, which the uploaded file is to be saved as.
Description Use the tftp put command to upload a file to a specified directory on a TFTP
server.
Related command: tftp get.
Example # Upload the file named config.cfg to the TFTP server whose IP address is 1.1.1.1
and save it as temp.cfg.
<SW7750> tftp 1.1.1.1 put config.cfg temp.cfg
File will be transferred in binary mode.
Copying file to remote tftp server. Please wait... /
TFTP: 962 bytes sent in 0 second(s).
File uploaded successfully.
tftp-server acl
Syntax tftp-server acl acl-number
undo tftp-server acl
View System view
Parameter acl-number: Basic ACL number ranging from 2000 to 2999.
Description Use the tftp-server acl command to specify the ACL adopted for the connection
between a TFTP client and a TFTP server.
Use the undo tftp-server acl command to cancel all the ACLs adopted.
Example # Specify to adopt ACL 2000 on the TFTP client.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] tftp-server acl 2000
DNS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
81
display dns domain
Syntax display dns domain
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display dns domain command to display the information in the DNS
suffix list.
Related command: dns domain.
Example # Display the information in the DNS suffix list.
<SW7750> display dns domain
No. Domain-name
0 aaa.com
Table 186 Field descriptions of the display dns domain command
Field Description
No. Sequence number
Domain-name Domain name suffix
display dns dynamic-host
Syntax display dns dynamic-host
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display dns dynamic-host command to display information about the
dynamic DNS cache.
The DNS Client saves successful DNS resolution results to the DNS cache. When
receiving a name query, the DNS Client first looks up the DNS cache for a match. If
a match is found, it returns the corresponding IP address to the user program. If
not, it sends a query to the DNS Server.
1012 CHAPTER 81: DNS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Display the information in the dynamic DNS cache.
<SW7750> display dns dynamic-host
No. Domain-name IpAddress TTL Alias
0 www.baidu.com 202.108.249.134 63000
1 www.yahoo.akadns.net 66.94.230.39 24
2 www.hotmail.com 207.68.172.239 3585
3 www.eyou.com 61.136.62.70 3591
Table 187 Description on the field of the display dns dynamic-host command
Field Description
No. Sequence number
Domain-name Domain name
IpAddress IP address corresponding to the domain name
TTL Time for the entry to be stored in the cache (in seconds)
Alias Alias name for the domain name, up to 4
display dns server
Syntax display dns server [ dynamic ]
View Any view
Parameter Dynamic: Displays the DNS server information dynamically obtained by DHCP or
other protocols.
Description Use the display dns server command to display the DNS server information.
Related command: dns server.
Example # Display the DNS server information.
<SW7750> display dns server
Domain-server IpAddress
0 169.254.65.125
1 169.254.66.15
Table 188 Field descriptions of the display dns server command
Field Description
Domain-server Sequence number of the DNS server. The system automatically
numbers the configured DNS servers starting from 0.
IpAddress IP address of the DNS server
display ip host
Syntax display ip host
View Any view
dns domain 1013
Parameter None
Description Use the display ip host command to display the hostnames and corresponding
IP addresses in the static DNS list.
Example # Display the hostnames and corresponding IP addresses in the static DNS list.
<SW7750> display ip host
Host Age Flags Address
My 0 static 1.1.1.1
Aa 0 static 2.2.2.4
Table 189 Field descriptions of the display ip host command
Field Description
Host Hostname
Age Time to live. It is always 0, meaning the static entries will never age out.
A static name-to-address mapping entry can only be manually removed.
Flags Type flag for the name-to-address mapping entry. It is "static" for static entries.
Address IP address of the host
dns domain
Syntax dns domain domain-name
undo dns domain [ domain-name ]
View System view
Parameter domain-name: DNS suffix, a string of 1 to 60 characters, including alphanumeric
characters, hyphens (-), underscores (_), and dots (.).
Description Use the dns domain command to configure a DNS suffix.
Use the undo dns domain command to delete one or all DNS suffixes.
No DNS suffix is configured by default.
You can configure up to 10 DNS suffixes. When using the undo dns domain
command, if you specify a DNS suffix, only the specified DNS suffix is removed,
otherwise, all statically configured suffixes are removed.
Related command: display dns domain.
n The DNS resolution function supported by Switch 7750 should be used together
with a DNS Server. Different DNS Servers may have differences in DNS
implementation. For example, the Switch 7750 supports a domain name which
includes "_", while Windows 2000 Server may be unable to resolve the "_".
Example # Configure com as a DNS suffix.
1014 CHAPTER 81: DNS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dns domain com
dns resolve
Syntax dns resolve
undo dns resolve
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the dns resolve command to enable dynamic DNS resolution.
Use the undo dns resolve command to disable dynamic DNS resolution.
Dynamic DNS resolution is disabled by default.
Example # Enable dynamic DNS resolution.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dns resolve
dns server
Syntax dns server ip-address
undo dns server [ ip-address ]
View System view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of a DNS server.
Description Use the dns server command to configure a DNS server IP address.
Use the undo dns server to remove a configured DNS server IP address.
No DNS server IP address is configured by default.
You can configure up to 6 DNS servers.
Related command: display dns server.
Example # Configure a DNS server with the IP address 172.16.1.1.
ip host 1015
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] dns server 172.16.1.1
ip host
Syntax ip host hostname ip-address
undo ip host hostname [ ip-address ]
View System view
Parameter Hostname: Hostname, a string of 1 to 30 characters, including alphanumeric
characters, hyphens (-), or dots (.).
ip-address: IP address of the specified host, in dotted decimal notation.
Description Use the ip host command to add a hostname-to-IP address mapping entry in the
static DNS list.
Use the undo ip host command to remove a mapping entry from the static DNS
list.
By default, there is no entry in the static DNS list.
As one hostname can mapped to only one IP address, when you add multiple
hostname-to-address mapping entries with the same hostname, only the last one
will be valid.
Related command: display ip host.
Example # Configure a mapping entry from the host named aaa to the IP address
10.110.0.1
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip host aaa 10.110.0.1
reset dns dynamic-host
Syntax reset dns dynamic-host
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset dns dynamic-host command to clear the dynamic DNS cache.
Related command: display dns dynamic-host.
1016 CHAPTER 81: DNS CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Clear the dynamic DNS cache.
<SW7750> reset dns dynamic-host
BASIC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
82 COMMANDS
clock datetime
Syntax clock datetime HH:MM:SS YYYY/MM/DD
View User view
Parameter HH:MM:SS: Current time, where HH ranges from 0 to 23, MM and SS range from
0 to 59.
YYYY/MM/DD: Current date, where YYYY is the year ranging from 2000 to 2099,
MM is the month ranging from 1 to 12, and DD is the day the range of which is
related with the month.
Description Use the clock datetime command to set the current date and time of the
Ethernet switch.
In an environment that needs to obtain exact absolute time, it is required to use
this command to set the current date and time of the Ethernet switch.
Related command: display clock.
Example # Set the current date and time of the Ethernet switch to 0:0:0 2001/01/01.
<SW7750> clock datetime 0:0:0 2001/01/01
clock summer-time
Syntax clock summer-time zone-name one-off start-time start-date end-time end-date
offset-time
clock summer-time zone-name repeating { start-time start-date end-time
end-date | start-time start-year start-month start-week start-day end-time
end-year end-month end-week end-day } offset-time
undo clock summer-time
View User view
Parameter zone-name: Name of the summer time, 1 to 32 characters long.
1018 CHAPTER 82: BASIC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
one-off: Sets the summer time for only one year (the specified year).
repeating: Sets the summer time for every year starting from the specified year.
start-time start-date: Start time and start date of the summer time, in the form of
HH:MM:SS YYYY/MM/DD.
end-time end-date: End time and end date of the summer time, in the form of
HH:MM:SS YYYY/MM/DD.
start-year: Start year, in the range of 2000 to 2099.
start-month: Start month, the value of which is January, February, March, April,
May, June, July, August, September, October, November, and December.
start-week: Start week, the value of which is first, second, third, fourth, fifth, and
last.
start-day: Start day, the value of which is Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,
Thursday, Friday, and Sunday.
end-year: End year, which should be the same year as the start year, ranges from
2000 to 2099.
end-month: End month, the value of which is January, February, March, April,
May, June, July, August, September, October, November, and December.
end-week: End week, the value of which is first, second, third, fourth, fifth, and
last.
end-day: End day, the value of which is Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,
Thursday, Friday, Sunday.
offset-time: Offset of the summer time relative to the standard time.
Description Use the clock summer-time command to set the name and time range of the
summer time.
Use the undo clock summer-time to cancel the settings.
After the setting, you can use the display clock command to check the results.
The time of the log and debugging information adopts the local time that has
been adjusted by the time zone and summer time.
Related command: clock timezone.
Example # Set the summer time named z2, which starts from 06:00:00 2002/06/08, ends
until 06:00:00 2002/09/01, and is one hour ahead of the standard time.
<SW7750> clock summer-time z2 one-off 06:00:00 2005/06/08 06:00:00 2
002/09/01 01:00:00
clock timezone 1019
# Set the summer time named z2, which starts from 06:00:00 06/08, ends until
06:00:00 09/01, and is one hour ahead of the standard time every year from 2002
on.
<SW7750> clock summer-time z2 repeating 06:00:00 2002/06/08 06:00:00
2002/09/01 01:00:00
clock timezone
Syntax clock timezone zone-name { add | minus } HH:MM:SS
undo clock timezone
View User view
Parameter zone-name: Name of the time zone, in length of 1 to 32 characters.
add: Sets the time zone to a time before the UTC time.
minus: Sets the time zone to a time behind the UTC time.
HH:MM:SS: Time to be subtracted from the UTC time, in the form of HH:MM:SS.
Description Use the clock timezone command to set the local time zone.
Use the undo clock timezone command to restore the local time zone to the
default UTC (universal time coordinated) time zone.
After the setting, you can use the display clock command to check the results.
The log information time and the debugging information time adopt the local
time that has been adjusted by the time zone and the summer time.
Related command: clock summer-time.
Example # Set the local time zone named z5, which is five hours ahead of the UTC time.
<SW7750> clock timezone z5 add 05:00:00
language-mode
Syntax language-mode { chinese | english }
View User view
Parameter chinese: Sets the CLI language environment to Chinese.
English: Sets the CLI language environment to English.
1020 CHAPTER 82: BASIC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the language-mode command to toggle between the language modes
(that is, language environments) of the command line interface (CLI) to meet your
requirement.
By default, the CLI language mode is english.
Example # Toggle from the english mode to the chinese mode.
<SW7750> language-mode chinese
quit
Syntax quit
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the quit command to return from current view to lower level view, or exit the
system if current view is user view.
The following lists the three levels of views available (from lower level to higher
level):
■ User view
■ System view
■ VLAN view, Ethernet port view, and so on
Related command: return and system-view.
Example # Return from system view to user view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] quit
<SW7750>
return
Syntax return
View System view and higher level views
Parameter None
Description Use the return command to return from current view to user view. The composite
key <Ctrl+Z> has the same effect with the return command.
sysname 1021
Related command: quit.
Example # Return from interface view to user view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 1/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet1/0/1] return
<SW7750>
sysname
Syntax sysname sysname
undo sysname
View System view
Parameter sysname: System name of the Ethernet switch. It is a character string in length of 1
to 30 characters. By default, it is 3Com.
Description Use the sysname command to set the system name of the Ethernet switch.
Changing the system name will affect the CLI prompt. For example, if the system
name of the switch is 3Com, the prompt for user view is <SW7750>.
Use the undo sysname command to restore the default system view of the
Ethernet switch.
Example # Set the system name of the Ethernet switch to 3ComLANSwitch.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] sysname 3ComLANSwitch
[SW7750LANSwitch]
system-view
Syntax system-view
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the system-view command to enter system view from user view.
Related command: quit and return.
Example # Enter system view from user view.
1022 CHAPTER 82: BASIC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750]
SYSTEM STATUS/INFORMATION
83 DISPLAY COMMANDS
display clock
Syntax display clock
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display clock command to display the current date and time of the
system, so that you can adjust them if they are wrong.
The maximum date and time that can be displayed by this command is 23:59:59
9999/12/31.
Related command: clock datetime.
Example # Display the current date and time of the system.
<SW7750> display clock
18:36:31 beijing Sat 2002/02/02
Time Zone : beijing add 01:00:00
Summer-Time : bj one-off 01:00:00 2003/01/01 01:00:00 2003/08/08 01:
00:00
Table 190 Field descriptions of the display clock command
Field Description
18:36:31 beijing Sat 2002/02/02 Current date and time of the system
Time Zone Configured time zone information
Summer-Time Configured summer time information
display debugging
Syntax display debugging [ interface interface-type interface-number ] [ module-name
]
View Any view
Parameter interface-type: Interface type, supported by the switch, which can be Ethernet,
GigabitEthernet, AUX, VLAN-interface and so on.
1024 CHAPTER 83: SYSTEM STATUS/INFORMATION DISPLAY COMMANDS
interface-numbe: Interface number.
module-name: Module name.
Description Use the display debugging command to display enabled debugging.
If you want to view the current enabled debugging, you can execute the display
debugging command. Executing this command without any parameter will
display all enabled debugging.
Related command: debugging.
Example # Display all enabled debugging.
<SW7750> display debugging
IP packet debugging is on.
The above information indicates that the IP packets debugging is enabled.
display version
Syntax display version
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display version command to display the information (such as the
version information) about the switch system.
Specifically, you can use this command to check the software version and issue
time, the basic hardware configuration, and some other information about the
switch.
Example # Display the version of the system.
<SW7750> display version
3Com Comware Platform Software
Comware software, Version 3.10, Release E3226
Copyright (c) 2004-2007 3Com Corporation All rights reserved.
3Com Switch 7758 uptime is 0 week, 1 day, 0 hour, 32 minutes
SRPG 0: uptime is 0 weeks,1 days,0 hours,32 minutes
3Com S7750 with 1 MPC8245 Processor
256M bytes SDRAM
32768K bytes Flash Memory
512K bytes NVRAM Memory
PCB Version : VER.B
BootROM Version : 530
CPLD Version : 004
Second CPLD Ver : 005
Software Version : S7758-E3226
Patch Version : None
display version 1025
I/O Module 1: uptime is 0 weeks,1 days,0 hours,29 minutes
3Com S7750 I/O Module with 1 MPC8241 Processor
128M bytes SDRAM
0K bytes Flash Memory
0K bytes NVRAM Memory
PCB Version : VER.B
BootROM Version : 527
CPLD Version : 002
Software Version : S7758-E3226
Patch Version : None
......
1026 CHAPTER 83: SYSTEM STATUS/INFORMATION DISPLAY COMMANDS
SYSTEM DEBUGGING COMMANDS
84
debugging
Syntax debugging { all [ timeout interval ] | module-name debugging-option }
undo debugging { all | module-name debugging-option }
View User view
Parameter all: Enables or disables all debugging.
timeout interval: Sets the timeout time for all debugging, in the range of 1 to
1,440 (in minutes). After the setting, all debugging is valid in the specified period
which starts from the time when the debugging is enabled. After the period, all
debugging will be disabled.
module-name: Module name.
debugging-option: Debugging option.
Description Use the debugging command to enable system debugging.
Use the undo debugging command to disable system debugging.
By default, all debugging is disabled for the system.
Ethernet switches provide various debugging functions for technical support
specialists and senior maintenance personnel to do network fault diagnostics.
Enabling debugging will generate a great deal of debugging information and thus
will affect the efficiency of the system, especially after enabling all debugging
through the debugging all command, the system may collapse. Therefore, it is
recommended not to use the debugging all command. The undo debugging
all command brings great convenience for you to disable all debugging at a time
instead of disabling them one by one.
Related command: display debugging.
Example # Enable IP packet debugging.
<SW7750> debugging ip packet
1028 CHAPTER 84: SYSTEM DEBUGGING COMMANDS
display diagnostic-information
Syntax display diagnostic-information [ module-name ]
View Any view
Parameter module-name: Module name. See the following table for details:
Table 191 Module name list
Module name Description
ARP ARP module information
DHCP DHCP module information
DRV Driver information
ETHERNET Ethernet module information
FTTH FTTH information
IGMP Multicast information
IP IP module information
L2INF Interface management information
LACP Link aggregation information
MEMORY Memory information
QUEUE Queue management information
RXTX Packet transmission information
STP STP information
SYSTEM System status information
Description Use the display diagnostic-information command to display operation
information about all or specified functional modules.
When the system goes wrong, you need to collect much information to locate the
fault. However, each module has its corresponding display command, which make
it difficult for you to collect all the information needed at a time. In this case, you
can use display diagnostic-information command to collect the operation
information about all or specified module. For displaying all information at a time
costs a long time and is not convenient to view, this command provides two
modes for you to collect the information
■ Output information to the Console.
■ Output information to a file.
You can choose one according to the prompt of the system.
Example # Display operation information about ARP module, output the information to the
file diaginfo.txt and save the file to the Flash memory.
<SW7750 > display diagnostic-information ARP
Redirect it to file?[Y/N]y
Please input the file name(*.txt)[flash:/diaginfo.txt]:
This operation may take a few minutes, continue?[Y/N]y
terminal debugging 1029
Writing diagnostic information to flash:/diaginfo.txt now.
......
<SW7750>
terminal debugging
Syntax terminal debugging
undo terminal debugging
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the terminal debugging command to enable terminal display for
debugging information.
Use the undo terminal debugging command to disable terminal display for
debugging information.
By default, terminal display for debugging information is disabled.
Related command: debugging.
Example # Enable terminal display for debugging information.
<SW7750> terminal debugging
1030 CHAPTER 84: SYSTEM DEBUGGING COMMANDS
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEST
85 COMMANDS
ping
Syntax ping [ -a ip-address | -c count | -d | -f | -h ttl | -i interface-type interface-number |
-n | - p pattern | -q | -r | -s packetsize | -t timeout | -tos tos | -v | ip ]* host-ip
ping ipx ipx-address [ -c count | -s packetsize | -t timeout ]*
ping clns nsap-address
View Any view
Parameter -a ip-address: Sets the source IP address to send the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST
packets.
-c count: Specifies how many times the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet will be sent.
The count argument is the times, which ranges from 1 to 4,294,967,295 and
defaults to 5.
-d: Sets the socket to DEBUGGING mode. By default, it is non-DEBUGGING mode.
-f: Specifies to discard a packet directly instead of fragmenting it if its length is
greater than the MTU (maximum transmission unit) of the interface.
-h ttl: Sets the TTL (time to live) value of the echo request packets in the range of
1 to 255. By default, the TTL value is 255.
-i interface-type interface-number: Specifies the interface that sends ICMP
ECHO-REQUEST packets by its interface type and number. After the interface is
specified, the TTL of the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet is set to 1 to test the
directly-connected device (the IP address of the device is in the same network
segment as that of the interface).
-n: Specifies to regard the host argument as an IP address without performing
domain name resolution. By default, the host argument is first regarded as an IP
address; if it is not an IP address, domain name resolution is performed.
-p pattern: Specifies the padding byte pattern of the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST
packets. The pattern argument is a byte in hexadecimal. For example, -p ff fills a
packet with only ff. By default, the system fills a packet with 0x01, 0x02, and so
on, until 0x09; then it repeats this procedure from 0x01 again.
-q: Specifies to display only the statistics and not to display the details. By default,
all the information including the details and statistics will be displayed.
1032 CHAPTER 85: NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEST COMMANDS
-r: Specifies to record the routes. By default, the system does not record any route.
-s packetsize: Specifies the size (in bytes) of each ECHO-REQUEST packet
(excluding the IP and ICMP headers). The packetize argument ranges from 20 to
32,000 and defaults to 56 bytes.
-t timeout: Sets the timeout time (in ms) waiting for an ECHO-RESPONSE packet
after an ECHO-REQUEST packet is sent. The timeout argument ranges defaults to
2,000 ms.
-tos tos: Sets the ToS value of the echo request packets in the range of 0 to 255.
By default, this value is 0.
-v: Specifies to display other ICMP packets received (that is, non-ECHO-RESPONSE
packets). By default, except for the ECHO-RESPONSE packets, other ICMP packets
are not displayed.
ip: Chooses IP ICMP packet.
host-ip: Domain name or IP address of the destination host, 1 to 30 characters
long.
ipx: Chooses IPX packet.
ipx-address: IPX address of the destination host.
clns: Chooses CLNS ECHO packets.
nsap-address: NSAP address of the destination host.
Description Use the ping command to check the connectivity of IP network or IPX network,
and the reachability of a host.
The process of executing of the ping command in the IP network: First, the source
host sends an ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet to the destination host. If the
connection to the destination network is normal, the destination host receives this
packet and responds with an ICMP ECHO-REPLY packet.
You can use the ping command to check the network connectivity and the quality
of a network line. This command can output the following information:
■ Response status of the destination to each ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet. If no
response packet is received within the timeout time, including the number of
bytes, packet sequence number, TTL and response time of the response packet.
If no response packet is received within the timeout time, the message
"Request time out" is displayed instead.
■ Final statistics, including the numbers of sent packets and received response
packets, the irresponsive packet percentage, and the minimum, average and
maximum values of response time.
You can set a relatively long timeout time waiting for response packet if the
network transmission is slow.
tracert 1033
Related command: tracert.
Example # Check the reachability of the host with IP address 202.38.160.244.
<SW7750> ping 202.38.160.244
ping 202.38.160.244 : 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=1 ttl=255 time = 1ms
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=2 ttl=255 time = 2ms
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=3 ttl=255 time = 1ms
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=4 ttl=255 time = 3ms
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=5 ttl=255 time = 2ms
--202.38.160.244 ping statistics--
5 packet transmitted
5 packet received
0.00% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/3 ms
tracert
Syntax tracert [ -a source-ip | -f first-TTL | -m max-TTL | -p port | -q num-packet | -w
timeout ] * host
tracert clns [ -m max-TTL | -n num-packet | -t timeout | -v ]* nsap-address
View Any view
Parameter -a source-ip: Sets the source IP address used by this command.
-f first-TTL: Sets the initial TTL of the packets to be sent, so that this command
displays the addresses of only those gateways on the path whose hop counts are
not smaller than the hop count specified by the first-TTL argument. For example, if
the first-TTL argument is three, the command displays the addresses of the
gateways from the third hop. The first-TTL argument ranges from 1 to 255 and
defaults to 1.
-m max-TTL: Sets the maximum TTL value of the packets to be sent. After the
command sends a packet with the maximum TTL, it will not send any more
packets. With this argument, this command displays the addresses of only those
gateways from the source destination to the hop count specified by the argument.
For example, if the max-TTL argument is 5, the command displays the addresses of
the gateways from the source to the fifth count. The max-TTL argument ranges
from 1 to 255 and defaults to 30.
-p port: Sets the destination port of the packets to be sent. The port argument
ranges from 0 to 65535 and defaults to 33434. Generally, you need not change
the argument.
-q num-packet: Sets the number of packets to be sent every time. The nqueries
argument ranges from 0 to 65,535 and defaults to 3.
-w timeout: Sets the timeout time to wait for ICMP error packets. The timeout
argument ranges from 0 to 65,535 and defaults to 5,000 (in milliseconds).
1034 CHAPTER 85: NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEST COMMANDS
host: IP address of the destination host or the host name of the remote system, 1
to 30 characters long.
clns: Connectionless network service, a suit of protocols in OSI system, including
CLNP, ISIS and ESIS.
-m max-TTL: Sets a maximum TTL value. The max-TTL argument ranges from 1 to
255 and defaults to 30.
-n num-packet: Indicates the integral number of the sent test packets. The
num-packet argument ranges from 0 to 65535 and defaults to 3.
-t timeout: Sets the timeout time of the tracert command. The timeout argument,
in seconds, ranges from 0 to 65535 and defaults to 5.
-v: Explains the error if the response packet error occurs. If no error occurs, after
you execute the command, the result is the same as the command is executed
without -v.
nsap-address: NSAP address of the destination host.
Description Use the tracert command to trace the gateways the test packets passes through
during its journey from the source to the destination. This command is mainly
used to check the network connectivity. It can help you locate the trouble spot of
the network.
The executing procedure of the tracert command is as follows: First, the source
sends a packet with the TTL of 1, and the first hop device returns an ICMP error
message indicating that it cannot forward this packet because of TTL timeout.
Then, the source resends a packet with the TTL of 2, and the second hop device
also returns an ICMP TTL timeout message. This procedure goes on and on until a
packet gets to the destination or the maximum TTL is reached. During the
procedure, the system records the source address of each ICMP TTL timeout
message in order to offer the path that the packets pass through to the
destination.
If you find that the network is in trouble by using the ping command, you can use
the tracert command to find where the trouble is in the network.
The tracert command can output the IP addresses of all the gateways the packets
pass through to the destination. It output the string "***" if a gateway times out.
Example # Trace the gateways the packets pass through during its journey to the
destination with IP address 18.26.0.115.
<SW7750> tracert 18.26.0.115
tracert to allspice.lcs.mit.edu (18.26.0.115), 30 hops max, 40 bytes
packet
1 helios.ee.lbl.gov (128.3.112.1) 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms
2 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 19 ms 19 ms 19 ms
3 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 39 ms 19 ms 19 ms
4 ccngw-ner-cc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.136.23) 19 ms 39 ms 39 ms
5 ccn-nerif22.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.168.22) 20 ms 39 ms 39 ms
6 128.32.197.4 (128.32.197.4) 59 ms 119 ms 39 ms
7 131.119.2.5 (131.119.2.5) 59 ms 59 ms 39 ms
tracert 1035
8 129.140.70.13 (129.140.70.13) 80 ms 79 ms 99 ms
9 129.140.71.6 (129.140.71.6) 139 ms 139 ms 159 ms
10 129.140.81.7 (129.140.81.7) 199 ms 180 ms 300 ms
11 129.140.72.17 (129.140.72.17) 300 ms 239 ms 239 ms
12 * * *
13 128.121.54.72 (128.121.54.72) 259 ms 499 ms 279 ms
14 * * *
15 * * *
16 * * *
17 * * *
18 ALLSPICE.LCS.MIT.EDU (18.26.0.115) 339 ms 279 ms 279 ms
1036 CHAPTER 85: NETWORK CONNECTIVITY TEST COMMANDS
DEVICE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
86
boot boot-loader
Syntax boot boot-loader { primary | backup } file-url
View User view
Parameter primary: Specifies an application as primary boot application.
backup: Specifies an application as backup boot application.
file-url: Path + name of an APP file in the Flash memory or CF module.
Description Use the boot boot-loader command to specify the APP file that will be adopted
when the switch reboots next time.
You can use this command to specify a primary and backup boot application for a
switch. The boot process is as following:
■ Normally, primary boot application is adopted for boot.
■ When the primary boot application goes wrong, the switch automatically uses
the backup boot application to startup.
■ If the switch can not boot through primary and backup boot applications, it
chooses an application in the Flash randomly for boot. If the switch still can not
boot, then the switch fails to boot.
The Boot ROM with the version not below 400 supports double applications boot.
Example # Specify the S7750.APP as the main application adopted when the active Fabric
reboots next time.
<SW7750> boot boot-loader primary S7750.APP slot 0
# Specify the S7750.APP as the main application file adopted when the standby
Fabric reboots next time.
<SW7750> boot boot-loader primary slot1#flash:/S7750.APP slot 1
boot bootrom
Syntax boot bootrom file-url slot slot-list
1038 CHAPTER 86: DEVICE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
View User view
Parameter file-url: Path + name of a Boot ROM file (that is, a .btm file) in the Flash memory.
slot slot-list: Specifies the slot number list, which is provided in the format of
slot-list= { slot-number [ to slot-number ] } & <1-N>, where &<1-N> means that
you can specify up to N slot numbers or slot number ranges. For the Switch 7757,
and 7758, N is 7 and for the Switch 7754, N is 4.
Description Use the boot bootrom command to update the Boot ROM.
Example # Update the Boot ROM of the module in slot 1 of the switch using the file named
S7750.btm.
<SW7750> boot bootrom S7750.btm slot 1
boot bootrom default
Syntax boot bootrom default [ slot slot-list ]
View User view
Parameter slot-list: Slot number list, provided in the format of slot-list = [ slot-number [ to
slot-number ] ]&<1-N>, where &<1-N> means that you can specify up to N slot
numbers or slot number ranges. For the Switch 7757, and 7758, N is 7 and for the
Switch 7754, N is 4.
Description Use the boot bootrom default command to upgrade the Boot ROM by using
the current boot file.
Example # Use the current boot file to upgrade the Boot ROM of all service modules that
working normally.
<SW7750> boot bootrom default
bootrom-update security-check enable
Syntax bootrom-update security-check enable
undo bootrom-update security-check enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the bootrom-update security-check enable command to enable the
validity check function when upgrading Boot ROM.
display boot-loader 1039
Use the undo bootrom-update security-check enable command to disable
the validity check function when upgrading Boot ROM.
By default, validity check function is enabled during Boot ROM upgrade.
Switch 7750s have many modules. Every module has its own Boot ROM
application. Wrongly upgrading the Boot ROM causes serious results. The validity
checking is used to avoid the above wrong operation.
Example # Enable the validity check function.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] bootrom-update security-check enable
display boot-loader
Syntax display boot-loader
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display boot-loader command to display the APP file that is adopted
when the switch boots this time and next time.
Example # Display the APP that will be adopted when the switch reboots.
<SW7750> display boot-loader
The primary app to boot of board 0 at the next time is: flash:/ccc.a
pp
The backup app to boot of board 0 at the next time is: flash:/ddd.ap
p
The app to boot of board 0 at this time is: flash:/ccc.app
Table 192 Field descriptions of the display boot-loader command
Field Description
The primary app to boot of module 0 at Primary boot file used by the device for reboot next
the next time time
The backup app to boot of module 0 at Backup boot file used by the device for reboot next
the next time time
The app to boot of module 0 at this Boot file used by the device for boot this time
time
display cpu
Syntax display cpu [ slot slot-number ]
View Any view
1040 CHAPTER 86: DEVICE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Parameter slot slot-number: Specifies a slot. The CPU status of the module on the slot is
displayed.
Description Use the display cpu command to display the CPU usage of a specified switch.
Example # Display the CPU usage of the module on slot 0 of the switch.
<SW7750> display cpu slot 0
Board 0 CPU busy status:
18% in last 5 seconds
19% in last 1 minute
19% in last 5 minutes
Table 193 Field descriptions of the display cpu command
Field Description
CPU busy status Indicates that the following lines describe the CPU occupancies in
different time periods.
18% in last 5 seconds The CPU usage in the last five seconds is 18%.
19% in last 1 minute The CPU usage in the last one minute is 19%.
19% in last 5 minutes The CPU usage in the last five minutes is 19%.
display device
Syntax display device [ detail | [ shelf shelf-no ] [ frame frame-no ] [ slot slot-number ]
]
View Any view
Parameter detail: Detail information about the specified switch.
shelf-no: Shelf number of a switch.
frame-no: Frame number of a switch.
slot-number: Slot number of a switch.
Description Use the display device command to display the information, such as the module
type and operating status, about each module (main module and sub module) of a
specified switch.
You can use this command to display the following information about each
module: slot number, sub slot number, versions of PCB, FPGA, hardware and Boot
ROM software, address learning mode, interface module type, and patch version.
Example # Display module information of the Switch 7750.
<SW7750> display device
3Com Switch 7758 switch fabric
Slot No. Brd Type Brd Status Subslot Num Sft Ver Patch Ver
0 LS81SRPG Master 0 S7758-E3226 None
1 NONE Absent Absent None None
2 LS813C16888 Normal 0 S7758-E3226 None
display environment 1041
3 3C16860 Normal 0 S7758-E3226 None
4 NONE Absent Absent None None
5 NONE Absent Absent None None
6 LS81VSNP Normal 0 S7758-E3226 None
7 NONE Absent Absent None None
# Display the information about the module in slot 0.
<SW7750> display device slot 0
Slot 0 info:
Status : Master
Type : LS81SRPG
Software Ver : S7758-E3226
Patch Ver : None
PCB Ver : VER.B
FPGA Ver : 004
BootRom Ver : 530
CPLD Ver : 004
Chip 0
Learning Mode: IVL
display environment
Syntax display environment
View Any view
Parameter none
Description Use the display environment command to display the environment
information.
Example # Display the environment information.
<SW7750> display environment
System temperature information (degree centigrade):
----------------------------------------------------
Board Temperature Lower limit Upper limit
1 30 10 70
3 43 10 80
5 33 10 70
display fan
Syntax display fan [ fan-id ]
View Any view
Parameter fan-id: ID number of a fan.
Description Use the display fan command to view the working state of the built-in fans.
1042 CHAPTER 86: DEVICE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
You can check whether the fans are working normally through the command.
Example # Display the working state of the fans.
<SW7750> display fan
Fan 1 State: Normal
The above information indicates that fan works normally.
display memory
Syntax display memory [ slot slot-number | limit ]
View Any view
Parameter slot slot-number Specifies a slot number, the usage state of the memory on the
slot will be displayed.
limit: Displays the memory configuration information of the device.
Description Use the display memory command to display the memory usage of a specified
switch.
Example # Display the memory usage on slot 0 of the switch.
<SW7750> display memory slot 0
System Total Memory(bytes): 197932416
Total Used Memory(bytes): 65234704
Used Rate: 32%
Table 194 Field descriptions of the display memory command
Field Description
System Total Memory(bytes) Total memory size of the system, in unit of bytes
Total Used Memory(bytes) Used memory size of the system, in unit of bytes
Used Rate Percentage of the used memory
# Display the current configuration information of the switch.
<SW7750> display memory limit
Current memory limit configuration information:
system memory safety: 40 (MBytes)
system memory limit: 30 (MBytes)
auto-establish enabled
Free Memory: 108120672 (Bytes)
The state information about connection:
The times of disconnect: 0
The times of reconnect: 0
The current state: Normal
display power 1043
display power
Syntax display power [ power-id ]
View Any view
Parameter power-id: Power ID.
Description Use the display power command to view the state of the power supply of the
switch.
Example # Display the state of the power supply.
<SW7750> display power
Power 1 State: Absent
Power 2 State: Normal
Power 3 State: Absent
display schedule reboot
Syntax display schedule reboot
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display schedule reboot command to display information about
scheduled reboot.
Related command: reboot, schedule reboot at.
Example # Display the information about scheduled reboot.
<SW7750> display schedule reboot
System will reboot at 16:00:00 2004/11/1 (in 2 hours and 5 minutes).
display transceiver alarm interface
Syntax display transceiver alarm interface [ interface-type interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameters interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.
Description Use the display transceiver alarm interface command to display the current
alarm information of a single or all transceivers.
1044 CHAPTER 86: DEVICE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
If no error occurs, None is displayed.
Table 195 shows the alarm information that may occur for the four types of
transceivers.
Table 195 Field descriptions of display transceiver alarm interface
Field Remarks
GBIC/SFP
RX loss of signal RX signal is lost.
RX power high RX power is high.
RX power low RX power is low.
TX fault TX fault
TX bias high TX bias current is high.
TX bias low TX bias current is low.
TX power high TX power is high.
TX power low TX power is low.
Temp high Temperature is high.
Temp low Temperature is low.
Voltage high Voltage is high.
Voltage low Voltage is low.
Transceiver info I/O error Transceiver information read and write error
Transceiver info checksum error Transceiver information checksum error
Transceiver type and port Transceiver type does not match port configuration.
configuration mismatch
Transceiver type not supported by port Transceiver type is not supported on the port.
hardware
XFP
RX loss of signal RX signal is lost.
RX not ready RX is not ready
RX CDR loss of lock RX clock cannot be recovered.
RX power high RX power is high.
RX power low RX power is low.
TX not ready TX is not ready.
TX fault TX fault
TX CDR loss of lock TX clock cannot be recovered.
TX bias high TX bias current is high.
TX bias low TX bias current is low.
TX power high TX power is high.
TX power low TX power is low.
Module not ready Module is not ready.
APD supply fault APD (Avalanche Photo Diode) supply fault
TEC fault TEC (Thermoelectric Cooler) fault
Wavelength unlocked Wavelength of optical signal exceeds the
manufacturer’s tolerance.
Temp high Temperature is high.
display transceiver alarm interface 1045
Table 195 Field descriptions of display transceiver alarm interface
Field Remarks
Temp low Temperature is low.
Voltage high Voltage is high.
Voltage low Voltage is low.
Transceiver info I/O error Transceiver information read and write error
Transceiver info checksum error Transceiver information checksum error
Transceiver type and port Transceiver type does not match port configuration.
configuration mismatch
Transceiver type not supported by port Transceiver type is not supported on the port.
hardware
XENPAK
WIS local fault WIS (WAN Interface Sublayer) local fault
Receive optical power fault Receive optical power fault
PMA/PMD receiver local fault PMA/PMD (Physical Medium Attachment/Physical
Medium Dependent) receiver local fault
PCS receive local fault PCS (Physical Coding Sublayer) receiver local fault
PHY XS receive local fault PHY XS (PHY Extended Sublayer) receive local fault
RX power high RX power is high.
RX power low RX power is low.
Laser bias current fault Laser bias current fault
Laser temperature fault Laser temperature fault
Laser output power fault Laser output power fault
TX fault TX fault
PMA/PMD receiver local fault PMA/PMD receiver local fault
PCS receive local fault PCS receive local fault
PHY XS receive local fault PHY XS receive local fault
TX bias high TX bias current is high.
TX bias low TX bias current is low.
TX power high TX power is high.
TX power low TX power is low.
Temp high Temperature is high.
Temp low Temperature is low.
Transceiver info I/O error Transceiver information read and write error
Transceiver info checksum error Transceiver information checksum error
Transceiver type and port Transceiver type does not match port configuration.
configuration mismatch
Transceiver type not supported by port Transceiver type is not supported on the port.
hardware
n For pluggable transceivers supported by Switch 7750 Ethernet switches, refer to
3Com Switch 7750 Family Installation Manual.
Examples # Display the alarm information of the transceiver on interface GigabitEthernet
2/0/1.
1046 CHAPTER 86: DEVICE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
<SW7750> display transceiver alarm interface gigabitethernet 2/0/1
GigabitEthernet2/0/1 transceiver current alarm information:
TX fault
Table 196 Field descriptions of display transceiver alarm interface
Field Description
transceiver current alarm information Current alarm information of the transceiver
TX fault TX fault
display transceiver diagnosis interface
Syntax display transceiver diagnosis interface [ interface-type interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameters interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.
Description Use the display transceiver diagnosis interface command to display the
currently measured value of digital diagnosis parameters of a single or all
anti-spoofing transceivers customized by 3Com.
Examples # Display the currently measured value of digital diagnosis parameters of the
anti-spoofing pluggable optical transceiver customized by 3Com on interface
GigabitEthernet 2/0/2.
<SW7750> display transceiver diagnosis interface gigabitethernet 2/0
/2
GigabitEthernet2/0/2 transceiver diagnostic information:
Current diagnostic parameters:
Temp(°C) Voltage(V) Bias(mA) RX power(dBM) TX power(dBM)
35 3.26 6.18 -35.64 -5.17
Table 197 Field descriptions of display transceiver diagnosis interface
Field Description
transceiver diagnostic information Digital diagnosis information of the transceiver carried by
an interface
Current diagnostic parameters Current diagnostic parameters
Temp.(°C) Digital diagnosis parameter-temperature, in °C, with the
precision to 1°C.
Voltage(V) Digital diagnosis parameter-voltage, in V, with the
precision to 0.01 V.
Bias(mA) Digital diagnosis parameter-bias current, in mA, with the
precision to 0.01 mA.
RX power(dBM) Digital diagnosis parameter-RX power, in dBM, with the
precision to 0.01 dBM.
TX power(dBM) Digital diagnosis parameter-TX power, in dBM, with the
precision to 0.01 dBM.
display transceiver interface 1047
display transceiver interface
Syntax display transceiver interface [ interface-type interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameters interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.
Description Use the display transceiver interface command to display main parameters of
a single or all transceivers.
Examples # Display main parameters of the pluggable transceiver on interface
GigabitEthernet 2/0/3.
<SW7750> display transceiver interface gigabitethernet 2/0/3
GigabitEthernet2/0/3 transceiver information:
Transceiver Type : 1000_BASE_LX_SFP
Connector Type : LC
Wavelength(nm) : 1310
Transfer Distance(km) : 10(9um)
Digital Diagnostic Monitoring : YES
Vendor Name : 3Com
Ordering Name : SFP-GE-LX10-SM1310
Table 198 Field descriptions of the display transceiver interface command
Field Description
transceiver information Transceiver information of the interface
Transceiver Type Transceiver type
Connector Type Type of the connectors of the transceiver:
■ Optical connectors, including SC (SC connector,
developed by NTT) and LC (LC connector, 1.25 mm/RJ45
optical connector developed by Lucent).
■ Other connectors, including RJ-45 and CX4.
Wavelength(nm) ■ Optical transceiver: central wavelength of the laser sent,
in nm. If the transceiver supports multiple wavelengths,
every two wavelength values are separated by a comma.
■ Electrical transceiver: displayed as N/A.
Transfer distance(xx) Transfer distance, with xx representing km for single-mode
transceivers and m for other transceivers. If the transceiver
supports multiple transfer medium, every two values of the
transfer distance are separated by a comma. The
corresponding transfer medium is included in the bracket
following the transfer distance value. The following are the
transfer media:
■ 9 um: 9/125 um single-mode fiber
■ 50 um: 50/125 um multi-mode fiber
■ 62.5 um: 62.5/125 um multi-mode fiber
■ TP: Twisted pair
■ CX4: CX4 cable
1048 CHAPTER 86: DEVICE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Table 198 Field descriptions of the display transceiver interface command
Field Description
Digital Diagnostic Monitoring Whether the digital diagnosis function is supported, where:
■ YES: supported
■ NO: not supported
Vendor Name Vendor name or vendor name specified of the transceiver:
■ The anti-spoofing transceiver customized by 3Com:
3Com is displayed.
■ Other transceivers: The original vendor name is displayed.
Ordering Name ■ Ordering name of the transceiver
display transceiver manuinfo interface
Syntax display transceiver manuinfo interface [ interface-type interface-number ]
View Any view
Parameters interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.
Description Use the display transceiver manuinfo interface command to display part of
the electrical label information of a single or all anti-spoofing pluggable
transceivers customized by 3Com.
Examples # Display part of the electrical label information of the anti-spoofing pluggable
transceiver customized by 3Com on interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/4.
<SW7750> display transceiver manuinfo interface gigabitethernet 2/0/
4
GigabitEthernet2/0/4 transceiver manufacture information:
Manu. Serial Number : 213410A0000054000251
Manufacturing Date : 2007-07-28
Vendor Name : 3Com
Table 199 Field descriptions of display transceiver manuinfo interface
Field Description
Manu. Serial Number Serial number generated during debugging
and testing
Manufacturing Date Debugging and testing date.. The date takes
the value of the system clock of the computer
that performs debugging and testing.
Vendor Name Vendor name specified, that is, 3Com.
display uplink monitor
Syntax display uplink monitor
View Any view
loadsharing enable 1049
Parameter None
Description Use the display uplink monitor command to view information about Layer 3
connectivity between the local device and the remote device.
Related command: uplink monitor.
Example # View information about Layer 3 connectivity between the local device and the
remote device.
<SW7750> display uplink monitor
UpLink monitor information
No. Dest_IP_Addr Dest_MAC_Addr Vlan Port ErrCnt Last_Err_Time
1 192.168.0.35 ----.----.---- 1 - 135 04/29 16:15:04
The above information shows there are 135 Layer 3 connectivity errors between
the local device and the remote device whose IP address is 192.168.0.35.
loadsharing enable
Syntax loadsharing enable
undo loadsharing enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the loadsharing enable command to enable system load sharing.
Use the undo loadsharing enable command to disable system load sharing.
By default, system load sharing function is disabled.
With system load sharing enabled, when an I/O Module receives traffic to be
cross-card forwarded, load sharing is performed between the active Fabric and the
standby Fabric.
n ■
■
Only unicast traffic supports load sharing.
Only 32Gbps and 64Gbps Switch Fabrics support load sharing.
■ Only I/O Modules of XGbus type support load sharing.
Example # Enable system load sharing.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] loadsharing enable
1050 CHAPTER 86: DEVICE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
pause-protection
Syntax pause-protection { enable | disable } slot slot-number
View System view
Parameter enable: Enables pause frame protection mechanism.
disable: Disables pause frame protection mechanism.
slot slot-number: Specifies a slot where module is to seat in.
Description Use the pause-protection command to enable/disable pause frame protection
mechanism.
Pause frame protection mechanism is disabled by default.
Pause frames, which can be utilized as packets to attack a network, are used in
traffic controlling. A switch that has pause frame protection mechanism enabled
discards the detected pause frames that are utilized to attack the network it
resides and logs these attacks in the log buffer. If the switch experiences successive
pause frame attacks, it sends messages to the console to warn users.
c CAUTION: Only A type modules support pause frame protection mechanism and
the related commands. A type modules include: 3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24A,
3C16858, and 3C16859.
Example # Enable pause frame protection mechanism on the module in slot 7.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] pause-protection enable slot 7
qe monitor
Syntax qe monitor { enable | disable }
View System view
Parameter enable: Enables queue traffic monitoring.
disable: Disables queue traffic monitoring.
Description Use the qe monitor command to enable/disable queue traffic monitoring.
Queue traffic monitoring is disabled by default.
With queue traffic monitoring enabled on a switch, the switch monitors the queue
traffic and relieves blocks in the output queue of its interfaces.
qe monitor errpkt 1051
The criterion used to distinguish a block is that the queue is full and the traffic of
the corresponding interface is less than the specified threshold.
Refer to the qe monitor overflow-threshold on page 1053 for information
about how to set a threshold.
Example # Enable queue traffic monitoring.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] qe monitor enable
qe monitor errpkt
Syntax qe monitor errpkt { all | none | runt }
View Ethernet port view
Parameter all: Specifies to detect all error packets on current interface.
none: Specifies not to detect error packets on current interface.
runt: Specifies to detect error packets that are of runt type on current interface.
Error packets that are of runt type refer to frames whose data segment is less than
64 bytes without CRC errors.
Description Use the qe monitor errpkt command to configure error packets detection
function on current interface.
A switch does not detect error packets on current interface by default.
If the switch receives a great number of error packets, it will not be able to
send/receive packets properly. With error packets monitoring enabled, the switch
collects information about received error packets regularly. If error packets are
detected, it takes protection measures to ensure that its interfaces send/receive
packets properly.
Example # Specify to detect error packets that are of runt type on Ethernet4/0/1 interface.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 4/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet4/0/1] qe monitor errpkt runt
qe monitor errpkt check-time
Syntax qe monitor errpkt check-time interval
View System view
1052 CHAPTER 86: DEVICE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Parameter interval: Specifies the interval for detecting error packets. The interval argument
ranges from 1 to 3600 (in seconds) and defaults to 5.
Description Use the qe monitor errpkt check-time command to set the interval for
detecting error packets.
If the switch receives a great number of error packets, it will not be able to
send/receive packets properly. With error packets monitoring enabled, the switch
collects information about received error packets at intervals. If error packets are
detected, it takes protection measures to ensure that its interfaces send/receive
packets properly.
Example # Set the interval for detecting error packets to 50 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] qe monitor errpkt check-time 50
qe monitor inner-bad
Syntax qe monitor inner-bad { enable | disable }
View System view
Parameter enable: Enables error packet monitoring on internal ports.
disable: Disables error packet monitoring on internal ports.
Description Use the qe monitor inner-bad enable command to enable error packet
monitoring on internal ports.
Use the qe monitor inner-bad disable command to disable error packet
monitoring on internal ports.
By default, error packet monitoring on internal ports is enabled.
If detecting that an internal port receives error packets, the system clears the
queues under this port.
n ■
■
This command is applicable to type-A I/O Modules only.
Type-A I/O Modules refer to the following I/O Modules: 3C16860, 3C16861,
LS81FS24A, 3C16858, 3C16859, 3C16860, 3C16861, LS81FS24, 3C16858,
and 3C16859.
Example # Enable error packet monitoring on internal ports.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] qe monitor inner-bad enable
qe monitor overflow-threshold 1053
qe monitor overflow-threshold
Syntax qe monitor overflow-threshold threshold
View System view
Parameter threshold: Integer that sets the overall traffic threshold, ranging from 0 to
4294967295 (in bps).
Description Use the qe monitor overflow-threshold command to specify the overall
traffic threshold used in queue traffic monitoring.
The overall traffic threshold defaults to 300,000,000 bps (300 Mbps).
With queue traffic monitoring enabled, the switch monitors the queue traffic and
relieves blocks in the output queue of its interfaces.
The criterion used to distinguish a block is that the queue is full and the traffic of
the corresponding interface is less than the specified threshold.
Example # Set the overall traffic threshold used in queue traffic monitoring to 90 Mbps.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] qe monitor overflow-threshold 90000000
rdram
Syntax rdram { enable | disable }
View System view
Parameter enable: Enables rambus dynamic random access memory (RDRAM) of the device.
disable: Disables RDRAM of the device.
Description Use the rdram enable command to enable RDRAM of the device.
Use the rdram disable command to disable RDRAM of the device.
By default, RDRAM of the device is disabled.
Example # Disable RDRAM of the device.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] rdram disable
1054 CHAPTER 86: DEVICE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
reboot
Syntax reboot [ slot slot-number ]
View User view
Parameter slot slot-number: Specifies the slot number.
Description Use the reboot command to restart the whole system or the specified module.
Example # Restart the switch.
<SW7750> reboot
System is checking configuration now. Please wait ...
This command will reboot the system. The current configuration has
not been saved and will be lost if you continue. Continue? [Y/N]
schedule reboot at
Syntax schedule reboot at hh:mm [ yyyy/mm/dd ]
undo schedule reboot
View User view
Parameter hh:mm: Reboot time, where hh (hour) ranges from 0 to 23, and mm (minute)
ranges from 0 to 59.
yyyy/mm/dd: Reboot date, where yyyy (year) ranges from 2,000 to 2,099, mm
(month) ranges from 1 to 12, and the range of dd (day) depends on the specific
month.
Description Use the schedule reboot at command to schedule a reboot on the current
switch and set the reboot date and time.
Use the undo schedule reboot command to cancel the scheduled reboot.
By default, no scheduled reboot is set on the switch.
n There is at most one minute defer for scheduled reboot, that is, the switch will
reboot within one minute after reaching the specified reboot date and time.
After you execute the schedule reboot at command with a future date specified,
the switch will reboot at the specified time with at most one minute delay.
After you execute the schedule reboot at command without specifying a date,
the switch will:
■ Reboot at the specified time on the current day if the specified time is later
than the current time.
schedule reboot delay 1055
■ Reboot at the specified time on the next day if the specified time is earlier than
the current time.
Note that the specified date can not be 30 days later than the current date. And
after you execute the command, the system will prompt you to confirm. Enter "Y"
or "y" for your setting to take effect, and your setting will overwrite the old one (if
available).
If you adjust the system time by the clock command after executing the schedule
reboot at command, the schedule reboot at command will be invalid and the
scheduled reboot will not happen.
Related command: reboot, display schedule reboot.
Example # Suppose the current time is16:21, schedule a reboot so that the switch reboots
at 22:00 on the current day.
<SW7750> schedule reboot at 22:00
Reboot system at 22:00 2005/04/06(in 5 hours and 39 minutes)
confirm?[Y/N]:y
<SW7750>
%Apr 6 16:21:03 2005 S7758 CMD/5/REBOOT:
aux0: schedule reboot parameters at 16:21:00 2005/04/06. And system
will reboot
at 22:00:2005 04/06/2005.
schedule reboot delay
Syntax schedule reboot delay { hhh:mm | mmm }
undo schedule reboot
View User view
Parameter hhh:mm: Reboot waiting delay, in the format of "hour:minute". hh ranges from 0
to 720, and mm ranges from 0 to 59.
mmm: Reboot waiting delay, ranging from 0 to 43,200 minutes.
Description Use the schedule reboot delay command to schedule a reboot on the switch,
and set the reboot waiting delay.
Use the undo schedule reboot command to cancel the scheduled reboot.
By default, no scheduled reboot is set on the switch.
n There is at most one minute defer for scheduled reboot, that is, the switch will
reboot within one minute after waiting for the specified delay.
You can set the reboot waiting delay in two formats: the hour:minute format and
the absolute minutes format, and both must be less than or equal to 30 × 24 × 60
(that is, 30 days).
1056 CHAPTER 86: DEVICE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
After you execute the command, the system will prompt you to confirm. Enter
"Y" or "y" for your setting to take effect. Your setting will overwrite the old one
(if available).
If you adjust the system time by the clock command after executing the schedule
reboot delay command, the schedule reboot delay command will be invalid
and the scheduled reboot will not happen.
Related command: reboot, schedule reboot at, undo schedule reboot at, and display schedule
reboot.
Example # Suppose the current time is 16:26, schedule a reboot so that the switch reboots
after 88 minutes.
<SW7750> schedule reboot delay 88
Reboot system at 17:54 2005/04/06(in 1 hours and 28 minutes)
confirm?[Y/N]:y
<SW7750>
%Apr 6 16:26:38 2005 S7758 CMD/5/REBOOT:
aux0: schedule reboot parameters at 16:26:34 2005/04/06. And system will reboot
at 17:54:2005 04/06/2005.
set backboard enhance
Syntax set backboard enhance
undo set backboard enhance
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the set backboard enhance command to set the running mode of
cross-card HG clock to enhanced mode (frequency: 187MHz).
Use the undo set backboard enhance command to restore the default running
mode of cross-card HG clock, that is, standard mode (frequency: 127 MHz).
By default, the cross-card HG clock runs in standard mode.
Example # Set the running mode of the HG clock between LS81GT48B and LS81VSNP
modules to enhanced mode.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] set backboard enhance
temperature-limit
Syntax temperature-limit slot-number down-value up-value
undo temperature-limit slot-number
uplink monitor 1057
View User view
Parameter slot-number: Physical module slot number.
down-value: Lower temperature limit, ranging from 0 to 70, in centigrade.
up-value: Upper temperature limit, in centigrade, ranging from 20 to 90, and must
be greater than the down-value.
Description Use the temperature-limit command to configure temperature alarm threshold.
Use the undo temperature-limit command to restore temperature alarm
threshold to the default.
Example # Set the lower temperature limit of module 0 to 10, and upper temperature limit
to 75.
<SW7750> temperature-limit 0 10 75
Success temperature limit set successfully
uplink monitor
Syntax uplink monitor ip ip-address
undo uplink monitor ip
View Ethernet port view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of a interface on the Layer 3 device in the remote peer. The
interface connects with the local device.
Description Use the uplink monitor ip command to enable the Layer 3 connectivity
detection function on the current port, and specify the IP address to be detected,
that is the IP address of the interface on the remote device that connects with the
local device.
Use the undo uplink monitor ip to disable the Layer 3 connectivity detection
function.
By default, Layer 3 connectivity detection function is disabled on all ports.
n This function requires no Layer 3 device existing between the local peer and the
remote peer.
Example # Enable Layer 3 connectivity detection function on Ethernet4/0/1, and specify the
IP address to be detected as 1.1.1.1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 4/0/1
[SW7750-Ethernet4/0/1] uplink monitor ip 1.1.1.1
1058 CHAPTER 86: DEVICE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
87
count
Syntax count times
undo count
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter times: Number of probes in each test. The times argument ranges from 1 to 15.
Description Use the count command to set the number of probes in each test.
Use the undo count command to restore the default.
For tests except jitter test, only one packet is sent in a probe. In a jitter test, you
can use the jitter-packetnum command to set the number of packets to be sent
in a probe.
By default, the number of probes in each test is 1.
Related command: frequency
Example # Set the number of probes made in an ICMP test to 10.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] count 10
datasize
Syntax datasize size
undo datasize
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter size: Size of a test packet in bytes. The value range varies with the test types.
1060 CHAPTER 87: REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
Table 200 Value range of the remote-ping test packets
Test type Value range Default
Jitter 68 to 8100 68
ICMP 4 to 8100 56
Udpprivate 4 to 8100 100
Udppublic 4 to 8100 100
The packet size configuration applies to ICMP, UDP, and jitter tests only.
Description Use the datasize command to configure the size of a test packet in a test.
Use the undo datasize command to restore the default.
Example # Set the size of ICMP test packets to 50 bytes.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] datasize 50
destination-ip
Syntax destination-ip ip-address
undo destination-ip
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter ip-address: Destination IP address of a remote-ping test.
Description Use the destination-ip command to configure a destination IP address of an
remote-ping test.
Use the undo destination-ip command to remove the configured destination IP
address.
By default, no destination IP address is configured for an remote-ping test.
Related command: destination-port
n The destination address can be an IP address or a host name in HTTP test, while in
other types of tests, it must be an IP address.
Example # Set the destination IP address of an ICMP test to 169.254.10.3.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] destination-ip 169.254.10.3
1061
destination-port
Syntax destination-port port-number
undo destination-port
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter port-number: Destination port number for an remote-ping test, in the range of 1
to 65535.
Description Use the destination-port command to configure a destination port number for
an remote-ping test.
Use the undo destination-port command to remove the configured destination
port number.
By default, no destination port number is configured for a test.
Related command: destination-ip
n ■ The destination-port command has effect on jitter, TCP-Private, and
UDP-Private tests only.
■ You are not recommended to perform a TCP, UDP, or jitter test to a known port
(ports with a number ranging from 1 to 1023). Otherwise, the remote-ping test
will fail or the corresponding service of the port will become unavailable.
Example # Set the destination port number for a tcpprivate test to 9000.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator tcp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-tcp] test-type tcpprivate
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-tcp] destination-port 9000
display remote-ping
Syntax display remote-ping { results | history } [ administrator-name operation-tag ]
View Any view
Parameters results: Displays results of the last test.
history: Displays the history records of tests.
administrator-name: Name of the administrator who created the remote-ping test
operation, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
operation-tag: Operation tag, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
1062 CHAPTER 87: REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
Description Use the display remote-ping command to display the result of the last
remote-ping test or the history of remote-ping tests.
Without administrator-name test-operation-tag specified, the command displays
the results of all test groups; without administrator-name test-operation-tag
specified, the command displays the results of the specified test group.
Related command: test-enable
Example # Display the result of the test group with the administrator name being
administrator, and the operation tag being icmp.
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] display remote-ping results administrator
icmp
remote-ping entry(admin administrator, tag icmp) test result:
Destinationip address:10.2.2.2
Send operation times: 10 Receive response times: 10
Min/Max/Average Round Trip Time: 1/2/1
Square-Sum of Round Trip Time: 13
Last succeeded test time: 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
Extend result:
SD Maximal delay: 0 DS Maximal delay: 0
Packet lost in test: 0%
Disconnect operation number:0 Operation timeout number:0
System busy operation number:0 Connection fail number:0
Operation sequence errors:0 Drop operation number:0
Other operation errors:0
Table 201 Description of the display remote-ping result command fields
Filed Description
Destination ip address Destination IP address
Send operation times Number of probes made
Receive responds times Number of received response packets
Min/Max/Average Round Trip Minimum/maximum/average round trip time
Time
Square-Sum of Round Trip Time Square sum of round trip time
Last succeeded test time Completion time of the last successful test
SD Maximal delay Maximum delay from the source to the destination
DS Maximal delay Maximum delay from the destination to the source
Packet lost in test Average packet loss ratio
Disconnect operation number Number of times the test was disconnected by the remote
end
System busy operation number Number of times the test failed because the system was
busy
Operation sequence errors Number of out-of-sequence packets received
Other operation errors Number of other errors
Operation timeout number Number of time-out occurrences in a test
Connection fail number Number of failures to connect with the remote end
Drop operation number Number of system resource allocation failures
# Display the history records of remote-ping tests.
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] display remote-ping history administrator i
cmp
remote-ping entry(admin administrator, tag icmp) history record:
Index Response Status LasrRC Time
1063
1 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
2 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
3 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
4 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
5 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
6 2 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
7 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
8 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
9 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.9
10 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.9
Table 202 Description of the display remote-ping history command fields
Field Description
Response Round trip time in the case of a successful test, timeout time
in the case of test timeout, or 0 in the case of a test failure
(in milliseconds)
Status Test result values, including:
1: responseReceived: Response received
2: unknown: Unknown error.
3: internalError: System internal error
4: requestTimeOut: Request timed out
5: unknownDestinationAddress: Unknown destination
address
6: noRouteToTarget: Destination unreachable
7: interfaceInactiveToTarget: Interface to destination
address inactive
8: arpFailure: ARP operation failed.
9: maxConcurrentLimitReached: Maximum limit of
concurrent accesses reached
10: unableToResolveDnsName: Unable to resolve DNS
domain name
11: invalidHostAddress: Invalid host address
LasrRC Last response code received (this code is based on the
specific implementation). With ICMP echo enabled on the
system, receiving ICMP response which includes
ICMP_ECHOREPLY(0) indicates the probe succeeds. ICMP
response is often defined in a file including ip_icmp.
Time Test completion time
# Display the result of the test group with the administrator name being
administrator, and the operation tag being http.
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-http] display remote-ping results administrator
http
remote-ping entry(admin administrator, tag http) test result:
Destination ip address:192.168.0.152
Send operation times: 10 Receive response times: 10
Min/Max/Average Round Trip Time: 47/87/74
Square-Sum of Round Trip Time: 57044
Last succeeded test time: 2000-4-2 20:41:50.4
Extend result:
SD Maximal delay: 0 DS Maximal delay: 0
Packet lost in test: 0%
Disconnect operation number: 0 Operation timeout number: 0
System busy operation number: 0 Connection fail number: 0
Operation sequence errors: 0 Drop operation number: 0
Other operation errors: 0
Http result:
DNS Resolve Time: 0 HTTP Operation Time: 675
1064 CHAPTER 87: REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
DNS Resolve Min Time: 0 HTTP Test Total Time: 748
DNS Resolve Max Time: 0 HTTP Transmission Successful Times: 10
DNS Resolve Failed Times: 0 HTTP Transmission Failed Times: 0
DNS Resolve Timeout Times: 0 HTTP Transmission Timeout Times: 0
TCP Connect Time: 73 HTTP Operation Min Time: 27
TCP Connect Min Time: 5 HTTP Operation Max Time: 80
TCP Connect Max Time: 20
TCP Connect Timeout Times: 0
Table 203 Description of the display remote-ping result command fields
Field Description
DNS Resolve Time Time used for a DNS resolution
HTTP Operation Time Total time used to establish an HTTP connection
DNS Resolve Min Time Minimal time used for a DNS resolution
HTTP Test Total Time Total time used for an HTTP test
DNS Resolve Max Time Maximum time used for a DNS resolution
HTTP Transmission Successful Number of successful HTTP transmissions
Times
DNS Resolve Failed Times Number of failed DNS resolutions
HTTP Transmission Failed Times Number of failed HTTP transmissions
DNS Resolve Timeout Times DNS resolution timeout times
HTTP Transmission Timeout HTTP transmission timeout times
Times
TCP Connect Time Total time used to establish a TCP connection
HTTP Operation Min Time Minimum time used to establish an HTTP connection
TCP Connect Min Time Minimum time used to establish a TCP connection
HTTP Operation Max Time Maximum time used to establish an HTTP connection
TCP Connect Max Time Maximum time used to establish a TCP connection
TCP Connect Timeout Times TCP connection timeout times
# Display the result of the test group with the administrator name being
administrator, and the operation tag being Jitter.
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-Jitter] display remote-ping results
administrator Jitter
remote-ping entry(admin administrator, tag Jitter) test result:
Destination ip address:10.2.2.2
Send operation times: 100 Receive response times: 100
Min/Max/Average Round Trip Time: 9/21/13
Square-Sum of Round Trip Time: 18623
Last succeeded test time: 2000-4-2 8:14:58.2
Extend result:
SD Maximal delay: 10 DS Maximal delay: 10
Packet lost in test: 0%
Disconnect operation number: 0 Operation timeout number: 0
System busy operation number: 0 Connection fail number: 0
Operation sequence errors: 0 Drop operation number: 0
Other operation errors: 0
Jitter result:
RTT Number:100
Min Positive SD:1 Min Positive DS:1
Max Positive SD:6 Max Positive DS:8
Positive SD Number:38 Positive DS Number:25
Positive SD Sum:85 Positive DS Sum:42
Positive SD average:2 Positive DS average:1
Positive SD Square Sum:267 Positive DS Square Sum:162
1065
Min Negative SD:1 Min Negative DS:1
Max Negative SD:6 Max Negative DS:8
Negative SD Number:30 Negative DS Number:24
Negative SD Sum:64 Negative DS Sum: 41
Negative SD average:2 Negative DS average:1
Negative SD Square Sum:200 Negative DS Square Sum:161
SD lost packets number:0 DS lost packet number:0
Unkown result lost packet number:0
Table 204 Description of the display remote-ping result command fields
Field Description
RTT Number Number of received response packets
Min Positive SD Minimum positive jitter delay from the source to the
destination
Min Positive DS Minimum positive jitter delay from the destination to the
source
Max Positive SD Maximum positive jitter delay from the source to the
destination
Max Positive DS Maximum positive jitter delay from the destination to the
source
Positive SD Number Number of positive jitter delays from the source to the
destination
Positive DS Number Number of positive jitter delays from the destination to the
source
Positive SD Sum Sum of positive jitter delays from the source to the
destination
Positive DS Sum Sum of positive jitter delays from the destination to the
source
Positive SD average Average of positive jitter delays from the source to the
destination
Positive DS average Average of positive jitter delays from the destination to the
source
Positive SD Square Sum Sum of the square of positive jitter delays from the source to
the destination
Positive DS Square Sum Sum of the square of positive jitter delays from the
destination to the source
Min Negative SD Minimum absolute value of negative jitter delays from the
source to the destination
Min Negative DS Minimum absolute value of negative jitter delays from the
destination to the source
Max Negative SD Maximum absolute value of negative jitter delays from the
source to the destination
Max Negative DS Maximum absolute value of negative jitter delays from the
destination to the source
Negative SD Number Number of negative jitter delays from the source to the
destination
Negative DS Number Number of negative jitter delays from the destination to the
source
Negative SD Sum Sum of absolute values of negative jitter delays from the
source to the destination
Negative DS Sum Sum of absolute values of negative jitter delays from the
destination to the source
Negative SD average Average of negative jitter delays from the source to the
destination
1066 CHAPTER 87: REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
Table 204 Description of the display remote-ping result command fields
Field Description
Negative DS average Average of negative jitter delays from the destination to the
source
Negative SD Square Sum Sum of the square of negative jitter delays from the source
to the destination
Negative DS Square Sum Sum of the square of negative jitter delays from the
destination to the source
SD lost packets number Number of lost packets from the source to the destination
DS lost packet number Number of lost packets from the destination to the source
Unknown result lost packet Number of lost packets for unknown reasons
number
# Display the result of the test group with the administrator name being
administrator, and the operation tag being dns.
[7750] display remote-ping results administrator dns
remote-ping entry(admin administrator, tag dns) test result:
Destination ip address:10.2.2.2
Send operation times: 10 Receive response times: 10
Min/Max/Average Round Trip Time: 6/10/8
Square-Sum of Round Trip Time: 756
Last succeeded test time: 2006-11-28 11:50:40.9
Extend result:
SD Maximal delay: 0 DS Maximal delay: 0
Packet lost in test: 0%
Disconnect operation number: 0 Operation timeout number: 0
System busy operation number: 0 Connection fail number: 0
Operation sequence errors: 0 Drop operation number: 0
Other operation errors: 0
Dns result:
DNS Resolve Current Time: 10 DNS Resolve Min Time: 6
DNS Resolve Times: 10 DNS Resolve Max Time: 10
DNS Resolve Timeout Times: 0 DNS Resolve Failed Times: 0
Table 205 Description of the display remote-ping result command fields
Field Description
DNS Resolve Current Time Default time used for a DNS resolution
DNS Resolve Min Time Minimum time used for a DNS resolution
DNS Resolve Times Number of DNS resolutions
DNS Resolve Max Time Maximum time used for a DNS resolution
DNS Resolve Timeout Times DNS resolution timeout times
DNS Resolve Failed Times Number of failed DNS resolutions
n The description on a specific field is available for the test results of all types of
tests, so that not the description on the output information of all types of tests is
provided here.
dns-server
Syntax dns-server ip-address
undo dns-server
1067
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter ip-address: IP address to be assigned to a domain name server (DNS).
Description Use the dns-server command to configure the IP address of a DNS server.
Use the undo dns-server command to remove the IP address of a DNS server.
By default, no DNS server IP address is configured.
n ■
■
This command applies to DNS and HTTP tests only.
For an HTTP test, if configuring the destination address as the host name, you
must configure the IP address of the DNS server to resolve the host name into
an IP address, which is the destination IP address of this HTTP test
Example # Set 192.168.1.1 as the IP address of the DNS server.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator dns
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-dns] test-type dns
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-dns] dns-server 192.168.1.1
dns resolve-target
Syntax dns resolve-target domain-name
undo dns resolve-target
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter domain-name: Domain name to be resolved, in the range of 1 to 60 characters.
Description Use the dns resolve-target command to configure a domain name to be
resolved.
Use the undo resolve-target command to remove a domain name to be
resolved.
By default, no dns resolve-target information is configured.
n This command applies to DNS tests only.
Example # Configure the domain name to be resolved as www.test.com.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator dns
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-dns] test-type dns
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-dns] dns resolve-target www.test.com
1068 CHAPTER 87: REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
filename
SyntaExamplex filename file-name
undo filename
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter file-name: Name of the file to be downloaded/uploaded in FTP tests, a string of 1
to 255 characters.
Description Use the filename command to specify a file to be downloaded/uploaded in FTP
tests.
Use the undo filename command to remove the configured file name.
By default, no file name is configured for FTP tests.
Related commands: username, password, and ftp-operation
n The filename command applies to FTP tests only.
Example # Specify to transmit config.txt between remote-ping client and FTP server in an
FTP test.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator ftp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] test-type ftp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] filename config.txt
frequency
Syntax frequency interval
undo frequency
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter interval: Automatic test interval in seconds. It ranges from 0 to 65,535.
Description Use the frequency command to configure the time interval of performing
automatic tests.
Use the undo frequency command to restore the default.
If interval is configured greater than 0, the system performs automatic tests at this
interval.
1069
interval defaults to 0, which means no automatic test is performed by default.
Related command: count
n ■
■
The frequency command does not apply to DHCP tests.
The frequency command supports fabric only when the test type of this test
group is ICMP. With fabric enabled, you are allowed to configure the
frequency command and use the display command to check your
configuration, but unless the test type is ICMP, your configuration does not
take effect until fabric is disabled.
Example # Set the automatic test interval to 10 seconds in an ICMP test.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] frequency 10
ftp-operation
Syntax ftp-operation { get | put }
View remote-ping test group view
Parameters get: Specifies the test operation as download from the FTP server.
put: Specifies the test operation as upload to the FTP server.
Description Use the ftp-operation command to configure the FTP operation mode, which can
be get and put.
By default, the FTP operation mode is get.
Related commands: username and password
n The ftp-operation command applies to FTP tests only.
Example # Set the FTP operation mode to put in an FTP test.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator ftp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] test-type ftp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] ftp-operation put
history-records
Syntax history-records number
1070 CHAPTER 87: REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
undo history-records
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter Number: Maximum number of history records that can be saved in a test group, in
the range of 0 to 50, and 50 by default.
Description Use the history-records command to set the maximum number of history records
that can be saved in a test group.
Use the undo history-records to restore the default.
By default, up to 50 records can be saved in a test group.
Example # Set the maximum number of history records that can be saved to 10.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] history-records 10
http-operation
Syntax http-operation { get | post }
View remote-ping test group view
Parameters get: Specifies the test operation to be download from the HTTP server.
post: Specifies the test operation to be uploaded to the HTTP server.
Description Use the http-operation command to configure the HTTP operation mode.
By default, the HTTP operation mode is get.
n The http-operation command applies to HTTP tests only.
Example # Set the HTTP operation mode to post in an HTTP test.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator http
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-http] test-type http
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-http] http-operation post
http-string
Syntax http-string string version
1071
undo http-string
View remote-ping test group view
Parameters string: HTTP operation string used to specify the webpage to be accessed, in the
range 1 to 255 characters.
version: HTTP version, in the range 1 to 255 characters. At present, this argument
can only be HTTP/1.0, where HTTP must be capitalized.
Description Use the http-string command to configure the HTTP operation string and version
in an HTTP test.
Use the undo http-string command to remove the configured HTTP operation
string and version.
By default, HTTP operation string and version are not configured.
The http-string command applies to HTTP tests only.
Related commands: http-operation
Example # Set the webpage to be accessed by an HTTP test as /index.htm and the HTTP
version as HTTP/1.0.
<7750> system-view
[7750] remote-ping administrator http
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-http] test-type http
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-http] http-string /index.htm
HTTP/1.0
remote-ping
Syntax remote-ping administrator-name operation-tag
undo remote-ping administrator-name operation-tag
View System view
Parameters administrator-name: Name of the administrator to create a remote-ping test
group, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
operation-tag: Operation tag, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
Description Use the remote-ping command to create an remote-ping test group and enter
remote-ping test group view. If the specified remote-ping test group already exists,
this command leads you to remote-ping test group view directly.
Use the undo remote-ping command to delete the test group.
1072 CHAPTER 87: REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
Example # Create an remote-ping test group of which the administrator name is
administrator and operation tag is ICMP.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp]
remote-ping-agent
enable
Syntax remote-ping-agent enable
undo remote-ping-agent enable
View System view
Parameters None
Description Use the remote-ping-agent enable command to enable the remote-ping client
function.
Use the undo remote-ping-agent enable command to disable the remote-ping
client function.
By default, the remote-ping client function is disabled.
You can perform tests only after you enable the remote-ping client function.
Related command: remote-ping-server enable
Example # Enable remote-ping client.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping-agent enable
jitter-interval
Syntax jitter-interval interval
undo jitter-interval
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter interval: Interval in milliseconds between jitter test packets. The value is in the
range of 10 to 1000.
Description Use the jitter-interval command to configure the interval between sending jitter
test packets.
1073
Use the undo jitter-interval command to restore the default.
By default, the interval between sending jitter test packets is 20 milliseconds.
Related command: jitter-packetnum
n The jitter-interval command applies to jitter tests only.
Example # Set the interval between sending jitter test packets to 30 milliseconds.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator jitter
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-jitter] test-type jitter
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-jitter] jitter-interval 30
jitter-packetnum
Syntax jitter-packetnum number
undo jitter-packetnum
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter number: Number of packets to be transmitted in one probe for a jitter test, in the
range of 10 to 100.
Description Use the jitter-packetnum command to configure the number of packets to be
sent in one probe for a jitter test.
Use the undo jitter-packetnum command to restore the default.
By default, 10 packets are sent in a probe for a jitter test.
Related command: jitter-interval
n This command applies to jitter tests only.
Example # Configure to send 30 packets in a probe for a jitter test.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator jitter
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-jitter] test-type jitter
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-jitter] jitter-packetnum 30
1074 CHAPTER 87: REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
password
Syntax password password
undo password
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter password: Password for logging in to an FTP server, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
Description Use the password command to configure a password for logging in to the FTP
server.
Use the undo password command to remove the configured password.
By default, the password for logging in to the FTP server is not configured.
Related commands: username and ftp-operation
n ■ To perform an FTP test successfully, the configured password must be
consistent with the FTP user password configured on the server.
■ This command applies to FTP tests only.
Example # Set the password for logging into the FTP server as remote-ping in an FTP test.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator ftp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] test-type ftp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] password remote-ping
probe-failtimes
Syntax probe-failtimes times
undo probe-failtimes
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter times: Number of consecutive failed probes, in the range of 1 to 15.
Description Use the probe-failtimes command to configure the number of consecutive times
the probe fails before the switch sends out a trap message.
Use the undo probe-failtimes command to restore the default.
By default, the switch sends a trap about probe failure each time when a probe
fails.
1075
Example # Configure the switch to send a trap after the probe in an ICMP test fails for three
consecutive times.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] probe-failtimes 3
send-trap
Syntax send-trap { all | { probefailure | testcomplete | testfailure }* }
undo send-trap { all | { probefailure | testcomplete | testfailure }* }
View remote-ping test group view
Parameters probefailure: Sends a trap when a probe fails.
testcomplete: Sends a trap after a test is finished.
testfailure: Sends a trap when a test fails.
all: Sends a trap when any of the above-mentioned scenarios occurs.
Description Use the send-trap command to enable debugging for a trap.
Use the undo send-trap command to disable debugging for a trap.
By default, no trap is output.
Example # Send a trap message after an ICMP test is finished.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] send-trap testcomplete
source-interface
Syntax source-interface interface-type interface-number
undo source-interface
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.
Description For ICMP tests, use the source-interface command to specify a source interface
for sending ICMP requests. The corresponding IP address of the specified interface
1076 CHAPTER 87: REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
is used as the source IP address of ICMP requests. For DHCP tests, use the
source-interface command to specify an interface for DHCP probes.
For ICMP tests, use the undo source-interface command to remove the specified
source interface, and its corresponding IP address is no longer used as the source
IP address of ICMP requests. For DHCP tests, use the undo source-interface
command to remove the specified interface for DHCP probes.
By default, no source interface is specified for ICMP tests and no interface is
configured for DHCP probes.
n ■ For DHCP tests, this command is required. For ICMP tests, this command is
optional. This command does not apply to other tests.
■ For ICMP tests, if a source IP address has been configured with the source-ip
command, the source-interface command cannot change the configured IP
address.
■ The interface to be specified in this command can be only a VLAN interface.
■ The interface to be specified must be Up; otherwise the test will fail.
Example # Configure the source interface that sends test packets in DHCP tests as
VLAN-interface 1.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator dhcp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-dhcp] test-type dhcp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-dhcp] source-interface Vlan-interface 1
source-ip
Syntax source-ip ip-address
undo source-ip
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter ip-address: Source IP address for a test.
Description Use the source-ip command to configure the source IP address for the test.
Use the undo source-ip command to remove the configured source IP address.
By default, the IP address of the interface that sends test packets serves as the
source IP address.
n ■ For FTP tests, this command is required. This command does not apply to DHCP
tests. For other tests, this command is optional.
■ The specified source IP address by this command cannot be of an interface on a
remote device, and the interface must be Up; otherwise the test will fail.
Example # Configure the source IP address as 169.254.10.2 for this ICMP test.
1077
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] source-ip 169.254.10.2
source-port
Syntax source-port port-number
undo source-port
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter port-number: Source port number, in the range of 1 to 65,535.
Description Use the source-port command to configure the source port number for this test.
Use the undo source-port command to remove the configured source port
number.
n This command does not apply to ICMP, DHCP, and DNS tests.
Example # Configure the source port number as 8000 for this ICMP test.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] source-port 8000
test-type
Syntax test-type type
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter type: Test type. It can be any of the following keywords:
■ dhcp: Indicates a DHCP test.
■ dns: Indicates a DNS test.
■ ftp: Indicates an FTP test.
■ http: Indicates an HTTP test.
■ icmp: Indicates an ICMP test.
■ jitter: Analyzes the delay change of UDP packet transmission.
■ snmpquery: Indicates an SNMP test.
■ tcpprivate: Indicates a TCP test on a specified (unknown) port.
1078 CHAPTER 87: REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
■ tcppublic: Indicates a TCP test on port 7.
■ udpprivate: Indicates a UDP test on a specified (unknown) port.
■ udppublic: Indicates a UDP test on port 7.
The default type is icmp.
Description Use the test-type command to configure the test type.
Example # Configure the test type as an FTP test.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator ftp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] test-type ftp
test-enable
Syntax test-enable
undo test-enable
View remote-ping test group view
Parameters None
Description Use the test-enable command to enable a remote-ping test.
Use the undo test-enable command to disable a remote-ping test.
Related command: display remote-ping
n The result of the remote-ping test cannot be displayed automatically, and you
need to use the display remote-ping command to display the test result.
Example # Perform a remote-ping test on an ICMP test group with the administrator name
and operation tag being administrator and icmp respectively.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] destination-ip 169.254.10.3
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-enable
test-failtimes
Syntax test-failtimes times
undo test-failtimes
1079
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter times: Number of times of consecutive test failure, in the range of 1 to 15.
Description Use the test-failtimes command to configure the number of consecutive times a
remote-ping test fails before the switch sends out a trap message.
Use the undo test-failtimes command to restore the default.
By default, the switch sends a trap about test failure each time when a test fails.
Example # Configure the switch to send out a trap message after an ICMP test fails for
three consecutive times.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-failtimes 3
timeout
Syntax timeout time
undo timeout
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter time: Timeout time for one probe, in the range of 1 to 60, in seconds.
Description Use the timeout command to set the timeout time for a probe. That is, the value
of the probe timer that is started after the remote-ping client sends out a test
packet.
Use the undo timeout command to restore the default value.
By default, the probe timeout time is 3 seconds.
Example # Set the timeout time for one probe in an ICMP test to 10 seconds.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] timeout 10
tos
Syntax tos value
undo tos
1080 CHAPTER 87: REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter value: ToS value in a remote-ping test packet header, in the range of 0 to 255.
Description Use the tos command to configure the ToS value in a remote-ping test packet
header.
Use the undo tos command to remove the ToS value in a remote-ping test packet
header.
By default, no ToS value is configured.
n This command does not apply to DHCP tests.
Example # Set the ToS value in the header of an ICMP test packet to 1.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping administrator icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] tos 1
username
Syntax username name
undo username
View remote-ping test group view
Parameter name: Username for logging in to an FTP server, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
Description Use the username command to configure a username for logging in to the FTP
server.
Use the undo username command to remove the configured username.
By default, no username for logging in to the FTP server is configured.
Related commands: password and ftp-operation
n ■ To perform an FTP test successfully, the configured username must be
consistent with the username configured on the FTP server.
■ This command applies to FTP tests only.
Example # Configure the username for logging into the FTP server in an FTP test as
administrator.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
1081
[7750] remote-ping administrator ftp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] test-type ftp
[7750-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] username administrator
1082 CHAPTER 87: REMOTE-PING CLIENT COMMANDS
REMOTE-PING SERVER COMMANDS
88
n ■
■
A remote-ping server is required for only jitter, TCP, and UDP tests.
You are not recommended to configure remote-ping jitter/UDP/TCP servers on
ports 1 through 1023 (well-known ports); otherwise, remote-ping probes may
fail or the services corresponding to these ports may be unavailable.
remote-ping-server
enable
Syntax remote-ping-server enable
undo remote-ping-server enable
View System view
Parameters None
Description Use the remote-ping-server enable command to enable the remote-ping server
function.
Use the undo remote-ping-server enable command to disable the remote-ping
server function.
By default, the remote-ping server function is disabled.
Related commands: remote-ping-agent enable, remote-ping-server
tcpconnect, and remote-ping-server udpconnect.
Example # Enable a remote-ping server.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping-server enable
remote-ping-server
tcpconnect
Syntax remote-ping-server tcpconnect ip-address port-number
undo remote-ping-server tcpconnect ip-address port-number
1084 CHAPTER 88: REMOTE-PING SERVER COMMANDS
View System view
Parameters ip-address: IP address from which a remote-ping server performs TCP listening.
port-number: Port from which a remote-ping server performs TCP listening. The
value ranges from 1 to 65535. Note that the ports with a number greater than
50000 or some special ports (that is, those used for fixed functions, such as port
1701) cannot be configured.
Description Use the remote-ping-server tcpconnect command to enable TCP listening.
Use the undo remote-ping-server tcpconnect command to disable TCP
listening.
When performing a TCP connection test on a specified port of a remote-ping
client, you must enable TCP listening on the server if a 3Com Switch 7750 serves
as a remote-ping server; otherwise, the test may fail.
Related command: remote-ping-server enable
c CAUTION: The port number used by remote-ping server for TCP listening cannot
be set to a number greater than 50000 or to some special port numbers that are
for fixed functions, such as 1701.
Example # Enable TCP listening, using 169.254.10.2 as the IP address and 9000 as the port
number.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping-server tcpconnect 169.254.10.2 9000
remote-ping-server
udpecho
Syntax remote-ping-server udpecho ip-address port-number
undo remote-ping-server udpecho ip-address port-number
View System view
Parameters ip-address: IP address from which a remote-ping server performs UDP listening.
port-number: Port from which a remote-ping server performs UDP listening. The
value ranges from 1 to 65535. Note that the ports with a number greater than
49999 or some special ports (that is, those used for fixed functions, such as port
1701) cannot be configured.
Description Use the remote-ping-server udpecho command to enable UDP listening on a
remote-ping server.
Use the undo remote-ping-server udpecho command to disable UDP listening.
1085
When performing a jitter test or a UDP connection test on a specified port of a
remote-ping client, you must enable UDP listening on the server if a Switch 7750
serves as a remote-ping server; otherwise, the test may fail.
Related command: remote-ping-server enable
c CAUTION: The port number used by remote-ping server for UDP listening cannot
be set to a number greater than 49999 or to some special port numbers that are
for fixed functions, such as 1701.
Example # Enable UDP listening, using 169.254.10.2 as the IP address and 9000 as the port
number.
<7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[7750] remote-ping-server udpecho 169.254.10.2 9000
1086 CHAPTER 88: REMOTE-PING SERVER COMMANDS
RRPP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
89
n This board is supported if you have the special order modules listed in the Switch
7750 Family Configuration Guide, in the chapter entitled “RPPP Configuration.”
control-vlan
Syntax control-vlan vlan-id
View RRPP domain view
Parameter vlan-id: Control VLAN ID, in the range of 2 to 4093.
Description Use the control-vlan command to specify the control VLAN for the RRPP domain.
You can configure the control VLAN of the primary ring. The control VLAN of the
subring is assigned by the system automatically and its ID is the control VLAN ID of
the primary ring plus 1.
A control VLAN is a special VLAN used to transfer RRPP packets. The port on each
switch for connecting the switch with the Ethernet ring belongs to the control
VLAN, and only the ports connected to the Ethernet ring can be added to the
control VLAN. It is not allowed to configure an IP address for the interface of the
control VLAN.
c CAUTION:
■ A specified control VLAN cannot be removed by using the undo vlan all
command.
■ The control VLAN of an RRPP domain cannot be a static VLAN already created
on the switch. If you configure a dynamic VLAN as the control VLAN of an
RRPP domain, the VLAN becomes a static VLAN automatically.
■ You are not recommended to configure a VLAN as both an RRPP control VLAN
and a remote-probe VLAN. (Refer to remote-probe vlan on page 814.)
■ You are not recommended to configure a VLAN as both an RRPP control VLAN
and an isolate-user-VLAN/sub VLAN. (Refer to “Isolate-User-VLAN
Configuration Commands” on page 131 and subvlan on page 136 for more
information.)
Example # Configure VLAN 100 as the control VLAN of the RRPP domain 1.
1088 CHAPTER 89: RRPP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp domain 1
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1] control-vlan 100
display rrpp brief
Syntax display rrpp brief
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display rrpp brief command to display the brief information of all RRPP
domains configured on the switch, including the RRPP enable state, RRPP domain
configuration, and Ethernet rings in the domains.
Example # Display the brief information of the RRPP domains.
<SW7750> display rrpp brief
Abbreviations for Switch Node Mode :
M - Master , T - Transit , E - Edge , A - Assistant-Edge
RRPP Protocol Status : Enabled
Number of RRPP Domains : 2
Domain Index : 1
Control Vlan : major 4093 sub 4094
Hello Timer : 1 sec Fail Timer : 3 sec
Ring Ring Node Primary/Common Secondary/Edge Is
ID Level Mode Port Port Enabled
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 M GigabitEthernet 2/0/1 GigabitEthernet 2/0/2 Yes
Domain Index : 2
Control Vlan : major 2003 sub 2004
Hello Timer : 1 sec Fail Timer : 3 sec
Ring Ring Node Primary/Common Secondary/Edge Is
ID Level Mode Port Port Enabled
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 T GigabitEthernet 2/0/11 GigabitEthernet 2/0/12 No
display rrpp statistics
Syntax display rrpp statistics domain domain-id [ ring ring-id ]
View Any view
Parameter domain-id: RRPP domain ID, in the range of 1 to 8.
ring-id: RRPP ring ID, in the range of 1 to 64.
Description Use the display rrpp statistics command to display the RRPP packet statistics.
display rrpp verbose 1089
Example # Display the packet statistics of primary ring 10 in RRPP domain1 (the current
switch is the master node of ring 10).
<SW7750> display rrpp statistics domain 1 ring 10
RRPP Ring : 10
Ring Level : 0
Node Mode : Master
Is Activated : No
Primary port : -
Packet LINK LINK COMMON COMPLETE Packet
Direct HEALTH UP DOWN FDB FDB Total
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Send 0 0 0 0 0 0
Rcv 0 0 0 0 0 0
Secondary port: -
Packet LINK LINK COMMON COMPLETE Packet
Direct HEALTH UP DOWN FDB FDB Total
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Send 0 0 0 0 0 0
Rcv 0 0 0 0 0 0
# Display the packet statistics of secondary ring 20 in RRPP domain1 (the current
switch is an edge node of secondary ring 20).
<SW7750> display rrpp statistics domain 1 ring 20
RRPP Ring : 20
Ring Level : 1
Node Mode : Edge
Is Activated : No
Primary port : -
Packet LINK LINK COMMON COMPLETE Packet
Direct HEALTH UP DOWN FDB FDB Total
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Send 0 0 0 0 0 0
Rcv 0 0 0 0 0 0
Secondary port: -
Packet LINK LINK COMMON COMPLETE Packet
Direct HEALTH UP DOWN FDB FDB Total
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Send 0 0 0 0 0 0
Rcv 0 0 0 0 0 0
display rrpp verbose
Syntax display rrpp verbose domain domain-id [ ring ring-id ]
View Any view
Parameter domain-id: RRPP domain ID, in the range of 1 to 8.
ring-id: RRPP ring ID, in the range of 1 to 64.
Description Use the display rrpp verbose command to display the RRPP configuration
details on the switch. If you do not specify the RRPP ring ID, the command displays
the details of all rings in the specified domain. Otherwise, the command displays
the details of the specified ring.
1090 CHAPTER 89: RRPP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Display the details of primary ring 10 in RRPP domain 1 (the current switch is the
master node in ring 10).
<SW7750> display rrpp verbose domain 1 ring 10
Domain Index : 1
Control VLAN : major 2003 sub 2004
Hello Timer : 1 sec Fail Timer : 3 sec
RRPP Ring : 10
Ring Level : 0
Node Mode : Master
Ring State : -
Is Enabled : No Is Activated : No
Primary port : - Port status: -
Secondary port: - Port status: -
# Display the details of primary ring 10 in RRPP domain 1 (the current switch is the
transit node in ring 10).
<SW7750> display rrpp verbose domain 1 ring 10
Domain Index : 1
Control VLAN : major 2003 sub 2004
Hello Timer : 1 sec Fail Timer : 3 sec
RRPP Ring : 10
Ring Level : 0
Node Mode : Transit
Ring State : -
Is Enabled : No Is Activated : No
Primary port : - Port status: -
Secondary port: - Port status: -
# Display the details of secondary ring 20 in RRPP domain 1 (the current switch is
the transit node in secondary ring 20).
<SW7750> display rrpp verbose domain 1 ring 20
Domain Index : 1
Control VLAN : major 2003 sub 2004
Hello Timer : 1 sec Fail Timer : 3 sec
RRPP Ring : 20
Ring Level : 1
Node Mode : Transit
Ring State : -
Is Enabled : No Is Activated : No
Primary port : - Port status: -
Secondary port: - Port status: -
# Display the details of secondary ring 20 in RRPP domain 1 (the current switch is
the edge node in secondary ring 20).
<SW7750> display rrpp verbose domain 1 ring 20
Domain Index : 1
Control VLAN : major 2003 sub 2004
Hello Timer : 1 sec Fail Timer : 3 sec
RRPP Ring : 20
Ring Level : 1
Node Mode : Edge
Ring State : -
Is Enabled : No Is Activated : No
reset rrpp statistics 1091
Common port : - Port status: -
Edge port : - Port status: -
reset rrpp statistics
Syntax reset rrpp statistics domain domain-id [ ring ring-id ]
View User view
Parameter domain-id: RRPP domain ID, in the range of 1 to 8.
ring-id: RRPP ring ID, in the range of 1 to 64.
Description Use the reset rrpp statistics command to clear the statistics information of the
specified RRPP domain.
If you specify the RRPP ring ID, the command clears the RRPP packet statistics
information of the specified ring in the specified domain. Otherwise, the
command clears the RRPP packet statistics information of all the rings in the
specified domain.
Related command: display rrpp statistics.
Example # Clear the packet statistics of ring 10 in RRPP domain 1 on the current switch.
<SW7750> reset rrpp statistics domain 1 ring 10
# Clear the packet statistics of all rings in RRPP domain 1 on the current switch.
<SW7750> reset rrpp statistics domain 1
ring
Syntax ring ring-id node-mode { master | transit } [ primary-port pri-port ] [
secondary-port sec-port ] level level-value
ring ring-id node-mode { edge | assistant-edge } [ common-port comm-port ]
[ edge-port edge-port ]
undo ring ring-id
View RRPP domain view
Parameter ring-id: Ethernet ring network ID, in the range of 1 to 64.
master: Defines the current switch as the master node on the Ethernet ring
network.
transit: Defines the current switch as the transit node on the Ethernet ring
network.
1092 CHAPTER 89: RRPP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
primary-port pri-port: Specifies a primary port.
secondary-port sec-port: Specifies a secondary port.
level-value: RRPP ring level, 0 for primary ring and 1 for secondary ring.
edge: Specifies the current switch as an edge node on the Ethernet ring network.
assistant-edge: Specifies the current switch as an assistant edge node on the
Ethernet ring network.
common-port comm-port: Specifies a common port.
edge-port edge-port: Specifies an edge port.
Description Use the ring command to configure the node role for the current switch and the
port role for the port connecting to the Ethernet ring.
Use the undo ring command to remove the role configuration.
For an edge node or an assistant edge node, make sure you have removed the
secondary ring configuration before removing the primary ring configuration.
Node roles ■ Master node: The node that initiates loop detection and prevents data loops.
Each ring has one and only one master node.
■ Transit node: Nodes on a ring other than the master node are all transit nodes.
■ Edge node: A node on the primary ring and a secondary ring at the same time
is an edge node. An edge node serves as a transit node on a primary ring and
an edge node on a secondary ring. In an RRPP domain, a secondary ring has
two edge nodes. You must specify one of them as assistant edge node.
n In the same RRPP domain, different rings must have different Ring IDs.
Port roles Of the two ports that connect the master node and a transit node to an Ethernet
ring, one is the primary port and the other the secondary port. The port roles are
determined by user configuration.
■ The primary port and secondary port of the master node
The primary port of the master node transmits the loop detection packet, and the
secondary port of the master node receives the loop detection packet.
When an Ethernet ring is in the healthy state, the secondary port of the master
node allows only packets of control VLAN to pass, but logically blocks packets of
data VLAN.
When the Ethernet ring is in the broken state, the secondary port of the master
node stops blocking the data VLAN and begins to forwards packets of data VLAN.
■ The primary and secondary ports on a transit node are functionally the same.
■ Of the two ports connecting an edge node to a subring, one is the common
port and the other is the edge port of the node. The common port connects
ring 1093
the edge node to the primary ring and a subring at the same time. An edge
port is connected only with a subring.
n ■ RRPP and loopback test functions are mutually exclusive. You must disable the
loopback test on the primary/secondary port of the master/transit node and the
common/edge port of the edge node.
■ An aggregation port cannot be configured as a primary/secondary port of the
master/transit node and a common/edge port of the edge node.
Example # Configure the current switch as the master node on primary ring 10 in RRPP
domain 1, GigabitEthernet2/0/5 as the primary port, and GigabitEthernet 2/0/6 as
the secondary port.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp domain 1
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1] ring 10 node-mode master primary-port GigabitE
thernet2/0/5 secondary-port GigabitEthernet 2/0/6 level 0
# Configure the current switch as the transit node on primary ring 10 in RRPP
domain 1, GigabitEthernet2/0/5 as the primary port, and GigabitEthernet 2/0/6 as
the secondary port.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp domain 1
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1] ring 10 node-mode transit primary-port Gigabit
Ethernet2/0/5 secondary-port GigabitEthernet 2/0/6 level 0
# Configure the current switch as the master node on secondary ring 20 in RRPP
domain 1, GigabitEthernet2/0/10 as the primary port, and GigabitEthernet 2/0/11
as the secondary port.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp domain 1
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1] ring 20 node-mode master primary-port GigabitE
thernet 0/10 secondary-port GigabitEthernet 0/11 level 1
# Configure the current switch as a transit node on secondary ring 20 in RRPP
domain 1, GigabitEthernet2/0/10 as the primary port, and GigabitEthernet 2/0/11
port as secondary port.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp domain 1
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1] ring 20 node-mode transit primary-port Gigabit
Ethernet 2/0/10 secondary-port GigabitEthernet 2/0/11 level 1
# Configure the current switch as an edge node on secondary ring 20 in RRPP
domain 1, GigabitEthernet2/0/5 as the common port, and GigabitEthernet 2/0/10
as the edge port.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp domain 1
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1] ring 20 node-mode edge common-port GigabitEthe
rnet 2/0/5 edge-port GigabitEthernet 2/0/10
1094 CHAPTER 89: RRPP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
# Configure the current switch as an assistant edge node on secondary ring 20 in
RRPP domain 1, GigabitEthernet2/0/6 as a common port, and GigabitEthernet
2/0/11 as an edge port.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp domain 1
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1] ring 20 node-mode assistant-edge common-port G
igabitEthernet 2/0/6 edge-port GigabitEthernet 2/0/11
# Remove the node role configured for the current switch on RRPP ring 10, and
the role configured for the port connecting to the Ethernet ring.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp domain 1
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1] undo ring 10 enable
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1] undo ring 10
ring enable
Syntax ring ring-id enable
undo ring ring-id enable
View RRPP domain view
Parameter ring-id: RRPP ring ID, in the range of 1 to 64.
Description Use the ring enable command to enable an RRPP ring for the current switch.
Use the undo ring enable command to disable an RRPP ring on the current
switch.
To enable the RRPP domain of the current switch, you must enable RRPP and the
RRPP ring at the same time.
RRPP and STP are mutually exclusive on the port to prevent the possible conflict
when the RRPP and STP calculate the blocked/unblocked status of the port.
Related command: rrpp enable.
Example # Enable Ethernet ring 10 on RRPP domain 1.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp domain 1
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1] ring 10 enable
# Disable Ethernet ring 10 on RRPP domain 1.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp domain 1
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1] undo ring 10 enable
rrpp domain 1095
rrpp domain
Syntax rrpp domain domain-id
undo rrpp domain domain-id
View System view
Parameter domain-id: RRPP domain ID, in the range of 1 to 8.
Description Use the rrpp domain command to create an RRPP domain and enter RRPP
domain view.
Use the undo rrpp domain command to delete an RRPP domain.
Before deleting an RRPP domain, make sure that no RRPP ring exists in the
domain. Otherwise, the deletion operation will fail.
Example # Create RRPP domain 1.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp domain 1
New domain created.
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1]
# Delete RRPP domain 1.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] undo rrpp domain 1
rrpp enable
Syntax rrpp enable
undo rrpp enable
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the rrpp enable command to enable the RRPP protocol on the current
switch.
Use the undo rrpp enable command to disable the RRPP protocol on the current
switch.
To enable an RRPP ring of the current switch, you must enable RRPP and the RRPP
ring at the same time.
Related command: ring enable.
1096 CHAPTER 89: RRPP CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Enable the RRPP protocol.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp enable
# Disable the RRPP protocol.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] undo rrpp enable
timer
Syntax timer hello-timer hello-value fail-timer fail-value
undo timer
View RRPP domain view
Parameter hello-value: Time interval in seconds at which the primary port of the master node
sends the health detection packet, in the range of 1 to 10. The default value is 1
second.
fail-value: Timeout time in seconds at which the secondary port of the master
node receives the health detection packet, in the range of 3 to 30. The default
value is 3 seconds.
Description Use the timer command to configure the time values of the Hello timer and Fail
timer in the RRPP domain.
Use the undo timer command to restore the default time values.
The Fail timer value cannot be less than three times the Hello timer value.
Example # Set the time interval at which the primary port of the master node in RRPP
domain 1 sends the health detection packet to 2 seconds, and set the timeout
time for the secondary port of the master node in the RRPP domain 1 to receive
health detection packets to 7 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp domain 1
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1] timer hello-timer 2 fail-timer 7
# Restore the default timer values for RRPP domain 1.
<SW7750> system-view
[SW7750] rrpp domain 1
[SW7750-rrpp-domain1] undo timer
NETSTREAM CONFIGURATION
90 COMMANDS
n Currently, the LS81VSNP modules installed in Switch 7750s support the Netstream
feature. In this manual, the LS81VSNP module is called I/O Module.
display ip netstream cache
Syntax display ip netstream cache slot slot-number
View Any view
Parameter slot-number: Slot number of an I/O Module.
Description Use the display ip netstream cache command to display the Netstream
configuration and status of the Netstream cache on the I/O Module in a specified
slot.
Example # Display information about the Netstream cache of the I/O Module in slot 3.
<SW7750> display ip netstream cache slot 6
IP netstream cache information in slot 6
Stream active timeout(minute) : 30
Stream inactive timeout(second): 60
Active stream entry : 0
Stream entry been counted : 0
Last statistics reset time : none
Protocol Total Packets Stream Packets
Streams /Sec /Sec /stream
----------------------------------------------------
Total 0 0 0 0
Table 206 Field descriptions of the display ip netstream cache command
Field Description
Stream active timeout(minute) : 30 The current active aging time is 15 minutes.
Stream inactive timeout(second): 60 The current inactive aging time is 60 seconds.
Active stream entry : 50 The Netstream cache contains 50 active stream entries.
Stream entry been counted : 0 Netstream has no stream entries.
Last statistics reset time : none The statistics have never been cleared.
Protocol, Total Streams, Packets/sec, Protocol type, total number of streams, packet per
Stream/sec, Packets/stream second, stream per second, and average number of
packets per stream.
1098 CHAPTER 90: NETSTREAM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display ip netstream export
Syntax display ip netstream export slot slot-number
View Any view
Parameter slot-number: Slot number of an I/O Module.
Description Use the display ip netstream export command to display information about
Netstream export packets on the I/O Module in a specified slot.
Example # Display information about Netstream export packets of the I/O Module in slot 6.
<SW7750> display ip netstream export slot 6
IP netstream export information in slot 6
IP netstream is enabled in slot : 3
Version 9 export information:
Stream destination IP(UDP): 10.10.0.10 (30000)
Stream source address: 3.3.3.3
Exported stream number: 16
Exported UDP datagram number(failed number): 16(0)
Version 9 AS aggregation information:
Stream destination IP(UDP): 10.10.0.11 (30000)
Exported stream number: 16
Exported UDP datagram number(failed number): 2(0)
Table 207 Field descriptions of the display ip netstream export command
Field Description
IP netstream export information Information about Netstream export packets on the I/O
in slot 6 Module in slot 6 will be followed.
IP netstream is enabled in slot : 3 Slot number of a module where Netstream is enabled
Version 9 export information: The following is information about version 9 Netstream
export packets
Stream destination IP(UDP): Destination IP address and UDP port number of Netstream
export packets
Not destination address for This information is displayed if you do not configure the
exported packet. destination IP address for Netstream export packets.
Exported stream number: Number of sent stream entries
Exported UDP datagram Number of sent UDP packets (Number of UDP packets
number(failed number): failed in sending)
Version 9 AS aggregation The following is information about version 9 Netstream
information: export packets when AS aggregation is enabled. This
information is not displayed if AS aggregation is not
enabled.
enable
Syntax enable
undo enable
ip netstream aggregation 1099
View Netstream aggregation view
Parameter None
Description Use the enable command to enable the aggregation mode corresponding to
current aggregation view.
Use the undo enable command to disable the aggregation mode.
By default, no aggregation mode is enabled.
Related command: ip netstream aggregation.
Example # Enable the AS aggregation mode of Netstream.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip netstream aggregation as
[SW7750-aggregation-as] enable
# Disable the AS aggregation mode of Netstream.
[SW7750-aggregation-as] undo enable
ip netstream aggregation
Syntax ip netstream aggregation { as | protocol-port | destination-prefix | prefix |
source-prefix }
View System view
Parameter as: Specifies the view for AS (autonomous system) aggregation mode. In this
mode, the Netstream streams are classified by: source and destination AS
numbers, outbound interface index.
protocol-port: Specifies the view for protocol-port aggregation mode. In this
mode, the Netstream streams are classified by: protocol number, source and
destination ports.
source-prefix: Specifies the view for source-prefix aggregation mode. In this
mode, the Netstream streams are classified by: source AS number, source mask
length and source prefix.
destination-prefix: Specifies the view for destination-prefix aggregation mode.
In this mode, the Netstream streams are classified by: destination AS number,
destination mask length, destination prefix, and outbound interface index.
prefix: Specifies the view for source- and destination-prefix aggregation mode. In
this mode, the Netstream streams are classified by: source and destination AS
numbers, source and destination mask lengths, source and destination prefixes,
and outbound interface index.
1100 CHAPTER 90: NETSTREAM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the ip netstream aggregation command to enter a Netstream
aggregation view.
Under the aggregation view, you can enable/disable the aggregation function in
the corresponding mode, and set the source IP address, the destination IP address
and port number for Netstream export packets in version 9 format.
Related commands: enable, ip netstream export host, and ip netstream export source.
Example # Enter Netstream AS aggregation view.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip netstream aggregation as
[SW7750-aggregation-as]
ip netstream export dscp
Syntax ip netstream export dscp dscp-value
undo ip netstream export dscp
View System view
Parameter dscp-value: Differentiated services code point (DSCP) value, ranging from 0 to 63,
with 0 as the default value.
Description Use the ip netstream export dscp command to configure the DSCP value of
Netstream export packets. Netstream export packets will be classified by their
DSCP values.
Use the undo ip netstream export dscp command to restore the default DSCP
value.
Example # Set the DSCP value of Netstream export packets to 60.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip netstream export dscp 60
ip netstream export host
Syntax ip netstream export host ip-address udp-port
undo ip netstream export host
View System view or Netstream aggregation view
Parameter ip-address: IP address of the destination host for Netstream export packets, in
dotted decimal notation.
ip netstream export source 1101
udp-port: UDP port number of the destination host for Netstream export packets.
Description Use the ip netstream export host command to configure the IP address and
UDP port number of the destination host for Netstream export packets.
Use the undo ip netstream export host command to restore the default IP
address and port number.
By default:
■ The destination IP address is 0.0.0.0 and the destination port number is 0 in
system view.
■ The destination IP address and port number in aggregation view are those
configured in system view.
You can configure different destination IP addresses and port numbers for
different aggregation modes.
Related command: ip netstream aggregation and ip netstream export source.
Example # Configure the destination IP address and UDP port number for Netstream export
packets to 172.16.105.48 and 50000 respectively.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip netstream export host 172.16.105.48 50000
ip netstream export source
Syntax ip netstream export source ip-address
undo ip netstream export source
View System view or Netstream aggregation view
Parameter ip-address: IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
Description Use the ip netstream export source command to configure the source IP
address of Netstream export packets, which will be used as the source address of
UDP packets.
Use the undo ip netstream export source command to restore the default
setting.
By default, the source IP address is 0.0.0.0, which indicates that the IP address of
the corresponding outbound interface is used as the source IP address.
You can configure different source IP addresses for different aggregation modes.
Related commands: ip netstream aggregation and ip netstream export host.
1102 CHAPTER 90: NETSTREAM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Example # Configure the source IP address of Netstream export packets to 3.3.3.3.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip netstream export source 3.3.3.3
ip netstream export version
Syntax ip netstream export version version-number [ origin-as | peer-as ]
undo ip netstream export version
View System view
Parameter version-number: Version number for Netstream export packets. Currently, you can
configure version 5 or version 9.
origin-as: Use original AS numbers as the AS numbers for individual IP addresses.
peer-as: Use peer AS numbers as the AS numbers for individual IP addresses.
Description Use the ip netstream export version command to configure the version and
the AS option for Netstream export packets in non-aggregation mode.
Use the undo ip netstream export version command to restore the default
configuration.
By default, version 5 is used and the AS option is peer-as.
Netstream can use three versions of Netstream export packets to send aged
stream entries: version 5, version 8 and version 9. But currently, only version 5 and
version 9 are configurable:
■ If version 5 is configured: the system sends normal stream entries through
version 5 packets and sends aggregated stream entries through version 8
packets.
■ If version 9 is configured: the system sends all aged stream entries through
version 9 packets.
Example # Configure to use version 5 Netstream export packets and use original AS
numbers as the AS numbers for individual IP addresses.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip netstream export version 5 origin-as
ip netstream inbound source
Syntax ip netstream inbound source srcslot-number to dstslot-number [ acl
acl-number ]
ip netstream outbound source 1103
undo ip netstream inbound source srcslot-number to dstslot-number
View System view
Parameter srcslot-number: Slot number of an interface module.
dstslot-number: Slot number of an I/O Module.
acl-number: Index of an ACL.
Description Use the ip netstream inbound source command to mirror the inbound
packets on an interface module to an I/O Module and enable Netstream, a packet
statistics function.
Use the undo ip netstream inbound source command to stop the mirroring
and disable Netstream.
If the acl keyword is used in the ip netstream inbound source command, the
streams on the interface module that match the ACL will be mirrored onto the I/O
Module, which in turn collect packet statistics.
By default, Netstream is disabled.
n With ACL rules, up to 100 streams can be mirrored for Netstream statistics
collection in the system.
Example # Mirror the inbound packets on the module in slot 3 to the I/O Module in slot 6
and enable Netstream.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip netstream inbound source 3 to 6
ip netstream outbound source
Syntax ip netstream outbound source srcslot-number to dstslot-number
undo ip netstream outbound source srcslot-number to dstslot-number
View System view
Parameter srcslot-number: Slot number of an interface module.
dstslot-number: Slot number of an I/O Module.
Description Use the ip netstream outbound source command to mirror the outbound
packets on an interface module to an I/O Module and enable Netstream.
Use the undo ip netstream outbound command to stop the mirroring and
disable Netstream.
1104 CHAPTER 90: NETSTREAM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
By default, Netstream is disabled.
Example # Mirror the outbound packets on the module in slot 3 to the I/O Module in slot 6
and enable Netstream.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip netstream outbound source 3 to 6
ip netstream template refresh
Syntax ip netstream template refresh packets
undo ip netstream template refresh
View System view
Parameter Packets: Threshold for the number of Netstream packets, ranging from 1 to 600,
in packets.
Description Use the ip netstream template refresh command to configure a packet
threshold for updating the template of version 9 Netstream packets. When the
number of transmitted packets exceeds the configured threshold, the system
sends the newest template to the NSC (Netstream collector).
Use the undo ip netstream template refresh command to restore the default
packet threshold.
By default, the packet threshold is 20.
Example # Set the packet threshold for updating the template to 100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip netstream template refresh 100
ip netstream template timeout
Syntax ip netstream template timeout minutes
undo ip netstream template timeout
View System view
Parameter minutes: Template aging time, ranging from 1 to 3,600, in minutes.
Description Use the ip netstream template timeout command to configure a template
aging time. When the time for transmitting Netstream packets exceeds the
configured aging time, the system sends the newest template to the NSC and
counts time again.
ip netstream timeout active 1105
Use the undo ip netstream template timeout command to restore the
default aging time.
By default, the template aging time is 30 minutes.
Example # Set the template aging time to 60 minutes.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip netstream template timeout 60
ip netstream timeout active
Syntax ip netstream timeout active minutes
undo ip netstream timeout active
View System view
Parameter minutes: Active aging time for Netstream entries in minutes, in the range of 5 to
60.
Description Use the ip netstream timeout active command to configure the active aging
time for Netstream entries.
Use the undo ip netstream timeout active command to restore the default
active aging time.
By default, the active aging time is 30 minutes.
A stream entry will be aged out when the active time of this stream (the time
elapsed since the stream entry was created) exceeds the time limit you set here.
Related command: ip netstream timeout inactive.
Example # Configure the active aging time for Netstream entries to 60 minutes.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip netstream timeout active 60
ip netstream timeout inactive
Syntax ip netstream timeout inactive seconds
undo ip netstream timeout inactive
View System view
1106 CHAPTER 90: NETSTREAM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter seconds: Inactive aging time for Netstream entries in seconds, in the range of 60
to 600.
Description Use the ip netstream timeout inactive command to configure the inactive
aging time for Netstream entries.
Use the undo ip netstream timeout inactive command to restore the default
inactive aging time.
By default, the inactive aging time for Netstream entries is 60 seconds.
A stream entry will be aged out when the inactive time of the stream (the time
elapsed since the last packet of the stream passed the switch) exceeds the time
limit you set here.
Related command: ip netstream timeout active.
Example # Configure the inactive aging time for Netstream entries to 150 seconds.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] ip netstream timeout inactive 150
reset ip netstream statistics
Syntax reset ip netstream statistics slot slot-number
View User view
Parameter slot-number: Slot number of an I/O Module.
Description Use the reset ip netstream statistics command to clear the Netstream
statistics and output statistics on a specified I/O Module and age out all the stream
entries in the Netstream cache.
n Executing the reset ip netstream statistics command will forcibly age out the
current stream entries in the NP. This forcible aging procedure may take a long
time and stops the creation of any new entry until all current entries are aged out.
Example # Clear the Netstream statistics and age all the stream entries in the Netstream
cache on the I/O Module in slot 6.
<SW7750> reset ip netstream statistics slot 6
POLICY ROUTING CONFIGURATION
91 COMMANDS
n Currently, the LS81VSNP modules installed in Switch 7750s support the policy
routing feature. In this manual, the LS81VSNP module is called I/O Module.
display qos-vlan traffic-redirect
Syntax display qos-vlan [ vlan-id ] traffic-redirect
View Any view
Parameters vlan-id: ID of a VLAN interface, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Description Use the display qos-vlan traffic-redirect command to display policy routing
configuration.
Use the display qos-vlan vlan-id traffic-redirect command to display policy
routing configuration on a specified VLAN interface.
Example # Display policy routing configuration on all VLAN interfaces.
<SW7750> display qos-vlan traffic-redirect
Vlan 1 traffic-redirect
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2001 rule 0 running
Redirected to: next-hop 13.53.3.3 slot 5
Vlan 2 traffic-redirect
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running
Redirected to: next-hop 3.3.3.3 slot 6
# Display policy routing configuration on VLAN-interface 2.
<SW7750> display qos-vlan 2 traffic-redirect
Vlan 2 traffic-redirect
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running
Redirected to: next-hop 3.3.3.3 slot 6
1108 CHAPTER 91: POLICY ROUTING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
traffic-redirect inbound ip-group
Syntax
1 Redirect packets to a specified VLAN interface
traffic-redirect inbound ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } [ rule rule [
system-index index ] ] interface vlan-interface interface-number [ remark {
dscp dscp | { precedence precedence | tos tos }* } ] slot slot-number
undo traffic-redirect inbound ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } [ rule rule ]
1 Redirect packets to a specified IP address
traffic-redirect inbound ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } [ rule rule [
system-index index ] ] next-hop ipaddr &1-3 [ remark { dscp dscp | {
precedence precedence | tos tos }* } ] slot slot-number
undo traffic-redirect inbound ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } [ rule rule ]
View VLAN view
Parameters acl-number: ACL number, ranging from 2000 to 3999.
acl-name: ACL name, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
rule rule: Specifies a rule in the ACL. The rule argument represents the number of
an ACL rule and ranges from 0 to 127. If rule rule is not provided, all rules in the
specified ACL will be applied.
system-index index: Specifies a system index for the specified ACL rule. The two
parameters are optional. The index argument ranges from 0 to 4,294,967,295.
When an ACL rule is applied, the system automatically assigns a system index to
the rule for search purpose. But you can also manually specify a system index for
an ACL rule when executing these commands. Generally, you are not
recommended to do so.
interface vlan-interface interface-number: Specifies the VLAN interface to which
packets are redirected. The interface-number argument is the index of a VLAN
interface, which ranges from 1 to 4094.
dscp dscp: Specifies the value of differential services code point. The dscp
argument ranges from 0 to 63 and defaults to 0. Packets can be classified by their
DSCP values.
precedence precedence: Specifies a precedence, which will be used to remark
packets. The precedence argument ranges from 0 to 7 and defaults to 0.
tos tos: Specifies the value of type of service. The tos argument ranges from 0 to
15 and defaults to 0. Packets can be classified by their ToS values.
slot slot-number: Specifies the slot number of an I/O Module.
traffic-redirect outbound ip-group 1109
next-hop ipaddr &1-3: Specifies the IP address(es) to which packets are
redirected. You can specify at most three IP addresses in one command line.
Description Use the traffic-redirect inbound ip-group command to redirect inbound
packets that match a specified ACL or ACL rule on an I/O Module.
Use the undo traffic-redirect inbound ip-group command to remove the
inbound packet redirection configuration.
You can redirect packets to a specified VLAN interface or specified IP addresses.
If all specified IP addresses are unreachable, the packets will be forwarded
depending on their destination IP addresses, but the action defined by the remark
keyword (if any) will still be performed.
c CAUTION:
■ With ACL rules, up to 100 streams can be redirected in the system.
■ Up to 3,000 traffic-redirect inbound ip-group commands can be
configured.
■ Totally up to 3,000 traffic-redirect inbound ip-group and traffic-redirect
outbound ip-group commands can be configured.
Example # Configure to redirect the inbound packets that match ACL 2100 on I/O Module
in slot 5 to 10.13.152.1 (the next hop).
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 3
[SW7750-vlan3] traffic-redirect inbound ip-group 2100 next-hop 10.13
.152.1 slot 5
traffic-redirect outbound ip-group
Syntax
1 Redirect packets to a specified VLAN interface
traffic-redirect outbound ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } [ rule rule [
system-index index ] ] interface vlan-interface interface-number [ remark {
dscp dscp | { precedence precedence | tos tos }*} ] slot slot-number
undo traffic-redirect outbound ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } [ rule rule ]
1 Redirect packets to a specified IP address
traffic-redirect outbound ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } [ rule rule [
system-index index ] ] next-hop ipaddr &1-3 [ remark { dscp dscp | {
precedence precedence | tos tos } *} ] slot slot-number
undo traffic-redirect outbound ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } [ rule rule ]
View VLAN view
1110 CHAPTER 91: POLICY ROUTING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter acl-number: ACL number, ranging from 2000 to 3999.
acl-name: ACL name, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
rule rule: Specifies a rule in the ACL. The rule argument represents the number of
an ACL rule and ranges from 0 to 127. If rule rule is not provided, all rules in the
specified ACL will be applied.
system-index index: Specifies a system index for the specified ACL rule. The two
parameters are optional. The index argument ranges from 0 to 4,294,967,295.
When an ACL rule is applied, the system automatically assigns a system index to
the rule for search purpose. But you can also manually specify a system index for
an ACL rule when executing these commands. Generally, you are not
recommended to do so.
interface vlan-interface interface-number: Specifies the VLAN interface to which
packets are redirected. The interface-number argument is the index of a VLAN
interface, which ranges from 1 to 4094.
dscp dscp: Specifies the value of differential services code point. The dscp
argument ranges from 0 to 63 and defaults to 0. Packets can be classified by their
DSCP values.
precedence precedence: Specifies a precedence, which will be used to remark
packets.. The precedence argument ranges from 0 to 7 and defaults to 0.
tos tos: Specifies the value of type of service. The tos argument ranges from 0 to
15 and defaults to 0. Packets can be classified by their ToS values.
slot slot-number: Specifies the slot number of an I/O Module.
next-hop ipaddr &1-3: Specifies the IP address(es) to which packets are
redirected. You can specify at most three IP addresses in one command line.
Description Use the traffic-redirect outbound ip-group command to redirect outbound
packets that match a specified ACL or ACL rule on an I/O Module.
Use the undo traffic-redirect outbound ip-group command to disable the
outbound packet redirection configuration.
You can redirect packets to a specified VLAN interface or IP addresses.
If all specified IP addresses are unreachable, the packets will be forwarded
depending on their destination IP addresses, but the action defined by the remark
keyword (if any) will still be performed.
c CAUTION:
■ Up to 100 ACL rule-filtered streams can be redirected in the system.
■ Up to 3,000 traffic-redirect outbound ip-group commands can be
configured.
■ Totally up to 3,000 traffic-redirect inbound ip-group and traffic-redirect
outbound ip-group commands can be configured.
traffic-redirect outbound ip-group 1111
Example # Configure to redirect the outbound packets that match ACL 2100 on the I/O
Module in slot 5 to 10.13.152.2 (the next hop).
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] vlan 3
[SW7750-vlan3] traffic-redirect outbound ip-group 2100 next-hop 10.1
3.152.2 slot 5
1112 CHAPTER 91: POLICY ROUTING CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
TELNET PROTECTION CONFIGURATION
92 COMMANDS
attack-protection
Syntax attack-protection [ ip-address ]
undo attack-protection
View System view
Parameter ip-address: Sets special ARP Telnet protection for the specified Layer-3 interface.
Description Use the attack-protection command to set global Telnet protection. After you
execute this command, the system protects all the Layer-3 interfaces in the Up
state.
Use the undo attack-protection command to cancel the global Telnet
protection.
Use the attack-protection ip-address command to set special ARP Telnet
protection. If the Layer-3 interface corresponding to the specified IP address is in
the UP state, Telnet protection is enabled on this Layer-3 interface. If the
corresponding Layer-3 interface does not exist or is in the Down state, the system
saves this configuration as the special ARP settings and enables Telnet protection
when the corresponding Layer-3 interface is in the UP state.
Use the undo attack-protection ip-address command to cancel the special ARP
Telnet protection.
Example # Configure global Telnet protection.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] attack-protection
# Configure special ARP Telnet protection.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] attack-protection 192.168.0.1
attack-protection disable-defaultroute
Syntax attack-protection disable-defaultroute
1114 CHAPTER 92: TELNET PROTECTION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
undo attack-protection disable-defaultroute
View System view
Parameter None
Description Use the attack-protection disable-defaultroute command to disable the
default-route Telnet protection function.
Use the undo attack-protection disable-defaultroute command to enable
the default-route Telnet protection function.
By default, default-routing Telnet protection is disabled.
After you enable the NAT function, You cannot configure default-routing Telnet
protection.
Example # Enable default-route Telnet login protection.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] undo attack-protection disable-defaultroute
attack-protection icmp
Syntax attack-protection icmp [ ip-address ]
undo attack-protection icmp
View System view
Parameter ip-address: Configures to protect ICMP packets for the specified source IP address.
Description Use the attack-protection icmp command to enable ICMP protection.
Use the undo attack-protection icmp command to disable ICMP protection.
Before enabling ICMP protection, you need to enable ICMP protection, and then
configure global Telnet protection, special ARP Telnet protection, and
default-routing Telnet protection.
By default, ICMP protection is disabled.
Example # Protect ICMP packets addressed from the source IP address 192.168.0.100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] attack-protection icmp 192.168.0.100
attack-protection snmp 1115
attack-protection snmp
Syntax attack-protection snmp [ ip-address ]
undo attack-protection snmp
View System view
Parameter ip-address: Configures to protect SNMP packets for the specified source IP
address.
Description Use the attack-protection snmp command to enable SNMP protection.
Use the undo attack-protection snmp command to disable SNMP protection.
Before enabling SNMP protection, you need to enable SNMP protection, and then
configure global Telnet protection, special ARP Telnet protection, and
default-routing Telnet protection.
By default, SNMP protection is disabled.
Example # Protect SNMP packets addressed from the source IP address 192.168.0.100.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] attack-protection snmp 192.168.0.100
attack-protection telnet
Syntax attack-protection telnet [ ip-address ]
undo attack-protection telnet
View System view
Parameter ip-address: Configures to protect Telnet packets for the specified source IP
address.
Description Use the attack-protection telnet command to enable Telnet protection.
Use the undo attack-protection telnet command to disable Telnet protection.
Before enabling Telnet protection, you need to enable Telnet protection, and then
configure global Telnet protection, special ARP Telnet protection, and
default-routing Telnet protection.
By default, Telnet protection is disabled.
Example # Protect Telnet packets addressed from the source IP address 192.168.0.100.
1116 CHAPTER 92: TELNET PROTECTION CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] attack-protection telnet 192.168.0.100
SMART LINK CONFIGURATION
93 COMMANDS
display smart-link flush
Syntax display smart-link flush
View Any view
Parameter None
Description Use the display smart-link flush command to view the information about how
the Smart Link device processes flush messages.
Example # Display the information about how the Smart Link device processes flush
messages.
<SW7750> display smart-link flush
Flush interface :Ethernet2/0/1
Count of flush packets received : 1
Time of last flush packet received : 22:52:23 2006/04/01
Source MAC of last flush packet received : 000f-e20f-5566
Device ID of last flush packet received : 000f-e20f-5566
Control VLAN ID of last flush packet received : 1
Table 208 Field descriptions of the display smart-link flush command
Field Description
Flush interface Interface that receives the latest legal flush
message
Count of flush packets received Total number of flush messages received
Time of last flush packet received Time when the last legal flush message is received
Source MAC of last flush packet received Source MAC address in the last legal flush
message received
Device ID of last flush packet received Bridge MAC address of the device from which the
last legal flush message was received
Control VLAN ID of last flush packet Control VLAN ID in the last legal flush message
received received
n A legal fulsh message refers to the message whose control VLAN ID is consistent
with the receiving control VLAN ID configured on the receiving port.
1118 CHAPTER 93: SMART LINK CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
display smart-link group
Syntax display smart-link group { group-id | all }
View Any view
Parameter group-id: Smart link group ID, in the range of 1 to 48.
all: Displays the information about all Smart Link groups.
Description Use the display smart-link group command to display the information about
the specific Smart Link group or all the Smart Link groups.
Example # Display the information about Smart Link group 1.
<SW7750> display smart-link group 1
Smart Link Group 1 information:
Device ID: 000f-e212-3456 Control-VLAN ID: 1
Member Role State Flush-count Last-flush-time
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ethernet2/0/1 MASTER ACTVIE 1 16:37:20 2006/04/21
AGG-1 SLAVE STANDBY 2 17:45:20 2006/04/21
Table 209 Field descriptions of the display smart-link group command
Field Description
Member Member of the Smart Link group
Role Port role of a Smart Link group member: master or slave.
Status Port status of a Smart Link group member when the link of this member port
is up: active or standby.
Flush-count Number of sent flush messages
Last-flush-time Time when the last flush message is sent. If no flush message is sent, "NA"
will be displayed.
flush enable control-vlan
Syntax flush enable control-vlan vlan-id
undo flush enable
View Smart Link group view
Parameter vlan-id: Control VLAN ID, in the range of 1 to 4,094.
Description Use the flush enable control-vlan command to enable the function of sending
flush messages in the specified control VLAN.
Use the undo flush enable control-vlan command to disable the function of
sending flush messages to the specified control VLAN.
By default, no control VLAN is specified.
link-aggregation group 1119
Example # Configure to send flush messages within control VLAN 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] smart-link group 1
[SW7750-smlk-group1] flush enable control-vlan 1
link-aggregation group
Syntax link-aggregation group group-id { master | slave }
undo link-aggregation group group-id
View Smart Link group view
Parameter group-id: Link aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 384 (only link
aggregation groups configured manually or statically are available).
master: Configures the specified link aggregation group as the master port of the
Smart Link group.
slave: Configures the specified link aggregation group as the slave port of the
Smart Link group.
Description Use the link-aggregation group command to configure a link aggregation
group as a member of the Smart Link group.
Use the undo link-aggregation group command to remove the specified link
aggregation group from the current Smart Link group.
n Smart Link and STP cannot be enabled on an Ethernet port at the same time.
Make sure that STP is not enabled on the port of the link aggregation group
before configuring the link aggregation group as a member of the Smart Link
group.
Example # Configure link aggregation group 8 as the slave port of Smart Link group 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] smart-link group 1
[SW7750-smlk-group1] link-aggregation group 8 slave
port
Syntax port interface-type interface-number { master | slave }
undo port interface-type interface-number
View Smart Link group view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
1120 CHAPTER 93: SMART LINK CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
interface-number: Port number.
master: Configures the specified port as the master port of the Smart Link group.
slave: Configures the specified port as the slave port of the Smart Link group.
Description Use the port command to configure the specified port as a member of the Smart
Link group.
Use the undo port command to remove the specified port from the Smart Link
group.
Either a single port or a link aggregation group configured manually or statically
can serve as a member for a Smart Link group. However, a link aggregation group
configured dynamically cannot serve as a member for a Smart Link group. This
command is not applicable to member ports in a link aggregation group.
n Smart Link and STP cannot be enabled on an Ethernet port at the same time.
Make sure that STP is not enabled on the port of the link aggregation group
before configuring the link aggregation group as a member of the Smart Link
group.
Example # Configure Ethernet2/0/6 as the slave port of Smart Link group 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] smart-link group 1
[SW7750-smlk-group1] port Ethernet 2/0/6 slave
port smart-link group
Syntax port smart-link group group-id { master | slave }
undo port smart-link group group-id
View Ethernet port view
Parameter group-id: Smart link group ID, in the range of 1 to 48.
master: Configures the port as the master port of the Smart Link group.
slave: Configures the port as the slave port of the Smart Link group.
Description Use the port smart-link group command to configure the current port as a
member of the Smart Link group.
Use the undo port smart-link group command to remove the current port
from the specified Smart Link group.
Either a single port or a link aggregation group configured manually or statically
can serve as a member for a Smart Link group. However, a link aggregation group
reset smart-link packets counter 1121
configured dynamically cannot serve as a member for a Smart Link group. This
command is not applicable to member ports in a link aggregation group.
n Smart Link and STP cannot be enabled on an Ethernet port at the same time.
Make sure that STP is not enabled on the port of the link aggregation group
before configuring the link aggregation group as a member of the Smart Link
group.
Example # Configure Ethernet2/0/3 as the master port of Smart Link group 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/3
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/3] port smart-link group 1 master
reset smart-link packets counter
Syntax reset smart-link packets counter
View User view
Parameter None
Description Use the reset smart-link packets counter command to clear the flush
message statistics of Smart Link.
Example # Clear the flush message statistics of Smart Link.
<SW7750> reset smart-link packets counter
smart-link flush enable
Syntax ■ In Ethernet port view:
smart-link flush enable control-vlan vlan-id
undo smart-link flush enable
■ In system view:
smart-link flush enable control-vlan vlan-id port interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]
undo smart-link flush enable port interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ]
View Ethernet port view/system view
Parameter vlan-id: Control VLAN ID, in the range of 1 to 4,094.
1122 CHAPTER 93: SMART LINK CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Description Use the smart-link flush enable control-vlan command to enable the
current/specified port to process flush messages received on the specified control
VLAN.
Use the undo smart-link flush enable command to disable the port from
processing flush messages.
■ The command executed in Ethernet port view has effect on the current port
only.
■ The command executed in system view has effect on the specified port only.
By default, no control VLAN is specified.
If you configure different control VLANs on the same port, only the last one takes
effect.
n The VLAN configured as a control VLAN for sending or receiving flush messages
must exist. You cannot directly remove the control VLAN. When a dynamic VLAN
is configured as a control VLAN for the Smart Link group, this VLAN will become a
static VLAN, and related prompt information is displayed.
Example # Enable Ethernet2/0/4 to process flush messages received from control VLAN 1..
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/4
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/4] smart-link flush enable control-vlan 1
# Enable Ethernet2/0/5 through Ethernet2/0/10 to process flush messages
received from control VLAN 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] smart-link flush enable control-vlan 1 port Ethernet 2/0/5
to Ethernet 2/0/10
smart-link group
Syntax smart-link group group-id
undo smart-link group group-id
View System view
Parameter group-id: Smart link group ID, in the range of 1 to 48.
Description Use the smart-link group command to create a Smart Link group and enter
Smart Link group view. If the specified Smart Link group exists, this command
leads you into Smart Link group view directly.
Use the undo smart-link group command to remove the specified Smart Link
group.
smart-link group 1123
After creating a Smart Link group, you must configure member ports for this
Smart Link group.
Related command: port smart-link group, link-aggregation group, and port.
n Make sure that the Smart Link group has no members before executing the undo
smart-link group command.
Example # Create a Smart Link group.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] smart-link group 1
New Smart Link Group has been created.
[SW7750-smlk-group1]
1124 CHAPTER 93: SMART LINK CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
MONITOR LINK CONFIGURATION
94 COMMANDS
display monitor-link group
Syntax display monitor-link group { group-id| all }
View Any view
Parameter group-id: Monitor Link group ID, ranging 1 to 96.
all: Specifies all the Monitor Link groups.
Description Use the display monitor-link group command to display Monitor Link group
information.
Example # Display the information about Monitor Link group 1.
<SW7750> display monitor-link group 1
Monitor link group 1 information:
Member Role Status Last-up-time Last-down-time
----------------------------------------------------------------------
SMLK-2 UPLINK UP 16:37:20 2006/4/21 16:37:20 2006/4/20
AGG-1 DOWNLINK UP
Table 210 Field descriptions of the display monitor-link group command
Field Description
Member Member of the Monitor Link group
Role Role of Monitor Link group member port: UPLINK or DOWNLINK
Status Status of Monitor Link group member port: UP or DOWN
Last-up-time Last time the port is up
Last-down-time Last time the port is down
link-aggregation group
Syntax link-aggregation group group-id{ uplink | downlink }
undo link-aggregation group group-id
View Monitor Link group view
Parameter group-id: Link aggregation group ID, ranging from 1 to 384 (A link aggregation
group can be a manual or static link aggregation group only).
1126 CHAPTER 94: MONITOR LINK CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
uplink: Configures the specified link aggregation group as the uplink port of the
Monitor Link group
downlink: Configures the specified link aggregation group as the downlink port
of the Monitor Link group
Description Use the link-aggregation group command to configure the specified link
aggregation group as a Monitor Link group member.
Use the undo link-aggregation group command to remove the specified link
aggregation group from the current Monitor Link group.
In Monitor Link, a Monitor Link group member can be a single port, a manual or
static link aggregation group, but not a dynamic link aggregation group. Uplink
port can also be a Smart Link group.
Use this command only on the link aggregation groups that are not Smart Link
group members.
n A port or a link aggregation group cannot serve as a member port for two Smart
Link groups. On the other hand, a port or a link aggregation group cannot serve
as a member of a Smart Link group and a Monitor Link group at the same time.
However, a Smart Link group can serve as the uplink member port of a Monitor
Link group.
Example # Configure link aggregation group 8 as the downlink port of the Monitor Link
group.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] monitor-link group 1
[SW7750-mtlk-group1] link-aggregation group 8 downlink
monitor-link group
Syntax monitor-link group group-id
undo monitor-link group group-id
View System view
Parameter group-id: Monitor Link group ID, ranging from 1 to 96.
Description Use the monitor-link group command to create a Monitor Link group and enter
Monitor Link group view.
Use the undo monitor-link group command to remove a Monitor Link group.
After the Monitor Link group is configured, member ports of the Monitor Link
group need to be configured.
port 1127
Related command: port monitor-link group, link-aggregation group, smart-link group, and
port.
n Make sure that the Monitor Link group has no members before executing the
undo monitor-link group command.
Example # Create a Monitor Link group.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] monitor-link group 1
New Monitor Link Group has been created.
[SW7750-mtlk-group1]
port
Syntax port interface-type interface-number { uplink | downlink }
undo port interface-type interface-number
View Monitor Link group view
Parameter interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.
uplink: Configures the specified port as the uplink port of the Monitor Link group
downlink: Configures the specified port as the downlink port of the Monitor Link
group
Description Use the port command to configure the specified port as a member of the
Monitor Link group.
Use the undo port command to remove the specified port from the current
Monitor Link group.
In Monitor Link, a Monitor Link group member can be a single port, a static link
aggregation group, but not a dynamic link aggregation group. The uplink port of
a Monitor Link group can also be a Smart Link group.
Do not use this command on member ports of a link aggregation group or a Smart
Link group.
n A port or a link aggregation group cannot serve as a member port for two Smart
Link groups. On the other hand, a port or a link aggregation group cannot serve
as a member for a Smart Link group and a Monitor Link group at the same time.
However, a Smart Link group can serve as the uplink member port of a Monitor
Link group.
Example # Configure Ethernet2/0/7 as a downlink port of the Monitor Link group
1128 CHAPTER 94: MONITOR LINK CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] monitor-link group 1
[SW7750-mtlk-group1] port Ethernet 2/0/7 downlink
port monitor-link group
Syntax port monitor-link group group-id{ uplink | downlink }
undo port monitor-link group group-id
View Ethernet port view
Parameter group-id: Monitor Link group ID, ranging 1 to 96.
uplink: Configures the port as the uplink port of the specified Monitor Link group
downlink: Configures the port as the downlink port of the specified Monitor Link
group
Description Use the port monitor-link group command to configure the current port as a
member of the specified Monitor Link group.
Use the undo port monitor-link group command to remove the current port
from the specified Monitor Link group.
In Monitor Link, a Monitor Link group member can be a single port, a static link
aggregation group, but not a dynamic link aggregation group. Uplink port can
also be a Smart Link group.
Do not use this command on member ports of a link aggregation group or a Smart
Link group.
n A port or a link aggregation group cannot serve as a member port for two Smart
Link groups. On the other hand, a port or a link aggregation group cannot serve
as a member for a Smart Link group and a Monitor Link group at the same time.
However, a Smart Link group can serve as the uplink member port of a Monitor
Link group.
Example # Configure Ethernet2/0/8 as a downlink port of Monitor Link group 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] interface Ethernet 2/0/8
[SW7750-Ethernet2/0/8] port monitor-link group 1 downlink
smart-link group
Syntax smart-link group group-id uplink
undo smart-link group group-id
smart-link group 1129
View Monitor Link group view
Parameter group-id: Smart Link group ID, ranging 1 to 48.
uplink: Configures the specified Smart Link group as the uplink port of the
Monitor Link group
Description Use the smart-link group command to configure the specified Smart Link group
as the uplink port of the Monitor Link group.
Use the undo smart-link group command to remove the configuration.
A Smart Link group can belong to only one Monitor Link group and can be
configured only as an uplink port of the Monitor Link group.
Example # Configure Smart Link group 1 as the uplink port of Monitor Link group 1.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] monitor-link group 1
[SW7750-mtlk-group1] smart-link group 1 uplink
1130 CHAPTER 94: MONITOR LINK CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
COMMANDS FOR BOOT ROM
95 UPGRADE WITH APP FILE
boot bootrom default
Syntax boot bootrom default [ slot slot-number-list ]
View User view
Parameter slot-number-list: Specifies a slot number list of the switch. slot-number-list = {
slot-number [ to slot-number ] }&<1-N>. &<1-N> means you can enter the
previous parameters up to N times. For the Switch 7757, and 7758, N is 7 and for
the Switch 7754, N is 4.
Description Use the boot bootrom default command to use the current startup file to
upgrade the Boot ROMs.
Example # Use the current startup file to upgrade the Boot ROMs of all normal I/O Module
modules in position.
<SW7750> boot bootrom default
boot bootrom file-url
Syntax boot bootrom file-url [ slot slot-number-list ]
View User view
Parameter file-url: Specifies the Boot ROM file path and file name in the Flash memory.
slot-number-list: Specifies a slot number list of the switch. slot-number-list = {
slot-number [ to slot-number ] }&<1-N>. &<1-N> means you can enter the
previous parameters up to N times. For the Switch 7757, and 7758, N is 7 and for
the Switch 7754, N is 4.
Description Use the boot bootrom file-url command to use the specified App file to upgrade
the Boot ROMs.
Example # Use the specified App file (abcd.app) to upgrade the Boot ROMs of slot 1 I/O
Module modules in position.
<SW7750> boot bootrom abcd.app slot 1
1132 CHAPTER 95: COMMANDS FOR BOOT ROM UPGRADE WITH APP FILE
boot boot-loader primary
Syntax boot boot-loader primary file-url
View User view
Parameter file-url: Specifies the Boot ROM file path and file name in the Flash memory.
Description Use the boot boot-loader primary command to specify the primary startup file
at next booting.
Example # Specify the App file abcd.app as the primary startup file for next booting and
use it to upgrade the Boot ROMs.
<SW7750> boot boot-loader primary abcd.app
INTER-CARD LINK STATE ADJUSTMENT
96 CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
set inlink
Syntax set inlink { auto | fix }
View System view
Parameter auto: Sets the inter-card links are established in the auto negotiation mode.
fix: Sets the inter-card links are established the fix mode.
Description Use the set inlink command to set the mode in which inter-card links are
established. By default, inter-card links are established in the auto negotiation
mode.
Example # Configure the inter-card links to be established in the fix mode.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] set inlink fix
1134 CHAPTER 96: INTER-CARD LINK STATE ADJUSTMENT CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
INTERNAL CHANNEL MONITOR
97 COMMANDS
monitor inner-channel
Syntax monitor inner-channel [ reboot-lpu | reboot-switch ]
undo monitor inner-channel [ reboot-lpu | reboot-switch ]
View System view
Parameter reboot-lpu: Restarts a service module.
reboot-switch: Restarts a switch.
Description Use the monitor inner-channel command to enable the function of monitoring
internal channels.
Use the undo monitor inner-channel command to disable the function of
monitoring internal channels.
By default, the function of monitoring internal channels is enabled.
An internal channel refers to the interface channel between the Fabric and the
service modules. The Fabric sends handshake packets to each service module every
second. After receiving the handshake packets, the service modules reports the
result to the Fabric. In this case, the Fabric knows that the service modules are
operating normally. Through this process, the Fabric can judge whether each
service module in the device operates normally.
Switch 7750s support this feature. Through this feature, you can monitor internal
channels.
You can also set the maximum number of times the Fabric fails to receive
handshake packets. If the number of times the Fabric fails to receive handshake
packets exceeds the upper limit, the switch resets the processing chip
automatically. When the Fabric receives handshake packets, it resets the counter
automatically.
You can also set whether to restart the service module or the switch when the
number of times the Fabric fails to receive handshake packets exceeds the upper
limit.
Example # Enable the function of monitoring internal channels
1136 CHAPTER 97: INTERNAL CHANNEL MONITOR COMMANDS
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] monitor inner-channel
monitor inner-channel
Syntax monitor inner-channel upper-limit upper-timers
undo monitor inner-channel
View System view
Parameter upper-times: Specifies the upper limit.
Description Use the monitor inner-channel upper-limit command to set the maximum
number of times of monitoring internal channels.
Use the undo monitor inner-channel command to disable the function of
setting the maximum number of times of monitoring internal channels.
The default value is 10.
An internal channel refers to the interface channel between the Fabric and the
service modules. The Fabric sends handshake packets to each service module every
second. After receiving the handshake packets, the service modules reports the
result to the Fabric. In this case, the Fabric knows that the service modules are
operating normally. Through this process, the Fabric can judge whether each
service module in the device operates normally.
Switch 7750s support this feature. Through this feature, you can monitor internal
channels.
You can also set the maximum number of times the Fabric fails to receive
handshake packets. If the number of times the Fabric fails to receive handshake
packets exceeds the upper limit, the switch resets the processing chip
automatically. When the Fabric receives handshake packets, it resets the counter
automatically.
Example # Set the upper limit to 50.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] monitor inner-channel upper-limit 50
SWITCH CHIP AUTO-RESET
98 CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
monitor slot
Syntax monitor slot slot-id enable
monitor slot slot-id disable
View System view
Parameter slot-id: Slot ID. The value range depends on the products (Switch 7754: 0 to 3;
Switch 7757: 0 to 6; Switch 7758: 0 to 7).
Description Use the monitor slot enable command to enable switch chip auto-reset.
Use the monitor slot disable command to disable switch chip auto-reset.
By default, switch chips cannot be reset automatically when the internal channel
handshake fails.
In actual application, a switch may fail to process services normally due to internal
channel block or because the switch chip is busy.
Switch 7750s support the function of resetting switch chips automatically. In case
that the function of monitoring internal channels is enabled, when the internal
channel handshake between a module and the backplane fails, the switch resets
the switch chip automatically to resume the corresponding module.
When the function of resetting switch chips is disabled, even if the switch finds
that the internal channel handshake fails, it cannot reset the switch chip
automatically.
Example # Enable switch chip auto-reset for the module in slot 2.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] monitor inner-channel
[SW7750] monitor slot 2 enable
1138 CHAPTER 98: SWITCH CHIP AUTO-RESET CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
CPU USAGE THRESHOLD
99 CONFIGURATION COMMAND
cpu-usage-threshold
Syntax cpu-usage-threshold value [ slot slot-id ]
undo cpu-usage-threshold [ slot slot-id ]
View System view
Parameter value: Upper limit of the CPU usage threshold, ranging from 1 to 99.
slot-id: Slot ID. The value range depends on the products (Switch 7754: 0 to 3;
Switch 7757: 0 to 6; Switch 7758: 0 to 7).
Description Use the cpu-usage-threshold command to enable CPU usage threshold
configuration.
Use the undo cpu-usage-threshold command to disable this function.
By default, this function is disabled.
Switch 7750 Ethernet switches support CPU usage threshold configuration. When
the CPU usage exceeds the configured threshold, the switch sends trap messages
and log messages, according to which the network administrator can modify the
switch configuration.
Switch 7750 Ethernet switches also support configuration of the CPU usage
threshold of the specified module. You can specify slot slot-number to configure
the CPU usage threshold of the specified module. When the CPU usage of the
module in the specified slot exceeds the configured threshold, the switch sends
trap messages and log messages to the network administrator.
If you set CPU thresholds for both all the modules and the specified module, the
CPU threshold of the specified module is determined by the latter one. For
example, if you set the CPU usage threshold of all the modules to 88 and set that
of the module in slot 2 to 77, the CPU usage threshold of the module in slot 2 is
77.
Example # Enable CPU usage threshold configuration on the module in slot 2 and set the
upper limit to 88.
<SW7750> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW7750] cpu-usage-threshold 88 slot 2
1140 CHAPTER 99: CPU USAGE THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION COMMAND
You might also like
- Network Security All-in-one: ASA Firepower WSA Umbrella VPN ISE Layer 2 SecurityFrom EverandNetwork Security All-in-one: ASA Firepower WSA Umbrella VPN ISE Layer 2 SecurityNo ratings yet
- Cisco CCNA Command Guide: An Introductory Guide for CCNA & Computer Networking Beginners: Computer Networking, #3From EverandCisco CCNA Command Guide: An Introductory Guide for CCNA & Computer Networking Beginners: Computer Networking, #34.5/5 (2)
- 3COM Switch 7700 Command Refference GuideNo ratings yet3COM Switch 7700 Command Refference Guide564 pages
- 3com SuperStack 4 Switch 5500G-EI - Command Reference Guide v3.1.xNo ratings yet3com SuperStack 4 Switch 5500G-EI - Command Reference Guide v3.1.x530 pages
- Guia 3com Switch-4500G Configuration-GuideNo ratings yetGuia 3com Switch-4500G Configuration-Guide598 pages
- 3com Switch 4500 Family: Getting Started Guide100% (3)3com Switch 4500 Family: Getting Started Guide102 pages
- 3com SuperStack 3 3CR17562-91 - Getting Started GuideNo ratings yet3com SuperStack 3 3CR17562-91 - Getting Started Guide128 pages
- 3com Switch 4500 Command Reference GuideNo ratings yet3com Switch 4500 Command Reference Guide466 pages
- 3com Stackable Switch Advanced Config GuideNo ratings yet3com Stackable Switch Advanced Config Guide336 pages
- Configuration Guide-3Com-Switch 4210 FamilyNo ratings yetConfiguration Guide-3Com-Switch 4210 Family567 pages
- Super Stack 4 5500 Series Switches Getting StartedNo ratings yetSuper Stack 4 5500 Series Switches Getting Started118 pages
- Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Command Reference, Release 8.0100% (1)Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Command Reference, Release 8.01,972 pages
- Cisco Catalyst 3500 Series XL Command ReferenceNo ratings yetCisco Catalyst 3500 Series XL Command Reference346 pages
- 3com Switch 4500 Configuration Guide V03.02.00No ratings yet3com Switch 4500 Configuration Guide V03.02.00400 pages
- Officeconnect Remote 812 Adsl Router Cli User'S Guide: Release 2.0No ratings yetOfficeconnect Remote 812 Adsl Router Cli User'S Guide: Release 2.0170 pages
- Fibeair Ip-10 Cli User Guide: Part Id: Bm-0134-0 Doc Id: Doc-00018394 Rev A.0 1 May 2008No ratings yetFibeair Ip-10 Cli User Guide: Part Id: Bm-0134-0 Doc Id: Doc-00018394 Rev A.0 1 May 200823 pages
- Advanced Configuration Guide: 3com Stackable Switch FamilyNo ratings yetAdvanced Configuration Guide: 3com Stackable Switch Family336 pages
- WAN TECHNOLOGY FRAME-RELAY: An Expert's Handbook of Navigating Frame Relay NetworksFrom EverandWAN TECHNOLOGY FRAME-RELAY: An Expert's Handbook of Navigating Frame Relay NetworksNo ratings yet
- Building Telephony Systems with OpenSIPS - Second EditionFrom EverandBuilding Telephony Systems with OpenSIPS - Second EditionNo ratings yet
- CISCO PACKET TRACER LABS: Best practice of configuring or troubleshooting NetworkFrom EverandCISCO PACKET TRACER LABS: Best practice of configuring or troubleshooting NetworkNo ratings yet
- Network with Practical Labs Configuration: Step by Step configuration of Router and Switch configurationFrom EverandNetwork with Practical Labs Configuration: Step by Step configuration of Router and Switch configurationNo ratings yet
- Configuration of a Simple Samba File Server, Quota and Schedule BackupFrom EverandConfiguration of a Simple Samba File Server, Quota and Schedule BackupNo ratings yet
- Evaluation of Some Intrusion Detection and Vulnerability Assessment ToolsFrom EverandEvaluation of Some Intrusion Detection and Vulnerability Assessment ToolsNo ratings yet
- Cisco Network Administration Interview Questions: CISCO CCNA Certification ReviewFrom EverandCisco Network Administration Interview Questions: CISCO CCNA Certification Review4.5/5 (6)
- Evaluation of Some Windows and Linux Intrusion Detection ToolsFrom EverandEvaluation of Some Windows and Linux Intrusion Detection ToolsNo ratings yet
- Configuration of a Simple Samba File Server, Quota and Schedule BackupFrom EverandConfiguration of a Simple Samba File Server, Quota and Schedule BackupNo ratings yet
- Set Up Your Own IPsec VPN, OpenVPN and WireGuard Server: Build Your Own VPNFrom EverandSet Up Your Own IPsec VPN, OpenVPN and WireGuard Server: Build Your Own VPN5/5 (1)
- 7.2.2.4 Comparing RIP and EIGRP Path Selection FORMNo ratings yet7.2.2.4 Comparing RIP and EIGRP Path Selection FORM2 pages
- Lab Experiment 1 One Router 2 Switches and 4 PCS: Pc0 Ip ConfigurationNo ratings yetLab Experiment 1 One Router 2 Switches and 4 PCS: Pc0 Ip Configuration24 pages
- Cajun P550: Gigabit Switch and Routing SwitchNo ratings yetCajun P550: Gigabit Switch and Routing Switch6 pages
- Command Manual (Ipv4 Routing Volume I) : Router/Ethernet SwitchNo ratings yetCommand Manual (Ipv4 Routing Volume I) : Router/Ethernet Switch139 pages
- Network Design 16.583/483: University of Massachusetts LowellNo ratings yetNetwork Design 16.583/483: University of Massachusetts Lowell17 pages
- HCIE-R&S Huawei Certified Internetwork Expert-Routing and Switching Material V1.1No ratings yetHCIE-R&S Huawei Certified Internetwork Expert-Routing and Switching Material V1.11,212 pages
- Lab: Basic RIP Configuration: Topology DiagramNo ratings yetLab: Basic RIP Configuration: Topology Diagram11 pages
- 10.3.1: Packet Tracer Skills Integration Challenge Activity: (Instructor Version)No ratings yet10.3.1: Packet Tracer Skills Integration Challenge Activity: (Instructor Version)7 pages
- Network Security All-in-one: ASA Firepower WSA Umbrella VPN ISE Layer 2 SecurityFrom EverandNetwork Security All-in-one: ASA Firepower WSA Umbrella VPN ISE Layer 2 Security
- Cisco CCNA Command Guide: An Introductory Guide for CCNA & Computer Networking Beginners: Computer Networking, #3From EverandCisco CCNA Command Guide: An Introductory Guide for CCNA & Computer Networking Beginners: Computer Networking, #3
- Programming and Customizing the PICAXE Microcontroller 2/EFrom EverandProgramming and Customizing the PICAXE Microcontroller 2/E
- 3com SuperStack 4 Switch 5500G-EI - Command Reference Guide v3.1.x3com SuperStack 4 Switch 5500G-EI - Command Reference Guide v3.1.x
- 3com SuperStack 3 3CR17562-91 - Getting Started Guide3com SuperStack 3 3CR17562-91 - Getting Started Guide
- Super Stack 4 5500 Series Switches Getting StartedSuper Stack 4 5500 Series Switches Getting Started
- Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Command Reference, Release 8.0Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Command Reference, Release 8.0
- Officeconnect Remote 812 Adsl Router Cli User'S Guide: Release 2.0Officeconnect Remote 812 Adsl Router Cli User'S Guide: Release 2.0
- Fibeair Ip-10 Cli User Guide: Part Id: Bm-0134-0 Doc Id: Doc-00018394 Rev A.0 1 May 2008Fibeair Ip-10 Cli User Guide: Part Id: Bm-0134-0 Doc Id: Doc-00018394 Rev A.0 1 May 2008
- Advanced Configuration Guide: 3com Stackable Switch FamilyAdvanced Configuration Guide: 3com Stackable Switch Family
- WAN TECHNOLOGY FRAME-RELAY: An Expert's Handbook of Navigating Frame Relay NetworksFrom EverandWAN TECHNOLOGY FRAME-RELAY: An Expert's Handbook of Navigating Frame Relay Networks
- Building Telephony Systems with OpenSIPS - Second EditionFrom EverandBuilding Telephony Systems with OpenSIPS - Second Edition
- CISCO PACKET TRACER LABS: Best practice of configuring or troubleshooting NetworkFrom EverandCISCO PACKET TRACER LABS: Best practice of configuring or troubleshooting Network
- Network with Practical Labs Configuration: Step by Step configuration of Router and Switch configurationFrom EverandNetwork with Practical Labs Configuration: Step by Step configuration of Router and Switch configuration
- Configuration of a Simple Samba File Server, Quota and Schedule BackupFrom EverandConfiguration of a Simple Samba File Server, Quota and Schedule Backup
- OpenVPN Building and Integrating Virtual Private NetworksFrom EverandOpenVPN Building and Integrating Virtual Private Networks
- Evaluation of Some Intrusion Detection and Vulnerability Assessment ToolsFrom EverandEvaluation of Some Intrusion Detection and Vulnerability Assessment Tools
- Cisco Network Administration Interview Questions: CISCO CCNA Certification ReviewFrom EverandCisco Network Administration Interview Questions: CISCO CCNA Certification Review
- CCNA Exam Focus: Study Guide with Practice TestsFrom EverandCCNA Exam Focus: Study Guide with Practice Tests
- Evaluation of Some Windows and Linux Intrusion Detection ToolsFrom EverandEvaluation of Some Windows and Linux Intrusion Detection Tools
- Configuration of a Simple Samba File Server, Quota and Schedule BackupFrom EverandConfiguration of a Simple Samba File Server, Quota and Schedule Backup
- Set Up Your Own IPsec VPN, OpenVPN and WireGuard Server: Build Your Own VPNFrom EverandSet Up Your Own IPsec VPN, OpenVPN and WireGuard Server: Build Your Own VPN
- 7.2.2.4 Comparing RIP and EIGRP Path Selection FORM7.2.2.4 Comparing RIP and EIGRP Path Selection FORM
- Lab Experiment 1 One Router 2 Switches and 4 PCS: Pc0 Ip ConfigurationLab Experiment 1 One Router 2 Switches and 4 PCS: Pc0 Ip Configuration
- Command Manual (Ipv4 Routing Volume I) : Router/Ethernet SwitchCommand Manual (Ipv4 Routing Volume I) : Router/Ethernet Switch
- Network Design 16.583/483: University of Massachusetts LowellNetwork Design 16.583/483: University of Massachusetts Lowell
- HCIE-R&S Huawei Certified Internetwork Expert-Routing and Switching Material V1.1HCIE-R&S Huawei Certified Internetwork Expert-Routing and Switching Material V1.1
- 10.3.1: Packet Tracer Skills Integration Challenge Activity: (Instructor Version)10.3.1: Packet Tracer Skills Integration Challenge Activity: (Instructor Version)